| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080198814 | Mapping Of Shared Physical Channels Depending On The Quality Of Service Class - A method, a base station and a wireless communication system are provided which allow to provide optimized Quality of Service to each of a plurality of services belonging to different QoS classes and different users, transmitted over shared physical channels. Data packets are assigned to service categories. To each service category only packets are assigned exclusively belonging to services associated with one user or user group and exclusively belonging to one of said Quality of Service classes. Based on information about the packets, the service categories and/or the shared physical channels, scheduling metrics are calculated, based upon the scheduling metrics, it is decided which of said service categories is to be served next. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080198815 | Nearly Collision-Free Channel Access System and Method - Techniques for controlling access to a communication channel for each of a plurality of nodes in a wireless ad hoc communication network. According to one embodiment, each node uses a predetermined rule, such as a hash function, to compute which of a plurality of time slots during a contention window it is to attempt transmissions. Each node in the network follows the same rule to access the channel and as a result no additional overhead transmissions are required between the nodes. In addition, contention among different nodes is reduced when a node needs to repeat an attempt to make a transmission. When a node has data to transmit on the channel, it determines a time slot in the contention window period during which to attempt the transmission using a computation that is based on a number identifier assigned to the node, the number of time slots in the contention window period and a transmission count value that represents the number of attempts the node has made to make the transmission. According to another embodiment, nodes are assigned to slot groups based on the time slot computation and the groups are assigned to particular slots during successive blocks in a round robin fashion so as to ensure fair access to the communication channel. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080205350 | Multiple Wireless Networks Management - A multiple wireless networks structure comprising a plurality of beacon groups each comprising one or more devices communicating via an associated wireless network utilising a superframe structure; wherein each device of each beacon group allocates a local control period and one or more neighbor control periods in each superframe; wherein the neighbor control periods in each beacon group cover all one or more control periods of other beacon groups detected by one or more of the devices in said each beacon group to an extent as said control periods do not overlap with the local control period in said each beacon group. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205351 | Subcarrier Spacing Identification - A cellular communications system that utilizes OFDM in its radio interface is capable of utilizing either a first subcarrier spacing or a second subcarrier spacing. Which of these is presently in use is indicated by generating a first type of synchronization signal in response to the first subcarrier spacing presently being in use, and generating a second type of synchronization signal in response to the second subcarrier spacing presently being in use. Whichever of the first type of synchronization signal and the second type of synchronization signal was generated is transmitted. To distinguish between the first and second types of synchronization signals, a time domain representation of the second type of synchronization signal includes a plurality of instances of the first type of synchronization signal. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080205352 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN OVERLAPPING WRAN CELLS WORKING IN DIFFERENT CHANNELS - A common control channel for base station (“BS”)/consumer premise equipment (“CPE”) communication in areas of overlapping coverage by wireless regional area network (“WRAN”) cells operating on different working channels is disclosed. A common control channel is selected from among the various working channels sensed in each of a plurality of overlapping WRAN cells so as to enable BS/CPE and BS/BS communication. Once chosen, each CPE within the overlapping area communicates with the controlling BS via an enhanced coexistence beacon protocol messages. These messages include timing and other synchronization information. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080212542 | Communication methods and devices for dual-mode communication systems - A method for wireless communication determines, for a client device having a first wireless connection with a first connection point, to initiate a second wireless connection between the client device and a second connection point, wherein the first connection point includes an Access Point and the second connection point includes a Base Station. The method sends a message from the second connection point to the first connection point, including instructions for the first connection point to communicate with the client device using either a Point Coordinate Function (PCF) or a Distributed Coordinate Function (DCF). In addition, the method initiates the second wireless connection between the client device and the second communication point. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080212543 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is provided with a control channel searching unit | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080225802 | Transmission Method for a Time Divsion Duplex Mobile Communication System - A method for a time division duplex mobile communication system comprises that setting a minimum unit of transmission time interval and a system frame structure, wherein each radio sub frame is composed of a downlink pilot time slot, a switching guard period, a synchronization time slot and a plurality of service time slots, and the transmission time interval uses the length of time slot as a unit; a user obtaining downlink synchronization by receiving downlink pilot information of the downlink pilot time slot, and obtaining corresponding configuration information of cell by reading cell broadcasting information, and then transmitting uplink synchronization information in the synchronization time slot to fulfill a random access process, wherein the configuration information includes transmission time interval and system frame structure information; the network side/the user transmitting call information to an opposite end, and the opposite end processing call acknowledgement according to the transmission time interval; the network side allocating a channel for the user, wherein the network side and the user communicates through the allocated channel. The method reduces data transmission delay during communication, improves call throughout. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080232331 | Mobile Communication System, Base Station, and Hsdpa Transmission Method Used in Them - To provide a base station which makes it possible to apply HSDPA to radio bearers in the RLC-TM, such as circuit switched calls, as well and which can use the radio capacity to the full. A call controller | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232332 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING OF SERVICE DATA IN UPLINK, A BASE STATION, A USER TERMINAL AND A COMMUNICATION NETWORK THEREFOR - The invention concerns a method for scheduling of service data intended to be sent from a user terminal (UE | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080232333 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for scheduling in a mobile communication system. According to the method, for data/message pre-promised between a UE and a network node, the UE transmits a scheduling request at a predetermined timing. When the network node receives the scheduling request at the predetermined timing, the network node directly allocates a resource for transmission of the promised data/message by itself, so that the UE can instantly transmit the data/message. As a result, transmission delay can be reduced. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080247364 | CYCLIC DELAY DIVERSITY AND PRECODING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for sending a MIMO transmission using a combination of cyclic delay diversity and precoding are described. A set of delays (e.g., zero delay, small delay, and large delay) for cyclic delay diversity and a set of precoding matrices may be supported. In one design, a Node B may select a delay specifically for a UE or for a set of UEs served by the Node B. In another design, a UE may evaluate different combinations of precoding matrix and delay, determine the combination with the best performance, and send this combination of precoding matrix and delay to the Node B. The Node B may perform precoding with the precoding matrix and then processing for cyclic delay diversity based on the selected delay. Alternatively, the Node B may perform processing for cyclic delay diversity based on the selected delay and then precoding with the precoding matrix. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080253337 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SFBC/STBC TRANSMISSION OF ORTHOGONALLY CODED SIGNALS WITH ANGLE FEEDBACK IN A DIVERSITY TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - Aspects of a method and system for SFBC/STBC transmission of orthogonally coded signals with angle feedback in a diversity transmission system are presented. Exemplary aspects of the system may include one or more circuits that enables generation of a plurality of concurrently transmitted signal groups based on a computed matrix such that a product of the plurality of concurrently transmitted signal groups, the computed matrix and/or a transformed version of the computed matrix, may generate at least one set of orthogonal signals based on at least one rotation angle. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080259878 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SCHEDULER FOR A MACRO-DIVERSITY PORTION OF A TRANSMISSION - A method, apparatuses, and system of broadcasting content data in a macro-diversity region of a data frame includes receiving a stream of transport packets. Selecting at least one burst size, from amongst a set of a plurality of predetermined burst sizes. Allocating one or more data bursts with the selected burst size to the macro-diversity region of the data frame, each data burst comprising at least a portion of the received transport packets and wherein the at least one burst size is selected so as to minimize a number of data bursts allocated to the macro-diversity region. Then communicating the allocation of data bursts to a transmitter that includes the allocation of data bursts in the macro-diversity region of a data frame transmitted by the transmitter. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080259879 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICE IDENTIFICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods, apparatuses, and systems for announcing services available in a macro-diversity region of a data frame broadcast by a plurality of base stations in a single frequency network to a plurality of subscriber stations, includes a data frame with at least a data region and a macro-diversity region. A media access control (MAC) management message is generated which identifies content and characteristics of the content in the macro-diversity region. Then the MAC management message is transmitted in the data region of the data frame, wherein the MAC management message is decoded by a client station to determine if there is content of interest to the client station in the macro-diversity region of the data frame. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080267136 | Allocation of Access Slots to Mobile Stations in Order to Count the Number of Stations Interested in a Mbms (Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service) - A method of operating a radio network, such as UMTS or cdma2000, which comprises at least one primary station (PS), i.e. and access point or bare station, and a plurality of secondary stations (SSI, SS | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267137 | COMPUTER GENERATED SEQUENCES FOR DOWNLINK AND UPLINK SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The present disclosure provides a base station transmitter, a user equipment transmitter and methods of operating the base station and user equipment transmitters. In one embodiment, the base station transmitter is for use with a cellular communication system and includes a synchronization unit configured to provide a randomly-generated constant amplitude zero autocorrelation (random-CAZAC) sequence corresponding to a downlink synchronization signal. Additionally, the base station transmitter also includes a transmit unit configured to transmit the downlink synchronization signal using the random-CAZAC sequence. In another embodiment, the user equipment transmitter is for use with a cellular communication system and includes a reference signal unit configured to provide a random-CAZAC sequence for an uplink reference signal corresponding to a one resource block allocation of the user equipment. The user equipment transmitter also includes a transmit unit configured to transmit the uplink reference signal using the random-CAZAC sequence. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267138 | MIMO SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING MODES - A MIMO system supports multiple spatial multiplexing modes for improved performance and greater flexibility. These modes may include (1) a single-user steered mode that transmits multiple data streams on orthogonal spatial channels to a single receiver, (2) a single-user non-steered mode that transmits multiple data streams from multiple antennas to a single receiver without spatial processing at a transmitter, (3) a multi-user steered mode that transmits multiple data streams simultaneously to multiple receivers with spatial processing at a transmitter, and (4) a multi-user non-steered mode that transmits multiple data streams from multiple antennas (co-located or non co-located) without spatial processing at the transmitter(s) to receiver(s) having multiple antennas. For each set of user terminal(s) selected for data transmission on the downlink and/or uplink, a spatial multiplexing mode is selected for the user terminal set from among the multiple spatial multiplexing modes supported by the system. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080267139 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY ALLOCATING WIRELESS RESOURCES - Dynamic resource allocation is performed by first generating a plurality of slot sequences. A figure of merit based on weighted interference signal code power (ISCP) and weighted resource units is then generated for each timeslot of each slot sequence. The timeslots within each slot sequence are then arranged in a decreasing figure of merit. The slot sequences are the processed to determine whether they can support the code to be transmitted. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080273503 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM OF POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT SERVICE - A method for performing a handover in a mobile communications system of a Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS), wherein when a terminal having subscribed (joined) a point-to-multipoint service moves from a first base station to a second base station, the terminal is commanded (indicated) by the first base station to transfer point-to-multipoint service information, and then transfers to the second base station a point-to-multipoint service list subscribed (joined) by the terminal or information on the point-to-multipoint service received from the first base station, whereby a service delay which may occur during the handover can be effectively avoided. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080279155 | Adaptive Scheduling in a Wireless Network - A method of adaptively scheduling communications in a wireless mesh network including a plurality of network nodes includes generating a network routing scheme based on a topology of the wireless mesh network, generating a communication schedule for the wireless mesh network, and automatically updating the communication schedule in response to detecting a change in a transmission requirement of at least one of the plurality of network nodes. The act of generating a communication schedule includes defining a communication timeslot of a predefined duration and defining a plurality of superframes as repeating cycles of a certain number of consecutively scheduled communication timeslots. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279156 | ORTHOGONAL HADAMARD CODE BASED SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL - A secondary synchronization channel (S-SCH) for E-UTRA downlink is applied to any orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) based system to reduce interference on S-SCHs among sectors of the same Node-B in an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080279157 | Resource allocation in wireless communication systems - A method and system wherein the coverage area of a plurality of base stations may be evaluated with respect to noise rise and power for assignment of system resources is disclosed. Path loss is measured to determine candidate base stations and at least one timeslot is selected from within the candidate base stations for optimization of the uplink and downlink. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080285523 | Method And Arrangements In A Radio Communication System - The present invention relates to uplink transmissions and scheduling of resources for uplink transmissions in connection with packet switched communication. A radio communication network schedules ( | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080285524 | Radio Communication System Using Multi-Antenna Transmission Technique, and Multi-User Scheduler Therefor - In a radio system performing scheduled transmission to a plurality of receiving stations from a transmitting station having a plurality of antennas, a transmitting station obtains reception quality information estimated from feedback information obtained from the plurality of receiving stations, determines a transmission system whether to perform beamforming, which transmits data of an identical stream by weighting each of the plurality of antennas based on the obtained reception quality information, or to perform MIMO multiplexing, which transmits data of different streams respectively from the plurality of antennas, and transmits information to identify the determined transmission system by adding to a scheduler management channel. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080291878 | Uplink Synchronous Control Method and Apparatus of the High Speed Shared Information Channel - The present invention discloses an uplink synchronization control method and system for the high speed shared information channel. The method includes: S | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080298325 | Method and Protocol for Handling Access Attemptsfor Communications Systems - An improved access attempt procedure for call establishment is achieved by deriving a probability of access transmission as a function of both a priority level for access attempts and a random access cause, and performing link establishment authentication and security control call establishment based upon the deriving. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080298326 | GUARD SUBCARRIER PLACEMENT IN AN OFDM SYMBOL USED FOR SYNCHRONIZATION - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a transmitter, a receiver and methods of operating a transmitter and a receiver. In one embodiment, the transmitter is for use with a base station in a cellular communication system and includes a partitioning unit configured to provide first and second groups of guard subcarriers that partition a synchronization portion from data portions in a downlink synchronization signal. The transmitter also includes a transmit unit configured to transmit the downlink synchronization signal. Additionally, the receiver is for use with user equipment in a cellular communication system and includes a receive unit configured to receive a downlink synchronization signal. The receiver also includes a processing unit configured to provide a synchronization portion based on employing first and second groups of guard subcarriers that partition the synchronization portion from data portions of the downlink synchronization signal. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080316978 | TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE TRANSITION ACCELERATOR - A transmit and receive machine (TRM) is part of a medium access controller (MAC), in support of the 802.11 wireless standard. The TRM is a control machine that changes the MAC within which it resides from a purely software-based MAC into a software and hardware management system. Timing-critical tasks that were once performed by the embedded processor of the MAC are performed by the TRM. This change enables the MAC to operate at a high speed while the TRM maintains high accuracy of transmit and receive timing operations. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20090003288 | Method for Reporting and Managing Wireless Resources in Tdm System - A method for reporting and managing wireless resources in TDM system comprises the step of reporting the wireless resources comprises a RNC obtaining the resource capacity information of each of the carrier frequency in a cell covered by a base station through the resource audit response message or the resource state indicating message or the resource obstruct message. The RNC can obtain the information of the carrier frequency. According to the method, resource capacity information of each of the carrier frequency in the RNC is in consistency of that of the base station. Thus, the rationality of the carrier frequency and the resource capacity information of the carrier frequency distributed to the service by the RNC can be assured. The success rate of the establishment for a radio link is improved accordingly as to avoid the fact that the radio link establishes on the carrier frequency that is not supported by the base station. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003289 | Wireless Communication System, Wireless Communication Device, Program and Wireless Communication Method - A wireless communication device that performs wireless communication with another wireless communication device using a set time band set in advance from among time bands included in a frame with a predetermined cycle. The wireless communication device includes: a selector, that, when a set time band is changed, selects a new time band for after the change from the time bands included in the frame; a communication portion that transmits in a block information showing the new time band to the other wireless communication device as a set time band change request; and a setting portion that, based on the response received from the other wireless communication device with regard to the set time band change request, changes the setting of the set time band to the new time band. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090003290 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting Transport Format Combination in a Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus for selecting a Transport Format Combination (TFC) in a wireless communication system are provided, in which it is determined whether a previous TFC used for data transmission on a previous valid Transmission Time Interval (TTI) can be reused as a current TFC for data transmission on a current valid TTI via at least one transport channel according to at least one parameter related to the transport channel, the previous TFC is set as the current TFC without performing a TFC search and determination process, when the previous TFC can be reused on the current valid TTI, and TFCs, each having Transport Formats (TFs) preset for data transmission on transport channels are searched, and a suitable TFC is selected for the current valid TTI from among the TFCs when the previous TFC cannot be reused on the current valid TTI. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090010229 | Token Based Radio Resource Management - The invention relates to a method of globally balancing the transmit power in a cellular radio system with tight reuse of frequencies, to a central controller node, and to an access point that in combination with conventional power control schemes balances the downlink transmission power on reused frequencies in order to balance co-channel interference in a multi-cell environment. The power balancing scheme dynamically assigns a token to or takes a token away from an individual reused radio channel based on quality of, or based on transmission power in the channel. A token, if taken away from the channel, inhibits conventional power control thereby freezing the transmission power in the channel on its current power level. A token, if assigned or re-assigned to channel, re-assumes conventional power control thereby allowing dynamic variation of the transmission power in the channel in accordance with the conventional power control. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090016305 | METHOD FOR AVOIDING AND OVERCOMING INDIRECT COLLISION IN BEACON-MODE WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - There is provided to a method for avoiding indirect collision of beacon, including: collecting beacon information of neighboring nodes and allocating a time slot based on the collected beacon information; transmitting information on the allocated time slot to the neighboring nodes depending on time slots of the neighboring nodes; and checking whether the time slot overlaps based on a reply message from the neighboring nodes and reallocating a time slot upon occurrence of overlapping. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090022110 | Transmission of Multiple Information Elements in Multiple Channels - A transmission of information from a secondary to a primary node occurs in a plurality of N logical time durations. The transmission from the secondary to primary node in a wireless network is performed by first receiving an allocation of M>1 reverse link channels for transmission of N>0 information elements. N information elements are produced. A group of K (possibly only one) reverse link channels is selected from the M allocated reverse link channels, using at least one of the N produced information elements, wherein the group of K reverse link channels comprises at least one channel, such that 0| 01-22-2009 | |
| 20090022111 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CIRCUIT MODE RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS (BWA) SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for circuit mode resource allocation in a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) system is disclosed. The method includes generating a first resource allocation message which comprises currently used slot bitmap information with respect to a circuit mode region in a frame; allocating resources to one or more terminals with respect to currently unused slots in the circuit mode region according to the currently used slot bitmap information; and generating a second resource allocation message which comprises information relating to the resource allocation. Thus, the effective circuit mode resource allocation can be achieved without holes in the circuit mode, while maintaining backward compatibility with the existing standards. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090022112 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NOTIFYING STATUS OF MOBILE NODE IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM USING VISIBLE LIGHT COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus for notifying status of an MN in a WLAN system using VLC are provided, in which an AP allocates a first predetermined number of time slots per frame as unallocated slots, for status notification of an initially accessing MN and allocates a second predetermined number of time slots per frame as reserved slots, for status notification of an initially accessing MN and uplink data transmission of an MN, and the MN transmits a visible light signal carrying status information about the MN in one of an unallocated slot and a reserved slot, if the MN initially accesses the AP. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090028114 | STAGGERING FORWARD AND REVERSE WIRELESS CHANNEL ALLOCATION TIMING - An apparatus and method for staggering forward and reverse channel time slot allocation in a wireless communication allows a wireless communication unit, such as a base station processor or a subscriber access unit, to transmit a return message in less than a full time slot interval. Forward and reverse channel allocation occurs as a cycle of time slots occurring at periodic timing intervals. Transmission of a wireless frame carrying a message payload occurs at the beginning of the time slot. Since the forward and reverse channel allocation cycles need not be concurrent, or in phase, these cycles may be staggered with respect to each other. By staggering the forward and reverse channel allocation timing interval, the return message is sent after only a portion of a full timing interval, rather than being delayed up to one complete timing interval. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090040984 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHANNEL RESERVATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An exemplary method for reserving medium access in an ad hoc network comprises transmitting a reservation request by a reservation owner, the reservation request identifying a reservation allocation, a reservation target, and a reservation type. The reservation type identifies exclusive use of the reservation allocation by the reservation owner and the reservation target during a reservation period. The reservation target may employ a prioritized contention access (PCA) scheme to access the reservation allocation. Alternatively, an idle portion of the reservation allocation may be subdivided into a plurality of slots including even slots and odd slots, and the reservation owner gains access to the idle portion by starting to transmit during an even slot, while the reservation target gains access to the idle portion by starting to transmit during an odd slot. In yet another embodiment, the reservation owner transmits an outgoing clear to send (CTS) communication to the reservation target to transfer ownership of the reservation allocation to the reservation target, and receives an incoming clear to send (CTS) communication from the reservation target to regain ownership of the reservation allocation. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090040985 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING AD-HOC NETWORKING OVER UMTS PROTOCOL - A method and apparatus are provided for ad hoc networking over a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS). In the method, if user equipment ( | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090046670 | Method for Data Transmission in a Radio Communication System - A method for data transmission in a radio communication system, in which data of a plurality of subscribers is combined with the aid of a multiplexing method to form frames, and is transmitted by means of sub-carriers. At least two frame structures are provided for transmission of the frames, with the frame structures differing in the respectively associated number of pilot signals and/or in the distribution or grouping of associated pilot signals. Each subscriber determines an individual progress speed, and each subscriber is allocated to one of at least two speed ranges, depending on the progress speed. A frame structure which is individually associated with the speed range, on the one hand, and an individually associated number of sub-carriers, on the other hand, are used in order to transmit the data from subscribers who are allocated to an identical speed range on the basis of their progress speed. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046671 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CELL TIMING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for determining the timing of a cell in a wireless communication system are described. A user equipment (UE) may obtain received samples that include at least one synchronization signal generated based on a cell identity (ID) of a cell. The UE may correlate the received samples with the at least one synchronization signal in the time domain at different time offsets to obtain energies for multiple timing hypotheses. The UE may identify at least one detected peak based on the energies for the multiple timing hypotheses. The UE may then update a set of candidate peaks based on the at least one detected peak and may identify a candidate peak with signal strength exceeding the signal strength of a peak being tracked. The UE may provide the timing of the identified candidate peak as the timing of the cell. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090046672 | RATE MATCHING OF MESSAGES CONTAINING SYSTEM PARAMETERS - Systems, methodologies, and devices are described that facilitate transmitting a guard time parameter to a mobile device to facilitate rate matching data around a guard time region associated with a downlink subframe of a radio frame sequence. A base station transmits the guard time parameter via PBCH or DBCH to the mobile device. The base station rate matches data associated with PDSCH, comprising DBCH, around the guard time region, and transmits PDSCH to the mobile device. The mobile device identifies the guard time parameter and rate matches at least a portion of the information received via the PDSCH around the guard time region to facilitate enhanced reception of PDSCH. Optionally, a radio frame sequence can be structured so that a subframe immediately following a subframe containing DBCH is a downlink subframe, which can be known by the mobile device a priori or based on a downlink subframe parameter. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090052406 | COMMUNICATION SCHEDULING OF NETWORK NODES - In one aspect, a method to schedule network communications includes transmitting a node identification associated with a first node joining a network over a first portion of control timeslots based on a first probability, detecting nodes in the network using a second portion of the control timeslots and receiving acknowledgments from at least one of the nodes in the network. The method also includes that if a ratio of a number of acknowledgments received to a number of the nodes in the network detected is greater than a predetermined percentage: transmitting control data over the first portion of the control timeslots based on a second probability associated with a number of the nodes detected and transmitting data over the second portion of the control timeslots based on a network schedule. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052407 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA COMMON TO USERS - A radio base station transmits user common data provided from a user common data control apparatus connected to a communication network to a plurality of mobile stations by radio. The radio base station includes a frame loss detection unit configured to detect loss of user common data that occurs on a transmission route between the radio base station and the user common data control apparatus, and a timing adjustment unit configured to change transmission timing of the user common data for the mobile station according to the loss of the user common data. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090052408 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method and apparatus are provided for enabling a user to effectively use a wireless network using a contention free channel access service. The wireless communication method includes receiving a contention free channel access request frame from at least one device in a wireless network in a superframe, and broadcasting a traffic information message including contention free channel access information in the superframe after the contention free channel access request frame is received. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090067389 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR UWB IMPULSE COMMUNICATION - Provided is a radio communication system for ultra wideband (UWB) impulse communications and a radio communication apparatus and method thereof. The present patent provides a radio communication system that can minimize power consumption by eliminating a need for carrier detection and sharing transmission/reception time information in UWB impulse communications. The system includes a network coordinator; and one or more devices communicating on a superframe basis in subordination to the network coordinator. The devices perform data transmission/reception in predetermined time slots and then they are inactivated to thereby reduce power consumption. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067390 | METHOD FOR SPECIFYING TRANSMITTING TIMES FOR CYCLICALLY SENDING OUT DATA MESSAGES, AND SUBSCRIBER DEVICE THEREFOR - A method for specifying transmitting times for cyclically sending out data messages ( | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090067391 | Separate Rank and CQI Feedback in Wireless Networks - A transmission of information within a wireless network may include a first and second type of feedback information, wherein the second type of feedback information is derived based on the first type of feedback information. The first type of feedback information is embedded in a configured frame every T1 frames. The second type of feedback is embedded in a configured frame every T2 frames, wherein T1 is greater than or equal to T2. A sequence of frames is transmitted from one node in the network to a second node on an uplink control channel. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090073940 | EFFICIENT USE OF PERSISTENT SCHEDULING WITH OFDMA WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Various embodiments of the invention may take advantage of persistent scheduling in a wireless network to achieve efficiencies of operation. One embodiment dynamically adjusts the duration of persistent scheduling based on changing channel conditions. When mobile stations are grouped together for persistent scheduling, another embodiment uses a bitmap to indicate which mobile stations in the group have data in the current frame. Still another embodiment eliminates the Connection Identifier from a packet header when bitmaps are being used. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090080384 | INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for mitigating interference on the reverse link in a wireless communication system are described. Terminals interfering with one another and communicating with different sectors on the reverse link may be identified. The terminals may be scheduled in time intervals selected to mitigate interference. For example, each terminal may be scheduled on at least one pseudo-randomly selected time interval, on a pseudo-randomly selected interlace that includes evenly spaced time intervals, on a different set of at least one time interval, on a different interlace, etc. A terminal may receive an assignment of at least one time interval for transmission on the reverse link to a serving sector. The at least one time interval may be selected to mitigate interference to terminals in neighbor sectors. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090080385 | CELL SEARCH METHOD, FORWARD LINK FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS USING THE SAME AND FORWARD LINK FRAME STRUCTURE - Provided are a cell search method, a forward link frame transmission method, an apparatus using the methods, and a forward link frame structure in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing cellular system, wherein the time it takes to perform a cell search and the complexity of the cell search can be reduced. The cell search apparatus includes a sync acquirer which receives a signal according to a forward link frame comprising a plurality of sync channel symbols each having different intervals between the adjacent sync channel symbols and achieves synchronization of the sync channel symbols using a sync channel of the received signal, and a boundary detector which detects a frame boundary using an interval pattern between the sync channel symbols, based on the achieved synchronization. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090086684 | Method for Preventing Co-Channel Operation with Radar Systems - A method for preventing co-channel operation with a radar system includes the steps of setting a state of a first communication channel to active, connecting to a first wireless access point on the first communication channel, passively scanning at least a second communication channel for communication from a second wireless access point, setting a state of the second channel to active if frames are received on the second channel, determining whether an elapsed time since frames were received on at least one of the first channel and the second channel has exceed a predefined value, and in response to the predefined value being exceeded for at least one of the first channel and the second channel, setting the state of a corresponding one of the first channel and the second channel to passive. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086685 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIME-BASED FAST ACK/NACK RESPONSE OPERATION WITH ENHANCED GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE 2 UPLINK - A method and apparatus for time-based fast positive acknowledgement (ACK)/negative acknowledgement (NACK) reporting (FANR) operation with enhanced general packet radio service 2 uplink (HUGE) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) configures downlink FANR operation and EGPRS-2 mode uplink transmission not to be in conflict. A modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for the EGPRS-2 mode may be limited to an MCS containing at most two RLC data blocks. Alternatively, three or more piggybacked ACK/NACK (PAN) bits may be used for a time-based FANR operation if an EGPRS-2 mode is configured. Alternatively, at least one PAN bit may indicate an ACK/NACK for a group of RLC data blocks. The number of PAN bits for a time-based FANR operation may be configured by the network. The downlink FANR operation may be dynamically switched between time-based and SSN-based. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090086686 | METHOD TO SIMPLIFY UPLINK STATE FLAG (USF) DECODING COMPLEXITY FOR REDHOT A AND B WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNITS - A method and apparatus allow for reliable and low-complexity decoding of EGPRS2 communication bursts when RTTI and BTTI equipment operate on the same timeslot(s). Various configurations for the Uplink State Flag (USF) mapping employ adjustable bit swapping of some or all USF channel-coded bits in communication bursts. Configurations that allow for an adjustable use of the symbol mapping stage in the transmitter and receiver to allow for more throughput and/or reduced complexity are also disclosed. Admissible mapping rules are known to the receiver and transmitter and therefore reduce the complexity of decoding this information. In order to increase throughput for EGPRS2 communication bursts, RTTI transmissions of different modulation types or EGPRS/EGPRS2 modulation and coding schemes during a BTTI interval are introduced that allow for reliable USF decoding and reduced decoder complexity. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090092103 | Method and apparatus for a coordinated scheduling method to avoid multiplexing of control and data for power limited users in the LTE reverse link - A system and method for coordinated scheduling of a telecom device to avoid multiplexing of control signaling and data signaling is disclosed. The method includes defining a round trip time for signaling transmissions. The method further includes allocating the signal transmissions and signal retransmissions for uplink transmissions which are directed by a first scheduling mode and downlink transmissions which are directed by a second scheduling mode to take place in a subframe time position where control signaling transmissions are not being transmitted in subframes where data transmissions and retransmissions are being transmitted. This system and method are particularly useful for telecommunication devices in power limited situations. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090092104 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND BASE STATION - In a radio communication system in which a radio terminal | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090097456 | METHOD FOR ACHIEVING FAIRNESS IN A NETWORK - Disclosed are a method and a computer program product for achieving fairness in utilization of a channel in a network. The network includes plurality of stations such that at least one station of the plurality of stations includes at least one radio. The at least one radio may fail to access the channel even when the channel is available for performing transmission. The method includes determining a number of idle slots occurred at the channel during a disruption period when the at least one radio is unavailable for transmission. The number of idle slots occurred during the disruption period may be accumulated as a credit. Based on the accumulated credit, an initial value of a backoff counter of the at least one station may be reset. The reset initial value of the backoff counter enables the at least one radio to utilize the accumulated idle slots for next transmission. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090097457 | REPEATING TRANSMISSIONS OF SIGNALS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses for a User Equipment (UE) to transmit an acknowledgement signal over multiple Transmission Time Intervals (TTIs). The acknowledgement signal is in response to a data packet reception and is transmitted in a different resource in each of the multiple TTIs, if the data packet reception is through a scheduling assignment, or is transmitted in the same resource in each of the multiple TTIs, if the data packet reception is periodic. The UE transmitting an acknowledgement signal over multiple TTIs should not transmit additional acknowledgement signals in subsequent TTIs before the initial acknowledgement signal transmission is completed. The UE should also not transmit data signals or other control signals in the same or subsequent TTIs before completing transmission of an acknowledgement signal over multiple TTIs. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090103498 | Adaptive Receiver Method and Apparatus - Receiver resources are allocated based on how subframes are allocated within in a frame between downlink and uplink transmissions and how often the receiver is expected to report feedback information associated with the downlink transmissions. Additional time is available for processing received data blocks if the feedback information derived from those blocks must be reported later than expected due to the unavailability of uplink subframes. According to one embodiment, received signals are processed by receiving transmission configuration information indicating how downlink and uplink subframes are allocated within a frame in the time domain. Based on the transmission configuration information, the receiver determines whether a delay that exceeds a feedback reporting interval assigned to the receiver will occur when reporting feedback information associated with the downlink subframes. Receiver resources are allocated based on whether a delay will occur when reporting the feedback information. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103499 | BEACON AND MOBILE TERMINAL SYNCHRONIZATION AND METHOD THEREOF - The invention relates to a method of optimizing measurement duration in a telecommunications network, said telecommunications network comprising a first base station connected to a first radio network, at least a second base station connected to a second radio network, a core network connected to said first and second radio network, a database coupled to said core network, said method comprising: sending a first beacon period information belonging to said first base station from said first base station to said database; sending at least a second beacon period information belonging to said second base station from said second base station to said database; storing at least said first and second beacon period information on said database; sending a request of said second beacon period information from said first base station to said database; generating a response of said second beacon period information belonging to said second base station from said database to said first base station; forwarding said response of said first base station to said mobile terminal; adjusting measurement periods on the mobile terminal based on said response of said beacon period information. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090103500 | Re-transmission capability in semi-persistent transmission - One or more hybrid automatic repeat request process identifications are configured for scheduling without associated control signaling. A particular HARQ process ID to be assumed for a given subframe is determined based on at least one of: a) system frame number; b) number of hybrid automatic repeat request processes that are allocated for semi-persistent scheduling; and c) periodicity for semi-persistent scheduling. In various embodiments: a) is broadcast and b) and c) are sent via RRC signaling; and the assumed particular HARQ process ID is determined as a function of [Current TTI/SP_Period] mod Num_SP_HARQ:wherein Current TTI is a number for the given subframe derived from the system frame number and the term [Current TTI/SP_Period] is rounded to an integer prior to the modulo operation; SP_Period is the periodicity of the semi-persistent scheduling; and Num_SP_HARQ is the number of hybrid automatic repeat request processes that are allocated for semi-persistent scheduling. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090109936 | Terminal Control Apparatus and Radio LAN System - When prohibiting data transmission by a radio communication terminal, such as a radio communication terminal L-STA, a terminal control apparatus generates radio data including information about a data transmission prohibition time interval in an L-SIG which is a header region which each radio communication terminal can recognize in common, and, if a use state checking unit 21 has checked to see that a channel CH_a is being not used, transmits the radio data to the radio communication terminal L-STA and so on in the form of frames which the radio communication terminal L-STA can recognize by using the channel CH_a. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090109937 | SELECTING TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS FOR CONTENTION-BASED ACCESS IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus are disclosed for selecting a channel for uplink communication includes determining whether a cell supports transmission over an enhanced random access channel (E-RACH) and selecting whether to send uplink communications over the E-RACH or a random access channel. A method for selecting a transmission time interval (TTI) for use on an E-RACH includes evaluating radio conditions measured at a user equipment and selecting a long TTI if radio conditions are bad and selecting a short TTI if radio conditions are good. Alternatively, the TTI can be selected based on an amount of data to be transmitted on the uplink. A user equipment, an integrated circuit, or a Node B can be configured to perform either method. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090116458 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT MULTIMEDIA DELIVERY IN A WIRELESS PACKET NETWORK - The present invention sends multiple versions of a multimedia packet to the base station, and, based on the radio channel and traffic characteristics, an appropriate version of the multimedia packet is selected to send to the mobile station at a given time. In this way, source transmission is improved to instantaneous conditions. The steps of the present invention are performed in conjunction with RTP used for multimedia transmission over internet protocol (IP) networks. In a first embodiment, the multiple versions are sent to the base station in the same RTP packet, and the base station strips out the extraneous versions. In a second embodiment, the base station receives multiple RTP packets having identical information in the packet header in many fields, and selects an appropriate one among these for transmission to the mobile station, discarding the rest. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116459 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CELL SEARCHING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for mapping a cell IDentifier (ID) for cell searching in a transmitter of a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes generating a single type of complex sequences mapped with a cell ID, and transmitting the complex sequences mapped with the cell ID to synchronization channels periodically transmitted in each slot of a physical frame. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090116460 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCHEDULING FOR SUPPORTING QUALITY OF SERVICE OF DATA SERVICE IN MOBILE INTERNET SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for setting a Quality of Service (QoS) level by a Portable Subscriber Station (PSS) in a mobile internet system are provided. The method includes determining a QoS request level serving as a QoS level required for transmitting a real-time packet if a packet to be transmitted is a real-time packet, transmitting the determined QoS request level to a Radio Access Station (RAS), receiving the QoS level determined corresponding to the QoS request level from the RAS and setting the QoS level to correspond to the received QoS level. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090122765 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE SYNCHRONISATION OF THE PHYSICAL LAYERS IN HETEROGENEOUS MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - The method according to the present invention provides synchronization in a heterogeneous mobile network, for the purpose of interoperability, of a wireless local area network, in which a medium is reserved for a certain service or user in radio channel reservation periods ( | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090122766 | NESTED WEIGHTED ROUND ROBIN QUEUING - In a Mobile Ad Hoc Network (MANET), nested weighted round robin queues are employed to selectively provide channel access for traffic according to a priority or Quality of Service (QoS) for data. By nesting queues within other queues, and applying a weighted round robin technique to serve each queue, relatively arbitrary service metrics may be achieved including nodal QoS for class-based traffic, avoidance of queue starvation, and so forth. Prioritized queues may also be provided for preemptive delivery of high priority traffic. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090129344 | ENHANCED STREAM LAYER TRANSMISSION FOR MEDIAFLO MOBILE MULTIMEDIA MULTICAST SYSTEM - Enhancing stream layer transmission for a MediaFLO mobile multimedia multicast system comprising a transmitter and a receiver includes sending a plurality of multicast logical channels (MLC) forming a data frame from the transmitter, wherein each MLC comprises multimedia data streams comprising a stream | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090135789 | Channel Estimation - To allocate a VSAT to a MODCOD in a DVB-S2 ACM system, the HUB periodically transmits pilot frames of alternating MODCODs, which is identified by the VSAT. An FPGA at a VSAT site maintains telemetry of good and bad frames. A processor polls this telemetry to determine the optimal MODCOD to be allocated to the VSAT. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090135790 | INTERFACE MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING HYBRID TIME REUSE - Interference that occurs during wireless communication may be managed by hybrid time reuse. A method, apparatus amend medium of communication determines one or more time reuse patterns of respective one or more unplanned access points. A second time reuse pattern that is less interfering with the one or more time reuse patterns is selected. Signals are transmitted according to the second time reuse pattern from a second unplanned access point to an associated access terminal. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090147756 | COORDINATING COMMUNICATIONS AMONG WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK DEVICES - Embodiments of a multi-radio wireless communication device having two or more radio modules are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an initiating link manager may generate and transmit messages to a responding link manager. The messages may include a desired slot offset value and a desired point in time to perform slot adjustment. The responding link manager may return with a message indicating acceptance or nonacceptance of the desired slot offset value. If the responding link manager accepts the desired slot offset value, the message may also include whether the slot adjustment may be implemented at the desired point in time or incrementally. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090147757 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - There are provided a base station device and a mobile station device for increasing the speed of cell search by introducing identification of TTI timing into the cell search. In the base station device ( | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090154429 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A BASE STATION AND SUBSCRIBER STATIONS - A method and system for managing a communication between a base station ( | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090154430 | Method of Radio Resource Allocation and Related Communication Apparatus - A method of radio resource allocation in a wireless communication system includes allocating radio resource to a plurality of logical channels according to a grant, and allowing the plurality of logical channels to use the remaining grant when the grant remains and the plurality of logical channels having data available for transmission cannot perform resource allocation anymore. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090161636 | FLEXIBLE CONTROL CHANNELS FOR UNPLANNED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless node configured to communicate with a remote node using a timeslot structure. The timeslot structure includes a plurality of data channels and a plurality of control channels, wherein each of the control channels comprises a plurality of control units. The wireless node is further configured to assign any one of a plurality of control messages for the data channels to any one of the control units. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161637 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided are a communication method and apparatus of a wireless sensor network which uses at least one channel and has a tree structure. The method includes: generating windows, where a beacon interval is divided, according to each channel; selecting a window, which is not assigned to nodes that exist within a predetermined range from a certain node, from among the generated windows; and the certain node communicating with a child node of the certain node by using a channel to which the selected window belongs during a time corresponding to the selected window. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090161638 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A basestation of a telecommunications network is able to acquire timing information by sending a single time request message over a computer network to a time server, with the time request message specifying a number of time response messages, said number being greater than one. Based on the received specified number of time response messages from the time server, the basestation is able to calibrate an internal oscillator. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090168730 | Pilot Signal Allocation Method and Apparatus - A pilot (or reference) transmission scheme is utilized where different transmitters are assigned pilot sequences with possibly different cyclic time shifts and different base pilot sequences. A pilot signal is transmitted concurrently by the transmitters in a plurality of pilot blocks, and a receiver processes the plurality of received pilot blocks to recover a channel estimate for at least one of the transmitters while suppressing the interference due to the pilot signals from the other transmitters. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090168731 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING INTERACTIONS BETWEEN MEASUREMENT GAP, AUTOMATED REPEAT REQUEST, DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus for handling interactions between measurement gap, automated repeat request, discontinuous reception and discontinuous transmission in wireless communications are disclosed. The method and apparatus are for real-time data and non-real time data in both an uplink and a downlink. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090175245 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING - A disclosed base station apparatus includes: a TTI-length determining unit which determines, based on downlink receive quality information transmitted from a mobile station, whether data is to be transmitted in a first TTI with, as a unit, a predetermined period no shorter than a subframe length, or in a second TTI with, as a unit, a period shorter than the first TTI; a number-of-subframes determining unit which determines a number of subframes making up the determined TTI; a reporting unit which reports the determined TTI and the number of subframes making up the determined TTI to the mobile station; and | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175246 | Method of requesting and reporting link quality in an EGPRS2 system - The link quality reporting method includes measuring link quality for received radio blocks, and if there is a modulation scheme with a largest number of radio blocks, reporting link quality for the modulation scheme, and if there is a plurality of schemes with the same number of radio blocks, reporting link quality for a modulation scheme selected using a predetermined method. Performance deterioration can be minimized in a link adaptation process. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175247 | METHOD OF SCHEDULING BROADCAST MESSAGES FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method for scheduling broadcast messages to transmit system information is disclosed. This method for scheduling broadcast messages having system information classifies a plurality of system information into one or more groups. For example, the system information may be control information for a network entry and initialization of a mobile station, or a burst profile. Then, the scheduling method allocates different numbers of transmission times to the individual groups, and determines transmission start times of system information of the individual groups according to the allocated transmission times. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175248 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING ENHANCED RACH IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting an enhanced Random Access CHannel (RACH) in a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system is provided, in which the UE transmits an uplink preamble to a Node B and upon receipt of an ACKnowledgment (ACK) for the uplink preamble, transmits an Enhanced Uplink Dedicated CHannel (E-DCH) and a Dedicated Physical Control CHannel (DPCCH) to the Node B. The transmission of the DPCCH starts before the transmission of the E-DCH. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090175249 | ALTERNATE CHANNEL FOR CARRYING SELECTED MESSAGE TYPES - A method for communicating information in a base station is disclosed. A reverse link channel is allocated to be a shared acknowledgement channel for receiving acknowledgement information. Acknowledgement information associated with data payload from a field unit is then received over the shared acknowledgement channel by the base station. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090185540 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH-SPEED TRANSMISSION ON RACH - A method and apparatus for signaling in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The method includes the WTRU receiving a value of a maximum number of retransmissions and retransmitting data in a plurality of hybrid automatic retransmission request (HARQ) processes limited by the value of a maximum number of retransmission. The WTRU is configured to receive a cell-specific, fixed or absolute grant on a broadcast channel. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090185541 | BASE STATION - A base station communicating with mobile stations by using a frequency band within a transmission band based on orthogonal frequency division multiplexing is disclosed. The base station includes a multiplexing unit configured to multiplex a synchronization channel, for a mobile station performing an initial cell search, in a second frequency band including a center frequency on a raster of a first frequency band and having a bandwidth corresponding to the smallest one of receivable bandwidths of the mobile stations in a system. The multiplexing unit is configured to multiplex multiple synchronization channels, for a mobile station performing a neighboring cell search, in a third frequency band including the center frequency on the raster of the first frequency band and having a bandwidth that is greater than that of the second frequency band. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090196262 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTRA-USER QUALITY OF SERVICE UPLINK SCHEDULING - A method for intra-user quality of service (QoS) uplink scheduling may include determining scheduling types associated with active uplink connections that are maintained by the subscriber station. The method may also include determining QoS parameters corresponding to the different scheduling types. The method may also include scheduling the active uplink connections for uplink transmissions based on the different scheduling types and their corresponding QoS parameters. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090196263 | WIRELESS RECEIVER - In a method for full discontinuous (DTX) control in a receiver in a wireless communication system it is determined if full DTX is allowed in a current timeslot. If not, then a full DTX indicator is set for the previous frame to false and the method ends. If full DTX is allowed, then it is determined if a special burst has been detected. If so, then the full DTX indicator is set for the previous frame to true and the method ends. If a special burst has not been detected, then it is determined if a transport format combination indicator (TFCI) has been accepted. If the TFCI has been accepted, then the full DTX indicator is set for the previous frame to false and the method ends. If the TFCI has not been accepted, then the method ends without setting the full DTX indicator for the previous frame. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090201888 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF UNCOMPRESSED VIDEO HAVING A DUAL-BEACON MECHANISM FOR TWO DEVICE TYPES - A system and method of wireless data communication over a network of devices and device types are disclosed. In one aspect, the beacons of a first device type are sent and received from devices of the first device type or a second device type, by a first device of the first device type. A plurality of beacons of the first device type or the second device type are sent or received from a plurality of devices of the first device type or a second device type, by a second device of the second device type. Each of channels by the first device is sensed. A free channel for data communication between the first device and the second device is located. Beacons of the first device type are sent out by the first device. Channel reservations of time blocks are made of the free channel for data transmissions. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201889 | INTEGRATED SCHEDULING OF UNICAST AND MULTICAST TRAFFIC IN RELAY-ENABLED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless network with integrated scheduling of unicast and multicast users in a relay-enabled two-hop wireless network is disclosed. In this system, users with finite buffers are considered and scheduled over multiple channels in an OFDMA-based wireless network. The gain-specific and efficient scheduling system helps leverage diversity and spatial reuse gains from these networks. The system is applicable to both unicast and multicast traffic and leverages diversity and spatial reuse gains simultaneously to optimize the target network with both unicast and multicast flows. The integrated scheduling system strikes a good balance in delivering efficient performance to unicast and multicast flows. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201890 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RESPONSE INFORMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for transmitting radio resources in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving a random access channel (RACH) preamble from a plurality of UEs and transmitting response information associated with the received preambles over a common channel wherein the plurality UEs can access the common channel and receive corresponding information. If a HARQ scheme is used when a UE transmits data to the eNode-B using uplink radio resources allocated over the RACH, the eNode-B does not pre-allocate uplink radio resources required for re-transmission and performs allocation of radio resources for a first transmission of HARQ. If the re-transmission is required, the eNode-B allocates the radio resources required for the re-transmission with the NACK signal. If re-transmission is not required, the present invention can reduce an amount of wasted radio resources. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090201891 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RESPONSE INFORMATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for transmitting radio resources in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving a random access channel (RACH) preamble from a plurality of UEs and transmitting response information associated with the received preambles over a common channel wherein the plurality UEs can access the common channel and receive corresponding information. If a HARQ scheme is used when a UE transmits data to the eNode-B using uplink radio resources allocated over the RACH, the eNode-B does not pre-allocate uplink radio resources required for re-transmission and performs allocation of radio resources for a first transmission of HARQ. If the re-transmission is required, the eNode-B allocates the radio resources required for the re-transmission with the NACK signal. If re-transmission is not required, the present invention can reduce an amount of wasted radio resources. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090207815 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR CO-EXISTING NETWORKS - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for improving the capabilities of an evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network, in particular for cases when more than one radio access network applying a time-division duplex transmission mode need to co-exist on a same carrier. The invention addresses further problems concerning an efficient allocation of uplink resources and resource allocation in a handover situation. The present invention assigns an attribute in form of a distinguishing value to the time slots used for the uplink and downlink transmission on said carrier such as to avoid scheduling of transmissions via a first radio access network in downlink or uplink time slots assigned to the second radio access network and to avoid scheduling of transmissions via the second radio access network in uplink time slots assigned for transmissions in the first radio access network. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090213815 | Contention protocols for wireless medium access in communication networks - Wireless medium access in a communication network having a number of terminals is controlled by defining protocol message units for transmission by a given terminal which units correspond to operational states of at least one of the terminal and the medium. A number of time slots are allocated for transmission of packets from each terminal, and a number of contention opportunities are defined at the beginning of each time slot. Priority and backoff mechanisms are defined and applied at each terminal during the contention opportunities in the slots. Packets are then transmitted by the terminal within the slots while (1) minimizing the occurrence of empty slots at times when packets are available for transmission, and (2) minimizing the number of slots during which two or more packets are detected on the medium simultaneously at the terminal. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213816 | Timeslot Sharing Protocol for Wireless Communication Networks - A method for transmitting information in a communication network of multiple nodes, in which information transmission is partitioned into successive superframes, and in which each superframe is partitioned into a beacon period followed by a data period, which may consist of a contention free period (CFP), and each beacon period and CFP of the data period is partitioned into timeslots. The method includes allocating to at least a first node of the multiple nodes a designated timeslot in which to transmit data in at least one of a plurality of superframes, and allocating to at least a second node of the multiple nodes the same designated timeslot in which to transmit information during at least one subsequent superframe. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213817 | Resource allocation method and apparatus for reducing uplink feedback overhead in a wireless communication system - A method and apparatus for reducing an uplink feedback overhead in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes scheduling DownLink traffic and determining a transmission period, and allocating UpLink feedback resources considering the DL traffic transmission period. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090213818 | METHOD OF PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and device for performing contention resolution between a mobile communication terminal and a base station. The method according to an embodiment includes initiating a random access procedure by a medium access control (MAC) layer of the mobile communication terminal, including starting a contention resolution timer; and stopping the contention resolution timer and determining that the random access procedure was successfully completed upon receipt from the base station of a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) transmission addressed to a cell-radio network temporary identity (C-RNTI) of the mobile communication terminal and containing a UL grant. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090219897 | DTX detection when ACK/NACK is transmitted with scheduling request - A method for signaling between a mobile apparatus ( | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090232103 | Apparatus and method adapted for directional bandwidth reservation with fixed announcement slot in wireless networks - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a transceiver operable in a wireless personal area network, wherein the transceiver is configured to communicate with a coordinator and at least one receiver and wherein the transceiver and the coordinator use a directional reservation of free channel time blocks using contention-based slots, by selecting uniformly at random contention slots by the transceiver and transmitting a bandwidth reservation request message specifying the requested reservation period using directional transmission pointed towards the coordinator. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232104 | Techniques enabling dynamic bandwidth reservation in a wireless personal area network - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising dynamically reserving free channel time blocks for directional transmissions in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) by a transceiver communicating with a Coordinator and the Coordinator allocating a part or a whole of unreserved channel time blocks for a directional link during a handshake with the transceiver. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232105 | MECHANISM TO AVOID INTERFERENCE AND IMPROVE COMMUNICATION LATENCY IN MMWAVE WPANS - Briefly, a mechanism to avoid interference and improve channel efficiency in mmWave Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs) is disclosed. In particular, interference information during various time periods is tracked and used to optimize transmission scheduling. Further, a mechanism is provided to improve communication latency by distributing responsibility for coordination of slots amongst multiple transmitting devices. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232106 | Beaconing and superframe structure for millimeter wave wireless technologies - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising communicating in a wireless network with a MAC layer that uses multi-level beacons, the multi-level beacons including a Discovery beacon (DB) which is transmitted in an omni mode and an announcement beacon/frame (AB) transmitted in a beamformed mode. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232107 | METHOD OF PERFORMING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - A method and device for performing a contention based random access procedure by a mobile communication terminal in communication with a base station. The method according to an embodiment includes transmitting a random access preamble message to the base station; receiving a random access response from the base station, the random access response including a timing advance command; determining a status of a mobile communication terminal time alignment timer; and ignoring the timing advance command if the mobile communication terminal time alignment timer is determined to be running in the determining step. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232108 | I/Q IMBALANCE ESTIMATION USING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS IN LTE SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus perform I/Q imbalance estimation and compensation using synchronization signals in LTE systems. Primary and secondary synchronization signals (P-SCH and S-SCH), which carry synchronization information, are embedded in each LTE frame, and are used for receiver I/Q imbalance estimation. Additionally, the performance may be significantly improved by optimally selecting the training data in I/Q imbalance estimation. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232109 | Method and System for Optimal Beamforming in Wireless Networks - Aspects of a method and system for optimal beamforming in a wireless network are presented. Aspects of the system may include one or more processors for use in a requesting communication device wherein the one or more processors may be operable to request a transmission time slot allocation. A determination may be made by a coordinating communication device as whether to assign a sector transmission time slot and/or beamforming transmission time slot to the requesting communication device based on the transmission time slot allocation request. The one or more processors may be operable to receive the assigned sector transmission time slot and/or beamforming transmission time slot. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090232110 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN A PACKET-BASED RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A scheme for resource allocation for variable rate users in a packet-based radio communication system such as a UMTS TDD system is based on a representation ( | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090238153 | MEDIUM ACCESS FOR DE-CENTRALIZED WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of wireless medium access for establishing a decentralized wireless network, the method comprising broadcasting of beacon frames by each of a plurality of devices; listening, at each device, for beacon frames of other devices; identifying, at each device, other devices who's beacon frames have been heard; and forming the decentralised wireless network as at least two dynamic networks, each dynamic network being centred around one of the devices and having said other devices who's beacon frames have been heard by said one device as network members. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238154 | Method for Synchronization of Assemblies in a Base Station - A method synchronizes assemblies in a base station to a reference clock signal. A local clock signal and a frame are formed in a first assembly. The clock signal and the frame are transmitted, using a synchronous transmission with a predictable propagation time, to a second assembly. A reference clock signal is received in the second assembly, and a phase difference and a time difference between the transmitted clock signal on the one hand and the reference clock signal on the other hand are determined. The phase difference and the time difference are transmitted from the second assembly to the first assembly via a link without a predictable propagation time. The phase difference and the time difference are used in the first assembly to determine a manipulated variable which controls the formation of the local clock signal, such that the first and the second assemblies are synchronized in time. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238155 | MULTI-CARRIER ALLOCATION USING RECIPROCAL NATURE OF UPLINK AND DOWNLINK IN TIME DIVISION DUPLEX TO USE JUST UPLINK PILOTS - In order to improve efficiency for sub-carrier allocation in a TDM multi-carrier system, the invention provides a novel frame structure and corresponding method and apparatus. During a centralized short period, each terminal sends a probe message including a predefined sequence to a network device and the network device estimates the channel characteristics for each sub-carrier with respect to each terminal by estimating the received probe message. In this way, sub-carrier allocation can be improved and sub-carriers with good channel characteristics are allocated to appropriate terminals. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090238156 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ANTENNA TRAINING OF BEAMFORMING VECTORS BY SELECTIVE USE OF BEAM LEVEL TRAINING - A system and method of performing a beam discovery between a device and a plurality of other devices in a wireless network is disclosed. Sector training sequences to a plurality of other devices are transmitted via a transmit directional antenna having a set of transmit sectors. A plurality of feedback messages are received from the plurality of other devices, where the plurality of feedback messages are indicative of optimum transmit sectors that have been determined at the other devices based at least in part on the sector training sequences. Beam training sequences are transmitted to the plurality of other devices via the transmit directional antenna. A plurality of feedback message indicative of optimum transmit beam directions within the optimum transmit sectors are received from the plurality of other devices. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090245211 | Method and apparatus for providing system information in ofdma cellular system - Provided is a method and apparatus for transmitting system information in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) cellular system. The system information transmitting method in a base station of a cellular system includes: generating a plurality of system information blocks that constitute the system information; generating a system information super frame including a main information block and the system information blocks; generating a system information broadcasting channel including the system information super frame; and allocating radio resources to the system information broadcasting channel in a Time Divisional Multiplexing (TDM) method. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245212 | REPORTING OF ACK AND CQI INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for reporting acknowledgement (ACK) information and channel quality indication (CQI) information in a wireless communication system are described. A user equipment (UE) may be able to receive data from up to two cells with dual-cell operation. The UE may determine CQI information for a first cell, determine CQI information for a second cell, and send the CQI information for both cells on a feedback channel with a single channelization code. The UE may process a control channel from each cell and, if control information is received from the cell, may further process a data channel from the cell to receive data sent to the UE. The UE may determine ACK information for each cell based on processing results for the data and control channels from that cell. The UE may send the ACK information for both cells on the feedback channel with the single channelization code. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090245213 | Efficient Quality of Service (QoS) Scheduling in OFDMA Wireless Networks - A system and methods for A method for efficient Quality of Service (QoS) scheduling in OFDMA wireless networks are presented. In one embodiment, the method includes determining a number of time slots to allocate to one of a plurality of wireless mobile stations according to a linear solution that satisfies one or more data access requirements and maximizes base station utilization. The method may also include adjusting the linear solution in response to a determination that a power consumption value exceeds a predetermined threshold value. Additionally, the method may include granting the one or more mobile stations access to the time slots in accordance with the linear solution. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090252124 | Method for requesting resource and scheduling for uplink traffic in mobile communication and apparatus thereof - The present invention relates to a resource request and a packet scheduling method for uplink traffic in a mobile communication system. For efficient scheduling of the uplink traffic, a base station and user equipment (UE) determines a scheduling method according to characteristics of the traffic when performing negotiation therebetween. The traffic may be classified into traffic that generating a fixed-size packet in a periodical time interval, traffic that generates a variable-size packet in a periodic time interval, and traffic that generates a variable-size packet in a random time interval. Therefore, the UE requests a resource in accordance with the characteristics of the traffic and the base station performs scheduling according to the characteristics of the traffic such that an optimal uplink packet scheduling can be achieved. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090252125 | METHOD AND PROCEDURES FOR UNSYNCHRONIZED, SYNCHRONIZED, AND SYNCHRONIZATION STAND BY COMMUNICATIONS IN E-UTRA SYSTEMS - An improved method of processing random access procedures, wherein the network receives at least one access burst to allow a network to estimate uplink received timing, the access burst containing at least a preamble, and transmits information for responding to the at least one access burst, while the mobile terminal configures at least one access burst containing at least a preamble and transmits the at least one access burst to allow a network to at least estimate uplink received timing. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090257406 | REDUCTION OF TRANSMISSION OVERHEAD IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for reducing the overhead associated with transmitting MAPs are provided by grouping client stations in different constellations into one of two or more groups/allocations based partially upon their respective channel conditions. As a result of grouping, client stations within each group/allocation share a single resource allocation and in addition, the different groups of client stations can be scheduled such that variable modulation repeat-coding schemes can be implemented for map transmissions to each group, thereby reducing the repetition rates and overhead associated with map transmissions. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257407 | PREAMBLE RETRANSMISSION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A preamble retransmission method in an Evolved Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) system is provided by which a terminal transmits a Radio Access Channel (RACH) preamble to a base station, the base station compares the received RACH preamble with preset specific criteria and requests retransmission for the RACH preamble to the terminal according to the comparison in order to reduce the probability of data transmission failure due to inaccuracy of time synchronization and to decrease interference with transmissions by other terminals. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257408 | METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL BUNDLING IN THE UPLINK - A method and apparatus for supporting uplink Transmission Time Interval (TTI) bundling in Long Term Evolution (LTE) is provided. Described are related method and apparatus for signaling, activation/deactivation and wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) behavior. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257409 | METHOD FOR GENERATING DOWNLINK FRAME, AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING CELL - The present invention relates to a method for generating a downlink frame including generating a first short sequence and a second short sequence indicating cell group information, generating a first scrambling sequence determined by the first synchronization signal, generating a second scrambling sequence determined by the first short sequence, scrambling the first short sequence with the first scrambling sequence, scrambling the second short sequence with at least the second scrambling sequence, and mapping a second synchronization signal including the scrambled first short sequence and the scrambled second short sequence in the frequency domain. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257410 | METHOD FOR SUPERFRAME MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATOR THEREOF - A method and a coordinator of superframe management are disclosed. The method includes receiving, by a coordinator, a GTS request from a node; determining the type of the node; allocating GTS in an active period based on GTS characteristics carried in the GTS request when the node is determined as an energy restricted device; allocating GTS in an active period and an inactive period based on GTS characteristics carried in the GTS request when the node is determined as an energy unrestricted device. As can be seen from the method of the present invention, for an energy unrestricted device, allocated GTS may extend to an inactive period. Since the length of slots allocated to the energy unrestricted node is extended, the QoS of the energy unrestricted node is improved and guaranteed. Meanwhile, since the method of the present invention considers and makes full use of the inactive period in the superframe, the network throughput is improved significantly. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090257411 | DATA GENERATION APPARATUS, DATA GENERATION METHOD, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTION METHOD, SECTOR IDENTIFICATION METHOD, INFORMATION DETECTION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To reduce the process of a cell search including sector identification without increasing loads on a transmission/reception apparatus. A synchronization channel (SCH) included on downlink in a multicarrier mobile communication system is multiplied by a sector specific code and a cell specific code (step S | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090262709 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS AND CHANNEL-SWITCHING METHOD - A wireless communications system and channel-switching method are disclosed herein. A source device and multiple sink devices independently maintain respective counters which track data packet errors. Each device independently switches channels only after its counter reaches a channel-switching threshold. The new channel switched-to is either determined by an indexed ordering of the available channels or by reference to a global clock maintained by each of the devices. Accordingly, all devices quickly arrive at a common channel. The system switches channels only when necessary and resolves quickly to a mutually acceptable channel. Therefore, unnecessary channel switching is minimized and data throughput is optimized. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262710 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Provided is a radio communication method capable of optimally using the wide-band communication enabled time while maintaining power saving in an ad hoc network. According to this method, in the ad hoc network using the wide-band communication and a narrow-band communication, transmission and output of the narrow-band synchronization tone signal and the resynchronization tone signal are controlled so that the reach radius of the narrow-band synchronization signal and the resynchronization tone signal exceeds the reach radius of the wide-band signal (milli-wave UWE signal). Thus, when radio communication devices pass by each other, super frame synchronization is completed before reaching the wide-band communication enabled range of the ad hoc network, thereby optimally using the wide-band communication-enabled time. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262711 | Method of scheduling an uplink packet transmission channel in a mobile communication system - A method of scheduling an uplink packet transmission channel in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method of scheduling includes determining a scope of user equipments (UEs) to be applied to a scheduling assignment for scheduling the uplink packet transmission channel, and transmitting the scheduling assignment to the user equipments included in the determined scope, wherein the scheduling assignment includes an identifier for identifying the scope of the user equipments and scheduling contents for carrying information applicable to the scheduling assignment. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262712 | TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DEVICES IN CELLULAR SYSTEM - In a multi-carrier cellular system, a second synchronization code (a Walsh code or a GCL series code) mapped on a second synchronization channel is used as a signal for specifying in which cell of the base station a mobile station terminal device itself is. A signal transmitted from the base station to the mobile station terminal device is mapped in a radio frame having two-dimensional extension in frequency and time directions. When mapping a certain series number of the second code for specifying a cell or a cell group on the radio frame as the second synchronization channel, phase rotation or circular shift in which one radio frame is one cycle is applied to the second synchronization code. On the receiving side, the head timing of the radio frame is known by knowing the phase rotation angle or the amount of circular shift of the second synchronization code. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090262713 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF TIMING ADVANCE AND DEVIATION - Apparatus and method for reducing the latency from timing deviation (TD) measurement to time advance (TA) adjustment. A deterministic procedure to coordinate time advance (TA) commands and timing deviation (TD) measurements is used so that failed transmissions or mobile terminals signal propagation changes can be recognized and corrected much more rapidly. Radio resource efficiency is maximized by minimizing signaling overhead through effectively reducing the frequency of time advance commands. This is accomplished by using TA command signals which include a Connect Frame Number (CFN) to specify particular radio frames for time advance (TA) adjustment. The potential for timing deviation (TD) measurements to be incorrectly processed in conjunction with adjusting a physical reception window and calculating mobile termination location is minimized, without excessive command signaling requirements. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090268693 | Signaling part of semi-persistent configuration via downlink control channel - A method includes receiving a first control information from a network access node, the first control information comprising a plurality of fields defining control information elements that are relevant to a resource allocation; receiving a second control information from the network access node, the second control information comprising a plurality of fields defining control information elements that are relevant to the resource allocation; and declaring the resource allocation to be a persistent resource allocation if at least one of the plurality of fields of the second control information is the same as one of the plurality of fields of the first control information. Also disclosed are computer programs and apparatus for carrying out the method, as well as a network access node configured to compose first control information and second control information for expressing resource allocations. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268694 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF TURBO CODED DATA WITH TIME DIVERSITY - A turbo-coded data block is processed for transmission on a wireless communication link by scheduling a plurality of portions of the block for transmission during respectively corresponding transmit intervals that are temporally separated from one another. The block portions are transmitted during the respectively corresponding transmit intervals according to the scheduling. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268695 | Method and System for Processing Reference Signals in OFDM Systems Using Transmission Time Interval Groupings - A method and system processes reference signals ( | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268696 | Method And Arrangement In A Mobile Telecommunication Network - The present invention is based on the idea to allocate HS-DSCH power at TTI based on the HS-SCCH allocation of TTI and an estimation of the HS-SCCH allocation of TTI+1. The estimation of the HS-SCCH allocation of TTI+1 is based on estimation of which users that will be scheduled at the time denoted TTI+1. i.e., the users that have a high probability to be selected for transmission by the scheduler at the time denoted TTI+1 are determined. That is performed by calculating for each user the probability that the user will be selected for transmission by the scheduler The users that have a high probability to be scheduled at the time TTI+1 are included in a candidate set according to the | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268697 | METHOD OF CHANNEL ASSESSMENT AND CHANNEL SEARCHING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of channel assessment and channel searching in a wireless network is disclosed. The wireless network separately performs a channel assessment procedure and a channel searching procedure for channel change or another object. The channel assessment procedure is to measure a status or quality of a channel which is currently used in the wireless network. A coordinator of the wireless network designates a time interval for the channel assessment to notify other device of it. The channel assessment procedure may be performed periodically, and is preferably scheduled to allow other devices not to use the channel for the time interval which at least one device performs channel assessment. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268698 | METHOD FOR MODE ADAPTATION IN MIMO SYSTEM - A mode adaptation method for performing mode switching between a single-user MIMO (SU-MIMO) mode and a multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO) mode includes receiving, by the base station, a preferred MIMO mode related information from a mobile station; determining a MIMO mode based on the preferred MIMO mode related information; reporting the MIMO mode to the mobile station; and receiving a feedback information of the MIMO mode from the mobile station. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268699 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - According to one embodiment, an information processing apparatus includes a wireless communication module, a communication traffic monitoring module and a management module. The wireless communication module is capable of time-dividing an identical wireless communication frame generated periodically to perform plural wireless communication with a respective plurality of different protocols in parallel. The communication traffic monitoring module monitors at least one of data traffic amounts required by the respective instances of plural wireless communication. And, the management module manages allocation of the wireless communication frame between the plurality of protocols based on the data traffic monitored by the communication traffic monitoring module. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268700 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING EMERGENCY SERVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Apparatuses and methods for providing an emergency service in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes allocating a Connection IDentifier (CID) used to transmit the emergency service message, determining a Convergence Sublayer (CS) type for processing the emergency service message, generating a Downlink Channel Descriptor (DCD) message which comprises at least one of the allocated CID and information relating to the determined CS type, and transmitting the generated DCD message to a Mobile Station (MS). | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090268701 | Method for sharing bandwidth using reduced duty cycle signals and media access control - A method is provided for transmitting data. A first device generates a first signal having a first duty cycle, comprising a first gated-on portion and a first gated-off portion in a time slot; and a second device generates a second signal having second duty cycle, comprising a second gated-on portion and a second gated-off portion in the same time slot. The first gated-on portion is generated during a first segment of the time slot and the first gated-off portion is generated during a second segment of the time slot, while the second gated-on portion is generated during the second segment and the second gated-off portion is generated during the first segment. Media access control (MAC) can be used to further define positions within time slots and provide error correction, power control, and the like. A preamble can be transmitted at an increased power level to facilitate acquisition. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090274124 | PACKET SCHEDULING METHOD, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A downlink packet scheduling method is disclosed for a shared channel or a common channel in a mobile communication system between a base station and a mobile station, the method including a step in which the base station determines whether there is a waiting packet to be transmitted to the mobile station other than a current transmission packet; a step in which when it is determined that there is no waiting packet to be transmitted, the base station sets a stop period “t” in which packet transmission is temporarily stopped after the current packet transmission; a step in which the base station transmits information indicating the stop period “t” through a schedule information channel transmitting schedule information of downlink packets; and a step in which the base station stops the packet transmission to the mobile station during the stop period “t” after the current packet transmission. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274125 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ORGANIZING THE CELLS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ALLOCATING RESOURCES TO PROVIDE MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST SERVICES - A system and method for configuring the system for configuring a wireless multi-cell communication to provide multimedia broadcast services (MBMS) to a plurality of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs). The cells of the communication system are organized into a plurality of sets of one or more cells. Resource units are assigned to each set of cells in the communication system. The assigned resource units are allocated in each cell of the communication system for MBMS transmission. The WTRUs receive information indicating how to access the resource units allocated for MBMS transmission. The WTRUs receive the MBMS from one or more of the cells of the communication system. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274126 | Mobile Station, Mobile Communication System, And Transmission Timing Control Method In Mobile Station - A mobile station, a mobile communication system comprising the mobile station and a base transceiver station, and a transmission timing control method in a mobile station, controlling a transmission timing of transmission data sent to the base transceiver station so as to cancel a difference between a first elapsed time comprising a difference between a transmission timing of first data transmitted from the base transceiver station ( | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090274127 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING SUPERFRAME FOR BEACON SCHEDULING - Provided is a method for determining superframe to efficiently perform beacon scheduling by allocating superframe lengths which are different according to a routing depth of sensor nodes in a ZigBee based wireless sensor network. The method for determining a superframe for beacon scheduling, includes the steps of: receiving a beacon from a neighboring node and grasping information on a superframe used by the neighboring nodes; and determining a transmission time and a length of own superframe based on superframe information of the grasped neighboring node. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090279511 | MULTI-TRANSCEIVER MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHODS FOR NEGATIVE SCHEDULING - Embodiments of a multi-transceiver mobile communication device and methods for negative scheduling are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. In some embodiments, a broadband wireless access network (BWAN) transceiver of a multi-transceiver mobile communication device may transmit a negative scheduling (NS) request frame that includes time-related QoS parameters to a BWAN base station to request one or more negative allocation (NA) periods. In response, the base station may transmit a NS management response frame to indicate when NA periods are to occur during subsequent BWAN frames. The BWAN base station may also transmit a subsequent NS response frame to update the configuration of the NA periods including an indication of when a subsequent NA period is to occur. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279512 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO TERMINAL APPARATUS - A wireless communication system comprises radio base station apparatuses each of which transmits an estimation pilot in advance for estimating the quality of a downlink communication after a spatial signal processing performed after a time unified among the radio base station apparatuses; and radio terminal apparatuses each of which receives the estimation pilot to determine the quality of the downlink communication, thereby reporting the determined downlink communication quality to the radio base station apparatus via an uplink channel. The estimation pilot is transmitted at the same time and frequency established among the radio base station apparatuses by use of the same directivity beam as used for transmitting the data after the unified time. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279513 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING SIGNAL - A sector transmitter maps a synchronization channel and a broadcast channel to be on a time axis adjacent to each other, and applies the same bandwidth and the same transmission diversity to the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel. A mobile station estimates a plurality of channel statuses for a plurality of sectors from a synchronization channel signal, and acquires broadcast channel information from a broadcast channel signal using the plurality of estimated channel statuses. As a result, the mobile station can receive a broadcast channel with high reception quality while having low complexity. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090279514 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY IN MESH NETWORK - An apparatus and method of transmission opportunity in a mesh network is disclosed. A beacon timing from a receiver MP is received. The beacon timing includes a beacon reception timing of a received beacon frame that is received by the receiver MP from a neighboring MP of the receiver MP. A transmission opportunity is determined in order not to be extended across the beacon reception timing. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090285187 | Optimized Estimation of Power for the Transport Format Selection of a UMTS Handset - The invention concerns a method for optimizing the Transport Format Combination (TFC) selection procedure processed by a user equipment UE in an uplink communication in a mobile telecommunication network, wherein the TFC procedure during the current TTI (Time Transport Interval) at instant t+1 is performed in function of:
| 11-19-2009 |
| 20090285188 | METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR OBTAINING CONNECTION FRAME NUMBER - A method, a communication system, and a device for obtaining a connection frame number (CFN) are provided to obtain the CFN under a situation of applying high speed package access (HSPA). The method includes the following steps. A downlink node synchronization request including radio network controller (RNC) time information is sent to a base station through a high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) frame protocol (FP). An uplink node synchronization response including base station time information sent from the base station through the HS-DSCH FP is received. A CFN is obtained according to a preset RNC frame number (FN), a preset frame offset, the RNC time information, and the base station time information. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090290558 | BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION IN AD HOC NETWORKS - A potentially interfering node updatable database associated with the MAC, in each node, contains a limited number of unique identification numbers (UNIDs) referring to nodes likely to interfere with the transmission of the node. Typically these UNIDs are one or two hop neighbours. In addition to the actual nodes, the database also contains unique ID numbers of dummy nodes. Practically, the node database does not distinguish between real or dummy nodes. Selecting a certain node to transmit at a certain TS is brought about by a “which node is to transmit in the next TS” (WINIT) function. This function takes into account all the UNIDs available in the UNID databases of the different nodes. When the WINIT selects a specific UNID to be active in the upcoming TS, the relevant MAC element in the respective node, invokes the transmission. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290559 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HARQ AUTONOMOUS RETRANSMISSIONS - A method and an apparatus for performing uplink hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) transmission in a burst are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may transmit a transmission burst over at least two consecutive transmission time intervals (TTIs) via a HARQ process configured for transmission burst. An E-DCH dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) power offset may be set to the transmission burst-specific E-DPCCH gain factor value. The WTRU may calculate a power of the E-DPCCH by dividing a conventional E-DPCCH power offset by a total number of TTIs in the transmission burst. The WTRU may transmit the E-DPCCH only during a first TTI of the transmission burst. The supported E-TFCs may be a second set of supported E-TFCs determined only for use with the transmission burst. The WTRU may determine the set of supported E-TFCs and the E-TFC for transmission based on a number of TTIs in the transmission burst. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090290560 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR UPLINK RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN TIME-SHARING CHANNEL MODE - A method for uplink resource allocation in a time-sharing channel mode is provided. The method includes the following steps. A base station accesses a network, and receives an uplink resource selection notification message from a neighboring base station, in which the uplink resource selection notification message carries information of uplink resources selected by the neighboring base station; and the base station initially accessing the network allocates uplink resources that do not overlap the uplink resources selected by the neighboring base station. A base station for uplink resource allocation in a time-sharing channel mode is also provided. By using such method and base station, different uplink resources are allocated to different base stations, so as to prevent possible conflict among one another, and avoid repeatedly transmitting the same signaling, thereby saving the resources. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090296665 | Method of Indicating Mobile Station Capability to a Network - An indication is sent from a mobile station to a network regarding the capability of the mobile station to receive or transmit on two or more carriers simultaneously. The network determines an ideal multi-carrier multi-slot capability of the mobile station from an existing capability indication for single carrier transmission mode of the mobile station; and the mobile station sends in an additional field an indication in respect of a reduction in number of time slots from the ideal multi-carrier multi-slot capability determined by the network. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296666 | MULTIPLEXING ARRANGEMENTS FOR MULTIPLE RECEIVE ANTENNAS - A method and apparatus processes a plurality of analog signals in a transceiver with multiple receive (Rx) antennas in a wireless communication system. By appropriate combining of the analog signals of each Rx antenna, this scheme allows a reduction in the number of the front end components, for example, filters, mixers and Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) devices. Subsequently, the signals are separated digitally by virtue of their unique code. The benefits associated with this scheme are at least threefold: reduced cost, area, and power consumption of a multiple antenna terminal. Additionally, proper parameter settings increase signal to Quantization Noise Ratio (SQNR) at the ADC output. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090296667 | Communication Method In Mobile Communication System, And Mobile Station And Base Station In The Same System - A scheduling method for transmitting an uplink signal from a mobile station to a base station comprises transmitting the uplink signal in a first scheduling mode in which the mobile station can transmit the uplink data without permission of the base station if an uplink communication state between the base station and the mobile station is higher than or equal to a predetermined quality; and transmitting the uplink signal in a second scheduling mode in which the permission is necessary for the mobile station transmitting the uplink data if the uplink communication state is lower than the predetermined quality. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090303968 | INCREASING CAPACITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Techniques to increase capacity in a wireless communications system. In an aspect, systematic non-transmission, or “blanking,” of minimal-rate frames transmitted in a communications system is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, eighth rate frames in a cdma2000 voice communications system are systematically substituted with null-rate frames carrying zero traffic bits. Provisions are nevertheless made for the transmission of certain designated as “critical” by, e.g., a vocoder. The receiver detects the presence of null rate or non-null rate transmissions and processes the received frames accordingly, including updating an outer loop power control only in response to non-null rate frames. Further techniques for changing the pilot transmission gating pattern to assist the receiver in detecting null rate frames are provided. In another aspect, early termination of a signal transmission over a wireless communications link is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a base station (BS) transmits power control groups (PCG's) for a frame over a forward link (FL) to a mobile station (MS) until accurate reception of the frame is acknowledged by the MS over a reverse link (RL), possibly before all PCG's of the frame are received over the FL. Possible ACK signaling methods are defined for channels associated with a cdma2000 wireless communications system. In another exemplary embodiment, techniques for reverse link early termination are also provided. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303969 | Apparatus and method for employing common control channel and broadcast channel in a broadband wireless communication system with frequency overlay - A broadband wireless communication system supporting frequency overlay is provided. Operations of a base station includes checking whether it is time to transmit a common control signal; switching positions of a first Common Control Channel and a second Common Control Channel applied to a previous transmission of the common control signal while mapping a common control signal to the first Common Control Channel and the second Common Control Channel positioned in different Frequency Assignments; and transmitting the common control signal via the first Common Control Channel and the second Common Control Channel that are switched. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090303970 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, SCHEDULING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system comprising: a holding unit that holds at least wireless resource allocation information on an opposite-direction communication link for use as information for deciding priority of wireless resource allocation to mobile stations, said opposite-direction communication link being a communication link in a direction opposite to a direction in which allocation priority is to be decided; and a scheduling unit that performs scheduling to allocate wireless resources with priority given to mobile stations, to which wireless resources are allocated on the opposite-direction communication link, using the wireless resource allocation information on the opposite-direction communication link. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090310571 | Medium Access Control in Industrial and Automotive Wireless with Combined Wired and Wireless Sensor Networks - An embodiment of the invention relates to a local area sensor network including a central unit configured to receive a resource allocation request from a priority network sensor in a reserved timeslot and in response to designate a shared timeslot allocation. The priority network sensor transmits a resource allocation request in a reserved timeslot, and the sensor transmits data in the allocated shared timeslot. A sensor network can be formed with multiple gateways that each communicate over wired and wireless portions of the network. The central unit communicates with the gateways over the wired portion of the network. Wireless nodes communicate wirelessly with the gateways. The central unit receives a plurality of link quality indicators from the gateways for respective wireless paths to the wireless sensors, and selects a gateway for relaying a message from the central unit to a wireless sensor based on the link quality indicators. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310572 | MAC layer timestamping approach for emerging wireless sensor platform and communication architecture - In the receiving side MAC layer timestamping approach, the MPDU structure is changed by adding an extra timestamping field. When a MPDU packet is generated, a captured receiving timestamp is written into the MPDU's timestamp field. The MPDU packet is then forwarded from the PHY to the MAC layer of the wireless sensor node. In the MAC layer, the receiving timestamp is further processed and inserted into a corresponding field of the time synchronization message, which is in turn transmitted to a Time Synchronization module. In the sending side MAC layer timestamping approach, the sending timestamp is captured immediately before the time synchronization message is written into TxFIFO. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310573 | DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL FOR AD-HOC NETWORKS - A distributed wireless medium access control protocol is disclosed. According to the disclosed wireless medium access control protocol the medium access time is partitioned into equal sized slots, and a predetermined number of the slots forming a superframe. The protocol defines beaconing devices and passive devices. Each beaconing device designates one of the slots in the superframe as its beacon medium access slot, and broadcasts during that beacon medium access slot a beacon frame to other devices in wireless range of that beaconing device. A beacon frame collision detection and resolution procedure, and a procedure for reserving access time for communication between devices are also disclosed. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090310574 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A DATA PACKET AND A METHOD OF ALLOCATING A CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A present invention is related to a method for transmitting a data packet in a wireless network. An exemplary method comprises requesting to allocate a bi-directional channel time block including a first channel time block for transmitting a specific data packet and a second channel time block for receiving a response to the specific data packet; transmitting the specific data packet through the first channel time block; and receiving the response to the specific data packet through the second channel time block, wherein the bi-directional channel time block is predetermined to be allocated in an unreserved region in a superframe. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090316664 | Method for Synchronizing PDCP Operations after RRC Connection Re-establishment in a Wireless Communication System and Related Apparatus Thereof - A method used in an E-UTRAN for synchronizing PDCP operations after a RRC connection re-establishment procedure with a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method includes: initiating an RRC reconfiguration procedure to resume all radio bearers other than a signaling radio bearer | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316665 | DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION SYNCHRONIZATION AND DATA BUFFER SIZING IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Method and apparatus are disclosed for calculating a target connection frame number (CFN) for a data frame in wireless communications. An update to an offset between the CFN and a radio access network frame number is computed. A target CFN variable is incremented in response to a received timer signal. The value of an update variable is checked to determine whether a new value of the offset has been received since a previous update to the offset. A new target CFN is calculated using a current target CFN and the new value of the offset on a condition that the new value of the offset has been received. The current target CFN is set equal to the new target CFN. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090316666 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A mobile station device transmits a random access preamble to a base station device and performs uplink timing alignment based on the synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response which the base station device transmits in response to the transmitted random access preamble, wherein in an uplink synchronous status, the mobile station device does not perform uplink timing alignment based on synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response, which is a response to a random access preamble whose preamble ID is randomly selected by the mobile station device. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090323642 | TRANSMITTER, RECEIVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL - A transmitter includes an amplitude adjustment unit multiplying an amplitude adjustment sequence value for adjusting amplitude with a synchronization channel transmitted from a base station for establishing synchronization with a mobile station. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20100002656 | OPPORTUNISTIC RELAY SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing opportunistic relay node communication based on scheduling of other communications in a wireless network. In particular, a relay node can maintain a backhaul link with an access point and an access link with a mobile device to facilitate communicating information therebetween. Time slots during which the backhaul link is active can be determined and avoided during scheduling access link communications with the mobile device. Furthermore, resource assignments from the access point to the mobile device can be monitored and decoded such that time slots associated therewith can also be determined and avoided. Thus, the relay node can communicate with mobile devices in time slots where the backhaul link is inactive and/or the mobile devices are not occupied communicating directly with the access point. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100002657 | Method and System for Generating Antenna Selection Signals in Wireless Networks - Embodiments of the invention describe a method for joint resource blocks assignment and antenna selection (AS) in a wireless communication network, the network comprising user equipment (UE), wherein the UE comprises a plurality of subsets of antennas, the UE is configured to transmit a sounding reference signal (SRS) from a subset of antennas at a time. The method transmits a first SRS from a first subset of antennas and a second SRS from a second subset of antennas. Upon receiving, in response to the transmitting of the first SRS and the second SRS, information related to an optimal subset of antennas, and information related to an optimal subset of resource blocks, the method transmits a data symbol from the optimal subset of antennas using the optimal resource block. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100008332 | Method for half-and full-duplex subscriber station operation in frequency division duplex systems - The present invention provides a novel framing structure that can be used to smoothly evolve a Time Division Duplex (TDD) wireless communications technology to a Frequency Division Duplex wireless communications technology. A method for establishing the start time of an uplink frame that is offset in relation to a downlink frame by an allocation start time is provided. In addition, methods of allocating downlink and uplink resources for half-duplex and full frequency division duplex operation with adequate provisions for transmit-receive and receive-transmit time gaps are also provided. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008333 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING SCHEDULING REFERENCE SIGNAL - A method of transmitting a scheduling reference signal (SRS) for uplink scheduling is provided. The method includes transmitting a SRS on a first partial SRS transmission band in a first transmitting time, and transmitting the SRS on a second partial SRS transmission band in a second transmitting time, wherein the first and the second partial SRS transmission bands are parts of a full SRS transmission band and have exclusive positions with each other in the full SRS transmission band, the full SRS transmission band selected for uplink scheduling, the full SRS transmission band comprising a plurality of partial SRS transmission bands. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008334 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A radio communication device includes a communication data selection unit for selecting from the received radio communication data containing communication time reservation request information in which a time slot for performing data transmission source radio communication device is described and a communication information analysis unit for extracting an identifier of the source radio communication device and the data transmission reservation time slot from the communication time reservation request information in the radio communication data. When the received radio communication data is addressed to the local device, a communication/response information generation unit correlates the identifier to the reservation time slot, records them in a communication reservation table, and generates communication time reservation response information including information of the reservation time slot. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100008335 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - As a first slot transmitting notification from an electronic device to a host device, a second slot transmitting a coupling request and a third slot transmitting notification except the coupling request are provided, and whether or not to provide the second slot may be controlled. Accordingly, it makes it possible to control a period when the second slot is provided, namely a period when the coupling request is performed, prevent the host device and the electronic device from being coupled erroneously by the unintended coupling request, and couple the host device being a communication object and the electronic device appropriately. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100014488 | Mobile Communication System and Base Station Device - In a base station device ( | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014489 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIRECTIONAL VIRTUAL SENSING RANDOM ACCESS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for wireless communication in a wireless network is provided. One implementation involves a requesting wireless station directionally transmitting a request to a coordinator for access to a communication channel; the request packet includes a field indicating the length of the desired reservation period; and upon successfully receiving the request from the wireless station, the coordinator reserving a channel time period for data transmission by the requesting wireless station, and at least pseudo-omni-directionally broadcasting a packet to all wireless stations in the network indicating the reservation. All other stations refrain from contending the channel during the reserved channel time period. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100014490 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - One aspect of the present invention relates to a mobile station apparatus, including: a first time multiplexing unit configured to time multiplex an uplink CQI measurement pilot channel for measuring an uplink CQI and an uplink L1/L2 control channel; a second time multiplexing unit configured to time multiplex a shared data channel and a shared data channel demodulation reference signal for demodulating the shared data channel; and a TTI multiplexing unit configured to time multiplex a CQI measurement reference signal and a data transmission signal into different TTIs, the CQI measurement reference signal resulting from the time multiplexing of the uplink CQI measurement pilot channel and the uplink L1/L2 control channel, the data transmission signal resulting from the time multiplexing of the shared data channel and the shared data channel demodulation reference signal. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100020770 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BANDWIDTH RESERVATION PROTOCOL FOR SPATIAL REUSE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for providing spatial reuse in a wireless network for communicating compressed and uncompressed audio/video is disclosed. A bandwidth reservation request for data communication with a receiver to a coordinator is transmitted. A first response indicating availability of the receiver for the data communication is received. A channel is listened to by a station for channel busy indication (CBI) messages transmitted by other stations in the wireless network. A local channel occupation report comprising data indicative of one or more time periods during which one or more other stations in the wireless network are scheduled to transmit data messages is transmitted to the coordinator. A second response comprising data indicative of one or more allocated channel time slots is received. Audio and/or video (A/V) data is transmitted to the receiver during the allocated channel time slots. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020771 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING PILOT POLLUTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for mitigating pilot pollution in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, pilot pollution may be mitigated by reducing density and/or transmit power of common pilots whenever possible. A cell may send a common pilot at a first density and a first transmit power level during a first time period and may send the common pilot at a second density and a second transmit power level during a second time period. The second density may be lower than the first density and/or the second transmit power level may be lower than the first transmit power level. Lower density may be achieved by sending the common pilot less frequently, on fewer subcarriers, and/or from fewer antennas. The cell may determine whether to reduce the density and/or transmit power of the common pilot based on network loading, SINRs of terminals, etc. In another aspect, pilot pollution may be mitigated by performing pilot cancellation at a terminal. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100020772 | Packet transmission scheduling technique - A packet data transmission method of the HSDPA system includes collecting information on the quality of physical channels, a status of the MAC buffer, the priority level of data, the delay of data, and the like, determining the transmission order of data and the size of a data block to be transmitted based on the collected information, and transmitting the data block through the physical layer according to the order of transmissions. Since the HSDPA scheduler takes into account the delay of data, the quality of real-time services can be improved. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100027512 | TRANSMITTING DEVICE, RECEIVING DEVICE, AND METHOD USED IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM EMPLOYING OFDM - A transmitting device includes a transmission signal generating unit configured to generate a transmission signal by inverse-Fourier-transforming reference signals and data signals mapped to subcarriers and a transmitting unit configured to wirelessly transmit the transmission signal. In the transmitting device, a total power level allocated to signals to be transmitted in a time slot is equal to a total power level allocated to signals to be transmitted in any other time slot, and a power density per unit bandwidth of the reference signals is greater than a power density per unit bandwidth of the data signals. This configuration makes it possible to equalize the total transmission power level of all time slots and thereby to improve the power amplification efficiency. Also, with this configuration, since the reference signals are transmitted with a higher power than that for other signals, it is possible to improve the accuracy of channel estimation. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100040028 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATION OF PROCEDURES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The described apparatus and methods may include a controller configured to receive data on a logical channel, determine that a first grant is not available during a first time transmission interval, determine whether to generate at least one of a buffer status report (BSR), a scheduling request (SR), and a random access channel (RACH) procedure based on an amount of the received data, determine that a second grant is available during a second time transmission interval, and transmit the received data during the second time transmission interval without generating the BSR, the SR, and the RACH procedure when the amount of the received data is less than or equal to the size of the grant. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100046482 | MULTI-CHANNEL SDMA - Certain embodiments provide a method for scheduling packet transmissions in a multi-channel wireless communications system. The method generally includes requesting, from a plurality of wireless network nodes, an identification of channels available for communicating with the wireless network nodes, receiving an identification of channels available for communicating with the wireless network nodes, determining a schedule for packet transmission for the wireless network nodes based on the identification of channels, and communicating the schedule to the wireless network nodes. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100054213 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIRECT RELIABLE LINK ACCESS - A wireless communication device and a method to establish a protected time for communication over a direct link between two stations of the same network. The method includes configuring at least one antenna for a direct link establishment, switching to a listening mode and waiting for a channel time allocation (CTA) for transmission. After receiving the CTA a source station sends a first frame to a destination station based on a channel time allocation value and receive a second frame from the destination station to complete an establishment the CTA. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100054214 | ACCESS POINT, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - An access point for establishing wireless connection with one or more wireless communication stations which can perform intermittent reception operation, based on a packet transmission system which allocates wireless bands by CSMA/CA, has: unit for describing, in a same packet or in respective packets, buffering information on a downlink packet addressed to a subordinate wireless communication station currently in an intermittent reception state, and transmission prohibition period information indicating a period where transmission from the subordinate wireless communication station is prohibited; unit for transmitting the instruction described packet, in which the description has been made, to the subordinate wireless communication station; unit for making a state of the access point transit to a Doze state immediately after the instruction described packet is transmitted, or when a predetermined number of downlink packets are transmitted; and unit for making a state of the access point transit to an Awake state when the transmission prohibition period elapses from the time of transmission of the packet in which the prohibition period information is described. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100061346 | CHANNEL QUALITY FEEDBACK SIGNAL FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - According to an example embodiment, a method may include broadcasting, in a downlink direction to one or more mobile stations in a wireless network, a message that includes a channel quality threshold, and receiving a signal from at least one of the one or more mobile stations, the signal being received in an uplink direction on one or more resource blocks that have a channel quality, as measured by one of the one or more mobile station in a downlink direction, that is greater than or equal to the channel quality threshold. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061347 | SYNCHRONIZATION MECHANISM FOR ALLOWING COEXISTENCE OF NODES IN THE SAME FREQUENCY BAND - Certain aspects provide a technique for managing transmissions in a wireless network. The technique generally provides for an access terminal to transmit synchronization packets containing timing information regarding an existing piconet. The synchronization packets may contain an indication of resources of the piconet allocated to the access terminal by an access point. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100061348 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SYSTEM SCHEDULER - Briefly, according to embodiments of the invention, there is provided a wireless communication system and a method to receive by a base station from a first mobile station a first chain of data symbols transmitted by at least two antennas and having a first transmit diversity, to receive from a second mobile station a second chain of data symbols transmitted by at least two antennas and having a second transmit diversity. Both first and second chains of data symbols are transmitted from the first and second mobile stations at the same time, are modulated according to an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) scheme and encoded by a space time block codes scheme. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100067496 | METHODS FOR CONTROLLING AN UPLINK SIGNAL TRANSMISSION POWER AND COMMUNICATION DEVICES - In an embodiment, a method for controlling an uplink signal transmission power in a communication device is provided. The method may include receiving a first message in a control channel modification time period, the first message including scheduling information about the timing of the transmission of a second message, the second message including an uplink signal transmission power related information, which will be transmitted by another communication device in the same control channel modification time period, controlling the communication device to receive the second message in accordance with the scheduling information, and controlling the uplink signal transmission power, which is used by the communication device for transmitting signals, depending on the uplink signal transmission power related information. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067497 | METHOD FOR MAINTAINING SYNCHRONISATION IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for maintaining synchronization of a user terminal (UE) in a radio communication system is proposed, wherein resources reserved for transmissions of random access signals are divided into at least one first portion for contention-based communication, and at least one second portion of said resources for contention-free communication, and wherein a user terminal (UE) is assigned at least one resource of the portion assigned to the contention-free communication, for transmitting signals for maintaining synchronization. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067498 | METHOD FOR RE-DIRECTION OF UPLINK ACCESS - A method for prompt re-direction of uplink access of a specific user equipment is disclosed. For initial random access to a network, if a user equipment transmits a preamble, which includes information related to random access, to a network node, the network node sends grant/rejection information of the preamble and re-direction information as a response message to the preamble. In comparison with the related art which controls a rush of an access request of the user equipment through a second response message from the network node, since the rush of an access request is controlled by a first response message in the present invention, it is possible to promptly deal with abnormal communication status, thereby improving communication efficiency. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067499 | RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT - Radio communication equipment performs radio communication with a first radio terminal group in a first period by using a frequency commonly for use by an adjacent base station, and with a second radio terminal group in a second period by using a frequency not commonly for use by the adjacent base station. The radio communication equipment includes a control unit to adjust time allocation of the first period and the second period; and a radio communication unit to perform radio communication with the first radio terminal group and the second radio terminal group according to the time allocation adjusted by the control unit. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067500 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING COMMON PHYSICAL CHANNEL - The present invention relates to a common channel generating method and device in a downlink. Receiving performance by the mobile station is improved by efficiently allocating the resource and generating the common channel in the downlink. Also, transmission diversity applied to the number of transmit antennas of the base station and the common channel can be easily detected, thereby acquiring the mobile station's initial process. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067501 | Faint Connectivity Session Setup - A method for communicating is provided. The method comprises communicating regarding transmission time interval (TTI) bundling related to one or more random access (RA) messages. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100067502 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DERIVING TRANSMISSION TIMING OF A DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN SUPPORT OF ENHANCED UPLINK OPERATION - A remote station for wireless communication is disclosed. The remote station includes a transmitter configured to transmit packet data on an uplink channel and a receiver. The receiver is configured to receive a first frame having a downlink dedicated physical channel, the first frame being defined by a first propagation delay and a first time offset relative to a reference timing based on a common control physical channel and receive a second frame having a downlink dedicated control channel responsive to the packet data received by a base station, a beginning of the second frame being defined by a second propagation delay and a second time offset from the reference timing, the second time offset being a function of the first time offset. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100074230 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile station is configured to send a base station a buffer status report explicitly indicating that the amount of a transmission signal in a buffer of the mobile station has become zero. This configuration makes it possible to efficiently allocate radio resources of an uplink shared channel and thereby to increase uplink capacity. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074231 | METHOD AND RELATED DEVICE OF SCHEDULING REQUEST BEHAVIOR IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of scheduling request (SR) behavior for a UE configured with semi-persistent scheduling in a wireless communication system includes triggering an SR when the UE does not have an uplink resource allocated for a current transmission time interval, and controlling the triggered SR to remain pending and to be repeated until uplink resources are granted for a new transmission. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074232 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method of communication between a mobile station and a base station in a mobile communication system of IMT-2000 communication network basis, which is suitable for effective transmission of various multimedia information within a given channel capacity, the method including the steps of (1) when a mobile station receives a data transmission request, providing one portion of a period of a data frame with regular number and arrangement of down link slots and up link slots and the other portion of the data frame with irregular number and arrangement of down link slots or/and up link slots depending on characteristics and amount of subscriber data to be transmitted, (2) determining a transmission type according to which a communication is executed using a competition period for determining priorities of the subscriber data, a reservation period for making a reservation for time slots for use in transmission of the subscriber data, and an assignment period for assigning a memory period according to an amount of the subscriber data, which periods are selectively and respectively included in the one portion of the data frame and in the other portion of the data frame, and (3) providing the data frame according to the transmission type and transmitting to the base station. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100074233 | Packet transmission scheduling technique - A packet data transmission method of the HSDPA system includes collecting information on the quality of physical channels, a status of the MAC buffer, the priority level of data, the delay of data, and the like, determining the transmission order of data and the size of a data block to be transmitted based on the collected information, and transmitting the data block through the physical layer according to the order of transmissions. Since the HSDPA scheduler takes into account the delay of data, the quality of real-time services can be improved. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100080195 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system including a plurality of base stations includes a radio communicator for communicating with mobile terminal devices with a plurality of carriers, and a communication controller for changing radio field intensity of the radio communicator; and a management device including: a storage for storing information of each of the base stations, the information including time slots and a number of registration requests from the mobile terminal devices in each communication area of the base station in accordance with the time slots, and an instructor for instructing to change radio field intensity of the plurality of carriers to the radio communicator in the base stations on the bases of the stored information in the storage when the number of the registration requests in the time slot exceed a specified predetermined threshold value. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100080196 | RSVP/SBM BASED UP-STREAM SESSION SETUP, MODIFICATION, AND TEARDOWN FOR QOS-DRIVEN WIRELESS LANS - A method and system is disclosed for setting up, modifying and tearing down an up-stream communication session in a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), so that the communication session has a defined Quality of Service (QoS). Regarding setting up an up-stream communication session, a first Path message and a first Resv message (Path/Resv message) of a RSVP protocol are detected at a designated subnet bandwidth manager (DSBM) in a station having a point coordinator (PC). The first Resv message originates from a RSVP agent of a host outside the BSS, and is a request for setting up an up-stream session between a source non-PC station in the BSS and the PC station. A QoS parameter set and a classifier from the first Path/Resv message for the session are extracted at the DSBM. The DSBM determines whether to admit the up-stream session to the network based on the QoS parameter set defining the session and a channel status report on a medium access control (MAC) sublayer of the BSS. When the up-stream session is admitted, a QoS management entity (QME) of the PC station sets up a virtual up-stream (VUS) between the source non-PC station and the PC station for transporting the up-stream session traffic. The DSBM is part of the QME in the PC station. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100085945 | NETWORK STATION IDENTIFIERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system allowing transmission of identifiers of network stations, the system including: a first network station, such as a femto cell basestation, with an identifier and a first transmission coverage area; a second network station, such as a macro cell basestation, with an identifier and a second transmission coverage area, which is larger than and overlaps with the first transmission coverage area; and storage means storing a unit of time defined in the system, along with a first ID window defined within the unit of time allocated to the first network station for transmission of its own identifier and a subsequent second ID window defined within the unit of time allocated for transmission of the second network station identifier. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100085946 | ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A network includes an access point and a station. The station transmits to the access point a current clear-to-send packet at a current time during a current exchange. The transmission is based on success or failure of a previous exchange during which a previous clear-to-send packet was transmitted at a previous time. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100091741 | WiFi system and method with high-speed mobile voice and video data communication - A WiFi system with high-speed mobile voice and video data communication includes a plurality of mobile devices and a WiFi base station connected to a WiFi network. The WiFi base station transmits and receives packets to/from a mobile device within a time frame. The time frame is repeated at a predetermined period of time and divided into a plurality of variable-size time slots, each slot being assigned to a mobile device. The WiFi base station is based on an IEEE 802.11 standard to transmit/receive the packets respectively. Accordingly, all the WiFi base stations can use a single channel such that the handover between the WiFi base stations can be performed at high speed. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091742 | CORRELATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING SYNCHRONIZATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Provides is a correlation method for acquiring a synchronization in a wireless local area network (WLAN). In the correlation method, an auto-correlation value is measured in a receive (RX) signal based on the WLAN standard by use of a successive partial short preambles. A time point when the auto-correlation value becomes smaller than a predetermined threshold value is detected. A cross-correlation value for the successive partial short preambles is measured from the time point when the auto-correlation value becomes smaller than the predetermined threshold value. A time point when the cross-correlation value becomes maximum is determined as a reference time point for synchronization acquisition. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100091743 | Preparation Phase for Switching Between Su-MIMO and MU-MIMO - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for switching between different modes in a communications network. The network comprises a number of transmit and a number of receive antennas, said modes comprising a single user mode and a multiple user mode. The method including the steps of: transmitting reference signals or predetermined sequences corresponding to both said modes comprising respective weighting matrices for said modes during a preparation phase, which comprises of one or more transmission time intervals (TTI), transmitting on a common channel, signalling information indicating start and duration of said preparation phase to all receiving equipments in a reception area. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100098031 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product Providing Initial Cell Acquisition and Pilot Sequence Detection - Disclosed herein are apparatus, methods and computer program products for performing cell acquisition and pilot sequence detection in a cellular telecommunications system such as, for example, an OFDM system. In the apparatus, methods and computer program products, a primary synchronization channel sequence and a secondary synchronization channel sequence are transmitted by a base station in a sub-frame of an OFDM downlink frame. In one embodiment, the primary synchronization channel sequence, secondary synchronization channel sequence, and system information are mapped to a plurality of sub-carriers in an FDM signal. At the user equipment, coarse synchronization is performed during cell acquisition by performing a cross correlation between the signal and a reference primary synchronization channel sequence stored in a memory of the user equipment. The coarse synchronization performed using the primary synchronization channel sequence is improved by performing a cross correlation between the signal and a reference secondary synchronization channel sequence stored in a memory of the user equipment. Identification of a pilot sequence for channel estimation purposes is performed by detecting two cyclically invariant pairs of secondary synchronization channel sequences over two consecutive frames of the signal. The cyclically invariant pair of secondary synchronization channel sequences are selected from a set of orthogonal sequences and identify a particular pilot sequence incorporated in the signal. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100098032 | LOCAL AND WIDE-AREA TRANSMISSIONS IN A WIRELESS BROADCAST NETWORK - To broadcast different types of transmission having different tiers of coverage in a wireless broadcast network, each base station processes data for a wide-area transmission in accordance with a first mode (or coding and modulation scheme) to generate data symbols for the wide-area transmission and processes data for a local transmission in accordance with a second mode to generate data symbols for the local transmission. The first and second modes are selected based on the desired coverage for wide-area and local transmissions, respectively. The base station also generates pilots and overhead information for local and wide-area transmissions. The data, pilots, and overhead information for local and wide-area transmissions are multiplexed onto their transmission spans, which may be different sets of frequency subbands, different time segments, or different groups of subbands in different time segments. More than two different types of transmission may also be multiplexed and broadcast. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100103908 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SHARING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM RESOURCES - A method for accessing a reverse channel for communication from a remote unit to a base station is disclosed. The method includes waiting a random period of time in response to determining that the reverse channel is available at a first time. The method also includes monitoring a forward channel after expiration of the random period of time to determine whether the reverse channel is available at a second time. The method further includes transmitting a first portion of data on the reverse channel in response to determining that the reverse channel is available at the second time. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100111047 | Techniques to support multiple radio-access technologies - Techniques to permit scheduling of mixed radio access technologies. In some cases, a first radio access technology mode of a base station is scheduled during a first time region and a second radio access technology mode of a base station is scheduled during a sleep mode of the first radio access technology mode. In some cases, a first radio access technology mode of a base station is scheduled during a first time region and a second radio access technology mode of a base station is scheduled during an unused portion of the first time region. In some cases, a femto-base station is scheduled to snoop for local mobile stations during a sleep mode. Inactive regions of mobile stations are scheduled during a portion of sleep modes of the radio access technology modes. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111048 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING A BEACON SLOT USING A BEACON TABLE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK (WPAN) AND WPAN DEVICE - The present invention relates to a method in which each device sets its own beacon slot by using beacon slot information of its neighbors and its neighbors' neighbors in a WPAN. In the method, beacon slot information of the neighbors and the neighbors' neighbors is received from neighbor devices. The beacon slots of the neighbors and the neighbors' neighbors are decided as beacon slots to avoid. The beacon slot of the WPAN device of the present invention is set among beacon slots of the beacon-only period, except for the beacon slots decided as beacon slots to avoid. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100111049 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING REGISTRATION OF ENDPOINT DEVICES THROUGH PROVISIONING - A method and apparatus for enabling registration of an endpoint device that is incapable of supporting a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) based Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) registration are disclosed. For example, the method performs a static registration of the endpoint device in a plurality network elements associated with an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network by provisioning that is initiated by a service provider of the IMS network. The method processes an originating call request or a terminating call request associated with the endpoint device by an Application Server (AS) using the static registration, wherein the application server is one of the plurality network elements. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100118834 | DEVICE BEACON FOR COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT FOR PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless communication device transmits a device beacon in accordance with a system timing of a wireless wide area network (WWAN). For one example, the beacon is transmitted relative to WWAN uplink channels of the time-frequency space of the uplink WWAN channel assignment. In response to the reception of the device beacon by another wireless communication device, a peer to peer communication session is established. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118835 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of wireless communications is provided. The method includes transmitting a channel time allocation request from a first device to a second device, wherein the channel time allocation request comprises a list of devices to be trained by the first device; receiving a channel time allocation granted by the second device; and transmitting, from the first device, at least one training packet to at least one device in the list of devices to be trained during the channel time allocation granted by the second device. An apparatus for performing the method is also disclosed. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118836 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System - The present invention relates to a method for sending reserved sub-carriers to a UE for the purpose of reducing peak to average power ratio (PAPR) of the transmitted signal to ensure sufficient quality of the modulated signal to achieve high data rate, including the steps of sending the information related to dynamic activation and deactivation of reserved sub-carriers on a common channel, which is readable for all UEs in idle and in connected mode; dynamically activating the transmission of the reserved sub-carriers in a cell when high modulation quality is to be maintained; dynamically deactivating the transmission of the reserved sub-carriers in a cell when high modulation quality is not required. The invention furthermore relates to a radio base station and a UE relating to said method. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118837 | USING SYNCHRONIZATION FRAMES FOR MESH NETWORKING WITH PICONETS - Certain aspects provide a technique for managing transmissions in a wireless network. The technique generally provides for an access terminal to transmit synchronization packets containing timing information regarding an existing piconet. The synchronization packets may contain an indication of resources of the piconet allocated to the access terminal by an access point. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118838 | Heterogeneous back-off mechanism to decrease latency in mobile IP telephony - A heterogeneous back-off algorithm wherein latency-intolerant messages follow a linear back-off and other messages follow an exponential back-off protocol is disclosed. Typically exponential back-off techniques are used to schedule retransmissions to increase the probability of successful transmission in temporally high contention scenarios. However, exponential back-off can create an exponential increase in the transmit latency. For transmitting latency-intolerant messages like handoff messages large latency is not acceptable therefore a heterogeneous back-off algorithm using both back-off protocols is proposed. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118839 | CONVEYING INFORMATION THROUGH PHASE OFFSET ON PSS RELATIVE TO DL-RS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate conveying information utilizing a constant phase offset on Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS). In general, the subject innovation can employ a fixed set of beams and phases in which a PSS and a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) can be transmitted with the fixed set of beams and phases. Furthermore, the phase offset for PSS and SSS can be the same such that legacy user equipment is unaffected or aware of such transmissions. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100118840 | PILOT ARRANGEMENT METHOD IN MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER ADOPTING SAME - A pilot arrangement method in a mobile radio communication system by which, in order to avoid a problem that poor CQI accuracy affects the scheduling of channel arrangement to cause the throughput to be deteriorated, a working frequency band is divided into a plurality of predetermined bands and time division multiplexing is performed. A known pilot symbol is inserted into the predetermined frequency bands at predetermined reference intervals. Furthermore, the known pilot symbol is inserted into at least one of the predetermined frequency bands at smaller intervals than the predetermined reference intervals and arranged. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100124205 | Distributed adaptive scheduling of communications among nodes in a mobile ad hoc network - Communications in a mobile network are scheduled by defining reservation frames having time slots during which network nodes can transmit certain traffic loads while avoiding interference. The nodes maintain maps that identify the slots as either free or reserved based on each node's existing reservations, and reservation information the node receives from neighboring nodes. A node wishing to transmit traffic determines the number of slots required to carry the traffic, selects a first set of slots from among those identified in its maps as free, and transmits a reservation initiation message (RIM) that identifies the first set of slots. Nodes receiving the RIM determine which, if any, of the first set of slots are already reserved based on their own maps, and transmit counter reservation initiation messages (CRIMs) if any slots are reserved. The CRIMs also identify those slots that the CRIM transmitting nodes determine to be currently free. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124206 | TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXED PILOT SIGNAL FOR INTEGRATED MOBILE BROADCASTS - A pilot channel signal for time-division multiplexing with one or more traffic channel signals in a broadcast/multi-cast signal and for code-division multiplexing with a continuously transmitted pilot channel signal is described. In an exemplary method for transmitting a broadcast/multicast signal, a pilot symbol sequence is obtained for each slot of one or more frames of the broadcast/multicast signal, so that the pilot symbol sequence varies for each slot of a given frame. The pilot symbol sequence for each slot is spread with a channelization code, and the spread pilot symbol sequence for each slot is scrambled, using a scrambling code, to form a first pilot channel signal. The first pilot channel signal is transmitted so that it is time-division multiplexed with one or more traffic channel signals transmitted during each slot and code-division multiplexed with a second pilot channel signal transmitted during all slots of the one or more frames. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124207 | Distributed medium access control (DMAC) for Mobile Ad Hoc networks - Message or traffic data is transmitted from a given radio or node for reception by one or more other nodes in a communications network, by arranging the node for transmitting the data according to a selected one of a number of different medium access protocols. The medium access protocol selected for a given message or traffic is determined according to one or more of (a) the size of the traffic, (b) the priority of the traffic, (c) the periodicity of the traffic, and (d) whether the traffic is broadcast or unicast to the other nodes in the network. Each radio includes one or more processor and memory modules configured to output messages or traffic for transmission from the radio according to the selected medium access protocol. By using distributed scheduling and traffic control to protect against hidden nodes, the radios can maintain agile portability in tactical urban environments. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100124208 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CALLING TERMINAL - A wireless communication system, including:
| 05-20-2010 |
| 20100128700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO IMPLEMENT SYNCHRONOUS CHANNEL TIMING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A system and method to implement synchronous channel timing are disclosed. The method comprises establishing a session time interval. In addition, the method comprises establishing a first time interval within the session time interval for transmitting a first data packet. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100135256 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING MULTIPLE RADIO COMMUNICATION PERIODS - A method for allocating multiple radio communication periods to an MS supporting co-existence mode is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a co-existence mode request message to a BS by the MS, receiving information about the position of a start frame for the co-existence mode by a co-existence mode response message as a response to the co-existence mode request message from the BS by the MS, and receiving information about an allocated Wi-Fi beacon reception period by an unsolicited co-existence mode response message in the start frame from the BS by the MS. A frame allocation pattern for allocating periods for communications with a Bluetooth or Wi-Fi system using a frequency band adjacent to that of an IEEE 802.16m system can be provided according to an IEEE 802.16m frame structure, and an MS with multiple radio interfaces can communicate with each system reliably, while minimizing interference between systems. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135257 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD - A base station communicating with a mobile station in a radio communication system by using OFDM for downlink is disclosed. The base station includes a sequence selecting unit configured to select multiple synchronization signal sequences; a synchronization signal generating unit configured to generate a secondary synchronization channel based on a part of the selected synchronization signal sequences and another part of the selected synchronization signal sequences; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit the secondary synchronization channel. The secondary synchronization channel is used to detect cell-specific information. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135258 | WIRELESS HIGH-DATE RATE COMMUNICATIONS - A base station apparatus for increasing the throughput of a packetized cellular data network is provided. The base station apparatus includes an orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) encoder and a time division multiplexer. The OFDM encoder is configured to encode a plurality of data streams into a corresponding plurality of OFDM tones, where one of the corresponding plurality of OFDM tones includes an OFDM preamble tone that indicates a mapping of remaining OFDM tones within the plurality of OFDM tones to one or more of a plurality of mobile stations. The time division multiplexer is operatively coupled to the OFDM encoder, and is configured to time multiplex a plurality of streams over a forward link channel for receipt by the plurality of mobile stations, where the corresponding plurality of OFDM tones are encoded as one of the plurality of streams. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135259 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGING COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN SOURCE DEVICES AND SINK DEVICES - Provided is a method of changing a communication link between source devices and sink devices. The method includes in a first downlink period, broadcasting an uplink period allocation message to the sink devices and passive source devices by an active source device, which establishes a communication link with a primary sink device from among the sink devices; during a first uplink period, broadcasting by a primary passive source device a link set message for establishing a communication link with the primary sink device to all the source devices in the network; during a second downlink period, relaying the link set message to all the sink devices in the network, wherein the link set message is relayed by the active source device; and during a second uplink period, establishing a communication link between the primary sink device and the primary passive source device by the primary sink device. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100135260 | Resource Allocation Method In Wireless Base Station Device, And Wireless Base Station Device - A wireless resource allocation method, including classifying a plurality of wireless terminal devices into a first group and a second group according to wireless communication quality; and performing allocation, such that transmission time period allocated to wireless terminal device having the best wireless communication quality from among the wireless terminal devices belonging to the first group, and transmission time period allocated to the wireless terminal device having the best wireless communication quality from among the wireless terminal devices belonging to the second group, are temporally in closest proximity or overlap. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100142491 | Multi-Slot Packet Data Transfer Method - A multislot packet data transfer method ( | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142492 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPOSING A SET OF CELLS IN A RADIO NETWORK - The invention proposes a method for enabling a composing of a set of cells within a coverage area of a radio access network within which the same information is transmitted time synchronously using a modulation and coding scheme common for the cells of the set. The proposed method comprises the following steps performed by a mobile station connectable to the radio access network: identifying one or more pilot signals from respective one or more cells monitored by the mobile station, determining signal and interference contributions from the one or more monitored cells with regard to a particular set of cells, reporting the determined signal and interference contributions towards a network node performing the composition of the set of cells. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142493 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - The present invention eliminates a transmission-waiting operation which is unnecessary while accommodating a prioritized traffic. Although a communication station enters a transmission-disallowed state in response to detection of a signal addressed to another station in accordance with medium access control based on CSMA, if the communication station receives a frame transmitted with priority to a local station during the transmission waiting, it cancels the transmission-disallowed state, sends back a frame responding the frame transmitted with priority and effectively operates a transmission prioritized period. The communication station starts a search procedure to perform a processing of evading duplication of the transmission prioritized periods if it judges a possibility of a problem occurring in a time zone in which reception with priority is possible. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100142494 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING A HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROCEDURE IN THE TRANSITION OF TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL BUNDLING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of improving a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) procedure in the transition of transmission time interval (TTI) bundling for a MAC layer of a user equipment in a wireless communication system, the method including activating TTI bundling upon receiving a bundling activation command, and using a first number of unused HARQ processes in the first round trip time after TTI bundling is activated to continue the first number of unfinished HARQ processes before TTI bundling is activated. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100150113 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTI-BAND SCHEDULING - A multi-band scheduling method determines frequency bands for each of a plurality of frames existing in a single session queue from among a plurality of frequency bands based on data characteristics of each of the plurality of frames. In particular, the multi-band scheduling method may assign a frame with a high significance to a frequency band having a superior channel state, thereby increasing communication reliability. Also, a broadcasting service system may use the multi-band scheduling method to effectively provide the broadcasting services. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150114 | APPARATUS AND METHOD TO ALLOCATE COMMUNICATION RESOURCES FOR AN APERIODIC DATA PACKET IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Apparatus and methods for allocating communication resources for an aperiodic data packet in a communication system. A transmission time interval for an aperiodic data packet including a channel quality indicator report is allocated during at least one of a first transmission time interval and a second transmission time interval in an uplink scheduling window in accordance with an uplink scheduling grant by a network entity, and a message is assembled including said aperiodic data packet for transmission to said network entity during said at least one of said first transmission time interval and said second transmission time interval. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100150115 | WIRELESS USB HOST AND CHANNEL TIME ALLOCATION METHOD - A wireless universal serial bus (WUSB) host is configured to execute WUSB communication with at least one WUSB device. The WUSB host includes a transmitter, a receiver, an analyzer, an adaptive channel time allocation (CTA) setting unit, and a controller. The transmitter is configured to broadcast an initial control packet to the at least one WUSB device, where the control packet includes CTA information generated for the at least one WUSB device. The receiver is configured to receive a data packet from the at least one WUSB device in a packet receiving period indicated by the CTA information included in the control packet. The analyzer is configured to analyze at least one data packet received by the receiver and to determine whether the data packet has been normally received. The adaptive CTA setting unit is configured to adaptively determine, for each of the at least one WUSB device, an optimal packet receiving period in which the analyzer has determined that the data packet has been normally received, and to set the CTA information generated for the at least one WUSB device based on the optimal packet receiving period. The controller configured to generate a subsequent control packet including the CTA information set by the adaptive CTA setting unit | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100157952 | Dynamic CTA adjustment across superframes in a wireless network - In a wireless communications network, various embodiments of the invention provide a technique for requesting an extension or truncation of the previously assigned channel time allocation (CTA), and extending that extension or truncation across multiple superframes without having to make further requests. The request may be made by transmitting an Information Element (IE) that indicates how many superframes the request applies to. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157953 | CONTINUOUS PACKET CONNECTIVITY (CPC) SCHEDULER - A base station establishes a data channel in an uplink between the base station and a user equipment, establishes a control channel in the uplink between the base station and the user equipment, and determines a gating configuration associated with the control channel. The base station also transmits the gating configuration to the user equipment, receives a gated control signal, via the control channel, based on the gating configuration, and synchronizes time slots for signal bursts associated with the gated control signal and time slots for data packets associated with the data channel. The base station further schedules transmissions of the data packets based on the synchronized time slots, generates an absolute grant based on the scheduled transmissions of the data packets, and transmits the absolute grant to the user equipment. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157954 | Multicarrier Wireless Communication Method and Wireless Communication Apparatus - In the wireless communication apparatus of the present invention, channels which are used by a plurality of radio units | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157955 | Efficient Formats of Beacon, Announcement, and Beamforming Training Frames - A method includes generating a first data unit to be transmitted during a first time period to one or several stations assumed to be beamformed, including determining a time interval that separates the first time period from a second time period, such that a second data unit is transmitted during the second time period to one or several stations assumed to be beamformed, and generating a parameter indicative of the time interval, such that the first data unit includes the parameter. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157956 | RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND TRANSMITTING POWER CONTROL METHOD - Radio network controller includes a propagation delay acquisition part for acquiring a measurement value of a round-trip time between the base station device and the radio terminal, an offset acquisition part for acquiring an offset value indicating a delay at which the base station device transmits the information of transmitting power control to the radio terminal, from a reference timing, a channelization format determination part for determining the channel identification spread code transmitted to the base station device based on the measurement value of the round-trip time and the offset value acquired by the offset acquisition part, and a slot format determination part for determining the time slot information transmitted to the base station device based on the measurement value of the round-trip time and the offset value. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100157957 | Method and Apparatus for Achieving System Acquisition and Other Signaling Purposes Using the Preamble in an OFDM Based Communications System - In the system acquisition process system information is non-coherently detected using correlation of reconstructed and received preamble signals, such as the primary broadcast control channel (PBCCH) and the acquisition pilots (TDM | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100172330 | METHOD FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Provided is a method of forming a signal in a wireless communication system in which a plurality of terminals commonly use time and frequency resources for efficient code hopping. The method includes allocating the same frequency-axis sequence and different time-axis sequences to a plurality of terminals by using a resource index according to a first slot in the first slot; and allocating different frequency-axis sequences and different time-axis sequences to the plurality of terminals by using a resource index according to a second slot in the second slot. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100172331 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHIFTING THE POSITION OF A SYMBOL TO REDUCE TRANSMISSION OVERHEAD - A method for shifting the position of a symbol to reduce transmission overhead is described. A frame with a plurality of symbols is provided. A determination is made whether the frame includes an indication of an event. At least one symbol of the plurality of symbols is shifted based on the determination. A counter is set to an initial value. The frame with the at least one shifted symbol is transmitted. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100177745 | FORMAT ADAPTATION OF A CONTROL CHANNEL FOR DISCONTINUOUS DATA TRANSMISSION - In a radio communication system ( | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177746 | SEMI-STATIC RESOURCE ALLOCATION TO SUPPORT COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (COMP) TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for supporting Coordinated MultiPoint (CoMP) transmission are described. For CoMP transmission, multiple cells may simultaneously send one or more data streams to one or more UEs on the same time-frequency resources based on short-term channel feedback from at least one UE to at least two cells. In an aspect, a semi-static configuration may be used by a set of cells for CoMP transmission to a UE. The semi-static configuration may indicate resource elements available to the set of cells to send CoMP transmission to the UE. The available resource elements may be determined based on a maximum number of TDM control symbols for all cells in the set and resource elements used for cell-specific reference signals by the cells in the set. A cell in the set may send data on the available resource elements to the UE for the CoMP transmission. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177747 | Method of handling time alignment command during a random access procedure - Disclosed is the radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and the terminal, and more particularly, a method of handling time alignment command during a random access procedure in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system is provided. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100177748 | Method for Operating a Communication System, Coordination Node in a Communication System and Communication System - A coordination node in a communication system, a communication system and methods for operating the communication system which allows data transmission with a guaranteed latency even when there are a relatively large number of network nodes, wherein a plurality of network nodes in the communication system are combined to form a group. The network nodes in the group are allocated a respective common address, and at least one guaranteed timeslot within a transmission frame is made available to the network nodes in the group solely for use for the data transmission by assigning it to the common address. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100182978 | COMMUNICATION SCHEDULING OF NETWORK NODES USING A CLUSTER COEFFICENT - In one aspect, a method includes scheduling network communications in a network comprising nodes connected by links, receiving at a first node updated bandwidth values from the other nodes, determining a cluster coefficient based on a number of one-hop neighbors of the first node and a number of neighbors N-hops and less of the first node, adjusting the cluster coefficient to form an adjusted cluster coefficient and determining a wait period based on the adjusted cluster coefficient. The method also includes implementing the updated bandwidth values received to determine updated node weight values of the other nodes after the wait period has expired. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182979 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for facilitating cell search by user equipments (UEs) in a wireless communication system are described. In an aspect, a primary synchronization code (PSC) sequence may be generated based on a Frank sequence and a constant amplitude sequence that is repeated multiple times. In another aspect, a set of PSC sequences may be generated based on complementary sequences having good aperiodic correlation properties and efficient implementations. In one design, PSC sequences A+B and B+A may be formed based on Golay complementary sequences A and B, there “+” denotes concatenation. In yet another aspect, a set of secondary synchronization code (SSC) sequences may be generated based on a set of base sequences and different modulation symbols of a modulation scheme. Each base sequence may be modulated by each of M possible modulation symbols for the modulation scheme to obtain M different SSC sequences. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182980 | METHOD FOR PHASE SYNCHRONIZING NODES IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - For phase synchronizing nodes, on a node by node basis, following a tree-structured phase distribution network using the infrastructure of a telecommunications network, a first node transfers to a second node phase information substantially in phase with a phase reference internal to the first node and position signaling of the phase information with respect to component elements, such as bits, of a data signal carried by a link linking the nodes. The position signaling can be the number of component elements separating it from the phase information in a packet. The time to transfer the phase information through the link is precisely compensated. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100182981 | Adaptive Scheduling - A communication device arranged to communicate data with another device at a given time instant according to either a first communication protocol or a second communication protocol, the communication device being constrained to transmit data according to the first communication protocol during a transmission window of predetermined duration that commences at a predetermined time instant and being arranged to, in dependence on a data communication according to the second communication protocol to be made by the communication device during that transmission window, select a time instant in that same transmission window for commencing a data transmission according to the first communication protocol. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100189081 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND BASE STATION USING FRAME CONFIGURATION WHICH SUPPORTS RELAY FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - A method using a frame structure which supports relay for wireless transmission, which divides the time slots of a sub-frame into some zones, in which the data is transmitted using the manner of TDD, wherein further including that at least one time slot in a sub-frame is set as a hybrid zone; the transmission of the data is realized through frequency division multiplexing the access link and relay link in the hybrid zone of the sub-frame; and also the multi-hop relay is supported under the two work manners of relay in sub-frame and relay in frame. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100189082 | LOCATION TRACKING METHOD IN COORDINATOR-BASED WIRELESS NETWORK - A location tracking method in a coordinator-based wireless network is provided. The location tracking method in a coordinator-based wireless network includes transmitting a first frame including its own identifier and time information to the wireless network by a device associated with the wireless network in order to disclose its location information; and receiving a second frame including the location information of the device transmitted from the wireless network by the device, as a response to the first frame. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100195626 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USER SELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of scheduling data transmission in a wireless network is disclosed. The wireless network includes an access router and a plurality of access terminals connectable to the base station. The method includes determining a number of the access terminals that are connected to the base station, and comparing the number with a threshold. The method further includes determining, based on the comparison between the number of connected access terminals and the threshold, whether to send a dedicated control signal or a shared control signal from the base station, in order indicate which ones of the plurality of access terminals are scheduled to transmit data during a slot. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195627 | REUSE OF RF RECEIVE CHAIN FOR HAND-IN ASSISTANCE - A radio frequency receive chain of an access point is reused for different functions. For example, the same RF receive chain may be used to receive on a downlink at certain points in time and on an uplink at other points in time. An RF receive chain that is used to derive synchronization from downlink signals received from a macro system also may be used to receive uplink signals from an access terminal to provide assistance for hand-in of the access terminal. Accelerated searching for hand-in may be provided through the use of a relatively small search window for hand-in of an access terminal to a small coverage access point. In some aspects, the search window may be defined based on the distance between access points or calibration of synchronization error between access points. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195628 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (TDM) FOR MULTIPLE SIGNAL OFDM SIGNAL FORMATS - Methods, systems and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on computer storage media, for operating time division multiplexing (TDM) on segments of MediaFLO superframes comprising: generating a MediaFLO OFDM waveform with at least one MediaFLO frame; allocating a MediaFLO local multiplex time segment in the at least one MediaFLO frame for non-MediaFLO data; and inserting the non-MediaFLO data into the MediaFLO local multiplex time segment. In one example, the non-MediaFLO data is a DVB-H table that is split into two time segments within the MediaFLO OFDM waveform. In another aspect, the apparatus and method for operating time division multiplexing (TDM) on alternate whole superframes of time comprising generating a MediaFLO OFDM waveform with a plurality of MediaFLO superframes; multiplexing the MediaFLO OFDM waveform with non-MediaFLO data over the plurality of MediaFLO superframes for whole superframe durations; and inserting MediaFLO data in at least one of the plurality of MediaFLO superframes. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195629 | EFFICIENT ACK TRANSMISSION FOR UPLINK SEMI-PERSISTENT SCHEDULING RELEASE IN LTE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which an uplink semi-persistent scheduling release is received an HARQ ACK is determined whether to be transmitted in response to the received uplink semi-persistent scheduling release. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100195630 | QUASI-ORTHOGONAL MULTIPLEXING FOR A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - For quasi-orthogonal multiplexing in an OFDMA system, multiple (M) sets of traffic channels are defined for each base station. The traffic channels in each set are orthogonal to one another and may be pseudo-random with respect to the traffic channels in each of the other sets. The minimum number of sets of traffic channels (L) is used to support a given number of (U) terminals selected for data transmission, where M≧L≧1 and U≧1. Each terminal transmits data and pilot symbols on its traffic channel. A base station receives data transmissions from all terminals and may perform receiver spatial processing on received symbols with spatial filter matrices to obtain detected data symbols. The spatial filter matrix for each subband may be derived based on channel response estimates for all terminals transmitting on that subband. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100202415 | DATA PACKET TRAFFIC SCHEDULING - Techniques of scheduling data packets are disclosed. For example, such data packet scheduling techniques may be employed to schedule data packets on wired and/or wireless networks. An example embodiment includes techniques for scheduling voice-over-Internet protocol data packets transmitted between a base station and a subscriber station on a WiMAX network. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202416 | Data Packet Communication Scheduling in a Communication System - A communication device has a plurality of concurrently operating transceiver systems, each operating in a respectively different one of a plurality of communication systems. Operation of the transceiver systems is coordinated by receiving a plurality of requests from different ones of the transceiver systems, each of the requests being a request to access a communication medium for the purpose of transmitting or receiving a data packet. Utilization of an available time period is scheduled by selecting which one or ones of the requests to grant based, at least in part, on how many remaining times out of a maximum number of times each of the transmission systems' data packet is permitted to be retransmitted compared to other requests, on whether the requests are requests to transmit a data packet, and on whether the requests are requests to receive a data packet. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202417 | MEDIUM RESERVATION ANNOUNCEMENT - In wireless meshes, mesh points announce reservation of the wireless medium in beacon frame. Each mesh point determines scheduled reservation of the medium for transmission of the future beacon frames and scheduled reservations of the medium for data communication with the station The station further aggregates the reservations into a single element: an medium occupation element and integrates this element into the beacon frame for future transmission to nearby mesh points. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202418 | SCHEDULING OF DATA PACKETS OVER AN AIR INTERFACE OF A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A scheduler ( | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100202419 | RADIO SCHEDULER AND DATA PLANE INTERFACE - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a MAC layer architecture for a base station may comprise a radio scheduler disposed in a control plane separate from the data plane modules of a data plane. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100208709 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING ACK/NACK BIT SUPPORTING HARQ IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI USER MIMO - Provided is a method of efficiently transmitting an acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) bit supporting hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a wireless communication system supporting multi-user multi-input and multi-output (MIMO). The method transmits the same downlink code and in-phase/quadrature (I/Q) multiplexed ACK/NACK bit to two mobile stations using the same uplink resource block. Accordingly, the method can efficiently transmit the ACK/NACK bit for multi-user MIMO and efficiently use downlink radio resources. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100208710 | METHOD FOR GENERATING CONTROL CHANNEL AND DECODING CONTROL CHANNEL, BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION THEREOF - A control channel generation method, a control channel decoding method, and a BS and an MS for implementing the methods are provided. The control channel generation method includes placing a frame control header (FCH) and a MAP within a TTI and generating a control channel for an enhanced communication system at a position after the MAP within the TTI. Another control channel generation method includes generating a control channel for the enhanced communication system and placing an FCH and a preamble at a position after the control channel. These methods enable implementation of an enhanced system that overcomes problems of the legacy system while minimizing influence exerted upon legacy MSs in the case where the base station generates a new control channel for a new MS or where an MS decodes a new control channel. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100220690 | DIRECT LINK ESTABLISHMENT FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to improve establishing direct links in the Contention Based Period (CPB) of the MAC superframe. Embodiments of the invention enable scheduled and unscheduled data delivery modes (DDM) for a Contention Based Period. Embodiments of the invention reuse capabilities of the private basic service set (PBSS) Control Point (PCP) device like polling during the announcement time (AT) period in order to identify stations that want to initiate data transmission with other stations. That knowledge is further used by the control node (PCP) to facilitate training procedure between stations through the Contention Based Period (CPB) period or Dynamic service period (SP) periods. The behavior of stations within those periods is divided in two phases: the training phase, referred to as the Beamforming Training Time (BFTT) and data schedule negotiation phase referred to as the Data Delivery Mode Negotiation Time (DNT). Within the training phase, stations learn in which direction they should point their antennas and during the negotiation phase, a decision on data delivery mode is taken. Data delivery modes include mechanisms such as unscheduled delivery, scheduled delivery, or always on delivery. The phases may occur directly, one after the other, or they may be separated in time. Typically, training phase (if needed) should occur before the data negotiation phase. The beginning of the training phase or data negotiation phase (if training phase is not needed) is indicated via a meeting point. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220691 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING BROADCASTING INFORMATION - In a method of transmitting broadcasting information, the broadcasting information is classified into fixed broadcasting information for transmitting to a fixed position of a super-frame and variable broadcasting information to be variably transmitted in the form of a broadcasting message. The fixed broadcasting information may be classified into primary broadcasting information having a short cycle and secondary broadcasting information having a long cycle. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220692 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for communication are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive messages from a plurality of different sources comprising one or more other femtocells, one or more cellular enabled communication devices, and one or more non-cellular network nodes. The femtocell may select, based on the received messages, a master clock within one of the plurality of different sources as a master clock for synchronization of the plurality of different sources. A femtocell clock, a global navigational satellite signal (GNSS) clock, a cellular base station clock, or a cellular enabled communication device clock may be selected as the master clock. The femtocell may transmit and/or receive synchronization messages to and/or from the one or more cellular enabled communication devices and the one or more non-cellular network nodes. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220693 | VOICE-DATA INTEGRATED MULTIACCESS BY SELF-RESERVATION AND STABILIZED ALOHA CONTENTION - A multiple access communication protocol that includes an uplink and a downlink channel is disclosed. The uplink channel has a plurality of frames, such that each frame has a first selectable number of minislots and a second selectable number of slots. A reservation request of a first type is sent into a first selected minislot of a selected frame of the uplink channel when information of a first type is to be sent. The reservation request of the first type requests an assignment for at least one slot for transmitting information of the first type in at least one frame that is subsequent to the selected frame. A reservation request of a second type is sent into a second selected minislot of the selected frame when the second selected minislot is available in the selected frame and when information of a second type is to be sent. The reservation request of the second type requests an assignment of at least one slot for transmitting information of the second type in at least one frame that is subsequent to the selected frame, and contends for the second selected minislot based on a pseudo-Bayesian Aloha algorithm. The downlink channel contains a feedback message that occurs prior to the end of the selected frame of the uplink channel. The feedback message includes minislot assignment information for sending reservation requests of the first and the second type and slot assignment information for transmitting information of the first and the second type, minislot contention information for the reservation requests of the second type sent in the selected frame, and reservation backlog information for an estimated number of reservation requests of the second type pending at a beginning of the selected frame. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220694 | Ranging Method and Apparatus in Wireless Communication System - The present invention provides a ranging method and apparatus, a frame structure includes one or more downlink service time slots, a guard interval between downlink sub-frame and uplink sub-frame and one or more uplink service time slots, and the method includes calculating start time of the first uplink service time slot, configuring the start time as reference time; generating a ranging signal; subtract a sum of time period needed for sending the ranging signal and reference time delay from the reference time and configure obtained time result as time of starting to send the ranging signal; subtract the length of a special ranging time slot from the reference time and configure obtained time result as time of starting to receive the ranging signal by a BS; receiving and processing the ranging signal. By the method and apparatus, all kinds of interference are minimized and an optimum ranging function is implemented. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220695 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING AND TRANSMITTING CODE SEQUENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of generating a code sequence in a wireless communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the method includes recognizing a desired length of the code sequence, generating a code sequence having a length different from the desired length, and modifying the length of the generated code sequence to equal the desired length. Here, the step of modifying includes discarding at least one element of the generated code sequence or inserting at least one null element to the generated code sequence. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100220696 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION IN AN OFDMA SYSTEM - The present invention provides method and system for managing communication in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) system using segments in an OFDMA frame. The method includes setting at least a first segment in the OFDMA frame as a high power segment for a plurality of base station in the OFDMA system. Further, communication is established between at least one base station and at least one communication device in the OFDMA system, in response to setting the at least first segment as a high power segment. The method further includes assigning a region of the first segment to a set of base stations in the OFDMA system. The assigned region can be used by the set of base stations at high power level to communicate with communication devices located in overlapping areas. A method for coordinating uplink transmission in the OFDMA system for reducing uplink interference is also provided. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100226342 | Distributed Ad Hoc Network Protocol Using Synchronous Shared Beacon Signaling - A method for forming a protocol structure for use in an ad hoc, distributed, scaleable wireless sensor node network which enables nodes to join the network autonomously without there being a designated, permanent central time reference and for enabling such nodes to synchronize timing with each other and with other nodes in the network. The method involves discovering the active channel changing sequence used by the network, synchronizing communications of a new node with the remainder of the nodes in the network and scanning communications channels to detect merging clusters of nodes. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100226343 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHARED COMMUNICATION MEDIUM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Performing distributed contention-free communication channel reservation for wireless communication, is disclosed. One implementation involves providing access to a shared communication channel in a wireless network including multiple wireless stations, by performing distributed channel time reservation for contention-free access to a shared wireless channel by each wireless station, based on a prior successful contention by the wireless station for access to the channel in a wireless network. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100232396 | QUALITY OF SERVICE ARCHITECTURE FOR HOME MESH NETWORK - An embodiment is a technique to perform QoS. An interface between an upper layer and a lower layer in a multi-hop mesh network receives and transmits packets from and to a local node and a remote node. A classifier classifies the received packets into a plurality of packet types having different priority levels. A queue manager manages a plurality of buffers organized according to the packet types. The plurality of buffers stores the classified packets based on the packet types. A scheduler schedules distributing the packets from the plurality of buffers based on the priority levels according to a scheduling policy. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232397 | Method and Apparatus for Improved Cell Acquisition with Reduced Frequency Error Impact - A method and apparatus for improved initial cell acquisition with reduced frequency error impact. The method determines the slot timing of a transmission, identifies the primary scrambling code and frame timing using the common pilot channel, and provides a path profile using a pseudorandom noise (PN) search. An apparatus using a cell searcher that performs the method is also described. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232398 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD, MAP CONFIGURATION METHOD, AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When characters are allocated to a keyboard, a plurality of consonants are divided into a plurality of groups according to pronunciation position in the oral cavity, and the groups are allocated to corresponding columns on the keyboard of 3 rows and 10 columns. A plurality of vowels are allocated to the corresponding columns according to the pronunciation position in the oral cavity. In this instance, the consonants and the vowels of which the pronunciation position are near the lips are allocated to the middle area of the area of 3 rows and 10 columns, and the consonants and the vowels of which the pronunciation position are near the vocal chords are allocated to the outer part of the area of 3 rows and 10 columns. The consonants and the vowels are allocated to the corresponding rows of the area of 3 rows and 10 columns according to usage frequency. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100232399 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL CENTER, AND BASE STATION - The base station includes a notification module configured to notify a control center of output power data, a measurement module configured to measure a reception quality of each time slot from received radio signals of control data transmitted from other base stations via a control channel, and a transmission module configured to transmit reception quality data indicating the reception quality to the control center, along with data indicating the time slot selected by the base station. The control center includes a reception module configured to receive the output power data, the reception quality data, and the data indicating the time slot, and a construction module configured to construct adjacent base station data indicating adjacency relationship between the base stations by comparing the reception quality and the output power of each of the base stations, the reception quality being obtained by converting the reception quality data based on the time slot. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100238906 | TRANSMISSION TIMING CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF, AND BASE STATION USING THE SAME AND MOBILE STATION - An adaptive transmission timing control system is provided in which a base station can correctly instruct a mobile station of a timing control signal indicating the amount of variation in transmission timing and a multipath situation can be estimated in the base station with accuracy. When control information for controlling transmission timing of an upstream signal of the mobile station is generated in the base station, the mobile station is notified of the control information in every frame of the upstream signal. Specifically, the control information is generated by determining the transmission timing using a power delay profile in which frames of the upstream signal are added and synthesized in every RTT (Round Trip Time) cycle of the upstream signal. This makes it possible to heighten resistance to an error in the timing control signal, and transmission timing control can be carried out correctly. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238907 | SCHEDULING METHOD FOR A GIVEN TRANSMISSION TIME SLOT - A method of scheduling for a given transmission time slot, time being divided into time slots for time division multiplex transmission to a plurality of terminals, said method comprising:
| 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238908 | Method of Managing Timing Alignment Functionality for Multiple Component Carriers and Related Communication Device - A method of managing timing alignment (TA) functionality in multiple component carriers for a communication device of a wireless communication system, which includes separately managing TA functionality of a plurality of component carriers or jointly managing TA functionality of component carriers belonging to the same cell. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238909 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RADIO NETWORK TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for allocating Radio Network Temporary Identifiers (RNTIs) for random access in a mobile communication system are provided. An Evolved Node B (ENB) determines the number of RNTIs allocated to at least one User Equipment (UE) that transmitted a random access preamble, determines an average number of random access preambles received during a Transmission Time Interval (TTI), and sets a timer based on the number of allocated RNTIs and the average number of random access preambles. If a cell identifier corresponding to a first UE is not received from an upper layer before expiration of the timer, the ENB releases the RNTI allocated to the first UE, and allocates the released RNTI to a second UE different from the first UE. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100238910 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ALLOCATING AND TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA BLOCK TRANSMISSIONS WITH PIGGY-BACKED ACK/NACK BITMAP - Systems and methods for allocating and transmitting uplink data block transmissions with piggy-backed ACK/NACK bitmap field are provided. In a specific example, a mobile station receives a request for a data block combined with control information (DBCCI). The mobile station responds by transmitting a DBCCI using at least one timeslot corresponding to a timeslot used for the request. At least some of the time, the mobile station sends data blocks in an order different than that would be otherwise used (e.g. block sequence order). | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100246537 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF UNCOMPRESSED VIDEO HAVING A DUAL-BEACON MECHANISM FOR TWO DEVICE TYPES - A system and method of wireless data communication over a network of devices and device types are disclosed. In one aspect, the beacons of a first device type are sent and received from devices of the first device type or a second device type, by a first device of the first device type. A plurality of beacons of the first device type or the second device type are sent or received from a plurality of devices of the first device type or a second device type, by a second device of the second device type. Each of channels by the first device is sensed. A free channel for data communication between the first device and the second device is located. Beacons of the first device type are sent out by the first device. Channel reservations of time blocks are made of the free channel for data transmissions. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246538 | ADAPTIVE FREQUENCY REUSE METHOD OF RADIO RESOURCES MANAGEMENT AND ALLOCATION - A method for managing and allocating radio resources (RRMA method) of multiple radio resource types to subscriber stations is disclosed. The RRMA method includes bandwidth partitioning, into parts comprising “slots” with a given reuse pattern, a selection rule, to select a “cell, reuse pattern” pair serving each user, and an allocation rule, for distributing to each user an appropriate number of bandwidth slots from the selected “cell, reuse pattern” pair. After an adaptation period, the method reaches a desired fairness, while simultaneously reaching a maximal mean throughput, possible under this fairness. For big networks, the method provides basically decentralized radio resource management. The RRMA method is useful to cellular networks having a single set of orthogonal sub-channels (frequency/time slots) being reused by all network cells, such as time division multiple access (TDMA), orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA), or OFDMA/TDMA cellular systems. Particularly, the method is applicable in fractional frequency reuse cellular networks. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246539 | Transmission method for a wireless network and corresponding reception method - The invention relates to a method for transmitting in a wireless network comprising a plurality of base stations, that transmit frames at a same frequency, and at least one mobile terminal. In order to optimise the size of a frame header, the method comprises:
| 09-30-2010 |
| 20100246540 | Method for Channel Switching and Device for Communication - A method for channel switching comprising the steps: establishing ( | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100254356 | Timing Alignment in an LTE System | 10-07-2010 |
| 20100260150 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR PROVIDING PEER-TO-PEER POSITIONING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus are provided for use in wireless networks to provide and/or otherwise support peer-to-peer positioning operations. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260151 | Joint Processing Downlink Coordinated Multi-Point Reference Signal Support - This invention concerns multiplexing in Long Term Evolution (LTE) and Long Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) in Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) wireless telephony. Joint processing down link coordinated multi-point reference signaling includes combining resource signal types at a user equipment, determining conflicts between resource signals of plural user equipment, puncturing resource signals of other cell upon determining conflicts between resource signals of plural user equipment and transmitting non-punctured combined resource signals from a user equipment. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260152 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for triggering a Random Access Channel (RACH) procedure for requesting uplink resources on a random access channel to a radio base station ( | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260153 | METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION IN A MESH MODE OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - In a method for data transmission in a mesh mode of a wireless communication network, which enables a decentralized transmission of data packets within data streams via communication links from one node to another node, data streams are classified in several service classes specifying quality requirements for data streams. Bandwidth reservations are performed between nodes of a communication link, each bandwidth reservation being dependent on the service class of the data stream to be transmitted via the communication link and comprising the exchange of control messages for reserving time slots for transmitting the data stream of the service class in subsequent data time frames via the communication link. The transmission of data streams is scheduled dependent on the service classes. The method is particularly used in the mesh mode of the standard IEEE 802.16 and enables a seamless coexistence of the point-to-multipoint mode and the mesh mode of the standard. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260154 | Method and Apparatus for Generating Reference Signals for Accurate Time-Difference of Arrival Estimation - A base station communicates a positioning reference signal (PRS) to wireless communication devices over a downlink in a wireless communication system by encoding a PRS into a first set of transmission resources, encoding other information into a second set of transmission resources, multiplexing the two sets of resources into a subframe such that the first set of resources is multiplexed into at least a portion of a first set of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) symbols based on an identifier associated with the base station and the second set of resources is multiplexed into a second set of OFDM symbols. Upon receiving the subframe, a wireless communication device determines which set of transmission resources contains the PRS based on the identifier associated with the base station that transmitted the subframe and processes the set of resources containing the PRS to estimate timing (e.g., time of arrival) information. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260155 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIME-ALIGNING TRANSMISSIONS FROM MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS IN A CDMA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Schemes to time-align transmissions from multiple base stations to a terminal. To achieve time-alignment, differences between the arrival times of transmissions from the base stations, as observed at the terminal, are determined and provided to the system and used to adjust the timing at the base stations such that terminal-specific radio frames arrive at the terminal within a particular time window. In one scheme, a time difference between two base stations is partitioned into a frame-level time difference and a chip-level time difference. Whenever requested to perform and report time difference measurements, the terminal measures the chip-level timing for each candidate base station relative to a reference base station. Additionally, the terminal also measures the frame-level timing and includes this information in the time difference measurement only if required. Otherwise, the terminal sets the frame-level part to a predetermined value (e.g., zero). | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100260156 | Apparatus and method for transmitting system information block in a broadband wireless communication system - An operation method of the femto BS includes configuring a subframe set including at least two types of subframes among subframes having predefined different structures, and, if a duration of a subframe carrying the subframe set arrives, transmitting one of the subframes included in the subframe set according to predefined order. The subframes having the predefined different structures include a first type subframe including a synchronization signal and a Master Information Block (MIB), a second type subframe including the synchronization signal, a third type subframe including the synchronization signal and system information, a fourth type subframe including the synchronization signal, the MIB, and the system information, and a fifth type subframe including the system information. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100265922 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT ASSOCIATION PROCEDURE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for efficient ad-hoc peer to peer communication in a contention access period, while antenna directions of communicating peers can point to each other. Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for improved association of a device in a wireless network with a controller of the network. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265923 | REAL-TIME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a real-time wireless communication method for guaranteeing quality of service in a wireless personal area network (WPAN). When real-time data transmitted in a time slot of a current superframe has an error, a terminal, which was designated as a coordinator from among a plurality of terminals in a WPAN, allocates a time slot for retransmitting the real-time data to a next superframe and retransmits the real-time data in the allocated time slot of the next superframe. Therefore, quality of a real-time communication service in a WPAN can be guaranteed. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265924 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE BEAMFORMING TRAINING USING FIXED TIME WINDOW FOR HETEROGENEOUS ANTENNA SYSTEMS - A system and method for performing a beamforming training between heterogeneous wireless devices in a wireless network is disclosed. A number of time slots in a fixed-time period are assigned for transmit and/or receive sector training. The number of time slots assigned for transmit and/or receive sector training is based on an antenna configuration of a wireless station. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100265925 | Segmented Beamforming - A method for beamforming in a communication network includes generating a plurality of beamforming training (BFT) units associated with a beamforming session between a pair of devices, where each of the plurality of BFT units corresponds to a different beamsteering vector, causing a first non-zero subset of the plurality of BFT units to be transmitted during a first timeslot, and causing a second non-zero subset of the plurality of BFT units to be transmitted during a second timeslot, where the first time timeslot and the second timeslot are not contiguous. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100272073 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiment of the disclosure set forth resource allocation in a wireless network. Some example methods include selecting a node based on probability of having available data at the node, sending an inquiry to the node, deriving a first set of average cost estimates based on a first step-size function, network information measured at the node, and a predetermined value, calculating a second set of threshold values based on a second step-size function and the first set of average cost estimates, updating the second set of values to generate a third set of threshold values based on the predetermined value, and allocating resources for the node based on the third set of threshold values. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272074 | EFFICIENT UPLINK TRANSMISSION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - A UE in a wireless communication network transmits succinct, direct channel state information to the network, enabling coordinated multipoint calculations such as joint processing, without substantially increasing uplink overhead. The UE receives and processes reference symbols over a set of non-uniformly spaced sub-carriers, selected according to a scheme synchronized to the network. The frequency response for each selected sub-carrier is estimated conventionally, and the results quantized and transmitted to the network on an uplink control channel. The non-uniform sub-carrier selection may be synchronized to the network in a variety of ways. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272075 | TRANSPORT FORMAT SELECTION IN ENHANCED UL - In a method and a device for selecting transport format in a User Equipment transmitting data in a cellular radio system using an Enhanced Uplink (EUL) with Discontinuous Reception (DRX) the determination of whether or not to transmit data in the next Transmission Time Interval (TTI) is based on the amount of data in the User Equipment transmission buffer. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272076 | SIMPLIFIED BEACONING AND CHANNEL RESERVATION TECHNIQUES FOR SHORT RANGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and method for wireless BANs and short-range wireless networks that support heterogeneous devices and applications are disclosed. In one example embodiment, a method of implementing a MAC superframe structure for short-range wireless networks includes transmitting multiple beacon slots ( | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272077 | System and Method for Communications using Time-Frequency Space Enabled Coordinated Beam Switching - A system and method for communications using time-frequency space enabled coordinated beam switching are provided. A method for transmitting information includes selecting a beam from a set of beams, determining a set of users out of a plurality of users, the set of users preferring the selected beam and for each user in the set of users, selecting a first available subframe-subband pair that maximizes the user's channel quality. The method also includes scheduling the selected subframe-subband pairs, and transmitting information related to the scheduled subframe-subband pairs to the users in the set of users. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272078 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING A RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Techniques and apparatus for efficiently determining the radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) size and flexible RLC PDU creation for multi carrier operation are disclosed. An example wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) calculates a maximum amount of data allowed to be transmitted for a current transmission time interval (TTI) for each of a plurality of carriers, and selects an RLC PDU data field size such that each RLC PDU to be multiplexed to a medium access control (MAC) PDU matches a minimum of the maximum amount of data calculated for the carriers. The maximum amount of data may, for example, be calculated based on an applicable current grant for each carrier for the current TTI. The RLC PDU may be generated for the later TTI on a condition that an amount of data in outstanding pre-generated RLC PDUs for a particular logical channel is less than or equal to 4N times the minimum of the maximum amount of data allowed to be transmitted by the applicable current grant for the carriers for the current TTI, where N is a number of activated carriers. The maximum amount of data may be calculated based on a remaining power on each carrier. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100272079 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CUSTOMIZED MULTI-APPLICATION CHANNEL CONTROL - Methods and devices are provided to aid in the control of a channel used in communicating data packets between a first communication device and a communication device with which the first communication device is communicating. For an open session occurring on the channel, the channel can be in an active state or a dormant state. Controlling when the channel is brought down to the dormant state can help improve operating conditions such as battery life of a communication device. Time-out parameters associated with the communication device, each open session and packets being sent and received on the channel are used in determining when the channel is brought up to the active state or brought down to the dormant state. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100278154 | HANDLING RESOURCES IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for managing Time Division Multiplex resources for a pool of Mobile Switching Centre Servers in a communications network. Time Division Multiplex resources are provided at a Media Gateway function serving the pool of Mobile Switching Centre Servers. Virtual Time Division Multiplex resources are allocated to each Mobile Switching Centre Server in the pool and mapped to the Time Division Multiplex resources. An ISUP signalling proxy function may be provided at the Media Gateway function. TDM resources are allocated to at least one Mobile Switching Centre, and associated with an identifier of the Mobile Switching Centre Server. The TDM resources are mapped to the Time Division Multiplex resource identifier. When the media Gateway receives an ISUP message, it replaces the identifier with an ISDN User Part signalling proxy function identifier before sending the message to a node in an external network. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100278155 | Rate-Adaptive Multiple Input/Multiple Output (MIMO) Wireless System - A rate-adaptive method of communicating over a multipath wireless communication system uses multiple links such that each end of a link uses multiple transmit and receive antennas. A number of independent streams that are to be transmitted for each link is determined based on an overall system performance measure. In addition, the system may also jointly determine the best modulation, coding, power control, and frequency assignment for each link, based on an overall system performance measure. In OFDM systems, the number of independent streams, as well as the modulation, coding, and power control, may be determined on a tone-by-tone basis based on an overall system performance measure. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100284376 | METHOD FOR RECONFIGURING TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER - Disclosed is the radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and the terminal, and more particularly, to a method for reconfiguring a timer of a mobile terminal in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100284377 | Method and Apparatus For Sending Signaling For Data Transmission In A Wireless Communication System - Techniques for sending signaling for data transmission in a wireless communication system are described. A transmitter may process signaling for a data transmission based on a block code, a convolutional code, a transformation, etc. The signaling may comprise an identifier of an intended receiver for the data transmission and/or other information such as data rate, resource assignment, etc. The signaling for the data transmission may be mapped to a first set of tones in a time slot. Data for the data transmission may be mapped to a second set of tones in the time slot. The entire signaling may be sent on the first set of tones. Alternatively, the first set of tones may be selected from among multiple sets of tones or pseudo-randomly selected from among available tones based on a first part of the signaling. A second part of the signaling may be sent on the first set of tones. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100290439 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING INFORMATION IN A PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - The present invention discloses a method and device for sending a message in a physical uplink control channel. The present invention overcomes the problem that an index of the physical uplink control channel corresponding to a ACK/NACK message can not be represented implicitly in prior art by using the known downlink information, which includes an index of the control channel element where control signaling associated with downlink data is located and an index of a sub-frame where the downlink data is located. Therefore, the index of the physical uplink control channel where the ACK/NACK message associated with the downlink data is located can be represented and the ACK/NACK message can be sent in an appropriate physical uplink control channel. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100296491 | METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION AMONG THE NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS IN THE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The object of the present invention is to provide a method and an apparatus for performing synchronization among neighboring base stations in the wireless communication network. According to the technical solution of the present invention, a base station turns off a transmitter randomly to receive a synchronization signal from neighboring base stations, and obtains a new local synchronization reference time based on the synchronization reference time of other neighboring base station. With the apparatus and the method provided by the present invention, the strongly robust synchronization among base stations is realized. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296492 | PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless transmission method includes providing a commanding node and a plurality of sub-networks. Each of the sub-networks includes at least one responding node. Time slots are assigned to the sub-networks such that time slots assigned to each sub-network are interleaved in time with time slots assigned to at least one other sub-network. Within each time slot, at least one acknowledgement packet is transmitted from the at least one responding node before a command packet is sent from the commanding node within the time slot. Each at least one acknowledgement packet indicates whether or not a most recent command packet from the commanding node was correctly received by the responding node. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296493 | DISTRIBUTED CHANNEL HOPPING METHOD IN WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK - A distributed channel hopping communication method in a low power wireless ad-hoc network. A beacon transmission and reception scheduling method using a distributed channel hopping method in a wireless ad-hoc network, the method includes: transmitting beacons using channel hopping, before establishing the wireless ad-hoc network including a plurality of nodes having a BP including at least one time slot, and receiving beacons of a plurality of neighboring nodes of each of the plurality of nodes; collecting information about the wireless ad-hoc network and information about the plurality of neighboring nodes from the received beacons; scheduling the receiving of the beacons that are transmitted from the plurality of neighboring nodes in the BP, using TDMA in each of the at least one time slot based on the information about the plurality of neighboring nodes; and scheduling transmitting of a beacon in each of the at least one time slot. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100296494 | SERVICE DIFFERENTIATION AND SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENTS FOR WIRELESS ACCESS CLIENTS - Differentiated services are provided through service level agreements (SLAs) between access nodes and some of the clients using a wireless access network. Client devices include internal devices that are compliant with service-related specifi-cations published by the access nodes. Client devices also may include non-compliant external and legacy devices, as well as out-side interferers. The access nodes control target SLAs for each client device. The access nodes and the internal client devices per-form rate limiting to ensure that a device's target SLA is adhered to. The service-related specifications include schedules to ensure preferential access for preferred internal client devices. The internal client devices send usage and bandwidth availability feedback to the access node they are associated with, enabling the access node to come up with better schedules for meeting the preferred internal devices' SLAs in view of the network conditions reported via the feedback. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100303044 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CREDIT-BASED CHANNEL TRANSMISSION SCHEDULING (CBCTS) - Credit based channel transmission scheduling (CBCTS) of packet data units (PDUs) on a downlink channel is provided based on priority, quantity, and timing efficiency. The CBCTS technique includes initializing a set of credit accounts with a set of credit values. Credit accounts are sorted to determine the account having the highest number of credits. An account is selected from the set having an associated PDU type that is ready for transmission and has a size that fits within a MAC block. The selected PDU is inserted into the MAC block. The cost associated with the inserted PDU is subtracted from the credits. The selected PDU size is subtracted from the MAC block size, and a determination is made as to whether there is free space remaining on the MAC block for insertion of additional PDUs. If so, another sort and search is performed prior to transmission on the downlink channel. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100303045 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ASSIGNMENT AND ALLOCATION OF MIXED-TYPE COMBINATIONS OF SLOTS - Methods and systems for performing allocation of mixed-type combinations of slots are provided. Specifically, in a single assignment message, an allocation of slots over two framed and slots over four frames is performed. These can be RTTI and BTTI blocks for example. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100309889 | Radio Communication Device, Communication Control Device, Radio Communication System, Radio Communication Method, and Communication Control Method - There is provided a radio communication device including a communication unit that communicates with a base station by using a given radio multiplexing architecture, a storage unit that stores time slot information, and a control unit that controls the communication unit to communicate with the base station by using the given radio multiplexing architecture in a time slot indicated by the time slot information. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309890 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION APPARATUS OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION RECEIVER AND TIME TRACKING METHOD FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION - A time tracking method is provided for channel estimation of a mobile communication receiver and a related channel estimation apparatus is provided. The channel estimation apparatus includes a channel estimation control unit for analyzing and outputting a delay profile of a multipath channel by using a channel estimation value of each multi-tap, a tracking mode control unit for calculating a distance between an earliest tap and a preset margin tap by using the delay profile analysis results, and for generating and outputting a hopping tracking control signal for tracking a position of the earliest tap to a position of the margin tap at a time when the determined distance is greater than a preset hopping threshold value, and a hopping tracking mode execution unit for receiving the hopping tracking control signal and for shifting the position of the earliest tap to the position of the margin tap at a time. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309891 | ALLOCATION OF CONTROL CHANNEL FOR RADIO RESOURCE ASSIGNMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A wireless communication device for receiving a frame corresponding to a transmission time interval, the frame having a control channel including at least two control channel elements and an embedded bit sequence, the location of which indicates a portion of the control channel used for radio resource assignment, wherein the portion of the control channel used for radio resource assignment may be less than the entire control channel of the frame having the embedded bit sequence, and wherein the at least two frames may use different portions of the control channel for radio resource assignment. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100309892 | Method and Arrangement for Transmitting a Data Unit in a Wireless Communications System - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for improving coverage in a wireless communications system. The object is achieved by a method in a sending node ( | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100316025 | Sharing a Frequency Band Between Different Radio Communications Protocols - A method including enabling a first mode of a first radio communications protocol using a shared radio frequency band and having a first defined schedule for communication in the shared radio frequency band; enabling a second mode of a second radio communications protocol using the shared radio frequency band and having a second defined schedule for communication in the shared radio frequency band; and enabling the first mode and disabling the second mode at a conflict time at which the first defined schedule and the second defined schedule coincide. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316026 | METHOD OF MANAGING CARRIERS IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for managing carriers allocated to a mobile station in a broadband wireless access system supporting multiple carriers, and an apparatus for use in the method are disclosed. A carrier management method for allowing a mobile station to perform carrier management in a broadband wireless access system supporting multiple carriers includes receiving a first message, which includes activation information indicating activation of at least one target carrier from among one or more second carriers allocated through a first carrier, from a base station, and transmitting a second message, which informs the base station of readiness or non-readiness of the at least one target carrier according to a result of the activation, to the base station. The activation information includes information indicating an activation time point, and the transmitting of the second message is performed at a specific time indicated by the activation time point information. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316027 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC AND DUAL ANTENNA BLUETOOTH (BT)/WLAN COEXISTENCE - An apparatus and method are disclosed for effectively and efficiently arbitrating concurrent usage between WLAN and Bluetooth access technologies for co-located wireless devices. A state level arbiter determines state and relevant parameters of a WLAN module and of a Bluetooth module of a wireless transceiver unit. The state level arbiter uses the state and relevant parameters to determine which access technology (WLAN or Bluetooth) or combination of the access technologies (WLAN or Bluetooth) will provide the best concurrent performance for wireless transmissions at a given time for specific Bluetooth states and WLAN states. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100316028 | Systems and Methods for Dynamic Aggregation of Bandwidth - Systems and methods are presented for the dynamic aggregation of communications network bandwidth. Communication devices are bonded in a community in which the communication resources of a bonded device can be used to transfer data on behalf of another bonded device. In an exemplary embodiment, communication devices are bonded wirelessly to share wireless wide area network communication channels. Bandwidth aggregation is performed dynamically based on user communication requirements and the current states of the bonded communication devices. Methods are presented by which communication devices can be automatically bonded when a predetermined bonding condition is satisfied. The methods and systems of the invention optimize utilization of communication resources in a cost-effective manner that provides a user high quality service as well as location mobility. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100322202 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION PARAMETER - A wireless communication system comprises a base station, wherein the base station performs scheduling for determining a resource block allocated to a mobile station, and determines a downlink transmission parameter based on a reception quality reported from the mobile station. The base station determines a transmission parameter by a predetermined first method for determining a transmission parameter when an identical resource block as a resource block allocated to any mobile station is allocated in an area adjacent to an area to which the mobile station is connecting, and determines a transmission parameter by a second method for determining a transmission parameter which selects a transmission parameter having a transmitting efficiency equal to or more than that by the first method for determining a transmission parameter when an identical resource block as a resource block allocated to any mobile station is not allocated in an area adjacent to an area to which the mobile station is connecting. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322203 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MONITORING OF TIMESLOTS DURING DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for coordinating communications between a user equipment and a base station is presented. The method includes receiving an assignment of a first set of timeslots for at least one of uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the base station. The method also includes transmitting to the base station an instruction to delay a reduction of a number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment to less than the first set of timeslots for communications. In some implementations, the instruction comprises at least one of a predetermined communication and a block including at least one of a dummy block format and a specified block format. The method may include transmitting a control block to the base station, the control block identifying one or more timeslots being monitored by the user equipment | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322204 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MONITORING OF TIMESLOTS DURING DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for coordinating communications between a user equipment and a base station is presented. The method includes receiving an assignment of a first set of timeslots for uplink communications between the user equipment and the base station using an Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) resource allocation algorithm. The method includes, after receiving the assignment of the first set of timeslots for uplink communications, reducing a number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment to less than the first set of timeslots for uplink communications, and transmitting uplink data to the base station using a non-EDA resource allocation algorithm. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322205 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MONITORING OF TIMESLOTS DURING DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for coordinating communications between a user equipment and a base station is presented. The method includes receiving an assignment of a first set of timeslots for at least one of uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the base station, reducing a number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment to a reduced set of timeslots, and receiving a second assignment of a second set of timeslots for at least one of uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the base station. When the second assignment message assigns a number of timeslots that is less than or equal to at least one of the number of timeslots in the reduced set of timeslots and the first set of timeslots, the method includes continuing to monitor the reduced set of timeslots. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322206 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MONITORING OF TIMESLOTS DURING DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for coordinating communications between a user equipment and a base station is presented. The method includes receiving an assignment of a first set of timeslots for at least one of uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the base station, and reducing a number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment to less than the first set of timeslots for communications. The method includes, after reducing the number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment to less than the first set of timeslots for communications, transmitting a block to the base station, the block signaling a resumption of timeslot monitoring by the user equipment, wherein the block includes at least one of a dummy block format, a specified block format, and a predetermined communication, and increasing the number of timeslots monitored by the user equipment. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322207 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MONITORING OF TIMESLOTS DURING DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for coordinating communications between a user equipment and a base station is presented. The method includes receiving an assignment of timeslots within each of a plurality of contiguous radio blocks for at least one of uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the base station. After receiving the assignment of timeslots within each of a plurality of contiguous radio blocks, the method includes reducing a number of radio blocks and associated timeslots monitored by the user equipment. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322208 | SYNCHRONIZATION DEVICE AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD - There is provided a synchronization device capable of, even when transmission timings of a plurality of other ships are different, almost reliably synchronizing with the other ships during a transmission of a ship concerned and is also provided a synchronization method. The synchronization device | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100322209 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR DETECTING ELECTRIC FIELD INTENSITY OF WIRELESS CHANNEL, AND PROGRAM STORING MEDIUM - A wireless communication apparatus includes a communication unit and a control unit. The communication unit periodically transmits a beacon signal to wireless terminal devices existing in a network using a use channel selected from wireless channels and to detect electric field intensities of the wireless channels. The control unit detects, by the communication unit, the electric field intensities of the wireless channels in a predetermined communication limiting period in a period during which wireless communication with an unspecified wireless terminal device existing in the network is prohibited in a period in which the beacon signal is transmitted. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100329219 | Method for Expression Evaluation and Network Node Implementing Such a Method - Method and network node ( | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329220 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting uplink data in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving an uplink grant and transmitting uplink data through a resource block which is indicated by the resource block index in a control region of a slot indicated by the slot indicator in the subframe. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100329221 | Transmission Mode Control Method And Communication Terminal Device - A transmission scheme controlling method performed by a radio communication device capable of performing radio communication with a different radio communication device in a transmission scheme in which a collision with another transmitting signal may occur is characterized by comprising the steps of: in response to communication requests collected from other radio communication devices, judging whether communication based on time slots is performed; when it is judged that the communication based on the time slots is performed, performing processing for assigning the time slots according to the collected communication requests; and when it is judged that the communication based on the time slots is not performed, performing the ratio communication with the different radio communication device in the transmission scheme. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20110002310 | RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND FRAME TRANSMISSION ADJUSTING METHOD - In adjusting transmission timings of frames sequentially transmitted from a radio network controller to a base transceiver station, the frame transmission schedule is changed in appropriate manner in response to a necessary Timing Adjustment control frame (TA). In a first period of time, which is a period of ignoring the received TA, the adjustment of the transmission timings of the frames is suspended. Also, out of the first period, the first period is varied in accordance with a variety of the delayed amount in transmission between the radio network controller and the base transceiver station. There is provided a period of ignoring a first control frame to be informed from the radio base transceiver station to the radio network controller. By setting the period to be a variable value, the synchronisation control is accomplished with certainty. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002311 | GATEWAY, BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR WINDOW-BASED CONTENT SYNCHRONIZATION - The present disclosure relates to a gateway, base station and method for window-based content synchronization technology. The gateway according the present invention comprises; a receiving unit for receiving a data packet; a window counting unit for counting the data packet, such that a predetermined number of packets forms a window, the number being a window size; a sequence number counting unit for generating a sequence number of the packet; a timestamp setting unit for setting a timestamp for the packet; and a processing unit for including the generated sequence number, the timestamp and a byte count in the packet to be transmitted. The base station according to the present invention comprises: a receiving unit for receiving a data packet; an information extracting unit for extracting a sequence number, a timestamp and byte count information from the data packet; a window counting unit for counting the received packets based on the extracted sequence number so as to form a window; and a processing unit for setting an anticipated air interface transmission time for the packets in the current window based on the extracted timestamp. The gateway or base station according to the present invention operates well with statistical multiplexing and has an improved overall performance in terms of synchronization processing delay and control packets load. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110002312 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CELL STATION USING THE SAME - A radio controller, which prescribes repetition of a frame formed by a plurality of downlink time slots and a plurality of uplink time slots, and which allocates a first data to be broadcast and a second data to be transmitted to a personal station with switching to the downlink time slots corresponding to each other in each frame. Further, the radio controller allocates a third data, which should be received from the personal station, to the uplink time slot corresponding to the downlink time slot allocated to the first data and to the uplink time slot corresponding to the downlink time slot allocated to the second data. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110007717 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE TIMING DOMAINS FOR PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTION IN EUTRA/LTE - A mobile device receives a signal, from a base station, comprising a primary synchronization sequence (PSS) and a secondary synchronization sequence (SSS). The mobile device utilizes two different sampling rates to perform the PSS synchronization and the SSS detection individually. For example, the mobile device synchronizes to the received PSS at a first sampling rate such as 0.96 MHz, which is determined based on the PSS transmission rate and/or the length of the received PSS. The mobile device detects the received SSS at a second sampling rate such as 1.92 MHz, which equals to the sampling rate for an analog-to-digital conversion at the mobile device. The received PSS and associated symbol timing are detected through the PSS synchronization to support the SSS detection. The detected SSS is used to acquire cell-specific parameters such as cell ID. The acquired cell-specific parameters ensure proper communications between the mobile device and the base station. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007718 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING TIMED EVENTS IN A RADIO FRAME IN AN E-UTRA/LTE UE RECEIVER - A mobile device coupled to a common system clock receives a signal comprising a primary synchronization sequence (PSS) and a secondary synchronization sequence (SSS) in a radio frame. Sample counts are generated for timed events based on corresponding operating bandwidths. The timed events are detected at modulo sample counts of the generated sample counts according to corresponding operating bandwidths. PSS symbol timing determined via the PSS synchronization is aligned to the generated sample counts based on corresponding operating bandwidth. The generated sample counts are bit-shifted relative to the aligned PSS symbol timing for other timed events based on corresponding operating bandwidths. The one or more timed events are determined via performing modulo counting after the bit-shifting. Timing operations are performed at the determined timed events and the determined one or more timed events are refined, accordingly. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007719 | METHOD FOR SETTING TRANSMISSION TIMING OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A method for setting an uplink transmission timing of a wireless communication apparatus, comprises: acquiring an initial uplink transmission advance timing by an initial ranging procedure during the wireless communication apparatus being served by SBS; receiving a downlink preamble signal from SBS; determining the downlink preamble signal receiving time at the wireless communication apparatus; and, setting an uplink transmission timing for the wireless communication apparatus according to the acquired initial uplink transmission advance timing and the downlink preamble signal receiving time. Another method comprises: acquiring an initial uplink transmission advance timing by an initial ranging procedure during the wireless communication apparatus being served by SBS; handing over the wireless communication apparatus to TBS from SBS; and, updating the uplink transmission timing for the wireless communication apparatus according to the acquired initial uplink transmission advance timing and the difference of receiving times of downlink preamble signals transmitted from SBS and TBS. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110007720 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus includes a base-station receiver which receives information indicating the occurrence of the given event in the wireless terminal device, the information being transmitted from the wireless terminal device using the common slot. The base station apparatus includes a base-station transmission and reception manager which determines the number of random slots assigned as random slots to transmit the bandwidth request information for the given event among random slots in the random access period, based on the occurrence of the given event received by the base-station receiver. The base station apparatus includes a base-station transmitter which transmits, in the base station apparatus, information on the assigned random slots to the wireless terminal device of random access period. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110013601 | METHOD FOR THE DYNAMIC RESERVATION AND ALLOCATION OF TIME SLOTS IN A NETWORK WITH SERVICE WARRANTY - Method of resource reservation with service guarantee in terms of throughput and deadline at the level of the N nodes of a radio network using time slots to send and transmit data, characterized in that it implements a global reservation process in which, a reservation message sent uses at least one of the following two parameters: the maximum deadline required to access the radio medium, the minimum throughput required in order to satisfy the service guarantee. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110013602 | MOBILE TERMINAL - A technology is disclosed for providing a mobile terminal that can prevent occurrence of packet loss and prevent communication delay. Based on the technology, the mobile terminal performs packet communication via a communication network with a communication terminal that is a communication partner of the mobile terminal, using a binding cache including address information of the communication terminal. The mobile terminal includes a measuring means | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110019649 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE STATION LOCATION DETERMINATION IN WIMAX - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide techniques for determining and communicating the location of a mobile station within a wireless communication system. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110026498 | Data Communication Method, Wireless Communication System, and Base Station - The invention provides a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the wireless communication system comprises a base station and user equipment. The base station transmits data to user equipment via a plurality of the component carriers comprising a series of data transmission cycles, interleaves starting time of a plurality of active periods of the component carriers in each data transmission cycle in an order, and sends control data to the user equipment via the component carriers during the active periods of the component carriers. The user equipment receives the control data via the component carriers during the active periods of the component carriers. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110026499 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH A MAPPING SYSTEM ALLOWING NODES TO REGISTER WITH A CONTROLLER - A communication system is provided that includes a controller providing a map of information to enable communication with a plurality of nodes. The information includes identification of two separate time slots, one for random access requests when a node initially contacts a controller and another for exclusively assigned access to transmit messages. The map can further provide information to enable identification of the nodes and assign transmission frequencies. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110032912 | MAC PROTOCOL FOR MULTI-CHANNEL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A distributed coordination of a wireless network operating on different channels is provided by dispatching a device on each ‘home’ channel to regularly visit other ‘foreign’ channels to propagate and listen to broadcast information on these channels. The information in the broadcast packets transmitted on the home channel is relayed to the devices on the foreign channels by the dispatched device, as a ‘proxy device’ that operates on behalf of the other devices in the home channel. In a preferred embodiment, various aspects of this proxy process are optimized to reduce overhead and delays. Each channel is configured to distinguish home devices from foreign devices, to avoid contention between home and foreign devices. Acquired beacon slots on foreign channels are reserved to facilitate returning proxy devices. At the home channel, an anchor device alerts other devices of the proxy device's temporary absence and preserves the proxy device's beacon slot on the home channel. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110038355 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF COMMUNICATION EMPLOYING SPATIAL REUSE RESERVATION PROTOCOL - A wireless device ( | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110044295 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION MODE SELECTION IN COOPERATIVE RELAY - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus, comprising at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: select at least two relay stations from a plurality of relay stations; determine a transmission mode for cooperatively forwarding a data packet by the selected relay stations; schedule a resource allocation for the selected relay stations based at least in part on the transmission mode; and notify the selected relay stations of the resource allocation, is disclosed. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044296 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL FOR MULTIPLE TRANSMIT ANTENNAS - Techniques for controlling the transmit power of a user equipment (UE) using multiple antennas for uplink transmission are described. In one design, the UE receives at least one transmit power control (TPC) command for the multiple antennas. The UE adjusts the transmit power for each antenna based on the TPC command(s). In one design, the UE receives a single TPC command for all antennas and adjusts the transmit power for each antenna based on this TPC command. All antennas may then have equal transmit power. In another design, the UE receives multiple TPC commands for multiple antenna groups, one TPC command for each antenna group. Each antenna group may include one antenna or more than one antenna. The UE adjusts the transmit power for each antenna group based on the TPC command for that antenna group. All antennas in each antenna group may have equal transmit power. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044297 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA BLOCK ON UPLINK FREQUENCIES - A method and apparatus of generating a data block for a plurality of uplink frequencies is provided. The apparatus determines a size of a data field of the data block so that each data block matches a minimum of a first amount of data and second amount of data. The first amount of data is allowed to be transmitted by a first grant on a first uplink frequency and the second amount of data is allowed to be transmitted by a second grant on a second uplink frequency. The apparatus generates at least one data block so that the amount of data in the generated data blocks is less than multiple times the minimum of the first amount of data and the second amount of data. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044298 | DETERMINISTIC BACKOFF CHANNEL ACCESS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for determining timing of transmit opportunities for wireless stations. According to certain aspects, an access point transmits a downlink transmission containing a deterministic slot count. A station receiving the downlink transmission may determining timing of a transmit opportunity for transmitting a return frame based, at least in part, on the deterministic slot count. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044299 | VAMOS transmission schemes - A method includes assigning a communication channel for simultaneous transmission to at least first and second mobile communication terminals using a Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM) communication protocol. Upon determining that data is to be transmitted over the communication channel to both the first and the second mobile communication terminals, the data is transmitted at a first power level that is defined for transmission to the first mobile communication terminal as part of the simultaneous transmission. Upon determining that the data is to be transmitted over the communication channel only to the first mobile communication terminal, the data is transmitted at a second power level that is defined for transmission only to the first mobile communication terminal and is lower than the first power level. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044300 | Techniques for Accessing a Wireless Communication System with Tune-Away Capability - To access a first communication system, a terminal determines a transmission time for an access probe, an expected response time from the system, and a protected time interval based on the transmission time and/or expected response time. The terminal determines a starting time for sending the access probe such that the protected time interval does not overlap a tune-away interval in which the terminal is to monitor anther frequency/air-interface. This starting time may be set initially to the end of a prior access probe plus a pseudo-random wait duration and may be advanced forward or moved backward in time, if needed, by a time duration selected such that the protected time interval does not overlap the tune-away interval. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110044301 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL - A method of transmitting a synchronization channel is provided. A plurality of block sequences for determining at least one block identifier is generated. A plurality of subcarriers of a synchronization channel are divided into a polarity of blocks, and the plurality of block sequences are allocated to the blocks to generate a synchronization signal. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110051695 | Methods and Devices for Scheduling Transmissions in a Wireless Network Based on Traffic Priority and Channel Conditions - Methods and systems for assigning time-division multiplexed (TDM) slots in a multi-channel TDM system are presented. Preferably, a radio access network (RAN) assigns forward link and reverse link transmissions between the RAN and one or more wireless communication devices (WCDs) to TDM slots on various wireless channels. When making these assignments, the RAN may take into account (i) the priority of data that the RAN queues for the WCDs, and (ii) the signal quality at which the WCDs can receive the various wireless channels. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051696 | METHOD OF RADIO COMMUNICATION, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROL APPARATUS - A method of radio communication in a radio communication system including a plurality of mobile terminals and a base transceiver station. The method includes establishing radio communication between a first mobile terminal and the base transceiver station by using a first physical channel and a first dedicated channel, wherein a slot of the first physical channel is shared by time-division multiplexing by first and second control information, the first control information being for the first dedicated channel of the first mobile terminal, the second control information being for a second dedicated channel of a second mobile terminal, and switching the first physical channel to a second physical channel on the basis of a first communication quality of the established radio communication, wherein a slot of the second physical channel is dedicated to the first control information. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110051697 | Apparatus, System, and Method for Access Procedure Enhancements - A mobile communication device for access procedure enhancement is provided. In the mobile communication device, a wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a service network. Also, a controller module transmits an access probe to the service network via the wireless module, and retransmits the access probe in response to not receiving an acknowledgement of the access probe from the service network via the wireless module in a waiting period of time. The waiting period of time is determined according to a coherence-time related offset. The controller module further repeats the retransmission of the access probe until the acknowledgement of the access probe is received from the service network via the wireless module | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110064061 | BASE STATION, TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Conventionally, different HARQ processes | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110069682 | RANGING CHANNEL STRUCTURES AND METHODS - To facilitate ranging between mobile terminals and a base station in a wireless communication network employing orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) for uplink data communications, a periodic ranging channel for use by a mobile terminal may be defined. A ranging transmission may periodically be sent as a spread signal across specified blocks of sub-carrier frequencies within a specified time slot. The duration of the ranging transmission may be less than a duration of an OFDM subframe. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069683 | ALLOCATION METHOD AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME - One object of the present invention is to prevent deterioration of communication quality and perform handover while maintaining a stable communication state. The terminal detection unit classifies a terminal device | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110069684 | METHOD OF CHANNEL ASSESSMENT AND CHANNEL SEARCHING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of channel assessment and channel searching in a wireless network is disclosed. The wireless network separately performs a channel assessment procedure and a channel searching procedure for channel change or another object. The channel assessment procedure is to measure a status or quality of a channel which is currently used in the wireless network. A coordinator of the wireless network designates a time interval for the channel assessment to notify other device of it. The channel assessment procedure may be performed periodically, and is preferably scheduled to allow other devices not to use the channel for the time interval which at least one device performs channel assessment. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110075636 | RANDOM ACCESS WITH FULL COVERAGE ON SELECTED RESOURCES - Random access coverage is assured while at the same time supporting high uplink data rates in a same service area served by a base station. A set of radio resources are shared by multiple mobile terminals for transmitting uplink to the base station including requests for access to service from the base station and transmissions for active connections with the base station. A first repeating time period and a second different repeating time period are defined. Uplink transmission grants are scheduled for active connections that permit use of a greater amount of the radio resources during the first repeating time period. Uplink transmission grants are also scheduled for active connections that permit use of a smaller amount of those resources during the second repeating time period. At least some random access requests to the base station are controlled to occur only during the second repeating time period. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075637 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A PSEUDO PILOT SIGNAL - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for processing a pseudo pilot signal. The method includes: transmitting a data service carrier signal on a first frequency in a first cell to a mobile station (MS); and transmitting a pseudo pilot signal corresponding to a voice service carrier signal on a first frequency in a second cell in at least one timeslot of the timeslots for transmitting the data service carrier signal. The apparatus includes: a first baseband processing module, configured to transmit a data service carrier signal on a first frequency in a first cell to an MS; a second baseband processing module, configured to transmit a pseudo pilot signal corresponding to a voice service carrier signal on a first frequency in a second cell; and a switching processing module, configured to switch the data service carrier signal transmitted by the first baseband processing module and the pseudo pilot signal transmitted by the second baseband processing module so that the pseudo pilot signal is transmitted in at least one timeslot of the timeslots for transmitting the data service carrier signal. With the present invention, the system complexity is decreased. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075638 | TIME SLICING TECHNIQUES FOR VARIABLE DATA RATE ENCODING - The disclosure is directed to a multi-channel encoder. The multi-channel encoder is configured to generate an encoded data stream. The multi-channel encoder includes a plurality of channel encoders, and a processor configured to allocate time slots in the encoded data stream to each of the channel encoders to vary the rate of data provided by each of the channel encoders into the encoded data stream. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075639 | UPLINK ACCESS REQUEST IN AN OFDM COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - The claimed subject matter relates to acquiring channel access in a wireless communication environment. A wireless terminal may transmit first and second sets of tones over respective first and second contiguous transmission periods. The first and second tone sets may be disjoint from each other and may each comprise a number of contiguous tones. The terminal may then refrain from transmitting during a third time period in order to receive a grant signal from a base station in response to the access request. The beginnings of the first time period and the second time period may be a function of a determined uplink transmission time. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110075640 | Method, System and Mobile Station for Obtaining Information - A method for obtaining information includes receiving carrier information and offset information of other carriers carried on a primary carrier, where the offset information includes frame number information, time difference information or window information; and obtaining, according to the carrier information and the offset information, data resources carried on the other carriers. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110080896 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL INTERFERENCE | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110085522 | METHOD FOR ALLOCATING SLOTS FOR EMERGENCY DATA AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING EMERGENCY DATA USING THE SAME - There are provided a method for allocating slots for emergency data and a method for transmitting emergency data using the same. The method for allocating slots for emergency data may be configured to include: allocating slots for emergency data to superframes that are configured to include a beacon period indicating a start of the superframe, a contention access period (CAP) transmitting data through contention, and a contention free period (CFP) transmitting data without contention; and providing slot allocating information on the emergency data to nodes. As a result, the method for allocating slots for emergency data allocates the separate slots for the emergency data while avoiding the contention access period (CAP) frequently used, which are used in the inter-node contention mode to enable the plurality of nodes to use one slot for one emergency data. In particular, even though there may be the risk of transmission failure due to the contention mode, the occurrence frequency of the emergency message, or the like, is low, which results in a similar effect to allocating the dedicated slots for the emergency data to the plurality of nodes while avoiding the transmission failure. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110090876 | REDUCED TRANMISSION TIME INTERVAL - A method is suggested for communicating to a mobile station which timeslots are configured as packet data channel pairs and on which of these packet data channel pairs the mobile station is assigned resources, wherein a description of packet data channel pairs is separated into “configuration” and an “assignment”. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110103352 | DETERMINISTIC BACKOFF WITH DYNAMIC ADAPTATION - Certain aspects provide techniques for conveying transmit opportunity (TXOP) scheduling information that can be used by a plurality of wireless nodes to determine TXOPs for sending transmissions. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110110340 | Method and Apparatus for Directional Centralized Contention Based Period in a Wireless Communication System - A method of communication includes allocating a portion of a superframe centralized contention based period where the access method is based on directional ALOHA. The centralized contention based period is divided into equal time slots, and each sequential set of N time slots forms a time cycle. During a time cycle, a wireless device listens for requests from other wireless devices while it changes its receiving direction from one time slot to another. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110110341 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING BROADCASTING CHANNELS - A method for transmitting and receiving a broadcast channel is disclosed. A wireless access system, a method for effectively transmitting and receiving a broadcast channel, a variety of superframe structures, and a super frame header structure are disclosed. A method for effectively receiving a broadcast channel includes receiving, by a mobile station (MS), a first broadcast channel including first information about a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) applied to a second broadcast channel, and receiving the second broadcast channel using the first information. The first broadcast channel is transmitted using a fixed modulation and coding scheme (MCS) value, and the second broadcast channel is transmitted using a variable modulation and coding scheme (MCS) value. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110116481 | Preamble Offset for Femto Base Stations - According to one example embodiment, a method may include receiving, by a first femto base station via a femto base station air interface, at least one neighbor preamble from at least one neighbor femto base station. The method may further include sending, by the first femto base station to a macro base station via a guided (DSL) Internet connection, an interference report, the interference report being based at least in part on the at least one neighbor preamble received from the at least one neighbor femto base station. The method may further include receiving, by the first femto base station from the macro base station via the guided Internet connection, a resource allocation message. The method may further include sending, by the first femto base station via the femto base station air interface, a first femto base station preamble, the first femto base station preamble being sent at a time determined at least in part by the resource allocation message. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110122849 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SILENCE PERIODS IN DIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A method of facilitating a silence period in a directional communication network is provided. The method may comprise initiating, by a first apparatus, a listening period mode, wherein the listening period mode comprises ceasing at least a portion of current communication and configuring the first apparatus to receive a request to initiate a new communication, determining whether a request is received during a time period in the listening period mode, and transmitting a response if the request to initiate the new communication is received during the time period in the listening period mode. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122850 | RANDOM ACCESS BURST TRANSMISSION SCHEME - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless telecommunication system and to a method for transmitting random access bursts in such an apparatus. The apparatus includes a transmitter for transmitting random access bursts, a receiver for receiving acknowledgement information confirming a successful transmission of a random access burst, a decision unit for deciding if acknowledgement information has been received, and a control unit for randomly choosing a time point for an attempt to retransmit said random access burst from an interval if no acknowledgement information has been received after a random access burst had been transmitted. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110122851 | SELF-ORGANIZING COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR THE OPERATION THEREOF - A radio communication network having at least two base stations. The base stations communicate with mobile stations using time slots. The time slots are divided into transmission slots, during which the base stations transmit messages, and receiving slots, during which the base stations receive messages. The base stations jointly determine an assignment of the time slots as transmission slots and receiving slots. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110128940 | TIMESLOT CONVERSION IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cellular communication system employs an air interface time frame structure comprising time frames divided into a plurality of timeslots. In the system, a timeslot configuration processor ( | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128941 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus in a radio communications system is disclosed. The radio communications system has a mobile station apparatus and the base station apparatus in communication with the mobile station apparatus to which is applied a scheduling scheme which allocates a radio resource for each of constant periods. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110128942 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION ABOUT DOWNLINK MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting uplink control information in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving one or more downlink component carriers among N downlink component carriers created by dividing a multi-carrier by an integer N, and transmitting control information about the received one or more downlink component carriers in one or more uplink component carriers among N uplink component carriers created by dividing a multi-carrier by the integer N, wherein the control information about the received one or more downlink component carriers is distributed equally or unequally to the one or more uplink component carriers and the control information includes at least one of a Channel Quality Information/Precoding Matrix Index (CQI/PMI), an ACKnowledgment/Negative ACKnowledgment (ACK/NACK), and a Rank Indication (RI). | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110134891 | WiMAX Scheduling Algorithm for Co-Located WiFi and WiMAX Central Points - After receiving an indication that a co-located central point is receiving co-location interference, a scheduling algorithm may be initiated. The scheduling may include allocating equal number of central points within each WiMAX frame. Each central point is allocated into a minimum number of frames subject to WiMAX capacity constraints. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134892 | RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD - A radio base station of the present invention is provided with an index setting unit configured to set an index to a radio resource in a frequency domain, a resource allocation class determining unit is configured to determine a resource allocation class of a radio communication terminal from among resource allocation classes which are classified according to radio resource allocation patterns fixedly allocated at a fixed time interval T | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110134893 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PAGING INFORMATION - Various methods of transmitting paging information in a wireless access system are disclosed. A method of transmitting paging information from a base station belonging to at least one paging groups according to one embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of allocating a paging group offset (PGO) per one specific one of at least one paging groups, transmitting a message including one paging group offset (PGO) per one specific paging group, and transmitting a broadcast channel (BCH) including paging group formation on the specific paging group at a timing point indicated by the paging group offset. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110142012 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING CHANNEL TIME FOR VARIABLE BIT RATE (VBR) TRAFFIC, APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING DATA AND METHOD THEREOF - A method of allocating a variable bit rate traffic in an unallocated channel time is disclosed. The present invention includes determining whether an unallocated channel time is great enough to allocate the channel time for VBR traffic when receiving a request for a channel time for the VBR traffic and allocating the VBR traffic channel time in a portion of the unallocated channel time. The method allocates an unallocated channel time by considering a channel time request of VBR traffic, thereby securing resource operation and management efficiency within a beacon interval. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110142013 | Relative Time Division for Network Coding - A base station serves multiple user terminals via a relay node in a cell of a wireless network. The base station includes a time division scheme selection unit that selects a time division scheme from multiple time division schemes that optimizes a parameter associated with network coding of data transmitted between the multiple user terminals and the base station via the relay node. The base station further includes a transmission allocation unit that allocates uplink and/or downlink transmission intervals and interval lengths, based on the selected time division scheme, to each of the multiple user terminals and to the relay node. The base station also includes a notification message unit that notifies the multiple user terminals and the relay node of their respective transmission interval and interval length allocation. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110149918 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SIMULTANEOUSLY COMMUNICATING WITH A GROUP OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of simultaneously communicating with a group of wireless communication devices. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to communicate with at least one group of a plurality of wireless communication devices over a wireless communication medium, wherein the wireless communication unit is to reserve the wireless communication medium for a time period, during which the wireless communication unit is to simultaneously transmit two or more different wireless communication transmissions to two or more wireless communication devices of the group, respectively. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149919 | Dynamic Adjustment of Reordering Release Timer - Aspects describe dynamically adjusting a reordering release timer to mitigate latency in a MAC-hs queue. Information already available at a mobile device is utilized for current packets and for missing packets to dynamically adjust the value of the T1 timer in an effort to mitigate latency. Further, the network might provide information regarding HARQ attempts, which mobile device can utilize for computing the dynamic value of the T1 timer. The network might signal the amount of time the mobile device should subtract from timer T1 for every HARQ transmission. Further, the T1 timer might only be dynamically adjusted for a subset of radio bearers. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149920 | MULTI-RADIO PLATFORM AND METHOD FOR MITIGATING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN CO-LOCATED RADIOS - Embodiments of a multi-radio platform and method for mitigating the effects of interference are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the multi-radio platform includes co-located radios including a Bluetooth transceiver and a wireless network transceiver. The wireless network transceiver may apply a transmit-active noise-cancellation matrix to signals received by the wireless network transceiver when the Bluetooth transceiver is transmitting and may apply a transmit-inactive noise-cancellation matrix to signals received when the Bluetooth transceiver is not transmitting. The transmit-active noise-cancellation matrix may mitigate effects of emissions generated by the Bluetooth transceiver when the Bluetooth transceiver is transmitting. The transmit-inactive noise-cancellation matrix is to mitigate effects of platform noise generated by platform elements of the multi-radio platform. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149921 | METHOD FOR ASSIGNING AND MANAGING REFERENCE SIGNALS IN A MULTI-CELL ENVIRONMENT, AND NETWORK DEVICE AND TERMINAL FOR APPLYING THE METHOD - A method of assigning and managing reference signals in a multi-cell environment, and a network device and a terminal for applying the method, are provided. Reference signal patterns may be assigned to multiple femtocells through a long term coordination of a central control unit that is used to control multiple cells. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149922 | Method and apparatus for enhancing signal-to-noise ratio of position location measurements - A method and apparatus for generating and use of a position location reference signal that allows a receiver to receive position location signals from relatively weak signal generators when in the presence of a strong signal source. The position location reference signals from multiple sources can be synchronized to occur within a scheduled time slot of a time division multiplexed communication system. During the scheduled time slot, each signal source can configure a transmission that includes a media access control address that corresponds to a value reserved for position location signals. Each signal source also configures the transmission to include a position location reference signal that corresponds to the signal source. The position location signals from each of the signal sources is positioned to occur at a time within the data portion of the scheduled time slot that no neighboring signal source transmits its corresponding position location signal. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110149923 | WIRELESS BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless base station apparatus for performing wireless communication with a plurality of wireless communication apparatuses includes a communication processing unit for allocating wireless resources to the wireless communication apparatuses to perform wireless communication, a statistics processing unit for obtaining information related to communication status of the wireless communication apparatuses in wireless communication, and an intermittent arrangement determination unit for detecting a wireless communication apparatus to be allocated with wireless resource at intervals of a predetermined number of communication frames based on the information obtained. The communication processing unit intermittently allocates the same time slot to a plurality of wireless communication apparatuses detected by the intermittent arrangement determination unit at intervals of a predetermined number of communication frames. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110158203 | PROPORTIONAL FAIR SCHEDULING WITH PACKET TRANSMISSION - A scheduler for transmission of Packetized data over a transmission link between a base station device and various terminal devices, each packet being associated with one terminal device, and the packets being of variable length. The scheduler calculates for each terminal device a proportional fair allocation metric, assigns a next available channel transmission resource to a device having a best metric, but only actually sends a next packet to a respective terminal device provided that respectively allocated and as yet unused channel transmission resources are sufficient to accommodate the next packet. Thus the packets are sent unfragmented and based on a proportional fair resource allocation. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158204 | RELIABLE AND LOW-LATENCY SENSOR NETWORK MAC SYSTEM AND METHOD USING SUPERFRAME - Provided are a reliability-based, real-time sensor network medium access control (MAC) communication system and method using a superframe. The superframe includes an active duration which is a time duration in which a communication is established, and a sleep duration which is a time duration in which no communication is established. The active duration includes a beacon block in which a plurality of beacon transmission nodes are respectively allocated beacon slots for transmitting a beacon frame, and a forwarding block in which each of sinks nodes is allocated a slot for unifying data regarding the sink node and data regarding sensor nodes managed by the sink node and transmit the result of unifying in order to establish a communication between the sink nodes and between each of the sink nodes and a base station. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158205 | Method And Apparatus For Concerted Signal Transmission On Multiple Antennas - A communication method is provided for use in a network in which users are allocated respective symbol positions within timeslots for communication to the respective users from a base station. A signal periodically transmitted from at least two antennas of the base station to a user terminal represents coded information. The signal is transmitted within each of a plurality of periodic timeslots. Within each timeslot, each antenna transmits the same coded information only during an assigned symbol position. The symbol positions assigned to the respective antennas are separated in time according to a specified sequential spacing of symbol positions within the timeslot. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110158206 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ALLOCATION GUARANTEED TIME SLOTS FOR EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION OF TIME-CRITICAL DATA IN IEEE 802.15.4 WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORKS - A guaranteed time slot allocation scheme is provided for the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for use in wireless personal area networks having sensor devices to overcome bandwidth under-utilization for time-critical or delay-sensitive data transmissions. A fractional knapsack problem is formulated to obtain optimal guaranteed time slot allocation with which a minimum bandwidth requirement is guaranteed for the sensor devices. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110170521 | Dynamic Downlink Beamforming Weight Estimation for Beamforming-Space Time Code Transmissions - Techniques are provided to improve wireless beamformed communication between first and second wireless communication devices. At a plurality of antennas of the first wireless communication device (e.g., a base station) uplink transmissions sent from the second wireless communication device (e.g., a client or mobile device or station) are received. The first wireless communication device generates a downlink beamforming weight vector from received uplink transmissions, and computes a covariance matrix for received uplink transmissions. The first wireless communication device stores history information based on the covariance matrices for received uplink transmissions. The first wireless communication device computes first and second beamforming-space time code weight vectors based on the covariance matrix for an uplink transmission received in a current frame and the history information. The first wireless communication device uses the first and second beamforming-space time code weight vectors for a beamforming-space time code transmission technique to send a downlink transmission to the second wireless communication device. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110170522 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR SPATIAL DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM - A wireless transmission method comprises the steps of: determining transmission time slots and start antenna indexes of a plurality of stations in a spatial division multiple access system according to the number of antennas of the plurality of stations; broadcasting a control frame signal to the plurality of stations and waiting for requests to transmit signals from the plurality of stations, wherein the control frame signal includes the transmission time slots and start antenna indexes of the plurality of stations; receiving the requests to transmit signals from the plurality of stations; and broadcasting a clear to transmit signal to the plurality of stations based on the received request to transmit signals. The requests to transmit signals of the plurality of stations, which are transmitted based on the transmission time slots and start antenna indexes of the plurality of stations, conform to a multi-input multi-output transmission standard of the access point. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110170523 | DIRECTED BEACONING USING POLLING FOR DEVICES WITH DIFFERENT CAPABILITIES - A method and system for directed beaconing in a superframe structure ( | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110176519 | Signalling of Multiple-User Multiple-Input and Multiple-Output Transmissions in High-Speed Packet Access Systems - A method for signaling multiple-user multiple-input and multiple-output in a high speed packet access system is described. A multiple-user multiple-input and multiple-output parameter is determined. A message that includes the multiple-user multiple-input and multiple-output parameter is determined. The message is sent to a wireless device. The method may be performed by a user equipment, a Node B or a radio network controller. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176520 | TECHNIQUES FOR EFFICIENT DATA TRANSFERS IN A BODY AREA NETWORK - A method for transferring data among devices in a body area network (BAN). The method comprises dividing an access time to a wireless medium of the BAN into at least a contention-based period ( | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176521 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PACKET OF NODE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided is an apparatus and method of transmitting a packet of a node in a wireless sensor network. The apparatus includes a plurality of priority queues, wherein packets to be transmitted to neighboring nodes are stored in each of the priority queues according to transmission priority, and the packets are transmitted according to the priority of each priority queue. Accordingly, a delay of a packet that requires real-time transmission is minimized by using priority queues in a node. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110176522 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and system for managing communication in a Multi-User Reusing One time Slot (MUROS) based communication network is provided. The method includes selecting a first communication device from a plurality of communication devices in the communication network, determining a Timing Advance (TA) associated with the first communication device and identifying a type of the first communication device, identifying a second communication device from the plurality of communication devices based on a TA associated with the second communication device, a type of the second communication device, the TA of the first communication device, and the type of the first communication device, and pairing the first communication device and the second communication device in a first time slot for establishing communication with the plurality of communication devices. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110188481 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUBFRAME INTERLACING IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for providing wireless communications using subframe partitioning are disclosed. Two or more base stations may be allocated subframes in a radio frame. All or part of the subframe allocation may be provided to the associated user equipment (UEs), which may use it to determine signal metrics during assigned subframes for an associated base station. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110194539 | ACCESS WINDOW ENVELOPE CONTROLLER IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method may include receiving a packet destined to a wireless node, buffering the packet, and scheduling a time at which to transmit the packet to the wireless node. Scheduling the packet may include determining an application-layer protocol associated with the packet. The method may also include wirelessly transmitting the packet to the wireless node at the scheduled time. In one embodiment, the method may also include sending information to a node that originated the packet indicating that the packet is buffered. In another embodiment, sending information to the node that originated the packet indicating that the packet is scheduled to be wirelessly transmitted at the scheduled time. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110200018 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVED CONTROL CHANNEL TRANSMIT DIVERSITY - A method for providing transmit diversity in wireless network communications is presented. An indication of a slot structure is received. The slot structure identifies at least a first location of a reference signal within a slot. A first reference signal is transmitted within a first slot using a first antenna. A location of the first reference signal within the first slot is determined by the slot structure. A second reference signal is transmitted within the first slot using a second antenna. A location of the second reference signal within the first slot is determined by the slot structure. In some cases, the slot structure identifies a second location of a reference signal within the slot structure. The second location being offset from the first location, and a third reference signal is transmitted within the first slot at the second location on the first antenna. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110200019 | Methods and Nodes in a Wireless Communication System - Embodiments herein include a network node and a mobile station in a wireless communication system. Embodiments also include a method in the mobile station and a method in the network node. With particular regard to the method in the network node, the method schedules wireless transmissions between the network node and the mobile station. The method comprises obtaining a multi-slot class of the mobile station and determining a downlink Temporary Block Flow configuration. Further, the method comprises assigning uplink timeslots to the mobile station and associating each assigned uplink timeslot with a priority value, based on the downlink Temporary Block Flow configuration and the multi-slot class of the mobile station. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110200020 | CONTINUOUS MODE OPERATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for a continuous communications mode in a wireless communications system. The technique may involve processing bundles of transmission time interval (TTI) transmissions having transmission times that are mapped to voice-over-internet-protocol (VOIP) arrival times, wherein the bundled TTI transmissions are processed without acknowledgements to indicate the bundled TTI transmissions have been successfully received. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110206016 | MANAGEMENT OF ACCESS TO A MEDIUM - The present invention relates to, in a wireless network in which wireless stations transmit frames, a method of managing the access of the medium to a wireless station once a frame or a sequence of frames has been transmitted by the wireless station, the method comprising: (a) generating a time value resulting from a function of the duration of the frame or the sequence of frames to be transmitted, (b) transmitting the frame or the sequence of frames; and (c) after step (b), the wireless station refraining from access to the medium by counting down a refraining time, the value of the refraining time being determined by taking account of the said time value. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110206017 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR BEACON TRANSMISSION - Various methods and apparatuses for beacon transmission in an ad-hoc peer-to-peer network are disclosed. In one aspect, an apparatus for communication is disclosed, the apparatus comprising a processing system configured to identify a plurality of successive beacon transmission periods separated by at least one non-beacon transmission period and to select one or more beacon transmission periods from the plurality of successive beacon transmission periods and a transmitter configured to transmit one or more beacons during each of the selected beacon transmission periods. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110206018 | PROVIDING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT INFORMATION BY A WIRELESS DEVICE - In general, to provide acknowledgment information by a first wireless device, the first wireless device sends repeated instances of acknowledgment information in respective first and second frame structures, in response to receipt of first information from a second wireless devalue. In addition, the first wireless device also sends further acknowledgment information in the second frame structure that is responsive to second information received from the second wireless device. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110206019 | Synchronization Scheduling Method - A synchronous scheduling method is provided. The method comprises: an appointed network element determining scheduling transmission time interval of a service according to length of a synchronization sequence and time division multiplexing period of the service, and sends the determined scheduling transmission time interval to multiple lower layer network elements (S | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110211562 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR BEACON TRANSMISSION - Various methods and apparatuses for beacon transmission in an ad-hoc peer-to-peer network are disclosed. In one aspect, an apparatus for communication is disclosed, the apparatus comprising a processing system configured to sense a channel during a first period comprising at least a first portion of a beacon transmission period and select, based on the sensing, a second period comprising at least a second portion of a beacon transmission period; and a transmitter configured to transmit one or more beacons during the second period. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110216745 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SIGNALING OVERHEAD INFORMATION IN A NETWORK - A system for signaling overhead information in a network includes a receiver configured to receive a radio frequency communication signal comprising at least one superframe, the at least one superframe comprising overhead information that identifies a location of a first data stream carried in the at least one superframe, and a trailer associated with the first data stream, the trailer including at least a portion of the overhead information that identifies the location of the first data stream in a subsequent superframe without the receiver processing the overhead information in the subsequent superframe. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110222513 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING MOBILE STATION - A method for positioning a Mobile Station (MS) is provided. The method includes transmitting, by a serving base station of a MS, indication information of a Location Based Services (LBS) zone to the MS receiving, by the MS according to the indication information, a reference signal used for positioning the MS in the LBS zone from a base station of a neighboring cell, wherein the LBS zone is multiplexed with a control information field in N downlink subframes, or with the control information field and a data field in the N downlink subframes, and wherein N is larger than or equal to | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110235620 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION - A wireless communication system is disclosed herein. More specifically, a method of transmitting control information from a user equipment in a wireless communication system is disclosed, wherein the method includes receiving a first transmission timing information for transmitting a first control information associated with one or more first downlink component carriers from a base station; determining a second transmission timing information for transmitting a second control information associated with one or more second downlink component carrier by using the first transmission timing information and an additional transmission timing information; and transmitting control information on the one or more second downlink component carriers in dependence upon the second transmission timing information to the base station. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110243102 | MULTIPLE TIMING ADVANCE AND CARRIER AGGREGATION - At least one of transmissions and receptions over allocated radio resources within a first timing advance group are synchronized using a first timer; and similar for allocated radio resources within a second timing advance group that are synchronized using a second timer. In response to determining that the first timer remains synchronized while the second timer is not synchronized with a radio network which has allocated the respective radio resources, a first procedure is followed for the case in which there is a primary component carrier within the second timing advance group and a different second procedure for the case in which there is no primary component carrier within the second timing advance group. In an exemplary embodiment, a message is sent to the radio network indicating that the second timer has expired. Various distinctions between the two procedures, and how the message is sent, are detailed for different embodiments. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243103 | TRANSMITTING CONTROL DATA AND USER DATA ON A PHYSICAL UPLINK CHANNEL - A method for transmission of control data and user data on a Physical Uplink Channel (PUC) is disclosed. An instruction from a base station to use an uplink control channel and an uplink shared channel to transmit uplink data is received. Control data and user data on the uplink control channel and the uplink shared channel is transmitted. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243104 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRACKING TIMING DRIFT IN MULTIPLE FREQUENCY HYPOTHESIS TESTING - A mobile device receives a signal comprising a PSS and performs multiple frequency hypothesis testing (MFHT) on the received signal. The mobile device starts MFHT by applying different initial frequency offsets in corresponding MFH branches. Timing drift in MFHT is compensated based on corresponding initial frequency offsets. In this regard, a PSS correlation process is performed on the received signal in each MFH branch. Resulting PSS correlation data is buffered and processed in corresponding PSS timing hypothesis buffers. The timing position of samples is updated in the PSS timing hypothesis buffers based on corresponding initial frequency offsets. Energy associated with the PSS transmissions may be accumulated utilizing corresponding PSS correlation data at updated sampling positions. The received PSS is detected based on a maximum accumulated energy associated with the PSS transmissions. Information that comes from the detected PSS is utilized by the mobile device to camp on a corresponding cell. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243105 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY RESCALING AN ACCUMULATION BUFFER IN SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEMS - A mobile device accumulates energy associated with each of successive PSS transmissions received from a base station. Accumulated energy values may be rescaled by a same number of bits whenever a buffer overflow condition occurs within the accumulation buffer. The mobile device may detect a correct PSS timing hypothesis utilizing the rescaled accumulated energy values within the accumulation buffer. A significant bit such as, for example, the most significant bit (MSB) or one of lesser significant bits, of each of the accumulated energy values may be monitored during the energy accumulation process to detect a buffer overflow condition. The mobile device may determine number of bits for rescaling or right shift each of the accumulated energy values in response to the detected buffer overflow condition. The resulting shifted accumulated energy values may be utilized for PSS detection. Either an integrating or filtering method is utilized during the energy accumulation process. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243106 | Methods for carrier agggregation - Methods to manage multiple component carriers (CCs) efficiently in a mobile network with carrier aggregation (CA) enabled are proposed. For CC activation/deactivation, a single LCID value is used to represent both activation and deactivation command. A single command with multiple instructions is provided to activate and/or deactivate multiple CCs. In addition, unnecessary re-activation or re-inactivation of a CC is prevented, and explicit feedback for activation/deactivation is considered. For scheduling mechanism, a novel buffer status reporting (BSR) procedure is provided, where only one BSR is calculated after preparing all the transport blocks (TB) within one transmission time interval (TTI). Novel power headroom reporting (PHR) format and trigger are also provided. For DL-UL linking, various linking types are created based on whether there is carrier indicator field (CIF) in DL grant or UL grant. The various linking types are used in different applications to improve scheduling flexibility and load balancing. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243107 | Structure for OTA ENB-ENB Communication - According to one general aspect, an apparatus may include a processor. In various embodiments, the processor may be configured to select either an uplink sub-frame or a special sub-frame to employ for base station-to-base station (B2B) communication in some embodiments, the processor may be configured to cause at least one user equipment (UE), associated with the apparatus, to either refrain from transmitting or substantially receiving during the selected sub-frame In various embodiments, the processor may be configured to transmit data, from the apparatus to a receiving BS, during at least a portion of the selected sub-frame. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243108 | METHOD FOR ENABLING A TERMINAL TO EFFICIENTLY DETECT AND SEARCH FOR A FEMTO BASE STATION - A method for enabling a mobile station (MS) to efficiently detect and search for a femto base station is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of receiving a signal including information of a femto base station; and searching for the femto base station on the basis of the received information, wherein said received information is a sequence including at least one of the following: the entirety or a part of a femto base station ID (Identity), the entirety or a part of a cell ID, a sector ID, the entirety or a part of a CSG (Closed Subscriber Group) ID, and a frequency allocation index. In the step of receiving femto base station information, a preamble and data containing information on the femto base station are received. In the step of detecting the femto base station, the femto base station is separately detected on the basis of the received information. Here, the entirety or a part of the preamble sequence of the femto base station which is used for the separation of the femto base station is reused as a scrambling sequence for said data. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243109 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, RECEIVING METHOD, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - There are disclosed a random access method for establishing an individual channel between a radio communication terminal device and a base station device in a short time and a radio communication terminal device executing the random access method. In this device, in step ST | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110243110 | Wireless Network Beacon Timing - An apparatus and method of a wireless network timing transmission of multiple BSSID beacons is disclosed. One method includes a method of a wireless access node within a wireless mesh network timing transmission of multiple BSSID beacons. The method includes the access node identifying multiple personalities of the wireless mesh network, wherein a separate MAC address corresponding with each of the personalities. The access node assigns a beacon type for each of the personalities. During each transmission frame, the access node consecutively transmits a plurality of the beacon types, wherein the different beacon types are consecutively spaced during transmission by a predetermined period. The predetermined period is substantially less than a time duration of each transmission frame. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110249656 | Sending Feedback for Multiple Downlink Carriers - Feedback information for multiple serving cells are transmitted on high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). A slot format for transmitting feedback information is determined based on the number of configured secondary serving cells and whether multiple input multiple-output (MIMO) is configured in the serving cells. Spreading factor is reduced to 128 when two secondary serving cells are configured and MIMO is configured in at least one of the two configured secondary serving cells, or when three secondary serving cells are configured. The serving cells are grouped into feedback groups, each feedback group having one or more serving cells. Channel coding may be applied to feedback information for the feedback groups. The resulting encoded feedback information for the feedback groups is concatenated to form composite feedback information. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110249657 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - A mobile terminal apparatus and radio base station apparatus supporting each of a plurality of mobile communication systems when the plurality of mobile communication systems coexists, where the mobile terminal apparatus performs a cell search using an SCH signal included in one downlink CC among a plurality of downlink CCs, and where the radio base station apparatus broadcasts a DBCH signal including information of an uplink CC paired with an initial downlink CC including the SCH signal obtained by the cell search, and transmits a response signal of an RACH signal from the mobile terminal apparatus to the mobile terminal apparatus in the initial downlink CC, and where the mobile terminal apparatus transmits a shared channel signal including information of a transmission/reception bandwidth of the mobile terminal apparatus to the radio base station apparatus in the uplink CC, and where the radio base station apparatus transmits a control signal including assignment information of a downlink CC and an uplink CC based on the information of the transmission and reception bandwidth of the mobile terminal apparatus to the mobile terminal apparatus, and where the radio base station apparatus and the mobile terminal apparatus communicate with each other in the downlink CC and the uplink CC based on the assignment information after random access. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110255520 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN OVERLAPPING WRAN CELLS WORKING IN DIFFERENT CHANNELS - A common control channel for base station (“BS”)/consumer premise equipment (“CPE”) communication in areas of overlapping coverage by wireless regional area network (“WRAN”) cells operating on different working channels is disclosed. A common control channel is selected from among the various working channels sensed in each of a plurality of overlapping WRAN cells so as to enable BS/CPE and BS/BS communication. Once chosen, each CPE within the overlapping area communicates with the controlling BS via an enhanced coexistence beacon protocol messages. These messages include timing and other synchronization information. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110261793 | CHANNEL RESERVATION IN FLEXIBLE WIRELESS NETWORKS - Channel access time slots are reserved in a wireless network employing a flexible medium access control (MAC) protocol. At least a type and a mode of the channel reservation are determined (S | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110280224 | TRANSCIEVER DEVICE FOR ON-BODY AND OFF-BODY COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention relates to a transceiver device for processing a medium access control (MAC) protocol used by a transceiver. The transceiver has a first antenna system for on-body communications and a second antenna system for off-body communications, the transceiver device being designed to reserve one or more data payloads for on-body communications and to allocate the first antenna system to the transceiver for the interval of time occupied by these data payloads, and/or to reserve one or more data payloads for off-body communications and to allocate the second antenna system to the transceiver for the interval of time occupied by these data payloads. An advantageous result of this is that the optimally matched antenna system is available for on-body communications and off-body communications respectively, collisions between data payloads on the radio channel being prevented within the network, and the throughput of data thus being increased and, at the same time, energy consumption being reduced for the transceiver. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110280225 | MEDIUM TIME ALLOCATION AND SCHEDULING USING ISO-ZONE STRUCTURED SUPERFRAME FOR QOS PROVISIONING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Allocation of contiguous blocks of airtime for data or airtime transmission can lead to large maximum service intervals for an application stream. This may result in a large delay bound where large blocks of contiguous MAS blocks other applications from meeting their low-latency requirements. A method and network that overcomes at least the shortcomings of known methods includes transmitting information over a wireless network. This includes the steps of: organizing the superframe into allocation zones; organizing the allocation zones into iso-zones; generating an allocation map; determining a periodic service interval and medium time based on a TSPEC, a delay requirement, and local resource of an application stream; searching for transmission opportunity that accommodates the periodic service interval and the medium time required based on the allocation map; transmitting information in the superframe upon finding transmission opportunity in the searching step. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110286435 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A SCHEDULER FOR A MACRO-DIVERSITY PORTION OF A TRANSMISSION - A method, apparatuses, and system of broadcasting content data in a macro-diversity region of a data frame includes receiving a stream of transport packets. Selecting at least one burst size, from amongst a set of a plurality of predetermined burst sizes. Allocating one or more data bursts with the selected burst size to the macro-diversity region of the data frame, each data burst comprising at least a portion of the received transport packets and wherein the at least one burst size is selected so as to minimize a number of data bursts allocated to the macro-diversity region. Then communicating the allocation of data bursts to a transmitter that includes the allocation of data bursts in the macro-diversity region of a data frame transmitted by the transmitter. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110286436 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Each of mobile station apparatuses | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110292915 | MULTIPLE CARRIER ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate selecting resources, such as time slots, subframes, etc., for performing bandwidth switching related to activating and/or deactivating one or more carriers. A data portion of one or more subframes can be selected for performing bandwidth switching. In addition, a device can determine whether one or more downlink grants are received in the one or more subframes, and can avoid selecting such subframes. The device can alternatively perform the bandwidth switching and request retransmission of the data portion. Additionally or alternatively, the device can determine a type of the one or more subframes and/or signals transmitted in the one or more subframes to determine whether to perform bandwidth switching in the subframes. The bandwidth switching can include changing a sampling rate, reconfiguring frequency filters, modifying a local oscillator, etc. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110292916 | RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD - Provided are a radio packet type determining section that determines at least whether a radio packet is a first transmission packet that is allocated persistently at predetermined time intervals or a retransmission packet among radio packets transmitted to a radio communication terminal, a first transmission interval control section that controls a transmission interval of each first transmission packet so as to disperse the first transmission packet and a retransmission packet of a radio packet index different from that of the first transmission packet, a retransmission interval control section that controls a transmission interval of each retransmission packet, and a radio resource allocation section that performs allocation of radio resources based on the transmission interval of each first transmission packet and the transmission interval of each retransmission packet. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110292917 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TIMING ADJUSTMENT TO PROTECT CQI - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose methods for protecting channel quality indicator (CQI) modulation symbols in a subframe (e.g., a localized frequency division multiplexing (LFDM) subframe). For some aspects, a timing adjustment method may be utilized to adjust time of a UE with respect to an eNodeB. The timing adjustment method may introduce a positive time offset to be used for reducing time mismatch between the UE and the eNodeB. In another aspect, a buffer may be used at the eNodeB to store symbols received by the eNodeB before removing the cyclic prefix information from the subframe. The eNodeB may use the stored symbols and an artificial time delay to ensure that the CQI information is protected. For some aspects, the CQI modulation symbols may not be located at the beginning of an LFDM symbol. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110292918 | BROADCASTING METHOD, ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS AND RADIO APPARATUS - A processing unit generates the timing information on the timing with which each of radio apparatuses is to synchronize in communications between the radio apparatuses when each of radio apparatuses broadcasts a signal. A modem unit, an RF unit and an antenna broadcast the thus generated timing information. The processing unit further generates the cycle information on a broadcast cycle in which each radio apparatus broadcasts the signal in communication between the radio apparatuses. The modem unit, the RF unit and the antenna broadcast the cycle information together with the timing information. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110299508 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, WIRELESS RECEIVING APPARATUS, WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND WIRELESS RECEPTION METHOD - The channels of A-EUTRA component carriers on which the mobile station devices of EUTRA do not stand by are configured without almost changing the conventional EUTRA channel configurations. A wireless transmitting apparatus, which performs radio transmission to a plurality of wireless receiving apparatuses by assigning one or more component carriers to a downlink, includes a control channel element processing section | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110299509 | SCHEDULING AND PROTECTION OF QUIET PERIODS IN A QUIET ZONE FOR INCUMBENT SIGNAL DETECTION - A method and system for scheduling and protecting quiet periods (QP) in a quiet zone ( | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110305224 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADAPTIVE DOWNLINK SIGNALING DETECTION USING DYNAMIC DOWNLINK SIGNALING POWER DISTRIBUTION PROFILES - A UE receives a downlink signaling signal in a current TTI over E-AGCH, E-RGCH or E-HICH. A downlink signaling power profile is established for the current TTI utilizing noise variance estimates and downlink signaling power estimates for the current TTI and prior TTIs. Commands such as UP or HOLD in the received downlink signaling signal are determined based on the established downlink signaling power profile. Candidate detection threshold values may be initially selected based on a current noise variance estimate. Distribution statistics, over the selected candidate detection threshold values, of the downlink signaling power estimates in the current TTI and the prior TTIs are determined for establishing the downlink signaling power profile. A detection threshold value is determined based on the current noise variance estimate and a metric derived from the established downlink signaling power profile to determine the commands for managing uplink data transmissions in subsequent TTIs. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110305225 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a wireless communication device which transmits data to destination nodes by time division multiplexing. The device includes: a storage section including a transmission queue region that stores unsent data therein; a communication controller including: a communication situation evaluating section configured to evaluate a communication situation of each of the destination nodes; and a communication slot controller configure to: allocate, in the plurality of communication slots, communication slots for data transmission to the respective destination nodes, retransmission slots for retransmission of the unsent data, and auxiliary retransmission slots for retransmission of the unsent data subjected to a specified destination node, the specified destination node being determined based on the communication situation; and allocate the respective unsent data to a corresponding one of the retransmission slots and the auxiliary retransmission slots based on a given condition. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110305226 | RESOURCE REMAPPING AND REGROUPING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus for remapping and regrouping transmission resources in a wireless communication system. First, a set of new permutation algorithms based on Galois field operation is proposed. Then the proposed algorithms and the known Pruned Bit Reversal Ordering (PBRO) algorithm are applied to several of various resource mapping schemes, including slot or symbol level Orthogonal Cover (OC)/Cyclic Shift (CS) mapping, cell-specific slot-level and symbol-level CS hopping patterns, and subframe and slot level base sequence hopping patterns. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110310854 | METHOD OF DETERMINING ACCESS TIMES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - The present invention provides a method of determining access times for a wireless committee case in device. One embodiment of the method includes selecting one of a plurality of time intervals in a periodically repeating access cycle for transmission of an access request. The selection is performed based on information identifying the wireless communication device. This embodiment of the method also includes transmitting the access request over a random access channel in the selected one of the plurality of time intervals. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310855 | UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION (UCI) MULTIPLEXING ON THE PHYSICAL UPLINK SHARED CHANNEL (PUSCH) - A method for multiplexing uplink control information (UCI) on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) is described. Control data is coded with user data repetition. The coded control data is mapped to a PUSCH resource. A data block base for the coded control data is also mapped in the PUSCH resource. The UCI may include channel quality indicators (CQI)/precoding matrix indicators (PMI), acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) and rank indicators (RI). | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310856 | HARQ ACK/NACK FOR DYNAMIC PDSCH - The aim of the present invention is to provide an efficient and reliable transmission/reception mechanisms for a communication system with multiple component carriers, each of which further includes physical resources such as transmission slot/symbol, subcarrier/frequency subband, code, or radiation pattern. Accordingly, the control signal of a component carrier comprises a scheduling assignment specifying for said component carrier a resource for transmission of a data signal, and an allocation map specifying that a scheduling assignment has been sent for another component carrier. Signalizing the allocation map enables detection of possibly missed scheduling assignments. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310857 | RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - The invention relates to a method of random access, comprising: a higher layer instructs the lower layer to transmit a random access preamble, wherein the timing transmission of the random access preamble is adjusted by the lower layer according the triggered resources. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310858 | BEACON SIGNALING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Systems and methods are described herein for managing beacon signaling in a wireless communication system. A method described herein includes identifying a neighboring macrocell and a time division multiplexing (TDM) channel offset of the neighboring macrocell, the channel offset corresponding to at least one of a signaling channel or an overhead channel; selecting a local channel offset that differs from the channel offset of the neighboring macrocell; and generating a transmission schedule such that first transmissions are omitted for at least a portion of transmission intervals of the neighboring macrocell; wherein the transmission intervals of the neighboring macrocell are identified according to the channel offset of the neighboring macrocell and wherein the first transmissions include at least one of pilot transmissions, medium access control (MAC) transmissions or traffic transmissions. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310859 | BASIC SERVICE SET SCHEDULING BASED ON MEDIA ACCESS CONTROLLER STATES - Apparatus and methods for controlling a wireless device concurrently operating in more than one basic service set (BSS). In one embodiment, a wireless device includes a first medium access controller (MAC), a second MAC, and a BSS scheduler. The first MAC is configured to communicate in a first BSS via a first wireless network. The second MAC is configured to communicate in a second BSS via a second wireless network. The BSS scheduler is configured to time multiplex medium access by the first and second MACs. Each of the first and second MACs is configured to provide a response to the BSS scheduler and to relinquish medium access when a request to relinquish medium access is received by the MAC, the timing of the response and relinquishment based on an activity state of the MAC when the request is received. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310860 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MEDIUM ACCESS N A MESH NETWORK USING ALLOCATION VECTORS AND STATION CARRYNG OUT SUCH METHOD - The present invention relates to Method for controlling medium access in a mesh network comprising the following steps: a station of the network receiving a Network Allocation Vector (NAV) setting frame indicating a period of time during which the station cannot access the medium,—the station setting a Network Allocation Vector expiration timer based on the received setting frame, the station detecting a least one reservation made by two other stations in the network, and setting a respective Reservation Allocation Vector (RAV) expiration timer based on the duration of the detected reservation, and storing the identity of the two stations as owners of the reservation, the station updating the NAV expiration timer as the latest of the NAV expiration time of the NAV setting frame and all set respective RAV expiration timers. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110310861 | System and Method for Timing Synchronization - The present disclosure relates generally to systems and methods for timing synchronization. Uplink synchronization is a necessary component of a UE operating in a mobile, wireless network. Reliable uplink synchronization generally requires regular uplink transmission containing reference signals. A method is provided that defines a burst period for sending the reference signals, determines an interval between the reference signals, and sends a timing instruction message that includes the burst period and the determined interval. A second method is provided that receives the timing instruction message and sends the reference signals in accordance with the timing instruction. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110317670 | TD-LTE HETNET PARTITION - Downlink (DL) subframes and DL hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) messages may be protected by time division multiplexing (TDM) partitioning. However, TDM partitioning may not be required for uplink (UL) subframes in general. For example, information carried over a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), may be protected by frequency division multiplexing (FDM) partitioning. In fact, one UL subframe may correspond to eNBs of multiple power classes. Since TDM partitioning may be required for DL transmissions, one DL sub frame may not correspond to the eNBs of multiple power classes. For some embodiments, groups of subframes may be allocated to the different power classes. Therefore, subframes allocated to an eNB of a power class may observe reduced or no interference from eNBs of other power classes. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110317671 | MULTIPLE-ACCESS HYBRID OFDM-CDMA SYSTEM - In one aspect of a multiple-access OFDM-CDMA system, data spreading is performed in the frequency domain by spreading each data stream with a respective spreading code selected from a set of available spreading codes. To support multiple access, system resources may be allocated and de-allocated to users (e.g., spreading codes may be assigned to users as needed, and transmit power may be allocated to users). Variable rate data for each user may be supported via a combination of spreading adjustment and transmit power scaling. Interference control techniques are also provided to improve system performance via power control of the downlink and/or uplink transmissions to achieve the desired level of performance while minimizing interference. A pilot may be transmitted by each transmitter unit to assist the receiver units perform acquisition, timing synchronization, carrier recovery, handoff, channel estimation, coherent data demodulation, and so on. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20120002644 | COORDINATED INTEGRATION OF SECONDARY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINALS INTO A PRIMARY WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A communication method for a mobile communication system is described. Available radio resources, i.e. an available frequency band, are divided into a plurality of comparatively small radio resource units. The mobile communication system uses a first communication protocol for communicating with mobile stations compatible with the mobile communication system. For communicating with an autonomous terminal at least one radio resource unit is allocated, in which a second communication protocol incompatible with the first communication protocol is used for communicating with the terminal. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120002645 | RADIO TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - A radio transmission apparatus and a radio transmission method for readily controlling retransmission timing presets a frame cycle for retransmission, and transmits only packets for which no acknowledgement of receipt has been received within the frame cycle as a reply from a receiving apparatus to a transmitting apparatus. Thus, timing for retransmission can be readily determined. Also, the retransmission timing is determined based on when a packet is actually transmitted. Therefore, the multiple acknowledgement of receipt can be returned as a combined reply. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120008599 | Reservation response and multi-user transmissions - In one embodiment, in absence of transmitting from an apparatus a reservation request frame, the apparatus receives a reservation response frame on an assigned channel. The reservation response frame indicates a duration of a frame transmission. In response to receiving the reservation response frame, the apparatus transmits a frame on the assigned channel during the frame transmission. In another embodiment, in response to receiving a reservation request frame on a first channel at an apparatus, the apparatus transmits a reservation response frame on the first channel and on at least one second channel. The reservation request frame indicates a duration of a frame transmission. The reservation response frame indicates the duration of the frame transmission. After transmitting the reservation response frame, this apparatus receives during the frame transmission a first frame on the primary channel and a second frame on the at least one secondary channel. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120008600 | MAINTAINING TIME ALIGNMENT WITH MULTIPLE UPLINK CARRIERS - Maintaining time alignment with multiple carriers is contemplated. A group of uplink carriers (UL CC sets) that operate with a single Timing Advance (TA) may be determined, and a TA value may be applied to a specific UL CC set. A wireless transmit/receive unit's (WTRU) capability of using multiple TAs may define a group index of a few bits for each UL CC set. A TA Command received in a Random Access Response message may be used to apply the TA value to each UL carrier of the UL CC set. The WTRU may determine which UL CC set the TA value applies to based on which DL carrier the command was transmitted from. The WTRU may determine which UL CC set the TA value applies to based on the Group Index being explicitly provided in the command. The WTRU may release multi-CC configurations upon Time Alignment Timer (TAT) expiry. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120008601 | Apparatus and Method for Scheduling in a Wireless Communication System - A method of scheduling an uplink (UL) data packet on a packet data network (PDN) connection of at least one radio bearer by a wireless communication unit comprises receiving, by the wireless communication unit, a signalling message comprising at least one scheduling priority parameter assigned to at least one uplink radio bearer, wherein the at least one scheduling priority parameter is based on at least one characteristic of the PDN connection that the radio bearer belongs to. The method further comprises determining, from the at least one scheduling priority parameter, at least one user transmission priority level associated with at least one PDN connection of at least one radio bearer; and scheduling at least one uplink data packet transmission in response to the at least one user transmission priority level. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120008602 | Terminal Access Method and Terminal - The present invention discloses a terminal access method and a terminal, wherein the method comprises: calculating a length of an access message body of an access message ( | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120014358 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING BANDWIDTH OF UPLINK SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL - The present invention discloses a method, system and device for determining a bandwidth of an uplink sounding reference signal SRS. The method for determining the bandwidth of the uplink SRS comprises the following steps: determining whether SRS is transmitted with the uplink pilot time slot if the SRS is transmitted with the largest bandwidth level; transmitting SRS with the non-extensive SRS bandwidth if SRS is determined to be transmitted with the uplink pilot time slot and the UE reaches the power limit. In the present invention, the signal-to-noise ratio detected on the bandwidth with which SRS transmitted can be maintained, and the accurate detection of the channel information is thereby realized. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120014359 | Systems and Methods for Allocating and Transmitting Uplink Data Block Transmissions - Systems and methods for allocating and transmitting uplink data block transmissions with piggy-backed ACK/NACK bitmap field are provided. The systems and methods involve using a request for a DBCCI (Data Block Combined with Control Information) to allocate a timeslot for data transmission. A UADB (uplink allocation for data block) is not also used to allocate the timeslot. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120020335 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL DETECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020336 | Method For Data Transmission In A Local Area Network - A method for data transmission in a local area network, wherein data is transmitted on a medium access control layer within successive time frames between a plurality of first nodes comprising client nodes and a second node within reach of the first nodes, and a coordinator node for the first nodes where a time frame comprises a plurality of time slots. Each time slot is assigned to a first node that is a slot owner node being exclusively allowed to start transmitting data at a time within a first interval at the beginning of the time slot. At least one first nodes of the plurality of first nodes is allowed to use the time slot based on a contention based access to transmit the data in a second interval succeeding the first interval where the slot owner node has not started transmitting data at a time within the first interval. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120020337 | SCHEDULING METHOD - In a cellular radio system, the number of TDM users per cell is limited. The cellular radio system can be a WCDMA system and in particular a WCDMA system employing an Enhanced Uplink (EUL). Other users in the cell are scheduled using CDM scheduling. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120026985 | Method and Apparatus for Grant Loss Detection and Related Processing in a Wireless Communication Network - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for improving wireless communication network performance and efficiency, based on detecting the occurrence of grant loss in relation to the transmission of scheduling grants to mobile terminals over a downlink control channel. Grant loss detection is based on detecting erasure events corresponding to the transmitted scheduling grants, and the incidence of grant loss with respect to a given mobile terminal can be tracked and used to compensate the control value(s) used for link adaptation of the downlink control channel, with respect to that terminal. Additionally, or alternatively, when a given grant is determined to be lost, a new grant is sent and the HARQ redundancy version is reset for the newly scheduled transmission. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120026986 | Downlink frequency selective scheduling based on channel quality feedback - A method for downlink frequency selective scheduling in LTE MAC based on channel quality feedback is disclosed. Existing methods for resource allocation have no means for efficient utilization of the resources and allocation of the available downlink bandwidth to the UE with low computation overhead. These methods do not ensure that the UEs that possess channel quality feedbacks are allocated their best sub-bands for transmission in time and compute efficient manner. The proposed method employs CQI based feedback from the UEs for allocation of the downlink bandwidth. The method defines a threshold value for the CQI and UEs that have sub-bands with CQI lesser than the defined threshold value will not be allocated resources in the corresponding sub-band. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120026987 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR TRANSMITTING AN ALLOCATION OF TIME IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Various methods and apparatuses for transmitting an allocation of time in a wireless communication system are disclosed. In one aspect, an allocation of time for receiving communications via a receive beam direction is transmitted. The allocation of time may be based on information regarding an apparatus known to be located in the receive beam direction. A unique time for receiving communications from each known apparatus may be allocated, or a duration of time for receiving communications from the known apparatuses may vary based on a number of apparatuses known to located in a receive beam direction. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120026988 | Wireless Communication Sharing in a Common Communication Medium Based on Voice Traffic Prediction - Performing wireless communication using first and second wireless communication protocols. The first and second wireless communication protocols may operate in a common communication medium. The wireless communication may be performed using the protocols over the common communication medium, e.g., in a time sharing fashion. Properties of voice traffic on current frames of the second wireless communication protocol may be measured. The method may further include predicting whether one or more subsequent frames of the second wireless communication protocol will have voice traffic. If the prediction indicates that the one or more subsequent frames of the second wireless communication protocol will not have voice traffic data may be transmitted using the first wireless communication protocol on the common communication medium during a subsequent second wireless communication protocol time slot. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120026989 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE USE OF MULTIPLE-INPUT, MUTLIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-PACKET RECEPTION (MPR) IN A DISTRIBUTED TIME SLOT ASSIGNMENT PROTOCOL - A method of multiple packet reception (MPR) using distributed time slot assignment (TDSA) in a multi-user network where receivers can detect two packets at the same time includes the steps of requesting information on slot assignment in a contention area, setting a frame length and acquiring a the slot assignment, selecting the assigned slot, and announcing and confirming information about the frame length and the assigned slot. The step of requesting information on slot assignment, setting a frame length and acquiring a slot assignment, and selecting the assigned slot are performed in a network where receivers can detect two packets at the same time, where time slots are assigned to nodes instead of links, where one-hop neighbors are assigned to different time slots since they may form a link together, while sharing one time slot with one of the two-hop neighbors in a non-interfering assignment. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120033645 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method of wireless communication includes determining a frame offset between communications of a first communication resource (e.g., an LTE radio) and communications of a second communication resource (e.g., a Bluetooth or WLAN radio). The method also includes determining potential time slot configurations for the communications of the second communication resource. A time slot configuration is selected from the determined potential time slot configurations, to reduce degradation of the first communication resource due to conflicting time slots between the first communication resource and the second communication resource, based on the determined frame offset. The selection may be based on the determined frame offset. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033646 | SYSTEM ACCESS FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A user equipment (UE) begins to access a heterogeneous network by obtaining synchronization parameters from system signals transmitted by a weaker one of a number of neighboring cells. After synchronizing with the network, the UE obtains resource scheduling information for the weaker cell. The resource scheduling information indicates at least one resource used by the weaker cell. The UE may then cancel the stronger cells of the neighboring cell. The resource scheduling information allows the UE to identify broadcasted system blocks for the weaker cell from which it may decode and retrieve control information used to complete access to the network. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033647 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP CARRIER IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS REQUIRED FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. Specifically, the invention relates to a method for configuring a component carrier at a base station in a wireless communication system, comprising the steps of determining whether initial access is permitted to a user equipment with respect to a downlink component carrier; and transmitting a synchronization channel signal and a broadcast channel signal to at least one user equipment via the downlink component carrier, wherein the initial access permission is applied to said at least one user equipment by modifying at least one of the synchronization channel signal and the broadcast channel signal. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033648 | MULTIPLEXING CONTROL AND DATA INFORMATION FROM A USER EQUIPMENT - Methods and apparatus are provided for a User Equipment to transmit acknowledgement information together with data information to a base station during a Transmission Time Interval. A number of nominal resources for the transmission of the first set of AIBs is compared to a number of resources available to the UE for transmission of the acknowledgement information. The first set of AIBs is transmitted if the number of nominal resources is less than or equal to the number of available resources. A second set of AIBs is selected from the first set of AIBs and bundling operations are performed over respective distinct subsets of AIBs in the second set of AIBs to obtain a third set of AIBs if the number of nominal resources is greater than the number of available resources. The third set of AIBs and a fourth set of AIBs are transmitted. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033649 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods for mobile communications are disclosed herein. An example method for a mobile station includes sending to a network a mobile station capability information element, the mobile station capability information element including a first reduction of timeslots field for a downlink dual carrier non-enhanced flexible timeslot assignment operation mode and a second reduction of timeslots field for a downlink dual carrier enhanced flexible timeslot assignment operation mode. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033650 | FLEXIBLE ALLOCATION OF CONTROL SIGNAL RESOURCES - A wireless communication system is disclosed. The method for processing a downlink subframe at a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes receiving information associated with a PHICH duration, receiving a subframe that includes a PHICH, a PDCCH, and a PDSCH, and obtaining the PDSCH after a lapse of the PDCCH duration. If the PHICH duration is larger than the PDCCH duration, the obtaining of the PDSCH is performed in consideration of PHICH resources in a duration that corresponds to the PHICH duration but not to the PDCCH duration. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120033651 | Methods and Devices for Scheduling Transmissions in a Wireless Network Based on Contention and Channel Conditions - Methods and systems for assigning time-division multiplexed (TDM) slots in a multi-channel TDM system are presented. Preferably, a radio access network (RAN) assigns forward link and reverse link transmissions between the RAN and one or more wireless communication devices (WCDs) to TDM slots on various wireless channels. When making these assignments, the RAN may take into account (i) the priority of data that the RAN queues for the WCDs, and (ii) the signal quality at which the WCDs can receive the various wireless channels. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120039306 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system comprises: a data amount measurement unit ( | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120039307 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CARRIER SWITCHING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTI-CARRIERS - A method and an apparatus for performing carrier switching in a wireless communication system using multi-carriers are provided. According to the method, a Mobile Station (MS) transmits a message including information on a time slot occupying status to a Base Station (BS), if a message for instructing to report the information on the time slot occupying status, is received from the BS, receives, from the BS, first information on at least one time slot scheduled by using the information on the time slot occupying status, identifies at least one time slot using the first information, and performs the carrier switching in the identified at least one time slot. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120039308 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA COMMUNICATION WHILE BASE STATION IS DISRUPTED IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method provides data communication while a Base Station (BS) is disrupted in a wireless communication system. The method includes, when a plurality of Mobile Stations (MSs) receive a preamble signal from a cluster header through a dedicated control channel while the BS is disrupted, sending a message requesting cluster member subscription to the cluster header, in the cluster header, including the plurality of MSs in a cluster member, configuring a cluster member list, and broadcasting the cluster member list, in a source MS among the plurality of MSs, sending a data transmission request message to the cluster header using the broadcasted cluster member list, in the cluster header, one of unicasting and broadcasting a response message for the data transmission request of the source MS, and, in the source MS, transmitting data to a target MS among the plurality of MSs based on the response message. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120044913 | Methods And Apparatus For Providing Communications With Use Of First And Second RF Transceiver Modules - A mobile communication device is operative to perform a first communication function (e.g. inquiry or paging function for discovery) with use of a first radio frequency (RF) transceiver (e.g. BLUETOOTH transceiver) and a second communication function (e.g. voice telephony function) with use of a second RF transceiver (e.g. IEEE 802.11 transceiver). In response to identifying an indication to invoke the first communication function while the second communication function is being performed, the mobile device reserves selected timeslots of a wireless communication link with the first RF transceiver for establishing a synchronous link. The mobile device then causes data of the first communication function to be communicated, via the first RF transceiver, during remaining unreserved timeslots of the wireless communication link. The mobile device further causes data of the second communication function to be communicated, via the second RF transceiver, during the reserved timeslots of the synchronous link. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120057570 | USING A SINGLE LOGICAL BASE TRANSCEIVER TO SERVE MULTIPLE PHYSICAL LOCATIONS - Using a single logical base transceiver to serve multiple physical locations is disclosed. A call traffic associated with a call associated at a mobile network with an assigned timeslot of a logical base transceiver is received. A timeslot with which the call traffic is associated is remapped from the assigned timeslot to a serving timeslot being used at a serving physical base transceiver to facilitate the call, in the event the call traffic comprises inbound call traffic being sent into the mobile network from the serving physical base transceiver, or from the serving timeslot to the assigned timeslot in the event the call traffic comprises outbound call traffic being sent from the mobile network to the serving physical base transceiver. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120063424 | DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA IN DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM - A digital broadcast receiver and a control method thereof are disclosed. The control method of the digital broadcast receiver includes receiving a broadcast signal into which mobile service data and main service data are multiplexed, extracting TPC signaling information and FIC signaling information from a data group in the received mobile service data, acquiring a program table defining a mapping relation between each of all ensembles transmitted at a physical frequency and at least one virtual channel corresponding to the ensemble, using the extracted FIC signaling information, and detecting IP address information required for channel tuning to the at least one virtual channel corresponding to the ensemble, using the acquired program table. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063425 | Method and Apparatus for Uplink Synchronization Control - The present invention discloses a method for uplink synchronization control, wherein network side and a user equipment (UE) maintain a timing alignment timer (TAT) for the UE, and maintain an uplink transmission timing adjustment amount for uplink component carriers, and the method includes following steps: the network side measuring uplink component carriers of the UE, and obtaining an uplink transmission TA amount of the uplink component carriers; and before the TAT expires, the network side transmitting to the UE an adjustment command comprising information of the uplink transmission TA amount for at least one of the uplink component carriers of the UE. Also disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention are a method for uplink synchronization control at the UE side, and a base station and a UE for implementing the above methods. The solution of the present invention enables accurate adjustment of the uplink synchronization for each component carrier in a carrier aggregation mechanism. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120063426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting a sounding reference signal from a terminal to a base station in a radio communication system. More specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving a transmission instruction signal for transmitting a non-periodic sounding reference signal from a base station; determining a time resource for transmitting said non-periodic sounding reference signal based on a specific subframe for transmitting the preset periodic sounding reference signal; and transmitting said non-periodic sounding reference signal to the base station using said determined time resource. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120069824 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENT MU-MIMO TRANSMISSION BY JOINT ASSIGNMENTS OF TRANSMISSION ARCHITECTURE, AND INTERFERENCE ALIGNMNET SCHEMES USING OPTIMIZED USER-CODE ASSIGNMENTS AND POWER-ALLOCATION - A method, apparatus, and wireless communication system is disclosed herein for operating a BIA code structure in a system. In one embodiment, the wireless communication system comprises a plurality of receivers, wherein each receiver in the plurality having a multi-mode antenna with a single radio frequency (RF) chain that is operable in a plurality of antenna modes, and further wherein each receiver shifts between the plurality of antenna modes in a predetermined manner. The wireless communication system also includes a plurality of base stations in a cell topology to perform downlink transmissions to the plurality of receivers, each base station in the plurality of base stations having one or more transmitters having a transmit antenna and being operable to communicate with one or more of receivers in the plurality of receivers using a multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO)-based blind interference alignment (BIA) scheme, wherein each active base station in the plurality of base stations operates an identical BIA code structure in a given transmission resource. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120069825 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system including: a first and second base station apparatuses which include one or more of sells or sectors respectively; and a terminal apparatus, wherein the first and second base station apparatuses and the terminal apparatus performs radio communication, the first and second base station apparatuses includes: a process unit which performs a scrambling process to a first and second transmission data respectively by using a common scrambling code when the first and second transmission data differing each of the cells or the sectors are transmitted to the terminal apparatus; and a transmission unit which transmits the scrambling processed first and second transmission data to the terminal apparatus respectively, and the terminal apparatus includes a reception unit which receives the first and the second transmission data and performs descrambling process to the first and the second transmission data by using the common scrambling code. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120069826 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND SIGNAL MULTIPLEXING CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a terminal device which achieves an improvement in the quality of uplink data while the power consumption of the terminal is suppressed even when the uplink data and a response signal are simultaneously transmitted in carrier aggregation. Specifically provided is a terminal device ( | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120076114 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND ABNORMALITY RESTORATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus attachable to an information processing apparatus. The wireless communication apparatus includes a wireless communication interface configured to perform wireless communication. The wireless communication apparatus also includes a processor configured to input, on detecting an error in the wireless communication interface, a signal for recognizing a temporary interruption to the information processing apparatus, and to initialize the wireless communication interface. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120076115 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting a sounding reference signal from a terminal to a base station in a radio communication system to which carrier aggregation is applied. More specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving information on a plurality of uplink component carriers for transmitting periodic sounding reference signals from a base station; allocating different time resources for said periodic sounding reference signal transmitted via said plurality of uplink component carriers; and transmitting said periodic sounding reference signals to said base station using said uplink component carriers and said allocated different time resources. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120082139 | DISTRIBUTED MEDIUM ACCESS SCHEDULING WITH IMPLICIT ORDERING - Provided is distributed medium access scheduling with implicit ordering (DSIO). The DISO includes the steps of: (a) when any terminal of a plurality of terminals included in a terminal group has data to transmit, promoting the terminal to a transmission data existence layer; (b) when any blue terminal of a plurality of blue terminals included in a blue terminal group has no data to transmit, degrading the blue terminal to a transmission data non-existence layer; and (c) when any red terminal of a plurality of red terminals included in a red terminal group succeeds in intruding between the blue terminals and recognizes whether or not to transmit data without a collision, promoting the red terminal to the blue terminal group. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120082140 | Method of TDM In-Device Coexistence Interference Avoidance - A method of TDM in-device coexistence (IDC) interference avoidance is proposed. In a wireless communication device, a first radio module is co-located with a second radio module in the same device platform. The first radio module obtains traffic and scheduling information of the second radio module. The first radio module then determines a desired TDM pattern based on the traffic and scheduling information to prevent IDC interference with the second radio module. The first radio module also transmits TDM coexistence pattern information based on the desired TDM pattern to a base station. In one embodiment, the TDM coexistence pattern information comprises a recommended TDM pattern periodicity and a scheduling period to maximize IDC efficiency subject to limited level of IDC interference possibility. In one specific example, the TDM coexistence pattern information comprises a set of discontinuous reception (DRX) configuration parameters defined in long-term evolution (LTE) 3GPP standards. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120082141 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Paging In Wireless Communication - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need to reduce paging latency. In one method, a wireless network determines ( | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120082142 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING RADIO RESOURCE AND TRANSMITTING DATA - Provided is a data transmission method. The data transmission method may limit a use authorization for a contention time period so that a portion of data transmission devices among a plurality of data transmission devices may transmit data during the contention time period. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120087347 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR JOINT SCHEDULING OF PEER-TO-PEER LINKS AND WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK LINKS IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - A wireless device, a method, and a computer program product in a wireless device are provided in which a scheduling control signal is received in peer-to-peer resources. In addition, whether to yield a data transmission is determined based on the received scheduling control signal. Furthermore, the data transmission is sent to a base station on the peer-to-peer resources upon determining not to yield the data transmission. A base station, a method, and a computer program product in a base station are also provided in which a scheduling control signal is received in peer-to-peer resources. In addition, whether to yield a data transmission is determined based on the received scheduling control signal. Furthermore, the data transmission is sent to a wireless device on the peer-to-peer resources upon determining not to yield the data transmission. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087348 | FACILITATING DISTRIBUTED CHANNEL ACCESS FOR A PLURALITY OF ACCESS TERMINALS TRANSMITTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Methods and apparatuses are provided for facilitating distributed transmissions among a plurality of access terminals. An access point may send an initial indicator count for each access terminal to follow a respective number of indicators when transmitting during a transmission opportunity. An access terminal may receive its respective initial indicator count, and may send a transmission after detecting a number of indicators equal to the assigned initial indicator count. A continuation indicator count may also be sent to each access terminals, where the continuation indicator count specifies a number of indicators each access terminal is to wait after sending a preceding transmission and before sending a subsequent transmission. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087349 | ACK/NACK Bundling - In one embodiment, a first system receives N data transmissions from a second system. The first system combines N ACK/NACK responses, corresponding to the N data transmissions received, and encodes the combined N ACK/NACK responses by selecting a position of a communication channel over which the first system sends ACK/NACK transmissions to the second system and setting a value for each bit sent during each ACK/NACK transmission based on the combined N ACK/NACK responses. The first system sends the bits at the selected position of the communication channel. The second system, upon receiving the bits sent at the selected position of the communication channel, decodes the N ACK/NACK responses based on the position at which the bits are sent and the bits. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087350 | Method and Apparatus for Low-Power, Long-Range Networking - An endpoint device may be operable to transmit and receive data wirelessly via a medium to which access is time-division multiplexed into a plurality of repeating windows. A first window of the plurality of repeating windows may be time-division multiplexed into a plurality of timeslots utilized for transmitting beacon signals. A second window of the plurality of repeating windows may be time-division multiplexed into a plurality of timeslots utilized for transmitting alarm signals. The endpoint may be assigned one of the first timeslots and, when an alarm condition is present, select one of the second timeslots for transmitting an alarm signal based on the assigned first timeslot, and based on a hash function. The endpoint may then transmit an alarm signal during the second timeslot. The endpoint may be operable to synchronize its local clock by listening to beacons transmitted by other endpoints. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087351 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN CONTENTION ON TIME SLOTS BETWEEN TRANSCEIVER NODES OF AN AD HOC NETWORK - The method for transmitting information in an ad hoc network comprises at least two transceiver nodes able to receive and transmit information and communicating with each other by sending information in random access time slots organized in frames. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087352 | METHOD FOR ENSURING MEDIUM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Method and apparatus for controlling transmission of a data stream from a station. A QoS registration frame is received, via an access point, from the station. The QoS registration frame includes information indicating a request for transmission of a data stream from the station, and information indicating a minimum required interval and a maximum required interval for an interval which is between start points of two successive durations of a medium dedication. Each duration of the medium dedication represents a time period in which the station is permitted to transmit the data stream. A schedule for the transmission of the data stream is calculated by setting a new interval which is between the minimum required interval and the maximum required interval, when the transmission is admitted. A QoS response frame, which includes information indicating the schedule, is then transmitted from the access point to the station, | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120087353 | AUTOMATIC REVERSE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT IN A TWO-WAY TDM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for communication is disclosed. Information is received on a downlink channel in a time interval. On a condition that an explicit allocation of a first uplink channel is received, feedback information regarding the received information is transmitted on the first uplink channel, wherein the feedback information is transmitted with user data on the first uplink channel. On a condition that an explicit allocation of the first uplink channel is not received, feedback information regarding the received information is transmitted in a time interval on a second uplink channel, wherein an explicit allocation of the second uplink channel is not received, wherein the time interval on the second uplink channel is a pre-determined time period away from the time interval on the downlink channel. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120093133 | TECHNIQUE FOR PROCESSING FLOWS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is provided for processing flows in a wireless communications network. Data packets belonging to different flows are received by a device of a communications network and stored in a queue to enable them to be sent by the device over a radio channel to at least one node. Access to the radio channel is time-shared between a plurality of nodes. The method includes: at least one step of determining a duration associated with a flow, the duration corresponding to a virtual duration needed for sending packets of said flow stored in the queue; and in order to send a data packet, a step of selecting one of the flows amongst a plurality of flows, in which step a flow is selected for which the associated duration is the smallest, and a step of sending a packet of the selected flow as extracted from the queue. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093134 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING CONTROL OF A TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY - Methods and apparatus are disclosed. A method implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) includes receiving a packet from a first other WTRU during a transmission opportunity (TxOP) associated with the first other WTRU and forwarding the packet to a second other WTRU during a remaining portion of the TxOP. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093135 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING UPLINK SIGNALING INFORMATION - A User Equipment, UE, of a cellular communication system transmits scheduling assistance data to a base station comprising a base station scheduler which schedules uplink packet data. The scheduling assistance data relates to uplink packet data transmission from the UE. The UE comprises a channel controller which is operable to cause the scheduling assistance data to be transmitted from the UE to the base station in a first physical resource of an uplink air interface. The first physical resource is not managed by the base station based scheduler. The scheduling assistance data may specifically be transmitted in a first transport channel multiplexed with other transport channels on a physical resource. The transport channels may be individually optimized and may have different termination points and transmission reliabilities. Specifically, the transport channel supporting the scheduling assistance data signaling may have a high reliability and be terminated in the base station. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093136 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT PROVIDING OF SCHEDULING INFORMATION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficiently providing scheduling information from an access terminal to a base station to enable effectuating scheduling decisions. Access terminals may transmit scheduling information in bifurcated requests. For instance, coarse scheduling information may be transferred utilizing a dedicated out-of-band channel, and fine scheduling information may be transmitted over an in-band channel. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093137 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - The present invention eliminates a transmission-waiting operation which is unnecessary while accommodating a prioritized traffic. Although a communication station enters a transmission-disallowed state in response to detection of a signal addressed to another station in accordance with medium access control based on CSMA, if the communication station receives a frame transmitted with priority to a local station during the transmission waiting, it cancels the transmission-disallowed state, sends back a frame responding the frame transmitted with priority and effectively operates a transmission prioritized period. The communication station starts a search procedure to perform a processing of evading duplication of the transmission prioritized periods if it judges a possibility of a problem occurring in a time zone in which reception with priority is possible. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120093138 | MIDAMBLE ALLOCATIONS FOR MIMO TRANSMISSIONS - Allocation of multiple training sequences transmitted in a MIMO timeslot from multiple transmit antenna elements is provided. For example, a method of generating signals in a MIMO timeslot, the method comprising: selecting a first training sequence; preparing a first data payload; generating a first signal including the prepared first data payload and the first training sequence; transmitting the first signal in a MIMO timeslot from a first antenna of a network element; selecting a second training sequence, wherein the second training sequence is different from first training sequence; preparing a second data payload; generating a second signal including the prepared second data payload and the second training sequence; and transmitting the second signal in the MIMO timeslot from a second antenna of the network element. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120099564 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING VIDEO PACKETS OVER MULTIPLE BEARERS FOR PROVIDING UNEQUAL PACKET LOSS PROTECTION - A method and apparatus distributes video packets over multiple bearers for providing unequal packet loss protection. The method includes a packet processing function receiving a plurality of packets collectively comprising a flow of sequential data included in a sequence of media frames. For each packet, the packet processing function: applies a bearer selection process to select one of a plurality of bearers for transporting the packet over an access network, wherein each bearer has a different quality of service level which influences the probability of the transported packets being intentionally discarded by the access network, wherein the bearer selection process causes distribution of the plurality of packets across the plurality of bearers such that each bearer carries non-consecutive packets both within any given media frame and across sequential media frames and provides unequal packet loss protection for the packets in the plurality; and provides an indication of the selected bearer. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120099565 | SYNCHRONIZATION ACQUISITION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are a synchronization acquisition method and apparatus in a multi-carrier system. A terminal acquires the synchronization for a first downlink component carrier by detecting a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) in the first downlink component carrier. The terminal acquires the synchronization for a second downlink component carrier by detecting a reference signal in the second downlink component carrier. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120106517 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OFSCHEDULING RESOURCES FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - An approach is provided for scheduling resources for device-to-device communications. A resource of a network is granted to a group designated for device-to-device communications. The group then determines how the resource allocation is utilized to support the communication session and allocates the resource among the user equipment within the group independently of the base station. Further, a user equipment pair in the group determines transmit/receive (Tx/Rx) timeslot configuration to allow TDD mode operations, and further configure the modulation and coding for the device-to-device connection, and error control scheme for the pair via control signaling independently from the group. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106518 | Wireless Communication System and Related Methods - A method of operating a wireless mesh network comprises generating a pseudorandom sequence element in a transmitting device and a receiving device of the network using information shared by the transmitting and receiving devices. The pseudorandom sequence element is then used to calculate a communication channel/timeslot assignment for communication between the transmitting wireless device and the receiving wireless device. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106519 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In the environment of a communication area including a SDM-compatible mobile station for space division multiplex transmission and a SDM-uncompatible mobile station not compatible with space division multiplex transmission, a base station having a plurality of antennas and capable of adaptively changing directivity performs allocation of a mobile station which simultaneously performs space division multiplex transmission (SDM) and space division multiplex access (SDMA) by using a predetermined space division multiplex transmission evaluation criterion and a space division multi access evaluation criterion. By using this radio communication method, it is possible to use the spatial degree of freedom at its maximum and provide a radio communication system having an improved communication capacity. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106520 | COMMUNICATION METHOD USING TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING - The invention relates to a communication method using time-division multiplexing, which enables permanent communication between user terminals. One of the terminals is a master terminal, while the others are slave terminals. The transmission channel is divided into consecutive cycles, and each cycle is divided into timeslots. Each slave terminal identifies, in a listening mode, a free timeslot in the current cycle ( | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120106521 | Method, Device and System for Determining Resource Locations - A method, device and system for determining resource locations are disclosed in the invention, wherein the method includes the following steps: a user equipment (UE) receiving the High-speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) from a network side equipment; according to said HS-SCCH, the said UE obtaining the time slot on which the High-speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) is located; according to the time slot on which said HS-DSCH is located, said UE determining the sub-frame on which said HS-DSCH is located; the UE receiving the HS-DSCH from said network-side device in the time-slots, which said HS-DSCH is located on, in the subframe which said HS-DSCH is located on. In the invention, the UE is enabled to determine the sub-frame on which the UE is located, according to the time-slots which are distributed by a base-station and the HS-DSCH is located on; while the HS-DSCH resource of TS | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120113962 | Method of Multiplexing and Transmission of Uplink Control Information and Related Communication Device - A method of handling an acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) transmission for a mobile device with a carrier aggregation (CA) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a configuration or an activation of the CA with at least one uplink (UL) component carrier and a plurality downlink (DL) component carriers from a network of the wireless communication system, and performing a simultaneous transmission of a scheduling request (SR) and the ACK/NACK, which corresponds to DL transmissions on the plurality of DL component carriers, with at least one PUCCH resource or on at least one PUCCH resource in a subframe according to one of a plurality of ACK/NACK transmission schemes configured or supported by the network. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120120924 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DOWNLINK AND UPLINK GRANT DESIGN IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to provide at least one control channel for downlink grant information, provide at least one other control channel for uplink grant information, and adjust time apportioned for the downlink and uplink grant information in the control channels. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120120925 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANTENNA DIVERSITY IN MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Transmission schemes that can flexibly achieve the desired spatial multiplexing order, spatial diversity order, and channel estimation overhead order are described. For data transmission, the assigned subcarriers and spatial multiplexing order (M) for a receiver are determined, where M≧1. For each assigned subcarrier, M virtual antennas are selected from among V virtual antennas formed with V columns of an orthonormal matrix, where V≧M. V may be selected to achieve the desired spatial diversity order and channel estimation overhead order. Output symbols are mapped to the M virtual antennas selected for each assigned subcarrier by applying the orthonormal matrix. Pilot symbols are also mapped to the V virtual antennas. The mapped symbols are provided for transmission from T transmit antennas, where T≧V. Transmission symbols are generated for the mapped symbols, e.g, based on OFDM or SC-FDMA. Different cyclic delays may be applied for the T transmit antennas to improve diversity. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120120926 | Multiple Uplink Control Channel Transmission with Reduced Cubic Metric - It is determined that there are X uplink control channel resources available for uplink signaling. Each of those X uplink control channel resources are sub-channelized into a plurality of sub-channels that each defines a unique time instant or point in time. For each of Y units of control information there is selected a unique combination of one of the sub-channels and a modulation (X and Y are each integers greater than one). The Y units of control information are sent on the X uplink control channel resources according to the respectively selected combinations. By example the uplink resources may be an ACK/NAK/DTX bit on a of one of the sub-channels and a modulation PUCCH. In one example the sub-channels are individual slots of a PUCCH. In another example the sub-channels are the reference-signal part and the data part of a single PUCCH slot. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120120927 | INTRODUCING A DELAY IN THE TRANSMISSION OF A NACK FOR A PACKET RECEIVED EMPLOYING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION - A communication method in a first apparatus, in which the first apparatus receives data via a direct route from a second apparatus and transmits in response an acknowledgement signal, wherein if the same data has also been transmitted via an indirect route and the data is not properly received via the direct route, the first apparatus introduces an indirect-route delay in transmitting the acknowledgement signal to allow receipt of the data via the indirect route, and otherwise no indirect-route delay is introduced. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120120928 | USER EQUIPMENT FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - A user equipment for physical layer automatic repeat request is disclosed. The user equipment comprises a higher layer automatic repeat request (ARQ) mechanism, a physical layer transmitter, a physical layer receiver, an acknowledgment (ACK) transmitter and an adaptive modulation and control unit (AMC). A higher layer ARQ mechanism generates data for transmission. A physical layer transmitter receives the data for transmission from the higher layer ARQ mechanism, to format the received data into packets for transmission. A physical layer receiver receives and demodulates received packets and retransmission statistics. An ACK transmitter transmits a corresponding acknowledgment for a given packet at the physical layer receiver. An AMC unit adjusts a particular encoding/data modulation of each packet using collected retransmission statistics. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120127964 | Method and Apparatus for Timing Advance Estimation - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus, comprising at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: determine a first timing associated with a first signal; detect a second timing associated with a second signal; and estimate a timing advance value based at least in part on the detected first timing and the second timing, is disclosed. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120127965 | HYBRID COORDINATION FUNCTION (HCF) ACCESS THROUGH TIERED CONTENTION AND OVERLAPPED WIRELESS CELL MITIGATION - A method and system reduce interference between overlapping first and second wireless LAN cells in a medium. Each cell includes a respective plurality of member stations and there is at least one overlapped station occupying both cells. An inter-cell contention-free period value is assigned to a first access point station in the first cell, associated with an accessing order in the medium for member stations in the first and second cells. The access point transmits a beacon packet containing the inter-cell contention-free period value, which is intercepted at the overlapped station. The overlapped station forwards the inter-cell contention-free period value to member stations in the second cell. A second access point in the second cell can then delay transmissions by member stations in the second cell until after the inter-cell contention-free period expires. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120127966 | METHOD OF DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION CAPACITY OF A DATA TRANSMISSION CONNECTION - A method of dynamically adjusting a transmission capacity of a data transmission connection is proposed. The method comprises different steps at a network end node. An incoming frame-structured time division multiplex signal carrying incoming timeslots is received from a client. Furthermore, a request data set comprising for at least one incoming timeslot a corresponding subset is received. The subset has an identifier for identifying an existing data transmission connection and a status indicator for indicating to the network end node a status requested by the client for the corresponding timeslot. If the status indicator indicates a request for adding the timeslot to the data transmission connection or removing the timeslot from the data transmission connection, the network end node adjusts the transmission capacity of the data transmission connection. If the status indicator indicates valid data in the incoming timeslot, the network end node transmits the data of the incoming timeslot via the existing data transmission connection to a far-end network end node. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120127967 | PROTOCOL FOR ALLOCATING UPSTREAM SLOTS OVER A LINK IN A POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system for controlling a contention state for a communication link between a base station controller and customer premises equipment in point-to-multipoint communication. The contention state is controlled using a state machine, which includes a grant pending absent state in which a unicast request slot is maintained open for use by the customer premises equipment. During the grant pending absent state, the customer premises equipment sends no upstream data to the base station controller but can use the unicast request slot to request a data slot for sending upstream data to the base station controller. In the grant pending state, the customer premises equipment preferably uses piggybacking to request grant of a next data slot while sending upstream data to the base station controller. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120127968 | UPLINK POWER CONTROL USING RECEIVED REFERENCE SIGNAL - A user equipment (UE) includes circuitry configured to receive control information on a downlink control channel from a base station. The control information indicates an allocation of an uplink channel and the control information is sent in response to the base station determining that the UE is to send an adaptive modulation and coding report. The circuitry is further configured in response to the control information to transmit a communication in the allocated uplink channel in a time interval including at least one time slot. The communication includes an adaptive modulation and coding report, and a transmission power level of the communication is derived from the control information and a pathloss measured by the UE. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120127969 | SEMI-RANDOM BACK-OFF METHOD FOR ACHIEVING RESOURCE RESERVATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described including determining if a successful unicast transmission has occurred, adjusting a contention window to a minimum value and adjusting a time slot back-off counter to one-half of the value of the contention window plus one responsive to the determination and adjusting the contention window using one of a plurality of adjustment schemes and selecting said time slot back-off counter from an interval between zero and the contention window. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120127970 | Wireless Network System And Method Configured To Mitigate Co-channel Interference - One embodiment provides a wireless network system ( | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120134342 | METHOD FOR COORDINATION OF WIRELESS TRANSCEIVERS OF A NETWORK NODE AND NETWORK NODE - A method for coordination of wireless transceivers of a network node, in particular for application in communication nodes of a vehicular network, wherein the network node is equipped with one or more wireless transceivers that are capable of simultaneously generating and/or receiving electromagnetic signals on different electromagnetic channels, the electromagnetic signals being potentially able to interfere with each other, is characterized in the steps of, for each pending packet transmission on a particular of the electromagnetic channels, checking the presence of ongoing and/or scheduled activity on one or more of the other of the electromagnetic channels, and deferring the pending packet transmission in case ongoing and/or scheduled activity is detected on one or more of the other of the electromagnetic channels, at least until the detected ongoing and/or scheduled activity on one or more of the other of the electromagnetic channels is completed. Furthermore, a corresponding network node is disclosed. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120134343 | WIRELESS CHANNEL ALLOCATION IN A BASE STATION PROCESSOR - A system and method are provided for allocating wireless channels in a base station processor to messages sent between a subscriber and the base station processor in a wireless network. A latency period is determined corresponding to a return message to be received from a responsive node in response to an outgoing message sent from a sender via the base station processor. A latency manager in the base station processor computes the latency period and stores the latency period in an allocation table. A scheduler schedules a channel to be available at the end of the latency period indicated in the allocation table. At the end of the latency period, the return message is received and the scheduler allocates a channel as defined in the allocation table. The scheduled channel is used to transmit the message to or from the corresponding subscriber. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120134344 | Scheduling In Radio Telecommunication System - A method, apparatus, and computer program is provided for controlling direct device-to-device communication between a first and at least a second terminal device on a shared communication channel also used for communication with a base station. The base station schedules the utilization of the shared communication channel to terminal devices communicating with the base station and terminal devices communicating directly with one another. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120140744 | Method for downlink sub-frame allocation, information transmission or acquisition in a WiMax evolved system - The present invention provides a method for downlink sub-frame allocation in an evolved WiMAX system, which comprises: setting a IEEE 802.16m frame start offset as a parameter of a deployment area range, and setting a starting location of a IEEE 802.16m frame by each IEEE 802.16m base station within a same deployment area range in the system according to the IEEE 802.16m frame start offset; always allocating a start sub-frame of the IEEE 802.16m frame by the IEEE 802.16m base station as a IEEE 802.16m downlink sub-frame, and sending a super frame header including a synchronization symbol at the starting location of a first frame of a super-frame; or sending a synchronization symbol at the starting location of a first frame of a super-frame and sending a super frame header in a start sub-frame of the first frame of the super-frame; and TDM is performed on the synchronization symbol and the super frame header in the first frame of the super-frame. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120140745 | METHOD FOR OPERATING DEVICE IN PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A method for operating a device in a personal area network (PAN), includes: obtaining physical layer information regarding a physical layer; scanning a channel on the basis of the physical layer information; selecting a channel on the basis of channel information obtained through the channel scanning process; determining whether or not there is a PAN coordinator with respect to the selected channel; and when a PAN coordinator does not exist in the selected channel, transmitting a beacon signal including information regarding a superframe structure, wherein the superframe structure includes at least one sub-superframe, and the information regarding the superframe structure includes information regarding the number of beacon slots for transmitting a beacon signal in each sub-superframe, the number of data slots for transmitting data in each sub-superframe, and the number of sub-superframes. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120140746 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK INFORMATION IN MULTI-CARRIER AGGREGATION SYSTEM - A method and a device for transmitting downlink information in a multi-carrier aggregation system are provided. The Method includes: a base station side sends a downlink subframe to a terminal side, wherein, the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) in the downlink subframe is used for bearing the downlink control indicating information and the carrier scheduling indicating information corresponding to each downlink control indicating information. It solves the problem that the terminal side can not clearly identify the downlink control information (DCI) of different carriers, which is caused by that the length of DCI may be same due to the difference of the bandwidths of carriers in the carrier aggregation system. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120147857 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOLVING TRANSMISSION PRIORITY IN A WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for initiating a traffic transmission between a first device and a second device are disclosed. One method includes determining whether the first device has a receive priority or a transmit priority over the second device during a first data frame, determining whether the first device has data to transmit to the second device during the first data frame, transmitting, from the first device, a receive priority control signal during a receive priority control slot (Rxp) corresponding to the first data frame if the first device has the receive priority and no data to transmit, and transmitting, from the first device, a transmit priority control signal during a transmit priority control slot (Txp) corresponding to the first data frame if the first device has the transmit priority and data to transmit. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120147858 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION - A method for communication transmission includes the steps of: performing sub-frame transmission in accordance with a first communication standard and pausing sub-frame transmission in accordance with a second communication standard in a first communication period; performing a sub-frame uplink operation in accordance with the second communication standard and pausing a sub-frame uplink operation in accordance with the first communication standard in a second communication period; and performing a sub-frame downlink operation in accordance with the second communication standard and pausing a sub-frame downlink operation in accordance with the first communication standard in a third communication period. The transmission band of the first communication standard overlaps, at least partially, the transmission band of the second communication standard. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120147859 | Method and Apparatus for Random Access - Method and apparatus for random access are provided. A base station sends access control information to a UE. The access control information includes an identifier of the UE and an access control command. The UE obtains an access time slot and a preamble signature according to the access control information received from the bases station. Then the UE initiate, according to the access time slot and the preamble signature, a random access procedure with a preamble power ramping. With the embodiments of the present invention, time delay in random access procedures may be decreased so as to enable the UE to complete the uplink access as quickly as possible and provide a feedback for a downlink transmission. Therefore efficiencies of the downlink transmission are enhanced. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120147860 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT MULTIMEDIA DELIVERY IN A WIRELESS PACKET NETWORK - The present invention sends multiple versions of a multimedia packet to the base station, and, based on the radio channel and traffic characteristics, an appropriate version of the multimedia packet is selected to send to the mobile station at a given time. In this way, source transmission is improved to instantaneous conditions. The steps of the present invention are performed in conjunction with RTP used for multimedia transmission over internet protocol (IP) networks. In a first embodiment, the multiple versions are sent to the base station in the same RTP packet, and the base station strips out the extraneous versions. In a second embodiment, the base station receives multiple RTP packets having identical information in the packet header in many fields, and selects an appropriate one among these for transmission to the mobile station, discarding the rest. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120155436 | SR/RACH Transmission Strategy For Half-Duplex UEs In LTE - A method of avoiding collision between uplink and downlink data of a user equipment includes verifying existence of data in an uplink buffer, determining a time instant for transmission of the uplink data, determining a likelihood for reception of downlink data at the determined time instant and selectively transmitting the uplink data based on the likelihood of reception wherein the user equipment is a half duplex (HD) equipment. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155437 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for coexistence interference avoidance in a UE equipped with an LTE radio and an ISM radio includes applying a TDM solution in the UE for avoiding coexistence interference between the LTE radio and the ISM radio, the TDM solution defining a period of the TDM solution allocated for the LTE radio and another period of TDM solution allocated for the ISM radio. The method further includes the UE skipping incrementing a transmission counter associated with a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process if a corresponding uplink transmission is scheduled to occur during the period allocated for the ISM radio. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155438 | METHOD OF REORDERING AND REASSEMBLING PACKET DATA IN RADIO LINK CONTROL LAYER - A method includes recognizing, by an RLC entity of a reception side, a transmission time interval (TTI) start time, initializing a count of the number of PDUs processed in a TTI, determining whether the reordering timer has expired, performing a procedure of reassembling RLC service data units (SDUs) and transmitting the reassembled RLC SDUs to an upper layer and updating the reordering timer when the reordering timer has expired, performing the procedure and updating the reordering timer when an RLC PDU received from a lower layer is an RLC PDU which should be received by retransmission of a transmission side before reordering timer expiration, and processing RLC SDUs received from the upper layer, wherein the procedure limits the number of RLC PDUs to be processed within a TTI using the count of the number of PDUs to be processed within the TTI. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155439 | NEIGHBOR SCANNING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - An access point includes a transmitter configured to transmit signals, a receiver configured to receive signals, and a timing information device. The timing information device is configured to receive a timing information request from a station associated to the access point, receive timing information for a beacon signal sent by a second access point, and report the timing information to the station, The timing information includes a time difference relative to a known reference time for transmission of the beacon signal and the time difference is an offset in timing units. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120155440 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING SERVICE ON MICROWAVE LINK - The embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of microwave communication technologies, and disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for scheduling a service on a microwave link. In order to overcome the problem that the data unit of the TDM service and the data unit of the packet service cannot be scheduled uniformly in the prior art, the method for scheduling a service on a microwave link provided in the embodiments of the present invention includes: receiving a radio transport unit that carries at least one radio data unit, where the radio data unit carries priority information; and scheduling the radio data unit according to the priority information of the radio data unit. The present invention enables uniform scheduling of the data unit of the TDM service and the data unit of the packet service. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120163347 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING SYNCHRONOUS TIME SLOT FOR LOW-POWER WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is an apparatus and method for allocating a synchronous time slot of a low-power wireless personal area network (WPAN) that allocates and controls a time slot based on synchronization in the low-power WPAN. A method of allocating a time slot by a communication node may minimize energy consumption and processing load associated with a message exchange since access to and release from a network may be possible without exchanging a message for controlling access between a coordinator and a device, may access a device in motion within a coordinator region by minimizing accessing time, and may enhance utilization of a time slot by optimally distributing links for accessing devices to available time slots uniformly using information of device global IDs. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163348 | SEQUENCE GENERATING METHOD FOR EFFICIENT DETECTION AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS USING THE SAME - A sequence generation method for allowing a reception end to effectively detect a sequence used for a specific channel of an OFDM communication system, and a signal transmission/reception method using the same are disclosed. During the sequence generation, an index is selected from among the index set having the conjugate symmetry property between indexes, and a specific part corresponding to the frequency “0” is omitted from a transmitted signal. In addition, a reception end can calculate a cross-correlation value between a received (Rx) signal and each sequence using only one cross-correlation calculation based on the conjugate symmetry property. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163349 | TRANSMISSION METHOD IMPLEMENTED BY A NODE AND CORRESPONDING RECEPTION METHOD - The invention relates to a transmission method implemented by a first node of a first set of nodes comprising at least two nodes, characterized in that the method comprises a transmission step, intended for at least one second node of the first set, of at least one item of quiet information representative of a prohibition to send during at least one allocated time slot to at least one second set of nodes. The invention also relates to the corresponding reception method. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120163350 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL RESOURCE BLOCKS - A method for transmitting downlink data using resource blocks at a base station in a wireless mobile communication system includes transmitting downlink data mapped to physical resource blocks (PRBs) to a user equipment, wherein indexes of virtual resource blocks (VRBs) are mapped to indexes of the PRBs for a first slot and a second slot of a subframe, and the indexes of the PRBs for the second slot are shifted with respect to the indexes of the PRBs for the first slot based on a predetermined gap, and wherein a predetermined offset is applied to an index of a PRB when the index of the PRB is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120170554 | BASE STATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD FOR BASE STATION DEVICE - Provided is a base station device which communicates to/from a mobile station device supporting a MIMO scheme. A base station device ( | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120177013 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Devices, systems and methods to schedule a service period at a wireless network. A wireless network controller of the wireless network may set a start time of a service period. The start time is no less than a predefined time after transmitting by the wireless network controller an information element containing the service period scheduling information. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120182974 | System and Method for Mapping Reference Signal Sequence in Advanced Long Term Evolution System - The present invention provides a method and system for mapping a reference signal sequence in an advanced Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and the method and the system are used to map the reference signal sequence to an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing symbol of l. The method includes: when the system uses a normal cyclic prefix, determining the symbol l according to an expression, and mapping the reference signal sequence to a location of a sub-carrier k on the symbol l of an antenna port p. The system includes: a mapping module, a first acquiring module and a second acquiring module. The system and the method which are provided ensure the transmission performance while ensuring the interference randomization. In addition, the system and the method are compatible with existing LTE systems, thus realizing high-order Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) transmission, supporting the usage of the corresponding techniques. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120182975 | Method and Apparatus for Repeating Uplink Synchronization in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multple Access (TD-SCDMA) Networks - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a first synchronization signal to access to a Node B is transmitted; a request signal from the Node B requesting a second synchronization signal is received; and the second synchronization signal is transmitted to the Node B. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120182976 | Wireless Network Protocol Coexistence - The present invention comprises a communication device configured to communicate using several wireless networking protocols. The communication device is configured to transmit a signal according to a first protocol so as to indicate to devices on the wireless network that they should not transmit during a first period of time, and subsequently, transmit or receive signals by means of the second protocol during the first period of time. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120182977 | Resource Setting Control for Transmission Using Contention Based Resources - There is proposed a mechanism by means of which resources for a data transmission between a user equipment and a base transceiver station are set. For this purpose, a resource dedicated to the user equipment (like an SR resource) is combined with at least one contention based resource allocated to a contention based transmission by the user equipment (like a CB-PUSCH resource). The at least one contention based resource to be combined is selected by executing a mapping according to a predetermined rule and based on an information indicating a specific resource element dedicated to the user equipment to at least one set of available contention based resources, and by determining an information identifying at least one resource element of the at least one contention based resource. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120188989 | RADIO TERMINAL AND TRANSMISSION RATE PREDICTION METHOD - In a radio communication system employing HARQ scheme wherein the maximum number of slots is changed, a radio terminal ( | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120195291 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADVOIDING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for coexistence interference avoidance in a user equipment (UE) having a first radio with an LTE/LTE-Advanced radio technology and a second radio based on another radio technology includes initiating a time division multiplexing (TDM) solution in the UE on a serving cell between the first and second radios, the TDM solution defining scheduling periods and unscheduled periods. In one embodiment the UE increments the PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER by 1 for each random access preamble transmission reattempt during the random access procedure, and the UE considers an unscheduled period of the TDM solution when determining the next available Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) subframe for preamble transmission. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120195292 | CARRIER AGGREGATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a data transmission system using a carrier aggregation. The data transmission system may assign a radio resource based on a correspondence relationship between a downlink and an uplink, and may transmit data using the assigned radio resource. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120195293 | METHOD, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS, FOR COMMUNICATING DATA AT REDUCED TRANSMISSION LATENCY IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING SLOTTED INTERFACE - A method, and associated apparatus, facilitates the communication of data of a radio block by a sending station to a receiving station, within a single time frame. Communication resources are allocated within a single time frame across a plurality of radio carriers. And, the data corresponding to a radio block is scheduled for communication, and is communicated, within the single time frame. Reduced levels of latency relative to conventional operations is provided. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120201228 | Method for Synchronizing PDCP Operations after RRC Connection Re-establishment in a Wireless Communication System and Related Apparatus Thereof - A method used in an E-UTRAN for synchronizing PDCP operations after a RRC connection re-establishment procedure with a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method includes: initiating an RRC reconfiguration procedure to resume all radio bearers other than a signaling radio bearer 1 (SRB1) when an RRC connection is re-established; re-transmitting a designated group of PDCP Service Data Units (SDUs) to the UE when a data radio bearer (DRB) mapped on Radio Link Control (RLC) Acknowledged Mode (AM) is resumed. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120201229 | RELAY BACKHAUL UPLINK HARQ PROTOCOL - The present invention relates to a method for configuring a retransmission protocol on the uplink between a network node and a relay node in a mobile communication system, the configuration being performed at a network node or at a relay node, and to the corresponding relay node apparatus and network node apparatus capable of configuring the retransmission protocol. In particular, the number of transmission processes is determined based on the position of time intervals available for the transmission and may be selected in order to control the round trip time of the retransmission protocol. Once the number of transmission processes has been configured, the transmission processes are mapped on the available time intervals in a predefined order and repetitively. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120201230 | Method for Transmitting Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) Information, Method for Determining PDCCH Search Space and Devices Thereof - A method for transmitting Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) information, a method for determining PDCCH search space and devices thereof are disclosed in the present embodiments. The method for determining PDCCH search space includes the following step: Node B (NB) determines the different search spaces corresponding to different PDCCHs according to Carrier Indicator (CI) information. By applying the technical solution provided in the embodiments of the present invention, the CI information is introduced in the search space determining process, so that different search spaces can be allocated to the cross-carrier PDCCHs of one User Equipment (UE) and the NB and UE are able to exactly determine the search spaces of PDCCHs in each downlink carrier, therefore reducing the blocking probability during PDCCH scheduling process and improving the reliability of PDCCH transmission. | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120207138 | Wireless Control Of Power Network Switching Devices - A method for controlling a plurality of power converters connected to a power supply network is described. Each power converter includes high-power semiconductor devices. Control signals are sent between a controller and a wireless node of one or more of said plurality of power converters using a wireless communication system. The control signals are transmitted to a local wireless node of one or more of a plurality of power converters. The data transmissions include data packets including control information such that a clock of the local wireless node can be synchronized using time synchronization information of the wireless communication system. In other aspects of the invention a system employing the method and a computer program for carrying out the method are described. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120213207 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEACTIVATING SECONDARY CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and an apparatus for deactivating secondary carriers in a mobile communication system using carrier aggregation are provided. A communication method, for a User Equipment (UE), includes activating a secondary carrier, starting a first timer upon activation of the secondary carrier, starting a second timer when the first timer expires, and deactivating the activated secondary carrier when the second timer expires. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213208 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHARED COMMUNICATION MEDIUM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Performing distributed contention-free communication channel reservation for wireless communication, is disclosed. One implementation involves providing access to a shared communication channel in a wireless network including multiple wireless stations, by performing distributed channel time reservation for contention-free access to a shared wireless channel by each wireless station, based on a prior successful contention by the wireless station for access to the channel in a wireless network. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120213209 | Extended USF Addressing Space - The present invention relates to assigning addresses to communication devices in a radio access network and notifying communication devices of scheduled uplink transmission time periods. Related methods, communication devices and control units are disclosed. A method of assigning an address to a communication device in a radio access network for use in notification of scheduled uplink transmission time periods for the communication device is provided. The method comprises assigning to the communication device an uplink state flag (USF) value. Furthermore, the method comprises assigning to the communication device an extended USF (eUSF) value. The address assigned to the communication device is a combination of the assigned USF value and the assigned eUSF value. By means of the eUSF value, the normal address range provided by the USF is extended, thereby facilitating use of more communication devices in the radio access network. | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120218976 | Mechanisim to Avoid Interference and Improve Communication Latency in MMWAVE WPANS - Briefly, a mechanism to avoid interference and improve channel efficiency in mmWave Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs) is disclosed. In particular, interference information during various time periods is tracked and used to optimize transmission scheduling. Further, a mechanism is provided to improve communication latency by distributing responsibility for coordination of slots amongst multiple transmitting devices. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120218977 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY IN MESH NETWORK - An apparatus and method of transmission opportunity in a mesh network is disclosed. A beacon timing from a receiver MP is received. The beacon timing includes a beacon reception timing of a received beacon frame that is received by the receiver MP from a neighboring MP of the receiver MP. A transmission opportunity is determined in order not to be extended across the beacon reception timing. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120224565 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An autonomously dispersed type wireless network is suitably formed with communication stations avoiding collision of beacons transmitted one to another. In the event that the range of reach of airwaves change and a receivable state is created and beacons collide, a communication station changes the beacon transmission position of itself in response to receiving a beacon from another station at a timing immediately prior to transmission to its own beacon. Also, in the event that beacon collision is exposed due to emergence of a new communication which can perform reception from two systems out of airwave range of each other, the newly-participating station requests one of the communication stations of which the beacons are colliding to change the beacon transmission timing. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120230302 | Method and System for Handling Congestion in a Communications System - An apparatus for managing contention in a communications system, the apparatus comprising a processor and a non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing programming for execution by the processor. The programming may include instructions to receive a ranging code from a device in a ranging channel, the ranging code corresponding to a current ranging attempt. The programming may further include instructions to broadcast a message acknowledging reception of the ranging code. The programming may further include instructions to receive a ranging request message from the device, the ranging request message comprising a ranging retries parameter that specifies a number of ranging retries that the device performed during the current ranging attempt. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120230303 | ARCHITECTURE AND METHODS FOR COEXISTENCE OF WIRELESS RADIOS HAVING DIFFERING PROTOCOLS - Embodiments of systems and methods for the coexistence of wireless radios having differing protocols are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. In some embodiments systems and methods for synchronizing clocks between two radios, and using a signal to notify one of the radios to refrain from transmitting for a timeperiod are described. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120236832 | TRANSMISSION STATION, RECEIVING STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A transmission station includes a communication section configured to perform transmission and reception of data with a receiving station by using a plurality of wireless carriers whose frequency bands differ from one another, and a processor configured to obtain reception qualities of a plurality of wireless carriers which are reported from the receiving station, and configured to assign a gap for each of the wireless carriers, in accordance with the obtained reception quality of the each of the wireless carriers, the gap being a period over which transmission of the data is stopped. | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120236833 | Systems and Methods for Allocating and Transmitting Uplink Data Block Transmissions with Piggy-Backed ACK/NACK Bitmap - Systems and methods for allocating and transmitting uplink data block transmissions with piggy-backed ACK/NACK bitmap field are provided. In a specific example, a mobile station receives a request for a data block combined with control information (DBCCI). The mobile station responds by transmitting a DBCCI using at least one timeslot corresponding to a timeslot used for the request. At least some of the time, the mobile station sends data blocks in an order different than that would be otherwise used (e.g. block sequence order). | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120243513 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - To secure a constant level or more of radio communication quality for each user equipment performing radio communication with a base station apparatus, and to increase the number of user equipment which the base station apparatus can accommodate under a condition of assuring the radio communication quality. In a radio communication system where there exist a base station apparatus having multiple antennas and user equipment for performing radio communication with a first antenna group including one or more of the antennas, the first antenna group is made configurable for each user equipment individually, and addition/deletion of the antenna to/from the first antenna group is performed based on the communication quality of each user equipment so that the number of antennas within the first antenna group may be minimized within a range satisfying a required value of the communication quality between the base station apparatus ad the user equipment. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243514 | Method of Handling Uplink Time Alignment - A method of handling uplink time alignment for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises being configured a primary cell and at least a secondary cell by a network of the wireless communication system, transmitting a random access preamble of a random access procedure on the secondary cell when one of the at least a secondary cell is activated, and receiving a random access response including a timing advance command for the secondary cell on the primary cell, the secondary cell, or another one of the at least a secondary cells. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243515 | Increasing Capacity in Wireless Communications - Techniques to increase the capacity of a W-CDMA wireless communications system. In an exemplary embodiment, early termination ( | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120243516 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - To reduce interference to another system and realize the coexistence with the other system by reducing the probability of False Alarm in multicarrier transmission. A mobile communication method according to the present invention, in which a mobile station UE transmits uplink data to a radio base station eNB using a plurality of carriers, includes a step A of instructing the mobile station UE to perform the transmission of uplink data using a plurality of downlink control signals including an information element for notifying the presence or absence of the transmission of uplink data using a plurality of carriers in a predetermined time frame, and a step B of deciding whether to perform the transmission of the uplink data using the plurality of carriers based on the information element included in the plurality of received downlink control signals. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120250662 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO AVOID HIGHER RANDOM ACCESS (RA) FAILURE RATE DUE TO A SOLUTION FOR IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to avoid higher random access (RA) failure rate. In one embodiment, the method comprises (i) equipping a UE on a serving cell with a first radio based on LIE or LIE-advanced radio technology and a second radio based on another radio technology, (ii) activating a TDM solution in the UE for the serving cell for avoiding in-device coexistence interference between the radio technologies, wherein the TDM solution defines one or more scheduling periods and unscheduled periods, (iii) initiating a RA procedure on the serving cell, (iv) transmitting a RA preamble for the initiated RA procedure from the serving cell, (v) receiving a corresponding RA response on the serving cell, and (vi) transmitting an Msg3, and starting a mac-ComentionResolutionTimer, wherein the UE may suspend the mac-ContentionResolutionTimer during an unscheduled period and resume the mac-ContentionResolutionTimer when entering a next scheduling period. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120250663 | Method and Device for Performing HARQ in a Multiple Antenna System - Disclosed are a method and a device for performing HARQ in a multiple antenna system. A terminal transmits uplink data via a plurality of antennas and through a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), and receives an ACK/NACK (Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement) signal indicating whether or not the uplink data has been received, the signal being received via the plurality of antennas and through a PHICH (Physical Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel) which corresponds to the PUSCH. A downlink resource to which the PHICH is mapped is determined on the basis of the index (I | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120257601 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE TIMING ADVANCE GROUPS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and apparatus for managing multiple Timing Advance Groups (TAGs) operating with different timings are provided for use in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. The method for managing multiple TAGs at a base station of a wireless communication system supporting carrier aggregation according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes categorizing a plurality of carriers into at least one TAG according to a predetermined rule, assigning a TAG index to each TAG, transmitting the TAG index to a terminal, generating a Timing Advance Command (TAC) for synchronization, and transmitting the TAC to the terminal in a random access process. The method and apparatus for managing TAGs according to exemplary embodiments of the present invention is capable of informing of the timing advance group to which each carrier belongs and managing multiple timing advance groups efficiently without signaling overhead. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120257602 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - Even when radio base stations including radio base station identification information eNB IDs having different lengths are coexistent, it is possible to perform an S | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120263152 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IP COMMUNICATION OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM TRANSPORT - Systems and methods for IP communication over a distributed antenna system transport are provided. In one embodiment, a method for providing Ethernet connectivity over a distributed antenna system comprises receiving internet protocol (IP) formatted data from an internet protocol device coupled to a remote unit of a distributed antenna system; sampling wireless radio frequency (RF) signals received at the remote unit to produce digitized RF samples; generating a serial data stream for output to a host unit of the distributed antenna system, the serial data stream further comprising a multiple-timeslot communication frame providing a first partition of bandwidth for transporting the digitized RF samples and a second partition of bandwidth for implementing an Ethernet pipe for transporting the IP formatted data. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120263153 | METHOD OF SUPPORTING DATA RETRANSMISSION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of supporting packet transmission in a mobile communication system is disclosed according to the present invention. A method of transmitting packets at a user equipment in a mobile communication system comprises transmitting a first packet to a network and transmitting a second packet to the network regardless of a reception status signal for the first packet, when control information for the second packet is received from the network. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120269178 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR TIMING SYNCHRONIZATION FOR PEER TO PEER DEVICES OPERATING IN WWAN SPECTRUM - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided in which a clock timing is determined for utilizing resources including peer-to-peer resources based on a WWAN downlink receive timing and a WWAN uplink transmit timing. In addition, the clock timing is utilized for peer-to-peer communication with the peer-to-peer resources. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120269179 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NONACKNOWLEDGEMENT SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting Acknowledgement/Non-Acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) signals by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system using Carrier Aggregation (CA) is provided. The method includes receiving, from a base station, information on a Primary Cell (Pcell) and a Secondary Cell (Scell), determining a timing position for transmitting the ACK/NACK signals based on the received information, and transmitting, to the base station, the ACK/NACK signals in the determined timing position. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120269180 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SYNCHRONOUS HARQ TRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus for supporting synchronous Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) transmission of Uplink are disclosed. When uplink/downlink configurations of multiple CA cellsrrier Aggregation (CA) are different, by configuring the HARQ transmission timing relations of primary cell and secondary cell, it is guaranteed that, with cross-carrier scheduling, the timing relation between a transmission of PUSCH in the Pcell and subsequent retransmission of PUSCH in the Scell is the same as that in Long Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE Advanced (LTE-A). | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120269181 | COOPERATIVE TRANSCEIVING BETWEEN WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICES OF A HOST DEVICE WITH SHARED MODULES - A circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data between a host module and a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol, wherein the first wireless protocol carries wireless telephony data for communication with a wireless telephony network. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data between the host module and a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol. The second wireless interface circuit includes at least one module that is shared with first wireless interface circuit. The first wireless interface circuit and the second wireless interface circuit operate in accordance with a wireless interface schedule that includes a first time interval where the first wireless interface device and the second wireless interface device contemporaneously use the at least one module. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120275436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PROCESSING SYNCHRONIZATION SHIFT COMMANDS IN TDSCDMA UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for processing received downlink synchronization shift commands for timing adjustments of uplink transmissions in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) wireless systems. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275437 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UTILIZING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION SHIFT COMMAND BITS IN TD-SCDMA UPLINK TRANSMISSION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for utilizing synchronization shift (SS) bits in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) based uplink communications. The SS bits can be used for various purposes different from indicating timing of transmissions from a Node B to a user equipment. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275438 | Method for Wireless Resource Scheduling, Network Element of Access Network and Terminal Thereof - Disclosed in the present invention is a radio resource scheduling method, including: a network element in an access network acquiring uplink (UL) data feature information corresponding to a service supported by a terminal; the terminal waiting for an UL resource scheduling signaling of the network element in the access network when judging that an initiated service is regular or predictable; the network element in the access network sending the UL resource scheduling signaling to the terminal to carry out UL resource scheduling on the terminal according to the UL data feature information corresponding to the service initiated by the terminal when the service initiated by the terminal is regular or predictable. Also disclosed in the present invention are a network element in an access network element and a terminal. The present invention enables the UL resource scheduling to save more control signaling, improving the radio spectrum efficiency and system throughput. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275439 | POWER BOOSTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus for power boosting a portion of installments in transmission of a packet of data. The power boosting incorporates a power boost factor for each installment. On receipt of a negative acknowledgement after the power boosted portion of installments, transmission of the subpacket is terminated, and processing passed to a higher layer. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120275440 | METHOD OF DOWNLINK HARQ OPERATION AT AN EXPIRY OF TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER - According to one embodiment, a method of processing data for a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) operation in a wireless communication system includes: receiving control signaling from a network; receiving data based on the received control signaling; generating a positive response message (ACK) if the received data is successfully decoded or a negative response message (NACK) if the received data is not successfully decoded, wherein the generated ACK or the generated NACK is not transmitted to the network when a timer is expired or not running; and combining the received data with data currently in a buffer after the timer is stopped or expired. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120281679 | RACH communication in cellular system - A solution for sharing random access parameters is provided. A plurality of terminal devices shares the same random access parameters, e.g. the random access preamble sequence, and different transmission opportunities are assigned to the terminal devices. The different transmission opportunities are used to distinguish the terminal devices in the random access procedure. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120281680 | Prohibition Of Sounding Reference Signal Transmission On Newly Activated Secondary Cells - In a wireless network supporting aggregation of uplink component carriers, sounding reference signals, SRS, are transmitted ( | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120281681 | BASE STATION AND UPLINK TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - A base station and an uplink transmission method thereof are provided. The base station receives a plurality of first uplink transmission requests of a plurality of first wireless devices of a first group and a plurality of second uplink transmission requests of a plurality of second wireless devices of a second group in a first time interval, and approves one of the second uplink transmission requests. The base station receives second uplink transmission data of the second wireless device corresponding to the approved second uplink transmission request in a second time interval behind the first time interval. The base station receives the second uplink transmission requests of the second wireless devices corresponding to the unapproved second uplink transmission requests in a third time interval behind the second time interval. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120281682 | Method and Apparatus for Improving Synchronization Shift Command Transmission Efficiency in TD-SCDMA Uplink Synchronization - A method of wireless communication includes receiving a signal associated with a frequency for adjusting timing and adjusting the timing based on the frequency. The frequency is less than once every 8 subframes. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120281683 | Interference Mitigation in Downlink Signal Communication to a Mobile Terminal - In downlink signal communication to a mobile terminal ( | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120281684 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND A BASE STATION AND USER TERMINAL THEREOF - A radio communication method in a radio communication system in which data signals for a first and second user are respectively transmitted using first and second subcarrier groups, and pilot signals for the first and second users are multiplexed using time-division multiplexing with the data signals for those users, including arranging a pilot signal of the first user at frequencies different from frequencies of a pilot signal of the second user and mapping subcarrier components of the pilot signals so that one of subcarrier components of higher frequencies corresponds to one of subcarrier components of lower frequencies, wherein the pilot signals are generated using a Zadoff-Chu sequence. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120294289 | Bit Error Probability Measurement - There is provided a method, including receiving data in a first user terminal during a time slot assigned for simultaneous transmission of data to a first set of at least one user terminal and to a second set of at least one user terminal in the time-division multiplexing communication protocol, estimating the applied power ratio between the transmission power of a first sub-channel to the first set and the transmission power of a second sub-channel to the second set, wherein the available power ratios are divided into at least one known region and each applied power ratio belongs to one region, estimating a bit error probability for each of the bursts of the received data; and applying an adaptation process in order to make the estimated bit error probabilities to fall into one of bit error probability intervals of a predefined mapping table with a predetermined probability, wherein the bit error probability interval in which the estimated bit error probabilities fall determines the bit error probability that is to be reported to a network and the adaptation process to be applied depends on which region the applied power ratio belongs to. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294290 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A first user terminal receives data during a time slot assigned for simultaneous transmission of data to a first set of at least one user terminal and to a second set of at least one user terminal using time-division multiplexing, estimates the applied power ratio between a first sub-channel to the first set and a second sub-channel to the second set (available power ratios are divided into at least one known region and each applied power ratio belongs to one region), estimates a bit error probability for each of the bursts of the received data; and applies an adaptation process in order to make the estimated bit error probabilities fall into one of bit error probability intervals of a predefined mapping table with a predetermined probability. which determines the bit error probability that is to be reported to a network. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294291 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK ASSISTED HYBRID NETWORK OPERATION - Methods and apparatus for minimizing scheduling collisions between networks. In one embodiment, the networks are substantially unsynchronized, and during hybrid network operation (e.g., LTE and CDMA 1× operation), a mobile device can place CDMA 1× voice calls while registered with the LTE network. However, since the LTE and CDMA 1× networks are not coordinated, the mobile device will experience scheduling collisions. In one variant, the LTE network accounts for predictable behaviors (such as CDMA 1× paging), and schedules low priority tasks during likely time interval conflicts. Consequently, even though the mobile device must tune away from the LTE network to check CDMA 1× pages, overall LTE network performance is minimally affected. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120294292 | Method of Associating Time Slots with a Transmission Path in a Wireless Interconnected Network - A method of associating time slots with a transmission path in a wireless interconnected network made of a plurality of network nodes such that the transmission path extends between a source node and a destination node and comprises a plurality of sequential links between adjacent network nodes, data being transmitted in the network on a time slot basis by the association of the time slots to be used with the links of the transmission path, wherein a quality value is determinable for each link within an association sequence of time slots describing an end-to-end data transmission from the source node to the destination node along the transmission path, where the value represents the reliability of the data transfer. An overall quality value for the association sequence can further be determined as a function of the quality values of each of the links. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120300751 | BASE STATION, USER TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a transmission timing adjustment determination unit determining whether it to adjust a transmission timing of an uplink signal for each of user terminals; a radio resource allocation unit allocating a radio resource for instruction information to be transmitted to first one of the user terminals for which it has been determined, by the transmission timing adjustment determination unit, that he transmission timing of the uplink signal is not to be adjusted, the instruction information indicating that the transmission timing is not to be adjusted; and an instruction information transmission unit transmitting the instruction information to the first one of the user terminals using the radio resource allocated by the radio resource allocation unit. Further, the radio resource allocation unit is configured to allocate the instruction information to a radio resource to be shared and used by the first one of the user terminals. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300752 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - This specification relates to an apparatus and method for performing random access in a wireless communication system. This specification discloses a mobile station, including a reception unit for receiving TAG configuration information on which at least one serving cell configured in the mobile station is classified as a Timing Alignment Group (TAG) from a base station and a transmission unit for transmitting a random access preamble to the base station on one representative serving cell within the TAG. In accordance with this specification, a procedure of obtaining a TAV for a serving cell in order to secure and maintain uplink timing synchronization becomes clear, the time taken to obtain uplink synchronization for a serving cell may be reduced, and overhead due to excessive random access attempts may be reduced by obtaining a TAV for a plurality of serving cells through one random access procedure. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300753 | Dynamic Real-Time Tiered Client Access - Wireless client devices within a wireless network exchange data with other wireless devices during particular time slots determined by the network. More particularly, the system generates and wirelessly broadcasts synchronization information to the client devices, where the synchronization information contains individual masks to be applied to bit fields of individual client devices, where said time slots are determined in accordance with the masked bit fields. In such a manner, client devices can be coordinated to communicate with the system in a dynamic real-time tiered manner. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300754 | Scheduling of Up-Link Transmissions of a Wireless Communication System - A method is disclosed of scheduling up-link transmissions for a number of terminals of a wireless communication system into a number of groups, wherein each group comprises terminals intended for simultaneous up-link transmission during a respective period of time. A subset metric may be calculated for each of a number of subsets of terminals based on transmissions received from the terminals of the subset. The subset metric is indicative of a simultaneous transmission suitability measure for the terminals of the subset. The subsets may be processed in subset metric order, starting with the subset having a subset metric indicating a least suitability metrics for of simultaneous transmission. During the processing, each terminal of the subset that is not already scheduled in a group may be scheduled in a group that does not already comprise another terminal of the subset. Information indicative of the period of time during which a scheduled terminal is intended to transmit may be transmitted to each of the scheduled terminals. Corresponding computer program product, scheduler and arrangement are also disclosed. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120300755 | Process for Slot Synchronization of the P-SCH Sequence in a UMTS Communication System and a Receiver for the Same - A Process for achieving slot synchronization of the P-SCH sequence in a UMTS communication system, involving the step of receiving ( | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120307806 | Video sub-reservation protocol in a wireless ecosystem - Video sub-reservation protocol in a wireless ecosystem. Appropriate access is provided to a number of wireless communication devices to ensure very high performance and a high perceptual user experience with respect to media related content communications. Access to the communication medium (e.g., air within a wireless location system) is provided to various wireless communication devices in a manner as to minimize collisions and contention. In one instance, different respective access assignment periods are sub-divided to give respective communication medium access to various devices within the system. Such sub-reservation may be adaptive in response to any of a number of considerations (e.g., traffic, device processing history, etc.). Also, such sub-reservation may provide respective time specificity at or during which certain devices may conduct communications, but may also specify any other operational parameters (e.g., which frequency spectra to use, duration of such communications, modulation coding set (MCS) to use, etc.). | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307807 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system equipped with a base station, and at least one of wireless communication terminals which perform packet communication with respect to the base station by using at least one carrier, and wireless communication terminals which perform packet communications with respect to the base station by using a plurality of carriers at the same time. The wireless communication terminal includes: an allocation information allocating section for allocating allocation information for one carrier or a plurality of carriers to a wireless communication terminal when at least one carrier is allocated to the wireless communication terminal; and an allocation information storage section for storing said allocation information for one carrier or a plurality of carriers; wherein the wireless communication terminal judges a destination of a communication packet transmitted from the base station based upon the allocation information contained in a header of the transmitted packet so as to be communicated with the base station. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307808 | DETERMINING UE INTERFERENCE DURING HANDOVER IN ENHANCED INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION - A method of wireless communication determines a UE interference condition during handover. A target cell receives information that indicates an interference condition of a user equipment (UE). Prior to completing handover, the target cell determines an expected UE interference condition that will arise after completing the handover of the UE at a target base station. The information can be determined based on a message from the UE. The UE message may indicate which cell is the strongest, indicate the interference condition at both the source and target cells, or only provide a measurement of the strongest cell. Based on the UE measurements, the target eNodeB may schedule the UE on resources based on the expected interference condition at the UE that may arise after the handover. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307809 | ALTERNATE CHANNEL FOR CARRYING SELECTED MESSAGE TYPES - A method is implemented by a subscriber unit in a wireless communication for establishing a network session. The subscriber unit encodes an acknowledgment message for transmission on a shared reverse link channel to a base station. Acknowledgment information associated with a received session tag at the subscriber unit to the base station is transmitted over the shared reverse link channel, on a condition that the session tag is received from a network server via the base station on a forward link channel and identified by the subscriber unit. The acknowledgment is transmitted on a reverse traffic channel on a condition that the session ID tag is not identified by the subscriber unit. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307810 | RANDOM TIMING OFFSET DETERMINATION - Methods, systems and instructions stored on computer-readable media for generating, at a first node, a plurality of data units. The plurality of data units are spread with a common pseudo-noise (PN) code that is used by a plurality of nodes, including the first node and a second node, that are in communication with an access point. A random timing offset is determined, and a first data unit is transmitted to the access point at a first time based upon a slot start time and the random timing offset. The first data unit is transmitted while at least a portion of a second signal is transmitted from the second node such that both the first data unit and the second signal are received by the access point. The second signal is transmitted at a second time based on the slot time and a second random timing offset. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120307811 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for establishing uplink synchronization in a base station, according to one embodiment of the present description, comprises performing a process for connection to user equipment, setting component carrier aggregation information, generating uplink timing groups from the set component carrier aggregation, and transmitting, via a plurality of component carriers, information on the thus-generated uplink timing groups simultaneously to the user equipment. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120320881 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING TIME SLOTS TO NODES WITHOUT CONTENTION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is an apparatus and method for allocating time slots to nodes without contention in a wireless network. The method for allotting time slots includes: receiveing a packet length and maximum allowable latencies of the nodes and converting them into data in symbol units; determining a beacon order so that a beacon interval representing a length of a superframe is smaller than or equal to a minimum value of the converted maximum allowable latencies; determining a superframe order so that the sum of a length of a beacon frame, a length of a contention access period, and a length of contention free period is smaller than a length of an active portion, based on the converted packet length; and allocating a guaranteed time slot without contention to each node according to an allocation priority order for the nodes. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320882 | INTERCELL INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Methods and apparatus are described for mitigating intercell interference in wireless communication systems utilizing substantially the same operating frequency band across multiple neighboring coverage areas. The operating frequency band may be shared across multiple neighboring or otherwise adjacent cells, such as in a frequency reuse one configuration. The wireless communication system can synchronize one or more resource allocation regions or zones across the multiple base stations, and can coordinate a permutation type within each resource allocation zone. The base stations can coordinate a pilot configuration in each of a plurality of coordinated resource allocation regions. Subscriber stations can be assigned resources in a coordinated resource allocation region based on interference levels. A subscriber station can determine a channel estimate for each of multiple base stations in the coordinated resource allocation region to mitigate interference. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320883 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING ACK/NACK INFORMATION TO UPLINK PHYSICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - Disclosed is a communication system which transmits Acknowledgement (ACK)/Negative Acknowledgement (NACK) information on downlink data by using an uplink control channel. The communication system individually allocates radio resources for a plurality of slots included in an uplink subframe. Consequently, uplink radio resources may be used freely, and it is even possible to flexibly handle a situation in which the amount of the ACK/NACK information is increased. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320884 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A TEMPORARY BLOCK FLOW IN A DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - The present invention provides a method and system for managing temporary block flow in a data communication network environment. In one embodiment, a temporary block flow is established between the first entity and the second entity. Then, it is determined whether the established TBF is to be maintained for a predetermined time period by the first entity based on quality of service (QoS) parameters associated with the established TBF. Further, a message indicating that the established TBF is to be maintained for the predetermined time period is sent to the second entity if the established TBF is to be maintained. Also, the established TBF between the first entity and the second entity is extended in uplink or delayed in downlink. If the established TBF is not to be maintained, the TBF established between the first entity and the second entity is teared down. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120320885 | MIXED MODE PREAMBLE FOR MIMO WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A preamble of a frame for a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication for a first transmit antenna of the MIMO communication includes a legacy preamble portion in accordance with a legacy wireless communication protocol. The preamble of the frame for the MIMO wireless communication for the first transmit antenna also includes a current protocol preamble portion in accordance with a protocol of the MIMO wireless communication. The preamble of a frame for at least a second antenna of the MIMO communication includes a cyclically shifted legacy preamble portion for the frame. The preamble of the frame for the MIMO wireless communication for the second transmit antenna also includes a second current protocol preamble portion in accordance with a protocol of the MIMO wireless communication. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120327912 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING RECEPTION AVAILABILITY ON MULTI-SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY MODULE DEVICES - An approach is provided for improving reception availability for multi-subscriber identity module (SIM) devices. The approach involves determining network access information for one or more applications resident on a device having two or more subscriber identity modules, wherein the network access information specifies, at least in part, one or more network access schedules, which of the two or more subscriber identity modules to use for establishing one or more network connections for the one or more applications, or a combination thereof. The approach also involves processing and/or facilitating a processing of the network access information to determine a coordinated network access schedule for the one or more applications. The approach further involves determining to use the coordinated network access schedule in place of the one or more network schedules to cause, at least in part, an establishment of the one or more network connections. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120327913 | MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - In a multi-radio user equipment, communications on a Long Term Evolution (LTE) radio and Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) radio operating in Wi-Fi mode may be aligned to reduce interference between the two radios. Communications of the WLAN radio may be aligned to the LTE radio using Notice of Absence (NoA) functionality. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120327914 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for allowing a station to transmit a sounding signal in a multiple-antenna wireless communication system, the method including receiving a group defining information about a group to which the station belongs from an access point (AP); determining a transmission time taken in transmitting a sounding signal by the respective stations, which belong to the group, on the basis of the group defining information; and transmitting a sounding signal to the AP in accordance with the transmission time and preset transmission order when receiving a sounding request signal from the AP. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120327915 | PPDU RECEIVING METHOD AND APPARATUS BASED ON THE MIMO TECHNIQUE IN A WLAN SYSTEM - Provided is a method of receiving a physical layer convergence procedure (PLCP) protocol data unit (PPDU) by an access point (AP) in a wireless local area (LAN) system. The method includes: allocating a first transmission channel bandwidth to a first station (STA) which is multiple input multiple output (MIMO)-paired with the AP; allocating a second transmission channel bandwidth to a second STA which is MIMO-paired with the AP; transmitting to the first STA and the second STA a sync trigger for determining a time point at which the first STA transmits a first PPDU and a time point at which the second STA transmits a second PPDU; and receiving simultaneously the first PPDU and the second PPDU from the first STA and the second STA. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120327916 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION AND USER DEVICE - The present invention provides a method for transmitting uplink control information and a user device, which transmits ACK/NACK (ACKnowledgement/Negative ACK) information and uplink control information other than the ACK/NACK information using a first PUCCH resource for transmitting the ACK/NACK information and a second PUCCH resource for transmitting the uplink control information within an uplink sub-frame, respectively when the first PUCCH resource and the second PUCCH resource belong to the same PUCCH area in each slot of the uplink sub-frame, and to drop the transmission of the uplink control information other than the ACK/NACK information using the first PUCCH resource when the first PUCCH resource and the second PUCCH resource belong to different PUCCH areas within the uplink sub-frame. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120327917 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING CONTROL CHANNEL - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method and a device which enable a terminal to receive a control channel in a wireless communication system that uses multi-carriers, the method comprising the following steps: receiving a plurality of search space through a sub-frame, wherein each of the search spaces includes a plurality of control channel candidate sets and each of the search spaces corresponds to each of the carriers; and monitoring the control channel candidates for control channels, wherein the plurality of search spaces are connected in the resource region for the control channels according to an allocation pattern and with the starting point as the basis, and the allocation pattern changes according to time. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20130010766 | SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE DURING CONNECTION SETUP - In a user equipment (UE) with multiple radio access technologies (RATs), communications of one RAT engaged in connection setup may be protected from communications of other RATs. Techniques for protecting such connection setups include performing power backoff on a potentially interfering RAT or implementing a time division multiplexing (TDM) solution alternating when certain RATs are active. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010767 | COEXISTENCE OF PRIORITY BROADCAST AND UNICAST IN PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKS - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided. In one configuration, the apparatus transmits a first broadcast signal including information indicating an intention to use a unicast resource for a broadcast. In addition, the apparatus transmits a second broadcast signal in the unicast resource. In another configuration, the apparatus, which is a first wireless device, receives a first broadcast signal from a second wireless device including information indicating an intention to use a unicast resource for a broadcast. In addition, the apparatus receives a first scheduling signal from the second wireless device in a scheduling resource. The first scheduling signal is for indicating a second intention to use the unicast resource for transmitting a second broadcast signal. Furthermore, the apparatus refrains from transmitting a second scheduling signal in the scheduling resource in response to the first scheduling signal. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010768 | Communication Method in a Mobile Communication System Using MTC Equipment, and Device for Same - The present invention relates to a method for enabling the efficient communication of machine-type communication (MTC) equipment by selecting a connection with a base station during a first allowed time period in a mobile communication system using the MTC equipment, and to a device for same. With regard to an example of the present invention, a communication method for MTC equipment in a wireless mobile communication system may include: receiving a first message, including information regarding the first allowed time period, from a network through dedicated signaling; transmitting or receiving data to/from the network during the first allowed time period included in the first message; and receiving, from the network, a second message including information regarding a second allowed time period different from the first allowed time period. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010769 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESERVING DATA CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Methods for reserving a data channel and apparatuses supporting the same are disclosed. A method for reserving a data channel in a wireless access system includes transmitting a request frame for reserving the data channel by a sending node, and receiving a notify frame in response to the request frame during a first time period or a second time period by the sending node. If the notify frame is received during the first time period, the sending node determines that the request frame has been collided, and if the notify frame is received during the second time period, the sending node determines that the data channel has been reserved successfully. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010770 | CELL SEARCH METHOD, FORWARD LINK FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS USING THE SAME AND FORWARD LINK FRAME STRUCTURE - A method of and an apparatus therefor searching a cell in a mobile station of a communication system in which a plurality of cells are grouped into a plurality of cell groups, and each cell group includes at least two cells. The method includes detecting a primary synchronization signal and a secondary synchronization signal from a received signal, and identifying a cell based on a combination of the primary synchronization signal and the secondary synchronization signal. The secondary synchronization signal is related to the cell group to which the mobile station belongs and the primary synchronization signal is related to the cell to which the mobile station belongs within the cell group. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010771 | Transmission Format Selection For Optimizing Transmission Of Delay Sensitive Traffic - A method, scheduler, and processor program product for scheduling transmission of packets from a base station to a mobile station. A data rate control index is received from a mobile station. A transmission format is selected using the received data rate control index. The selected transmission format uses a payload size that is smaller than a largest compatible payload size for another transmission format corresponding to the received data rate control index and that is smaller than a total size of packets waiting to be transmitted. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130010772 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING REGISTRATION OF ENDPOINT DEVICES THROUGH PROVISIONING - A method and apparatus for enabling registration of an endpoint device that is incapable of supporting a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) based Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) registration are disclosed. For example, the method performs a static registration of the endpoint device in a plurality network elements associated with an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network by provisioning that is initiated by a service provider of the IMS network. The method processes an originating call request or a terminating call request associated with the endpoint device by an Application Server (AS) using the static registration, wherein the application server is one of the plurality network elements. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130016703 | User Identifier Multiplexing By Time DivisionAANM Ranta; Jukka TapioAACI KaarinaAACO FIAAGP Ranta; Jukka Tapio Kaarina FI - A network assigns to a first user equipment UE and to a second UE a same temporary identifier for use at least while the first and the second UEs are simultaneously in a connected state in a same cell. Individual control channel transmissions utilizing the temporary identifier are selectively associated to only one of the first and the second UEs according to a predetermined time domain division. In various embodiments the time domain division comprises discontinuous reception DRX periods having mutually exclusive reception time periods; or mutually exclusive radio frame or subframe groups assigned to the first and second UEs for at least downlink control channel transmissions. Such radio frame/subframe groups may be even and odd numbered, or may be given by any of various example formulas if there are two or more UEs sharing the same temporary identifier. For an LTE system such an identifier may be the C-RNTI. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130016704 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHODAANM Lin; Chien-NanAACI TaipeiAACO TWAAGP Lin; Chien-Nan Taipei TW - A wireless transmission method is provided for allowing data transmission between plural wireless devices. In the wireless transmission method, each time cycle is divided into a flag time segment and a transmission time segment. The flag time segment includes plural flag time slots corresponding to respective wireless devices, and the transmission time segment includes plural transmission time slots. After the plural wireless devices are synchronized with each other, the wireless device for transmitting data issues a transmission request during the corresponding flag time slot. In response to the transmission request, a corresponding wireless device issues an assigning command during the corresponding flag time slot. The wireless device issuing the transmission request will transmit data during a transmission time slot assigned by the assigning command. In accordance with the wireless transmission method, each of the plural wireless devices has transmitting and receiving capability. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130016705 | ENHANCING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS (SRS) - A method for enhancing a sounding reference signal (SRS) in a non-root wireless communication device is disclosed. The method determines that all SRS transmissions for the wireless communication device are to occur in an uplink pilot time slot (UpPTS) portion of a transition subframe. The method also determines whether available uplink bandwidth for the UpPTS portion is greater than available uplink bandwidth for a normal uplink subframe. A current SRS is transmitted using the available uplink bandwidth for UpPTS portion when the available uplink bandwidth for the UpPTS portion is greater than available uplink bandwidth for the normal uplink subframe. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130016706 | UL/DL SCHEDULING FOR FULL BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION - A method may include receiving, by a user equipment incapable of transmitting and receiving simultaneously, a schedule to transmit data on an uplink, detecting, by the user equipment, whether there is data to be transmitted on the uplink, and receiving, by the user equipment, during a time corresponding to the schedule, data associated with a downlink, when it is determined that there is no data to be transmitted. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130016707 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK SCHEDULING REQUEST IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMAANM He; HongAACI BeijingAACO CNAAGP He; Hong Beijing CNAANM Li; YingyangAACI BeijingAACO CNAAGP Li; Yingyang Beijing CNAANM Sun; ChengjunAACI BeijingAACO CNAAGP Sun; Chengjun Beijing CN - A method and apparatus for transmitting an uplink Scheduling Request (SR) are provided. The method includes, obtaining a SR subframe configuration by receiving signaling, and transmitting SR information to a Base Station (BS) by using physical resources of another non-SR channel for transmitting other uplink control information. By applying the present invention, the SR, ACKnowledgement/Non-ACKnowledgement (ACK/NACK) or Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) information is returned to a BS when low Constant Modulus (CM) characteristic of an uplink Component Carrier (CC) is ensured. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130022029 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a data transmission method and apparatus of a machine-type communication (MTC) device in a wireless communication system. The MTC device receives common control channel (CCCH) configuration information for CCCH configuration of a normal terminal and the MTC CCCH configuration information for CCCH configuration of the MTC device from a base station, selects one MTC CCCH group from a set of the MTC CCCH groups on the basis of the CCCH configuration information and the MTC CCCH configuration information, and transmits or receives data through an the MTC CCCH to which the selected the MTC CCCH group belongs. | 01-24-2013 |
| 20130028238 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD FOR MAPPING THE CONTROL CHANNEL TO PHYSICAL RESOURCE USING BLOCK INTERLEAVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a downlink control channel in a mobile communication system and a method for mapping the control channel to physical resources using a block interleaver are provided. In order to transmit a downlink control channel in a mobile communication system, information bits are modulated to generate one or more modulation symbols according to a specific modulation scheme, the modulation symbols are interleaved using a block interleaver, and the interleaved modulated symbols are mapped to resource elements allocated for transmission of at least one control channel in a subframe, thereby transmitting the at least one control channel. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028239 | Time Alignment in Multicarrier OFDM Network - A base station receives uplink signals from a wireless device and transmits at least one time alignment command computed based, at least in part, on timing of the received uplink signals. The time alignment command comprises a time adjustment value and an index identifying a carrier group. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028240 | MOBILE USER TERMINAL, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile user terminal, which communicates with a base station in an intermittent fashion, the mobile user terminal includes a radio transmitter which transmits downlink channel quality information indicating downlink channel quality and an uplink pilot signal to a base station in an intermittent fashion; and a transmit time controller which synchronizes transmit time of the downlink quality information and transmit time of the uplink pilot signal relative to each other, such that the downlink quality information and the uplink pilot signal are sent in adjacent different timings in a period corresponding to a state of intermittent communicate. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028241 | METHOD FOR SENDING UPLINK SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL, METHOD FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL, MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for sending an uplink sounding reference signal (SRS), a method for estimating a channel, a mobile terminal and a base station are provided. The method for sending the uplink SRS includes: processing the uplink SRS with masks to obtain a plurality of uplink SRSs processed by the masks; sending the plurality of uplink SRSs processed by the masks on each of numerous time slots distributed to reference signals. The technical solution is able to improve the capacity of the SRS. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130028242 | ARQ SYSTEM WITH STATUS AND PACKET ACKNOWLEDGEMENT - A communication system comprises a downlink indicator channel (DL | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130034085 | Medium Access Control Timing Advance Group Assignment - In a method for assigning serving cells of a mobile terminal to timing advance groups, a network node transmits a Medium Access Control (MAC) control element to a mobile terminal in a wireless communication network. The MAC control element includes a set of first indicators, with each first indicator specifying whether a corresponding serving cell of the mobile terminal is to be included in a timing advance group. The MAC control element also includes at least one second indicator, with each second indicator specifying a timing advance group, and also specifying, via a defined mapping, the serving cell of the mobile terminal to which the timing advance group corresponds. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130034086 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZING EDGE DEVICES ON CHANNELS WITHOUT CARRIER SENSE - A system and method are disclosed for synchronizing edge devices on a network, wherein the network has limited bandwidth and does not support a practical carrier sense mechanism. The edge devices transmit, using a slotted protocol, to a server located at a central data aggregation point. The server also controls a Central Transmitter, which sends messages to the edge devices to assign transmission slots and provide timing information to the edge devices to ensure that transmissions sent by devices sharing the same communication channel do not collide. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130034087 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING INFORMATION ON AN UPLINK TIMING GROUP IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting information on an uplink timing group includes performing RACH procedures with user equipment for a preset period of time to generate an uplink timing group, and transmitting, to the user equipment, a message including information on the configuration of the thus-generated uplink timing group, wherein said uplink timing group is a group of one or more component carriers to which identical uplink timing correction is applied. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130039349 | Methods of Channel State Information Feedback and Transmission in Coordinated Multi-Point Wireless Communications System - An apparatus and method for feedback solutions that function in conjunction with CoMP transmissions. The feedback solutions are applicable to joint transmission (JT) as well as coordinated scheduling (CS) and coordinated beamforming (CB). Embodiments of the present disclosure are described herein in the context of a wireless network in compliance with LTE standards. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130039350 | METHODS AND DEVICE OF MANAGING RESOURCES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a device for managing resources in a wireless communication network are provided. In one embodiment, a Medium Access Control (MAC) superframe format for a wireless communication network includes a beacon frame including beacon information for synchronizing devices in the wireless communication network and for defining structure of the MAC superframe, where the beacon information includes superframe structure information and synchronization information. The MAC superframe format also includes at least one multi-node connection frame substantially following the beacon frame and including device specific information and network specific information for allocating resources to one or more of the devices and/or providing network configuration parameters to the devices. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130039351 | MULTIPLE MODE SUPPORT IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Briefly, in accordance with one embodiment of the invention, an access point may provide multiple access to a single medium by providing time division multiple access to the medium. During a first phase to communicate with devices of a first type, the access point may transmit a beacon to indicate to devices of a second type not to communicate during the first phase. During a second phase to communicate with devices of the second type, the access point may transmit a beacon to indicate to devices of the first type not to communicate during the second phase. In one particular embodiment, the access point may transmit a medium reservation packet to indicate reservation of the medium for affected devices. Phases may be adaptively extended by transmitting additional medium reservation packets until it is desired to end the present phase and transition to the second phase | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130044735 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS POINT SYSTEM BASED ON VIRTUAL ACCESS POINT SERVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) system is provided. The WLAN AP system includes a first virtual access point (VAP) that is logical entity performing communication with a first station (STA); and a second VAP performing communication with a second STA. The first VAP uses a first channel to exchange a frame with the first STA and the second VAP uses a second channel to exchange a frame with the second STA. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044736 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station includes a time-division-multiplexer that time-division-multiplexes control signals and data signals; a culling unit that culls from the signal time-division-multiplexed by the time-division-multiplexer, data signals temporally overlapping control signals of a neighboring cell; a transmitting unit that transmits the data signal culled by the culling unit; and a determining unit that determines conditions concerning the culling corresponding to transmission power of a portion temporally overlapping the control signals of the neighboring cell, in the signal transmitted by the transmitting unit. The culling unit culls the data signals based on a result obtained by the determining unit. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130044737 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION STATE AT A USER EQUIPMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of controlling uplink synchronization state at a user equipment in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method of controlling an uplink synchronization state at a user equipment in a mobile communication system comprises receiving control information associated with controlling uplink synchronization state of the user equipment from a network, releasing uplink resources allocated from the network if the uplink synchronization state is shifted from a synchronization state to an asynchronous state based on the control information. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130051373 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL SEARCH IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus for transmitting and receiving signals are provided for facilitating a cell search in a wireless communication system supporting various types of multicarrier transmission. A carrier type indication signal indicating a type of carrier supported by the base station is generated. The carrier type indication signal is transmitted with synchronization signals, to one or more terminals in a cell of the base station. A type of a carrier supported by a base station is determined based on a carrier type indication signal transmitted by the base station. A cell search procedure is performed to access the base station according to the type of the carrier supported by the base station. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130058314 | PACKET TYPE SPOOFING FOR COEXISTENCE AMONG MULTIPLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES - Methods having corresponding apparatus and computer-readable media comprise: transmitting and receiving wireless Long Term Evolution (LTE) signals according to an LTE schedule; transmitting and receiving wireless Bluetooth signals according to a Bluetooth schedule having a plurality of Bluetooth schedule slots, wherein the wireless Bluetooth signals represent Bluetooth Asynchronous Connection-oriented [logical transport] (ACL) packets; generating a Bluetooth ACL packet; selecting a spoofed number M of the Bluetooth schedule slots for the Bluetooth ACL packet based on information representing the LTE schedule, wherein M is a positive integer; selecting a Bluetooth ACL packet type based on the spoofed number M of the Bluetooth schedule slots; and indicating the selected Bluetooth ACL packet type in a type field of the Bluetooth ACL packet prior to transmitting the wireless Bluetooth signals representing the Bluetooth ACL packet. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058315 | TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL FOR PHYSICAL RANDOM ACCESS CHANNELS - The invention relates to methods for adjusting the transmit power utilized by a mobile terminal for uplink transmissions, and to methods for adjusting the transmit power used by a mobile terminal for one or more RACH procedures. The invention is also providing apparatus and system for performing these methods, and computer readable media the instructions of which cause the apparatus and system to perform the methods described herein. In order to allow for adjusting the transmit power of uplink transmissions on uplink component carriers, the invention suggests introducing a power scaling for uplink PRACH transmissions performing RACH procedures on an uplink component carrier. The power scaling is proposed on the basis of a prioritization among multiple uplink transmissions or on the basis of the uplink component carriers on which RACH procedures are performed. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058316 | COEXISTENCE TIMER MECHANISM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A common coexistence timer can be implemented on collocated or proximate wireless radio devices so that timing information associated with scheduled communications of each of the wireless radio devices is communicated with a common time reference. The coexistence timer provides the common time reference for the wireless radio devices. A transmitting wireless radio device can calculate a difference time associated with the timing information of a scheduled communication and can provide the difference time to a receiving wireless radio device. The receiving wireless radio device can convert the difference time into a time format corresponding to the receiving wireless radio device's local time reference. This can minimize interference between the collocated or proximate wireless radio devices, thus minimizing performance degradation, packet collision, and interference. Moreover, this also can eliminate timing errors due to the wireless radio devices using different timers operating at different frequencies or being synchronized to different crystals. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130058317 | METHOD IN WHICH A GROUP OF TERMINALS RECEIVES A DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL, AND METHOD IN WHICH THE TERMINALS MAKE REQUESTS FOR BANDWIDTH IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN WHICH THE SAME STID OR C-RNTI IS ALLOCATED TO THE GROUP OF TERMINALS - The present invention relates to a method in which a group of terminals receives a downlink control channel, and to a method in which the terminals make requests for bandwidth in a wireless communication system in which the same station identifier (STID) or cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) is allocated to the group of terminals. The method, in which a group of terminals to which the same STID or C-RNTI is allocated receive a downlink control channel, comprises the following steps: receiving, from a base station, information on the STID or C-RNTI allocated to the terminals; receiving information on a time domain in which the downlink control channel for the terminals is transmitted, information on a frequency domain, or information on a search space from the base station; and decoding the downlink control channel on the basis of the information on a time domain, the information on a frequency domain, or the information on a search space, and on the basis of the STID or C-RNTI. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130064229 | Energy Efficient Method For Communication In A Wireless Sensor Network Of An Industrial Control System - A method for communication in a wireless sensor network of an industrial control system. The network includes a plurality of device nodes and at least one gateway. The method includes aggregating in at least one wireless device data originating from at least two data packets. The method includes receiving at a first node at least one first data packet for a first destination address and aggregating data from the at least one data packet with data from at least one second data packet, intended for the same first destination address, forming an aggregated data packet and sending the aggregated data packet to another node or to said gateway. In other aspects of the invention a method, system and a computer program for carrying out the method are described. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064230 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a signal from a base station to a user equipment in a multi-node system comprises down-link-transmitting a signal at a first zone of a radio frame by using centralized antennas (CAs); and downlink-transmitting a signal at a second zone used for a backhaul link of a relay in the radio frame by using distributed nodes, wherein the first zone and the second zone are multiplexed by time division. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064231 | GENERATING DOWNLINK FRAME AND SEARCHING FOR CELL - The present invention relates to a method for generating a downlink frame including generating a first short sequence and a second short sequence indicating cell group information, generating a first scrambling sequence determined by the first synchronization signal, generating a second scrambling sequence determined by the first short sequence, scrambling the first short sequence with the first scrambling sequence, scrambling the second short sequence with at least the second scrambling sequence, and mapping a second synchronization signal including the scrambled first short sequence and the scrambled second short sequence in the frequency domain. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130064232 | TECHNIQUES FOR REDUCING OVERHEAD IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Parallel demodulators are provided in field units. Forward and reverse channel allocation information may be broadcast to the field units in the same epoch as traffic data but on first and second channels, such as paging and traffic channels. This assures that all field units are able to receive forward and reverse channel allocation information every epoch. By having parallel demodulators in the field unit, switching between the first and second channels is avoided and channel allocation information is not lost. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130070734 | NETWORK APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING CHANNEL IN CONTENTION FREE PERIOD - There is provided a network apparatus in which a contention free period is fixed at a relatively maximum size and guaranteed time slots are varied in the fixed contention free period to allocate remaining time slots of the contention free period to data transmissions of terminals according to priority. There is provided a network apparatus for accessing a channel in a contention free period, the method including: a coordinator fixing a contention free period within a frame to have a preset size and setting and allocating guaranteed time slots (GTSs) in the fixed contention free period according to request; and a terminal group having at least one terminal, forming a network with the coordinator, requesting guaranteed time slots from the coordinator, and transmitting data in allocated guaranteed time slots. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130070735 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - When time at present is included in a high-traffic time period, an interference determining unit ( | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130077603 | Method and Apparatus For Mapping Multi-Standard IQ Data Based on CPRI - The invention provides a method for IQ data mapping, including the following steps of mapping IQ data of one or more standards to a CPRI radio frame, wherein, the CPRI radio frame includes multiple multi-frames, and boundaries of the multi-frames are aligned with the header of the CPRI radio frame, and each multi-frame includes K basic frames, and each basic frame includes a plurality of IQ sub-containers, and one IQ sub-container constitutes one time slot, and the number K of the basic frames and bit widths Naxc of the IQ sub-containers included in each multi-frame are identical for different standards, and the length of the CPRI radio frame is 10ms. The invention also provides an IQ data mapping apparatus. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130077604 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - The present invention provides a method, an apparatus and a system for data transmission. The method includes: receiving processed first microwave data information that is received through a microwave antenna; performing multiplexing through a preset rule on the first microwave data information and processed first radio frequency data information that is received through a base station antenna, and sending multiplexed information to a baseband unit, so that the baseband unit sends the first microwave data information to a microwave indoor unit. In the method, the apparatus and the system for data transmission, microwave data information and radio frequency data information are multiplexed, and then multiplexed information is transmitted together. The microwave data information can be transmitted through a transmission medium between base station devices, such as a fiber, thereby saving connection cables between microwave transmission devices and reducing a device cost and an installation cost of the microwave transmission devices. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130077605 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING VIDEO CONTENTS FROM A SERVER TO A TERMINAL OF A USER WITHIN SERVICE PERIODS OF A RADIO TRANSPORT CHANNEL - The invention related to a method for transmitting video contents from a server to a terminal of a user within service periods (S) of a radio transport channel, each video content being encoded by using scalable codec technology for integrating a scalable codec base layer (b | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130077606 | Method, Network Element and System for Scheduling Communication Link - Provided is a method for scheduling a communication link, wherein the communication link is adapted for connecting two network elements, wherein a first carrier and a second carrier are assigned to the communication link, wherein each carrier includes frames divided into timeslots, and a predefined number of timeslots is allocated for downlink communication and a predefined number of timeslots is allocated for uplink communication. The method includes scheduling the communication link for offsetting the start of the frames of the first carrier in respect to the start of the frames of the second carrier. Also provided are a network element adapted for carrying out the method and a system including the network element. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130077607 | TECHNIQUES FOR DYNAMIC RESOURCE ALLOCATION - Techniques are disclosed that dynamically allocate communications resources in a wireless communications network, such as a wireless personal area network (WPAN). For instance, a wireless communications device may obtain a resource allocation. This resource allocation includes a time slot (e.g., a TDMA time slot) within a wireless communications medium. The device determines a first portion of the time slot in which it intends to transmit data. Also, the wireless communications device relinquishes a second portion of the time slot that occurs after the first portion of the time slot. Based on this relinquishment, a central controller device may reallocate the second portion of the time slot. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130083779 | METHOD FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION BASED ON CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is device-to-device communication based on a cellular communication network. A method of operating a terminal capable of supporting D2D (device to device) communication based on a cellular communication network may include: determining whether to perform central control D2D communication or distributed control D2D communication; and performing the distributed control D2D communication, or requesting a setting for the central control D2D communication to a base station on the basis of the determination. With the D2D communication based on the cellular communication network, the cellular communication, the central control D2D communication, or the distributed control D2D communication may flexibly and selectively operate in the cellular network. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083780 | ANTENNA TIME OFFSET IN MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT AND COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSIONS - A method for wireless communication is provided which includes receiving first and second signals transmitted from first and second antennas, respectively, determining a time offset between the first and second antennas based on the first and second signals, and reporting information regarding the time offset, including information regarding the time offset as being above or below a predetermined threshold. Another method for wireless communication is provided which includes generating channel state information feedback based on an assumption that the time offset is being compensated at a transmitter side. Yet another method for wireless communication is provided which includes receiving information regarding a time offset between multiple transmit antennas, including information regarding the time offset as being above or below a predetermined threshold, and adapting downlink transmissions to account for the time offset. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130083781 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RETRIEVING TRANSMIT OPPORTUNITY CONTROL IN REVERSE DIRECTION GRANT - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for retrieving transmit opportunity control in reverse direction grant, so that a conflict occurring between a case where an RD Initiator continues sending another frame to an RD Responder after retrieving TXOP control and a case where a terminal other than the RD Initiator sends a block acknowledgement to the RD Responder can be avoided. The method provided in the embodiments of the present invention includes: when an RD Initiator fails to correctly demodulate a frame sent by an RD Responder, retrieving, by the RD Initiator, TXOP control by using a PIFS if it is impossible for the RD Responder to enable an MU-MIMO mode, and retrieving, by the RD Initiator, the TXOP control by using a duration if it is possible for the RD Responder to enable the MU-MIMO mode, where the duration is longer than the PIFS. | 04-04-2013 |
| 20130089079 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for observing random access performance in a Long Term Evolution network. The object is achieved by a method in a base station ( | 04-11-2013 |
| 20130094478 | MULTICASTING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Technologies are generally described for providing multicasting services. In some examples, a method performed under control of a first user equipment may include receiving a first level of signal and a second level of signal from a base station during a first time slot and transmitting the second level of signal to a second user equipment during a second time slot. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094479 | METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) AND APPARATUSES THEREOF - A method for transmitting, by a user equipment (UE), a channel state information (CSI) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving control information about a transmission of the CSI from a serving eNodeB, allocating a CSI combination composed of different CSIs to one subframe based on the received control information, and transmitting the CSI combination to the serving eNodeB in the allocated subframe, wherein the control information includes information on a maximum payload size of a CSI being able to be transmitted in one subframe, a transmission period and a transmission start time point of the CSI combination, and a transmission period and a transmission start time point of each of the different CSIs. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094480 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING CONNECTION IDENTIFIER FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method and a device for generating a Connection Identifier (CID) for Device-to-Device (D2D) communication are provided. A transmitting device transmits a request signal for requesting direct communication between the transmitting device and a receiving device on a resource unit of a first resource index determined based upon at least one of a device ID of the transmitting device and a device ID of the receiving device during a predetermined first period, receives information about at least one used CID being used by at least one surrounding device from the peripheral device during a second period following the first period, transmits generation information including at least one available CID acquired during the second period on a resource unit of a second resource index being identical to the first resource index during a third period following the second period, and determines at least one CID to be used for D2D communication between the transmitting device and the receiving device based on the generation information. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094481 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CHANNEL RESOURCE - An apparatus for managing a channel resource by a node sets a channel hopping sequence and a channel hopping offset value which are to be used, divides an assigned time slot into a plurality of subslots, divides a data frame for transmission into a plurality of subframes, and selects a channel for transmitting the plurality of subframes in the plurality of subslots, respectively, by channel hopping based on the channel hopping sequence, the channel hopping offset value, the index of the time slot, and the index of a subslot for transmitting a subframe. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094482 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BUFFER STATUS REPORT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for reporting a buffer status to a Node B, by a User Equipment (UE), in a mobile communication system. The method includes checking if a resource for data to be transmitted to the Node B is available, when there is a buffer status report triggered to be transmitted to the Node B; transmitting the buffer status report using the available resource, if the resource is available; and transmitting a scheduling request to the Node B, if the resource has not been allocated for a predetermined time duration. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130094483 | Method And Apparatus For Handling Uplink Transmissions Using Multiple Uplink Carriers - A method and an apparatus for uplink transmission using multiple uplink carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) selects a dedicated channel medium access control (MAC-d) flow with highest priority data to be transmitted and performs uplink carrier selection and enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) restriction and selection to select a carrier among a plurality of carriers and select an E-TFC based on a maximum supported payload, a remaining scheduled grant payload of the selected carrier and a remaining non-scheduled grant payload. The WTRU then generates a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) for E-DCH transmission via the selected carrier based on the selected E-TFC. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130100936 | Scheduling of a Communication Base Station - The present invention relates to a method of a base station, the method comprising: obtaining information about a service currently used by a communication terminal associated with the base station; performing predictive scheduling of transmissions from the communication terminal to the base station based on the obtained information, the predictive scheduling including determining an interval I which is the predicted maximal time period between consecutive transmission grants sent by the base station to the communication terminal; sending a first transmission grant to the communication terminal at the time t=0 in accordance with the predictive scheduling; sending a first SR inhibiting indicator to the communication terminal, preventing the communication terminal from sending a Scheduling Request (SR) to the base station unless a specified criterion is fulfilled; and sending a second transmission grant to the communication terminal at the latest at the time t=I. The invention also relates to the base station. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100937 | WIRELESS STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless station includes a receiver configured to receive a packet, a processor configured to set a retransmission start time of a packet transmitted to another wireless station based on the received packet, and a transmitter configured to control transmission of a packet that is the same as the transmitted packet in accordance with whether a response signal responsive to the transmitted packet is received before the set retransmission start time is reached. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100938 | APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREFOR - There are provided an apparatus for performing uplink synchronization in a multiple component carrier system and a method thereof. The method includes determining whether a timing advance value for adjusting uplink timing of a secondary serving cell is valid, entering a transmission holding mode in which the secondary serving cell holds uplink transmission, and determining a releasing condition of releasing the transmission holding mode is satisfied. The timing advance value is secured and the validity of the timing advance value is determined so that it is possible to prevent uplink interference from being generated due to a difference in timing advance values and to prevent capability from deteriorating due to the uplink interference. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100939 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LAYER 2 ARQ FOR PACKETS - A method and a transmitter are provided for performing packet ARQ in a communication system. A first RLC PDU is generated. The first RLC PDU includes polling information having a predetermined bit, when there is no subsequent RLC PDU transmission after transmission of the first RLC PDU. A timer is started or restarted when the first RLC PDU is transmitted to a receiver. The polling information having a predetermined bit is transmitted when the timer expires. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100940 | SHARED UPLINK NOTIFICATION BURSTS (SUNB) - A mobile station (MS) operating within a radio network includes a processing unit having an active mode and an inactive mode. The mobile station includes a transmitter in communication with the processing unit. The mobile station includes a memory in communication with the processing unit for storing uplink payload. The mobile station includes a radio interface in communication with the radio network and the transmitter; when there is uplink payload to transmit when the processing unit is in the inactive mode, the transmitter transmitting an activity indication to a base station over the radio interface, the processing unit changing to active mode, and the transmitter transmitting the uplink payload to the base station over the radio interface. A method for a mobile station operating within a radio network. A method for a base station operating within a radio network. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130100941 | COMMUNICATION METHOD - A method for a node to transmit data in a telecommunications network is disclosed. In one method aspect, it comprises, selecting a time slot j in a window having a plurality of time slots and preceding a transmission period, listening to time slots preceding the time slot j, wherein the transmission period presents a plurality of transmission channels. Furthermore, the method comprises counting a number of time-slot transmissions during the time slots preceding the time slot j wherein when the number of time-slot transmissions is greater than a threshold, the data transmission is postponed or cancelled. Furthermore, when the number of time-slot transmissions is less than or equal to the threshold, a transmission is made during the time slot j, and one of the transmission channels is determined as a function of said number of time-slot transmissions. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130107867 | Reducing In-Device Interference Between Multiple Wireless Communications of a Multi-Mode Mobile Device | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130114571 | COORDINATED FORWARD LINK BLANKING AND POWER BOOSTING FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices are provided for coordinating forward link blanking and/or power boosting in wireless communications systems. Some embodiments include two or more bandwidth systems. The bandwidth of one bandwidth system may overlap with the bandwidth of another bandwidth system. This overlap may create interference. Coordinating forward link blanking and/or power boosting may aid in reducing the impact of this interference. Some embodiments utilize flexible bandwidth and/or normal bandwidth systems. Flexible bandwidth systems may utilize portions of spectrum that may not be big enough to fit a normal waveform, though some embodiments may utilize flexible waveforms that utilize more bandwidth than a normal waveform. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114572 | UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MULTIPLE TIMING ADVANCES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Technology for synchronization of uplink transmission with multiple timing advances in a wireless communication environment is disclosed. Additional resource allocation messages for additional timing advances are addressed to a user equipment specific search space. A number of band decodes needed to find a resource allocation message used to access an additional timing advance can be reduced by padding the resource allocation message. A number of blind decodes used to find the resource allocation message can also be reduced by restricting the control channel candidates in which the resource avocation can be embedded in terms of the control channel element aggregation level, or levels, associated with acceptable control channel candidates. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114573 | Accommodating Semi-Persistent Scheduling in Heterogeneous Networks with Restricted Subframe Patterns - A method is provided for operating a network element in a wireless communications network. The method comprises transmitting, by a network element configured to utilize time domain measurement resource restriction, a first initial transmission under an SPS scheme, wherein retransmissions of the first initial transmission follow a first retransmission pattern. The method further comprises transmitting, by the network element, a second initial transmission under the SPS scheme, wherein retransmissions of the second initial transmission follow a second retransmission pattern, the second retransmission pattern allowing at least one retransmission of the second initial transmission to occur in a restricted subframe. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114574 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEFINING TIMING REFERENCE FOR SECONDARY CELLS IN A SECONDARY TIMING ADVANCE GROUP - A user equipment (UE) is configured to perform a method for determining a timing reference for a secondary cell (SCell) in a secondary timing advance group (sTAG). The method includes selecting a SCell among a plurality of SCells within a sTAG as an uplink timing reference cell based on a predefined rule that is known at the UE and an eNB in communication with the UE. The method also includes receiving a downlink carrier from the selected SCell and determining, from the downlink carrier, a downlink timing used as a reference for an uplink transmission timing. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114575 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING HARQ-ACK FEEDBACK INFORMATION - A method for transmitting Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest-ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK) feedback information is provided. The method includes obtaining HARQ-ACK feedback information, a total number of bits of which is less than or equal to four through performing group bundling on the HARQ-ACK feedback information of all sub-frames in a current HARQ-ACK bundling window of two Component Carriers (CCs), determining a number of Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) resources provided for transmission of the HARQ-ACK feedback information according to data transmission modes of the two CCs, and a number of elements in the bundling window, and transmitting the HARQ-ACK feedback information after the group bundling to a base station on PUCCH channel resources adopting a PUCCH format 1b of channel selection according to the PUCCH channel resources mapped from the HARQ-ACK feedback information after the group bundling and modulation symbols. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114576 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for performing uplink synchronization n a multiple component carrier system. A method of User Equipment (UE) performing uplink synchronization in a multiple component carrier system includes receiving secondary serving configuration information on a cell used to configure one or more secondary serving cells in the UE from a Base Station (BS), receiving a Medium Access Control (MAC) message, including an activation indicator indicative of the activation or deactivation of the secondary serving cells configured in the UE and configuration information on a Timing Advance Group (TAG) that is a set of secondary serving cells having the same uplink time alignment value, from the BS, and setting the state of the secondary serving cells, configured in the UE, as activation or deactivation according to the activation indicator. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114577 | METHODS OF MULTIPLE POINT HSDPA TRANSMISSION IN SINGLE OR DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES - Disclosed herein are methods and systems for uplink control feedback design in relation to the high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). First uplink data may be transmitted on a HS-DPCCH to a first serving cell and a second serving cell, where the first serving cell may be used as a timing reference cell for the uplink transmission. The first serving cell may be associated with a first NodeB and the second serving cell may be associated with a second NodeB. First downlink data may be received from the first serving cell and second downlink data may be received from the second serving cell. A timing reference for uplink transmission may be changed such that the second serving cell may be used as the timing reference cell. Second uplink data may be transmitted on the HS-DPCCH using the second serving cell as the timing reference cell. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114578 | TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION AND UPLINK MIMO - A transmission method for carrier aggregation, more particularly, for uplink MIMO and carrier aggregation, in a method for transmitting an uplink signal by the carrier aggregation in a terminal having at least four antennas, includes receiving a grant signal for transmission of the uplink signal, the grant signal including information related to use of a primary cell and a secondary cell, determining one antenna or at least two antennas to use the primary cell, determining one antenna or at least two antennas to use the secondary cell, and transmitting a first uplink signal to the primary cell and a second uplink signal to the secondary cell using the respective determined antennas. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114579 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, RELATED BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - Method for transmitting data between a base station ( | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114580 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device for communicating with at least a lower-level device, the communication device comprising a beacon signal generator for generating beacon signals used for synchronizing a clock of the lower-level device, and a beacon transmitter for transmitting the beacon signals generated by the beacon signal generator to the lower-level device at regular time intervals. The beacon signal generated by the beacon signal generator include a beacon identification code, the beacon identification code is shorter in code length than a communication identification code of the own device, and at least a part of the beacon identification code includes a code generated arbitrarily by the beacon signal generator. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130114581 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION UNITS, AND METHOD FOR BROADCAST AND UNICAST COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus supporting broadcast and unicast transmissions in a wireless communication system including plural communication cells. A first method includes: supporting one broadcast transmission in one sub-frame of a physical resource; the one broadcast transmission includes broadcast data using a first cell identifier and supporting transmission of unicast control information using a second cell identifier in the one sub-frame of the physical resource, the first and second cell identifiers being different. A second method includes: supporting one time discontinuous broadcast transmission in one sub-frame of a radio frame of a physical resource; and supporting transmission of unicast control information in plural time-continuous sub-frames of the radio frame of the physical resource; the one sub-frame used for the one time discontinuous broadcast transmission including a first duration less than a second duration used in the plural sub-frames of the radio frame for transmitting unicast control information. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130121315 | Uplink Synchronization Processing - Uplink synchronization of user equipment, UE, ( | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121316 | Component Carrier Configuration - A method of configuring a component carrier includes determining how timings of receiving and/or sending data for at least two aggregated component carriers in at least one time period are related; and setting the timing of receiving and/or sending data for the at least two aggregated component carriers based on the determining. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121317 | MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION SUPPORT METHOD AND APPARATUS - Provided are a machine type communication (MTC) support method and apparatus capable of providing efficient MTC service. First, when a base station transmits a subframe to which an MTC-physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) is allocated using an MTC-PCFICH code that is cyclic-shifted on the basis of a control format indicator (CFI) to MTC user equipment (UE), the MTC UE detects the MTC-PCFICH from the received subframe by performing blind decoding of a cyclic shift, and detects a region occupied by a legacy physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) on the basis of the detected MTC-PCFICH. Accordingly, it is possible to support efficient MTC service in a Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Long Term Evolution (LTE)-based mobile communication system while maintaining compatibility with a legacy LTE station. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121318 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK METHOD AND DEVICE - A method for Channel State Information (CSI) feedback in a wireless communication system includes: determining parameters required for the CSI feedback in a first wireless communication system, so that a feedback structure of the first wireless communication system in Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) is based on a feedback structure of a second wireless communication system in the PUCCH; notifying the parameters to a user equipment; transmitting a Channel State Information Reference Symbol (CSI-RS) to the user equipment periodically, so that the user equipment calculates the CSI required to be fed back; and receiving the CSI fed back by the user equipment according to the feedback structure of the first wireless communication system in the PUCCH in response to the CSI-RS, wherein information fed back for each BP is information obtained by jointly encoding optimum subband Channel Quality Information (CQI) with optimum subband Pre-encoding Matrix Information (PMI) in the BP. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130121319 | TIMING ADJUSTMENT METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A timing adjustment method in a mobile communication system that performs an adjustment of uplink transmission timing by random access between a user equipment and a base station, the timing adjustment method that includes performing transmission having transmission timing adjustment information in the user equipment; allocating a plurality of parameters related to a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource used for communications, between the user equipment and the base station; and if a timer controlling a term of uplink transmission timing adjustment information expires during uplink communications to the base station having the uplink transmission timing adjustment information in the user equipment, releasing only a part of the allocated plurality of parameters related to the PUCCH resource. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130128867 | System and Method for Communications Link Control - A method for operating an access point includes receiving information from a first station configured to operate in a non-transmit-indicator-map (TIM) mode, and determining if downlink data intended for the first station is available at the access point. The method also includes transmitting at least one of the downlink data intended for the first station to the first station, a data indicator indicating that the downlink data intended for the first station is available at the access point, information indicating downlink data is available for the first station, and a time indicator indicating a specific time when the downlink data intended for the first station will be sent to the first station. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128868 | SYNCHRONIZING DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN A WIRELESS NETWORK AND A WIRED NETWORK - Methods, systems and computer program products to synchronize timing of data transmissions between wireless and wired networks using a combined wireless gateway and cable modem are provided herein. The method includes the step of generating an indicator prior to a look-ahead time period and transmitting a poll to a wireless device upon sending the indicator. The look-ahead time period is a time period from transmitting the indicator to transmitting the DOCSIS frame. The method further includes the step of receiving data from the wireless device and encapsulating the data in a DOCSIS format to generate a DOCSIS frame. The method also includes transmitting the DOCSIS frame at a start of a next transmit opportunity to a cable modem termination system (CMTS). | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128869 | WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system comprising one or more wireless stations programmed to await for an authorizing signal to initiate wireless communications with a network controller or access point. The network controller maintains identification information in different queues, and polls stations from those queues. The wireless station identification information may be moved between the different queues in response to wireless station activity. Between polling, each mobile station aggregates data for the next opportunity to transmit. Multi-polling may be employed such that more than a single station is polled at a time. Polling is accomplished by polling one of the more stations from each queue having the effect that stations in one queue are polled more often than those in another queue. If a lesser active station becomes active, it may be moved into the shorter queue and consequently will be polled more often. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128870 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for transmitting data in a transmitting device of a wireless network comprises transmitting one or more data packets to a receiving device via a reserved region comprising channel resources allocated by a coordinator, and transmitting channel time extension information for requesting channel time extension to the receiving device, in order to transmit the data packets on an unreserved region in which the coordinator does not allocate channel resources to any devices. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128871 | UPLINK RESYNCHRONIZATION FOR USE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for reusing an uplink control channel configuration associated with an uplink control channel, the method comprising the steps of, at a user agent, receiving an uplink control channel resource configuration assigned by an access device, transmitting to the access device using the control channel resources associated with the received uplink control channel resource configuration and, after a time alignment timer expires, retaining the uplink control channel resource configuration. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130128872 | RANDOM TIMING OFFSET DETERMINATION - Methods, systems and instructions stored on computer-readable media for generating, at a first node, a plurality of data units. The plurality of data units are spread with a common pseudo-noise (PN) code that is used by a plurality of nodes, including the first node and a second node, that are in communication with an access point. A random timing offset is determined, and a first data unit is transmitted to the access point at a first time based upon a slot start time and the random timing offset. The first data unit is transmitted while at least a portion of a second signal is transmitted from the second node such that both the first data unit and the second signal are received by the access point. The second signal is transmitted at a second time based on the slot time and a second random timing offset. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130136108 | Base Station, User Equipment and Methods Therein for Control Timing Configuration Assignment in a Multiple Cell Communications Network - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a base station and method therein, for configuring control timing to and from a user equipment in a multiple component cell communications network. Example embodiments presented herein are also directed towards a user equipment and method therein, for configuration of control timing for a user equipment in a multiple component cell communications network. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130136109 | Storage and Assignment of Control Timing Configurations in a Multiple Cell Communications Network - Example embodiments are directed towards a network node, and corresponding method, for a configuration of scheduling or control timing for a user equipment in a multiple cell communications network. The configuration of scheduling or control timing being based on at least two ordered sets of timing configuration numbers, each ordered set corresponding to a cell associated with the user equipment in the multiple cell communications network. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130136110 | BASE STATION AND METHOD OF INTERFERENCE HANDLING - In a radio communication system where a base station provides blank time slots to avoid inter-cell interference, a decrease in throughput by an excess or shortage of blank time slots is prevented. This invention relates to a radio system that avoids interference in cooperation between base stations by providing blank time slots by a (first) base station. Other (second) base stations detect the number of served terminals affected by interference from the first base station that sets blank time slots, calculate required blank time slots so that the number of required blank time slots will increase with an increase in the number of terminals located in cell edges, and send a notification of the required blank time slots to the first base station. The first base station determines whether system throughput is anticipated to improve, based on the above notifications, and adjusts the length of blank time slots. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130136111 | SIGNALING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A communication system, such as a wireless CDMA system, detects markers with fewer errors by having field units transmit the markers at different power levels (e.g., 9 dB for one marker and 11 dB for another marker). The difference in power levels of the markers allows the base station to identify the request markers using alternative criteria with a low probability of error, where the alternative criteria may include comparing the markers to respective energy level thresholds, monitoring occupancy of time slots, occupancy of mutually exclusive code channels, or combinations thereof. For example, in one particular embodiment, a request marker, which is generally a high priority marker, is transmitted with higher power, which improves the probability of detection and reduces the probability of false detection of the request marker. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130142175 | EFFICIENT SPECTRUM UTILIZATION WITH ALMOST BLANK SUBFRAMES - Systems and methods for providing efficient utilization of spectrum in a cellular communication network that applies Almost Blank Subframes (ABSs) are disclosed. In general, the network includes an access node that applies ABSs in the downlink. In one embodiment, the access node identifies UEs for which transmissions are to be scheduled for the uplink using a scheduling scheme that does not require control information for every subframe. The access node then time-aligns scheduling instants of the UEs and subframes in the uplink that correspond to at least some of the ABSs in the downlink. In another embodiment, the access node identifies UEs for which transmissions are to be scheduled for the downlink using a scheduling scheme that does not require control information for every subframe. The access node then time-aligns scheduling instants of the UEs for the downlink and at least a subset of the ABSs in the downlink. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130142176 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING ACKNOWLEDGMENT MESSAGE OVERHEAD - Systems, methods, and devices for reducing the overhead required to transmit acknowledgment messages (ACKs) are described herein. In some aspects, the ACKs are reduced in size. In some aspects the ACKs include several short training fields. In some aspects, a receiver of the ACKs can determine the transmitter of the ACK based on when the ACK is received. In some aspects, a receiver of the ACKs can determine the transmitter of the ACK based on information superimposed on the short training fields in the ACK. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130142177 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJACENT-CHANNEL EMISSION LIMIT DEPENDING ON SYNCHRONIZATION OF INTERFERED RECEIVER - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprises a transceiver configured to receive a transmission from a radio node, the transmission including a synchronization signal; a processor configured to determine a state of synchronization with the radio node and based at least in part on the state of synchronization adjusting at least one transmission parameter. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130142178 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION OPERATION BY CONNECTED MODE USER EQUIPMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) operation by a connected mode User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system. The method includes waking up at a wake-up timing, and determining whether an incoming data indication is received from a Node B; reestablishing uplink synchronization upon receipt of the incoming data indication; and waking up after sleeping for a time from the incoming data indication reception timing, receiving a transmission resource allocation message from the Node B, and receiving downlink data over allocated transmission resources. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130142179 | OFDM-BASED MULTIPLE ACCESS METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONTROLLING THE SAME - An OFDM-based multiple access method and a communication device controlling the same are provided. The OFDM-based multiple access method includes transmitting a predetermined synchronization control signal to many and unspecified terminals, and receiving a test message from the terminals in response to the synchronization control signal; classifying the terminals that receive the test message in a first unit time from a predetermined reference time after the transmission of the synchronization control signal into a first group, and classifying the terminals that receive the test message in a certain n-th unit time from the reference time into an n-th group; allocating use permission time of sub-channels to the groups; and the terminals transmitting/receiving data through partial occupation of the sub-channels and symbols at a time allocated to the corresponding groups. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130148636 | Wireless electronic device with antenna switching circuitry - A wireless electronic device may include antennas formed at different locations on the device. The wireless electronic device may include transceivers that are used to wirelessly communicate in different frequency bands by transmitting and receiving radio-frequency signals in the frequency bands. The transceivers may include Wi-Fi® transceivers and cellular transceivers such as Long Term Evolution transceivers. The wireless electronic device may include antenna switching circuitry interposed between the transceivers and the antennas. The wireless electronic device may include control circuitry that controls the antenna switching circuitry to ensure that radio-frequency transmissions in adjacent frequency bands are routed to different antennas. By routing radio-frequency transmissions in adjacent frequency bands to different antennas, self-interference between communications in the adjacent frequency bands may be reduced. Self-interference may also be reduced by performing time division multiplexing to isolate radio-frequency signals that are transmitted in adjacent frequency bands. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148637 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a device-to-device (D2D) communication control method. A D2D communication control method performed in a control apparatus includes allocating resources for D2D communication, and including information about the allocated resources in D2D-downlink control information (DCI) and transmitting the D2D-DCI to terminals that will perform D2D communication. Accordingly, it is possible to efficiently allocate radio resources for D2D communication, and reduce the load of self-control of terminals. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148638 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND DEVICE - The present invention discloses a scheduling method and a device, which may avoid a conflict between scheduling performed by a first system on a UE and using, by the UE, a second system on a frequency band adjacent to a frequency band of the first system, such as receiving or sending, by the UE, data or a message of the second system. In this way, the problem of mutual interference in message reception and transmission that are performed by the UE in two systems on adjacent frequency bands is solved. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130148639 | WHITE SPACE USAGE FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICES - A method and apparatus are described including defining a neighbor set for each access point, selecting a first clock in a first access point, the selected clock having a highest accuracy as a grand master clock, advising neighboring access points to synchronize with the selected grand master clock and transmitting a message to schedule a quiet period based on the grand master clock. Also described are a method and apparatus including receiving a beacon message, inspecting clock descriptors in the beacon message, selecting a best master clock responsive to the inspection and transmitting a message to schedule a quiet period based on the selected best master clock. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130156012 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR IMPROVED WIFI AND BLUETOOTH COEXISTENCE USINGREDUCED POWER FOR CONTROL PACKETS - Disclosed in some examples is a method including receiving a downlink data packet over a first wireless link using a first wireless protocol during communications over a second wireless link using a second wireless protocol the first and second wireless protocols being different; and sending a control packet in response to the downlink data packet over the first wireless link using a reduced power setting during the communications over the second wireless link, the reduced power setting being less than a non-control packet power setting. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130156013 | USER EQUIPMENT REFERENCE SIGNAL-BASED TIMING ESTIMATION - Estimation of timing errors is disclosed that uses user equipment reference signals (UERSs). A UE models each channel in a user equipment reference signal (UERS) as a channel on an adjacent UERS tone multiplied by a phase ramping term. This phase ramping term is determined using an estimator on the modeled channels. The UE then determines the equivalent timing error by mapping the phase ramping terms into the estimated timing errors in the time domain. In coordinated multipoint (CoMP) systems, the UERS-based timing error may be used to identify an aligned common reference signal (CRS) associated with the network entity transmitting the data. With this determination, the UE may estimate a CRS-based timing error and either substitute the CRS-based timing error for the UERS-based timing error or calculate a further average timing error based on both the CRS-based and UERS-based timing errors. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130156014 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN SRS-TRIGGERING-BASED SRS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and terminal apparatus which involve transmitting a sounding reference signal (SRS)-triggering-based SRS in a wireless communication system. The terminal apparatus of the present invention comprises a receiver which receives, from a base station, an SRS-triggering indicator for triggering an SRS transmission; and a transmitter which transmits the SRS via a preconfigured uplink subframe in accordance with the SRS-triggering indicator. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130156015 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a base station apparatus, a mobile terminal apparatus and a communication control method capable of selecting a CSI-RS arrangement flexibly in accordance with a system configuration. The base station apparatus has a CSI-RS arrangement section ( | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130156016 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEMS - Several wireless network systems are disclosed. In an embodiment, a wireless network system includes at least two access points and a distributed set of devices communicatively associated with the at least two access points. Each device from among the distributed set of devices comprises a pair of wireless stations and each wireless station from among the pair of wireless stations is configured to transmit data associated with an alert situation to a distinct access point from among the at least two access points. A communication between one or more access points from among the at least two access points and one or more wireless stations from among the pairs of wireless stations corresponding to the distributed set of devices is synchronized based on a timing synchronization information shared by at least two basic service sets (BSSs) corresponding to the at least two access points. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130156017 | TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING A SIGNAL INCLUDING PREDETERMINED INFORMATION - A reception unit periodically receives a packet signal from a base station apparatus in each of two or more subframes in a superframe formed by time-multiplexing the subframes. An analysis unit gives a priority order to a subframe receiving the packet signal from the base station apparatus based on the packet signal received in the reception unit. A processing unit preferentially processes the packet signal received in the subframe with a high priority order among the priority orders given in the analysis unit. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130163568 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN DISTRIBUTED TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SYSTEMS - In one exemplary embodiment, a system for resource allocation in a distributed time-division multiplexing (TDM) system comprises a plurality of users with each user having a corresponding weight and taking turns to use the resources of the distributed TDM system. The each user repeats the execution of obtaining a resource usage right, reading a first message of a user having an active weight sum and a system benefit level; computing a resource usage quantity of the user, computing a resource residual quantity of the user, updating the active weight sum, and storing an individual benefit basis of the user; dividing the resource residual quantity by an updated value of the active weight sum and accumulating a divided result to the system benefit level; and transferring a second message having the updated value of the active weight sum and an accumulated value of the system benefit level to a next user obtaining the resource usage right. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163569 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION INFORMATION IN CELLULAR RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING COOPERATIVE MULTI-POINT SCHEME - An apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving reference signal transmission information in a cellular radio communication system using a Cooperative Multi-Point (CoMP) scheme is provided. In the reference signal transmission information transmission method, a Central Control Apparatus (CCA) transmits measurement set information related to a measurement set including at least one reference signal resource unit through which a reference signal is transmitted, and reference signal transmission timing information including information related to a timing at which the reference signal is transmitted to a User Equipment (UE), and transmits reference signal non-transmission timing information including information related to a timing at which the reference signal is not transmitted through the reference signal resource unit to the UE. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163570 | BASE STATION ON THE BASIS OF ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SCHEME AND INTERFERENCE COORDINATION METHOD THEREOF - A base station on the basis of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing solution and an interference coordination method thereof are provided. The base station can include an interference estimation unit, which estimates the interference state of each physical resource block according to the feedback information from the user equipment, and in the condition that the interference of the physical resource block is greater than or equal to a first threshold and less than or equal to a second threshold which is greater than the first threshold, the interference of the physical resource block is estimated as medium interference state. The base station can also include an interference coordination request unit, which at least responses the medium interference state estimation to transmit the interference coordination request to one or a plurality of predetermined base stations, wherein interference coordination request includes the information for indicating the interference state of said physical resource block. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163571 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - To provide a mobile communication system and communication method for efficient scheduling to be performed when a base station apparatus notifies a mobile station apparatus of a plurality of downlink control information formats in the same subframe and/or for some particular time period, in a mobile communication system comprised of a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus, the base station apparatus notifies the mobile station apparatus of a plurality of downlink control information formats including at least one downlink control information format including instructions for transmission of a sounding reference signal and a parameter in the same subframe, and the mobile station apparatus transmits a sounding reference signal set based on the parameter to the base station apparatus when among the plurality of downlink control information formats, a predetermined downlink control information format includes instructions for transmission of a sounding reference signal and the parameter. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163572 | COMMUNICATION METHOD USING A PREAMBLE TO SHARE CHARACTERISTIC INFORMATION, METHOD FOR GENERATING THE PREAMBLE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TO WHICH THE METHODS ARE APPLIED - A communication method of a transmitter using a preamble in a wireless communication system, includes determining at least two subcarriers from among a plurality of subcarriers, for the preamble; mapping a subcarrier sequence and a subcarrier phase value of the preamble to the at least two subcarriers; and transmitting the preamble using the at least two subcarriers. The preamble may include a real component having a first repeated pattern in a preset time interval, and an imaginary component having a second repeated pattern in the preset time interval, and a relationship between the first repeated pattern and the second repeated pattern may indicate characteristic information of the wireless communication system. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130163573 | TRANSMISSION DEVICE AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided are a transmission device and transmission method that are capable of allowing leeway in data reception processing on the receiving side regardless of the position in time of a resource region to which control information, which is contained in resource allocation information for transmission data, is mapped. A setting unit ( | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130170475 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING SUBSCRIBER CONTROL PACKETS IN A TRUNKED RADIO SYSTEM - Embodiments include a trunking site base station receiving a first base station control packet over a network and, in response, transmitting a first subscriber control packet over a subscriber control channel at a first transmission time that is determined based on a transmission schedule. The first subscriber control packet includes a frame sync, a network ID, and a payload. Responsive to determining that a second base station control packet has not been received before a first timeout (or based on another trigger), the base station transmits a second subscriber control packet at a second transmission time that is determined based on the transmission schedule. The second subscriber control packet includes the frame sync and the network ID. The second subscriber control packet also may include a payload indicating a delay period for a subscriber radio to wait before making an attempt to register with a different trunking site. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170476 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING VARIOUS TYPES OF PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION LINKS - A base station allocates resources for peer-to-peer communications by creating or updating peer sets from measured performance information received from one or more stations. Based on current resource assignments in each timeslot and based on the peer sets, the base station determines excluded timeslots and preferred timeslots. The base station then marks potential resources in a portion of a resource allocation map. One of the potential resources is allocated for peer-to-peer communication between a transmitter station and one or more receiver stations. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170477 | METHOD FOR SECURING HANDOVER DATA INTEGRITY IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method of performing an uncontrolled handover data integrity of a target Base Station (BS) is provided. The method includes receiving an initial access request message from a Mobile Station (MS) by the target BS, performing a negotiation for establishing a handover data integrity path with a serving BS through a serving Access Service Network-Gateway (ASN-GW) by the target BS, and generating a main data path and a first handover data integrity path with the serving ASN-GW according to a result of the negotiation by the target BS. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170478 | WIRELESS COEXISTENCE BASED ON NETWORK ALLOCATION VECTOR USAGE - A wireless apparatus includes a wireless transceiver, a WLAN controller and a second controller coupled to the wireless transceiver. The WLAN controller is configured to send/receive packets in accordance with a WLAN protocol, and the second controller is configured to send/receive packets in accordance with a second wireless protocol. The apparatus includes scheduling logic that determines whether a WLAN communication will complete before an end of a WLAN active time period. If the scheduling logic determines that the WLAN communication will not complete before the end of the WLAN active time period, the scheduling logic causes the WLAN controller to transmit a WLAN packet that encodes a NAV value that prevents an access point from using the wireless medium until an end of second time period. The second controller is configured to use the wireless medium during the second time period. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130170479 | RANDOM BACKOFF FOR EXTENDED ACCESS BARRING - Technology for initiating a random access procedure by a wireless device after extended access barring (EAB) is disclosed. The wireless device can release a bar on the wireless device. The bar can prevent the wireless device from accessing a node using EAB. The wireless device can count a random backoff time using a random backoff timer. The random backoff time can include a random time between zero and a maximum backoff time period. The wireless device can transmit a random access channel (RACH) message (including physical random access channel (PRACH) preamble) from the wireless device to the node to initiate a random access procedure after the expiry of the random backoff timer. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130176991 | Method and Apparatus for Detecting Secondary Synchronization Signal - a method and apparatus for detecting a secondary synchronization signal, the method including: calculating a channel estimation compensation value of each sub-carrier of a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) symbol in different Cyclic Prefix (CP) modes; obtaining coherent accumulative results of even half frames and odd half frames of each sub-carrier according to the channel estimation compensation value of each sub-carrier of said SSS symbol; generating a SSS sequence; obtaining an index of the SSS sequence corresponding to an over-threshold value of a first round detection, determining indexes composed of the SSS sequence used in a second round detection according to said index, using coherent accumulative results of all the sub-carriers in the even and odd half frames and SSS sequences of all the sub-carriers to obtain an over-threshold value of the second round detection; and obtaining a CP mode, and calculating a cell ID and a radio frame boundary. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176992 | Method and Apparatus for Application of Precoder Information at the UE in Closed Loop Transmit Diversity - Apparatus and methods are described herein for applying precoding information updates at a user equipment (UE). The UE receives precoder information from a network component. The UE can them transmit packet data over a transmit time interval (TTI) of tow or more slots using transmit diversity. The UE updates the precoder for transmit diversity with the precoder information in a slot subsequent to the first slot in the TTI. The precoder information is applied to update the precoder at a slot boundary within the TTI. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176993 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING DURING A CONTENTION BASED ACCESS PERIOD - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of communicating during a Contention-Based-Access-Period (CBAP). For example, a device may include a wireless communication station to transmit a wireless communication transmission over a wireless communication medium upon determining that the wireless communication medium is idle for a predefined time period within a contention-based-access period (CBAP), if a scheduling element allocating the CBAP includes an indication of an identity of the wireless communication station in a predefined field. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176994 | CODED REVERSE LINK MESSAGES FOR CLOSED-LOOP POWER CONTROL OF FORWARD LINK CONTROL MESSAGES - A field unit includes circuitry configured to receive a signal and determine whether the received signal has a predetermined quality; circuitry configured to select a signal from a plurality of signals including a first signal indicating that the field unit is requesting an assignment of resources and the received signal was received with the predetermined quality, a second signal indicating that the field unit is requesting an assignment of resources and the received signal was not received with the predetermined quality, a third signal indicating that the field unit is not requesting an assignment of resources and the received signal was received with the predetermined quality, and a fourth signal indicating that the field unit is not requesting an assignment of resources and the received signal was not received with the predetermined quality; and circuitry configured to transmit the selected signal over a control channel. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176995 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING WIRELESS RESOURCES FOR A MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and device for allocating wireless resources in a wireless communication system. The wireless resource allocating method comprises allocating a machine type communication (MTC)-dedicated wireless resource and a general wireless resource, and communicating with at least one MTC device through the MTC-dedicated wireless resource. Herein, the MTC-dedicated wireless resource supports only the communication with the at least one MTC device, and the MTC-dedicated wireless resource and the general wireless resource may be different from each other. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176996 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A resource determination unit determines at least a part within any downlink subframe as a first resource and determines at least a part of an UpPTS (Uplink Pilot Timeslot) or a part of an uplink subframe as a second resource for transmitting an SRS (Sounding Reference Signal). A transmission path state estimation unit estimates a state of a transmission path to a wireless terminal based on a DRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) included in uplink user data after the first resource is determined and until it receives an SRS, and it estimates a state of the transmission path to the wireless terminal based on an SRS after it received the SRS. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130176997 | Air-Interface Timing Synchronization Sharing - The invention discloses a timing synchronization method in a User Equipment (UE) which is served in a first cell of a first synchronous communication network and also located in a second cell of a second synchronous communication network. The method comprises receiving a message from a communication node of the first network, the message including clock offsets of the first cell and the second cell or timing difference there between, and calculating downlink synchronization of the second cell from downlink synchronization of the first cell and the clock offsets/timing difference. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130182685 | Uplink Control Signal Design for Wireless System - The present disclosure generally relates to an uplink control signal design for wireless system. One example method includes establishing communication with a mobile station in a multi-carrier wireless communication system using a primary carrier, providing a first control signaling via the primary carrier, the first control signaling assigning at least one secondary carrier, and receiving a channel quality indication of the secondary carrier via the primary carrier using a control channel. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182686 | OPTIMIZATION OF DUAL BSS SCHEDULING - An integrated circuit includes logic configured to determine a communication schedule of a device configured to perform Wi-Fi communications in a first Basic Service Set (BSS) network and in a second BSS network. The logic determines the communication schedule based at least in part on a first BSS network communication load of the device and on a second BSS network communication load of the device. The communication schedule defines the service time allocation of the device in the first BSS network and the service time allocation of the device in the second BSS network. At least one of the first and the second BSS networks is supportive of a peer-to-peer connection. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182687 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SECONDARY CELL UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION STATES - A user equipment (UE) is configured to perform a method for controlling synchronization with a secondary cell (SCell). The method includes receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order from an eNodeB associated with an SCell. The method also includes, in response to receiving the PDCCH order, transitioning from a first state where the UE considers the SCell in sync for an uplink transmission to a second state where the UE considers the SCell out of sync for the uplink transmission. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182688 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS ON A SECONDARY CARRIER - Methods and apparatus are described herein for synchronizing timing when using a secondary component carrier (SCC) in a carrier aggregated wireless network. A user equipment (UE) may determine that it is out of synchronization with respect to an SCC used to communicate with a network element. The UE may inform the network element of the out of synchronization status, and may perform a random access procedure to synchronize the timing. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182689 | SYSTEM AND METHOD USING A RATE SPLIT SCHEME BASED ON COOPERATION BETWEEN RECEIVERS - Each of a first transmitter and a second transmitter uses a rate split scheme. Each of the first transmitter and the second transmitter may transmit at least four sub-messages, and different transmission powers may be allocated to the at least four sub-messages. Also, each of receivers may cooperate with each other, may share sub-messages that act as interferences, and may extract desired messages using the shared sub-messages. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182690 | Carrier Selection - The invention relates generally to mobile communication networks. More particularly, the invention relates to interference management and carrier selection for transmitting data. There is provided a solution for improved selection of a cell-specific base carrier, the solution utilizing a timing framework for the carrier selection. The solution includes determining a maximum allowed time duration, and performing within the determined maximum allowed time duration: obtaining information related to one or more selected carriers from at least one neighboring base station, selecting the at least one cell-specific base carrier for data transmission on the basis of the obtained information, and informing the at least one neighboring base station of the selected cell specific base carrier. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182691 | Method of and Base Station for Configuring a Data Transmission Scheme Based on Data Frames in a Communication Network - A method of configuring a data transmission scheme based on data frames in a communication network is provided, wherein communication in the communication network includes a data transmission including downlink and uplink data transmissions via first and second data transmissions paths, the first and second data transmission paths including respective first and second downlink data transmission paths and respective first and second uplink data transmission paths, the downlink data transmission via the second data transmission path being delayed to the downlink data transmission via the first downlink data transmission path, the method being executed by a base station, the method including configuring the data transmission scheme such that a reduction of a base station processing time associated with processing payload data of the data transmission is prevented | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130182692 | Method and User Equipment for Transmitting Feedback Information - A method for transmitting feedback information and a user equipment are disclosed in the present document, wherein, one method includes: a User Equipment (UE) performing time domain extension on feedback information within one subframe; and mapping respectively data which go through the time domain extension and demodulation reference signals corresponding to the data which go through the time domain extension to multiple uplink Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols within the subframe, and transmitting the data which go through the time domain extension and the demodulation reference signals corresponding to the data which go through the time domain extension in the same frequency domain position in a way of time division multiplexing; wherein, each uplink SC-FDMA symbol occupies n successive physical resource blocks in the frequency domain, and n is a positive integer. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130188609 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND CONTROL DEVICE - A communication system includes: a plurality of mobile stations each of which performs wireless communication with a base station; a plurality of base stations each of which selects, for each transmission timing, a mobile station which performs wireless communication for transmission of a radio signal with the base station, from mobile stations that are coupled to the base station among the plurality of mobile stations; and a control device that calculates, for each transmission timing, a parameter for each of a communication source in the transmission of the radio signal, the parameter being calculated so that a communication quality of each of the mobile stations selected for the transmission timing by each of the plurality of base stations satisfies a certain condition; wherein the each of the communication source transmits the radio signal at each transmission timing, using a parameter for the communication source calculated by the control device. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188610 | One or multiple bit restricted access window (RAW) end point determination within for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - One or multiple bit restricted access window (RAW) end point determination within for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A RAW is defined in which only devices of the particular class (e.g., low power class, Z class, smart meter station (SMSTA) class, etc.) are allowed access to the communication medium. Indication of the end of such a RAW may be included within one or more bits set within a signal field (SIG) field of a framer packet generated by a given device within the system and transmitted to one or more other devices. After completion of the RAW, other respective devices of at least one other type of class may be provided access to the communication medium. The manner of access to the communication media outside of the RAW may be varied (e.g., scheduled, based on carrier sense multiple access/collision avoidance (CSMA/CA), etc.). | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188611 | SUBFRAME CONSTRAINTS FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods, and corresponding apparatus and program products, for wireless communication involving coordinated multipoint (CoMP) operation that involves dynamic switching between multiple transmission points that serve a user equipment (UE). | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188612 | Random Access Process in a Multicarrier Base Station and Wireless Device - A Base station transmits a control command for transmission of a random access preamble on a first cell if the base station determines radio resources of the first cell are required for transmission of a portion of data and that the first cell requires a different uplink timing from all currently activated cells of the wireless device. The base station transmits at least one control packet for providing transport format information and resource allocation information for transmission of a plurality of packets of the data to be transmitted on a first data channel of the first cell. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188613 | Configuring Base Station and Wireless Device Carrier Groups - A base station transmits control message(s) to a wireless device configuring secondary cell(s). Each of the secondary cells is assigned to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups comprising a primary cell group and at least one secondary cell group. The control message(s) comprise dedicated parameters. If dedicated parameters comprise a cell group index for the secondary cell, the wireless device assigns the secondary cell to one of the at least one secondary cell group identified by the cell group index. Otherwise, the wireless device assigns the secondary cell to the primary cell group. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188614 | Pathloss Reference Configuration in a Wireless Device and Base Station - A base station transmits message(s) assigning each of at least one secondary cell to a cell group in cell groups comprising a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The at least one message comprises a pathloss reference for a secondary cell. The pathloss reference is a configurable parameter if the secondary cell is in the primary cell group. The configurable parameter is configurable to a downlink of the secondary cell or the primary cell. The pathloss reference is only configurable as a downlink of the secondary cell if the secondary cell is in the secondary cell group. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188615 | Multicarrier Wireless Communications Reference Cell - A base station configures a primary cell group and at least one secondary cell group in a wireless device. The wireless device transmits first uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing a reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a timing reference. The wireless device autonomously selects a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference. The new activated secondary cell is different from the reference secondary cell. The wireless device transmits second uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188616 | Random Access in Networks with Carrier Aggregation - A wireless device configures a deactivation timer for a secondary cell in a secondary cell group. The wireless device may receive a control command initiating a random access process for the secondary cell. The wireless device may transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell in response to receiving the control command. The wireless device may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the wireless device receives, on the primary cell, a random access response for the random access preamble transmission. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188617 | Time Alignment Timer in Multicarrier Communications - A wireless device is configured with a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. When a first time alignment timer of the primary cell group expires, for each cell in the wireless device, the wireless device stops uplink transmission of HARQ feedback, uplink transport blocks, and channel state information. When a second time alignment timer of the secondary cell group expires and the first time alignment timer is running, for each activated cell in the secondary cell group, the wireless device stops transmission of uplink transport blocks, and continues transmission of HARQ feedback and channel state information. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188618 | Synchronization in Base Stations and Wireless Networks - A base station transmits subframes of downlink carriers in a primary cell group and downlink carriers in a secondary cell group in substantial time alignment with each other. A wireless device transmits subframes of uplink carriers in the primary cell group in substantially time alignment with each other. The wireless device transmits subframes of uplink carriers in the secondary cell group in substantially time alignment with each other. The subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group employ different synchronization signals as a timing reference and different timing advance commands. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188619 | Secondary Cell Sounding Transmission - A wireless device receives message(s) configuring transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in a secondary cell group. The wireless device receives an activation command to activate the secondary cell. The wireless device transmits the sounding reference signals if the secondary cell is activated, a timing advance command is applied to the secondary cell group, and a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group is running. The wireless device is configured to not transmit the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell during the period between receiving the activation command and applying the timing advance command. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188620 | Wireless Device for Multicarrier Communications - A wireless device establishes a first signaling bearer with a base station on a primary cell. The establishment of the signaling bearer comprises the wireless device receiving a control message from the base station on the primary cell in a plurality of cells comprising the primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The wireless device transmits radio capability parameters to the base station on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell. The radio capability parameters comprise at least one parameter indicating whether the wireless device supports a timing advance groups. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188621 | NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Beacons may be grouped to facilitate neighbor discovery in a wireless network. For example, neighboring access devices such as IEEE 802.11 access points may cooperate to transmit beacons in a group. In this way, a wireless device seeking to discover the neighboring access devices may scan for the beacons for a shorter period of time. An indication may be provided to enable a wireless device to more efficiently scan the beacons. For example, the indication may indicate the channel the wireless device should scan to receive the next beacon that is to be transmitted. In addition, the indication may include information relating to the transmission time of the next beacon. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188622 | METHOD OF CHANNEL RESOURCE ALLOCATION AND DEVICES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method of allocating channel resources from a first device to a second device in a wireless network comprises receiving channel resource allocation information from a coordinator of the wireless network to allocate the channel resources; transmitting data to the second device through the allocated channel resources; receiving channel resource request information from the second device to request the first device to allocate a part of the allocated channel resources; and deciding whether to allocate the part of the channel resources allocated from the coordinator, to the second device in accordance with the channel resource request information. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130188623 | Method and Apparatus for Transmitting Periodic Feedback Report - Disclosed in the present invention are a method and an apparatus for transmitting a periodic feedback report. In this case, the method includes: coding a periodic feedback report to be transmitted and data information corresponding to a transmission block respectively, wherein the periodic feedback report includes one of the following information: a combined coding index of rank indicator (RI) information and first pre-coding matrix indicator (PMI-1) information, a combined coding index of the RI and pre-coding type indication (PTI) information, and the PMI-1; intercepting correspondingly coded information according to the target length; and when a transmission block corresponds to a single layer or multiple layers, carrying out channel interleave on the coded information on the single layer or multiple layers to be transmitted on the transmission block, and transmitting the interleaved information on a layer corresponding to a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130195081 | COLLISION REDUCTION MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method includes wirelessly communicating with one or more stations that are partitioned into one or more groups. The method also includes generating a message that identifies one or more time periods during which each station of a first group of the one or more groups is permitted to contend for a communication channel or restricted from contending for the communication channel. The method further includes transmitting the message. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130195082 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING COEXISTENCE OF SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS NODES IN A SYNCHRONOUS MAC SYSTEM - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be configured to determine a plurality of slots for transmitting information including a plurality of first type slots and a plurality of second type slots where the second type slots have a longer duration that the first type slots. The apparatus may be configured to transmit information in a first type slot when a previous reception was successful and there is no other transmission expected to occur during a gap preceding the first type slot and during the first type slot. Additionally or in the alternative, apparatus may be configured to transmit information in a second type slot when at least one of the previous reception was unsuccessful or there is another transmission expected to occur during a gap preceding the first type slot or during the first type slot. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130195083 | MAIN HUB, SUB HUB, AND SENSOR NODE COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS BODY AREA NETWORK (WBAN) INCLUDING AT LEAST ONE SUB HUB, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A main hub, a sub hub, and a sensor node communicating in a wireless body area network (WBAN) including at least one sub hub, and a communication method thereof, are provided. A communication method of the main hub, includes assigning a beacon slot to the sub hub. The method further includes receiving, from the sub hub, a beacon signal based on the beacon slot. The method further includes verifying whether the sub hub includes data to be transmitted to the main hub based on the beacon signal. The method further includes receiving, from the sub hub, the data based on a result of the verification. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130195084 | PHYSICAL LAYER ISSUES RELATED TO MULTI-TA GROUP SUPPORT - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may determine a number of uplink timing groups configured for a plurality of component carriers, and determine whether to transmit at least one of data or control information on one or more first component carriers of the plurality of component carriers concurrently with sounding reference signals (SRS) on one or more second component carriers of the plurality of component carriers based at least in part on the number of uplink timing groups. When only one uplink timing group is determined, the SRS is transmitted in a symbol on the one or more second component carriers if the data and control information is not transmitted in the symbol. When two uplink timing groups are determined SRS may be transmitted on the second component carriers concurrently with data or control information on the component carriers | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130195085 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING A WIRELESS DEVICE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for synchronizing the discovery of wireless services or applications in a wireless network using a recurring time interval T in which wireless devices within the wireless network can be in one of a predetermined plurality of time states. The method includes selecting a time state from amongst the plurality of time states, performing discovery by a first wireless device supporting a given service or application once during the recurring time interval T at the selected time state, and repeating the above steps in successive ones of the recurring time interval T until all of the predetermined plurality of time states have been selected. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130195086 | TIMING MANAGEMENT IN UPLINK (UL) COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (COMP) TRANSMISSION - According to example embodiments, a method for wireless communications by a user equipment (UE) includes receiving signaling indicating multiple timing adjustments (TAs) for different uplink channels between the user equipment (UE) and one or more transmission points, and applying at least one of the multiple TAs when transmitting on at least one of the uplink channels. According to example embodiments, a method for wireless communications by a base station includes determining multiple timing adjustments (TAs) for different uplink channels between the user equipment (UE) and one or more transmission points, and transmitting signaling indicating the multiple timing adjustments (TAs) to the UE. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130195087 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DATA OF MULTIPLE MTC DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method and a system of multiplexing Machine Type Communication (MTC) data of MTC devices over a single radio block period are provided. The method includes providing, by a base station, resource information to a plurality of MTC devices, where the resource information includes a time slot allocated to the plurality of MTC devices in each frame of a radio block period, a temporary flow identifier, and the sub-block index information. The method further includes packing MTC data associated with each of the plurality of MTC devices in a data packet. Furthermore, the method includes multiplexing the data packet including the MTC data associated with the plurality of MTC devices in downlink over the time slot allocated in each frame of the radio block period. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130201965 | WIRELESS NETWORKS UTILIZING MULTIPLE MODULATIONS - A method of communicating in a wireless network including a plurality of nodes having communications devices including a first node, wherein at least one node utilizes a first physical layer (PHY) modulation, and at least one other node utilizes a second PHY modulation different from the first PHY modulation. The first node receives a PHY frame transmitted by one of the plurality of nodes, and identifies a PHY modulation type selected from the first PHY modulation and the second PHY modulation used in the PHY frame or to be used in a subsequently to be received PHY frame or frame portion. The first node decodes the PHY frame or the subsequently to be received PHY frame or frame portion using the PHY modulation type identified in the identifying step. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201966 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPLINK INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method, at a first network access device of a heterogeneous network, the method sending a report to a second network access device indicating a user equipment (UE) in the vicinity of the second network access device to be handled in the uplink by the second network access device; receiving an uplink timing control report from the second network access device; transmitting uplink timing control adjustments to the UE; allocating uplink resources for the second network access device to forward uplink information; allocating physical downlink control channel (‘PDCCH’) resources belonging to the first network access device for transmitting uplink scheduling information provided by the second network access device to the UE; receiving uplink information including uplink scheduling information from the second network access device at the first network access device; and sending the uplink scheduling information to the UE. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201967 | Open/Closed Loop Synchronization for Radio Transmitters - Methods and systems can provide accurate synchronization of two nodes even when those nodes cannot communicate directly with one another. A method, for example, can include determining a first propagation delay estimate to a first node ( | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201968 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HIGH-POWER BASE STATION, LOW-POWER BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication system | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201969 | TDM Scheduling Method and Device for Scheduling Uplink Transmissions - The invention discloses a TDM scheduling method for scheduling Start uplink transmission in a cellular radio communication system, comprising: obtaining relevant parameters including an Uplink pilot quality for each TDM User Equipment in a cell and an available TDM load for TDM UEs in the cell; determining a TDM group size as a number of TDM UEs to be scheduled to transmit simultaneously in a Transmission Time Interval, TTI, by using the obtained relevant parameters; and scheduling the TDM UEs according to the determined TDM group size. The TDM UEs refer to the UEs to be scheduled according to the TDM scheduling method of the present invention in the cell. With the solution of the invention, the UL system performance can be improved. The proposed solution is easy to be implemented. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201970 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Each node transmits to a destination node a registration packet indicating that a local node is a node to request packet transmission. Each node transmits a packet to the destination node within a transmission time reported from the destination node. The destination node receives a registration packet from each node, and calculates a traffic amount to occur in each path for every path going through an adjacent node that enables direct communication with the destination node. The destination node assigns a transmission time to transmit the packet to the each path based on the calculated traffic amount of each path and reports the assigned transmission time to each node. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201971 | TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NON-PERIODIC SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL(SRS) - The present invention discloses a transmission method and apparatus for non-periodic SRS. eNB configures time-domain configuration parameter of non-periodic SRS through higher layer signalling or downlink physical control channel signalling; terminal equipment transmits non-periodic SRS in indicated time-domain resource. The application of the technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention can reduce signalling consumption through high layer semi-static configuration of time-domain resource of non-periodic SRS. On one hand, flexible non-periodic SRS time-domain transmission is allowed for terminal equipment which can send non-periodic SRS in multiple subframes, which is featured by low sounding delay and great sounding bandwidth; on the other hand, flexible timing mode is also permitted for terminal equipment which brings little restriction to scheduling. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201972 | FILTER STRUCTURE FOR ITERATIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING - A method is for communicating by tracking time varying channels in a multiple access packet based communication network. Each packet includes a preamble portion including a data symbol, and a data portion including data symbols. The method may include initializing a channel estimate reference from an initial channel estimate based upon the data symbol in a preamble portion of a received packet, and updating the channel estimate reference based upon a channel estimate of a current data symbol and a previously received data symbol from the data symbols in a data portion of the received packet. The method may also include repeating the updating upon receipt of a subsequent data symbol from the data symbols in the data portion of the received packet. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201973 | Method of Timing Reference Management - A method of timing reference management for a mobile device in a wireless communication system comprising a network is disclosed. The method comprises being configured a first cell of a timing advance group, as a timing reference cell of the timing advance group; and when the timing reference cell is changed from the first cell to a second cell of the timing advance group and a timing alignment timer applied for the timing advance group for uplink transmission synchronization is running, deriving a new uplink transmission timing according to a second timing adjust value; wherein the second timing adjust value is calculated according to a first downlink timing of the first cell, a second downlink timing of the second cell, and a first timing adjust value for deriving the uplink transmission timing when the timing reference cell is the first cell. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201974 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING COLLISIONS AFTER TRAFFIC INDICATION MAP PAGING - Systems, methods, and devices for reducing collisions in a wireless communications network are described herein. In some aspects, a processor is configured to decrementing a value of a counter if a channel of a wireless communications network is idle for at least an extended slot time. The processor may be further configured to generate a polling request and allow the transmission of the polling request to an access point over the wireless communications network when the value of the counter reaches a threshold value. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201975 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR ENHANCED PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (EPDCCH) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for systems that support DMRS-based transmissions, that may allow such systems to at least partially utilize resources in the center six RBs of subframes 0 and 5 for DMRS-based transmissions (e.g., EPDCCH), while avoiding collision with Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) or Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH). | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201976 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TRANSMISSION UNIT - A signal transceiving section transmits a transmission signal to a transmission path, each frame in the transmission signal is divided into a plurality of periods in a time axis direction, and the plurality of periods includes superimposing period for superimposing a superimposed signal. A transmission unit includes a signal adjustment section for changing the proportion of the superimposing period in one frame of the transmission signal. The signal adjustment section adjusts the proportion of the superimposing period in accordance with a transmission state of the superimposed signal transmitted between second communication terminals. The signal adjustment section may adjust the proportion of the superimposing period so that the proportion of the superimposing period in one frame of the transmission signal increase with increasing the volume of transmission data transmitted between the second communication terminals through the superimposed signal. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130201977 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ASSIGNING ADDRESSES TO SUBSCRIBER STATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A system and a method for assigning addresses to subscriber stations in a wireless communication environment are provided. The method includes receiving a request to register with a wireless communication network from a subscriber station, assigning a unicast address and at least one specific time duration to a subscriber station for communication with a network entity in the wireless communication network during registration process, and communicating the unicast address and the at least one specific time duration to the subscriber station, wherein the assigned unicast address is valid for the subscriber station during the at least one specific time duration. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130208706 | Sector Based HS-DPCCH Transmission for Multi-flow HSDPA Transmissions - There is provided a method of transmitting feedback information from a mobile terminal in a wireless communication system. The feedback information relates to multi-flow High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, HSDPA, transmissions to the mobile terminal from cells belonging to multiple cell sectors. The cell sectors are sometimes simply referred to as sectors. The method comprises transmitting multiple High-Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channels, HS-DPCCHs, one HS-DPCCH for each sector, such that different HS-DPCCH channels are used to carry feedback information for cells that belong to different sectors. This opens up for a more flexible HS-DPCCH solution, allowing multiple HS-DPCCHs. In this way, the relevant time budget(s) for the mobile terminal and/or base station may be retained or conserved even for multi-flow HSDPA transmission scenarios, thus avoiding re-transmissions of data. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130208707 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An autonomously dispersed type wireless network is suitably formed with communication stations avoiding collision of beacons transmitted one to another. In the event that the range of reach of airwaves change and a receivable state is created and beacons collide, a communication station changes the beacon transmission position of itself in response to receiving a beacon from another station at a timing immediately prior to transmission to its own beacon. Also, in the event that beacon collision is exposed due to emergence of a new communication which can perform reception from two systems out of airwave range of each other, the newly-participating station requests one of the communication stations of which the beacons are colliding to change the beacon transmission timing. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130208708 | Method and device for collaborative data communication in a radio network - The present invention relates to communication between collaborative nodes configured to collaboratively communicate in a radio network. A corresponding method comprises: sending, by each active node of the set of collaborative nodes, an RTS message for the same transmission slot; sending, by one of the active nodes, referred to as coordinator node, a CTS message to acknowledge reservation of said transmission slot on behalf of all the active nodes, upon receiving the RTSs; wherein the transmission slot is divided, based on the sent RTSs, into sub-slots for respective active nodes to transmit data packets. The invention provides an improved use of the reserved transmission slot, and a reduced waste of reserved time. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130208709 | STATE SYNCHRONIZATION OF ACCESS ROUTERS - Embodiments describe synchronizing access routers with wireless terminal state information. According to an embodiment is a wireless terminal that transmits a message that includes an address for at least two access routers. State change information can optionally be included in the message. According to another embodiment is an access router that receives a state change notification from a wireless device or another access router. The state change notification is updated in the access router. An acknowledgment confirming the updated state change may be sent to the wireless terminal. Dynamic state synchronization is provided with minimal communication with wireless terminal. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130208710 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting a sounding reference signal. A terminal receives, from a base station, a configuration for periodic channel quality indicator (CQI) transmission and a configuration for sound reference signal (SRS) transmission. When a positive SRS request is detected, the terminal determines an SRS subframe winch satisfies the configuration for SRS transmission. When the periodically transmitted CQI is triggered in the SRS subframe, the terminal transmits the SRS in the SRS subframe to the base station. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130208711 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING IN-DEVICE CO-EXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN A USER EQUIPMENT - A method and apparatus for handling in-device co-existence interference in a user equipment are provided. In an exemplary method, a Long Term Evolution (LTE) activity scheduled to be performed during an inactive time period of an LTE module in a user equipment is determined. It is determined whether the LTE module is to be allowed to perform the LTE activity during the inactive time period. If the LTE activity is to be allowed, then the LTE module is allowed to perform the LTE activity during the inactive time period. Otherwise, the LTE module is not allowed to perform the LTE activity during the inactive time period to provide interference free time for an Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) module in the user equipment. Moreover, the disallowed LTE activity is scheduled to be performed during an active time period following the inactive time period. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130215873 | MULTI-CHANNEL INTER BASE-STATION COMMUNICATION - The invention relates to systems and methods for spectrum sharing and communication among several wireless communication networks with overlapping service areas (or cells), especially to Wireless Regional Area Networks (WRANs). Particular embodiments of the invention disclose using a conference channel to communicate between base stations. Other embodiments use slotted coexistence windows within frames to transmit and receive information, including for reserving transmission times within subsequent frames. | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130215874 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a communication method, a base station and a user equipment. The communication method includes: sending, by a base station, a random access response message to a user equipment UE, where the random access response message includes a timing advance command, and a value T | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130215875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING SCHEDULING INFORMATION - Provided are a method and apparatus for monitoring scheduling information in a wireless communication system. A terminal monitors a first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) having first scheduling information, and monitors a second PDCCH having second scheduling information based on the first scheduling information. The second scheduling information includes resource allocation for a plurality of serving cells. | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130223412 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO IMPROVE FRAME EARLY TERMINATION SUCCESS RATE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. A transmitting apparatus receives a packet at a MAC layer object and generates a first MAC layer output and at least one duplicate MAC layer output based on the received packet. The MAC layer output and duplicate MAC layer output are fed to a PHY layer object. The PHY layer object can transmit first PHY layer information in a first TTI and begin transmitting a second, duplicate PHY layer information in a second, consecutive TTI following the first TTI. The receiving apparatus receives first information in a first TTI and receives duplicate information in a second, consecutive TTI following the first TTI. The receiving apparatus attempts to early decode the information in the first TTI, and when unsuccessful, attempts to decode the information in the second TTI. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130223413 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, UPLINK TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION METHOD - A mobile station includes a channel quality estimation unit configured to estimate downlink channel quality based on a reference signal from a base station and to output the estimated downlink channel quality as channel estimation information; an acknowledgement information determining unit configured to determine whether a downlink data channel from the base station is correctly received and to output the determination result as acknowledgement information; and an acknowledgement information prioritizing unit configured to cause the acknowledgement information to be preferentially transmitted to the base station if transmission timings of the channel estimation information and the acknowledgement information coincide. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130223414 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN A BROADBAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a broadband wireless communication system, a spread spectrum signal is intentionally overlapped with an OFDM signal, in a time domain, a frequency domain, or both. The OFDM signal, which inherently has a high spectral efficiency, is used for carrying broadband data or control information. The spread spectrum signal, which is designed to have a high spread gain for overcoming severe interference, is used for facilitating system functions such as initial random access, channel probing, or short messaging. Methods and techniques are devised to ensure that the mutual interference between the overlapped signals is minimized to have insignificant impact on either signal and that both signals are detectable with expected performance by a receiver. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130223415 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus in a radio communication system where transmit diversity is applied in uplinks includes a reference signal measurement unit configured to measure a receive level of the reference signal, a switch pitch determination unit configured to determine the antenna switch pitch of transmitting the reference signal based on the receive level measured by the reference signal measurement unit, and a transmitting unit configured to transmit the antenna switch pitch determined by the switch pitch determination unit. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130223416 | Muting Data Transmissions - A method includes determining at least one first station and at least one second station have a relative timing difference. The method then determines a muting schedule for the at least one first station for a plurality of sub-frames, wherein the muting schedule includes at least two adjacent muted sub-frames. The method further includes initiating sending an indication of the muting schedule to the at least one first station and the at least one second station wherein information on one or more channels is transmitted from the at least one second station during the at least two adjacent muted sub-frames. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130230026 | Compact Transceiver Architecture for Achieving Device to Device (D2D) Communication Using Uplink and Downlink Carrier Frequencies - A system and method for device-to-device (D2D) communication is disclosed. A preferred embodiment comprises a frequency synthesizer configured to provide a first carrier frequency and a second carrier frequency, an up-converter coupled to the frequency synthesizer and configured to up-convert a first baseband signal into a cellular uplink signal when receiving the first carrier frequency from the frequency synthesizer, and configured to up-convert the first baseband signal into a first device-to-device signal when receiving the second carrier frequency from the frequency synthesizer, and a down-converter coupled to the frequency synthesizer and configured to down-convert a second device-to-device signal into a second baseband signal when receiving the first carrier frequency from the frequency synthesizer, and configured to down-convert a cellular downlink signal into the second baseband signal when receiving the second carrier frequency from the frequency synthesizer. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230027 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING AND/OR USING TRANSMISSION POWER INFORMATION - A wireless terminal determines the transmission power used for its dedicated control channel at a point in time, and generates a power report indicating a ratio of a maximum wireless terminal transmit power to the transmit power of the dedicated control channel at the point in time. The power report provides a measure of available transmit power for wireless terminal use for other purposes, e.g., uplink traffic channels, after taking into consideration the transmit power used for the dedicated control channel. The point in time has a known time offset from the start of a communications segment in which the power report is transmitted. This allows the base station receiving dedicated control channel uplink signals from the wireless terminal to measure the received signals, receive and process the communicated power report, and correlate information to be used for accurate wireless terminal closed loop power control. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230028 | System and Method for Sectorized Transmission in a Wireless Network - The hidden node problem can be avoided by scheduling stations in different sectors to perform transmissions during different time periods. Sectorized scheduling can be communicated to stations through transmission of beamformed beacon signals at the beginning of respective time periods. For instance, a first beamformed beacon signal may be transmitted to stations in a first sector at the beginning of a first time period, while a second beamformed beacon signal may be transmitted to stations in a second sector at the beginning of a second time period. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230029 | HARQ-ACK SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IN RESPONSE TO DETECTION OF CONTROL CHANNEL TYPE IN CASE OF MULTIPLE CONTROL CHANNEL TYPES - Methods and apparatus are described for a User Equipment (UE) to transmit and for a base station to receive a Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK) signal in a resource of a Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH). The HARQ-ACK signal is transmitted from the UE in response to a detection of a PDCCH transmitted from the base station and conveying a DCI format that, depending on the PDCCH type, can include a HARQ-ACK PUCCH Resource Offset (HPRO) information field. The UE and the NodeB determine the PUCCH resource depending on the PDCCH type and, if the DCI format includes the HPRO, also depending on a PDCCH transmission type. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230030 | HARQ-ACK SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IN RESPONSE TO DETECTION OF CONTROL CHANNEL TYPE IN CASE OF MULTIPLE CONTROL CHANNEL TYPES - Methods and apparatus are described for a User Equipment (UE) to transmit and for a base station to receive a Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK) signal in a resource of a Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH). The HARQ-ACK signal is transmitted from the UE in response to a detection of a PDCCH transmitted from the base station and conveying a DCI format that, depending on the PDCCH type, can include a HARQ-ACK PUCCH Resource Offset (HPRO) information field. The UE and the NodeB determine the PUCCH resource depending on the PDCCH type and, if the DCI format includes the HPRO, also depending on a PDCCH transmission type. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230031 | AUTOMATIC REVERSE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT IN A TWO-WAY TDM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for communication is disclosed. Information is transmitted on a downlink channel in a time interval. On a condition that an explicit allocation of a first uplink channel is transmitted, feedback information regarding the transmitted information is received on the first uplink channel, wherein the feedback information is received with user data on the first uplink channel. On a condition that an explicit allocation of the first uplink channel is not transmitted, feedback information regarding the transmitted information is received in a time interval on a second uplink channel, wherein an explicit allocation of the second uplink channel is not transmitted, wherein the time interval on the second uplink channel is a pre-determined time period away from the time interval on the downlink channel. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230032 | SELECTION OF COMMUNICATION MODE - A method, apparatus, and computer program for selecting a communication mode for a terminal device is described herein. A communication mode is selected for a terminal device on the basis of a difference between an estimated radio channel between the terminal device and a base station and an estimated radio channel between the terminal device and another terminal device. The communication mode is selected from a group comprising a plurality of different configurations to multiplex communication over the first radio link with communication over the second radio link. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130230033 | UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING METHOD AND DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for a terminal to transmit acknowledgement information in a wireless communication system including: determining whether the transmission of a scheduling request is set in one uplink subframe, where acknowledgement information on downlink transmission in a downlink subframe set including M(M≧1) downlink subframes is to be transmitted; and transmitting the acknowledgement information by using a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) format and the resource. Here, if there is no Semi-Persistent Scheduling releasing Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) in the downlink subframe set, if the acknowledgement information corresponds to only one Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) indicated by the detection of a corresponding PDCCH received on only a Primary Cell in the downlink subframe set, and if a Downlink Assignment Index value of the PDCCH is 1, the acknowledgement information and the scheduling request may be transmitted using PUCCH format 1b. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130235849 | METHODS FOR IMPROVED INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MEASUREMENTS - A method at a mobile device for increasing measurement gaps to facilitate inter-radio access technology measurements is provided. The method at the mobile device: receiving inter-radio access technology (RAT) measurement configuration information from the network; when the device is actively connected, determining whether a triggering criterion is met, based on the received information; and if the triggering criterion is met, increasing the time available for measurements. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235850 | CONTROLLING STATIONS' ACCESS TO A COMMUNICATIONS MEDIUM - Managing access to a time-slotted communications medium by masking interrogatory codes that are contained in signals demarcating time slots of the medium and comparing the masked interrogatory codes against masked response codes. Access to the medium is dependent on the outcome of these comparisons. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235851 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Beam-steered millimeter wave signals transmitted in each of n sector slices include a sequence of primary synchronization (PSCH) symbols within predetermined symbol positions in at least one slot of a subframe. The symbols in consecutive symbol positions are each transmitted on a different one of the n slices, with the first symbol repeated on the same slice at the end. The sequence order rotates cyclically in each subframe so that two PSCH symbols are transmitted on one slice in a single subframe every nth subframe. Secondary synchronization (SSCH) and Broadcast Channel (BCH) symbols are transmitted in a predetermined pattern following the sequence of PSCH symbols. By transmitting consecutive PSCH symbols on different slices and repeating the first symbol, the mobile station can detect the best slice and beam by switching receive beams every subframe instead of every slot, relaxing time constraints on AGC adjustment while avoiding the start-at-the-edge problem. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235852 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING A PROBE RESPONSE RELATED TO WIRELESS MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL - An approach is provided for managing a probe response related to wireless medium access control. The approach involves causing, at least in part, an active scan process that includes transmitting one or more probe request messages to indicate one or more scheduling windows within which receiving one or more probe response messages is permitted in reply to the one or more probe request messages. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235853 | TRANSMISSION OF UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT RECEPTION - Methods and apparatus for a User Equipment (UE) to determine a number of coded modulation symbols per spatial layer for an Uplink Control Information (UCI) type it multiplexes in a Physical Uplink Shared CHannel (PUSCH) is provided. The UE communicates with different sets of Reception Points (RPs) in different Transmission Time Intervals (TTIs) wherein two RPs in a same set of RPs have a communication latency that is smaller than or equal to a predetermined value and two RPs in two different respective sets of RPs have a communication latency that is larger than a predetermined value. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235854 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FEEDING BACK DATA RECEIVING STATUS - An apparatus and a method for feeding back data receiving status, applied to a system, are provided. The method includes sequencing, by a User Equipment (UE), downlink subframes for transmitting data with respect to each Component Carrier (CC), generating receiving status feedback information for the first X downlink subframes with respect to each CC according to the result of the sequencing, where X≦M, wherein M is the number of downlink subframes on each CC, and transmitting the receiving status feedback information generated with respect to each CC to a base station. Accordingly, the UE will not misinterpret the receiving status for the downlink subframes due to inconsistencies with the base station between transmitting and receiving feedback. This affects the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) transmission, saves the uplink overheads occupied by the receiving status feedback information, and increases the uplink coverage area. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235855 | OPTIMIZED SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES - A base station subsystem (BSS) and a method are described herein for improving an Access Grant Channel (AGCH) capacity when a downlink Temporary Block Flow (TBF) is established for at least one mobile station and used for sending the respective downlink payload. Plus, a mobile station (MS) and a method are described herein for improving the AGCH capacity when the mobile station is sent information required for establishing a downlink TBF on which it receives its respective downlink payload. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235856 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND ROUTER USED IN THE NETWORK - The present invention provides a communication network comprising a host network, a plurality of base stations, at least a mobile host capable of establishing links to the base stations, and a hierarchy-network of plural routers which are improved in transferring performances for ensuring continuous operations with a reduced load without packet loss. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235857 | Meeting A Communication Restriction Requirement In A Process - An industrial process control system including a process control device, a first wireless communication network, a second wireless communication network and a first group of wireless field devices interfacing the industrial process and being associated with the first network. The network supervisor device investigates if the field devices of the first group are able to communicate with the process control device via the first network while meeting a communication restriction requirement, and redirects, in case the requirement is not met, communication between some of the field devices in the first group and the process control device to the second network so that the requirement is met for a first part of the field devices using the first wireless communication network and for a second part of the field devices using the second wireless communication network. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130235858 | INFORMATION NOTIFICATION AND TIMING ADVANCE ACQUISITION METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the invention disclose an information notification and timing advance acquisition method, system and device, relate to the field of wireless communications and address the problem of how a UE acquires a Timing Advance (TA) for uplink transmission in a cell newly added in a set of cells configured for the UE. In the invention, a base station sends mapping relationships between cell and Timing Advance, TA, group to a UE, and the UE determines a TA group corresponding to a newly added cell configured for the UE by the base station according to the mapping relationships; determines whether there is a cell, having established uplink synchronization with the based station, in the TA group; and if so, then the UE regards a TA of the cell as a TA for uplink transmission in the newly added cell; otherwise, the UE acquires a TA for uplink transmission in the newly added cell by initiating a random access procedure. Apparently with the invention, the UE can acquire a TA for uplink transmission in the newly added cell. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130242951 | SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method for uplink synchronization in a distributed antenna system is provided. A user equipment determines a transmission offset based on a transmission point for uplink synchronization, allocates uplink synchronization signal to a second communication channel based on the transmission offset, and transmits the uplink transmission signal to the transmission point for uplink synchronization through the second communication channel. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242952 | METHODS FOR SOLVING TIMING OFFSET IN THE ARRIVAL TIMES OF REFERENCE SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for solving timing offset in arrival times of a signal transmitted from multiple transmission points in different geographic locations to a user equipment. A phase of the signal to be transmitted by a transmission point is first rotated by a pre-adjusting angle. The phase-rotated signal is transmitted to the user equipment by the transmission point. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242953 | UPDATE OF TIMING ADVANCE WITHOUT STARTING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION ACTIVITY TIMER - Methods, apparatuses, and computer programs that are able to minimize UE power consumption while still updating the TA are provided. For example, one embodiment includes performing TA update without starting the DRX inactivity timer and short cycle timer. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242954 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPLINK DATA TRANSFER IN DYNAMIC TIMESLOT REDUCTION - A method for communicating with a network is presented. The method includes receiving an assignment of first timeslots for uplink communications, and receiving an instruction to reduce monitoring to a set of timeslots. The set of timeslots has a number of timeslots less than a number of timeslots to be monitored in accordance with the assignment. The method includes receiving a negative acknowledgement of a data block previously transmitted to the network, and, after receiving the instruction to reduce monitoring and the negative acknowledgement, transmitting a new data block to the network before retransmitting the data block previously transmitted to the network. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242955 | Method and Apparatus for Determining Information about Access Barring - A method for determining information about access barring includes the steps of: receiving a message set transmitted via a radio interface to a user equipment, the message set including at least a starting message that is a paging message; obtaining at least a first hit of a bit set from the starting message, wherein the bit set includes at least two bits and is intended for access barring; determining information of the hit set; the information at least disclosing whether the access barring is on or off; and receiving a system information block transmitted via the radio interface to the user equipment, the system information block comprising a scheduling information list that lists a further system information block that contains access barring parameters. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242956 | NON-INTERFERENCE TECHNIQUE FOR SPATIALLY AWARE MOBILE AD HOC NETWORKING - A system and method for reducing interference between wireless terminals communicating in a mobile ad-hoc network (MANET). Interference is reduced by dividing the MANET into a number of geographical areas having a specific size and shape. Each geographical area is assigned a time slot during which wireless terminals located in the respective geographical area may transmit to other wireless terminals. The time slots are assigned such that geographical areas having the same time slot are far enough away from each other that wireless terminals located in such same time slot geographical areas are outside the interference range of each other. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242957 | Method for achieving backward compatibility in large bandwidth wireless network, and access point - The present disclosure discloses a method for achieving backward compatibility in a large bandwidth wireless network and an Access Point (AP) for solving the technical problem of compatibility between a more effective channelization solution and a plurality of existing channelization solutions. The technical solution of the disclosure is implemented on the basis of time division multiplexing and frequency division multiplexing, and under the time division multiplexing mode, the AP sends/receives wireless frames on channels belonging to a first and a second channelization set respectively and alternately in terms of time according to a communication protocol; and under the frequency division multiplexing mode, the AP independently configures time window parameters and the corresponding main and/or secondary channel parameters on the channels which belong to the first and second channelization sets and are non-overlapped in the frequency domain, and sends/receives the wireless frames. By way of the above solution of the disclosure, the wireless station can establish a large bandwidth wireless network supporting backward compatibility. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242958 | Sounding Reference Signal - A wireless device receives RRC message(s) configuring transmissions of sounding reference signals on a second carrier in a second carrier group. The wireless device receives a random access response comprising a timing advance command. The wireless device transmits the sounding reference signals on the second carrier after applying the timing advance command to the second carrier group. The wireless device is configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the second carrier during a period between receiving the RRC message and applying the timing advance command to the second carrier group. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242959 | SYNCHRONOUS TDM-BASED COMMUNICATION IN DOMINANT INTERFERENCE SCENARIOS - Techniques for supporting communication in a heterogeneous network are described. In an aspect, communication in a dominant interference scenario may be supported by reserving subframes for a weaker base station observing high interference from a strong interfering base station. In another aspect, interference due to a first reference signal from a first station (e.g., a base station) may be mitigated by canceling the interference at a second station (e.g., a UE) or by selecting different resources for sending a second reference signal by the second station (e.g., another base station) to avoid collision with the first reference signal. In yet another aspect, a relay may transmit in an MBSFN mode in subframes that it listens to a macro base station and in a regular mode in subframes that it transmits to UEs. In yet another aspect, a station may transmit more TDM control symbols than a dominant interferer. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242960 | Methods And Apparatus For Providing Communications With Use Of First And Second RF Transceiver Modules - A method of communicating using first and second radio frequency (RF) transceiver modules of a communication device involves reserving selected timeslots for a wireless communication link of a first RF transceiver module; communicating data via the second RF transceiver module during the selected reserved timeslots; and simultaneously communicating data via the first RF transceiver module during remaining unreserved timeslots of the wireless communication link. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130242961 | NETWORK TIME RESERVATION CANCELLATION - Methods and systems that support, for example, canceling or trimming reservations of a shared communication medium are described. In one embodiment, a method that adapts a network time reservation in a communication network may include, for example, one or more of the following: transmitting a preamble field; transmitting a legacy signal field; transmitting at least one paired field, each paired field comprising a signal field and a protocol data unit; and generating an interframe gap. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130250923 | BANDWIDTH ADAPTIVE REFERENCE SIGNALS - Systems and methods for providing bandwidth adaptive reference signals are disclosed. In one embodiment, a wireless device receives a downlink signal from a base station in a cellular communication network on a corresponding downlink carrier, where a number of time domain units per frame in the downlink signal that carry reference symbols is determined based on, or is otherwise a function of, a system bandwidth of the downlink carrier. In addition, in some embodiments, a number of frequency domain units that carry reference symbols is also a function of the system bandwidth of the downlink carrier. The wireless device processes the reference symbols to provide one or more desired features such as, for example, synchronization, radio resource management measurements, channel estimation, or the like. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130250924 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SIGNALING AND DETERMINING TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL BUNDLING PARAMETERS - A method for determining transmission time interval (TTI) bundling parameters on a wireless communication device is described. The method includes receiving signaling that indicates a TTI bundling configuration. The method also includes receiving signaling that indicates an uplink grant. The method further includes determining at least one TTI bundling parameter based on the TTI bundling configuration and the uplink grant. The method additionally includes transmitting a signal based on the at least one TTI bundling parameter. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130250925 | TIMING ADVANCE CONFIGURATION FOR MULTIPLE UPLINK COMPONENT CARRIERS - The invention relates methods for time aligning uplink transmissions by a mobile terminal in a mobile communication system, and to methods for performing a handover of a mobile terminal to a target aggregation access point. The invention is also providing apparatus and system for performing these methods, and computer readable media the instructions of which cause the apparatus and system to perform the methods described herein. In order to allow for aligning the timing of uplink transmissions on uplink component carriers, where different propagation delays are imposed on the transmissions on the uplink component carriers, the inventions suggests to time align the uplink component carriers based on a reference time alignment of a reference cell and a reception time difference or propagation delay difference between the downlink transmissions in the reference cell and the other radio cells, the uplink component carriers of which need to be time aligned. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130250926 | SCHEDULING OF DYNAMIC BROADCAST CHANNEL - System(s) and method(s) are provided that facilitate scheduling system information. Scheduling of system information exploits a control channel associated with a broadcast channel (BCH), and utilizes reference information (e.g., a time reference or a scheduling reference) in addition to system information typically carried by scheduling units (SUs). Scheduling proceeds primarily according to three planning types. (i) A SU carries an indication of a time at which a disparate SU is to be scheduled in the control channel associated with the BCH. The indicated time is a specific time slot in the control channel or a lower bound for an actual scheduling instant. (ii) A first SU indicates a time cycle, or time period, for scheduling disparate scheduling units in the control channel associated with the BCH. (iii) A first SU carries a time indication to a second SU in a same control channel, the second SU indicates a time at which a third SU is to be scheduled. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130250927 | Resource Partitioning Information for Enhanced Interference Coordination - Methods and apparatus for partitioning resources for enhanced inter-cell interference coordination (eICIC) are provided. Certain aspects involve broadcasting a message indicating time-domain resource partitioning information (RPI), where a user equipment (UE) may be operating in idle mode. With the RPI, the UE may be able to identify protected resources with reduced/eliminated interference from neighboring cells. The RPI in this broadcasted message may be encoded as a bitmap as an alternative or in addition to enumeration of the U/N/X subframes. Other aspects entail transmitting a dedicated or unicast message indicating the time-domain RPI, where a UE may be operating in connected mode. With the RPI, the UE may be able to determine channel state information (CSI), make radio resource management (RRM) measurements, or perform radio link monitoring (RLM), based on one or more signals from a serving base station during the protected time-domain resources. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130259007 | SYNCHRONIZATION IN A FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH WIRELESS NETWORK - In a wireless network, a primary synchronization signal and a secondary synchronization signal are sent at a predetermined bandwidth in a transmission. The predetermined bandwidth is a lowest operating bandwidth of the wireless network. Data is also sent in the transmission using an operating bandwidth greater than the lowest operating bandwidth. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130259008 | Random Access Response Process in a Wireless Communications - A wireless device transmits a random access preamble with an initial transmission power. The wireless device monitors a control channel on a primary cell for a corresponding random access response. The monitoring is performed within a time frame which starts at a first subframe having a duration less than or equal to a primary random access response window regardless of which cell is employed for transmission of the random access preamble. The wireless device retransmits, with an increased transmission power, the random access preamble if no corresponding random access response is received. The increased transmission power depends on a cell specific power ramping step value. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130259009 | System and Method for Transmitting a Reference Signal - In one embodiment, a method for transmitting a reference signal in a wireless communications system includes obtaining, by a base station, a radio frame and determining, by the base station, a first subset of subframes of the radio frame, where the first subset includes a first subframe of the radio frame, and where the first subframe includes a mandatory downlink signal. Also, the method includes transmitting the reference signal only in the determined first subset. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130259010 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to an aspect of this disclosure, a radio communication device is provided including a first transceiver configured to transmit and receive signals in accordance with a Cellular Wide Area radio communication technology; a second transceiver configured to transmit and receive signals in accordance with a Short Range radio communication technology; a first processor configured to control the first transceiver to receive and transmit data packets in accordance with a first data transmission frame; a second processor configured to control the second transceiver to receive and transmit data packets in accordance with a second data transmission frame; wherein the first processor is further configured to control the first transceiver such that the first transceiver does not transmit a data packet during at least a time period provided for a first transmission of a respective data packet transmitted by the second transceiver in accordance with the second data transmission frame. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130259011 | MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A mobile station device set to communicate with a base station device over a plurality of subframes using a plurality of cells is provided. When ACK/NACK for reception of data transmitted from the base station device is to be transmitted to the base station device using a PUCCH and the PUCCH is set to select one resource from a plurality of PUCCH candidate resources to transmit with prescribed transmit power using the selected resource, the mobile station device determines a parameter value related to prescribed transmit power in accordance with the number of cells used for data communication in the plurality of subframes. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130259012 | WIRELESS MULTI-SITE CAPACITY COORDINATION - Wireless multi-site capacity coordination includes calculating a total interference impact metric for a reference cell, determining a distribution of power resources for the reference cell and a plurality of neighboring cells, and allocating the power resources to sub-bands for the reference cell and the plurality of neighboring cells. Determining a distribution of power resources includes determining power resources to assign to sub-bands and assigning the determined power resources to sub-bands. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130259013 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNALS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for facilitating cell search by user equipments (UEs) in a wireless communication system are described. In an aspect, a primary synchronization code (PSC) sequence may be generated based on a Frank sequence and a constant amplitude sequence that is repeated multiple times. In another aspect, a set of PSC sequences may be generated based on complementary sequences having good aperiodic correlation properties and efficient implementations. In one design, PSC sequences A+B and B+A may be formed based on Golay complementary sequences A and B, there “+” denotes concatenation. In yet another aspect, a set of secondary synchronization code (SSC) sequences may be generated based on a set of base sequences and different modulation symbols of a modulation scheme. Each base sequence may be modulated by each of M possible modulation symbols for the modulation scheme to obtain M different SSC sequences. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130265990 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES, SERVICE NETWORKS, AND METHODS FOR MANAGING OPERATION OF A REGISTRATION PROCEDURE FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE (M2M) COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile communication device configured for Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communications is provided. In the mobile communication device, a wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a service network, and a controller module receives a message with an extension registration period only for the M2M communications from the service network via the wireless module and periodically performs a registration procedure according to the extension registration period only for the M2M communications. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130265991 | Primary and Secondary Cell Group Configuration - A base station transmits control message(s) to a wireless device configuring secondary cell(s). Each of the secondary cells is assigned to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups comprising a primary cell group and at least one secondary cell group. The control message(s) comprise dedicated parameters. If dedicated parameters comprise a cell group index for the secondary cell, the wireless device assigns the secondary cell to one of the at least one secondary cell group identified by the cell group index. Otherwise, the wireless device assigns the secondary cell to the primary cell group. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130265992 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SYNCHRONIZATION BETWEEN BASE STATIONS - The present invention provides a method, an apparatus, and a system for synchronization between base stations. The method for synchronization between base stations includes: A first base station receives synchronization information sent by a user equipment, where the first base station is a serving base station of the user equipment; and the first base station adjusts a downlink sending time point and an uplink receiving time point of the first base station according to the synchronization information, so as to keep consistency between the downlink sending time point of the first base station and a downlink sending time point of a second base station that serves as a synchronization time reference and keep consistency between the uplink receiving time point of the first base station and an uplink receiving time point of the second base station. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130265993 | Quasi-Orthogonal Functional Walsh Code Allocation Devices and Methods - Methods and devices for allocating codes to user devices to enable extracting an intended signal among a plurality of signals multiplexed over the same physical channel are provided. The methods include determining a threshold number of orthogonal codes to be reserved for allocation to first user devices, based on (i) a number of orthogonal codes usable for allocating, (ii) a usage of the orthogonal codes, and (iii) an average penetration of first user devices, the first user devices being less capable than the second user devices to cancel undesirable interference from a signal extracted using the allocated code. The methods further include allocating an orthogonal code if a number of available orthogonal codes is larger than the threshold number, otherwise allocating an orthogonal code if a first user device requests a connection, and a quasi-orthogonal code if a second user device requests a connection. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130272272 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MULTIPLE-STREAM WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of multiple-stream wireless communication. For example, an apparatus may include a wireless communication unit to perform wireless peer-to-peer (P2P) communication according to a time allocation scheme defining a plurality of scheduled allocations (teeth) for wireless P2P communication within a wireless communication network based on a predefined priority scheme, which assigns a plurality of priorities to a plurality of streams corresponding to a plurality of service types, wherein a tooth may be scheduled for P2P communication between a pair of endpoints of the wireless communication network, and wherein the tooth includes one or more contiguous portions (slices), a slice having a predefined duration allocated for communication of one or more streams having the same priority. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272273 | Methods and Devices for Transmission of Signals in a Telecommunication System - Transmitter and receiver technologies are provided that allow more than two users in a time-slotted communications system to share the same time slot by creating orthogonal sub-channels, while keeping the receiver complexity low are provided. Moreover, the users can in accordance with some embodiments employ GMSK or other non-linear continuous phase modulation technique. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272274 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT SCHEME - In an environment in which a macro base station and a low transmission power base station exist, the ratio of the interference reduction time period of the macro base station is optimized, and the throughput of the low transmission power base station is improved, while minimizing a reduction in throughput. The macro base station causes a high interference to other base stations and one or a plurality of low power nodes (LPN) subjected to interference from the macro base station. The macro base station sets first and second data transmission time periods and then determines the ratio of the second time period and the pattern of the first time period and the second time period based on communication quality in the first time period and communication quality in the second time period of the macro base station and the LPN. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272275 | DIGITAL WIRELESS INTERCOM SYSTEM AND DRIVING METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a digital wireless intercom system including: at least one master base station; at least one remote base station connected to the at least one master base station wiredly through at least one of a local area network, a local area network infrastructure and an internet, the at least one remote base station transmitting and receiving a synchronization signal and a data signal of digital type with the at least one master base station; a plurality of first belt packs within a transmission radius of the at least one master base station, the plurality of first belt packs transmitting and receiving the synchronization signal and the data signal with the at least one master base station wirelessly; and a plurality of second belt packs within a transmission radius of the at least one remote base station, the plurality of second belt packs transmitting and receiving the synchronization signal and the data signal with the at least one remote base station wirelessly, wherein the at least one master base station and the at least one remote base station are driven with different independent frequencies based on a frequency interference situation, and wherein the synchronization signal and the data signal transmitted and received between the at least one master base station and the at least one remote base station have different starting timings of period | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272276 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, MEMORY DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A wireless communication includes: a communication unit; a storage unit; a transmission buffer; and a controller. The communication unit wirelessly communicates with a reception terminal. The storage unit stores information relating to a timing at which the reception terminal changes from a first state to a second state. The first state is a state of being able to receive data and continues for a first period. The second state is a state of being unable to receive data and continues for a second period. The first period is extended by a fixed duration when the reception terminal in the first state receives data. The transmission buffer temporarily stores segmented data constituting transmission data to be transmitted to the reception terminal. The controller controls the communication unit to wirelessly transmit dummy data to the reception terminal by the timing if the segmented data is not stored in the storage unit. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272277 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In a wireless communication system that conducts a communication between a base station and a terminal the base station includes a first communication unit using a first communication system of a TDMA system, and a second communication unit using a second communication system, and the terminal includes a third communication unit using the first communication system, and a fourth communication unit using the second communication system. The base station transmits a control signal in the first communication system with the use of the first communication unit, and the base station determines timing of transmission for the second communication unit according to timing of TDMA of the first communication unit. The third communication unit receives the control signal transmitted from the base station in the first communication system, and the fourth communication unit controls receiving operation according to information included in the control signal. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272278 | ELECTRIC MONITORING SYSTEM USING A RANDOM PHASE MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and apparatuses, including computer programs encoded on computer-readable media, are configured for receiving monitor data from an electric meter. A data stream is created based upon the monitor data. The data stream is spread with a common pseudo-noise (PN) code that is used by a plurality of nodes in communication with an access point. The spread data stream is transmitted at a first time based on a slot start time and a first randomly selected timing offset. The spread data stream is transmitted while at least a portion of a second spread data stream is transmitted at a second time based on the slot start time and a second randomly selected timing offset. The second spread data stream is spread with the common PN code. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272279 | Timing in a Multicarrier Wireless Device - A base station configures a primary cell group and at least one secondary cell group in a wireless device. The wireless device transmits first uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing a reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a timing reference. The wireless device autonomously selects a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference. The new activated secondary cell is different from the reference secondary cell. The wireless device transmits second uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272280 | Inter-System Carrier Aggregation - The invention relates to apparatuses, a method, computer program and computer-readable medium. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130272281 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING HARQ MODE - The invention discloses a method for determining an HARQ mode so as to facilitate the use of the same HARQ modes at the network side and the UE side. The method includes: transmitting a reconfiguration message to instruct a UE to be reconfigured as a TTI bundling HARQ mode; detecting activation, upon reception of a feedback of the UE for the reconfiguration message, to determine whether a TTI bundling mechanism is validated at the UE side; and determining from a detection result an HARQ mode adopted by the UE. The invention further discloses an apparatus for performing the method. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130279481 | BASE STATION, TERMINAL, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND RECEPTION METHOD - A base station, a terminal, a transmission method and a reception method that allow the data processing on a reception side to have a margin irrespective of the time position of a resource region where control information is mapped. In a base station ( | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130279482 | MULTIRECEIVER TIMING ADVANCE PROVISIONING - A method of operating a mobile station in a packet transfer mode includes receiving a distribution timing advance message on a control channel from a base station. The distribution timing advance message contains a plurality of mobile station identifiers and associated timing advance values. One of the mobile station identifiers is identified as corresponding to the mobile station. The timing advance value associated with the identified one of the mobile station identifiers is determined. The timing of an uplink transmission to the base station is then adjusted responsive to the timing advance value. Related mobile stations, methods of operating a base station subsystem to communicate timing advance values to a plurality of mobile stations, base station subsystems, and methods of operating a serving GPRS support node to control communication of timing advance values by a base station subsystem are also disclosed. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130279483 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a wireless communication unit, a wired communication unit, and a communication timing correction unit. If the wireless communication unit fails to receive a synchronization signal from another base station apparatus at given reception timing, the wired communication unit transmits a synchronization state confirmation signal for confirming a synchronization state between the base station and another base station apparatus, and receives a synchronization state response signal including a determination result of the synchronization state. The communication timing correction unit corrects a communication timing based on the synchronization state response signal. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130279484 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF INTERFERER SIGNAL DETECTION - A method for detecting an interferer signal in a duplex communication channel. The method comprises establishing a duplex communication channel for transmitting and receiving a signal having a plurality of frames each comprising an uplink (UL) and a downlink (DL) sub frames, allocating a plurality of silent slots in at least on of the UL and DL sub frames of at least some of the plurality of frames, intercepting at least one transmission signal during the plurality of silent slots, and detecting at least one interferer signal according to the at least one transmission signal. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130279485 | SCRAMBLED TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE THEREOF - Disclosed are a scrambling transmission method and device thereof. The method comprises: a user terminal generates the message to be sent and modulates the message to be sent to generate the data modulation symbols; the user terminal scrambles the data modulation symbol using the cell-specific scrambling sequence, to generate the scrambled data modulation symbols; and the user terminal sending the scrambled data modulation symbols via a DFT-S-OFDM transmission structure with a time domain spreading. The present invention can reduce the interference among different user terminal data on the same resource in adjacent cells, thus improve the detection performance of uplink control signals | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130279486 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - In a mobile station that performs communication with a base station device via a plurality of cells, the plurality of cells are grouped into a first group constituted by cells having an uplink transmission timing that is the same as that of one primary cell and a second group constituted by one or more cells having an uplink transmission timing that is different from that of the primary cell. The uplink transmission timings are each managed using a corresponding transmission timing timer for each of the groups. In a case where a transmission timing timer for the first group has expired, the mobile station stops all uplink transmissions in the plurality of cells. In a case where a transmission timing timer for the second group has expired, the mobile station stops uplink transmissions in the cells constituting the second group for which the transmission timing timer has expired. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130287009 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE WITHIN DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides an apparatus and a method for controlling coexistence interference within a device in a wireless communication system. The method discloses the following steps: performing triggering, in which a transmission, which is generated in a terminal, in a first frequency band of a first network system requests controlling of interference on a reception, which is generated in the terminal, in a second frequency band of a second network system performed; transmitting to a eNB support information including information on a time section that can or cannot be used by the first network system or the second network system, due to the interference; and receiving from the base station reply information for accepting or denying interference control as a reply to the support information. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130294418 | Switching Between Remote Radio Heads - An exemplary embodiment in accordance with this invention provides a method of managing a set of uplink reception paths and controlling the timing of uplink transmission of a UE. The method includes selecting a dominant path from a plurality of paths based at least in part on measurements of the plurality of paths. A path describes a communication route from a mobile device to an access point via a RRH. The method also includes selecting a plurality of non-dominant serving paths from the plurality of paths based at least in part on the measurements; determining a timing window based at least in part on the dominant path; determining a TA for the mobile device based at least in part on the timing window and sending the TA to the mobile device. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130294419 | METHODS AND NODES FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION WITH A USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention relates to a method in a radio equipment unit for downlink radio communication with a UE of a radio network. The radio equipment unit provides radio communication with UE in at least one cell, and is connected to a radio equipment control unit controlling the radio communication. The method comprises receiving ( | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130294420 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS IN WIRELESS NETWORK - In controlling channel access from a plurality of terminals in a wireless network, information for wireless resource allocation for each of the terminals is acquired, and channel access time for each terminal is determined based on the information for wireless resource allocation. Then, frames each containing the channel access time determined for each terminal are sequentially transmitted. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130294421 | Systems and Methods for Network MIMO - A multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) communication system comprising a master base station and a slave base station. The master base station has a plurality of transmit antennas and transmits a first set of data to a mobile station in a first transmission. The slave base station has a plurality of transmit antennas and transmits a second set of data to the mobile station in the first transmission. The master base station retransmits the second set of data to the mobile station during a first retransmission and the slave base station retransmits the first set of data to the mobile station during the first retransmission. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130294422 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND BASE STATION DEVICE CONTROL METHOD - A calculation unit computes, based on subsequent information that is added to data transmitted from a terminal device and indicates the presence or absence of untransmitted data reserved in the terminal device when transmitting the data, the number of data in which untransmitted data exists among the certain number of data previously transmitted from the terminal device. A time slot assignment control unit controls the assigned size of a time slot to the terminal device based on the number of the data, in which untransmitted data exists, computed by the calculation unit. A data processing unit notifies the terminal device of the assigned size of the time slot determined by the time slot assignment control unit. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130294423 | METHODS AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING CONTROL INFORMATION USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - An apparatus may include a radio frequency (RF) transceiver to receive a first message over a first carrier in a first band in a downlink sub-frame of a first radio frame in a communications link, where the communications link comprises interband carriers aggregated over primary and secondary cells. The apparatus may also include a processor and a reply message assignment module operable on the processor to determine a downlink sub-frame in which the downlink transmission is received and to adjust timing of a reply/acknowledge message to be sent by the RF transceiver in response to the first message so as to coincide with a predetermined uplink sub-frame of a radio frame. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130294424 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING UPLINK TIME ALIGNMENT - A method and apparatus of managing uplink time alignment in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment starts a time alignment timer which is used to control how long the user equipment is considered uplink time aligned and receives an expiry request message from a base station while the time alignment timer is running. Upon receiving the expiry request, the user equipment expires the time alignment timer and releasing uplink resources. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130301619 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK TIMING ALIGNMENT IN SYSTEM WITH LARGE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A mobile station is configured to perform a method for uplink timing alignment in a wireless network. The method includes receiving a first downlink synchronization signal from a base station on a first beam pair at a first time associated with a first propagation delay. The method also includes receiving a second downlink synchronization signal from the base station on a second beam pair at a second time associated with a second propagation delay. The method further includes determining a second timing advance for the second beam pair based on a known first timing advance for the first beam pair and a time difference between the first time and the second time. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130301620 | HARQ in Spatial Multiplexing MIMO System - A method and apparatus for signaling scheduling information in a spatial multiplexing wireless communications system, as well as corresponding methods and apparatus for processing such signaling information, are disclosed. Signaling scheduling information includes scheduling first and second transport blocks for simultaneous transmission during a first transmission interval on first and second data substreams, respectively, and assigning a single re-transmission process identifier for the first transmission interval and transmitting first scheduling information for the first transmission interval. The first scheduling information includes the re-transmission process identifier and first disambiguation data. Additionally, at least one of the first and second transport blocks is scheduled for re-transmission during a second transmission interval. Second scheduling information for the second transmission interval is also transmitted; the second scheduling information including the re-transmission process identifier and second disambiguation data. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130301621 | REPLAY METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A reply method comprising transmitting signals in a plurality of frequency bands in an identical time frame from a first communication apparatus to a second communication apparatus, receiving the signals transmitted in the plurality of frequency bands in the identical time frame from the first communication apparatus, generating a reply signal for a signal received in each of the plurality of frequency bands, the reply signal indicating whether the received signal has been successfully decoded and transmitting a plurality of the reply signals separately in a plurality of time frames, each of the plurality of reply signals being generated for each of signals received in the plurality of frequency bands in the identical time frame. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130301622 | Dynamic Time-Spectrum Block Allocation For Cognitive Radio Networks - Dynamic time-spectrum block allocation for cognitive radio networks is described. In one implementation, without need for a central controller, peer wireless nodes collaboratively sense local utilization of a communication spectrum and collaboratively share white spaces for communication links between the nodes. Sharing local views of the spectrum utilization with each other allows the nodes to dynamically allocate non-overlapping time-frequency blocks to the communication links between the nodes for efficiently utilizing the white spaces. The blocks are sized to optimally pack the available white spaces. The nodes regularly readjust the bandwidth and other parameters of all reserved blocks in response to demand, so that packing of the blocks in available white spaces maintains a fair distribution of the overall bandwidth of the white spaces among active communication links, minimizes finishing time of all communications, reduces contention overhead among the nodes contending for the white spaces, and maintains non-overlapping blocks. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130301623 | INTEGRATED CIRCUIT FOR CQI REPORTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Provided is a wireless communication mobile station device by which a throughput can be improved in multicarrier communication. In the device, a group control section ( | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130308610 | Uplink Scheduling Timing | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130308611 | COMMUNICATING WITH TWO NODES WITH OVERLAPPING FRAMES - A first wireless node may determine that a first reserved retransmission frame overlaps with a second reserved transmission frame and a second reserved retransmission frame and that the second reserved transmission frame overlaps with a first reserved transmission frame and the first reserved retransmission frame. The first reserved transmission frame and the first reserved retransmission frame may be reserved for wireless communication with a first master node, and the second reserved transmission frame and the second reserved retransmission frame are reserved for wireless communication with a second master node. The wireless node may also process and acknowledge data received from the first master node during the first reserved transmission frame based on the determining, ignore data sent by the second master node during the second reserved transmission frame based on the determining, and process and acknowledge data received from the second master node during the second reserved retransmission frame. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130308612 | Sending Feedback for Multiple Downlink Carriers - Feedback information for multiple serving cells are transmitted on high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). A slot format for transmitting feedback information is determined based on the number of configured secondary serving cells and whether multiple input multiple-output (MIMO) is configured in the serving cells. Spreading factor is reduced to 128 when two secondary serving cells are configured and MIMO is configured in at least one of the two configured secondary serving cells, or when three secondary serving cells are configured. The serving cells are grouped into feedback groups, each feedback group having one or more serving cells. Channel coding may be applied to feedback information for the feedback groups. The resulting encoded feedback information for the feedback groups is concatenated to form composite feedback information. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130308613 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND NETWORK EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a random access method, a user equipment and a network equipment. The method comprising: acquiring a random access group scheduling identity, wherein the random access group scheduling identity is shared by user equipments belonging to a first group; receiving control signaling scrambled by the random access group scheduling identity on a PDCCH, and decoding the control signaling according to the random access group scheduling identity; receiving a data packet on a PDSCH according to the decoded control signaling, wherein the data packet comprises indication information used for instructing at least one UE belonging to the first group to perform a random access; and determining that the random access is needed to be performed according to the indication information, and performing the random access. The embodiments of the present invention may save PDCCH resource. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130308614 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A method for receiving system information by a mobile station (MS) of a wireless communication system includes receiving a secondary superframe header (S-SFH) change cycle from a base station (BS), and receiving a primary superframe header information element (P-SFH IE) including a first field indicating a change count of a plurality of secondary superframe header subpacket information elements (S-SFH SP IEs) from the base station (BS). Once each of the plurality of S-SFH SP IEs is changed, each of the plurality of S-SFH SP IEs remains unchanged during one or more S-SFH change cycles. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130308615 | TECHNIQUE FOR PERFORMING A RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE OVER A RADIO INTERFACE - The invention relates to a technique for performing a random access procedure over a radio interface, for example between a mobile terminal and a radio base station of a mobile network. A method aspect of the invention comprises the steps of transmitting a synchronization request for synchronization information; receiving synchronization information in response to the synchronization request; and transmitting, based on at least one transmission parameter adjusted in accordance with the synchronization information, a resource request for data transmission resources. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130315210 | Dynamic Real-Time Tiered Client Access - Wireless client devices within a wireless network exchange data with other wireless devices during particular time slots determined by the network. More particularly, the system generates and wirelessly broadcasts synchronization information to the client devices, where the synchronization information contains individual masks to be applied to bit fields of individual client devices, where said time slots are determined in accordance with the masked bit fields. In such a manner, client devices can be coordinated to communicate with the system in a dynamic real-time tiered manner. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315211 | AIRSYNC: ENABLING DISTRIBUTED MULTIUSER MIMO WITH FULL MULTIPLEXING GAIN - Systems and methods are described that provide not only time but also phase synchronization, thus enabling distributed multiuser multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) architectures and techniques, such as supported by the IEEE 802.11n standard, where several access points are connected to a central server and operate as a large distributed multi-antenna access point. The systems and methods can lock the phase of all access points using a common reference (e.g., a synchronization tone) broadcasted over the air in conjunction with a predictive filter (e.g., a Kalman filter) which closely tracks the phase drift for each subcarrier channel. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315212 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND DEVICES FOR DECOUPLED INTERFERENCE RANDOMIZATION FOR UPLINK REFERENCE SIGNALS - Interference between reference signals from user equipments in a wireless network, the method may be reduced by using a received time shift value from a node in the wireless network. An interference randomization technique may be applied to a reference signal and a sequence may be generated based on the reference signal to which the interference randomization technique has been applied. A processed reference signal may be derived by applying a time shift based on the time shift value to the sequence. The processed reference signal may be transmitted to the node. Related systems, methods, nodes and wireless devices are also described. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315213 | METHOD OF GENERATING AN INDEX VALUE - A method of generating an index value associated with a primary synchronization code within a communication signal includes splitting a sampled communication signal into even and odd samples. The even and odd samples are correlated with a primary synchronization code of the communication signal and complex values of the even and odd samples are generated. Signal strength values for the even and odd samples are approximated and the approximate signal strength values within a frame of the communication signal are accumulated. A highest accumulated signal strength value is assigned as an index value. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315214 | Timing Advance Without Random Access Channel Access - A timing advance TA for a second component carrier CC is determined in dependence on a difference value that is indicated in wireless signaling between a network and a user equipment UE, in which the second CC and a first CC is allocated to the UE simultaneously. The determined TA is utilized to synchronize wireless communications on the second CC between the network and the UE. In exemplary embodiments: the difference value is a difference between times at which downlink transmissions were sent on the first and second CCs, and determining comprises solving for the TA for the second CC utilizing the signaled difference value in at least one algorithm; the difference value may be signaled in a MAC message or via RRC signaling, and the second CC may be an extension carrier. Apparatus, methods and programs are detailed for the UE and for the network access node/eNB. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315215 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TEMPORARILY AND DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATING RADIO RESOURCES TO MACHINE-TYPE-COMMUNICATION (TMC) DEVICES AND HUMAN-TO-HUMAN (H2H) DEVICES - A method operating a wireless communication system including a radio interface having limited radio resources. The method includes: arranging for one or more communication devices of first type to communicate data to/from a first type source via the radio interface; arranging for one or more communication devices of second type to communicate data to/from a second type source via the radio interface; restricting use of the radio resources by the one or more communication devices of second type during a specified data transmission period by allocating more of the radio resources to the first type of communication devices than the communication devices of second type; and restricting use of the radio resources by the one or more communication devices of first type outside the specified data transmission period by allocating more of the radio resources to the second type of communication devices than the communication devices of first type. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315216 | CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for uplink channel estimation comprises providing ( | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130315217 | TECHNIQUES TO TRAIN A PERSONAL AREA NETWORK COMPONENT - Techniques to train a personal area network component may include obtaining a packet error rate from a personal area network component. It may be determined that the packet error rate is greater than a packet error rate threshold after a time period. A reservation may be requested from a wide area network component based a first transmit pattern from the personal area network component. A second or adjusted transmit pattern from the wide area network component may be received. Personal area network signals may be transmitted based on the second transmit pattern. The time period may be adjusted based on a personal area network packet error rate of the second transmit pattern. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130322412 | Unbiased Media Contention in the Presence of Conflicting Wireless Operation - Unbiased media contention in the presence of conflicting wireless operation of data transmission includes beginning media contention only during Bluetooth® operation; treating the Bluetooth® operation as a rejection of media transmission; holding a backoff timer associated with a backoff period steady for a specified duration; upon immediate completion of the Bluetooth® operation, WiFi contends with a small backoff value when media access is busy; using a small random number for the backoff period during a non-Bluetooth® data transfer period; and keeping an overall backoff timer unbiased for a duration of the data transmission. The specified duration may include an end of the Bluetooth® operation or a maximum backoff time that is reached. The random number for the backoff period includes uniform distribution in a contention window. A mean backoff timer value equals a uniform mean value minus a ratio of a Bluetooth® operation period to a total backoff period. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130322413 | METHODS TO ENABLE SCHEDULING AND CONTROL OF DIRECT LINK COMMUNICATION IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for enabling scheduling and control of direct link communication in a cellular communication system may be disclosed. A method for use in a first wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include transmitting a request for device-to-device (D2D) communication resources to an enhanced Node B (eNB). The first WTRU may receive an allocation of resources for multiple transmission time intervals (TTI) to be used for D2D communications from the eNB. The first WTRU may schedule D2D communications with a second WTRU to be performed during the allocated resources. The first WTRU may perform D2D communications with the second WTRU using half duplex communications during the allocated resources. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130329701 | RADIO BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING TTI BUNDLING - A radio base station (RBS), such as an eNodeB, for supporting TTI bundling transmissions from a User Equipment (UE) using is provided. The RBS is arranged for toggling a TTI bundling mode of the UE by transmitting a first signal ( | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329702 | Inter-Frame Spacing Duration for Sub-1 Gigahertz Wireless Networks - Systems and methods of performing communication via a sub-1 gigahertz wireless network are disclosed. Values of one or more inter-frame spacing parameters for use in communication via the sub-1 gigahertz wireless network are also defined. The parameters may include a short inter-frame spacing (SIFS) time of 160 microseconds (μs). The parameters may also include a clear channel assessment (CCA) time of 40 μs. Additional parameters, such as air propagation time are also defined (e.g., for inclusion into a standard, such as Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11ah). | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329703 | Method of Handling HARQ Resource in TDD System and Related Communication Device - A method of determining HARQ resource of a UL subframe comprises determining a first new association set of the UL subframe according to an association set of the UL subframe of a first UL/DL configuration of a legacy communication device; replacing a subset of the first new association set by a subset of an association set of the UL subframe of a second UL/DL configuration of an advanced communication device, when the legacy communication device is not able to perform a reception in at least one subframe corresponding to the subset of the first new association set; configuring a mapping between at least one sequence index of the UL subframe of the first UL/DL configuration and the first new association set according to the first UL/DL configuration; and determining the HARQ resource of the UL subframe according to the mapping and the first new association set. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329704 | Method of Handling HARQ Resource in TDD System and Related Communication Device - A method of determining hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) resource of a UL subframe for an advanced communication device comprises determining a first new association set of the UL subframe according to an association set of the UL subframe of a first UL/DL configuration of a legacy communication device; configuring a mapping between at least one sequence index of the UL subframe of the first UL/DL configuration and the first new association set according to the first UL/DL configuration; and determining the HARQ resource of the UL subframe according to the mapping and the first new association set. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329705 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE ACCESS TO AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method of enabling configuration of a link between a circuit-switched Private Branch Exchange (CS PBX), and an access gateway node that connects at least one CS PBX to an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). The method is performed at an IMS application server, AS. The AS is configured with timeslot configuration information for each link between the access gateway node and the at least one CS PBX. The AS receives, from the access gateway node, a request for timeslot configuration information for one or more of the links, and identifies the one or more links to which the request relates. The AS then retrieves the timeslot configuration information for the identified link, and sends a response indicating this information to the access gateway node. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329706 | PREVENTING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN A FIRST MODEM (E.G. DECT) LOCATED IN PROXIMITY TO A RADIO MODEM OPERATING IN A TDM MODE (E.G. GSM) - A method for preventing interference between a first modem and located in proximity to a radio modem operating in TDM mode the method may include: detecting by the first modem, wireless transmission from the radio modem operating in a TDM mode; wherein the detecting comprises processing RSSI values obtained during multiple time slots of multiple frames of the first modem; determining an operation pattern of the radio modem operating in a TDM mode according to the detected transmission;
| 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329707 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Methods and apparatus which allow a wireless terminal ( | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329708 | Primary and Secondary Cell Group Configuration - A base station transmits a message assigning each secondary cell to a cell group. The message comprises dedicated parameters for a secondary cell. If the dedicated parameters comprise a cell group index for the secondary cell, the secondary cell is assigned to a secondary cell group. Otherwise, the secondary cell is assigned to the primary cell group. The message comprises MAC dedicated parameters comprising a sequence of at least one information element. Each information element comprises a first cell group index of a first secondary cell group and a corresponding time alignment timer value. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329709 | Methods and Nodes in a Wireless Communication System - Embodiments herein include a network node and a mobile station in a wireless communication system. Embodiments also include a method in the mobile station and a method in the network node. With particular regard to the method in the network node, the method schedules wireless transmissions between the network node and the mobile station. The method comprises obtaining a multi-slot class of the mobile station and determining a downlink Temporary Block Flow configuration. Further, the method comprises assigning uplink timeslots to the mobile station and associating each assigned uplink timeslot with a priority value, based on the downlink Temporary Block Flow configuration and the multi-slot class of the mobile station. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329710 | PILOT ARRANGEMENT METHOD IN MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER ADOPTING SAME - A mobile communication system in which a working frequency band is divided into a plurality of predetermined frequency bands, and time division multiplexing is performed, the mobile communication system includes a base station to insert a known pilot symbol into the plurality of predetermined frequency bands at a predetermined reference interval, and to insert to arrange the known pilot symbol into at least one of the plurality of predetermined bands at a smaller interval than the predetermined reference interval, wherein a frequency band in which the known pilot symbol is inserted at a smaller interval than the predetermined reference interval is to be set cyclically in time; and a mobile terminal to receive the known pilot symbol transmitted from the base station. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130329711 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and device for communication between terminals in a wireless communication system. According to the present invention, a resource configuration method, a channel configuration method, a transmission power control method, etc. for communication between terminals can be provided. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130336292 | WIRELESS FIRE SYSTEM BASED ON OPEN STANDARD WIRELESS PROTOCOLS - A wireless fire detection monitoring system comprises a control unit which includes a wireless transceiver and control software to implement a wireless multi-hop communications protocol. A network of battery powered monitoring devices is provided for monitoring alarm conditions. Each monitoring device includes software to implement the wireless communication protocol with one of, the control unit and at least one other child member of the plurality, or, at least two other members of the plurality where a selected device communicates with at least one child device and at least one parent device. The wireless multi-hop communications protocol comprises a time division multiple access communications protocol with the monitoring devices being time synchronized and the control unit and the monitoring devices are adapted to communicate compliant with the IEEE 802.11 standard. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336293 | SCHEDULING INFORMATION REPORTING IN TD-HSUPA SYSTEMS - A method to improve the sending of scheduling information, particularly for Time Division-High-Speed Uplink Packet Access (TD-HSUPA) operation is described. When T-WAIT is configured at a large value which is above a threshold, and when the UE transitions from having a grant to not having a grant, and the TEBS is larger than zero, if the UE does not receive a grant within a time window, the UE may send scheduling information via the E-RUCCH without waiting for the T-WAIT timer to expire. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336294 | Wireless Device Connection to an Application Server - A base station transmits a first message to a wireless device over a primary cell group. The first message comprises a content descriptor and originates from an application server. The base station transmits to the wireless device over the primary cell group: first content packets; a control message configuring a secondary cell group; and an activation command activating one or more secondary cells in the secondary cell group. The base station transmits second content packets over the primary cell group and the secondary cell group. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336295 | Packet Transmission in Wireless Networks - A wireless device transmits to a base station over a primary cell group a first control message comprising the size of a buffer storing a first portion of content data. The wireless device receives a second control message from the base station over the primary cell group configuring a secondary cell group. The wireless device receives a third control message initiating an uplink timing synchronization process for the secondary cell group. The wireless device transmits a plurality of content packets addressed to an application server to the base station over the primary cell group and the secondary cell group. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336296 | Carrier Grouping in Multicarrier Wireless Networks - A base station transmits an RRC message to modify a first cell group index of a first cell. If the first cell is a primary cell, the RRC message reconfigures the primary cell as a secondary cell with an updated first cell group index and the RRC message comprises mobility control information. If the first cell is a secondary cell, the RRC message releases the secondary cell and adds the secondary cell with an updated first cell group index without employing mobility control information. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336297 | INCORPORATION OF MESH BASE STATIONS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Incorporating and operating a mesh base station in a wireless network is described. The mesh base station can utilize common wireless resource allocations as a corresponding wireless base station while transmitting to wireless subscriber stations during the same time period. The mesh base station obtains a data packet from the wireless base station over a backhaul link during a scheduled time period and transmits the data packet to the designated wireless subscriber station during another scheduled time period. The wireless base station and the mesh base station can also receive data packets from wireless subscriber stations during a same time period. A wireless network can be configured with two mesh base stations at an approximate boundary of two adjacent sector coverage areas, where a coverage area is supported by a wireless base station and each mesh base station supports wireless subscriber stations within a coverage radius. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336298 | Timing in a Multicarrier Wireless Device - A wireless device receives a control command causing transmission of a random access preamble on a reference secondary cell in a secondary cell group. The reference secondary cell is employed as a timing reference to transmit first uplink signals in the secondary cell group. The wireless device receives a random access response comprising a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The wireless device, autonomously and when a predefined condition is met, selects a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336299 | RETRANSMISSION METHOD FOR DYNAMIC SUBFRAME SETTING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed is a method for allowing a terminal to transmit and receive signals to and/from a base station in a wireless communication system using a time division multiplexing method. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving a request signal for resetting into a second uplink/downlink setting while transmitting and receiving a signal according to a first uplink/downlink setting; terminating an uplink retransmission process associated with a specific uplink subframe when the use of the specific uplink subframe is changed into a downlink subframe according to the second uplink/downlink setting; and applying the second uplink/downlink setting at a specific time point to transmit and receive signals. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336300 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - A data transmission method and apparatus is provided for transmitting UL grant or ACK/NACK at flexible subframes in a Time Division Duplex (TDD) system. The data transmission method of a base station according to the present invention includes configuring subframes irrelevant to Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) process as flexible subframes; scheduling uplink transmission at the flexible subframes with uplink grant; receiving uplink data transmitted by a terminal at the flexible subframes as scheduled; and transmitting, when decoding the uplink data fails, HARQ acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) or uplink grant to request retransmission of the uplink data. The data transmission method of the present invention is capable of utilizing flexible subframes for uplink transmission without influencing the uplink HARQ process associated with the downlink subframes configured as flexible subframes. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336301 | Method and System for Delay Scheduling - The present disclosure discloses a method for delay scheduling, comprising: sending, by a base station, delay scheduling information to a terminal for performing delay scheduling on the terminal; receiving, by the terminal, the delay scheduling information, and stopping monitoring a Physical Downlink Control Channel PDCCH and entering a delay scheduling state according to the received delay scheduling information; and restarting monitoring the PDCCH and terminating the delay scheduling state according to the delay scheduling information. The present disclosure also discloses a delay scheduling system, which enhances an overload processing ability of network. Meanwhile, a mass of radio resources required to access to the network may be saved, and thereby the radio resources can be saved effectively, the load at the network side is relieved. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130336302 | DYNAMIC SUBFRAME SETTING METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present application discloses a method for a terminal to transmit/receive signals to/from a base station in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the method comprises a first step in which an uplink signal is transmitted from a first subframe and a downlink signal is received from a second subframe, and a second step in which a downlink signal is received from the first subframe and the second subframe if the first subframe has changed so as to be used for the reception of a downlink signal; and the method is characterized in that in the first step a protection space is located between the first subframe and the second subframe, in the second step the protection space is located at the front end of the first subframe, and the first subframe and the second subframes are consecutive. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130343350 | SYNCHRONIZATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention includes a communication system. The communication system includes a plurality of multi-role wireless communication devices communicatively coupled to transmit and receive data between at least one network access point and between each other in a plurality of communication roles in a time-division multiplexed manner. At least one of the at least one network access point and at least one of the plurality of multi-role wireless communication devices can be configured to transmit a timing beacon configured to synchronize a time-division multiplexing of at least one corresponding communication role associated with each of the plurality of multi-role wireless communication devices. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343351 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING OF DEDICATED CHANNEL - Disclosed are apparatus and method for time division multiplexing of a dedicated channel. In one aspect, the apparatus and method are configured to assign a common spreading code to two or more User Equipments (UEs); encode a downlink (DL) dedicated channel (DCH) with the common spreading code; time-division multiplex a Dedicated Physical Data Channel (DPDCH) data for each of the two or more UEs on the encoded DL DCH; and transmit the multiplexed data on the DL DCH to the UEs. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343352 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343353 | Internet Of Things long range many units communication networks - The concept of “Internet of Things” is about allowing things and object to connect together over the internet It is expected that a major portion of the “things” to be connected will be a mass number of sensors or controllers, for applications like “Smart City”. It is expected that each sensor will send a brief messages every few minutes. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343354 | POWER CONTROL PROTOCOL FOR HIGHLY VARIABLE DATA RATE REVERSE LINK OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A subscriber unit performs power control of a reverse link by sending heartbeat messages to a base station, permitting the base station to determine a reverse link quality report. Using a reverse link quality report message received from the base station, the subscriber unit calculates its reverse power level and maintains the reverse power level during the standby state. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343355 | SEMI-PERSISTENT SCHEDULING GRANTS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Time division multiplexing (TDM) partitioning is one of the inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) mechanisms considered for a heterogeneous network (HetNet) ICIC in a co-channel deployment. For example, in subframes that are pre-allocated to an evolved Node B (eNB), neighbor eNBs may not transmit, hence interference experienced by served user equipments (UEs) may be reduced. Semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) grants may have various available periodicities, which may not be compatible with TDM partitioning. Therefore, a UE may miss an SPS opportunity that was scheduled for a subframe that was not usable by the UE. Hence, using SPS grants with small periodicities in a heterogeneous network with TDM partitioning may require changes which may include adjusting the periodicities of the SPS grants, rescheduling of uplink SPS messages based on resource partitioning information (RPI), and/or determining RPI based on current SPS grants. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343356 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURATION OF SPECIAL SUBFRAME PATTERN CONFIGURATION - A method is provided for configuration of a special subframe pattern configuration. The method may include determining a configuration of a primary special subframe pattern configuration. The first special subframe configuration may have a corresponding secondary special subframe pattern configuration for multiplexing with the primary special subframe pattern configuration. The method may further include, responsive to a downlink assignment following the configuration of the primary special subframe pattern configuration, using the secondary special subframe pattern configuration instead of the primary special subframe pattern configuration. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343357 | Determining Timing of Feedback Information in Wireless Network Realised in Different Technologies - The invention relates to a method in a user equipment | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343358 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A plurality of cells include one primary cell and one or more secondary cells. The primary cell and the secondary cells are grouped into a first transmission timing group that includes a secondary cell having an uplink transmission timing that is the same as an uplink transmission timing of the primary cell, and a second transmission timing group that includes secondary cells having an identical uplink transmission timing that is different from the uplink transmission timing of the primary cell. Upon receipt of a transmission timing message which contains transmission timing information and transmission timing group information regarding a transmission timing group to which the transmission timing information is to be applied, the mobile station apparatus applies the transmission timing information to a cell of a transmission timing group that is based on the transmission timing group information. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343359 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SRS IN LTE TDD SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting an uplink Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) by a User Equipment (UE). The method includes receiving information related to an SRS period and an offset for an SRS transmission; generating the uplink SRS; and when the information indicates the SRS period is 2 ms, transmitting the SRS in two Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SCFDMA) symbols in a half frame according to the offset for the SRS transmission. When the information indicates the SRS period is 2 ms and a length of an Uplink Pilot Time Slot (UpPTS) in the half frame is two symbols, a first symbol in the UpPTS is indicated by offset 0 and a second symbol in the UpPTS is indicated by offset 1. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343360 | Optimization of Polling Protocols in Sensor Networks - A communication-management method involves a recurring polling scheme, wherein network nodes are polled by a base station according to optimized and/or user-preferred polling intervals assigned to each network node. The polling interval assigned to a given node may be optimized to minimize and/or achieve user-preferred thresholds for energy consumption and latency associated with each network node in the sensor network. Optimized and/or user-preferred polling intervals may be constrained in accordance with various network performance considerations, for example, a recommended update interval for each network node, characteristics of the network nodes themselves, the duration of the timselots at which the network nodes are polled, and/or other network performance considerations. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343361 | METHOD OF SIGNAL MULTIPLEXING AND TRANSMITTER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A transmitter time-division-multiplexes, in time domain, to assign at least a part of a second signal stream of a second channel being relatively high error-resilient compared to a first signal stream of a first channel between a boundary of the blocks and the first signal stream of the first channel of a time-division-multiplexing signal. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343362 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for data transmission, comprising: receiving, by a device, a paging message, and determining an opportunity for acquiring an uplink transmission resource, by basing on a subframe for receiving the paging message; acquiring, by the device, an uplink transmission resource at the opportunity for acquiring the uplink transmission resource; and reporting, by the device, user data in the uplink transmission resource, by using a time advance that is stored in the device itself and that corresponds to a current position. According to the embodiments of the present invention, no random access is required when the MTC device transmits uplink data, and no RRC connection or user plane bearer is to be established, which greatly simplifies the procedures of data transmission for the device, and the device can quickly and high-efficiently transmit uplink data, thereby improving the transmission efficiency, and reducing the signaling load of the base station. | 12-26-2013 |
| 20130343363 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL RESOURCE BLOCKS - A method for efficiently scheduling virtual resource blocks to physical resource blocks is disclosed. In a wireless mobile communication system, for distributed mapping of consecutively allocated virtual resource blocks to physical resource blocks, when nulls are inserted into a block interleaver used for the mapping, they are uniformly distributed to N | 12-26-2013 |
| 20140003399 | USING DURATION FIELD IN BEACON TO RESERVE CHANNEL TIME SUBSEQUENT TO BEACON | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140003400 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HARQ IN PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140003401 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140003402 | TECHNIQUES ENABLING DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH RESERVATION IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140003403 | FREQUENCY CORRECTION IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140010208 | CAPACITY INCREASING DEVICES AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The present patent application improves DARP by allowing multiple users on one time slot (MUROS). It comprises means and instructions for sharing signals on a single channel, comprising setting up a new connection, allocating a new time slot if there is an unused time slot on a channel frequency, selecting an used time slot for the new connection to share with an existing connection if there is not an unused time slot on the channel frequency, and selecting a different training sequence code for the new connection if the used time slot on the channel frequency has been selected for the new connection to share with an existing connection. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140010209 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR FACILITATING QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL - Methods and apparatuses are provided for facilitating quality of service control. A method may include receiving, at a terminal apparatus, a set of one or more quality of service parameters provisioned by a serving network apparatus. The method may further include determining a configuration setting for controlling quality of service for a device-to-device connection between the terminal apparatus and another device based at least in part on at least one received quality of service parameter. The method may additionally include causing implementation of the determined configuration setting. Corresponding apparatuses are also provided. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140010216 | FEEDBACK SCHEME FOR MU-MIMO - Embodiments of a system and method for managing feedback in a MU-MIMO system. An access point can announce one or more of mobile stations that are to receive downlink information in a first frame. The access point can also send a sounding package to the one or more mobile stations and receive feedback from the one or more mobile stations according to the feedback schedule. The feedback may be based on the reception of the sounding package. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140010217 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING TERMINALS IN SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE ANTENNA ELEMENTS COMBINING INTO COMMON CELL - A method and an apparatus for scheduling terminals in a system with multiple antenna elements combining into a common cell are provided. The method includes: receiving channel quality information fed back by the multiple terminals in the common cell, determining, according to the channel quality information fed back by the multiple terminals, all terminals capable of being bound to each antenna element; determining a first antenna element among the antenna elements in the common cell on a first time domain resource within a scheduling granularity, determining a terminal to be served on the first time domain resource, and beginning to serve the terminal; and scheduling all terminals capable of being bound to the first antenna element on each remaining time domain resource within the scheduling granularity, determining a terminal to be served on each remaining time domain resource, and beginning to serve the terminal. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140016619 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FRAMES IN TALK-AROUND DIRECT COMMUNICATION - A permutated channel structure based on a block structure in talk-around direct communication is provided. A dedicated subchannel interferes with only one adjacent dedicated subchannel, even with a large synchronization error, by permutating the dedicated subchannels by cyclic shifts, whereby diversity gain can be maintained and interference between adjacent channels can be minimized. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016620 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION OF UPLINK SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH LARGE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - Methods for preventing timing collisions in a wireless communication network include transmitting a data uplink symbol of normal duration via a first base pair using a first timing advance (TA) corresponding to the first base pair. Scheduling to transmit a second uplink symbol via a second base pair (BP) corresponding to the transmit RF chain. Predicting a timing collision will occur based on a different between the first TA and a second TA corresponding to the second BP. Preventing the timing collision by: reducing the duration of the second symbol by an adjustment amount calculated based on the first TA and the second TA; inserting a guard interval to delay transmission of the second symbol by the calculated adjustment amount; and increasing the duration of a cyclic prefix of the second symbol but refraining from transmitting a portion of the enlarged CP. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016621 | Methods and Arrangements for Estimating Timing Offset Differences in a Cellular Network - A method in a first network node ( | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016622 | Method and Device for Adjusting Demodulation Pilot Frequency in Wireless Communication System - Disclosed is a method for configuring a pilot frequency in a wireless communication system, comprising: on the basis of at least one item among a current wireless channel characteristic parameter, device capability information of a correspondent node, and system requirement information, configuring in real-time a pilot frequency for different transmissions during a transmission process; and transmitting the configuration result to the correspondent node. Also disclosed is a corresponding device for configuring the pilot frequency. The present invention allows for configuration in real-time of the pilot frequency. This facilitates improved transmission reliability and guaranteed communication quality, and reduces pilot frequency overhead, and at the same time, is applicable in additional number of channel environments and application scenarios. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016623 | Method, Apparatus And Computer Program Product For Triggering The Determination Of A Timing Advance For One Component Carrier Based Upon Another Component Carrier - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to facilitate the determination of the timing advances of each of a plurality of component carriers by triggering the determination of the timing advances in response to certain pre-defined events that are indicative of a need for the timing advance to be determined. A method may include determining that a pre-defined event has occurred and triggering a determination of a timing advance for a second component carrier relative to a timing advance of a first component carrier based upon occurrence of the predefined event. In this regard, both the component carriers are concurrently allocated to a mobile terminal. The method may also utilize the timing advance to synchronize communications on the second component carrier between the mobile terminal and a network. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product may also be provided. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016624 | SLOTTED ACCESS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND CONTROL THEREOF - An example method provides a method of determining access times and channels for a wireless communication device. One embodiment includes selecting, at a wireless communication device, one of a plurality of time intervals in a periodically repeating access cycle for transmission of an access signal based on an identification number identifying the wireless communication device, negotiating a preamble assignment for the selected one of the plurality of time intervals, and transmitting the access signal over an access channel in the selected one of the plurality of time intervals using a preamble corresponding to the preamble assignment. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016625 | SYNCHRONIZED CHANNEL ACCESS IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and method for arbitrating channel access in a wireless device including co-located network transceivers are disclosed herein. A wireless device includes a first wireless transceiver and a second wireless transceiver. The first transceiver is configured for operation with a first wireless network. The second transceiver is configured for operation with a second wireless network. The wireless device further includes logic that determines which of the first and second transceivers is enabled to transmit at a given time. The logic causes the first transceiver to transmit a notification signal indicating a time period during which the second transceiver of the wireless device will perform a first wireless transaction, and during which, based on receiving the notification signal, a different wireless device performs a second wireless transaction via the second wireless network without transmitting a notification signal. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140016626 | MIMO SLOTTED ALOHA (MSA) SYSTEM - A method including receiving at a synchronizing node a first reference frame from a first reference node at a first time and storing a first time value representing the first time, and calculating a timing estimator by subtracting a minimum time value, representing the distance from the synchronizing node to the first reference node, from the first time value. The method includes receiving at the synchronizing node a second reference frame at a second time and transmitting from the synchronizing node to the first reference node a short tuning contention time frame. The method includes receiving at the synchronizing node from the first reference node an arrival time value representing the time at which the first reference node received the short timing contention frame and calculating a time drift from the first arrival time value and the second time value and adjusting the timing estimator based on the time drift. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140023047 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PACKET GENERATION - According to an aspect of this disclosure, a communication device is provided comprising a first interface configured to receive a first packet supplied by a packet encoder; a determiner configured to determine a time difference between the time at which the first packet is ready to be sent by the communication device and a time at which communication resources for sending the first packet are available; a generator configured to generate information from which it is derivable when a second packet should be provided by the packet encoder based on the time difference; and a second interface configured to transmit the information to the packet encoder. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023048 | Method and System for Phase Compensation in Multi-Path Communication Device - A method and apparatus for a radio base station ( | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023049 | Communication Network For An Athletic Activity Monitoring System - The present invention provides a communication network for facilitating monitoring of an athletic activity. In one exemplary embodiment, such a communication network includes a base station and a first monitor configured to be coupled to an individual, wherein the base station is configured to transmit a first beacon message, wherein, in response to receipt of the first beacon message, the first monitor is configured to transmit an endpoint message including a characteristic of the individual, and wherein the base station is configured to receive the endpoint message, and, if the base station does not receive the endpoint message by a determined time, the base station is configured to transmit a second beacon signal, the second beacon signal including instructions to a second monitor to transmit the endpoint message (i.e., the same endpoint message transmitted by the first monitor). | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023050 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for allocating resources in a cellular communication system including a plurality of cells divides time resources of one period into a plurality of time division intervals, allocates one time division interval of the plurality of time division intervals for user terminals in a cell edge region, and controls at least one of a magnitude of one period and a magnitude of the plurality of time division intervals in accordance with distributions and load distributions of user terminals of the plurality of cells. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023051 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING IN AN EQUIPMENT OF A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of accessing in an equipment of a communication network is proposed in the invention. The method comprises the steps of: receiving a message 2 from a base station, the message 2 being used for an assignment of resource to transmit a message 3, the assigned resource corresponding to N HARQ RTTs, where 1≦N≦8; and transmitting the message 3 only in part of the N HARQ RTTs. With the scheme of the invention, a MTC device selectively transmits the Msg3 in one/some HARQ RTT and maintains silence in another one/some HARQ RTT, thus the possibility of the occurrence of access collision with other UEs may be backed off, such that other UEs, particularly human-to-human UEs, may transmit the Msg3 normally. And the possibility of the occurrence of collision is reduced from the viewpoint of the user equipments in a network, reducing entirely the possibility of an access delay and access failure. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023052 | METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS - The present invention proposes a method, in an eNB in wireless communication network based on carrier aggregation (CA) transmission, for controlling random access performed by UE, wherein the method comprises: determining whether the UE is out of UL sync on all cells, wherein the cells comprises Pcell and Scell: sending Physical Downlink Control Channel (PD-CCH) order signaling if the UE is out of UL sync on all the cells, wherein the PDCCH order signaling is used to indicating the UE to perform random access. A method, in a mobile station in wireless communication network based on carrier aggregation (CA) transmission, for random access, wherein the mobile station is configured a Pcell and at least one Scell, and the method comprises: determining whether random access is needed on at least one cell of the cells, wherein the cells comprises the Pcell and the at least one Scell; performing random access on at least one cell of all the cells, if it is determined that random access is needed on at least one cell of the cells. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023053 | Channel Access Method And Apparatus Using The Same In Wireless Local Area Network System - A method of apparatus for channel access in a wireless local area network is provided. A station receives a channel access control message including group indication information indicating a group of stations allowed to access a channel from an access point. The station attempts contention for accessing the channel if the station belongs to the group indicated by the group indication information. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023054 | METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION FOR INITIALIZING SECONDARY CELL IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments provide a method for initializing a secondary cell in a cellular communication system. The method may comprise: receiving from a base station a Radio Resource Control RRC configuration request for the secondary cell to perform a RRC configuration; and in response to receiving the RRC configuration request, performing uplink synchronization with the base station in the secondary cell. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023055 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CARRIER ACTIVATION IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and a device for cell activation in a carrier aggregation system, and the method for activating a cell of a terminal according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step for receiving an activation message of a first cell; a step for activating the first cell when the message of the first cell is received; an information obtaining step for obtaining uplink activation information of the first cell; and a transmission determination step for determining whether to execute an uplink transmission according to the uplink activation information. According to an embodiment of the present invention, efficient carrier management plan can be provided. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023056 | UL/DL SCHEDULING FOR FULL BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION - A method may include receiving, by a user equipment incapable of transmitting and receiving simultaneously, a schedule to transmit data on an uplink, detecting, by the user equipment, whether there is data to be transmitted on the uplink, and receiving, by the user equipment, during a time corresponding to the schedule, data associated with a downlink, when it is determined that there is no data to be transmitted. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023057 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting control signals in a wireless communication system includes multiplexing a first control signal with a second control signal in a slot, the slot comprising a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in time domain, the plurality of OFDM symbols being divided into a plurality of data OFDM symbols and a plurality of reference signal (RS) OFDM symbols, wherein the first control signal is mapped to the plurality of data OFDM symbols after the first control signal is spread by a base sequence in the frequency domain, the RS is mapped to the plurality of RS OFDM symbols, the second control signal is mapped to at least one of the plurality of RS OFDM symbols, and transmitting the first control signal and the second control signal in the slot. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140023058 | Device for Operating Using Multiple Protocols in Wireless Networks - A network includes an access point using a first protocol and a station using both the first protocol and a second protocol. The station uses the first protocol before a first threshold and a second protocol after the first threshold. A first duration between the second threshold and the first threshold is at least of sufficient length for the station to receive one data packet from the access point and send an acknowledgment. The station transmits to the access point a current clear-to-send packet at a current time during a current exchange based on success or failure of a previous exchange during which a previous clear-to-send packet was transmitted to the access point at a previous time. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140029582 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A POWER CONTROL MECHANISM - A user equipment (UE) may reduce the difference in transmit power between the uplink channel and enhanced high speed channel so that the base station may decode the uplink channel. The UE may determine the transmit power level for the uplink channel, such as dedicated physical channel, and the transmit power level for the enhanced high speed channel, such as shared information channel, and reduce the power difference when the power difference is greater than a threshold. The power difference may be reduced by increasing or decreasing the power of the enhanced high speed channel and/or increasing or decreasing the power of the uplink channel. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029583 | Systems and Methods for Time Optimization for Silencing Wireless Devices in Coexistence Networks - Embodiments provide systems and methods to optimize the time when to transmit a silencing frame, and hence, improve the overall network throughput and avoid access point transmission rate fall-back mechanism having an avalanche effect during coexistence of dissimilar wireless network technologies. A device comprises at least two dissimilar network technology subsystems, at least one subsystem of which is lower priority than at least another of the dissimilar subsystems. In some embodiments, a device is able to transmit a silencing frame during a transmission window within a lower priority technology network interval. In other embodiments, a device calculates a transmission window, the transmission window to occur within a lower priority technology network interval, and transmits a silencing frame during the transmission window. In further embodiments, a device is able to calculate a transmission window to occur during a lower priority technology network interval, and transmit a silencing frame during the calculated transmission window. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029584 | System and Method for Multiple Point Communications - A method for multiple point communications includes configuring a set of first communications system resources to form a plurality of first communications system resource groups, each first communications system resource group including a plurality of channels, and configuring a set of second communications system resources for each one of the plurality of first communications system resource groups, the set of second communications system resources used to convey a feedback transmission. The method also includes signaling information about the plurality of first communications system resource groups to a first user equipment, and signaling information about the sets of second communications system resources associated with the plurality of first communications system resource groups to the first user equipment. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029585 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR SPECTRUM SENSING IN AN OPPORTUNISTIC BAND - A system, apparatuses and methods are provided for communicating in an opportunistic band. Channels that are reserved for primary users are used by sensing devices when primary users are not present. A geo-location database is configured to store occupancy information of a channel and information associated with the primary user of the channel. The database includes information such as the type of primary user, and the expected occupancy time of a channel by a primary user. Sensing devices are categorized into different classes based on their sensing capability. A device capabilities database stores device classification information associated with the sensing devices attached to a dynamic spectrum management system. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029586 | PROPAGATION DELAY DIFFERENCE REPORTING FOR MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIERS - The invention relates to methods for reporting on downlink timings by a mobile terminal in a mobile communication system. In order to allow for an aggregation access point to obtain information on propagation delay differences of downlink transmissions on aggregated serving cells, the invention suggests the mobile terminal to report timing information based on reception time difference information for a the target/reference cell. The mobile terminal performs measurements relating to transmission and/or reception time differences on the target/reference cell, and reports same to the eNodeB. The eNodeB compares the measurement result to a predefined maximum propagation delay time difference. Alternatively, the mobile terminal performs the measurements, compares same to the predefined maximum propagation delay time difference and then report the comparison result to the eNodeB. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029587 | RECEIVER, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND IN-STORE EQUIPMENT MONITORING SYSTEM - To avoid occurrence of communication conflict at the transmission time of re-transmission data without losing real-time performance of data transmission with respect to data missing during communication, thereby enabling excellent data transmission a reception controller allocates time slots for transmission of second data (re-transmission) transmitted from transmitters on the basis of a re-transmission request message according to a reception condition of first data (latest data) and the reception controller transmits an acknowledgement message (ACK) for the first data with a slot time being embedded in an acknowledgement message for every reception-success transmitter. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029588 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication device in a wireless network sets management information notification cycles at specified time intervals and transmits management information containing receive timing information showing its own position to start receiving information, receive window information, and receive cycle information. Another wireless communication device receiving that management information links it to a communication device number for the corresponding wireless communication device and stores the receive timing, the receive window information, and the receive cycle information. When sending information, the receive start position of the corresponding communication device is found from the receive timing information, the receive window information, and the receive cycle information of the other communication and information is then transmitted at that timing. An asynchronous ad-hoc communication wireless network can therefore be configured without a particular control station. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029589 | TRANSMISSION OF ACK/NACK BITS AND THEIR EMBEDDING IN THE REFERENCE SIGNAL - Transmitting a ACK/NACK response in a wireless cellular network by mapping the data value into a cyclic shifted version of a reference signal. A subframe is formed with a plurality of symbols with certain symbols designated as reference signal (RS) symbols. The receiver and transmitter both know when an ACK/NACK response is expected. If an ACK/NACK response is not expected, then an RS is inserted in the duration of symbols designated as RS symbols. If an ACK/NACK response is expected, then the ACK/NACK response is embedded in one or more of the symbols designated as RS symbols. The subframe is transmitted to a receiver, and the receiver can determine the ACK/NACK value in the RS symbol, if present, and also use the RS symbol for coherent demodulation of a CQI (channel quality indicator) or data. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029590 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING SYNCHRONIZATION CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A Synchronization Channel (SCH) transmission method includes generating a Primary SCH (P-SCH) sequence according to supplementary information. The supplementary information includes at least one of Base Station (BS) type information, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) size information, BandWidth (BW) information, group information, sector information, and carrier type information. The method also includes modulating the P-SCH sequence and mapping the modulated P-SCH sequence to subcarriers within a predefined subcarrier set. The subcarriers are included in the subcarrier set being spaced one subcarrier interval apart. The method further includes generating a P-SCH symbol by Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM)-modulating the P-SCH sequence mapped to the subcarriers, and transmitting the P-SCH symbol. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029591 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USER EQUIPMENT SPECIFIC INFORMATION IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cellular communication system comprises a base station ( | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029592 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING USER EQUIPMENT SPECIFIC INFORMATION IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cellular communication system comprises a base station ( | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029593 | Method and System for Optimal Beamforming in Wireless Networks - Aspects of a method and system for optimal beamforming in a wireless network are presented. Aspects of the system may include one or more processors for use in a requesting communication device wherein the one or more processors may be operable to request a transmission time slot allocation. A determination may be made by a coordinating communication device as whether to assign a sector transmission time slot and/or beamforming transmission time slot to the requesting communication device based on the transmission time slot allocation request. The one or more processors may be operable to receive the assigned sector transmission time slot and/or beamforming transmission time slot. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029594 | METHOD FOR USER EQUIPMENT SETTING CONNECTION WITH NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - In the present invention, a method for a user equipment setting a connection with a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed, and more particularly, the method comprises the following steps: receiving a plurality of timer values from the network through a system information; and transmitting a connection request message including a reason for a specific connection to the network, wherein each of the plurality of timer values are used when transmitting the connection request message, depending on a respective corresponding connection reason, and the reason for the specific connection corresponds to a specific timer value from the plurality of timer values. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140029595 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, RANDOM ACCESS PROCESSING METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A base station device uses a downlink control channel and instructs a mobile station device to perform a random access procedure. The mobile station device switches, according to whether or not random access parameters are included in parameters of a secondary cell that has been allocated to the mobile station device, between a first random access procedure in which information in a carrier indicator field included in the downlink control channel is not used for selection of a cell in which a random access procedure is performed, and a second random access procedure in which information in the carrier indicator field included in the downlink control channel is used for selection of a cell in which a random access procedure is performed. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140036876 | HIGH EFFICIENCY DISTRIBUTED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) CHANNEL ACCESS - Techniques for facilitating device-to-device (D2D) communications using a high efficiency distributed channel access scheme are generally described herein. In some examples, a communication zone allocated for wireless D2D communications is divided into resource contention and scheduled transmission portions. The resource contention segment may be used to transmit a request message from a transmitting device to a receiving device (a request-to-send message), and transmit a response to the request message from the receiving device to the transmitting device (a clear-to-send message). The response can indicate a time for the data transmission to occur during the scheduled transmission segment. During the scheduled transmission segment, the scheduled data transmission and other D2D data transmissions among the various devices will be performed. In further examples, contention access techniques may be used during the resource contention segment to manage access to the resource channel. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036877 | Scheduling Energy Harvesting Nodes in a Wireless Sensor Networks - A system and method for optimizing power consumption of energy harvesting nodes in a wireless sensor network. In one embodiment, a system includes a network coordinator. The network coordinator includes a wireless transceiver and a controller. The wireless transceiver is configured to provide access to the wireless sensor network. The controller is configured to determine whether a wireless device that is wirelessly communicating with the network coordinator is powered via energy harvesting. The controller is also configured to schedule, based on a determination that the wireless device is powered via energy harvesting, the wireless device to communicate via the wireless sensor network using a priority timeslot of a superframe of the wireless sensor network. The priority timeslot is a timeslot occurring in an initial portion of the superframe. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036878 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT AND METHOD USING SHORT IDENTIFIER FOR RESOURCE SCHEDULING - A mobile communications network for communicating data to/from mobile terminals, including a wireless access interface that provides a shared channel for communicating data to or from the mobile terminals, the shared channel divided in time into different units of communications resource. The mobile communications network is configured to form super-frames including plural units of communications resource of the shared channel, to allocate each of the mobile terminals in one or more of groups, and to transmit control information providing for each of the mobile terminals in each of the groups of mobile terminals a short identification number in association with an identification number allocated to the mobile terminal by the mobile communications network, the short identification number for use in allocating the units of communications resource to each of the mobile terminals in one of the groups for one of the super-frames. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036879 | Method and Apparatus for Configuring Transmission of a Power Headroom Report in Carrier Aggregation Systems - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided that may support power headroom reporting in conjunction with carrier aggregation, such as the secondary cell(s) of a network that supports carrier aggregation. A method, apparatus and computer program product may be configured to receive a command from a primary cell indicating that a connection with a secondary cell is to be activated, receive scheduling information for the secondary cell and cause a power headroom report including actual power headroom parameters, such as at least one of actual power headroom or P | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036880 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE A-PERIODIC SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments, there is at least a method and an apparatus, the apparatus including computer program code executed by at least one processor to cause the apparatus to perform the method including operating an apparatus to detect an occurrence of at least one trigger condition, where the occurrence of the at least one trigger condition is indicative at least of user equipment having data buffered for an uplink transmission, and in response to the detection of the occurrence of the at least one trigger condition, transmitting an a-periodic sounding reference symbol to a network access node. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036881 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The embodiments of the present invention relate to a method for transmitting control information by a base station in a wireless communication system, wherein the method comprises a step of transmitting a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The downlink control information of the PDCCH may include an indicator indicating whether or not a reference signal is transmitted in a time domain corresponding to the subframe in which the PDCCH is transmitted. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036882 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF HANDLING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE IN VARIOUS WIRELESS NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES - A method and system for handling in-device co-existence in wireless network technologies is disclosed. The method provides Time Division Multiplexing and power domain based solutions for in device co-existence. In TDM based approach, the method sends interference indication and assistant information to the Base station. In an embodiment, a preferred solution may also be sent to the Base station. Further, the Base station takes a decision on the preferred solution to be employed. In power domain approach, Base station reduces the transmission power of the LTE uplink transmission which actually overlaps with ISM/GNSS reception opportunity. Further, a hybrid based solution for implementation of TDM and power domain solution based on the scenario is also disclosed. Even though the proposed mechanism is discussed from 3GPP LTE/LTE-Advanced context, it is in general applicable to similar cellular technologies. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036883 | METHOD FOR POSITIONING CHANNEL BOUNDARY, USER TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION - The present disclosure is applicable to the field of communications, and provides a method for positioning a channel boundary and a base station, where the method includes: receiving cell timing difference information of a channel of a reference cell, and obtaining a boundary of a high speed-dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH) through calculation according to the cell timing difference information; and obtaining a CQI sending time point of the HS-DPCCH and a reception time point of a high speed-shared control channel (HS-SCCH) through calculation according to the boundary of the HS-DPCCH. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036884 | MAC MULTIPLEXING AND TFC SELECTION PROCEDURE FOR ENHANCED UPLINK - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for multiplexing data for an enhanced uplink channel is disclosed. The WTRU multiplexes data from medium access control for dedicated channel (MAC-d) flows into a medium access control for EU channel (MAC-e) protocol data unit (PDU), wherein a data multiplexing limit is at least based on an EU transport format combination (E-TFC) size and a size based on the at least one serving grant and the at least one non-scheduled grant. The WTRU select an E-TFC for transmission of the MAC-e PDU, wherein the selected E-TFC is a smallest E-TFC that supports the multiplexed data. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036885 | PROHIBITING UNNECESSARY SCHEDULING REQUESTS FOR UPLINK GRANTS - Uplink transmission scheduling requests (SRs) may be prohibited for a lower priority data flow, logical channel group (e.g., VoIP configured with semi-persistent resource allocation), or other grouping but may still be triggered for higher priority traffic (e.g., data connected to a signaling radio bearer (SRB)). More efficient scheduling is also achieved by allowing an uplink transmission scheduler to distinguish between different priority flows or groups (e.g., LCGs) without a buffer status report (BSR), As a result, when a semi-persistent resource is scheled for the lower priority data, there is less delay for high priority data while eliminating uplink and downlink control signaling, i.e., fewer scheduling requests (SRs) and uplink grants, for the lower priority data. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036886 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION AND SIGNALINGS FOR GROUP SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Method and apparatus for resource allocation formatting, signaling, and procedures in wireless communications, the method reducing signal overhead. Wireless transmit/receive units are divided into one or more semi-static groups. Resource allocation takes place to a group and the resource sets are signaled to an individual unit needing the resources. The method is applied to resource allocation for services, including both real time and non real time services. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036887 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036888 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENT MU-MIMO TRANSMISSION VIA BLIND INTERFERENCE ALIGNMENT SCHEMES WITH REDUCED CHANNEL COHERENCE-TIME REQUIREMENTS - A wireless communication system, method and base station for using a multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO)-based blind interference alignment (BIA) scheme are described. In one embodiment, the wireless communication system comprises a plurality of terminals, wherein each terminal in the plurality has a single radio frequency (RF) chain that is operable in M antenna modes, where M is an integer, and further wherein each terminal shifts between the M antenna modes in a predetermined manner. The wireless communication system also includes one or more base stations to perform downlink transmissions to the plurality of terminals using a transmitter array of M transmit antennas and operable to communicate with one or more of the terminals using a multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO)-based blind interference alignment (BIA) scheme that uses at least one code BIA code serving K terminals from the transmitter array over L(M+K−1) slots for some L>0, wherein at least one of the one or more base stations transmits L symbols for user k, and where the L symbols for user k are transmitted over M distinct slots, within a set of L(M+D−1) consecutive slots, and where D is an integer less than K. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036889 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING RECEPTION ACKNOWLEDGEMENT INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention and embodiments thereof relate to a method for transmitting a signal of a base station in a wireless communication system using a carrier merge. The method includes transmitting to a terminal a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) on a downlink secondary cell and a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) indicating the PDSCH on a downlink primary cell; and receiving a reception acknowledgement response on the PDSCH, which is transmitted from the terminal to an uplink primary cell. The PDSCH is transmitted when the downlink secondary cell becomes available, and the transmission timing of the reception acknowledgement response is determined by one of the PDSCH transmission timing or the PDCCH transmission timing. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140036890 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a mobile communication method, in which in direct communication between a mobile station UE# | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140044104 | METHOD AND SYSTEM HAVING REFERENCE SIGNAL DESIGN FOR NEW CARRIER TYPES - A method and network element for providing reference signals to a user equipment, the method determining a reference signal pattern at the network element; and sending the reference signals to the user equipment using a reference signal mapping based on the reference signal pattern. Further a method and user equipment for receiving reference signals from a network element, the method determining a reference signal mapping at the user equipment; and detecting the reference signals at the user equipment using the reference signal mapping. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140044105 | TD LTE Secondary Component Carrier in Unlicensed Bands - A method is provided for communication in a wireless telecommunication system. The method comprises adaptively designating, by a network element following a frame-based communication protocol, for use as a secondary component carrier in a carrier aggregation scheme, at least a portion of radio resources on an unlicensed band. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140044106 | Method and Apparatus for Multi-Network Communication - The present disclosure describes techniques and apparatuses for multi-network communication. In some aspects a first packet is transmitted via a wireless interface effective to prevent a device associated with a first wireless network from transmitting data packets. The wireless interface is then configured for communication via a second wireless network for a first duration of time and a second packet is transmitted via the wireless interface. Transmission of the second packet is effective to cause a peer device associated with the second wireless network to transmit data packets during the first duration of time. The wireless interface is then configured for communication via the first wireless network for a second duration of time effective to enable reception of the data packets that the device was previously prevented from transmitting. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140044107 | Successive Interference Cancellation Stacked Branch VAMOS Receivers - A receiver receives a desired radio sub-channel transmitted with an unwanted radio sub-channel by producing signal branches from a received radio signal by treating orthogonal components of the received signal separately and also by using one or both of oversampling and multiple receive antennas. Channel estimates for both the desired and unwanted radio sub-channels are produced for signal branches. The unwanted radio sub-channel bits are estimated from a non-stacked form of the received radio signal. The channel estimates and the estimate of the unwanted radio sub-channel bits are used to reconstruct unwanted radio sub-channel components separately for signal branches. Desired radio sub-channel signal branches are produced by subtracting a corresponding one of the reconstructed unwanted radio sub-channel components from signal branches. A non-stacked desired signal is produced by combining the desired radio sub-channel signal branches. The non-stacked desired signal is processed to receive the desired radio sub-channel. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140044108 | TIME-ADVANCED RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL TRANSMISSION - Systems and methods can be implemented on a wireless device and base stations to facilitate uplink synchronization. The wireless device can transmit a random access preamble to at least one base station serving the wireless device to initiate a random access procedure. The wireless device can identify a signal propagation time associated with the position of the wireless device and the position of the at least one base station serving the wireless device. The wireless device can also identify a positive time advance based on the identified signal propagation time for transmitting the random access preamble. Further, the wireless device can transmit the random access preamble to the at least one base station based on the identified time advance for random access. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140044109 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a terminal apparatus which performs communication with a base station apparatus. The terminal apparatus includes: a receiving unit which receives a plurality of channel state information reference signals; a channel state information generating unit which generates a plurality of channel state information by referring to each of the plurality of channel state information reference signals; and a report transmitting unit which reports each of the plurality of channel state information to the base station apparatus. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140044110 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR, BASED ON COMMUNICATION OF A FIRST PHYSICAL LAYER DEVICE, PERMITTING TRANSMISSION OF DATA TO A SECOND PHYSICAL LAYER DEVICE COLLOCATED WITH THE FIRST PHYSICAL LAYER DEVICE - A first network device includes a first PHY device that transfers first data on a first channel between the first network device and a second network device via a base station. The second PHY device receives a first request transmitted on a second channel and in response to receiving the first request, determines whether the first PHY device is receiving the first data. The first request is received from the second network device via an access point and requests permission to send second data. The second PHY device, if the first PHY device is not receiving the first data, determines whether the first PHY device is to receive or transmit the first data in respective periods. The second PHY device transmits a response signal to the second network device, on the second channel, if the first PHY device is not to receive or transmit the first data the respective periods. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140050201 | JOINT PROCESSING DOWN LINK COORDINATED MULTI-POINT REFERENCE SIGNAL SUPPORT - This invention concerns multiplexing in Long Term Evolution (LTE) and Long Term Evolution-Advanced (LTE-A) in Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) wireless telephony. Joint processing down link coordinated multi-point reference signaling includes combining resource signal types at a user equipment, determining conflicts between resource signals of plural user equipment, puncturing resource signals of other cell upon determining conflicts between resource signals of plural user equipment and transmitting non-punctured combined resource signals from a user equipment. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140050202 | LOCALIZED CoMP PRECODING - A system is provided for precoding in a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) joint transmission (JT) system. During operation, the system identifies, at a first base station (BS) of a first cell, a set of regular user equipments (UEs), which are located within the first cell and receive signals from the first BS; and one or more coordinated multipoint (CoMP) UEs, which are located within a second cell and receive signals. The CoMP UEs receive signals from both the first BS and a second BS of the second cell. The system obtains a first channel state information (CSI) associated with the regular UEs, receives a second CSI associated with the CoMP UEs from the second BS, and constructs a local precoder for the first cell in accordance with the first CSI and the second CSI. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140050203 | Apparatus and Method for Radio Systems Co-Existence on Secondary Carriers - A mechanism for radio systems co-existence on secondary carriers may be of particular value to radio systems that that operating on the same bands as Wi-Fi™ (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, or the like) or the bands of similar radio systems. A method providing such a mechanism may include operating Provide Wireless a first network node of a first radio network on a primary channel. The method may also include identifying a secondary channel for expanded operation of the first network node. The method may further include providing a second network node with an opportunity to capture the secondary channel. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140050204 | METHODS FOR COORDINATING TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OPERATIONS OF RADIO MODULES IN A COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communication apparatus is provided. A first radio module communicates with a first communications device in compliance with a first protocol to provide a first wireless communications service. A second radio module communicates with a second communications device in compliance with a second protocol to provide a second wireless communications service. The first radio module further estimates time remaining for the second radio module before a next operation of the first radio module and transmits information regarding the estimated remaining time to the second radio module. The second radio module further schedules operations of the second radio module according to the information regarding the estimated remaining time received from the first radio module. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140050205 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AND WIRELESS DEVICE USING SAME - Provided are a method for controlling uplink transmission power and a wireless device. The wireless device decides a first transmission power of a first uplink channel, which is transmitted through a first wireless resource from a first serving cell, and decides a second transmission power of a second uplink channel, which is transmitted through a second wireless resource from a second serving cell. The first serving cell belongs to a first timing advance (TA) group, and the second serving cell belongs to a second TA group that differs from the first TA group. All or a portion of the first wireless resource and the second wireless resource overlap, wherein the sum of the first and second transmission powers in the overlapping portion is decided so as not to exceed a maximum transmission power. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140050206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method and an apparatus for transmitting a synchronization signal in a carrier aggregation system. The method comprises: transmitting via a first serving cell a synchronization signal setting information with regard to a second serving cell; and transmitting the synchronization signal via the second serving cell, wherein the synchronization signal is variably set by means of the synchronization signal setting information. | 02-20-2014 |
| 20140056286 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS SLAVE AND MASTER UNITS USED THEREIN - In a wireless communication system, slave units such as operation switches and the like are configured such that the higher the priority level of an information signal to be transmitted from each slave unit is, the shorter a period t | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140056287 | Method, Device, and System for Synchronizing Physical Layer State - The present invention discloses a method, a device, and a system for synchronizing a physical layer state, and belongs to the field of communications technologies. The present invention realizes synchronization of the physical layer state of the first feature at the network side and the terminal after the terminal updates the RRC layer configuration corresponding to the first feature. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140056288 | BLUETOOTH.RTM. AND WIRELESS LAN COEXISTENCE - A method and system for Bluetooth® and Wireless LAN coexistence may include controlling wireless local area network (WLAN) communication and Bluetooth® communication in a coexistence system that handles at least a WLAN communication protocol and a Bluetooth® communication protocol based on time division multiplexing (TDM) and adaptive frequency hopping (AFH). Switching may occur between the WLAN communication and the Bluetooth® communication based on the TDM and the AFH. In one embodiment of the invention, the switching may occur adaptively. Notwithstanding, in instances where it may be determined that AFH is disabled, switching to TDM may occur. WLAN communication and/or Bluetooth® communication may be disabled or enabled based on a state of at the WLAN communication and/or the Bluetooth® communication. Use of the AFH may be enabled or disabled based on a link status of the WLAN communication and/or the Bluetooth® communication. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140056289 | Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for triggering a Random Access Channel (RACH) procedure for requesting uplink resources on a random access channel to a radio base station scheduler based on a change in terminal buffer status as compared to a Buffer Status Report BSR stored in said terminal. In a first method step, the status of the present terminal buffer content, i.e. terminal buffer data, is compared with the status of said stored buffer status report BSR. A second method step involves initiating a RACH procedure for indicating a service request to said base station scheduler upon detecting a change of buffer status at said comparison. The service request includes an indicator of the status change as a trigger for said scheduler to assign uplink resources to said terminal. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140064255 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING DATA DURING AN ALLOCATED TIME PERIOD - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of communicating during an allocated time period. For example, an apparatus may include a wireless communication unit to perform the functionality of a first station to communicate data with a second station during an allocated time period, wherein, when both the first and second stations do not have data ready for transmission, the wireless communication unit is to communicate frames between the first station and the second station to occupy the allocated time period until at least one of the first and second stations has data ready for transmission or until an end of the allocated time period. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140064256 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR EMPLOYING A MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME FOR A DATA BLOCK - Access terminals are adapted to employing a modulation and coding scheme for a data block in various circumstances. For instance, an access terminal may determine that there is a conflict with at least some transmission timeslots of a radio block on which a data block is to be transmitted. In response to the determined conflict, the access terminal can employ a modulation and coding scheme for the data block. In some instances, the modulation and coding scheme may be changed from a previously selected scheme in response to the conflict. In other instances, the modulation and coding scheme may be initially selected in response to the conflict. With the modulation and coding scheme employed, some of the RF bursts of the data block can be transmitted during transmission timeslots of the radio block that are not conflicted. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140064257 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING A FIRST AND A SECOND ASSOCIATION WHICH ARE DECOUPLED - A method for establishing a first and second association between a main node and respectively a first and second wireless node is disclosed. The first association associates a first virtual access point VAP | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140071953 | FORWARD LINK FRAME GENERATION IN A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE (M2M) WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WAN) - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). A physical layer frame is generated. The frame being used for wireless M2M communications on a forward link in the M2M wireless WAN. The frame including no more than three channels. The physical layer frame including a first channel including paging channel, a second channel including a traffic channel, and a third channel including an acknowledgment (ACK) channel. A time division multiplexing (TDM) operation is performed on pilot symbols and data symbols to obtain a TDM pilot burst. At least one TDM pilot burst is inserted into each channel of the physical layer frame. The physical layer frame is transmitted on the forward link at a low data rate. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071954 | System and Method for Adaptive Transmission Time Interval (TTI) Structure - Methods and devices are provided for communicating data in a wireless channel. In one example, a method includes adapting the transmission time interval (TTI) length of transport container for transmitting data in accordance with a criteria. The criteria may include (but is not limited to) a latency requirement of the data, a buffer size associated with the data, a mobility characteristic of a device that will receive the data. The TTI lengths may be manipulated for a variety of reasons, such as for reducing overhead, satisfy quality of service (QoS) requirements, maximize network throughput, etc. In some embodiments, TTIs having different TTI lengths may be carried in a common radio frame. In other embodiments, the wireless channel may partitioned into multiple bands each of which carrying (exclusively or otherwise) TTIs having a certain TTI length. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071955 | Dynamic Sounding Control In Wifi - A method of performing dynamic sounding in a wireless communication device includes determining whether to perform sounding based on an age of current channel state information (CSI). An achievable throughput can be recorded as a reference throughput after performing the sounding. A current achievable throughput can be compared with the reference throughput. A CSI timestamp can be reset when the current throughput is above the reference throughput by a first predetermined amount, thereby prolonging a lifespan of the current CSI. The CSI timestamp can be reduced when the current throughput is below the reference throughput by a second predetermined amount, thereby reducing the lifespan of the current CSI. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071956 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS TO SIGNAL SHORT INTERFRAME SPACES - Generally, embodiments to enable, indicate and detect Short Interframe Space (SIFS) of different time durations, a short (or small) SIFS which is shorter in duration than a regular SIFS, are described herein. Embodiments may comprise logic such as hardware and/or code to signal a short SIFS or a regular SIFS by setting or clearing a bit of a management frame transmitted by a station to an access point during the network association process, or by setting or clearing a bit in the SIG field of the preamble of a data unit transmitted by an access point to an associated station. In some embodiments, a third party station is able to receive the data unit sent by the access point, and decode, e.g., the SIG field bit to determine whether the short SIFS duration or regular SIFS duration is defined for the communication between the access point and the station. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071957 | COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Certain aspects provide a method for wireless communications by a first access point, comprising determining a first schedule of intervals for the first access point to communicate with a first group of one or more wireless devices, wherein intervals of the first schedule are synchronized with wake up or transmission cycles of the first group of one or more wireless devices and communicating with the first group of one or more wireless devices according to the first schedule. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071958 | Apparatus and Method for Allocating Resources for Coordinated Transmissions from Multiple Cells - Apparatus and method for communication are provided. The apparatus is configured to receive from an upper scheduler data for user terminals served by the apparatus, wherein a first set of terminals is connected to more than one cell and a second set of user terminals is not connected to more than one cell; receive from an upper scheduler physical layer resources to be allocated for the first set of user terminals; determine physical layer resources for the second set of user terminals and allocate the received and determined resources for the user terminals. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071959 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR COEXISTENCE OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention provide signaling mechanisms for wireless networks composed of a large number of stations. An example method embodiment comprises: receiving by a short-range access point in a basic service set, a beacon from a long-range access point in an overlapping basic service set, indicating a beginning and ending of a first quiet interval for short-range stations associated with the short-range access point; and transmitting by the short-range access point, a broadcast control frame, notifying the long-range access point of a second quiet interval for long-range stations associated with the long-range access point, the broadcast control frame further notifying the short-range stations associated with the short-range access point that they may access and transmit data during the second quiet interval. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071960 | SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL (SSS) POST-PROCESSING TO ELIMINATE SHORT CODE COLLISION INDUCED FALSE CELLS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for improving detection and processing of secondary synchronization signals (SSS). | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071961 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIGNALLING RESOURCE ALLOCATION INFORMATION IN AN ASYMMETRIC MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and system signal resource allocation information in an asymmetric multicarrier communication network. A MS communicates with a BS using asymmetric carriers consisting of at least one low frequency carrier (e.g., primary carriers) in a cellular band and at least one high frequency carrier (e.g., secondary carriers) in a millimeter Wave band. In one embodiment, the BS allocates resources for one or more transmit time intervals in at least one of DL allocation interval of a secondary DL carrier and UL allocation interval of a secondary UL carrier for the MS, where the DL allocation interval spans one or more subframes of the secondary DL carrier and the UL allocation interval spans one or more subframes of the secondary UL carrier. The BS then transmits information regarding the allocated resources to the MS in a Packet Data Control Channel region of a subframe of the primary DL carrier. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071962 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR FORMATTING DATA - A transmitting apparatus, a receiving apparatus, and a communication system are provided that allow a reduction in a frame loss due to interference caused by use of the same channel. A transmitting apparatus disposed in a base station includes a GPS receiver for receiving a GPS signal, a timing generator for controlling respective function blocks in accordance with the GPS signal and an inter-base-station control signal so as to precisely synchronize the timing of frame transmission among base stations, the front-end transmission processing unit including for converting transmission information into transmission time slots, a frame generator for generating a frame including a plurality of time slots and one frame guard, and a back-end transmission processing unit for transmitting the generated frame as a radio signal. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071963 | Method and System for Implementing Multiple Timing Domains for Primary and Secondary Synchronization Detection in EUTRA/LTE - A mobile device receives a signal, from a base station, comprising a primary synchronization sequence (PSS) and a secondary synchronization sequence (SSS). The mobile device utilizes two different sampling rates to perform the PSS synchronization and the SSS detection individually. For example, the mobile device synchronizes to the received PSS at a first sampling rate such as 0.96 MHz, which is determined based on the PSS transmission rate and/or the length of the received PSS. The mobile device detects the received SSS at a second sampling rate such as 1.92 MHz, which equals to the sampling rate for an analog-to-digital conversion at the mobile device. The received PSS and associated symbol timing are detected through the PSS synchronization to support the SSS detection. The detected SSS is used to acquire cell-specific parameters such as cell ID. The acquired cell-specific parameters ensure proper communications between the mobile device and the base station. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071964 | METHOD OF HANDLING TIME ALIGNMENT COMMAND DURING A RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - Disclosed is the radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and the terminal, and more particularly, a method of handling time alignment command during a random access procedure in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system is provided. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071965 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROCESSES PER TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL - A method and apparatus may be used for supporting multiple hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) processes per transmission time interval (TTI). A transmitter and a receiver may include a plurality of H-ARQ processes. Each H-ARQ process may transmit and receive one TB per TTI. The transmitter may generate a plurality of TBs and assign each TB to a H-ARQ process. The transmitter may send control information for each TB, which may include H-ARQ information associated TBs with the TBs. The transmitter may send the TBs using the associated H-ARQ processes simultaneously per TTI. After receiving the TBs, the receiver may send feedback for each of the H-ARQ processes and associated TBs indicating successful or unsuccessful receipt of each of the TBs to the transmitter. The feedback for multiple TBs may be combined for the simultaneously transmitted H-ARQ processes, (i.e., TBs). When MIMO is implemented, one H-ARQ process may be associated with one MIMO stream, or codeword. The feedback may include a channel quality indicator (CQI) per MIMO stream or codeword. The control information and the feedback may be sent via a layer 1 or layer 2/3 control part. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140071966 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless terminal capable of transmitting accompanying information in an ad-hoc network to an external network in a state in which the incidence of missing information is minimized. In this device, ad-hoc communication and external communication are performed at different timings. Node function determination unit ( | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140079030 | Scheduling Best Effort Traffic With Guaranteed Latency Traffic In A Communications System Having A Bluetooth-Like Packet Communication Protocol - Time frames (TFs) are allocated for performance of transactions of a low latency data stream (LLDS) and a best effort data stream (BEDS) in Bluetooth®-like equipment, wherein payload carrying packets of the different data streams are equal in size, each occupying multiple TFs. An overrule mechanism enables uncompleted transactions of one data stream to continue as needed into TFs allocated to another data stream. Every TF within an allocation window (AW) is individually allocated to the LLDS or the BEDS, and plural TFs immediately following the AW form a guard space between adjacent AWs, the guard space being allocated to neither the LLDDS or the BEDS. Configuration of the AW and of the guard space guarantees the LLDS a first opportunity to transmit a payload carrying packet and continued opportunities to retransmit the packet until successful, after which the BEDS is given an opportunity for transmission and possible retransmissions. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079031 | Methods and Nodes for Soft Cell Uplink Prioritization - The invention relates to a method in a wireless device for mapping a logical channel to one of a first and a second link. The first link is maintained to a first radio network node and the second link is maintained to a second radio network node. The method comprises obtaining ( | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079032 | Uplink Synchronization Method and User Equipment - A method, performed in a user equipment (UE) includes: saving a timing advance (TA) value when a TA timer associated with the TA value expires, the TA value indicating when the UE should start its uplink transmission before a nominal time given by the timing of a downlink signal received by the UE; and starting the TA timer in response to the UE receiving a TA command from an evolved Node B while the TA value is saved, the TA command containing an update for the TA value. A corresponding UE is presented. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079033 | Method and Apparatus for Time Alignment upon Time Advance Group Split or Creation - This disclosure details example methods and apparatuses for a wireless communication network and for devices operating in such networks that reduce or eliminate the need for performing random access procedures to obtain appropriate Timing Advance, “TA”, values for use with new TA groups that include cells split from an existing TA group and/or new cells not in any existing TA groups defined for a given device. It is advantageously recognized herein that a TA relationship between one or more cells in an old or existing TA group of a device and one or more cells in a new TA group of the device may be known or otherwise estimated, e.g., based on known delay differences, cell sizes, etc. The TA relationship is used to initialize the TA value used for the new group, e.g., by copying or offsetting the current TA value of the old or existing TA group. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079034 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An electronic device forming part of a communication system includes first processing circuitry configured to receive a beacon from a counterpart device. The communication system also includes second processing circuitry that causes the counterpart device to set a transmitting and receiving operation as active state for a first operating period. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079035 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL OF ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL TRANSMISSIONS - A method and apparatus for controlling enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transmissions are disclosed. A plurality of primary absolute grants are received, wherein the plurality of primary absolute grants are associated with a TTI. At least one relative grant is received for E-DCH transmission, wherein the at least one relative grant is associated with the TTI. At least one serving grant for E-DCH transmission is determined. A H-ARQ process is identified for use for the TTI. It is determined whether the identified H-ARQ process is available for scheduled data and whether scheduled data is allowed to be transmitted in the TTI based at least on the identified H-ARQ process. On a condition that the identified H-ARQ process is available for scheduled data and scheduled data is allowed to be transmitted in the TTI, scheduled data is allocated for transmission in the TTI. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079036 | CONTROL ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING PAGING MESSAGES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methods for utilizing paging group IDs and paging indicators are disclosed for PDCCH and PDSCH transmissions to mobile terminals in a mobile communication system. By use of the paging group IDs and paging indicators, various groups of mobile terminals, including subsets of those groups can be paged with reduced decoding requirements. Nesting of the grouping is exploited and packing of the PDCCH frame to accomplish efficient use is described. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079037 | TRANSMISSION OF MULTIPROTOCOL DATA IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - In a distributed antenna system (DAS) and a local area network (LAN), a common communication infrastructure distributes data from radio-based and Internet-based sources. A radio equipment (RE) of the DAS interfaces to a LAN segment. For the downlink, a gateway maps radio signal data from a radio equipment controller (REC) and data packets from a switch to mixed-data frames using a radio data interface protocol for transmission in the DAS. At the RE, the signal data and data packets are retrieved from the mixed-data frames and provided to the air interface and LAN segment, respectively. For the uplink from the RE, the radio signal data from the air interface and the data packets from the LAN segment are mapped to mixed-data frames and transmitted to the gateway. The gateway retrieves the signal samples and data packets from the mixed-data frames for transfer to the REC and switch, respectively. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079038 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system includes a CSG cell which is accessible by a CSG member, a hybrid cell which is the CSG cell where a non-CSG member is also allowed access at the same time, and a mobile terminal which is subscribed as the CSG member and connected to the CSG cell or the hybrid cell as the CSG member. Even in a case in which a subscription time period has expired, the mobile communication system enables the mobile terminal to continue the connection. When the subscription time period for the CSG member expires, in case of the mobile terminal's connection to the CSG cell, the CSG cell initiates a handover, in case of the mobile terminal's connection to the hybrid cell, the hybrid cell changes treatment for the mobile terminal from treating the mobile terminal as the CSG member to treating the mobile terminal as the non-CSG member. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140079039 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSIGNING HYBRID-AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROCESSES - A method and apparatus for transmitting enhanced uplink (EU) data is disclosed. Configuration parameters for EU operation are received, including a priority associated with each MAC-d flow and a maximum number of H-ARQ transmissions associated with each MAC-d flow. A H-ARQ process to use for transmission for a next TTI is identified. On a condition that the identified H-ARQ process is available for new data for the next TTI, data is selected for transmission over the EU channel based on MAC-d flow priority, a transmission status is set to indicate a new transmission, and the selected data is transmitted in accordance with the identified H-ARQ process. On a condition that the identified H-ARQ process is not available for new data for the next TTI, the transmission status is set to indicate a retransmission, and data associated with the identified H-ARQ process is retransmitted. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140086218 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BROADCASTING MESSAGES TO NODES WITHIN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A node within a wireless mesh network is configured to forward a high-priority message to adjacent nodes in the wireless mesh network by either (i) transmitting the message during successive timeslots to the largest subset of nodes capable of receiving transmissions during each timeslot, or (ii) transmitting the message on each different channel during the timeslot when the largest subset of nodes are capable of receiving transmissions on each of those channels. | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140086219 | Uplink Timing Maintenance Upon Time Alignment Timer Expiry - Systems, apparatuses, and methods for uplink timing maintenance in wireless communications are provided. Certain aspects of the disclosure involve applying a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing/resume uplink synchronization; and determining a metric. The metric can be used in determining whether to apply a timing advance command (TAC) to resume uplink resynchronization. | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140086220 | Methods and Apparatuses in a Mobile Communication Network - Techniques for supporting concurrent deployment of 2-millisecond and 10-millisecond TTI for E-DCH transmissions in CELL_FACH state and Idle Mode are disclosed. One example method comprises receiving a ( | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140086221 | TIMING SYNCHRONIZATION FOR DOWNLINK (DL) TRANSMISSIONS IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (CoMP) SYSTEMS - Technology for adjusting a receiver timing of a wireless device in a Coordinated MultiPoint (CoMP) system is disclosed. One method can include the wireless device receiving a plurality of node specific reference signals (RSs) from a plurality of cooperating nodes in a coordination set of the CoMP system. The coordination set includes at least two cooperating nodes. The wireless device can estimate a composite received RS timing from a plurality of received RS timings generated from the plurality of node specific RSs. The received RS timings represent timings from the at least two cooperating nodes. The wireless device can adjust the receiver timing based on the composite received RS timing. A node specific RS can include a channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS). | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140086222 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR USE IN FRAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT - Provided in the present invention are a method and device for use in frame acknowledgement. The method comprises: bearing an immediate acknowledgement instruction into a data frame, the immediate acknowledgement instruction is for use in instructing an immediate return frame acknowledgement response; and transmitting the data frame having the immediate acknowledgement instruction attached thereto. | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140086223 | METHOD FOR BASE STATION PROVIDING PERIODIC CHANNEL STATE REPORT, AND METHOD FOR USER EQUIPMENT PROVIDING PERIODIC CHANNEL STATE REPORT - The present invention relates to a communication system, and more particularly, to a periodic channel state report in a communication system. | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140086224 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING A CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MULTI-COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - The present description relates to an apparatus and method for receiving a control channel in a multi-component carrier system. The method for performing random access disclosed in the present description comprises the steps of: transmitting a random access preamble to a base station from an activated sub-serving cell; monitoring physical downlink control channel candidates during a response window one the basis of a certain aggregation in a temporary search space in a control region of the activated sub-serving cell, wherein the control region consists of a group of control channel elements; and adjusting an uplink time of the activated sub-serving cell according to a time advance command indicated by a random access response when the random access response, including a random access identifier corresponding to the random access preamble, is received in the response window. | 03-27-2014 |
| 20140092877 | RADIO NODE, A USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A TRANSMISSION - A radio network node ( | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140092878 | METHOD OF ENHANCED INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (CSI) FEEDBACK - Embodiments of providing enhanced interference measurements for CSI feedback are generally described herein. In some embodiments, CSI-IM resources are used by UE to perform interference measurements. The serving cell determines a hopping pattern for varying a position of the determined CSI-IM resources in subframes transmitted to the served UE. The determined CSI-IM resources and the determined CSI-IM resources hopping pattern are transmitted to the served UE. The serving node transmits a zero-power (ZP) CSI-RS. The serving node receives an interference measurement from the served UE based on CSI-IM and ZP CSI-RS provided to the served UE from the serving cell. Collisions between the CSI-IM of the serving node and CSI-IM of the non-serving nodes are minimized by the determined CSI-IM resources hopping pattern. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140092879 | DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION POINT SELECTION IN A WIRELESS HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A heterogeneous wireless communication network comprises a macrocell base station that includes a first transmission point, at least one microcell base station that includes a second transmission point and a controller configured to enable transmission of wireless data from the macrocell base station and the at least one microcell base station to a user equipment (UE). The controller is configured to determine a set of transmission point combinations for providing downlink data, determine, using a statistics of ACKs and NACKs received for previous downlink transmissions from the transmission point combinations, a sequence of downlink transmissions to the UE from the transmission point combinations in the set. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140092880 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method and a device for transmitting data. The method includes: a user equipment receives downlink data sent from a base station through downlink resources of a special subframe; the user equipment determines its corresponding guard period level, the guard period level corresponds to a round-trip time of the user equipment and indicates a length of an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol in a guard period corresponding to the user equipment in the special subframe; the user equipment determines, according to its corresponding guard period level, a position of uplink resources corresponding to the user equipment in guard period resources of the special subframe; and the user equipment sends uplink data to the base station through the uplink resources corresponding to the user equipment in the guard period resources of the special subframe. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140092881 | Wireless Communication System, Base Station Apparatus and Mobile Station Apparatus - An apparatus for signal processing includes a scheduling unit and a transmitting unit. The scheduling unit is configured to assign one physical uplink control channel resource for transmissions of first group feedback information and second group feedback information. A first periodicity corresponds to the first group feedback information and a second periodicity corresponds to the second group feedback information. The transmitting unit is configured to transmit a transmission parameter of the first periodicity and the second periodicity and information of the assigned physical uplink control channel resource. The first group feedback information includes a transmission of reception quality information and transmission signal precoding information and the second group feedback information includes a transmission of transmission signal sequence information. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140092882 | INTERCELL INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Methods and apparatus are described for mitigating intercell interference in wireless communication systems utilizing substantially the same operating frequency band across multiple neighboring coverage areas. The operating frequency band may be shared across multiple neighboring or otherwise adjacent cells, such as in a frequency reuse one configuration. The wireless communication system can synchronize one or more resource allocation regions or zones across the multiple base stations, and can coordinate a permutation type within each resource allocation zone. The base stations can coordinate a pilot configuration in each of a plurality of coordinated resource allocation regions. Subscriber stations can be assigned resources in a coordinated resource allocation region based on interference levels. A subscriber station can determine a channel estimate for each of multiple base stations in the coordinated resource allocation region to mitigate interference. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140098796 | INTERFACE SELECTION IN A HYBRID COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A hybrid device can be configured to select a transmit interface to attempt to ensure that each network interface of the hybrid device supports unidirectional traffic. Each of the plurality of network interfaces of the hybrid device can be categorized into one of a set of interface classes based on whether incoming traffic is received at the network interface and/or whether outgoing traffic is transmitted from the network interface. A transmit interface class is selected from the set of interface classes based, at least in part, on a priority level associated with each of the interface classes. One of the network interfaces that belongs to the transmit interface class is selected as a transmit interface for transmitting the frame on the communication network. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140098797 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING HYPER FRAME NUMBER (HFN) DE-SYNCHRONIZATION IN RADIO LINK CONTROL (RLC) UNACKNOWLEDGED MODE (UM) - Apparatus and methods of data communication between a transmitter and a receiver in a radio link control (RLC) unacknowledged mode (UM) include determining, by the transmitter, a hyper frame number (HFN) de-synchronization condition, wherein the HFN de-synchronization condition is FALSE when at least one protocol data unit (PDU) out of a plurality of successive PDUs is successfully transmitted by the transmitter to the receiver, and wherein the HFN de-synchronization condition is TRUE when all of the plurality of successive PDUs are lost, and adjusting, by the transmitter, a transmitter HFN of the transmitter when the HFN de-synchronization condition is TRUE, wherein the adjusted transmitter HFN is used for new PDUs to be transmitted. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140098798 | UPLINK TIMING CONTROL TO REDUCE CALL DROP - A user equipment (UE) may employ Timing Advance (TA) reporting to detect possible error conditions during communication between a base station and the UE. In some instances, the UE receives commands to change a timing advance value. The UE declares an error condition when a timing advance value compared with a reference timing advance value changes more than a threshold amount during a specified time period. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140098799 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING TIME INTERVAL RECONFIGURATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system. A number of errors for a received data is determined. A power boosting message is generated and transmitted based on the number of errors to a transmitting apparatus such that the transmitting apparatus is configured to transmit data using a boosting power. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140098800 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station, a base station, a mobile communication system and a communication method enabling operations associated with simultaneous uplink reception in multiple stations to be simplified are provided. The base station includes a transmission timing determining unit determining a transmission timing based on scheduling conducted upon a data transmission request from a mobile station and notifying the mobile station of the transmission timing, and a receiving unit receiving data in accordance with the transmission timing. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140098801 | Contention Based Access Of Resources In A Wireless Network - A wireless communication device for a wireless network employing a wireless time division communication structure, where the wireless communication device includes a wireless transmitter, a wireless receiver and an access control unit, which is configured to order the wireless transmitter to transmit, in a contention interval, a priority setting of a wireless communication device competing for resources, where the priority setting is transmitted as a signal having a frequency representing the priority setting, order the wireless receiver to receive, in the contention interval, priority settings of other competing wireless communication devices as signals having frequencies representing these priority settings, compare the transmitted priority setting with the received priority settings and seize a following data interval if the transmitted priority setting is higher than the received priority settings. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140105185 | TIMING EVENT GENERATION CIRCUIT FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system or circuit for generating timing events for mobile communications includes fetching network parameters corresponding to a cellular network. The network parameters are used to program a set of programmable registers. The timing events then are generated based on the network parameters. The timing events enable a user equipment (UE) or a base station to operate in multiple cellular networks. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105186 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS TO COORDINATE COMMUNICATIONS OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF DEVICES ON A WIRELESS NETWORK - Logic may coordinate communications of different types of wireless communications devices such as high power and low power wireless communications devices. Logic may coordinate communications by assigning time slots to a low power station (LP-STA) in a management frame such as a beacon transmitted by an access point (AP) associated with the LP-STA. Logic of the high power stations (HP-STAs) may receive the beacon and shepard logic of the HP-STA may defer transmissions by the HP-STA throughout the duration(s) indicated in the beacon from the AP. Logic of the LP-STA may comprise carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance logic to determine when to transmit a communication. Shepard logic of an HP-STA may detect the communication from the LP-STA and defer transmission of communication during a time duration for the communication by the LP-STA. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105187 | SUPPORT FOR SIGNALING OVER FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER - Methods, systems, and devices are provided that may support signaling, such as a Signaling Radio Bearer (SRB), over a flexible bandwidth carrier. For example, an SRB rate for a SRB over for a normal bandwidth carrier may be identified. A Transmission Time Interval (TTI) may be determined for the SRB over for the flexible bandwidth carrier that facilitates a SRB rate of the SRB over the flexible bandwidth carrier that maintains at least the SRB rate for the SRB over the normal bandwidth carrier. The determined TTI may be utilized for the SRB over the flexible bandwidth carrier, which may help avoid increased call setup delay, increased latency for handover, etc. that may be introduced in flexible bandwidth carrier systems. Some embodiments may include reducing spreading factors, increasing transmission power, and/or concatenating multiple transport blocks with respect to the SRB over the flexible bandwidth carrier. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105188 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ENHANCING WIFI REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods of enhanced real-time communications between WiFi devices. In one embodiment of the present invention a method for enhanced payload protection in a WiFi system includes transmitting multiple copies of data packets in successive frame body transmissions. In another embodiment, a method for enhanced communications over a WiFi link includes examining a unit ID packet to determine a destination of a data payload when errors are detected in IP and/or MAC headers. If a destination is determined, the packet is corrected and forwarded to the device based on the unit ID determination. In another embodiment, a method for enhanced real-time communications in a WiFi network includes establishing a communications frame that includes an active timeslot, preferably based on U-APSD, for a WiFi device to use for transmission of successive audio data packets transmitted between the WiFi handset and AP. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DIFFERENT SIGNAL TYPES IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting a Reference Signal (RS) by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system. The method includes transmitting a DeModulation Reference Signal (DM RS) and information data in a sub-frame; and transmitting a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) in a last symbol in another sub-frame. The DM RS is transmitted in a middle symbol in each slot of the sub-frame, and the information data is transmitted in other symbols in each slot of the sub-frame. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105190 | MAINTAINING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a method for maintaining a communication between a mobile terminal and a network in a mobile communication system includes: determining whether a state of the mobile terminal is in an unsynchronized state while maintaining a radio resource control (RRC) connected state with the network; performing a random access channel (RACH) procedure for a synchronized state if it is determined that the state of the mobile terminal is in the unsynchronized state while maintaining the RRC connected state with the network; and after performing the RACH procedure, transitioning from the synchronized state to the unsynchronized state with the network while maintaining the RRC connected state with the network when a timer expires. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105191 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. In more detail, a method for performing HARQ (hybrid automatic repeat request) retransmission by a communication device in a wireless communication system, the method comprising: initially transmitting a data block to a Base Station (BS); attempting PDCCH (physical downlink control channel detection) in a predetermined time interval including a plurality of subframes after transmission of an uplink channel signal; and retransmitting the data block when a PDCCH signal indicating retransmission of the data block is detected in the predetermined time interval, wherein reception of a PHICH (physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel) corresponding to initial transmission of the data block is skipped. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105192 | METHOD FOR TERMINAL TO CONTROL TIMING ADVANCE GROUP IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present application discloses a method in which a terminal controls a timing group in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the method is characterised by comprising: a step for measuring the difference between the downlink timing of a specific serving cell and a reference cell; and a step for transmitting, via a network, a message requesting the change of a timing group, if the specific serving cell belongs to the same timing group as the reference cell and the measured downlink timing difference is at least a threshold value, or if the specific serving cell belongs to a different timing group to the reference cell and the measured downlink timing difference is less than the threshold value. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140105193 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to uplink transmissions and scheduling of resources for uplink transmissions in connection with packet switched communication. A radio communication network schedules time slots for transmission of bursts of a first radio block on at least two different uplink packet data channels and transmits an Uplink State Flag, associated with a mobile station for which the first radio block was scheduled, on a first downlink packet data channel representing a first subperiod within a basic uplink period. The mobile station receives the Uplink State Flag, identifies the scheduled resources for transmission of the first radio block wherein the timing of the first subperiod is derived utilizing the fact that the Uplink State Flag was received on the first downlink packet data channel and transmits the first radio block utilizing the identified resources. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140112314 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An electronic device includes processing circuitry configured to set a transmitting and receiving operation as active state for a first operating period and determine whether to set the transmitting and receiving operation as a state in which transmission or reception is limited after the first operating period elapses. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140112315 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RADIO COMMUNICATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication device includes: a receiver configured to receive a radio signal; and a processor coupled to the receiver, configured to switch between a first communication mode and a second communication mode in accordance with scheduling of allocation of a time slot to another radio communication device based on the radio signal, communication between the radio communication device and the another radio communication device being executed using time division multiplexing in the first communication mode, and communication between the radio communication device and the another radio communication device being executed using a competitive access method in the second communication mode. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140112316 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DEVICE AND METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A radio communication device which manages a network defines a predetermined transmission frame cycle, allocates in the frame specific access slots as timing with which the individual radio communication devices in the network concerned receive a transmission, puts the information of the allocation in a beacon signal, and transmits the signal. Each radio communication device performs receiving operation at access slots specific to the device itself defined by the beacon signal. When information transmission is made between arbitrary communication devices in the network, access slots for the device which is to receive the information are used. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140112317 | EFFICIENT AND FLEXIBLE TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING SECTOR SWEEP IN A MULTI-ANTENNA COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method implemented in a communication device includes receiving a first beamforming training transmission corrupted by a collision, determining a first station to which the first beamforming training transmission corresponds based on the first beamforming training transmission corrupted by the collision, and in response to determining the first station, transmitting a signal to the first station to prompt the first station to transmit a second beamforming training transmission. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140112318 | RADIO RESOURCE OPTIMIZING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a radio resource optimizing method, apparatus, and system. The method includes: performing DPI on received network data, so as to identify a protocol type of the network data; if the network data is a first kind of data stream, identifying a heartbeat in the first kind of data stream, and obtaining heartbeat information of the heartbeat; when the heartbeat interval period of the heartbeat information is greater than a radio resource pre-allocated time slice, determining a radio resource bandwidth allocation parameter according to the heartbeat bandwidth requirement of the heartbeat information; and sending a radio resource allocation parameter including the radio resource bandwidth allocation parameter. In this way, the radio resource allocation parameter is dynamically set when an application runs in the background, thereby improving the utilization rate of an air interface bandwidth and time of a radio base station. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140119344 | ADAPTIVE ALLOCATION OF IDLE SLOTS BASED ON ERROR RATE - To create additional communication gaps for a user equipment to perform inter-radio access technology (inter-RAT) measurement, the user equipment may discontinue communications during time slots of specific transmission time intervals (TTIs) based on a block error rate of a previous TTI. The time of the discontinued communications may then be allocated for inter-RAT measurement. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119345 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EMPLOYING A TUNE-AWAY OPERATION TO COMMUNICATE SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH A PLURALITY OF CHANNELS - Apparatus and methods are disclosed to provide for a multi-SIM wireless user equipment configured for block-level, or slot-level tune-away operations enabling simultaneous communication with a plurality of channels. The first and second channels may correspond to different RANs, each of which the user equipment may subscribe to as corresponding to information in a plurality of SIMs at the user equipment. In other examples, the first and second channels may correspond to different cells within a single RAN. In either case, the tune-away operations disclosed provide for reduced data loss at the first channel and in some examples improved communication performance at the second channel. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119346 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING WHETHER A TRANSMITTER IS POWER LIMITED - An apparatus and method of determining whether a transmitter is power limited. A predetermined number is added to an amount of useful data for transmission expressed in bits, thereby to calculate the size of an increased amount of useful data. The predetermined number corresponds to the minimum number of bits required to transmit additional user data and any associated header. A transmission format which has the smallest transport block size with capacity for the increased amount of useful data is then selected from a predetermined group of transmission formats. Each of the group of transmission formats has a different transport block size. It is then determined whether the power required for the transmitter to transmit the selected transmission format exceeds the maximum power available to the transmitter. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119347 | DELAY AND JITTER LIMITED WIRELESS MESH NETWORK SCHEDULING - Schedule and channel assignment in a wireless mesh network (WMN) includes: forming a representation of a sequence of permutation matrices from an n×n rate matrix. The entries of the rate matrix define the bandwidth of links between nodes of the WMN. Each permutation matrix represents active radio links between nodes. The sequence of permutation matrices defines a sequence of radio links to provide desired bandwidth between nodes. Further, a representation of a sequence of partial permutation matrices corresponding to the sequence of permutation matrices is formed so that each of the permutation matrices can be decomposed into a group of partial permutation matrices. Each partial permutation matrix represents non-interfering radio links between the nodes. In each timeslot, the nodes are configured for radio transmission and reception in accordance with at least one of the partial permutation matrices in each group to transmit traffic between the nodes. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119348 | Scheduling of Downlink Data Resources - There is provided a control entity for a communication network, a base station including such a control entity and a user equipment for communication with such a base station. The control entity includes a controller for providing a downlink control signal (e.g. a downlink assignment) scheduling a downlink data resource in a first time slot wherein the controller is configured for providing the downlink control signal over a downlink control resource in an earlier time slot which is chronologically earlier than the first time slot. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119349 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention operates as a base station and preferably suppresses interference between cells in a downlink to a terminal in a range expansion area, under a radio communication environment in which cells in different sizes are layered. PDCCH parts which are respectively used by a Macro eNodeB and a Pico eNodeB are separated by a search space so that all information in the PDCCH can be protected from losing due to interference. Since a user equipment can maintain a control signal in the PDSCH part, a signal in the PDSCH can be output from an eNodeB and this improves the throughput. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119350 | TECHNIQUES FOR EFFICIENT DATA TRANSFERS IN A BODY AREA NETWORK - A method for transferring data among devices in a body area network (BAN). The method comprises dividing an access time to a wireless medium of the BAN into at least a contention-based period and a contention-free reservation period; allowing devices to transfer data during the contention-based period using a local prioritized contention access (LPCA) mechanism; and allowing only devices having reserved time slots to transfer data during the contention-free reservation period. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140119351 | DETECTING DELIMITERS FOR LOW-OVERHEAD COMMUNICATION IN A NETWORK - A waveform communicated from a first station to a second station over a shared medium may include at least the first symbol comprising a first set of frequency components at predetermined carrier frequencies modulated with preamble information and a second set of frequency components at predetermined carrier frequencies modulated with frame control information. The first symbol may comprise a single symbol delimiter. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140126549 | Method and Apparatus for Communicating in an Increased Coverage Area to a Wireless Communication Unit - A method for increasing coverage in a wireless communication system is described. The method comprises, at the network element: transmitting a first portion of subframes comprising a number of resource blocks to a first wireless communication unit in a first mode of operation, wherein the number of resource blocks are transmitted at a first power level per resource block; and transmitting, a second portion of subframes to a second wireless communication unit in a second mode of operation at a second power level, wherein the second portion of subframes comprise a lower number of resource blocks than the first portion of subframes and the lower number of resource blocks is transmitted at a second power level per resource block that is higher than the first power level per resource block. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126550 | TEMPORARY MEDIUM HANDOVER - A system and method are disclosed that reduce collisions on a wireless medium shared by devices associated with a wireless network, thereby improving throughput on the wireless medium. For some embodiments, a first device reserves access to the medium for a first interval, and then grants medium access to a second device for a remainder of the first interval. If the second device transmits data during the remainder of the first interval, medium access is maintained with the second device and then the second device is prevented from contending for medium access during a subsequent contention period. Otherwise, medium access is returned to the first device and the second device is allowed to contend for medium access during the contention period. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126551 | METHODS OF MAPPING RETRANSMISSIONS RESPONSIVE TO BUNDLED NACK MESSAGES AND RELATED DEVICES - A method of operating a node of a MIMO network may include transmitting first and second HARQ IDs over a downlink signaling channel to a wireless terminal for a first MIMO TTI. The first HARQ ID is mapped to a first MIMO layer, and the second HARQ ID is mapped to second and third MIMO layers. First, second, and third data blocks are transmitted over the first, second, and third MIMO layers to the wireless terminal for the first MIMO TTI. Responsive to receiving an ACK message associated with the first HARQ ID, a fourth data block is transmitted over the first MIMO layer to the wireless terminal for a second MIMO TTI. Responsive to receiving a NACK message associated with the second HARQ process identification, the second and third data blocks are retransmitted over the second and third MIMO layers to the wireless terminal for the second MIMO TTI. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126552 | AUTONOMOUS DENIAL CONFIGURATIONS FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - To manage in-device coexistence between multiple radios for different radio access technologies (RATs) on a wireless device, an autonomous denial rate may be specified for the wireless device from a base station of a first RAT. The communications for a second RAT of the wireless device may then be adjusted based on the autonomous denial rate. The wireless device may also request TDM or FDM communication configurations for the first RAT to manage communications. Measurement reporting may be scheduled around denied uplink subframes of the first RAT. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126553 | PROCESSING UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSIONS IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK - In a heterogeneous wireless network that includes a macro base station and one or more micro base stations, a wireless device to wirelessly transmit, in a first time slot at a first position in a first transmission subframe, data over a first physical communication channel. An ACK/NACK control message is received over a backhaul network connection a first time period after the first time slot. A response message is transmitted to the wireless device such that when the control message is received prior to the second time slot, then the response message uses data reception information from the control message and when the control message is not received prior to the second time slot, then the response message indicates that the data was successfully received. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126554 | METHOD TO ENABLE RAPID SCANNING BY COGNITIVE RADIOS - A cognitive radio scanning method is disclosed that enables cognitive radios to rapidly scan for neighboring channels by staggering the position of beacons across the frame relative to other channels and intelligently allocate the bandwidth across super frames such that a device has the ability to switch and scan multiple beacons both within and across multiple super frames. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126555 | Extended Acknowledgement Mechanism For Communications Between A Source Node And A Destination Node - An extended acknowledgement mechanism is provided. In one aspect, a source node provides an indication that extended acknowledgement is supported. In response, the source node receives from a destination node an acknowledgement that comprises a regular acknowledgement frame, an extended acknowledgement frame, a bidirectional acknowledgement frame including payload data or an extended bidirectional acknowledgement frame that includes payload data. In another aspect, an indication is received from a source node a frame that extended acknowledgement is supported. In response, a destination node transmits to the source node an acknowledgement that comprises a regular acknowledgement frame, an extended acknowledgement frame, a bidirectional acknowledgement frame including payload data or an extended bidirectional acknowledgement frame that includes payload data. The ability of nodes supporting extended acknowledgement may be indicated during registration, and propagated throughout the network domain, so as to avoid per-frame indication in subsequent communications. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126556 | Signalling Arrangement for Inter-Site Carrier Aggregation Having Only Single Component Carrier Available in Uplink Direction - An apparatus is described which is connectable to a first network node by a first downlink component carrier and to at least a second network node by a at least second downlink component carrier, wherein the apparatus provides a single uplink connection. The uplink connection is shared among a first uplink component carrier to the first network node and at least a second up link component carrier to the at least second network node. Sharing of the uplink connection may be performed in a time divisional multiplexed manner. Furthermore, a corresponding method is described. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126557 | RADIO TRANSMISSION/RADIO RECEPTION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION WITHIN A, IN PARTICULAR WIRELESS, MOTOR VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INTERACTING IN AD-HOC FASHION - The invention relates to a radio transmission/radio reception device and to a method for communication within a, in particular wireless, motor vehicle communication system interacting in ad-hoc fashion which are configured such that the radio transmission/radio reception device emits a piece of information about the scope of envisaged reports, at least one further radio transmission/radio reception device receives the information, and the further radio transmission/radio reception device takes the received information as a basis for stipulating a frequency for the emission of chronologically successive reports. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140126558 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND DEVICE HAVING CONTINUITY IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present description discloses a method for a first device to transmit data in a WPAN (wireless personal area network), comprising the steps of: transmitting, to a second device, a message requesting a transmission bandwidth for transceiving non-competitive data of a first device; receiving, from the second device, transmission bandwidth allocation information corresponding to the message requesting the transmission bandwidth; and transceiving data to/from the second device according to the transmission bandwidth allocation information, wherein the transmission bandwidth allocation information may include length, gap, and window information on the transmission bandwidth for non-competitive transception. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140133469 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTI-CHANNEL CONCURRENCY - Systems and methods are disclosed to dynamically assign priorities to beacons sent from different networks to allow a device to selectively receive a beacon from one of the networks when a conflict occurs. When two or more beacons from different networks arrive at times that do not allow the client device to receive all of the beacons, one beacon may be selected for reception based upon a priority determination. An initial priority may be assigned to beacons from each network. Further, the initial priorities may be adjusted so that a more desirable rate of receiving the beacons may be achieved. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140133470 | ANTENNA ARRAY CALIBRATION USING TRAFFIC SIGNALS - An antenna array of a base station is calibrated using outbound traffic signals. The antenna array includes a number of sub-arrays. A combiner in the antenna array combines the outbound traffic signals in the sub-arrays into a feedback signal. The outbound traffic signals are captured simultaneously for use as reference signals before the outbound traffic signals enter transmit paths in a radio unit of the base station. Each of the reference signals is one of the outbound traffic signals that is to be transmitted via one of the sub-arrays. An impairment estimator of the base station estimates the impairment for each of the outbound traffic signals based on the feedback signal and the reference signals. An approximate inverse of the impairment estimation is applied to the outbound traffic signals by a number of equalizers before the outbound traffic signals enter the transmit paths. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140133471 | METHODS AND DEVICES RELATING TO MIMO COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and devices supporting MIMO transmission/reception are discussed. For example, first and second data blocks may be transmitted/received respectively using first and second transmission/reception layers during a first TTI for rank two transmission/reception. A first HARQ process may be mapped to the first data block of the first layer for the first TTI. A second HARQ process may be mapped to the second data block of the second layer for the first TTI. Third, fourth, and fifth data blocks may be transmitted/received respectively using the first and second layers and using a third transmission/reception layer during a second TTI for rank three transmission/reception. The first HARQ process may be mapped to the third data block of the first layer for the second TTI. The second HARQ process may be mapped to the fourth and fifth data blocks of the second and third layers for the second TTI. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140133472 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF RECEIVE DIVERSITY (RXD) FULL CELL SEARCH - Apparatus and methods of receive diversity (RxD) full cell search by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system are described. In an aspect, a first set of received energies of a first signal received at a first antenna and a second set of received energies of a second signal received at a second antenna may be separately determined. Based thereon, a set of peak energies and corresponding antenna indices, along with a slot timing of at least one cell corresponding to the set of peak energies and corresponding antenna indices, may be determined A frame timing and a scrambling code for the at least one cell then may be determined using a respective one of the first antenna and the second antenna corresponding to each of the set of peak energies and the corresponding antenna indices, along with the respective slot timing of the at least one cell. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140133473 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SLOT - An end device transmits a request command for requesting a slot management to a coordinator, and receives a reply command including a result of the slot management request from the coordinator. Each of the request command and the reply command includes an allocation order for indicating a slot allocation interval request. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140133474 | UPLINK TRANSMISSION FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION VIA MULTIPLE NODES - Uplink control channel management is disclosed in which a user equipment receives a configuration for multiple uplink control channels for transmission to multiple nodes in multiflow communication with the UE. The UE generates the uplink control channels based on the configuration, wherein each of the uplink control channels is generated for a corresponding one of the nodes. The UE then transmits each of the uplink control channels to the corresponding node. For UEs capable of multiple uplink transmissions, in which the UE communicates with at least one of the nodes over multiple component carriers (CCs), the configuration may designate with of the multiple CCs the UE should transmit the uplink control channel for that node. For UEs capable of only single uplink transmissions, the configuration may designate the transmission of the uplink control channels in either frequency division multiplex (FDM) or time division multiplex (TDM) schemes. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140133475 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system and method for wireless communication that schedules a connection time of a terminal based on a delay time is provided. A base station of the system for wireless communication may include a delay time determiner to determine a delay time of a terminal, based on preamble information for a plurality of terminal groups based on location information of the terminal, and a scheduler to schedule a connection time for the terminal to connect to the base station, using the delay time. | 05-15-2014 |
| 20140140328 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF TRANSMISSION INTERVALS IN WI-FI - An access point generates a data packet such that the data packet has a same packet length as a data packet from at least one other access point. The access point reserves a channel for a time interval, and initiates transmission of the data packet over the channel at a same time as transmission of the data packet from the at least one other access point. As a result, the access point synchronizes its transmission interval with a transmission interval of the at least one other access point which reduces inter-access point interference. | 05-22-2014 |
| 20140140329 | NETWORK AND USER BEHAVIOR BASED TIME-SHIFTED MOBILE DATA TRANSMISSION - A computer program product for mobile data transmission is provided in the illustrative embodiments. A request for data is received from a mobile device. A determination is made whether a data transmission over a mobile data communication network in response to the request can be delayed, forming a time-shifting determination. A determination is made, responsive to the time-shifting determination being affirmative, a delayed schedule for the data transmission in response to the request such that the data transmission is completed by a deadline. The data is transmitted over the mobile data communication network according to the delayed schedule. | 05-22-2014 |
| 20140140330 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN COLLOCATED TRANSCEIVERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE - A network device including a first transceiver and a second transceiver. The first transceiver is configured to receive, in accordance with a first wireless protocol, first data during a first time period, and transmit, in accordance with the first wireless protocol, second data during a second time period. The second transceiver is configured to receive, in accordance with a second wireless protocol, a block of packets during the first time period in which the first transceiver receives the first data. The second wireless protocol is different from the first wireless protocol. Subsequent to receiving all packets in the block of packets, the second transceiver is configured to transmit, in accordance with the second wireless protocol, a single acknowledgement during the second time period in which the first transceiver transmits the second data. The single acknowledgement is configured to indicate receipt of all the packets in the block of packets. | 05-22-2014 |
| 20140146795 | FLEXIBLE PAGING SCHEME IN A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). A first paging message is transmitted in the M2M wireless WAN according to a first paging cycle. An occurrence of a first event is detected. A second paging message is transmitted, based at least in part on the occurrence of the first event. The second paging message is transmitted according to a second paging cycle. The second paging cycle being different from the first paging cycle. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140146796 | BUFFER SIZE REPORTING IN TIME DIVISION HIGH SPEED UPLINK PACKET ACCESS (TD-HSUPA) SYSTEMS - A method of wireless communication reports buffer size in TD-HSUPA networks. A protocol data unit is transmitted and an artificial buffer size is reported in response to the transmitted PDU. The artificial buffer size corresponds to the size of a scheduling request. The actual buffer size is reported when a NACK is received or when a round trip timer expires. The actual buffer size corresponds to a PDU retransmit size. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140146797 | TIMESLOT MAPPING AND/OR AGGREGATION ELEMENT FOR DIGITAL RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSPORT ARCHITECTURE - A serial link interface unit includes serialized data stream interfaces configured to receive a serialized data stream having a data rate and set of timeslots; an aggregate serialized data stream interface configured to communicate an aggregate serialized data stream having aggregate data rate and plurality of aggregate timeslot sets each coming sequentially in time, wherein a second aggregate timeslot set comes after a first aggregate timeslot set; and wherein the serial link interface unit interleaves data from the different serialized data streams received at the plurality of first interfaces by mapping data from a first timeslot from each different serialized data stream to the first aggregate timeslot set in the aggregate serialized data stream and mapping data from a second timeslot from each different serialized data stream to the second aggregate timeslot set in the aggregate serialized data stream. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140146798 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUBFRAME INTERLACING IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for providing wireless communications using subframe partitioning are disclosed. Two or more base stations may be allocated subframes in a radio frame. All or part of the subframe allocation may be provided to the associated user equipment (UEs), which may use it to determine signal metrics during assigned subframes for an associated base station. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140146799 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREFOR IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of receiving downlink control information and a corresponding apparatus in a wireless access system supporting an enhanced physical downlink control channel. The method includes receiving, from an eNB, DCI transmission channel information that indicates which one of a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and the e-PDCCH is used to transmit the DCI, checking the starting symbol of the e-PDCCH when the DCI transmission channel information indicates that the e-PDCCH is used to transmit the DCI, and receiving the DCI by performing blind decoding on the e-PDCCH from the starting symbol of the e-PDCCH. | 05-29-2014 |
| 20140153550 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR SYNCH FRAME TRANSMISSIONS - Logic to manage synch frame transmissions in a synch network via helper stations (STAs) synched to the network. Logic may coordinate actions of helper STAs via a transmission window (TW) provided by a master clock STA. Logic may distribute synch frame transmissions within a TW via synch logic in the helper STAs. Logic in helper STAs of a synch network may determine discovery periods in which to transmit synch frames between synch frame transmissions by the master clock STA. Logic in helper STAs to determine a discovery period in which to transmit synch frames to share workload with the master clock STA and to extend the coverage area of the synch network. Logic of the master clock STA may establish a fixed TW based upon the number of helper STAs and a time constraint for discovering the synch network. Or logic of the master clock STA may establish a dynamic TW in which the master clock STA can adjust the TW based upon a number of synch frame transmissions during a TW. | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140153551 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCE FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL - A method and apparatus for allocating a management resource of a channel of a node that is included in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) are provided. A resource of a channel performs communication with a specific node using a multi-superframe including a plurality of superframes, limits a position area of a time slot including a channel that is allocated to communication with a specific node to a predetermined superframe of the plurality of superframes, gives a logical connection ID to the time slot, and is allocated by matching the logical connection ID and a management resource that manages the time slot. | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140153552 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, TRANSCEIVER STATIONS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER PROGRAMS - The invention relates to a method for communicating over a radiofrequency channel in a network including a primary node and multiple secondary nodes ( | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140153553 | COMBINED FRAME OF TWO COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS ON SAME CARRIER FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE AND FOR BROADBAND COMMUNICATION - A communication device configured to communicate with a plurality of terminals via a first communication protocol and a second communication protocol, wherein both protocols organise communications into a series of frames and the frames of the first protocol are shorter than those of the second protocol, the communication device being configured to impose one or more frames according to the first protocol onto at least part of a frame according to the second protocol to form a single frame for communicating via both protocols. | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140153554 | Method and Apparatus for Allocating Resource and Method and Apparatus for Acquiring Resource - Embodiments of the present disclosure disclose a method and apparatus for allocating resource and a method and apparatus for acquiring resource. The method for allocating resource includes: allocating an F-PCICH resource to a UE, where the F-PCICH resource includes F-PCICH configuration information; and sending the F-PCICH configuration information to the UE through first control information, where the first control information is corresponding to an F-PCICH resource index number, and the F-PCICH resource index number is corresponding to the F-PCICH configuration information. This enables the UE to acquire the F-PCICH resource, so that a UL CLTD technology can be applied. | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140161104 | DYNAMIC HYSTERESIS SELECTION - A method of wireless communication includes determining an operating parameter of a mobile device. The method also includes dynamically setting a hysteresis for a gain state of a power amplifier (PA) based at least in part on the determined operating parameter. The hysteresis may include a power level hysteresis and a temporal hysteresis | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161105 | MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION STATION AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE-ACCESS BEAMFORMING IN A MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of a millimeter-wave communication station and method for multiple-access beamforming in a millimeter-wave network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an initiating station performs multiple-access beamforming with one or more responding stations by announcing a number of sector-sweep (SS) slots of a beamforming training (BFT) period and a number of SS frames of each SS slot. One or more SS frames are received from one or more of the responding stations within one of the SS slots of the BFT period. The initiating station transmits one or more SS feedback frames to the responding stations within the one SS slot to indicate an antenna configuration to the responding stations for communication with the initiating station. The responding stations transmit a limited number of SS frames per SS slot based on the number of SS frames announced by the initiating station and transmit any additional SS frames in a next SS slot of the beamforming training period. Each SS frame contains an indication to the initiating station of an antenna configuration for communication with the responding station, | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161106 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION BASED ON BUFFER STATUS INFORMATION OF NEIGHBORING CELL - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for resource allocation based on a buffer status in a neighboring cell. A method of allocating a resource between base stations may include receiving, by a first base station, information associated with a buffer status of a second base station, comparing information associated with a buffer status of the first base station to the information associated with the buffer status of the second base station, and relatively allocating a resource based on a result of the comparison. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161107 | BEACONING MODE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to facilitating apparatus interaction. In at least one example embodiment of the present invention, apparatuses may comprise both triggered communication activities and automated communication activities. Triggered communication activities may correspond to, for example, user and/or application instigated actions in a wireless apparatus. Automated activities may occur without any requirement for user intervention, and further, without any notification to the user that an action has occurred. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161108 | LOGICAL CHANNEL PRIORITIZATION PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING MULTIPLE UPLINK TRANSPORT BLOCKS - The invention relates to methods for scheduling of uplink transmission and generating transport blocks according to multiple received uplink assignments. Furthermore, the invention is also related to the implementation of these methods in hardware and software. To propose strategies for generating plural transport blocks within a given time constraint, the invention introduces prioritization of the uplink assignments, so that multiple uplink assignments can be ranked in the mobile terminal in a priority order. The prioritization of the uplink assignments is used to determine the order in which the individual transport blocks corresponding to the uplink assignments are filled, respectively how the data of different logical channels is multiplexed to the transport blocks for transmission in the uplink. Another aspect of the invention is to suggest joint logical channel procedures that operate on virtual transport blocks accumulated from the received uplink assignments. One or more such joint logical channel procedure can be performed in parallel. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161109 | SCHEDULER AND SCHEDULING METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN MIMO BASED WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A scheduler and scheduling method that may select a data transmission time interval and a data transmitting station are included in a multi-user Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) communication system. An access point may include a receiver to receive channel measurement signals from stations using a plurality of receive antennas; a channel estimation unit to generate channel state matrices with respect to wireless channels formed from the stations to the receive antennas using the channel measurement signals; and a scheduler to select at least one transmitting station from the stations by considering the channel state matrices and a number of the receive antennas. The receiver may receive a data stream from the selected transmitting stations. Stations receive identifiers corresponding to transmitting stations and/or transmitting antennas to identify stations or antennas for transmitting data streams to the access point. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161110 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING MULTI TRANSMISSION TIMING TO AT LEAST ONE TIMING ADVANCE GROUP IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - The present invention relates to methods of allocating a Timing Advance (TA) value used for at least one timing advance group in a wireless access system for supporting carrier aggregation (CA). According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method of adjusting transmission timing for at least one TA group in a wireless access system for supporting CA includes: receiving, by a terminal, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) signal including a reserved bit indicating at least one TA group; receiving a medium access control (MAC) message including at least one TA value corresponding to at least one TA group; and transmitting an uplink signal by applying a TA value corresponding to a TA group in the TA group that the reserved bit indicates. At this point, each of the at least one TA group may include at least one primary cell. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161111 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING A MULTI-CARRIER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Transmitting data using a multi-carrier in a mobile communication system by transmitting data in user equipment of a wireless communication system using a carrier aggregation technique including setting secondary cells included in an S-TAG (Secondary-Timing Advance Group) configured of only secondary cells (SCells), deactivating a downlink timing reference cell in the S-TAG, determining whether other activated secondary cells exist besides the deactivated downlink timing reference cell in the S-TAG, and when the other activated secondary cells exist in the S-TAG, setting one of the other activated secondary cells as a new downlink timing reference cell. Accordingly, the uplink transmission speed can be increased in the user equipment and user QoS can be improved by transmitting data using one or more uplink carriers in the terminal. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140161112 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING TO A FIRST AND A SECOND CLASS OF TERMINALS USING A FIRST AND/OR A SECOND CARRIER - A telecommunications system communicating data to/from one or more terminals, including one or more transmitters to transmit first and second carriers over respective first and second frequency bandwidths. During a first time period the transmitters can transmit data receivable by first and second classes of terminal on the first and second carriers. During a second different time period, the transmitters can transmit data to the second class of terminal on the first and second carriers in combination. A data transmission format on the first carrier in the first time period is incompatible with a user data transmission format on the second carrier during the first time period. The transmitters can transmit control data on the first carrier in the first time period which is receivable by the second class of terminal to enable the second class of terminal to maintain synchronisation with the first carrier during the first time period. | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140169338 | KEEP ALIVE PERIODICITY DETERMINATION FOR WIFI NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for keep alive messages. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a user equipment, an indicator sent by a wireless access point, wherein the indicator represents a time to send at least one keep alive message to enable maintenance of at least one binding in at least one intermediate node; and generating, by the user equipment, the at least one keep alive message. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169339 | Systems and Methods to Achieve Fairness in Wireless LANs for Cellular Offloading - System and method embodiments are included to provide various degrees of time allocation fairness to users using varying target transmission opportunity (TXOP) values. In one embodiment, a method for promoting various degrees of fairness for users in a wireless network includes assigning a target TXOP value for one or more users in the wireless network, wherein the target TXOP value indicates a number of time units for transmissions to be met on average over time by the one or more users, and transmitting the target TXOP value to the one or more users. In another embodiment, a method includes receiving a TXOP value from the wireless network, wherein the target TXOP value indicates a number of time units allocated for transmissions, and transmitting traffic over a plurality of time periods that have an average duration about equal to the number of time units. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169340 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO CONSERVE POWER OF MACHINE-TO-MACHINE DEVICES USING A SHARED DATA CHANNEL - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). A traffic slot map is generated. The traffic slot map identifies one or more first time slots and one or more second time slots. First data is transmitted during the one or more first time slots at a first data rate. Second data is transmitted during the one or more second time slots at a second data rate. The traffic slot map is broadcasted to one or more M2M devices during a traffic slot of a first forward link frame at a beginning of a traffic channel cycle. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169341 | UPLINK CHANNEL ESTIMATION FOR A SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO - A system and method for uplink channel estimation for a software defined radio is disclosed. The method comprises dividing an allocated bandwidth for a received signal on the uplink channel into N segments. The uplink channel estimation is processed for each of the N segments as a separate process. The uplink channel estimation includes pre-processing each of the N segments of the received signal; Wiener filtering the pre-processed segments of the received signal in the frequency domain; and Wiener filtering each of the frequency filtered segments in the time domain to determine a channel estimate for each of the N segments for use in equalizing the received signal. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169342 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a wireless communication unit, a wired communication unit, and a communication timing correction unit. If the wireless communication unit fails to receive a synchronization signal from another base station apparatus at given reception timing, the wired communication unit transmits a synchronization state confirmation signal for confirming a synchronization state between the base station and another base station apparatus, and receives a synchronization state response signal including a determination result of the synchronization state. The communication timing correction unit corrects a communication timing based on the synchronization state response signal. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169343 | Method and Apparatus for Resource Aggregation in Wireless Communications - Methods and apparatus for cell aggregation are disclosed. In accordance with one aspect information regarding a predefined maximum number of cells that can be aggregated by a communication device on a single carrier resource is sent by the communication device. Said Information is received by a network node where after control on cell aggregation can be based on the information, and the communication device can support cell aggregation on the single carrier resource up to said maximum number of cells. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169344 | Random Access Method, Mobile Terminal, and Mobile Communications Sytem - The present invention discloses a random access method, a mobile terminal, and a mobile communications system, and relates to the communications field. The method includes: obtaining a dynamic probability class (N) and an access service class (ASC) of a current service that are in a system information block; calculating an access probability of the current service according to the N and the ASC of the current service; successively comparing random numbers corresponding to available access timeslots with the access probability of the current service until a random number corresponding to an available access timeslot is less than or equal to the access probability of the current service; and sending an access preamble to a base station in the available access timeslot. Embodiments of the present invention apply to establishment of a random access process for a mobile terminal. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169345 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING SYNCHRONIZATION IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for acquiring synchronization by a user equipment (UE) in a radio communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving a synchronization signal from a first transmission point, and acquiring synchronization to a second transmission point using the synchronization signal and information including a subframe offset received from the first transmission point, wherein the subframe offset is a subframe difference value between the first transmission point and the second transmission point. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140169346 | RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, AND SYNCHRONIZATION TIMER CONTROL METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio station, a radio terminal, and a method for synchronization timer control are provided that can reduce a delay as much as possible until uplink signal resynchronization is done in a case where a plurality of cell groups exist. In a radio communication system having a function of using a plurality of radio resources corresponding to a plurality of cells, respectively, for communication between a radio station ( | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140177602 | UPLINK TIMING MANAGEMENT AND UPLINK POWER CONTROL - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for uplink timing management and uplink power control in wireless communications systems. A UE may detect a switch in a set of one or more transmission points (TPs) for at least one of uplink (UL) transmissions or (DL) transmissions. The uplink timing management may include the UE determining one or more DL component carriers (CCs) to use as a Timing Advance (TA) reference after the switch. The uplink power control may include a UE determining, based at least in part on one or more serving TPs after the switch, one or more power control functions to be utilized for transmission power for one or more UL channels after the switch. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177603 | COMMUNICATIONS COEXISTENCE SIGNALING - A coexistence signaling scheme for radio communications is described. In one embodiment, a method for coexistence signaling includes establishing first communications and second communications with separate access points or base stations. The method further includes determining protocol timings of the first and second communications. Based on various communications parameters, protocol timings, and identified interference conditions, the method includes generating one or more priority signals to manage the first and second communications. According to certain aspects, overlapping channel conditions can be avoided while maintaining acceptable communications data throughput. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177604 | ELECTRONIC SHELF LABEL SYSTEM AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE SAME - There is provided a method of operating an electronic shelf label system performed by a gateway wirelessly connected to a plurality of electronic shelf label tags and providing data provided from an electronic shelf label server to the plurality of electronic shelf label tags through a data channel, the method including, interlocking with the electronic shelf label server to thereby be allocated time slots of a wakeup channel, providing information regarding the time slots allocated to the gateway to the plurality of electronic shelf label tags, and receiving an update data request from at least one of the plurality of electronic shelf label tags when the time slots allocated to the gateway have elapsed and providing update data in response to the corresponding update data request. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177605 | METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION SCHEDULING BY GROUPING STATIONS - Provided is a transmission scheduling method based on station grouping, including performing physical grouping on stations into sectors based on positions of the stations, performing logical grouping of each physical group into logical groups based on a common characteristic of the stations in each physical group, transmitting, to the stations, access scheduling information used to enable each logical group to access an access point at different time intervals, and controlling a station access based on the access scheduling information. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177606 | MITIGATION OF INTERFERENCE BETWEEN COMMUNICATION TERMINALS IN TD-LTE - A method for communication includes communicating between one or more first base stations ( | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177607 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH LARGE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A method for performing random access by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless network, comprises configuring at least one UE transmit beam for a transmission of a random access signal, generating the at least one UE transmit beam using an antenna array according to the configuration, and transmitting the random access signal to a base station (BS) on the at least one UE transmit beam. An user equipment for performing random access in a wireless network, the User Equipment comprises a processing circuit configured to configure at least one UE transmit beam for a transmission of a random access signal, and generate the at least one UE transmit beam using an antenna array according to the configuration, and transmit the random access signal to the Base Station (BS) on the at least one UE transmit beam. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177608 | USE OF CORRELATION COMBINATION TO ACHIEVE CHANNEL DETECTION - Combinations of correlation results are used to achieve detection of multiple coded signals at a receiver in a wireless communications system. The code applied to signals includes a lower rate code and a higher rate code. The lower rate code is a nested or tiered code such that it comprises at least two code sequences of the higher rate code. The received coded signal is correlated with the higher rate code using a single higher rate correlator to provide a higher rate code correlation result. The higher rate code correlation results are fed to two or more lower rate code correlators that combine multiple higher rate code correlation results, each using a different lower rate code, to provide corresponding lower rate code correlation results. The presence of at least one coded signal or mutually exclusive coded signals can be determined from the lower rate code correlation results. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140177609 | Generation of Digital Clock for System Having RF Circuitry - Circuitry for any of a transceiver, a transmitter, and a receiver, has radio frequency (RF) circuitry, digital circuitry, a carrier signal generator to provide a carrier signal to the RF circuitry and a clock generator for generating a digital clock for clocking at least some of the digital circuitry. The RF circuitry is susceptible to interference from harmonics of the clocking, and the clock generator derives a frequency of the digital clock based on a frequency divided down from a frequency of the carrier signal so that the interference to the RF circuitry occurs at frequencies which are harmonics of the carrier signal. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140185591 | POWER CONTROL WITH DYNAMIC TIMING UPDATE - Methods and apparatuses for wireless communication include determining whether to move a receive window by more than a change in an uplink transmit timing of a user equipment (UE). The methods and apparatuses further include moving the receive window by an amount larger than the change in the uplink transmit timing when a determination is made to move the receive window by more than the change in the uplink transmit timing. Moreover, the methods and apparatuses include identifying at least one cell with receive time within the receive window at the UE. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140185592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CORRECTING REFERENCE TIME FOR DISTRIBUTED TIME SYNCHRONIZATION - In a wireless communication system formed of a plurality of nodes, an arbitrary node receives messages broadcasted from neighbor nodes and calculates amounts of changes in receiving times that are differences between receiving times when the messages are currently received and receiving times when the messages are previously received with respect to the neighbor nodes. The node corrects reference time thereof based on the amounts of changes calculated with respect to the neighbor nodes. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140185593 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING DATA FLOW IN A MULTI-CHIP ENVIRONMENT USING AN INTERCHIP INTERFACE - A processing system includes an interchip interface that comprises an interchip interface module having an arbiter to allocate a dedicated time slice in every fixed number of time slices, to assign a first priority to store data item(s) from a first-type channel having a first datapath width in memory during the dedicated time slice. In the remaining time slices of the fixed number of time slices, the arbiter further arbitrates among multiple channels of one or more types other than a first type, where the multiple channels correspond to at least one datapath width different from the first datapath width, and channels with wider datapath win the arbitration. The arbiter further arbitrates among two or more channels of the same type if a certain type of channel(s) wins the arbitration in a time slice. A method for implementing the same is also disclosed. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140185594 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RECEPTION DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - A communication device comprising a transmission unit and a reception unit. The transmission unit is configured to transmit, to a first communication device, first information indicating a first set of subcarriers comprising of a plurality of subcarriers, and to a second communication device, second information indicating a second set of subcarriers comprising of a plurality of subcarriers. The reception unit is configured to receive a first Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM) signal from the first communication device using the first information and a second Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM) signal from the second communication device using the second information. Also, in the communication device, a portion of the second set of subcarriers can overlap with at least a portion of the first set of subcarriers in a time frame of a plurality of time frames. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140185595 | Determination of the Timing Advance Group - A technique, including initiating an access procedure by making from a communication device an uplink transmission on one component carrier of a plurality of component carriers associated with an access node; thereafter receiving at said communication device group information specifying a group of said plurality of component carriers sharing uplink transmission timing information as a group to which said one component carrier belongs; and making from said communication device a further uplink transmission on said one component carrier using uplink transmission timing information for said group specified in said group information. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140192784 | SYSTEMS AND FOR REDUCING INTERFERENCE IN LONG-RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating a compressed beacon are described herein. In some aspects, a method of receiving a long-range communication in a wireless network is provided. The method includes transmitting, at a first device, a first communication reserving a wireless medium for at least a first time period. The first communication has a first range. The method further includes receiving, at the first device, a second communication during the first time period. The second communication is unidirectional and has a second range longer than the first range. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140192785 | MITIGATING OVERLAPPING BASIC SERVICE SET INTERFERENCE IN SMART GRID NETWORKS - Systems and methods for implementing a mitigation of overlapping basic service set (OBSS) interference are disclosed. Synchronization of access point (AP) devices may be based upon a transmission synchronization function (TSF) offset between the AP devices. In an implementation, collaboration between the AP devices may include exchanging of beacon schedule frames through a controller, or over the air media access. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140192786 | DM RS Based LTE Downlink Physical Layer - It is provided an apparatus, including synchronizing means adapted to synchronize with a cell of a cellular communication system based on a synchronization signal and to obtain a cell identification of the cell; receiving means adapted to receive a symbol only on one or more subcarriers and subframes which carry at least one symbol of a physical broadcast channel; first obtaining means adapted to obtain a common demodulation reference symbol based on the cell identification and the received symbol; demodulating means adapted to demodulate a signal received on the physical broadcast channel based on the common demodulation reference symbol; user equipment means adapted to provide a user equipment functionality of the communication system. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140192787 | MULTIPLE APPEARANCE PROTOCOL FOR TIMELY ORGANIZED AD HOC NETWORK - The present invention comprises a plurality of timely organized ad hoc data communications networks and a method for data communication. A network from the plurality of networks includes media-independent communications links and plurality of network nodes, where a network node in the plurality could be coupled to at least one other network node via a media independent communication link, and a plurality of access points, where each access point in the plurality is coupled to at least one other access point via another media-independent communications link. The network communicates during a data collection cycle that includes a broadcast interval, a time-slotted communications interval and a random access time-slotted communications interval. The plurality of network nodes are arranged in a self-assigned hierarchy where one or more nodes in the plurality of network nodes can be assigned more than one time slot to transmit the network information messages. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140192788 | MULTI-RADIO CONTROLLER AND METHODS FOR PREVENTING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN CO-LOCATED TRANSCEIVERS - Embodiments of a multi-radio controller and methods for preventing interference between co-located transceivers are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the multi-radio controller operates within a multi-radio device and is configured to cause a wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver to transmit a triggering frame after an active period of a wireless wide-area network (WWAN) transceiver. The triggering frame indicates the duration of a transmission opportunity, which may be restricted to the time between active periods of the WWAN. In response to receipt of the triggering frame, the WLAN access point is configured to transmit a downlink data frame within the transmission opportunity. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140192789 | CONCEPT FOR BIDIRECTIONAL DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN A BASE STATION AND A NODE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a base station including bidirectional data transmission to a node. The base station has a receiver for receiving a data packet transmitted by the node at a node transmission frequency, the node transmission frequency being derived from a frequency generator of the node. In addition, the base station has a determiner for determining the node transmission frequency based on the data packet received and for determining a deviation of the frequency generator of the node based on a frequency deviation between the determined node transmission frequency and a set node transmission frequency associated to the node. Furthermore, the base station has a transmitter for transmitting a data packet to the node at a base station transmission frequency, the transmitter for transmitting the data packet being configured to set the base station transmission frequency based on the determined deviation of the frequency generator of the node. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140198773 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SPECIAL SUBFRAME CONFIGURATION FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION - A user equipment (UE) for special subframe configuration for carrier aggregation is described. The UE includes a processor and memory in electronic communication with the processor. Executable instructions are stored in the memory. The UE transmits and receives based on the special subframe configuration, regardless of a combination of special subframe configurations of the aggregated cells. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140198774 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING RANGING OF MOBILE TERMINALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for controlling ranging in a wireless communication system. The apparatus according to the present invention comprises a Radio Frequency (RF) module converting RF band signals received via antenna to low-frequency band signal; a Fast Fourier transform (FFT) module converting the low-frequency band signal of time-domain to frequency-domain signal; a derandomizer performing derandomizing the frequency-domain signals by using a random sequence being transmitted by the terminals; a depermutation module combining the frequency-domain signals output from the derandomizer by unit of burst and outputting the combined signal; and a ranging controller controlling periodic ranging of the terminal corresponding to the respective bursts by estimating phase change in the frequency-domain signals of burst unit. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140198775 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH A MAPPING SYSTEM ALLOWING NODES TO REGISTER WITH A CONTROLLER - A communication system is provided that includes a controller providing a map of information to enable communication with a plurality of nodes. The information includes identification of two separate time slots, one for random access requests when a node initially contacts a controller and another for exclusively assigned access to transmit messages. The map can further provide information to enable identification of the nodes and assign transmission frequencies. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140198776 | METHODS OF TRANSMITTING AND/OR RECEIVING DATA TRANSMISSIONS USING INFORMATION RELATING TO OTHER DATA TRANSMISSIONS AND RELATED NETWORK NODES - A method may be provided to receive communications at a first node operating in a wireless communication network from a second node. The method may include receiving first information from the second node operating in the wireless communication network, wherein the first information is for a first data transmission from the second node to the first node. Second information may be received from the second node, wherein the second information is for a second data transmission to a third node operating in the wireless communication network. The first data transmission may be received at the first node from the second node using the first information for the first data transmission received from the second node and using the second information for the second data transmission received from the second node. Related transmission methods, network nodes, and wireless terminals are also discussed. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140198777 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system comprising first and second master stations configured to perform synchronous wireless communication with a slave station via a first network, and a control station configured to be connected to the first and second master stations via a second network, wherein the control station transmits time information used to synchronize times of the first and second master stations to each of the first and second master stations via the second network, wherein one of the first and second master stations performs timing based on the time information from the control station, and wherein the other of the first and second master stations performs the timing based on announcement information announcing the time information transmitted from the one of the first and second master stations via the first network. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140198778 | HOPPING MASTER IN WIRELESS CONFERENCE - A first radio has duplex communication with a second radio and a third radio, without using a base station by using a multiple-access protocol system. The first radio is configured to switch back and forth between being a master radio and a slave radio in the multiple-access protocol system. In some embodiments, time-division multiplexing is used as the multiple-access protocol system for the first radio, the second radio, and the third radio to communicate. In some embodiments, the master radio provides timing synchronization and/or assigns transmission slots for radios in the multiple-access protocol system. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140204916 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION LINKS - A system and method for managing a communication link between a consumer electronic device adapted for two-way, wireless communications with at least one peripheral. The communication link is managed using a controller that is associated with the consumer electronic device that functions to assign communication slots to the peripheral to facilitate communications between the peripheral and the consumer electronic device. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140204917 | Method of Managing Packet Transmission for Wireless System - A method of managing packet transmission for a first wireless system wherein the first wireless system coexists with at least one second wireless system includes receiving a first type of packet of the first wireless system; determining whether the step of receiving the first type of packet is interfered by a second type of packet of one of the at least one second wireless system; and modifying a priority of the first type of packet when the first type of packet is interfered. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140204918 | TCP RECOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method for Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) recovery in a transmitter for a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes detecting an event for releasing a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection with a receiver, storing a TCP packet for the receiver when the RRC connection is released, reestablishing the RRC connection with the receiver, determining whether a session for the stored TCP packet exists, and transmitting the stored TCP packet to the receiver when determined that the session for the stored TCP packet exists. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140204919 | MULTIPLE POWER CONTROL AND TIMING ADVANCE LOOPS DURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method of wireless communication includes receiving a signal from an base station. The method also includes determining a timing advance loop from a set of timing advance loops, and/or a power control loop from a set of power control loops. The determination is based on the received signal. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140204920 | METHOD TO PREVENT HYPER FRAME NUMBER DE-SYNCHRONIZATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for HFN synchronization in a wireless communication system. If re-establishment of an RLC entity occurs during a pending RLC reset procedure, the pending RLC reset procedure is aborted and the re-establishment of the RLC entity is performed. A first RC variable included in a RESET PDU is incremented. The pending RLC reset procedure is restarted. The RESET PDU including the incremented first RC variable is transmitted. A RESET ACKnowledgement (ACK) PDU for the RESET PDU including a second RC variable is received. The second RC variable included in the received RESET ACK PDU is checked and the received RESET ACK PDU is accepted based on the checking result. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140204921 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A wireless communication system includes a base station ( | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140204922 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK SIGNALS FROM A USER EQUIPMENT TO A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE SAME - A method for transmitting uplink signals from a user equipment to a base station in a time division multiplexing wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of transmitting a first uplink signal on an uplink subframe or a special subframe that precedes the uplink subframe, by preceding a first timing advance value at a reference time; and transmitting a second uplink signal on the uplink subframe by preceding a second timing advance value at the reference time, wherein the first timing advance value is greater than the second timing advance value, and the first uplink signal is transmitted for an uplink pilot time slot (UpPTS) period of the special subframe if a difference value between the first timing advance value and the second timing advance value is greater than a preset value. | 07-24-2014 |
| 20140211764 | SYNCHRONIZING GENERATION AND TRANSMISSION OF KEEP-ALIVE MESSAGES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for generating keep-alive messages for a plurality of persistent connections. The plurality of persistent connections associated with at least one application on a wireless device in a network hosting the plurality of persistent connections are identified. A timing schedule specific to the network to transmit keep-alive messages to refresh each persistent connection of the plurality of persistent connections is identified. A generation of the keep-alive messages for each persistent connection of the plurality of persistent connections is synchronized. The synchronized generation of the keep-alive messages occurs according to the identified timing schedule of the network. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140211765 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL PROGRAM AND CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication device includes a memory, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to specify a timing for transmitting a signal for requesting information about a second base station that is used for voice data communication when conducting outgoing or incoming voice communication while conducting communication through a first base station that is used for data communication other than voice communication, transmit, in accordance with the specified timing, the signal for requesting the information about the second base station, and adjust by advancing the specified timing when a request for conducting incoming or outgoing voice communication is received. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140211766 | IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE OF MULTIPLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES - In a method of operating a device configured to communicate according to at least a first communication protocol and a second communication protocol, a time division multiplexing (TDM) pattern is obtained. The TDM pattern is defined for communication according to the first communication protocol is obtained. The TDM pattern defines communication periodicity that includes a scheduled period and an unscheduled period. A guard interval is reserved within the unscheduled period, and the unscheduled period is used for communication according to the second communication protocol. The guard interval is used to transition to an inactive state with respect to the second communication protocol. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140211767 | Scheduling Communications - In methods and apparatus for communications scheduling for at least one device in a first direction is determined by a controller. Information relating to the scheduling is communicated in at least one assignment associated with a second direction for use in configuring of data transmission in the first direction. After a device receives the assignment it determines from the assignment information relating to the scheduling and data transmissions in the first direction are configured based on the assignment associated with the second direction. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140211768 | ACK/NACK FEEDBACK METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of ACK/NACK feedback in a wireless communication system. The method includes determining, by a UE, a number of public sub-frames, all of which are uplink sub-frame in PCC and any SCC sub-frames of any radio frame in frame structure configurations according to the frame structure configurations of the PCC and any SCC, selecting, by the UE, a configuration, uplink sub-frames of which merely include sub-frames corresponding to the determined number of public sub-frames from existing seven kinds of frame structure configurations, and feeding back, by the UE, to an eNB ACK/NACK information corresponding to PDSCH in the SCC on the PCC adopting a timing relationship between the PDSCH and the ACK/NACK corresponding to the selected configuration. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140211769 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL, BASE STATION, AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - Embodiments of the present application provide a method for determining a transmission time interval, a base station, and a radio network controller. A base station receives uplink data sent from a user equipment in an idle state or a cell forward access channel state on an enhanced dedicated transmission channel. The base station determines a transmission time interval (TTI) used by the user equipment for sending the uplink data, and sends the uplink data and a transmission time interval indicator in an enhanced dedicated transmission channel data frame to a radio network controller. The radio network controller acquires the TTI, thereby ensuring that the radio network controller selects and configures an appropriate TTI for the user equipment when the user equipment transits from the Cell_FACH state to the Cell_DCH state. | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140211770 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CSI ON THE PUSCH IN AN LTE SYSTEM - The present invention relates to allowing configuring CSI reporting (step S- | 07-31-2014 |
| 20140219255 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - Among other things, a communication system comprising remote units and a controller is described. Each of the remote units comprises one or more radio frequency (RF) units to exchange RF signals with mobile devices. At least some of the RF signals comprise information destined for, or originating from, a mobile device. The controller comprises one or more modems and is connected to an external network. At least one of the modems is a baseband modem and is configured to pass first data corresponding to the information. The at least one of the modems is configured to perform real-time scheduling of the first data corresponding to the information. The controller is separated from the remote units by an intermediate network. The intermediate network comprises a switched Ethernet network over which second data corresponding to the information is carried in frames between the controller and the remote units. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140219256 | Method of accessing a communication medium used by a plurality of communication terminals - A method of accessing a communication medium used by a plurality of communication terminals, comprising the following steps, performed by a first communication terminal belonging to a group of communication terminals from the plurality of communication terminals:
| 08-07-2014 |
| 20140219257 | UPLINK SCRAMBLING DURING RANDOM ACCESS - The technology described in this case facilitates random access by a user terminal with a radio base station. A user terminal determines one of a first type of uplink scrambling sequences and generates a random access message using the determined one of the first type of uplink scrambling sequences. The random access message is transmitted to the base station. The user terminal receives from the base station a second, different type of uplink scrambling sequence and uses it for subsequent communication with the radio base station. For example, the first uplink scrambling sequences may be specifically associated with the radio base station's cell area or a random access radio channel associated with the radio base station, but they are not specifically assigned to any user terminal, and the second uplink scrambling sequence may be selected from a second set of uplink scrambling sequences specifically assignable to individual user terminals. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140219258 | FAST SWITCHING OF FORWARD LINK IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - A technique for distributing channel allocation information in a demand access communication system. Multiple access codes are used that have a defined code repeat period or code epoch. For each such epoch duration, a schedule of assignment of traffic channels to active terminals for each epoch is determined. For each terminal designated as active during the epoch, a list of active channels for such terminal unit is assigned. Prior to the start of each epoch, a channel set up message is sent on one of the forward link channels, such as a paging channel, indicating the lists of active channels for epochs of the associated traffic channel(s) that are to follow. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140219259 | Method, System, Base Station and Terminal for Sending Multipoint Transmission System Data - The present document provides a method, a multi-point transmission system, a base station and a terminal for transmitting data in a multi-point transmission system. The method includes: for a User Equipment (UE) enabling multi-point transmission, a base station to which a secondary serving cell of the UE belongs adjusting a time when a High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) and a High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-PDSCH) are transmitted to the UE according to frame offset information of the primary and secondary serving cells of the UE, so that a subframe boundary offset between the HS-PDSCHs of the primary and secondary serving cells received by the UE is within a specified range, and a subframe boundary offset between the HS-SCCHs of the primary and secondary serving cells received by the UE is within the same specified range. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140233535 | UPLINK TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SYSTEM - The invention discloses an uplink transmission method and apparatus in a carrier aggregation system and relates to the field of radio communications so as to address the issue of how to perform uplink transmission in a secondary cell when a base station configures a user equipment additionally with the secondary cell. In the invention, a user equipment selects, under a preset reference carrier selection rule, one of downlink carriers corresponding to cells having already eatablished downlink synchronization with a base station as a timing reference downlink carrier used by a secondary cell after the base station configures the user equipment additionally with the secondary cell; and the user equipment performs uplink transmission in the secondary cell according to downlink timing of the timing reference downlink carrier. With the invention, a timing reference downlink carrier used by an additionally configured secondary cell in uplink transmission can be determined and uplink transmission can be further preformed over the timing reference downlink carrier. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233536 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and a device for performing communication in a wireless communication system are provided. In the wireless communication system, a transmitter determines a communication state for first devices using a first communication scheme for a first time interval, determines a duration of a second time interval to be allocated for the first devices, and transmits information on the second time interval having the determined duration to the first devices before the second time interval starts, wherein the first time interval and the second time interval are included in a frame allocated for a second communication scheme that different from the first communication scheme, wherein a frequency used for the first communication scheme is identical to a frequency used for the second communication scheme, and wherein a signal transmission operation of second devices using the second communication scheme is suspended during the first time interval and the second time interval. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233537 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - Disclosed are a method and a device for sending and receiving downlink control information. The method comprises: discrete user-specific search space is determined, control channel resources corresponding to the discrete user-specific search spaces being distributed discretely; and the downlink control information on the discrete user-specific search space is sent. Through the disclosure, the diversity effect of sending physical downlink control information is improved. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233538 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - Disclosed are a method and a device for data transmission, which relate to the field of wireless communication technologies, and are used for decreasing signaling overhead of a system in this application, an eNB delivers a scheduling radio network temporary identifier RNTI to a terminal; the eNB schedules uplink resources and/or downlink resources for the terminal through a physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by using the scheduling RNTI, receives uplink data sent by the terminal on the scheduled uplink resources, and sends downlink data to the terminal on the scheduled downlink resources. The terminal monitors the PDCCH scrambled by using the scheduling RNTI, and sends the uplink data and/or receives the downlink data by using the resources scheduled by the monitored PDCCH. The method of this application can be used to effectively decrease the signaling overhead of the system. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233539 | Soft Cell Inter-Layer Interference Handling - In a heterogeneous cell deployment a mobile terminal may need to receive control data transmissions from a macro node at the same time as a pico node is transmitting user data for the mobile terminal, using the same frequency or set of frequencies. This can result in a problematic interference situation. According to several embodiments of the present invention, at least one of two general approaches is used to mitigate the interference situation described above. In a first approach, the pico node's transmission power is reduced in some time intervals, thereby reducing the interference to a level where reception from the macro node is possible. In a second approach, which may be combined with the first approach in some cases, the data transmitted from the macro node is provided by the pico node, either alone or in combination with the macro node. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233540 | Method and Apparatus for Modulation and Coding Scheme Adaption in a MIMO System - Method and apparatus for decoding a transmitted signal by a receiver in a MIMO system into a first estimate component for estimating a first signal, a first interference component indicating interference resulting from a correlation relationship among a set of signals to be transmitted, and a first noise component. A base station generates the transmitted signal from the set of signals through a coding process, the coding process defining a correlation relationship amongst the set of signals. The correlation information about the correlation relationship is transmitted to the receiver directly or by a dedicated reference symbol. The decoding is performed by determining a linear receiver filter for the first signal in accordance with the correlation information, and de-correlating the first signal and interferences. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233541 | BUNDLING SCHEDULING METHOD IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a bundling scheduling method in a wireless access system and an apparatus therefor. Specifically, the bundling scheduling method in the wireless access system comprises the steps of: transmitting the bundled downlink control information including a plurality of downlink control information through one physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) to a terminal; transmitting the downlink data, to the terminal, through a plurality of physical downlink shared channels (PDSCH) scheduled by the bundled downlink control information; and receiving acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) information for the plurality of PDSCHs from the terminal. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140233542 | METHOD AND MOBILE NODE FOR DETERMINING A POINT IN TIME FOR TRANSMISSIONS - Method and mobile node in a wireless communication network for determining when to transmit a signal. The mobile node operates in a wireless communication network comprising a first cell and a second cell where the mobile node is synchronized to the first cell. The method comprises determining a timing reference based on a reception of a downlink transmission in the first cell and transmitting the signal, to be received in the second cell, at a point in time based on the timing reference and a timing advance value of the first cell. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140241327 | ADJUSTING INITIAL TRANSMIT POWER FOR HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION - A method of wireless communication adjusts the transmit power for high speed data communications. A UE determines whether a random access channel is configured on an uplink traffic time slot. When the random access channel is configured on the uplink traffic time slot, the UE transmits a high speed data channel with adjusted transmit (TX) power based at least in part on transmit power used for a scheduling request. | 08-28-2014 |
| 20140241328 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION APPARATUS, INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, AND SPECIFYING METHOD AND PROGRAM - An information distribution system including radio devices installed in carriages; wireless terminals; and an information distribution apparatus. Each wireless terminal includes: a first communication unit receiving radio signals transmitted by the radio devices; a determination unit specifying, based on a reception time period and signal strength of the radio signals received by the first communication unit, a radio device installed in the carriage and a second communication unit transmitting data indicative of the radio device specified by the determination unit to an information distribution apparatus. The information distribution apparatus includes: a receiving unit receiving data including identification information indicative of a radio device from which a wireless terminal has received a radio signal and a carriage in which a user of the wireless terminal is aboard; a generation unit generating a content including information corresponding to the carriage based on the data received and a distribution unit distributing the content. | 08-28-2014 |
| 20140241329 | Method For Activating Multiple Streams Transmission UE To Transmit HS-DPCCH And UE Thereof - The present document provides a method for a User Equipment (UE) which activates multi-stream transmission to transmit a High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH) and a UE thereof, wherein the method is applied in a multi-stream transmission system, and includes: after receiving High-Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH) subframes transmitted from primary and secondary serving cells, the UE which activates the multi-stream transmission transmitting a HS-DPCCH carrying jointly encoded Acknowledge/Negative Acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) and Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) after a predetermined duration by taking a later received HS-PDSCH subframe of the pair of paired HS-PDSCH subframes as a reference, wherein the predetermined duration is determined according to a timing correlation by which the UE transmits the HS-DPCCH subframe and correspondingly receives the HS-PDSCH subframe, which is specified in the 3 | 08-28-2014 |
| 20140247813 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING INFORMATION - A communication device is described including a transceiver configured to establish a communication connection via a first radio cell and to carry out data communication via the communication connection according to a frame structure including a plurality of frames, a determiner configured to determine timings for a plurality of data communications via a second radio cell, determine whether, for any frame of the plurality of frames, the number of timings falling within the frame is above a predetermined threshold and determine, if for any frame of the plurality of frames, the number of timings falling within the frame is above the predetermined threshold, change the timings such that for no frame of the plurality of frames the number of timings falling within the frame is above the predetermined threshold and a controller configured to control the transceiver to carry out the data communications via the second radio cell according to the timings. | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140247814 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SPECIAL BURST TRANSMISSIONS TO REDUCE UPLINK AND DOWNLINK INTERFERENCE FOR TD-SCDMA SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus in wireless communications is provided. The method may include determining an occurrence of a special burst time slot, and obtaining one or more control symbols located in a first data field and a second data field of the special burst time slot. | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140247815 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING FREQUENCY HOPPING IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are provided for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system. Hopping information including at least a number of sub-bands is received. Resource allocation information is received. A resource for transmitting the data is determined based on the resource allocation information and the hopping information. The data is transmitted using the determined resource. The resource for transmitting the data is determined according to at least one of applying a change of a resource allocation within inter sub-bands and applying a change of the resource allocation within an intra sub-band. A sub-band includes at least one sub-channel, and one sub-channel includes a plurality of sub-carriers | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140247816 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. Particularly, the present invention pertains to a method for receiving a PDCCH signal in a wireless communication system and a device therefor, and the method comprises: receiving a subframe that includes a PDCCH search space, monitoring a plurality of PDCCH candidates in the PDCCH search space, and performing an operation according to a PDCCH signal if the PDCCH signal indicated to the UE is detected, wherein if the subframe is a first subframe, the PDCCH search space is configured in a first time domain of the subframe, if the subframe is a second subframe, the PDCCH search space is configured in a second time domain of the subframe, and the first time domain and the second time domain are multiplexed at the subframe by time division multiplexing (TDM). | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140247817 | SCHEDULING METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention provides a scheduling method in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) system and a device therefor. Specifically, a method for allocating a guaranteed time slot (GTS) in a WPNA system comprises the steps of: receiving a GTS request command for requesting periodic GTS allocation from a device; and transmitting a beacon frame which includes periodic GTS allocation information to the device, wherein a GTS allocation interval is determined by GTS interval information included in the GTS request command, and an allocated periodic GTS expires if data or an acknowledgement (ACK) frame is not transmitted from the device within a section determined by the GTS allocation interval. | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140254564 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL INTERFERENCE - Methods and apparatus for controlling interference with regard to important control signals, e.g., synchronization signals and broadcast channel signals, are described. A configurable base station monitors for and receives signals from other base stations in its local vicinity and determines the implemented frame timings corresponding to the other deployed base stations. If possible, the configurable base station selects to use a frame timing offset which is different from the frame timing offsets being used by the other base stations. In some embodiments, symbol level and subframe level synchronization are maintained between the base stations; however, frame level synchronization may, and sometimes does vary. Different adjacent base stations may, and sometimes do, intentionally offset their frame boundaries by multiples of a subframe. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254565 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLE CONCURRENT WLAN OPERATIONAL MODES - Systems and methods are provided for enhancing the concurrency of a wireless device operating in multiple network contexts. At least one virtual interface may be implemented for each network context. A recurring communication event having a defined interval associated with one of the network contexts may be identified and the interval may be time divided into multiple operation periods, such that each operation period corresponds to one of the virtual interfaces. Accordingly, each virtual interface may be given access to the physical transceiver during the corresponding operation period. As desired, the operation periods may be subdivided into one or more slots, which may be associated with different priorities of communication. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254566 | METHODS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATIONS, AND SYSTEM FOR SYNCHRONIZING DEVICES AND NEIGHBOR AREA NETWORKING (NAN) CONFIGURATION - Embodiments of a user station (STA) and methods for synchronizing with devices in a wireless communication network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a STA accesses a list of social channels. The STA may transmit a scan message on a primary social channel. The primary social channel may be included in the list of social channels. The STA may determine an identity of the primary social channel by inspecting the list of social channels. The STA may synchronize with a device on the primary social channel when the STA detects transmissions on the primary social channel within a time duration subsequent to transmitting the scan message on the primary social channel. Otherwise, the STA may transmit a scan message on a secondary social channel selected from the list. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254567 | CARRIER TYPE (NCT) INFORMATION EMBEDDED IN SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL - A Second Synchronous Signal (SSS) for a 3GPP LTE downlink signal is generated in such a way that a legacy User Equipment (UE) can determine whether the downlink signal comprises a legacy downlink signal or a New Carrier Type (NCT) downlink signal, which is unavailable to a legacy UE. One exemplary embodiment provides that a first binary sequence and a second binary sequence are generated in which the first and second binary sequences are part of the SSS for the downlink signal. The first binary sequence is multiplied by a first scrambling sequence, and the second binary sequence by a second scrambling sequence in which the first and second scrambling sequences are selected to indicate that the downlink signal is a new carrier type downlink signal. Other exemplary embodiments provide that an order of the first and second scrambling sequences indicates whether the downlink signal is a NCT downlink signal. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254568 | SEMICONDUCTOR MODULE - A semiconductor module includes a first transmission circuit outputting a first transmission signal of a first wireless communication system based on time-division multiplexing, a second transmission circuit outputting a second transmission signal of a second wireless communication system based on time-division multiplexing, and a switch circuit outputting a reception signal from an antenna, as a first reception signal of the first wireless communication system or a second reception signal of the second wireless communication system, outputting the first transmission signal and the first reception signal in a time division manner, and outputting the second transmission signal and the second reception signal in a time division manner. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254569 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISCOVERING AND SYNCHRONIZING WITHIN A NEIGHBOR AWARE NETWORK - Methods, devices, and computer program products for optimization of message transmission intervals in a NAN are described herein. In one aspect, a method for discovering a cluster of STA's forming a NAN is provided. The method includes generating a NAN beacon at an access point (AP). The NAN beacon includes timing information for the NAN. The timing information indicates a first time interval when one or more messages can be transmitted within the NAN. The method further includes transmitting the NAN beacon. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254570 | METHOD OF RESOLVING OVERLAPS IN DATA TRANSMISSION AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREFOR - A method of a user equipment (UE) operating in a wireless communication system and the user equipment are discussed. The method includes receiving a timing advance command for indicating a change of uplink timing relative to a current uplink timing in a subframe; and when uplink transmissions in a subframe n and a subframe n+1 are overlapped due to the timing advance command, transmitting the subframe n completely. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254571 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, RECEIVING METHOD, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - Random access technology is provided for establishing an individual channel between a radio communication terminal device and a base station device in a short time and a radio communication terminal device executing the random access method. A RACH sub-channel allocation unit allocates a transmission packet input from a replication unit to an arbitrary sub-carrier at the RACH arbitrary time slot at random. An allocation unit judges whether an overlap is generated in the allocation result obtained by the RACH sub-channel allocation unit. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140254572 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK RADIO RESOURCES - A method and apparatus for managing radio resources in one or more wireless communication networks. At least one radio resource manager (RRM) is provided within a network node, or as an independent entity. The RRM monitors performance on wireless communication links of the network(s) and interacts with nodes associated with those links to change the configuration on a particular wireless communication link if its performance (i.e., quality) falls below an established threshold. Information regarding current resource usage of the network is sent to the RRM by the nodes. Each of the nodes may send a quality report to the RRM including wireless communication link quality measurements and performance statistics. Alternatively, the RRM may perform the wireless communication link quality measurements. The RRM facilitates the broadcasting of information regarding current resource usage of one network to other networks to avoid collisions and interference. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140269627 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING DECODING TIME ACROSS TRANSPORT BLOCKS - Techniques for efficiently decoding data at a receiver are disclosed. In one aspect, total available decoding time of the receiver is initially allocated to a plurality of code blocks of a plurality of transport blocks to obtain initial allocated decoding times for the plurality of code blocks. The initial allocated decoding time for each code block may be given by a particular number of decoding iterations to perform for that code block. One or more code blocks of one or more transport blocks are decoded. After decoding the one or more code blocks, a remaining available decoding time is determined and reallocated to undecoded code blocks of the plurality of transport blocks to obtain updated allocated decoding times for the undecoded code blocks. The remaining available decoding time may be reallocated across code blocks of a transport block, across transport blocks, across carriers, across radio access technologies, or a combination thereof. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269628 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR OVERLAPPING BSS COORDINATION OF MACRO/PICO WI-FI NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention provide signaling mechanisms for wireless networks composed of a large number of stations. An example method embodiment comprises: receiving, by an access node of an access network, a frame from an overlapped access network, indicating time restrictions for reserving a wireless medium for the access network; and coordinating, by the access node of the access network, transmissions by members of the access network, to comply with the time restrictions for reserving the wireless medium for the access network. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269629 | RETRANSMISSION TIMER IN A HIGH SPEED DATA NETWORK - A system and method include adjusting a retransmission timer in a high speed network. The hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) retransmission timer is adjusted to a minimum of: a network signaled value for the HARQ retransmission timer, a network signaled value for a radio link control (RLC) retransmission timer, and a user equipment (UE) measured time of when feedback is received from a network in response to a retransmission. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269630 | USER BASED NETWORK COMPONENT ANALYTICS - A data record server is configured to receive transmission measurement data from one or more network components containing information about one or more packet data communications and create a data record for each of packet data communications. Data records corresponding to a particular network component are identified, associated with one or more time slots in a data measurement compilation, and used to analyze the resource usage of a network component by one or more of the subscribers or mobile devices. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269631 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GROUPING NODES TO REDUCE COLLISIONS - Systems, methods, and devices for grouping nodes to reduce collisions are described herein. In one aspect, a method for reducing collisions in a wireless communication network is provided. The method includes receiving a packet from a first wireless device, the packer including an indication of a packet loss observed by the first wireless device. The method then determines that a collision occurred based on the indication of a packet loss. The method then assigns at least one wireless device to at least one group, based at least in part on the detected collision. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269632 | ESTABLISHING MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN A USER EQUIPMENT AND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK NODES - A control plane connection is established between a user equipment (UE) and a first wireless access network node. Signaling in the control plane connection is used for establishing a plurality of connections between the UE and corresponding additional plurality of wireless access network nodes, to communicate user plane data between the UE and the additional wireless access network nodes. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269633 | COEXISTENCE OF A WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK DEVICE IN TIME DIVISION DUPLEX (TDD) MODE WITH A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (AP) - In one embodiment, a wireless access point (AP) receives messages from a wireless wide area network (WWAN) device, wherein these messages identify parameters of future WWAN frames. Each message identifies a starting time, an operating band, an upload/download sub-frame configuration, and a special sub-frame pattern of a WWAN frame. The AP uses the parameters defined by each received message to determine whether to transmit a beacon frame at a scheduled target beacon transmission time (TBTT), or delay the transmission of the beacon frame to a delayed TBTT. The AP will not delay the scheduled TBTT if the parameters defined by the received message indicate there are no co-existence problems. However, the AP will delay a transmission from the scheduled TBTT if this scheduled TBTT coincides with a downlink sub-frame of the WWAN frame, and the WWAN frame has an operating band subject to interference from the intended transmission. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269634 | PRIORITIZED AIRTIME-AWARE SCHEDULING FOR WIRELESS LOCAL-AREA NETWORK - A method for communication includes accepting in an Access Point (AP) data items for transmission over a wireless channel to multiple terminals served by the AP. Aggregate airtimes, which were previously allocated to the respective terminals on the wireless channel, are assessed. Transmission of the data items is scheduled depending on the aggregate airtimes. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269635 | AIRTIME-AWARE SCHEDULING FOR WIRELESS LOCAL-AREA NETWORK - A method for communication includes accepting in an Access Point (AP) data items for transmission over a wireless channel to multiple terminals served by the AP. Aggregate airtimes, which were previously allocated to the respective terminals on the wireless channel, are assessed. Transmission of the data items is scheduled depending on the aggregate airtimes. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269636 | Data Aggregation Method and Network Architecture for Robust Real-Time Wireless Industrial Communication - A wireless data network includes a master wireless node and a plurality of slave wireless nodes that are configured to transmit data using at least two independent channels. A first slave wireless node transmits data to a second slave wireless node using a first independent channel concurrently to a third slave wireless node transmitting data to the master wireless node using a second independent channel during a first time slot, the transmission from the third slave wireless node including a fixed overhead time. The second slave wireless node transmits the data from the first slave wireless node and additional data for the second slave wireless node to the master wireless node during a second time slot, the transmission from the second node including the fixed overhead time. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269637 | DETECTING MISSING RRC CONNECTION RELEASE MESSAGE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. The UE determines a possibility of failing to receive an RRC connection release message from a network. The UE sends a communication to the network in order to determine whether the UE failed to receive the RRC connection release message. The UE may perform one of maintaining or changing an RRC state based on the communication sent to the network. The UE may maintain an RRC connected state upon determining that the UE did not fail to receive the RRC connection release message from the network. The UE may change from an RRC connected state to an RRC idle state upon determining that the UE failed to receive the RRC connection release message from the network. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269638 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING ENHANCED POSITION LOCATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments disclosed herein relate to methods and systems for providing improved position-location (e.g., time-of-arrival) measurement and enhanced position location in wireless communication systems. In an embodiment, an access point may replace information (e.g., data) transmission by a “known” transmission (or “reference transmission”) at a predetermined time known to access terminals in the corresponding sectors. The access terminals may use the received reference transmission to perform a position-location measurement, and report back the measured information. The access point may also send a reference transmission on demand, e.g., in response to a request from an access terminal in need for a location-based service. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269639 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA AND CONTROL INFORMATION THROUGH AN UPLINK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method are provided for transmitting data and control information in a wireless communication system. The method include determining if the control information is to be transmitted via a data channel; and if the control information is to be transmitted in the data channel, determining a number of symbols for coded control information in consideration of the data, generating the coded control information based on the number of symbols for the coded control information, generating coded data based on an MCS for the data, multiplexing the coded data and the coded control information, modulating the multiplexed coded control information and coded data by a modulation scheme, performing FT on the modulated coded control information and coded data, performing IFT on the FTed coded control information and coded data based on sub-carrier mapping, and transmitting the IFTed coded control information and coded data via the data channel. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269640 | ARCHITECTURE TO SUPPORT NETWORK-WIDE MULTIPLE-IN-MULTIPLE-OUT WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OVER A DOWNLINK - The present invention provides a method of coordinating the downlink transmissions from a plurality of base stations to at least one mobile unit. The method is implemented in a control plane entity and includes receiving, at the control plane entity and from each of the plurality of base stations, channel state information for a plurality of wireless communication channels between the plurality of base stations and one or more mobile units. The method also includes determining, at the control plane entity and based on the channel state information, transmission formats for downlink transmissions from the plurality of base stations to the mobile unit(s). The method further includes providing the transmission formats to the plurality of base stations. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140269641 | METHOD FOR TRANSRECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - In the present invention, disclosed are a method for transceiving a reference signal in a wireless access system supporting device-to-device communication, and apparatus for same. More particularly, comprised are the steps of: a first device transmitting the reference signal for aligning device-to-device synchronization with a second device; and the first device performing device-to-device communication with the second device performing device-to-device synchronization with the second device after obtaining synchronization with the second device, wherein the reference signal is mapped on a predetermined symbol inside a resource that is allocated for device-to-device communication with the second device. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140286318 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND SCHEDULING DEVICE - A scheduling method by a scheduling device, the scheduling method including: receiving a first signal including a plurality of first reference signals from a terminal, the plurality of first reference signals being time multiplexed and having a same frequency, estimating a frequency deviation of the first signal based on the plurality of first reference signals of the first signal, transmitting a second signal to the terminal based on the frequency deviation, the second signal instructing the terminal to transmit a third signal in which the plurality of first reference signals and a second reference signal are time multiplexed in a specified period and have a same frequency. | 09-25-2014 |
| 20140286319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE HIDDEN NODE PROTECTION - A method and a wireless communication device to overcome a hidden node problem in a BSS. The method includes detecting that transmitting one or more data frames causing one or more nodes of an unsynchronized wireless communication network to become hidden nodes. The wireless communication device that causes the hidden node problem requests a time allocation for transmitting one or more data frames to at least one node of the unsynchronized wireless communication network and to transmit the one or more data frames using an antenna beam forming technique at the allocated time frame. | 09-25-2014 |
| 20140286320 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for indicating a transmission time interval. The implementation solutions of the method includes: receiving an access preamble from a user equipment UE, where the access preamble carries a signature; determining whether a cell where the UE is located is configured with an extended acquisition indicator EAI, and sending, on an acquisition indicator channel AICH of an access timeslot corresponding to an access timeslot where the access preamble is received, an acquisition indicator AI corresponding to the signature of the access preamble. Therefore, the problem that the judging condition of EAI configured is always YES is solved; the UE access delay may be reduced; the number of preambles sent by the UE may be reduced; and interference on the uplink may be reduced. | 09-25-2014 |
| 20140293968 | ALIGNING TIMING FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATIONS - In some implementations, a method includes compensating for timing misalignment of subframes associated with at least one of first user equipment (UE) or a second UE. The first UE and the second UE are in an inter-device session (IDS) for direct UE-to-UE communication, and timing for the first UE and a timing for the second UE is derived from an eNode B (eNB). | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293969 | UTILIZATION OF REDUNDANT INDICATION FIELD - A method of utilizing same indication fields of time slots for different purposes includes: transmitting an indication signal in an indication field of at least one first time slot on a dedicated physical channel (DPCH); and transmitting at least one known symbol in an indication field of at least one second time slot on the DPCH, wherein the known symbol is arranged for estimating channel characteristics. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293970 | WLAN UPLINK SCHEDULER FOR LTE-WLAN AGGREGATION - Techniques for improving uplink throughput of UE uplink transmissions are disclosed. The UE may communicate with an eNB over an LTE wireless link using a first radio, and with a WLAN access point over a WLAN wireless link using a second radio. The UE may schedule a first portion of uplink data from an aggregating layer of the UE for transmission over the WLAN wireless link during a scheduling window, the scheduling based on an availability of access to the LTE wireless link. The UE may transmit the first portion of the uplink data over the WLAN wireless link during the scheduling window. The aggregation of the LTE wireless link with the WLAN wireless link may allow the UE to transmit uplink data from the aggregating layer of the UE over both the LTE wireless link or the WLAN wireless link. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293971 | EMPLOYING NEIGHBORING CELL ASSISTANCE INFORMATION FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for employing a neighboring cell's assistance information for interference mitigation (e.g., by conveying the information to a user equipment). A base station (BS) may determine assistance information for a neighboring cell and convey it to a user equipment (UE). A UE may receive assistance information for a neighboring cell and use that information for performing interference cancellation or suppression on received signals. The UE may receive the assistance information from a serving cell or a non-serving cell. The assistance information may be valid for a particular transmission instance, for a known period of time, or until updated by a BS. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293972 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE NETWORK TECHNIQUE USING ISOCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION - A network including a plurality of nodes each configured as transmitters, receivers, or transceivers. At least one of the nodes may be configured to wirelessly transmit a repeating isochronous signal for reception by one or more of the other nodes. The isochronous phase and/or frequency of the repeating isochronous transmission may be variably adjusted to reduce signal interference. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293973 | Method of TDM In-Device Coexistence Interference Avoidance - A method of TDM in-device coexistence (IDC) interference avoidance is proposed. In a wireless communication device, a first radio module is co-located with a second radio module in the same device platform. The first radio module obtains traffic and scheduling information of the second radio module. The first radio module then determines a desired TDM pattern based on the traffic and scheduling information to prevent IDC interference with the second radio module. The first radio module also transmits TDM coexistence pattern information based on the desired TDM pattern to a base station. In one embodiment, the TDM coexistence pattern information comprises a recommended TDM pattern periodicity and a scheduling period to maximize IDC efficiency subject to limited level of IDC interference possibility. In one specific example, the TDM coexistence pattern information comprises a set of discontinuous reception (DRX) configuration parameters defined in long-term evolution (LTE) 3GPP standards. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293974 | Method of Transmission in a Communications Network - A method of transmission in a communications network is provided in which data is transmitted using a first radio access technology and a second radio access technology. The method includes providing an anchor carrier associated only with the first radio access technology and another carrier shared between the first radio access technology and the second radio access technology. Transmission via the second radio access technology is muted in the shared carrier during at least one subframe of each data frame transmitted using the second radio access technology. Data is transmitted using the first radio access technology in the shared carrier only during the at least one subframe in which transmission using the second radio access technology is muted. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140293975 | METHOD OF MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL AND WIRELESS DEVICE USING SAME - The present invention relates to a method of monitoring a control channel in a wireless communication system and a wireless device using same. The wireless device monitors a first downlink control channel having an uplink grant in a first slot, and a second downlink control channel having a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) positive-acknowledgement (ACK)/negative-acknowledgement (NACK) in a second slot. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140301373 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING APPLICATION-GENERATED DATA REQUESTS IN DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX) MODE - The invention provides a technique for managing application-generated data requests within a wireless communication device comprising a baseband component operating in discontinuous reception (DRX) mode. The technique includes the steps of receiving a data request from an application, tagging the data request as a low-priority data request or a high-priority data request in accordance with a manner in which the application is executing, forwarding the tagged data request to the baseband component, determining a next-scheduled active time based on parameters associated with the DRX mode, and causing a scheduling request to be issued at or substantially proximate to the next-scheduled active time. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140301374 | Mechanism for Group Polling Without Precise Timing - In a wireless communication network, to reduce the polling overhead it is proposed to poll several stations using the same polling frame. In order to be able to poll more than one station in the same frame, an access point can make use of the locations of stations relative to the access point. The location of each station relative to the access point will cause a different propagation delay for radio communications between the station and the access point. Based on the propagation delays, two or more stations may be grouped together for subsequent transmissions to the access point. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140301375 | TIMING ADVANCE METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZED WIFI NETWORK - A wireless communication system timing introduces a timing advance calculation mechanism. The timing advance calculation mechanism allows a communication device in the system to adjust its transmission timing to ensure reliable receipt of its transmissions at a receiver. The timing advance calculation mechanism is based on exchanging two new media access control layer messages between the transmitter and the receiver. The procedure is triggered by the transmitter planning to associate with a network managed by the receiver. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140301376 | BROADCAST RECEIVING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING BROADCAST SIGNALS - A broadcast receiving system capable of receiving mobile broadcast data and a method for processing broadcast signals are disclosed. The broadcast receiving system includes a first receiving unit, a second receiving unit, a known sequence detector, a equalizer, and a display unit. The first receiving unit receives a first broadcast signal including first mobile broadcast service data and first main broadcast service data. The second receiving unit receives a second broadcast signal including second mobile broadcast service data and second main broadcast service data. The known sequence detector detects at least one of known data included in the received first broadcast signal and known data included in the received second broadcast signal. The channel equalizer uses the detected known data, thereby channel-equalizing the received first and second mobile broadcast service data corresponding to the detected known data. The display unit provides any one of first video data and second video data included in the channel-equalized first and second mobile broadcast service data to a user. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140307717 | FEEDBACK MESSAGE ALIGNMENT FOR MULTICARRIER SYSTEMS WITH FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER - Methods, systems, and devices are provided for signaling alignment for multicarrier systems that may utilize one or more flexible bandwidth carriers. Tools and techniques are provided that may help ensure signaling alignment with respect to feedback messages, such as ACK/NACK messages, in multicarrier systems that may utilize one or more flexible bandwidth carriers and/or systems that may utilize multiple different flexible bandwidth carriers. Some methods may include identifying timing for one or more subframes that carry one or more feedback messages for a first cell; and/or adjusting a timing for one or more subframes that carry one or more feedback messages for a second cell to align with the one or more subframes that carry the one or more feedback messages for the first cell. The first cell and/or the second cell may include at least one of the one or more flexible bandwidth carriers. | 10-16-2014 |
| 20140307718 | PILOT SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD, CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD, AND APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - A pilot signal transmission method, a channel estimation method, and an apparatus are provided, and the method for a pilot signal transmission includes: transmitting a pilot signal 1 CPICH1 over a first antenna, and transmitting a pilot signal 2 CPICH2 over a second antenna; transmitting a pilot signal CPICHk1 over a k1 | 10-16-2014 |
| 20140307719 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PACKETS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - An apparatus and a method are provided for receiving data in a communication system. Information is received representative of a number of processes of a persistent resource allocation and a persistent resource allocation interval. Data is received in a new transmission based on the received information. A HARQ process ID is calculated using the number of processes of the persistent resource allocation, the persistent resource allocation interval, and time information. Control information including the HARQ process ID is received. Data is received in a retransmission, based on the control information including the HARQ process ID. The data received in the new transmission and the data received in the retransmission are combined. The combined data is decoded. | 10-16-2014 |
| 20140307720 | DETERMINISTIC USER EQUIPMENT BARRING - According to an example embodiment, there is provided a method comprising determining a barring class to which a user equipment belongs, and determining a value for a barring timer, wherein determining the value for a barring timer uses a value derived from a system frame number, SFN, in which the user equipment received an access barring parameter. The method may further comprise initializing the barring timer to the determined value, starting the barring timer and determining, while the barring timer is running, whether a group of user equipment to which the user equipment belongs is barred. | 10-16-2014 |
| 20140314051 | Apparatus, Method, and Computer Program Product Providing Persistent Uplink and Downlink Resource Allocation - Apparatus, methods, computer program products, systems and circuits are provided that allow for persistent uplink and downlink resource allocations. A method includes: allocating resources to a user equipment for a data flow over a plurality of time intervals with a single signaling event at a wireless network radio network layer; and informing the user equipment of the allocated resources. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140314052 | TECHNIQUES FOR SETTING UP TRAFFIC CHANNELS IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A control channel supporting traffic control in epochs is divided into two control subchannels each being less than or equal to about a half epoch in duration and occurring serially in time. Slot allocation data may be transmitted and received independently over the subchannels. One subchannel may be used for transmitting forward slot allocation data and the other subchannel may be used for transmitting reverse slot allocation data. The channel split into two subchannels may be a paging channel. The forward and reverse slot allocation data may be transmitted between a base station processor and field unit. Forward and reverse traffic data may be staggered by at least about half an epoch. Transmission of traffic data happens within about two epochs after the assignments. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140314053 | Segmented Beamforming - A method for beamforming in a communication network includes generating a plurality of beamforming training (BFT) units associated with a beamforming session between a pair of devices, where each of the plurality of BFT units corresponds to a different beamsteering vector, causing a first non-zero subset of the plurality of BFT units to be transmitted during a first timeslot, and causing a second non-zero subset of the plurality of BFT units to be transmitted during a second timeslot, where the first time timeslot and the second timeslot are not contiguous. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140314054 | METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA ON BASIS OF GROUPING IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for transceiving data in a wireless LAN system on the basis of a station (STA). The method comprises: receiving an allocation for an association ID (AID) by associating with an access point (AP); and exchanging data with the AP during the channel access period for an STA group comprising the STA. The STA group is grouped on the basis of the AID. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140314055 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to the present invention, a base station determines from a wireless communication system whether data to be transmitted is a response signal-required data that requires a response signal, estimates the amount of buffer of a user equipment (UE) at the point when the response signal is to be transmitted, predicts a required resource amount of the UE that is required for transmitting the response signal by using the buffer amount of the UE that is estimated, and schedules for allocating a resource to the UE on the basis of the required resource amount that is predicted. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140314056 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A FRAME IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting and receiving a frame performed by an AP in a wireless communication system. The method includes the steps of: transmitting a PST message providing instructions to transmit a frame to at least one STA; and receiving frames from a first STA and a second STA. The PST message includes first subband information indicating a first subband in which a first frame is transmitted from the first STA and second subband information indicating a second subband in which a second frame is transmitted from the second STA. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140314057 | Network Synchronisation of Devices in a D2D Cluster - The invention relates to an apparatus including at least one processor and at least one memory including a computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least to: convey timing information parameters and information on statuses of validity timers of devices belonging to a device cluster and being in a network communication mode for network synchronization purposes to a master device of a device cluster, and obtain at least one re-source request for network synchronization from the master device of the device cluster on behalf of at least one device belonging to the device cluster and being in the network communication mode or in a network idle mode, and communicate with the master device of the device cluster for providing network synchronization. | 10-23-2014 |
| 20140321434 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINATION OF ALMOST BLANK SUBFRAME PATTERN BY NETWORK LISTENING - A method of determining almost-blank subframe (ABS) information in a heterogeneous network (HetNet) including a macro cell and one or more small cells underlaid with respect to the macro cell, the method including obtaining, at a first base station (BS) of a first one of the one or more small cells, almost-blank subframe (ABS) information of the macro cell based on at least one of transmissions of the macro cell and transmissions of a UE attached to the first small cell. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321435 | Methods and Apparatuses for Use in a Mobile Communication Network - The proposed technology relates to the issue of supporting release of common radio resources in a radio communication network. A radio network controller ( | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321436 | Systems and Methods for Efficient Channel Synchronization - System and method embodiments are provided for efficient channel synchronization. The embodiments enable a reduction in a stations power consumption and reduce network overhead for transmitting synchronization frames by refraining from sending the synchronization frame when it is not needed. In an embodiment, a method in an access point (AP) for synchronizing a station (STA) associated with the AP includes sending, by the AP, a first management frame that indicates a time slot that is allocated for the STA and sending a synchronization frame at a boundary of the time slot allocated for the STA if the AP determines that a channel is idle at the boundary of the time slot allocated for the STA and if the time slot that is allocated for the STA is longer than a first threshold value. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321437 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING AN UPLINK RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - Embodiments relate to methods and apparatuses for performing a random access procedure from a mobile terminal to communicate with a wireless communication network, the random access procedure providing a first ( | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321438 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN UNLICENSED FREQUENCY BANDS - A method and an apparatus for synchronization for Device-to-Device (D2D) communication in unlicensed frequency bands are provided. The method includes determining whether a signal is detected during a preset time period within a synchronization period, after transmitting a synchronization signal during the synchronization period for the D2D communication, when it is determined that the D2D communication is to be performed, and starting the time period for the D2D communication and performing the D2D communication during the time period for the D2D communication, when it is determined that the signal is not detected. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321439 | Apparatus and Methods for Transmission and Reception of Data in Multi-Antenna Systems - Methods and apparatus adapted to address asymmetric conditions in a multi-antenna system. In one embodiment, the multi-antenna system comprises a wireless (e.g., 3G cellular) multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) system, and the methods and apparatus efficiently utilize transmitter and receiver resources based at least in part on a detected asymmetric condition. If an asymmetric condition is detected by the transmitter on any given data stream, the transmitter can decide to utilize only a subset of the available resources for that stream. Accordingly, the signal processing resources for that data stream are adapted to mirror the reduction in resources that are necessary for transmission. The transmitter signals the receiver that it will only be using a subset of the resources available, and the receiver adapts its operation according to the signaling data it receives. The multi-antenna system can therefore reduce power consumption as well as increasing spectral efficiency on the network. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321440 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF UPLINK TRANSMISSION TIME - Systems and methods for dynamically adjusting the transmission time interval (TTI) for a communications system are presented. The described aspects provide for dynamically adjusting the TTI in a communication session between a base station or nodeB and a wireless device or user equipment between a shorter TTI, which can provide increased data throughput and lower power consumption, and a longer TTI, which can provide more rugged communication link connections. By dynamically adjusting the TTI, the communications link can be optimized for the given communication channel conditions. Determinations, based on indicia related to the communications system conditions, can be employed in dynamic TTI adjustment. These determinations can be formed centrally at the Radio Network Controller (RNC), at the RNC supplemented with user equipment (UE) available information, or formed in a distributed manner between the RNC and UE across a communications system. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321441 | MULTI-DETECTION OF HEARTBEAT TO REDUCE ERROR PROBABILITY - A communications system improves performance of detecting a signal having an indication of a request to change communications states by making at least two positive identifications of the request in a given time frame. The system may further improve performance by applying a difference in power levels for a non-request state (i.e., steady state or ‘control hold’ state) versus a request state (i.e., ‘request to change’ state). In one particular application, a base station determines a request to change communications states with a reasonably high probability of detection and a reasonably low probability of false detection. The system has a reduced number of erroneous communications states, such as erroneous traffic channel allocations. The detection technique is compatible with 1xEV-DV systems and I-CDMA systems, but general enough to support systems employing various other communications protocols used in wired and wireless communications systems. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140321442 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SETTING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of setting uplink transmission power by a terminal in a wireless communication system. The method of setting uplink transmission power by the terminal may include: assigning a plurality of serving cells by a base station; transmitting a random access message including a random access preamble from a secondary cell Scell of the plurality of serving cells to the base station; receiving a random access response message from the base station in response to the random access message; and resetting, in response to receiving the random access response message, a factor of an accumulated mode representing the current uplink transmission control adjusted state at the Scell to which the random access message is transmitted. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140328329 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method includes configuring one or multiple pools of Device-to-Device (D2D) communication resources by an eNodeB (eNB). The method also includes signaling of the configured pool(s) of D2D communication resources by the eNB to a first User Equipment (UE) and a plurality of UEs using a common broadcast channel; and sending a request for one or multiple D2D communication resources to an eNB by the first UE configured to transmit D2D messages. The method also includes determining one or multiple resources for D2D communication by an eNB for the first UE. The method also includes communicating D2D resource allocation information to the first UE. The method also includes communicating D2D resource allocation information by the first UE to multiple UEs; and transmitting D2D data by the first UE to multiple UEs. Methods for configuring and signaling D2D communication resources by relay or out-of-coverage UEs are also provided. | 11-06-2014 |
| 20140328330 | METHOD OF REPORTING SCHEDULING INFORMATION - A method of encoding and transmitting information relating to data to be transmitted from user equipment to a base station in a multi-carrier wireless telecommunications network. Each carrier comprises a data channel. The method comprises the steps of:
| 11-06-2014 |
| 20140328331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method for multi-radio coexistence receives historical frequency usage information and historical time usage information from a first radio. The method creates a time and frequency mask by extrapolating the historical frequency and time usage information to future times and frequencies when the first radio will be active and uses the time and frequency mask to schedule a second radio to avoid receiving when the first radio will likely be active. A related apparatus has a collocated radio input for receiving timing usage information, a non-collocated radio input for receiving frequency usage information, and a time and frequency mask generator for creating a time and frequency mask using the timing usage information and the frequency usage information. The method and apparatus predicts collocated and non-collocated radio activity in both the time and frequency dimensions to reduce interference among radios operating in overlapping or adjacent frequency bands. | 11-06-2014 |
| 20140328332 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. In particular, the present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting control information by means of a terminal in a CA-based wireless communication system, including the steps of: forming first and second cells that include different subframe configurations, wherein the second cell includes TDD UL-DL configuration #0; receiving a UL grant by means of the first cell; and transmitting data corresponding to the UL grant by means of the second cell. | 11-06-2014 |
| 20140328333 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING ACK/NACK SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting an acknowledgement/not-acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) signal in a wireless communication system. The method includes the steps of: receiving a transmission block; and transmitting an ACK/NACK signal for the transmission block in a first subframe or a second subframe according to the size of the transmission block, wherein, when the size of the transmission block is smaller than or equal to a reference value, the ACK/NACK signal is transmitted in the first frame, when the size of the transmission block is greater than the reference value, the ACK/NACK signal is transmitted in the second subframe, and the second subframe is behind the first subframe in a time domain. | 11-06-2014 |
| 20140334456 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTENTION FREE DEVICE SIGNALING WITHOUT A CONTROLLING NETWORK NODE - A method and user equipment operating in or near a network without a central controller, the method receiving a device signal from a second user equipment, the second user equipment being within a contention region of the first user equipment; and utilizing the device signal to determine a transmission opportunity at the first user equipment. Further, disambiguation processes include removing network, new device and bootstrapping ambiguity. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140334457 | NEW CARRIER TYPE FOR TIME DIVISION COMMUNICATION - Certain embodiments relate to wireless communication systems, such as long term evolution advanced (LTE-A), which may be part of third generation partnership project (3GPP) LTE release 12 (Rel-12). More specifically, certain embodiments may provide an arrangement related to new carrier type for time division long term evolution (TD-LTE), which may also be related to Enhanced Interference Management and Traffic Adaptation. According to certain embodiments, a method can include determining that a split configuration is to be followed, in which at least one system information block configured uplink subframe is reconfigured as a new carrier type downlink subframe, whereas at least one other system information block configured subframe is as indicated by system information block configuration. The method can also include applying the determined split configuration to communications with an access point. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140334458 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES TO MITIGATE COMMUNICATION COLLISIONS - Embodiments may comprise logic such as hardware and/or code to mitigate or attenuate collisions of communications between wireless communications devices and access points by defining time slots for stations to communicate with the access point. Some embodiments may define time slots for stations to respond to an indication that the access point is buffering data for the station. Further embodiments may define time slots for stations to communicate with the access point whether there is data buffered for the station or not. And many embodiments may determine stations associated with communications collisions or likely to be associated with communications collisions and defines different time slots for the stations to communicate with the access point. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140334459 | METHODS PROVIDING OFFSET VALUES DEFINING DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MIMO DATA STREAMS AND RELATED CONTROLLERS AND WIRELESS TERMINALS - A method of communicating with a wireless terminal may include providing first information responsive to receiving first and second multiple-input-multiple-output (MIMO) data streams from the wireless terminal through a first antenna array of a first sector during a first transmission time interval. Second information may be provided responsive to receiving the first and second MIMO data streams from the wireless terminal through a second antenna array of a second sector during the first transmission time interval with the first and second sectors being different and the first and second antenna arrays being different. An offset value may be generated responsive to the first information and/or the second information, with the offset value defining a difference between the first and second MIMO data streams for a second transmission time interval, and the offset value may be transmitted to the wireless terminal. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140334460 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNALS IN UPLINK MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) TRANSMISSION - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and an apparatus for transmitting reference signals in uplink MIMO transmission. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the method for transmitting uplink signals through a terminal in the wireless communication system comprises the steps of: receiving control information including the information on a cyclic shift and/or an orthogonal cover code; allocating the multiplexed reference signals onto an uplink subframe; and transmitting the subframe through a multi-antenna. When the uplink MIMO transmission is multiuser MIMO transmission, the reference signals of the terminal and the reference signals of other terminals can be multiplexed by using the orthogonal cover code. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140334461 | Source Node and Relay Node that Cooperatively Transmit an Alamouti Code - Methods, systems and apparatuses are provided for transmitting and receiving space-time block coded data in a wireless communications system with co-operative relays. A source node transmits RF signals representing first and second sets of data symbols in respective first and second channels (in time frequency code or any combination) of a wireless communications system, the first and second sets of data symbols being for transmission from separate antennas respectively according to a space-time block code. A relay node receives the RF signals representing the first set of data symbols in the first channel and transmits RF signals representing the first set of data symbols in the second channel. A destination node received the RF signals representing the second set of data symbols from the source node and the RF signals representing the first set of data symbols from the relay node. This enables decoding of the received RF signals representing the first and second sets of data symbols according to the space-time block code. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140334462 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DETERMINING A RESOURCE INDEX - This disclosure provides methods for determining or calculating a default Enhanced Dedicated Channel, E-DCH, resource index, and apparatuses for performing the method. In some embodiments, a method for calculating a E-DCH resource index includes: receiving a Concurrent Transmission Time Interval, TTI, Partition Index, CTPI, and calculating (SigInd+CTPI) mod Y or calculating (SigInd mod (Y−CTPI))+CTPI, where Y is the total number of E-DCH resources configured in a cell for Enhanced Uplink in CELL_FACH state and IDLE mode, and SigInd is the signature index value of the Nth PRACH preamble signature corresponding to an access indicator, AI, that is configured available in the cell and corresponding to E-DCH transmission for Enhanced Uplink in CELL_FACH state and IDLE mode. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140341192 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE ALLOCATION OF MEASUREMENT GAPS IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION ENVIRONMENT - A method, network element and user equipment, where in one embodiment at a network element, allocating a measurement gap configuration for a user equipment (UE) capable of operating in a carrier aggregation environment using at least first and second component carriers; and sending the measurement gap allocation to the UE, the allocation indicating a first measurement gap configuration for the first component carrier, the first measurement gap configuration being different than a second measurement gap configuration allocated for the second component carrier. In another embodiment at a UE capable of operating in a carrier aggregation environment using at least first and second component carriers, sending a measurement gap preference to a network, the preference including preference information indicating a preference for a first measurement gap configuration for the first component carrier, the first measurement gap configuration being different than a second measurement gap configuration for the second component carrier. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140341193 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL MEASUREMENT INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - A method in which a first communication module of a terminal transmits channel measurement information to a base station in a wireless communication system and a device therefor are disclosed in the present invention. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving a message indicating an operation start of at least one second communication module coexisting in the terminal from the second communication module; determining an unusable frequency due to in-device coexistence (IDC) interference on the basis of information on an operating frequency of the first communication module and an operating frequency of the second communication module; and transmitting an IDC interference indication message including channel measurement information corresponding to the determined unusable frequency to the base station. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140341194 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF DELAY SENSITIVE DATA IN A PACKET DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - This disclosure deals with an apparatus in a base station for controlling transmission of delay-sensitive data from a transmitter over a transmission link in a packet data communication network, which transmitter is capable of changing between a TTI bundling enabled mode and a TTI bundling disabled mode. The apparatus comprises: a receiver for receiving data from the transmitter over the transmission link; a decision unit for deciding that the transmitter should change TTI bundling mode; a silent mode detection unit for detecting that the transmitter is in the silent mode; and a triggering unit for triggering change of TTI bundling mode in response to deciding that the transmitter should change TTI bundling mode and in response to detecting that the transmitter is in the silent mode. The disclosure further relates to a corresponding method. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140341195 | Method and Device for Switching - A switching method and device are disclosed by the present invention. The switching method according to the embodiments of the present invention includes: receiving from a base station a switching indication information that requires a UE to switch a TTI; sending to the base station a switching confirmation information with which the switching indication information is confirmed; and switching the TTI. The switching method according to the embodiments of the present invention includes: sending to a UE a switching indication information that requires the UE to switch a TTI; and receiving from the UE a switching confirmation information with which the switching indication information is confirmed. By using the switching method and device according to the embodiments of the present invention, the delay of switching the TTI can be shortened and the TTI can be switched quickly. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140341196 | Transmission Method, System, and Communication Device for Realizing Coexistence of Data and Voice Services - The present invention is applicable to the field of communications and provides a transmission method, a system, and a communication device for realizing coexistence of data and voice services. The method includes: acquiring an idle timeslot available when voice transmission is performed by using Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT); and performing Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) transmission in the idle timeslot available when voice transmission is performed by using DECT. In the present invention, an idle timeslot available when voice transmission is performed by using DECT is first acquired, and then the idle timeslot available when voice transmission is performed by using DECT is used to perform Wi-Fi transmission, so as to realize coexistence of Wi-Fi and DECT in a time division multiplexing manner. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140348137 | SERVICE DIFFERENTIATION AND SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENTS FOR WIRELESS ACCESS CLIENTS - Differentiated services are provided through service level agreements (SLAs) between access nodes and some of the clients using a wireless access network. Client devices include internal devices that are compliant with service-related specifications published by the access nodes. Client devices also may include non-compliant external and legacy devices, as well as outside interferers. The access nodes control target SLAs for each client device. The access nodes and the internal client devices perform rate limiting to ensure that a device's target SLA is adhered to. The service-related specifications include schedules to ensure preferential access for preferred internal client devices. The internal client devices send usage and bandwidth availability feedback to the access node they are associated with, enabling the access node to come up with better schedules for meeting the preferred internal devices' SLAs in view of the network conditions reported via the feedback. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348138 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING A REFERENCE TIMING - In a communication system including first and second base stations, an apparatus operates as the first base station. The apparatus determines a first reference timing that is used as a reference timing for transmitting a downlink signal, and adjusts the determined first reference timing to a second reference timing being used in the second base station. The apparatus corrects a deviation of the first reference timing from the second reference timing, which has occurred after adjustment of the first reference timing, in accordance with a receiving timing of a preamble signal transmitted from a mobile station device to the second base station. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348139 | NON-CONVEX OPTIMIZATION OF RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN MULTI-USER NETWORKS WITH TIME-VARIANT CAPACITY - A plurality of resource requests and a plurality of estimated link capacities are received at a first device from other devices coupled to a network. Each of the plurality of resource requests is indicative of a requested data rate for a different one of a plurality of communication links. Each of the plurality of estimated link capacities is indicative of an available data rate for the different ones of the plurality of communication links. An allocation of time slots within a first time interval is determined at the first device, based on at least the plurality of resource requests and the plurality of estimated link capacities, according to a branch and bound algorithm. At least some of the other devices of the plurality of devices are caused to communicate via the plurality of communication links according to the determined allocation of time slots. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348140 | MODULAR DETERMINISTIC COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR REMOTE SYSTEMS - A modular deterministic communication terminal and a method for transmitting user data between the modular deterministic communication terminal and a remote modular deterministic communication terminal are provided. The modular deterministic communication terminal includes at least one logic module including at least one deterministic hardware circuit configured to generate at least one data stream by combining user data of at least two data channels and to separately and independently transmit the at least one data stream via at least one communication link to at least one deterministic hardware circuit provided in the a remote modular deterministic communication terminal. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348141 | Method for Transmitting Control Signaling, User Equipment, and Base Station - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for transmitting control signaling. A base station determines a modulation mode adopted for one group of resources among multiple groups of resources. Different modulation modes are adopted for at least two groups of resources among the multiple groups of resources. The base station uses the modulation mode adopted for the one group of resources to modulate control signaling sent on the one group of resources. The base station sends the modulated control signaling to a UE on the one group of resources. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348142 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING REMOTE TRANSMITTING STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for controlling a remote transmitting station in a wireless communication system, including a step of: a first transmission point transmitting to a second transmission point time resource information related to at least one or more remote transmitting stations among a plurality of remote transmitting stations, wherein the plurality of transmitting stations located at cell edges of the first transmission point and cell identifiers of the at least one or more remote transmitting stations are changed according to a time period instructed by the time resource information. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348143 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A base station apparatus assigns a plurality of cells to a mobile station apparatus, and the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus communicate with each other via the plurality of cells. The plurality of cells are grouped into a plurality of groups, each group being made up of at least one cell having an identical transmission timing in the mobile station apparatus. In a case where a cell that has been deleted from one of the plurality of groups is added to another one of the plurality of groups in accordance with an instruction from the base station apparatus, the mobile station apparatus sets the added cell to be in a deactivated state. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348144 | TERMINAL SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TIMING RANDOMISATION METHOD AND DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a terminal signal transmission timing randomisation method and device in a wireless communication system, and the terminal signal transmission method in a wireless communication system of the present disclosure comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, setting information for randomising transmission timing with respect to a signal transmitted by a terminal; determining the transmission timing for the signal in accordance with the setting information; and transmitting the signal to the base station in accordance with the determined transmission timing. | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140348145 | SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL MAPPING - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a transmitter, a receiver and methods of operating a transmitter or a receiver. In one embodiment, the transmitter is for use with a base station and includes a primary module configured to provide a primary synchronization signal. The transmitter also includes a secondary mapping module configured to provide a secondary synchronization signal derived from two sequences taken from a same set of N sequences and indexed by an index pair (S | 11-27-2014 |
| 20140355572 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL FOR TD-SCDMA SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus in wireless communications is provided. The method may include measuring received powers levels for a first window of samples, and computing a gain value based on the measured received powers levels. The method may also include determining an offset duration such that the first window of samples and a second window of samples both are included within a downlink region that has downlink power within a threshold level. The method may additionally include applying the gain value to the second window of samples, and the second window of samples may occur after the offset duration. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140355573 | SHARING UP-LINK RESOURCES IN UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present subject matter discloses a method for sharing a enhanced uplink dedicated channel (E-DCH) resource from amongst a plurality of E-DCH resources on time multiplex basis. In one implementation, the method comprises receiving, from a user equipment (UE), a random access procedure (RAP) request for allocation of the common E-DCH resource from amongst a plurality of common E-DCH resources. The method further includes identifying the common E-DCH resource to be time multiplexed between a plurality of UEs based on the RAP request. The method also includes allocating the identified common E-DCH resource to the UE on a time multiplex basis, wherein the common E-DCH resource is shared among the plurality of UEs. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140355574 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program for Scheduling Device-to-Device Signals - A method of operating a network control apparatus in which the network control apparatus is wirelessly connected to at least one wireless device. In the method, the network control apparatus indicates a device-to-device timing advance value to said wireless device. The device-to-device timing advance value is for use by the wireless device in scheduling the transmission of a device-to-device signal to a second wireless device. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140355575 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method transmits data in a communications network containing a plurality of nodes. The transmission of suitable configuration data between a node and its neighboring node ensures that the time slots used for the data transmission are used only by one node, thus preventing collision. The method is preferably used in wireless sensor networks, in which the individual sensor nodes exchange data between one another. The method guarantees reliable data transmission with low energy consumption by the individual sensor nodes. The method can be combined with a decentralized pattern detection, for which mean values are decentrally determined in a suitable manner in the individual nodes via protocols known per se, particularly via a consensus protocol or via a tree aggregation protocol. The method is used particularly in a communications network for an automation system or a power network or a transport network. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140355576 | METHOD FOR COORDINATING BEACON TRANSMISSION TIMES IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for coordinating beacon transmission times for a plurality of access points (APs) in a wireless local area network includes generating a first neighboring AP list listing one or more neighboring AP(s) of a first AP, deriving a first beacon transmission time for the first AP according to the first neighboring AP list, and transmitting a beacon message at the first beacon transmission time by the first AP. The first AP and the one or more neighboring AP(s) are arranged to form a Hot Spot that offers network services over the wireless local area network. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140355577 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140362831 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH A NARROWER SUBORDINATE CARRIER - Communicating by a terminal device using a host carrier with radio resource segments distributed in time is disclosed. Each radio resource segment may provide radio resources in a first frequency band. The terminal device may communicate with a base station using a second frequency band and a subordinate carrier that comprises radio resources of a subset of the radio resource segments of the host carrier. The second frequency band may be narrower than and contained within the first frequency band. | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140362832 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED UPLINK COVERAGE - Systems and method are specified to improve the reception of UL transmission, for example in power or coverage limited situations. A WTRU may modify procedures to increase the available signal energy for reception at an eNB and/or to make more efficient use of the available signal energy at the receiver for processing UL transmissions. Example methods for increasing UL link coverage may include modifying HARQ timing (e.g., shorter HARQ), using longer TTIs, use of dedicated PUSCH allocations, use of new PUSCH modulations, enhanced reference signal design, UL macro diversity reception for PUSCH, utilizing protocol reduction techniques, ensuring in-order packet delivery, and/or utilizing a configuration for coverage limited/power limited modes of operation. The proposed methods may be applied individually or in any combination. | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140362833 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROCESSES PER TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL - A method and apparatus may be used for supporting multiple hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) processes per transmission time interval (TTI). A transmitter and a receiver may include a plurality of H-ARQ processes. Each H-ARQ process may transmit and receive one TB per TTI. The transmitter may generate a plurality of TBs and assign each TB to a H-ARQ process. The transmitter may send control information for each TB, which may include H-ARQ information associated TBs with the TBs. The transmitter may send the TBs using the associated H-ARQ processes simultaneously per TTI. After receiving the TBs, the receiver may send feedback for each of the H-ARQ processes and associated TBs indicating successful or unsuccessful receipt of each of the TBs to the transmitter. The feedback for multiple TBs may be combined for the simultaneously transmitted H-ARQ processes, (i.e., TBs). | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140362834 | Scheduling Information Transmission Method, Device, and Communications System - A scheduling information transmission method, device, and communications system are provided. The method includes: generating a channel attribute parameter and a serving grant (SG), where the channel attribute parameter and the SG are used for data scheduling of uplink multiple input multiple output (MIMO); and delivering the channel attribute parameter and the SG to a user equipment (UE) through a target channel, where the channel attribute parameter is used by the UE to determine a primary-stream enhanced dedicated channel transport format combination indicator (E-TFCI) and a secondary-stream E-TFCI. In the scheduling information transmission method, device, and communications system that are provided in embodiments of the present invention, the determined E-TFCIs can better adapt to different channel conditions, which improves data transmission performance. | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140369321 | COOPERATIVE PHASE TRACKING IN DISTRIBUTED MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT SYSTEM - A cooperative phase tracking system allows access points of a wireless network (e.g., a WiFi network) to use a clock or oscillator that may be different or independent from other access points of the same wireless network. As such, the cooperative phase tracking system eliminates a limitation of using a same clock (or oscillator) among the access points and at the same time may allow more access points to be installed for an associated wireless network to serve a larger area. Moreover, the cooperative phase tracking system may attribute intensive computations of relative phase drifts associated with the access points to a dedicated coordinator, thereby alleviating workload of the access points of the wireless network. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140369322 | PERFORMING MULTIPLE TIMING ADVANCE ADJUSTMENTS IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Technology for performing multiple timing advances in a carrier aggregation communication system is disclosed. A method comprises communicating a random access preamble from a UE to an eNodeB via a PCell associated with a selected component carrier of the carrier aggregation. A Random Access Response (RAR) is received at the UE from the eNodeB for the PCell. The RAR contains a timing advance adjustment instructing the UE to adjust a timing of a PCell wireless communication. A request is received at the UE to adjust a timing of an SCell communication. A random access preamble is communicated to the UE via the SCell. An RAR is received at the UE from the eNodeB for the SCell to adjust a timing advance of the SCell wireless communication. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140369323 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DATA RATE OPTIMIZATION IN A WCAN SYSTEM WITH INJECTION-LOCKED CLOCKING - A method for determining an optimal pulse repetition period (PRP) in a system including a wireless transmission device operating in a static physical transmission environment includes providing a first and second injection-locked transmission system (ILT system). The method further includes implementing an algorithm in a microprocessor within the first ILT system. The algorithm includes synchronizing a receiver clock in the second ILT system with the clock of the first ILT system; setting the PRP equal to an impulse duration, the PRP being very short; increasing the PRP until a bit error rate (BER) at the PRP is less than the bit error rate limit; and based on the determining that the BER is less than the bit error rate limit, setting the PRP as the optimal PRP. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140369324 | UPLINK SIGNAL SENDING METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - An uplink signal sending method applied to a carrier aggregation system, comprises: after configuring more than two timing advances, user equipment rate-matching uplink signals and/or uplink channels between which front-to-back symbol overlap will occur in time domain over different uplink carriers, and then sending the uplink signals and/or uplink channels, or discarding and then sending the uplink signals and/or uplink channels, or sending simultaneously. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140369325 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR HANDLING TIMING REFERENCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - According to a first aspect of embodiments herein, the object is achieved by a method in a terminal for handling a timing reference. The terminal is served by multiple serving cells of a wireless network, and is configured with a first Timing Advance, TA, group comprising the multiple serving cells, one of which, a current TR cell, acts as the timing reference for the multiple serving cells. When the current TR cell becomes unavailable for the terminal, the terminal autonomously selects a new TR cell to act as the timing reference for the multiple serving cells in the TA group. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140369326 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRIGGERING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATIONS - A method and apparatus for triggering at least one machine type communications (MTC) application using at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is disclosed. The method includes receiving a triggering message including a device trigger (DT) and a maximum delayed response time value from a core network entity (CN), storing the DT in the WTRU, initiating a timer in the WTRU set to the maximum delayed response time value, and on a condition that the timer expires, the WTRU transitioning to a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode and dispatching the DT to the MTC application. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140369327 | PAGING ACCESS TERMINALS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An embodiment is directed to an access network that configures set of paging indicator (PI) bits within a quick paging channel (QPCH) cycle to page a group of access terminals. An access terminal within the group receives the QPCH cycle, and evaluates the PI bits to determine whether a unicast page and/or group page is present. Another embodiment is directed to selecting less than all timeslots in one or more control channel cycles of a downlink control channel, and configuring a page message to convey the selected timeslots to an access terminal. The access terminal receives the configured page message and decodes information only within the selected timeslots. Another embodiment is directed to generating a transport-layer message for transmission to at least one access terminal, and configuring the transport-layer message by modifying an application-layer portion of the transport-layer message. An access terminal receives the message and extracts the application-layer portion. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140376519 | System and Method for Detecting and Resolving Conflicts - A method for operating a first device includes transmitting a conflict query frame including a first address field containing a first locally assigned identifier associated with the first device, wherein the conflict query frame further includes a second address field and has a structure of a first legacy frame, and determining if a conflict notification corresponding to the conflict query frame is received within a specified time interval after transmitting the conflict query frame. The method also includes discontinuing use of the first locally assigned identifier if the conflict notification is received within the specified time interval, and continuing use of the first locally assigned identifier if the conflict notification is not received within the specified time interval. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376520 | INTERFACE MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING HYBRID TIME REUSE - Interference that occurs during wireless communication may be managed by hybrid time reuse. A method, apparatus amend medium of communication determines one or more time reuse patterns of respective one or more unplanned access points. A second time reuse pattern that is less interfering with the one or more time reuse patterns is selected. Signals are transmitted according to the second time reuse pattern from a second unplanned access point to an associated access terminal. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376521 | Cross-Layer And Cross-Application Acknowledgment For Data Transmission - Systems and methods may integrate acknowledgments, such as application-level acknowledgments and medium access control layer acknowledgments. In an embodiment of a cross-layer acknowledgment method, a medium access control layer acknowledgment and application-layer acknowledgment may be integrated as a single medium access control layer acknowledgment. In an embodiment of a cross-application acknowledgment method, an application-layer acknowledgment for a first application and application-layer acknowledgment for a second application may be integrated into a single medium access control layer frame. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376522 | METHOD AND OPERATION FOR OPERATION BETWEEN WPAN AND WLAN FOR A NETWORK INTERFACE CARD - A wireless network adapter may provide an absence indicator to devices in a first network to alert such devices to a time period when the wireless network adapter is not available in the first network. The wireless network adapter may operate in multiple networks, wherein the multiple networks are time division multiplexed on a same transmission channel. The absence indicator may be provided as a Notice Of Absence (NOA) Information Element (IE). | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376523 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of a user equipment are provided for transmitting a channel status report in a communication system. The method includes receiving first information for at least one channel status report; generating a first channel status report corresponding to the first information for the at least one channel status report based on a reference signal in a first subframe; and transmitting the first channel status report based on the first information for the at least one channel status report in a second subframe. The first information for the at least one channel status report comprises information for a period and an offset, and a difference between the first subframe and the second subframe is a smallest value greater than or equal to a predetermined value. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376524 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting control signals in a wireless communication system includes multiplexing a first control signal with a second control signal in a slot, the slot comprising a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in time domain, the plurality of OFDM symbols being divided into a plurality of data OFDM symbols and a plurality of reference signal (RS) OFDM symbols, wherein the first control signal is mapped to the plurality of data OFDM symbols after the first control signal is spread by a base sequence in the frequency domain, the RS is mapped to the plurality of RS OFDM symbols, the second control signal is mapped to at least one of the plurality of RS OFDM symbols, and transmitting the first control signal and the second control signal in the slot. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376525 | UPLINK RESYNCHRONIZATION FOR USE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for reusing an uplink control channel configuration associated with an uplink control channel, the method comprising the steps of, at a user agent, receiving an uplink control channel resource configuration assigned by an access device, transmitting to the access device using the control channel resources associated with the received uplink control channel resource configuration and, after a time alignment timer expires, retaining the uplink control channel resource configuration. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140376526 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device is provided in a wireless multi-hop network. The communication device includes a receiving unit, a transmission-offset calculating unit, and a transmitting unit. The receiving unit receives a sequence number, a divided time acquired by dividing a time width allocated for transmitting detected usage data by a division number, and the division number. The transmission-offset calculating unit calculates a remainder by dividing the sequence number received by the receiving unit by the division number and calculates a transmission offset time based on the remainder and the divided time. The transmitting unit transmits the usage data based on the transmission offset time calculated by the transmission-offset calculating unit. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20150009964 | ENHANCED NODE B AND METHODS FOR NETWORK ASSISTED INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION WITH REDUCED SIGNALING - Embodiments of an enhanced node B (eNB) and methods for network-assisted interference cancellation with reduced signaling in a 3GPP LTE network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the number of transmission options is reduced by introducing a smaller signaling codebook. In some embodiments, higher-layer feedback from the UE to the eNodeB is established to inform the eNB about certain NA-ICS capabilities of the UE. In some embodiments, the number of signaling options is reduced by providing only certain a priori information. In some embodiments, correlations in the time and/or frequency domain are exploited for reducing the signaling message. In some embodiments, differential information is signaled in the time and/or frequency domain for reducing the signaling message. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009965 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR EARLY TRANSPORT FORMAT DETERMINATION - Apparatus and methods include receiving one or more first signals at a user equipment (UE) during a first portion of a transmission time interval (TTI), wherein the one or more first signals are transmitted by a network to the UE using a transport format; determining the transport format upon receiving the one or more first signals and prior to a second portion of the TTI subsequent to the first portion of the TTI; and receiving one or more second signals at the UE during a second portion of the TTI. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009966 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH COORDINATED MULTIPOINT OPERATION AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless access point includes a wireless transceiver configured to provide coordinated multipoint communications with at least one non-legacy device of a plurality of remote devices via a wireless local area network protocol. The coordinated multipoint communications are coordinated with at least one other wireless access point in accordance with coordination data. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009967 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID GROUP SYNCHRONIZATION - A first device of a network may decide to transmit a flood of packets that is longer in duration than the maximum amount of time that the first device can continuously transmit. The first device may coordinate with one or more second devices of the network such that each of the one or more second devices transmits a respective second portion of the flood of packets following transmission of a first portion of the flood of packets by the first network device. The packets may advertise a pending network event that is to occur at a time indicated by the contents of the packets. The first device may select the one or more second devices from a plurality of devices based on a location of the one or more second devices and/or how many third devices are in the network. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING BEAMFORMING - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in a communication system using beamforming are provided. The transmission method includes transmitting a control channel signal in a control channel region of a subframe using a first transmission beam of a base station. The transmission method also includes transmitting a data signal during a predetermined time period of a data region after the control channel region in the subframe using a second transmission beam determined based on the first transmission beam. The transmission method further includes transmitting a data signal in a remaining data region following the predetermined time period using a scheduled transmission beam. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009969 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION DEVICE AND INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided are an information transmission device and method thereof allowing a wireless device intended to newly start an operation in a white space to efficiently perform its preparatory operation, the transmission device including: a first retainer retaining first information including at least a list of channels available in each of first-type partial areas obtained when dividing an area at a first fineness; a second retainer retaining second information including at least a list of channels available in each of second-type partial areas obtained when dividing the area at a second fineness finer than the first fineness; a generator generating multiplexed information including the first and the second information so that the first and the second information are repeated at equal frequencies, or the first information is repeated at a frequency higher than that of the second information in the time axis direction; and a transmitter wirelessly transmitting the multiplexed information. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009970 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE D2D COMMUNICATION METHOD AND D2D COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present invention provides a D2D communication method and a D2D communication device. The method includes: determining a second time slot for transmitting D2D data according to a first time slot for transmitting D2D signaling to a D2D receiver and a synchronous transmission relationship between the D2D signaling and the D2D data, the second time slot being after the first time slot; determining a third time slot for transmitting uplink control information in cellular communication according to the second time slot, the uplink control information being used for indicating an uplink radio resource in the second time slot, and the third time slot being before the second time slot; demodulating the uplink control information in the third time slot to acquire the uplink radio resource in the second time slot; multiplexing the uplink radio resource in the second time slot to perform D2D communication with the D2D receiver. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009971 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method for transmitting control information through a PUCCH in a wireless communication system and an apparatus for same comprising the steps of: obtaining a plurality of second modulation symbol streams corresponding to a plurality of SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbols by diffusing a plurality of first modulation symbol streams to form the first modulation symbol streams corresponding to the SC-FDMA symbols within a first slot; obtaining a plurality of complex symbol streams by performing a DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) pre-coding process for the plurality of second modulation symbol streams; and transmitting the plurality of complex symbol streams through the PUCCH wherein the plurality of second modulation symbol streams are scrambled in a SC-FDMA symbol level. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009972 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR SENDING, RECEIVING, AND DETERMINING TIMING REFERENCE INFORMATION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, a device, and a system for sending, receiving, and determining timing reference information, and pertain to the communications field. The method for sending timing reference information includes: acquiring access time difference information reported by a mobile terminal; generating timing reference information according to the access time difference information, where the timing reference information includes identifier information of a timing reference cell; and sending the timing reference information to the mobile terminal. By technical means of determining one of two cells with different downlink channel timings as a timing reference cell and using the timing reference cell as a benchmark to feed back HARQ-ACK information, the present invention solves a timing problem encountered when a UE uses a same HS-DPCCH to jointly feed back two pieces of HARQ-ACK information of a serving cell and an assisting serving cell. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009973 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING TRANSMISSION IN A SLOTTED RADIO DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BY PAUSING DATA RECEPTION - Apparatus, and an associated method, that facilitates communication of data in a radio communication system that utilizes a slotted communication scheme. Multiple successive time slots are allocable upon which to communicate data to a receiving communication station. At selected intervals, a controller causes the mode of operation of the receiving communication station to be changed to pause operation in a receive mode and, during the pause, to cause operation of the receiving communication station to transmit data, such as control acknowledgments or other responses. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150009974 | TRANSMITTING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MESSAGES USING A STAGGERED UPLINK TIME SLOT - A downlink communication is transmitted/received in at least one downlink time slot. In response to the received downlink communication, an acknowledgement message is received/transmitted in an uplink time slot a fixed integer number of uplink time slots after transmission/reception of the received downlink communication. The uplink and downlink time slots are staggered by substantially a half of a time slot. | 01-08-2015 |
| 20150016428 | METHODS AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Disclosed are methods for carrying out device-to-device (“D2D”) communication. In one implementation, a user equipment (“UE”) communicates D2D with another UE using uplink radio resources. The first UE receives a downlink signal from a base station and determines the reception time. The first UE also receives a timing advance for uplink communication. Based on the reception time and the timing advance, the first UE determines an uplink transmission time. When transmitting to the second UE, however, the first UE does not transmit at the determined UL transmission time. Rather, the first UE delays its D2D transmission for a period of time that is based on the second UE's uplink timing advance. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150016429 | COOPERATIVE INTERFERENCE SUBTRACTION SCHEME - A cooperative interference subtraction scheme includes receiving a first baseband signal including an interference signal at a first base station, receiving a second baseband signal including the interference signal at a second base station, calculating a channel translation parameter based on the first baseband signal and the second baseband signal, receiving a signal including a user equipment (UE) transmission at the first base station during a first time slot, and subtracting interference from the signal including the UE transmission using the channel translation parameter. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150016430 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT OF UPLINK VoIP - Apparatus and methods for improving a coverage of an uplink Voice over IP (VoIP) transmission of a wireless device are disclosed. A wireless device assigns a first hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process to a first VoIP packet of the wireless device. The wireless device then assigns a second HARQ process to a second VoIP packet of the wireless device. The wireless device then transmits the first and second VoIP packets to a base station. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150016431 | Method and Apparatus for Determining the Transmission Time Interval Length - A method includes receiving information on a requested transmission time interval length for use by a user equipment, determining if said requested transmission time interval length can be used, and if not causing a different transmission time interval length to be used by said user equipment. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150016432 | Retransmission Protocol Feedback Handling with Multiple Feedback Times - In a mobile network, the transmission of downlink data blocks ( | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150016433 | Enhanced Dedicated-Channel Signaling in a CELL_FACH State - A new set of random-access preamble signatures are introduced to differentiate new-release UEs from UEs compliant only with earlier releases. Additional new features of a random-access procedure are also disclosed, including an ability to deploy multiple transmission-time-intervals TTIs) in a given area. An example mobile terminal, according to some embodiments of the present invention, selects a TTI from two or more possible TTIs. The mobile terminal then selects a preamble signature from a group of one or more preamble signatures associated with enhanced-uplink resources and associated with the selected TTI, and transmits a random-access channel (RACH) preamble, using the selected preamble signature. In some embodiments, the mobile terminal selects between a 2-millisecond TTI and a 10-millisecond TTI. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150016434 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INTERFERENCE COORDINATION - The present invention provides a method and a device for interference coordination. The method comprises: determining mutually interfering wave beams between a cell of a first base station and a cell of a second base station based on first interference information and second interference information; coordinating time-frequency resources, time domain resources or frequency domain resources occupied when the mutually interfering wave beams between the cell of the first base station and the cell of the second base station are sent, so as to reduce interference. By coordinating, wave beams of the cells of the base stations are sent in a staggered manner in terms of the time-frequency resources, the time domain resources or the frequency domain resources. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150023324 | SYSTEMS, DEVICES, AND METHODS FOR IMPROVING DATA CAPACITY IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM BY MANAGING SHORT ADDRESSES - Systems, devices, and methods of managing short addresses in a wireless communication system include receiving reservation requests on a random access channel from subscriber units at a radio frequency (RF) site such that the reservation requests includes a minimum number of requested time slots for data transmission between a subscriber unit and the RF site, and a subscriber long address. Further, for each of the reservation requests, the RF site selects a subscriber short address for the respective subscriber unit as well as transmitting the selected subscriber short address to the respective subscriber unit on a RF site channel. In addition, the RF site determines a short address transmission schedule for the subscriber units as well as transmitting a schedule message to the subscriber units on a schedule channel such that the schedule provides slot assignments for data transmissions by subscriber units according to their assigned short addresses. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023325 | Configuring New Paths in a Wireless Deterministic Network - In one embodiment, a first node in a wireless deterministic network communicates to a second node configuration information identifying a destination-facing path portion of a particular one-way path traversing from a source node to a destination node within the wireless deterministic network. The destination-facing portion includes a path traversing from the second node over one or more additional nodes to the destination node over which to forward packets received over a first portion of the particular one-way path from the source node to the second node. The configuration information includes a particular time slot for the second node to receive packets being sent over the particular one-way path. In one embodiment, the first node receives from the second node an acknowledgement message in the particular time slot that the destination-facing portion of the particular one-way path was configured and activated. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023326 | Installation of Time Slots for Sending a Packet through an ARC Chain Topology Network - One embodiment includes: determining, by a particular networked device, sending and receiving time slots for progressively communicating a particular packet among nodes of an arc of an Available Routing Construct (ARC) chain topology network in both directions on the arc to reach each edge node of the arc; and determining, by the particular networked device, for each edge node of the arc a predetermined respective time slot for communicating the particular packet to a respective child node on a second arc of the ARC chain topology network. One embodiment includes respectively installing said determined time slots in said nodes of the arc. In one embodiment, the network is a wireless deterministic network. In one embodiment, the predetermined respective time slot for each particular edge node is after all time slots in which the particular packet could be received by said particular edge node. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023327 | Resilient Forwarding of Packets in an ARC Chain Topology Network - One embodiment includes: forwarding a particular packet through an Available Routing Construct (ARC) chain topology network. In one embodiment, this forwarding includes: sending the particular packet by each particular non-edge node on an arc of the plurality of arcs receiving the particular packet to each sibling on the arc that did not send the particular packet to said particular non-edge node, while not sending the particular packet if it was received from both siblings of said particular edge node; and sending the particular packet to a respective child node on a second arc of the plurality of arcs by each particular edge node of two edge nodes on the arc after receiving the particular packet. In one embodiment, the network is a wireless deterministic network with pre-assigned time slots for receiving and subsequently sending a same particular packet by each node of the network. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023328 | OAM and Time Slot Control in a Deterministic ARC Chain Topology Network - In one embodiment, a network of nodes is configured to communicate according to a configuration of Available Routing Construct (ARC) chains as well as monitoring communication in the network, and/or selectively controls whether or not provisioned particular links will be used. One embodiment colors nodes of the network (e.g., a wireless deterministic network) along different paths through the network and marks packets with the color of each traversed node to track a path taken by a packet. One embodiment sends a particular packet through the network and marks over which links the packet traverses and aggregates these traversed links of other copies of the particular packet. One embodiment controls whether or not the provisioned time slots are used based on flooding a control packet through the network with enable or disable information for each of these links. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023329 | WIRELESS NETWORK SIGNAL TO INTERFERENCE PLUS NOISE RATIO ESTIMATION FOR A RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL - A wireless device includes a preamble detector configured to identify a plurality of preambles transmitted via a random access channel of a wireless network. The preamble detector includes a noise floor estimator. The noise floor estimator is configured to: estimate, for a given preamble root sequence identified by the preamble detector, a noise floor value as mean energy of received signal samples, excluding detected preamble samples on the give preamble root sequence, below a noise floor threshold assigned to the given preamble root sequence. The noise floor estimator is configured to compute the noise floor threshold as a product of: average energy of the received signal samples less total signal energy contained in each cyclic prefix window in which a preamble is detected using the given preamble root sequence; and a predetermined normalized relative noise floor threshold based on a target false preamble detection rate. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023330 | Information Transmission From Wireless Access Point - Embodiments herein relate to transmitting information from wireless access points (WAP) sharing a same frequency channel that is part of an industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio band. During a beacon transmit period (BTP), the WAPs transmit a beacon. Then, a first WAP is to collect information from at least one of the plurality of communication devices (CD) associated with the first WAP during a control access period (CAP). Next, the first WAP transmits the collected information during an open access period (OAP). | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023331 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNALS, AND METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNALS - According to the present invention, a common reference signal is transmitted in a subframe configured to receive the common reference signal and/or a fixed subframe predefined to receive the common reference signal, from among a plurality of subframes within a frame. In the present invention, the common reference signal is transmitted in every subframe within a legacy frame duration. However, the common reference signal is transmitted in said configured subframe and/or said fixed subframe within a frame duration which is not a legacy frame duration. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023332 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING CONTROL AND DATA CHANNEL - An approach is provided for performing control signaling. Data and control information are received. The control information is orthogonalized using block-level spreading. The data and the orthogonalized control information are multiplexed at a symbol-level. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150023333 | POWER-EFFICIENT MEDIA ACCESS TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Techniques for media access in wireless networks are disclosed. For instance, embodiments may provide a time interval for accessing a wireless communications channel. In addition, embodiments may prevent channel access during the time interval by stations incapable of employing a first channel access technique. This access technique employs an access probability P. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150030006 | RADIO BASE STATION AND CHANNEL ESTIMATION METHOD - A radio base station including: a processor configured to precode a first reference signal based on a first precoding matrix and a second reference signal based on a second precoding matrix, transmit the precoded first reference signal using a first radio resource and the precoded second reference signal using a second radio resource, to a radio terminal, receive first channel state information and second channel state information from the radio terminal, the first channel state information indicating a first channel estimated at the radio terminal based on the precoded first reference signal, the second channel state information indicating a second channel estimated at the radio terminal based on the precoded second reference signal, and estimate a downlink channel between the radio base station and the radio terminal based on the first channel state information, the second channel state information, the first precoding matrix, and the second precoding matrix. | 01-29-2015 |
| 20150030007 | Joint Transmit and Receive Procedure - A user equipment, UE, ( | 01-29-2015 |
| 20150030008 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DEACTIVATION TIMER OF CELL - The present specification proposes a technique for controlling a deactivation timer of a cell. Specifically, the present specification proposes a method for controlling a deactivation timer of a cell in a mobile communication system. The method comprises the steps of: configuring a primary cell and at least one secondary cell on user equipment (UE); receiving, from the UE, an indicator related to a deactivation timer for one secondary cell from among one or more secondary cells; and disabling, on the UE, the deactivation timer of one secondary cell on the basis of the indicator. | 01-29-2015 |
| 20150030009 | BROADCASTING METHOD FOR SENDING SIGNAL CONTAINING PREDETERMINED INFORMATION AND RADIO APPARATUS - A control information extraction unit receives information on a frame that contains at least a plurality slots from an access control apparatus for controlling communications between radio apparatuses. The control information extraction unit generates a frame that contains at least a plurality of slots in such a manner as to synchronize with the frame corresponding to the received information. An estimation unit estimates empty slots in the plurality of slots generated. A selection unit selects, at random, at least one of the estimated. A modem unit and the like broadcast data using the selected slot. | 01-29-2015 |
| 20150030010 | SYNCHRONIZED CHANNEL ACCESS IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and method for arbitrating channel access in a wireless device including co-located network transceivers are disclosed herein. A wireless device includes a first wireless transceiver and a second wireless transceiver. The first transceiver is configured for operation with a first wireless network. The second transceiver is configured for operation with a second wireless network. The wireless device further includes logic that determines which of the first and second transceivers is enabled to transmit at a given time. The logic causes the first transceiver to transmit a notification signal indicating a time period during which the second transceiver of the wireless device will perform a first wireless transaction, and during which, based on receiving the notification signal, a different wireless device performs a second wireless transaction via the second wireless network without transmitting a notification signal. | 01-29-2015 |
| 20150030011 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The disclosed is a data transmission method and apparatus configured to establish a frequency hopping-retransmission mechanism in a CFP of a superframe and switch a channel accordingly. The method provided by an embodiment includes: selecting two channels as a prescribed channel and a spare channel; dividing a CFP of a superframe into three SCFPs, where a second SCFP is used to re-transmit data that a node fails to transmit in a first SCFP, a third SCFP is used to re-transmit data that the node fails to transmit in the second SCFP, and a timeslot position of each node in the first SCFP is the same as in the second SCFP; broadcasting a beacon frame on the prescribed channel in a beacon period of the superframe, where the beacon frame includes channel selection information and timeslot division information; receiving data from the node; and transmitting an acknowledgement frame. | 01-29-2015 |
| 20150036666 | Timing Advance Group in LTE Small Cell Enhancement - A method for communication in a wireless telecommunication system is provided. The method includes assigning a first cell of a first network node to a first timing advance group (TAG) of a user equipment (UE) and assigning a second cell of a second network node to a second TAG of the UE, wherein the second network node has a separate MAC (medium access control) scheduler from the first network node, and wherein the UE is able to transmit data on both the first and the second cell. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150036667 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF MANAGING SIGNALING RADIO BEARER TRANSMISSIONS AT A USER EQUIPMENT - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to apparatuses and methods of managing signaling radio bearer (SRB) transmissions. In one aspect, the apparatuses and methods are configured to generate a SRB packet comprising signaling information, wherein the SRB packet is configured to be transmitted on a channel according to a scheduling serving grant, determine whether the SRB packet is unable to be transmitted based on resources allocated by the received scheduling serving grant, override the received scheduling serving grant in response to determining that the SRB packet is unable to be transmitted, and transmit at least a part of the SRB packet on the channel. In another aspect, a scheduling information message to indicate whether an additional scheduling severing grant is needed is transmitted on the channel along with at least the part of the SRB packet. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150036668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING POWER SCALING IN UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION - Methods and apparatus for avoiding power scaling and controlling transmit power in uplink data transmission are provided. If a user equipment (UE) would be transmit-power limited when transmitting data concurrently on an uplink high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH) and an uplink data channel, the UE may forgo building data for transmission on the uplink data channel to avoid power scaling. If the UE would be transmit-power limited when transmitting data concurrently on an HS-DPCCH and a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH), the UE may reduce the transmission power of a portion of the data transmitted on the DPCCH to avoid power scaling. The UE may also boost transmission power of a negative acknowledge transmission above network-specified power level. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150036669 | Closed-Loop MIMO Systems and Methods - Methods, devices and systems are provided for transmitting and receiving MIMO signals. In one embodiment, transmitting of the MIMO signals involves pre-coding each of at least two data symbols using a respective pre-coding codeword to preclude a corresponding plurality of pre-coded data symbols. A respective signal is transmitted from each of a plurality of antennas, the respective signal including one of the pre-coded signals and at least one pilot for use in channel estimation. The signals collectively further include at least one beacon pilot vector consisting of a respective beacon pilot per antenna, the beacon pilot vector containing contents known to a receiver for use by the receiver in determining the codeword used to pre-code the at least one data signal. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150043541 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INITIAL SYNCHRONIZATION AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE IN DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT NETWORK COVERAGE - A method at a first device for enabling a device-to-device wireless link, the method detecting whether a presence signal of a second device is received over a first time period, the presence signal of the second device having a time-slot boundary; and if the presence signal of the second device is not detected, initiating a time-slot boundary by the first device including: transmitting a first presence signal of the first device in a selected time-slot; and checking for an acknowledgment to the first presence signal. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043542 | Method and Apparatus for Reporting Reference Information with Respect to Multiple Carriers or Multiple Cells - A method includes causing first reference information associated with a first cell or carrier and second reference information associated with a second cell or carrier to be sent to a first destination in a first time interval and causing at least third reference information associated with a third cell or carrier to be sent to a second destination in a different time interval. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043543 | RADIO BASE STATION - In a radio base station (eNB), a reception unit calculates “TA | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043544 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention concerns a method whereby a base station transmits signals in a wireless communication system. The signal transmission method which comprises a step of transmitting a downlink signal in a first subframe set for uplink use, wherein the transmission timing of the first subframe is determined by means of a second subframe that precedes the first subframe, and a time value for a terminal receiving the first subframe is used in the second subframe. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043545 | TWO-STAGE DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) DISCOVERY PROCEDURES - First user equipment transmits a first synchronization signal and a second synchronization signal that are assigned to the first user equipment for device-to-device (D2D) communication. The first synchronization signal indicates a timing reference for D2D communication and a combination of the first synchronization signal and the second synchronization signal indicate resources allocated to the first user equipment to transmit discovery information for D2D communication. First user equipment detects a first synchronization signal and a second synchronization signal that are assigned to second user equipment for D2D communication. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043546 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HIGH-POWER BASE STATION, LOW-POWER BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication system | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043547 | Method and Mobile Terminal Providing Priority-Based Uplink Scheduling Information - A method and mobile terminal for providing uplink scheduling information to a scheduler in a wireless telecommunication system. When a logical channel having data available to transmit triggers a buffer status report, the mobile terminal determines whether a priority level associated with the logical channel exceeds a predefined threshold. If so, the mobile terminal performs a scheduling request procedure with the scheduler. If not, the mobile terminal delays the scheduling request procedure until a predefined timing event has occurred. The predefined timing event may be at least one of expiration of a timer, a radio bearer associated with the logical channel becoming active, and if the scheduling request procedure is being performed using a contention-based random access, contention resolution succeeding for the mobile terminal. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043548 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION AND BASE STATION, AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - According to one aspect of the present invention, antennas or antenna nodes spaced away from each other by a predetermined distance or more are configured to be able to transmit control information of mutually different user equipment groups, thereby increasing the efficiency in the operation of control channels. In addition, according to another aspect of the present invention, a resource region for transmitting control information for an improved user equipment, which is a target of a multi-node cooperative transmission, is set differently from a resource region for transmitting control information for a legacy user equipment, thereby increasing the efficiency in the transmission of the control information for the improved user equipment. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043549 | One or multiple bit restricted access window (RAW) end point determination for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - One or multiple bit restricted access window (RAW) end point determination within for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A RAW is defined in which only devices of the particular class (e.g., low power class, Z class, smart meter station (SMSTA) class, etc.) are allowed access to the communication medium. Indication of the end of such a RAW may be included within one or more bits set within a signal field (SIG) field of a framer packet generated by a given device within the system and transmitted to one or more other devices. After completion of the RAW, other respective devices of at least one other type of class may be provided access to the communication medium. The manner of access to the communication media outside of the RAW may be varied (e.g., scheduled, based on carrier sense multiple access/collision avoidance (CSMA/CA), etc.). | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043550 | Radio Communication System, Reception Device, Mobile Station Device, Transmission Device, Base Station Device, Transmission/Reception Device Control Method, and Transmission/Reception Device Control Program - A radio communication system includes transmission/reception devices which perform communication by dynamically switching a first transmission mode and a second transmission mode having a lower quality than the first transmission mode, wherein the transmission/reception devices have a transmission mode decision means which fixes a transmission mode upon communication to the first transmission mode for a given period of time. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043551 | WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system comprising one or more wireless stations programmed to await for an authorizing signal to initiate wireless communications with a network controller or access point. The network controller maintains identification information in different queues, and polls stations from those queues. The wireless station identification information may be moved between the different queues in response to wireless station activity. Between polling, each mobile station aggregates data for the next opportunity to transmit. Multi-polling may be employed such that more than a single station is polled at a time. Polling is accomplished by polling one of the more stations from each queue having the effect that stations in one queue are polled more often than those in another queue. If a lesser active station becomes active, it may be moved into the shorter queue and consequently will be polled more often. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150043552 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for communication includes transmitting a first uplink message from a first remote node ( | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150049739 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONTROLLING CELL ACTIVATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a method and an apparatus used for in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of controlling cell activity and an apparatus therefore, in which the method comprises: receiving a signal including an identifier and a timer value, wherein the identifier identifies a corresponding TAG and the timer value is used for cell deactivation of the corresponding TAG; and applying the received timer value to all cells belonging to the corresponding TAG. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150049740 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method for transmitting an uplink signal of a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes receiving an uplink (UL) grant from a serving base station and performing UL transmission based on the UL grant or device-to-device (D2D) communication, according to a configuration for D2D communication and a configuration of transmission time interval (TTI) bundling. When bundled UL transmission based on the UL grant and transmission for D2D communication are scheduled in the same TTI, the UL transmission scheduled in the TTI is performed in a first available TTI after the TTI, and, when two bundled UL transmissions according to two different UL grants are scheduled in the same TTI, bundled UL transmission according to the later received UL grant of the two different UL grants is dropped. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150049741 | Downlink Procedures For LTE/LTE-A Communication Systems With Unlicensed Spectrum - Long term evolution (LTE)/LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) deployments with unlicensed spectrum leverage more efficient LTE communication aspects over unlicensed spectrum, such as over WIFI radio access technology. In order to accommodate such communications, various downlink procedures may be modified in order to handle communications between licensed and unlicensed spectrum with LTE/LTE-A deployments with unlicensed spectrum. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150049742 | MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MIMO) TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose an uplink MIMO transmission method, including: sending, by a UE, first data to a base station (NodeB) in a first process in an HARQ_RTT, and receiving an acknowledgement character related to the first data and returned by the NodeB; and determining, by the UE according to the acknowledgement character and a rank value to be used for next transmission, data transmission of the first process in a next HARQ_RTT. The present invention further provides a corresponding user equipment and base station. Implementing the method and apparatus provided by the present invention can enable a UE to correctly perform HARQ transmission using MIMO, thereby effectively ensuring performance of MIMO. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150049743 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR UPLINK FEEDBACK FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS (HSPDA) - Systems and method for uplink feedback for multipoint transmission of high-speed downlink packet access (MP-HSDPA) that may improve downlink transmission efficiency and cell coverage. For example, Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) and/or Precoding Control Indicator (PCI) that may be calculated to accommodate the needs of coordinated dynamic network scheduling. Additionally, various frame structures may be generated for the uplink feedback that may carry multiple CQI and HARQ-ACK feedbacks from MP-HSDPA. The frame structures may also address asynchronous downlink transmissions between two cells. Moreover, HS-DPCCH power offset settings for both CQI and HARQ-ACK fields that may be modified and/or created to ensure reliable uplink feedback transmission. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150049744 | EFFICIENT FORMATS OF BEACON, ANNOUNCEMENT, AND BEAMFORMING TRAINING FRAMES - A method includes generating a first data unit to be transmitted during a first time period to one or several stations assumed to be beamformed, including determining a time interval that separates the first time period from a second time period, such that a second data unit is transmitted during the second time period to one or several stations assumed to be beamformed, and generating a parameter indicative of the time interval, such that the first data unit includes the parameter. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150055632 | Base Station and Method for Primary and Secondary Synchronization Signal Transmission in New Carriers - A method for transmitting primary synchronization signals and secondary synchronization signals in new carriers is provided, which includes: with respect to a time domain, a base station side sending Primary Synchronization Signals (PSS) and Secondary Synchronization Signals (SSS) in Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols except OFDM symbols occupied by reference signals in subframes #1 and #6, or subframes #0 and #5, or subframes #1, #6, #0 and #5; and with respect to a frequency domain, the base station side sending the PSS or SSS in resources of intermediate 6 Physical Resource Block (PRB) pairs of system bandwidth; the reference signals include Demodulation Reference Signals (DMRS). | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150055633 | ACCESS POINT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION - An access point (AP) and a communication system are provided. The access point comprises at least but not limited to a transceiver, a network connection unit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured for the following steps. The AP receives channel access requests of the user equipments (UEs) from the UEs. Next, the AP transmits a channel request data according to QoS requirements of plurality of channel access requests of the UEs to the server. Afterward, the AP receives resource allocation information associated with the channel request data from the server, wherein the resource allocation information comprises an allocated result of physical channels and transmission power configurations. Subsequently, the AP allocates the physical channels to the UEs according to the QoS requirements of the channel access requests of the UEs and the resource allocation information. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150055634 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus for establishing peer-to-peer communication in a wireless network is described. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may receive configuration information comprising periodic resources comprising time and subcarrier resources from a base station of a wireless network. The time and subcarrier resources may be used in discovery of other WTRUs. The WTRU is further configured to transmit an identification in the allocated resources and to transmit a synchronization signal to a peer WTRU for timing synchronization of the peer WTRU. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150055635 | METHOD OF PROCESSING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of processing control information in a mobile communication system is disclosed, by which an RRC connection setup can be quickly completed and by which control information can be processed without an unnecessary standby of a mobile terminal. The present invention includes the steps of receiving a plurality of protocol data units transmitted plural time from a transmitting side via one common logical channel by an RLC (radio link control) entity operating in a UM (unacknowledged mode) and having a receiving window and a timer, re-ordering a plurality of the received protocol data units using sequence numbers of a plurality of the received protocol data units, the receiving window and the timer, reassembling at least one service data unit by processing a plurality of the re-ordered protocol data units, and delivering the at least one service data unit. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150055636 | Alternatives To Satellite Signals For Synchronization In Macro Network - Disclosed herein are methods and systems that may help a base station provide high-speed data communication under a protocol such as LTE or WiMAX, even when a GPS signal is not available to the base station. In an exemplary embodiment, a base station may acquire a high-stability reference signal via a subcarrier of a terrestrial broadcast signal, such as an FM radio signal, and may coordinate the timing frame transmissions with other nearby base stations, instead of relying upon a GPS signal for such functionality. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150063316 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCE - In a cellular communication system including a plurality of cells, a resource allocation apparatus of a base station determines a resource division ratio of a present resource frame using a traffic load of a plurality of cells that are measured for an immediately preceding resource frame and marginal utility of each partition, divides a present resource frame into a plurality of partitions according to the determined resource division ratio, and allocates a plurality of partitions to a user. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063317 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING UPLINK SIGNALS, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting an uplink signal in a wireless communication system. The method includes the steps of: transmitting an uplink signal in a first uplink transmitting timing period determined on the basis of a first timing advance command received from a first serving cell; and, when a specific condition is satisfied, transmitting an uplink signal in a second uplink transmitting timing period determined on the basis of a second timing advance command. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063318 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE USER UPLINK - The disclosure provides methods and apparatuses for multiple user uplink. One aspect of the disclosure provides a method for wireless communication. The method comprises receiving a first wireless message from an access point indicating an uplink transmission opportunity and a target transmission duration for each of a plurality of user terminals including a first user terminal. The method also comprises changing a planned transmission duration of a second wireless message from the first user terminal to fit the target transmission duration. The method also comprises transmitting the second wireless message from the first user terminal over the target transmission duration. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063319 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING MULTIPLE RE-ASSOCIATION ATTEMPTS - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication are described herein. In some aspects, a method for preventing multiple re-association attempts includes identifying a station, determining a back-off period for the identified station during which an access point will reject association requests from the station, and transmitting a message to the station, the message including the determined back-off period. The method may further include rejecting association requests from the identified station during the back-off period. The method may also include determining a timeout period for the identified station after which disassociation with the access point will occur. The message may further include the determined timeout period. The method may also include disassociating the identified station after the timeout period. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063320 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF MULTI-USER UPLINK WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS - Methods and apparatus for acknowledgment of multiple user uplink are provided. In one aspect, a method of wireless communication includes receiving a first wireless message from a first station at least partially concurrently with receiving a second wireless message from a second station, generating a first acknowledgment message in response to receiving the first wireless message, generating a second acknowledgement message in response to receiving the second wireless message, and transmitting the first acknowledgment message to the first station at least partially concurrently with transmitting the second acknowledgement message to the second station. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063321 | RADAR DETECTION - Systems and methods for radar detection in a communication environment are disclosed. The radar detection may comprise, for example: receiving a first signal; identifying the first signal as a potential radar signal; limiting transmission by an apparatus as a result of the identification; receiving a second signal while the transmission by the apparatus is limited; and determining whether at least one of the first signal, the second signal, or a combination thereof is a radar signal. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063322 | METHOD OF IMPROVING CHANNEL UTILIZATION - The present invention provides improvements on latency on highest priority messaging and channel utilization in a time-slotted access channel structure. New superframe structures are presented where scheduled, but unused access slots can be utilized by secondary nodes. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063323 | CHANNEL SELECTION TO REDUCE INTERFERENCE TO A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK FROM A CELLULAR NETWORK - The disclosure is related to selecting an operating channel for a cellular network to reduce interference to a wireless local area network (WLAN) operated by a small cell comprising a WLAN access point and a cellular network modem. The small cell performs a channel scan of available channels, determines whether or not there is a clean channel to be the operating channel for the cellular network based on the channel scan, wherein a clean channel comprises a channel that interferes with the WLAN less than a WLAN interference threshold, and selects the clean channel as the operating channel for the cellular network based on the clean channel being available or turns off the cellular network based on no clean channel being available. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063324 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of a user equipment are provided for transmitting a channel status report in a communication system. The method includes receiving first information for at least one channel status report; generating a first channel status report corresponding to the first information for the at least one channel status report based on a reference signal in a first subframe; and transmitting the first channel status report based on the first information for the at least one channel status report in a second subframe. The first information for the at least one channel status report comprises information for a period and an offset, and a difference between the first subframe and the second subframe is a smallest value greater than or equal to a predetermined value. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150063325 | RECEIVER SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless apparatus utilizes a wireless transceiver, in communication with a processor, to transmit and receive messages via a wireless network. The wireless transceiver may receive a schedule definition for devices affiliated with a node of the wireless network. The processor may determine, from the received schedule definition, one or more time periods allocated to the wireless apparatus. The wireless transceiver may communicate with the wireless network in accordance with at least one of the one or more time periods. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150071254 | Adaptation of Transmission Parameters - A radio frequency communication device ( | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071255 | Sensor Data Transport and Consolidation Within Communication Nodes in a Network - In one embodiment, sensor data is transported in a network to a rendezvous point network node, which consolidates the information into a consolidated result which is communicated to the destination. Such consolidation by a network node reduces the number of paths required in the network between the sensors and the destination. One embodiment includes acquiring, by each of a plurality of originating nodes in a wireless deterministic network, external data related to a same physical event; communicating through the network said external data from each of the plurality of originating nodes to a rendezvous point network node (RP) within the network; processing, by the RP, said external data from each of the plurality of originating nodes to produce a consolidated result; and communicating the consolidated result to a destination node of the network. In one embodiment, the network is a low power lossy network (LLN). | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071256 | METHOD FOR SETTING SYNCHRONIZATION BETWEEN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION TERMINALS BASED ON CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for setting synchronization between terminals performing device-to-device (D | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071257 | RADIO RESOURCE REQUEST FOR IRAT MEASUREMENT IN TD-HSUPA/TD-HSDPA - A user equipment (UE) may achieve fast inter radio access technology (IRAT) measurement and better IRAT handover performance to effectively avoid call drops via smooth IRAT handover to other RATs during Time Division High Speed Downlink/Uplink Packet Access (TD-HSDPA/TD-HSUPA) data transmission. In some instances, the UE may speed up the IRAT measurement by request a resource allocation grant preference from a base station. The request indicates a reduced number of time resources and an increased number of other resources. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071258 | RANDOM ACCESS ALGORITHM FOR LTE SYSTEMS - A method for initial synchronisation in a random access procedure in LTE standards provides dividing the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) into a plurality of tiles, each comprising by a adjacent subcarriers, over which the channel response is assumed to be substantially flat, i.e. the frequency response is replaced over each subcarrier of a tile with an average frequency response. In an embodiment, an algorithm for initial synchronization is provided on the basis of a generalized likelihood ratio test (GLRT). | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071259 | Scheduling method and electronic device using the same - A scheduling method for an electronic device is disclosed. The electronic device comprises a first wireless module and a second wireless module for transmitting and receiving wireless signals of a first wireless communication system and a second wireless communication system respectively. The scheduling method comprises determining an arrival timing of specific frame periodically transmitted by a base station of the first wireless communication system; determining an interval covering the arrival timings of the specific frame; disabling the second wireless module during the interval for facilitating the first wireless module to hunt the specific frame; and enabling the second wireless module when the interval expires. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071260 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL TO AND FROM NETWORK AT USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a signal to a transmitter at a receiver in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving first information to be transmitted to the transmitter from a higher layer and activating a timer, receiving second information to be transmitted to the transmitter from the higher layer, and transmitting a resource allocation request message to the transmitter, for transmitting the first and second information, upon expiration of the timer. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071261 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING TAG OF CELL IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - This description suggests a technique of controlling the timing advance group (TAG) of a cell. In particular, this description suggests a method of managing the TAG in a communication system. The method may include receiving a control signal indicating a cell by user equipment (UE); putting the cell in a first TAG by the UE in response to the control signal, wherein the first TAG includes only at least one secondary cell of which the uplink timing is not decided; performing a random access procedure on the cell in the first TAG by the UE; and putting the cell in a second TAG from the first TAG by the UE. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071262 | Method and Apparatus for Signaling That Stations are Awake and Ready to Receive Data - A method, apparatus and software configured to compile a traffic indication message indicating downlink traffic is waiting for a plurality of users; and only for each nth ones of the users for which a response to the traffic indication message is received, the response identifying the nth user in a time period corresponding to a portion of the traffic indication message which indicates downlink traffic is waiting for that user, schedule the downlink traffic in each nth slot corresponding to the time period. A method, apparatus and software configured to determine that a received traffic indication message indicates downlink traffic is waiting for a particular user; map a portion of the traffic indication message, that indicates the downlink traffic is waiting for the particular user, to an uplink time period; and send, in the mapped uplink time period, a response indicating that the particular user is awake. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071263 | CHANNEL QUALITY INDEX (CQI) REPORTING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of wireless communication in a wireless network includes transmitting synchronization shift (SS) bits with a channel quality index (CQI) report. The method also includes indicating, via the synchronization shift bits, one or more preferred time slots for receiving a high speed data transmission. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071264 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION AND RETRANSMISSION OF MOBILE STATION AT BASE STATION - Disclosed is a communication method for controlling data transmission of a mobile station at a base station. The method comprises the steps of: determining, by the base station, a transmission operation to be performed by the mobile station in next transmission time interval based on HARQ and schedule result; sending, in a downlink by the base station, an ACK/NACK packet, an indicator indicating the type of the transmission by the mobile station and a resource use command for the used resource based on the determined transmission operation; receiving, by the mobile station, the ACK/NACK packet, the indicator and the resource use command sent from the base station, and performing respective transmission operations according to the received ACK/NACK packet, indicator and resource use command without using any data-associated signaling in an uplink. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071265 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A RADIO LINK CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT SIZE - A method and apparatus are used to create RLC PDUs in advance of the E-TFC selection for the MAC PDU that will include this or these RLC PDU(s). The apparatus may be configured to pre-generate RLC PDUs for transmission in a later TTI. This approach avoids the large peak processing requirement due to the tight delay constraint if any RLC PDU to be included into a MAC PDU had to be created after the determination of the size of this MAC PDU, i.e. after E-TFC selection. The method and apparatus maintain an approximate match between the size of an RLC PDU and the size of the MAC PDU it is included into. Maintaining this approximate match ensures that the RLC PDU error rate due to HARQ residual errors remains low. This approach may be designed as “semi-radio aware” or “radio-aware with delay”. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071266 | Extended USF Addressing Space - The present invention relates to assigning addresses to communication devices in a radio access network and notifying communication devices of scheduled uplink transmission time periods. Related methods, communication devices and control units are disclosed. A method of assigning an address to a communication device in a radio access network for use in notification of scheduled uplink transmission time periods for the communication device is provided. The method comprises assigning to the communication device an uplink state flag (USF) value. Furthermore, the method comprises assigning to the communication device an extended USF (eUSF) value. The address assigned to the communication device is a combination of the assigned USF value and the assigned eUSF value. By means of the eUSF value, the normal address range provided by the USF is extended, thereby facilitating use of more communication devices in the radio access network. | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150071267 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING DATA BASED ON HARQ - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a device, and a system for transmitting data based on a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ). The method includes: adjusting, according to current physical resources, a channel quality indicator (CQI) fed back by a terminal to obtain an adjusted CQI and determining an initial transmit power corresponding to the adjusted CQI; calculating an optimum number N | 03-12-2015 |
| 20150078346 | SPECTRUM SHARING IN WHITE SPACE BANDS USING JOINT POWER CONTROL AND CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT - An optimization framework for spectrum sharing in white space bands formulates an objective function as a linear function of channels and power levels, and constructs a linear set of equations based on a general graph model according to constraints, including spectrum usage regulations and/or resource re-use constraints. The optimization framework provides joint power control and channel assignment where the solution is implemented by an algorithm that allocates time/power/channel to each network to avoid interference while re-using time and/or frequency resources. The solution allocates a fair and orthogonal portion of time on each channel for a certain power level to the networks. The solution can be implemented by a central entity having at least location information of the networks and, upon solving the optimization problem, signals scheduling information of each channel assigned. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078347 | STORAGE OF BASE STATION IDENTITY CODE (BSIC) TIMING - A method and apparatus for wireless communication stores synchronization channel (SCH) timing for each identified Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) cell. The stored SCH timing is used to perform base station identity code (BSIC) reconfirmation for an identified GSM cell without frequency correction channel (FCCH) tone detection and initial BSIC confirmation. The stored SCH timing is maintained across a plurality of user equipment (UE) states. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078348 | TRANSMISSION OF PHYSICAL BROADCAST CHANNEL (PBCH) CONTENTS - Technology for transmitting physical broadcast channel (PBCH) contents is disclosed. An evolved node B (eNB) may configure one or more repetitions of PBCH content for transmission, to a user equipment (UE), from a cell at a selected time interval. The eNB may select a scrambling code for the one or more repetitions of PBCH content transmitted from the cell. The eNB may apply the scrambling code to one or more repetitions of PBCH content. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078349 | DRX OPERATION FOR UL/DL RECONFIGURATION - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for identifying subframes in a radio frame on which a UE may receive a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) or enhanced PDCCH (ePDCCH) transmission. Specifically, the UE may receive multiple indications of uplink/downlink (UL/DL) subframe configurations and identify one or more subframes in which the UE may receive the PDCCH or ePDCCH transmission. The UE may then monitor one or more of the identified subframes and base discontinuous reception (DRX) timer functionality on one or more of the identified subframes. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078350 | DUTY-CYCLE CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network has a duty-cycle limitation, which defines a total transmission time budget and an average transmission time. A device ( | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078351 | FAST WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING MULTIPLE TRANSFER RATE PARTITIONING AND COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION - A wireless local area network (WLAN) communication method and apparatus using multiple transmission speed partitioning and cooperative transmission are disclosed. The WLAN communication method includes transmitting, by access point to the nodes, transmission time slots, partitions and internal transmission priorities using transmission time slot information, partition information and internal transmission priority information, receiving uplink packet from one node, determining whether downlink data to be transmitted to the high speed or the low speed node is present, or not in the download queue, transmitting, if present, the downlink packet to the nodes, removing downlink data from the download queue for ACK, and transmitting, if not present, transmitting ACK to the nodes. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078352 | System and Method for OFDMA PS-Poll Transmission - A method for communicating in a wireless system includes receiving a trigger frame including a paging bitmap, and resource allocation information indicating a location of a resource pool for transmitting a packet, and determining if the station is permitted to transmit the packet in accordance with the paging bitmap. If the station is permitted to transmit the packet, the method also includes determining a location of a network resource in the resource pool in accordance with an identifier of the station, and transmitting the packet at the location of the network resource. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078353 | ACCESS POINT COORDINATION FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A presence of interference between a first wireless network and a second wireless network is determined. Transmissions in the first wireless network are coordinated with transmissions in the second wireless network to reduce interference between the first wireless network and the second wireless network. Transmissions in the first wireless network are scheduled based on the coordinating to reduce interference between the first wireless network and the second wireless network. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078354 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS, AND RECEIVING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a communication method, a receiving method and an apparatus in a wireless local area network. The communication method includes: determining a first channel and a second channel of the wireless local area network, where the first channel and the second channel are consecutive, and the wireless local area network includes a first local area network and a second local area network; sending a first beacon frame by using all or a part of a bandwidth of the first channel, where the first beacon frame includes system information of the first local area network; and sending a second beacon frame by using all or a part of a bandwidth of the second channel, where the second beacon frame includes system information of the second local area network. The embodiments of the present invention improve a utilization rate of system spectrum resources. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150078355 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) PROTOCOL FOR BODY AREA NETWORKS - A method for controlling access to a wireless medium in a network. The method comprises dividing an access time to the wireless medium into fixed and repeated time rounds, wherein each time round includes a plurality of superframes and each superframe includes a fixed number of time slots; allocating a global beacon period within a time round; and reserving subframes within each superframe, wherein master devices can access the wireless medium at least during the reserved subframes. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150085833 | TECHNIQUES TO MANAGE HETEROGENOUS CARRIER TYPES - Techniques to manage heterogeneous carrier types are described. User equipment may comprise a processor circuit and a network control component for execution on the processor circuit to locate a synchronization signal (SS) and a cell-specific reference signal (CRS) in a physical resource block (PRB) pair of a long term evolution (LTE) system, the PRB pair having a physical signal pattern for a first carrier type, the physical signal pattern for the first carrier type to have a same number of defined positions between the SS and the CRS within the PRB pair as a physical signal pattern for a second carrier type. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085834 | TIME DIVISION LONG TERM EVOLUTION (TD-LTE) FRAME STRUCTURE MODIFICATION - A method of wireless communication includes communicating with a base station using an extended special subframe. Communicating with the base station using the extended special subframe may be performed by disabling an uplink pilot time slot and an adjacent uplink subframe. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085835 | OUT-OF-SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTION AND CORRECTION DURING COMPRESSION - Methods and apparatus are described for synchronizing compression for communication between a user equipment (UE) and a serving node. The methods and apparatus include determining that a compressor memory of a compressor and a decompressor memory of a decompressor are out-of-synchronization based on a checksum failure. Further, the methods and apparatus include resetting the compressor memory and the decompressor memory to a predetermined state in response to determining that the compressor memory and the decompressor memory are out-of-synchronization, wherein the compressor memory and the decompressor memory are synchronized at the predetermined state. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085836 | UPLINK SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND STATION DEVICE, AND UPLINK SIGNAL RECEIVING METHOD AND ACCESS POINT DEVICE - The present invention provides an uplink signal transmission method and apparatus. A method for transmitting an uplink signal to an access point (AP) by means of a station (STA) in a Wireless local area network (WLAN) system comprises: sensing a medium being occupied by another STA; and transmitting the uplink signal to the AP on the medium being occupied by another STA. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085837 | METHOD OF SYNCHRONIZATION AND DETECTION FOR A MULTI-STATION WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (WiFi), AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM UTILIZING THIS METHOD - A method is provided for detection and synchronization for a multistation wireless communication system (WiFi) implementing a layer, termed the MAC or Medium Access Control layer, provided for implementing a multiple access protocol and a physical layer, termed the PHY or Physical Layer, provided for achieving synchronization and detection functions, the MAC layer transmitting commands to the PHY layer so as to carry out the multiple access protocol and the PHY layer generating in response at least one waveform carrying synchronization signals and detection signals, the MAC layer implements an orthogonal or quasi-orthogonal cyclic signal to construct the at least one waveform. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085838 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication method is provided in which beam forming information for forming transmission beams directed from the small base station to the user terminal are generated based on position-related information of the user terminal acquired by communication between the macro base station and the user terminal using a coverage carrier and position-related information of the small base station, and the small base station precodes at least one of a common control signal and a reference signal that are common in a small cell (C2) based on the beam forming information and transmits the precoded signal from a plurality of transmitting antennas using a capacity carrier. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085839 | UPLINK TIMING ERROR REDUCTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The technology presented in this disclosure pertains to telecommunication. For example, there is presented a method of operating a wireless terminal | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085840 | TIME DIVISION LONG TERM EVOLUTION (TD-LTE) FRAME STRUCTURE - A method of wireless communication includes communicating with a base station using a special subframe that extends a guard period over an uplink pilot time slot and one or more disabled, adjacent uplink subframes. The method also includes associating a control information subframe with a specific downlink subframe while accounting for both cell radius extension and loss of the one or more disabled, adjacent uplink subframes used to communicate the extended special subframe. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085841 | CARRIER SENSE ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION (CSAT) IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for Carrier Sense Adaptive Transmission (CSAT) and related operations in unlicensed spectrum are disclosed to reduce interference between co-existing Radio Access Technologies (RATs). The parameters for a given CSAT communication scheme may be adapted dynamically based on received signals from a transceiver for a native RAT to be protected and an identification of how that RAT is utilizing a shared resource such as an unlicensed band. Other operations such as Discontinuous Reception (DRX) may be aligned with a CSAT Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) communication pattern by way of a DRX broadcast/multicast message. Different TDM communication patterns may be staggered in time across different frequencies. Channel selection for a co-existing RAT may also be configured to afford further protection to native RATs by preferring operation on secondary channels as opposed to primary channels. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085842 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEACTIVATING SECONDARY CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and an apparatus for deactivating secondary carriers in a mobile communication system using carrier aggregation are provided. A communication method, for a User Equipment (UE), includes activating a secondary carrier, starting a first timer upon activation of the secondary carrier, starting a second timer when the first timer expires, and deactivating the activated secondary carrier when the second timer expires. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150085843 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and apparatus for controlling in-device coexistence (IDC) interference in a wireless communication system are described in the present invention. The present invention includes transmitting UE capability information whether the UE has a capability to measure IDC, to a base station (BS); receiving measurement configuration information whether the UE is allowed to send IDC indication, from the BS; and transmitting the IDC indication and at least one of measurements which are a measurement in consideration of IDC and a measurement without consideration of IDC to the BS. It is possible to control reducing occurrence of in-device coexistence interference. | 03-26-2015 |
| 20150092752 | GRANT PROCESSING FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for control information processing and utilization in a wireless communications system that utilizes one or more flexible bandwidth carriers. The methods may include receiving control information over a first channel of one of the one or more flexible bandwidth carriers, determining a processing time for the received control information over the first channel of the one of the one or more flexible bandwidth carriers based on a processing time of control information for another bandwidth carrier, and utilizing the received control information over the first channel of the one of the one or more flexible bandwidth carriers during a first transmission time interval of the first channel of the one of the one or more flexible bandwidth carriers subsequent to the processing time for the received control information over the first channel of the one of the one or more flexible bandwidth carriers. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092753 | HIGH PRECISION ACCESS POINT TO ACCESS POINT SYNCHRONIZATION IN AN INDOOR POSITION LOCATION SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and devices are described that provide for high precision synchronization between pairs of APs within a tracking area of a position location network. These tools and techniques may provide for incrementally synchronizing timers and oscillators located at respective APs. An AP may transmit a course frequency and timing acquisition signal that a second AP utilizes to estimate a frequency offset and/or time offset. The AP may transmit a subsequent fine frequency and timing acquisition signal which may be used to accurately adjust the estimated frequency offset and/or time offset of the second AP. The second AP may thus incrementally synchronize its oscillator(s) and/or timer(s). These techniques may be utilized over a multi-hop wireless network. The methods, systems, and devices may be applicable to single- and multi-floor location tracking systems. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092754 | HIGH PRECISION NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION IN AN INDOOR POSITION LOCATION SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and devices for synchronizing a position location network. The methods, systems, and/or devices may provide for designating as a master AP one AP from a network. The master AP may broadcast synchronization signals, which other APs in the network may use to synchronize their respective oscillators and/or clocks. In some cases, the master AP and/or a network server (e.g., a tracking management server) may designate acting master APs. The acting master APs may, for example, broadcast synchronization signals to neighboring APs. The acting master APs and/or the master AP may maintain lists of synchronized APs, which may be transmitted among APs and/or to a network server. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092755 | CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS FROM INTERFERING STATIONS - An access point to transmit a first message that instructs stations (STAs) to bypass uplink transmissions for a first time interval indicated in the first message. The access point is to transmit one or more first messages at a transmission power sufficient for a first portion of the STAs to decode the one or more first messages and insufficient for a second portion of the STAs to decode the one or more first messages. The transmission power can be determined based on minimum transmit powers associated with the STAs. Subsequent second time intervals can be determined based on uplink transmissions received from the STAs during the first time interval. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092756 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR GENERATING FRACTIONAL GUARD PERIODS - A method, system, and computer program product is provided for transmitting output symbols in sub-slots that each have a pre-determined length. A UE generates a first output symbol having a first symbol length, and transmits the first output symbol with a guard period having a guard period length. During the guard period, no transmission is made by the UE. The sum of the first symbol length and the guard period length is less than or equal to the predetermined length. Further, the UE generates a plurality of other output symbols that each have the predetermined length. Then, immediately following the transmission of the first output symbol, the UE transmits the plurality of other output symbols. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092757 | HARQ-ACK Resource Allocation and Use for eIMTA - A downlink data transmission is performed in a downlink subframe. One or more resources are determined. The one or more resources are to be used for transmission or reception of error information for the received transmission in an uplink subframe based at least on an association set between one or more downlink or special subframes and an uplink subframe. The determined association set depends on a downlink reference configuration. The association set for each uplink subframe comprises a grouping of the downlink or special subframes into at least two groups. An association set is defined only for the subframes which are uplink subframes in a corresponding downlink reference configuration. The error information is transmitted or received using the determined one or more resources in the uplink subframe. Methods, apparatus, programs, and program products are disclosed. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092758 | PRIORITIZATION OF DIFFERENT OPERATORS IN SHARED SPECTRUM - Methods, systems, apparatuses, and devices are described for wireless communications. In one method, an opportunity may be identified for a first operator to perform a clear channel assessment (CCA) for a shared spectrum. The opportunity may be based on a priority of the first operator with respect to at least one other operator associated with the shared spectrum. The CCA may be performed for the shared spectrum during the identified opportunity to determine whether the shared spectrum is available for a transmission during a transmission interval. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092759 | Low-Latency Synchronous Clock Distribution and Recovery for High-Speed OFMDA-Based Mobile Backhaul - A communication system includes an OFDMA transmitter (Tx) at an optical line terminal (OLT) generating an OFDMA signal by assigning orthogonal subcarriers to different cell sites through digital logic, an electrical multiplexer combining the electrical OFDMA signal with two electrical clock signals, and an optical intensity modulator intensity-modulating the resulting joint electrical OFDMA+clocks signal; an optical multiplexer receiving aggregate OFDMA signals on multiple wavelengths with tight DWDM λ-spacing; a remote node (RN) receiving the OFDMA signals, such that each wavelength is distributed by a de-multiplexer (Demux) to designated general small cell area, to which cell sites are connected by optical splitters; and an optical network unit (ONU) to directly photodetect and digitize received OFDMA signal, wherein downstream (DS) information for each cell is digitally extracted and prepared for wireless radio frequency (RF) transmission over an air interface, and an electrical splitter and bandpass filters to separate the OFDMA and clock signals for DSP-free clock recovery. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092760 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACTIVITY COORDINATION IN MULTI-RADIO TERMINALS - A wireless communication device is provided with a first radio module and a second radio module inside. The first radio module performs wireless transceiving according to a plurality of first traffic patterns which each indicates allocations of a plurality of first slots for a plurality of forthcoming transmitting or receiving operations, respectively. The second radio module determines an indicator indicating at least one of a plurality of second traffic patterns which each indicates allocations of a plurality of second slots for a plurality of forthcoming transmitting or receiving operations, respectively. Particularly, one or more allocations of the second slots are selectively determined according to the first traffic patterns. Also, the second radio module transmits the indicator to a peer communication device, so that the peer communication device performs transmitting or receiving operations according to the indicator. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092761 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UP LINK CONTROL SIGNAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting uplink control information in a mobile communication system; and, more particularly, to a method for effectively forming uplink control information transmitted through a downlink from a base station to a terminal in a mobile communication system for providing a packet service and transmitting the uplink control information with minimum radio resources occupied. The method includes the steps of generating uplink control information; allocating the uplink control information to a downlink-shared radio resource for packet data transmission based on downlink scheduling information; and transmitting the radio resource to a terminal. The present invention is applied to a mobile communication system. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150092762 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR TRANSMISSION CONTROL - A transmission control method may include: determining, by an access device, a distribution of a downlink transmission time slot in a first subframe of a first wireless frame, where the first subframe is a special subframe in a case that the first wireless frame has a first configuration periodicity, or the first subframe is a downlink subframe in a case that the first wireless frame has a second configuration periodicity; generating, by the access device, control information for indicating the determined distribution of the downlink transmission time slot in the first subframe; and sending, by the access device, the first wireless frame to a user terminal, where the control information is carried in a downlink control channel of the first subframe of the first wireless frame, or the control information is carried in a previous subframe of the first subframe of the first wireless frame. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150098451 | WLAN AND LTE TIME DIVISION BASED SCHEDULING DEVICES AND METHODS - A device with concurrent long-term evolution (LTE) and WLAN uplink transmission includes a WLAN transceiver coupled to an LTE transceiver via an interface. The LTE transceiver includes an LTE Layer-1 module that determines whether an LTE data downlink activity is scheduled for an LTE downlink sub-frame of an LTE time frame, based on information in a first portion of the LTE downlink sub-frame. When determination is made that the LTE data downlink activity is not scheduled for the LTE downlink sub-frame, a message may be communicated through the interface to notify the WLAN transceiver that the second portion of the LTE downlink sub-frame is available for WLAN communication. The LTE time frame includes multiple LTE downlink sub-frames each including the first portion and a second portion. The first portion provides the information that indicates whether the LTE data downlink activity is scheduled for the second portion of that LTE sub-frame. | 04-09-2015 |
| 20150098452 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - A method and apparatus can be configured to perform discontinuous monitoring of a macro cell/MeNB. The method can also include performing monitoring of a small cell/SeNB. The monitoring of the macro cell/MeNB and the monitoring of the small cell/SeNB are performed using a time-division-multiplexing pattern. The monitoring of the macro cell/MeNB has higher priority over the monitoring of the small cell/SeNB. | 04-09-2015 |
| 20150098453 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus of transmitting information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes transmitting information based on a first resource index through a first antennae and transmitting the information based on a second resource index through a second antennae. | 04-09-2015 |
| 20150098454 | TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RESPONSE SIGNAL MAPPIING METHOD - This invention relates to a terminal apparatus that can possibly reduce situations in which upstream channel data are punctured by a plurality of response signals. When having received at least one piece of downstream allocation control information corresponding to a second downstream unit band, which is other than a first downstream unit band, of a plurality of unit bands, a control unit ( | 04-09-2015 |
| 20150103809 | DYNAMIC TRANSMIT POWER AND SIGNAL SHAPING - This disclosure provides several mechanisms for adapting transmit power spectral density (PSD). A communications device may adapt the power spectrum utilized at the transmitter based, at least in part, on the channel conditions or PSD constraints associated with the communications medium between the transmitter and a receiver device. Additionally, the transmit PSD may be adapted based, at least in part, on a total power capability associated with a transmitter. Power is allocated to improve throughput and utilization of the communications channel. A transmission profile may be selected based, at least in part, on the notch depth. The transmission profile may be associated with symbol timing parameters. The communications device may maintain a plurality of selectable pulse shapes that are optimized for different notch depths. | 04-16-2015 |
| 20150103810 | Facilitating Synchronization Between a Base Station and a User Equipment - Methods and apparatus are provided for facilitating synchronization between a base station (BS) and a user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system. The UE receives a synchronization signal originated by the BS. The synchronization signal is encoded with a selected cyclically permutable (CP) codeword. Encoding of the synchronization signal is facilitated by a repetitive cyclically permutable (RCP) codeword derivable from the selected CP codeword. The RCP codeword has a plurality of codeword elements each associated with a value, the value of at least one codeword element in the RCP codeword being repeated in another codeword element position in the RCP codeword. And the synchronization signal is decoded in accordance with repetitive structure of the RCP codeword. | 04-16-2015 |
| 20150103811 | MAINTAINING TIME ALIGNMENT WITH MULTIPLE UPLINK CARRIERS - Maintaining time alignment with multiple carriers is contemplated. A group of uplink carriers (UL CC sets) that operate with a single Timing Advance (TA) may be determined, and a TA value may be applied to a specific UL CC set. A wireless transmit/receive unit's (WTRU) capability of using multiple TAs may define a group index of a few bits for each UL CC set. A TA Command received in a Random Access Response message may be used to apply the TA value to each UL carrier of the UL CC set. The WTRU may determine which UL CC set the TA value applies to based on which DL carrier the command was transmitted from. The WTRU may determine which UL CC set the TA value applies to based on the Group Index being explicitly provided in the command. The WTRU may release multi-CC configurations upon Time Alignment Timer (TAT) expiry. | 04-16-2015 |
| 20150110082 | METHOD OF HANDLING HARQ COLLISION AND PUSCH RETRANSMISSION COLLISION IN TDD - A method of handling PUSCH data retransmission collision, in a user terminal of TDD, wherein, the user terminal uses a first UL/DL configuration mode in a first radio frame, the method comprises the following steps: receiving a reconfiguration message from a base station, the reconfiguration message is used to indicate the user terminal to use a second UL/DL configuration mode in a second radio frame; judging whether PHICH for a first PUSCH data transmission is located in the first radio frame; if yes, judging whether the second radio frame includes a collision subframe, wherein, the downlink subframe occupied by the PHICH is also used to bear uplink retransmission resource allocation; when including, determining a retransmission uplink subframe used to retransmit PUSCH data by using a remapping scheme, when the second radio frame includes the collision subframe; and retransmitting the PUSCH data in the retransmission uplink subframe. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150110083 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a communication control apparatus including a radio communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with a terminal apparatus to which a first operator provides a radio communication service, the terminal apparatus being capable of radio communication by using one primary frequency band and at least one secondary frequency band, and a control unit configured to control access of the terminal apparatus in a manner that a frequency band among one or more frequency bands owned by a second operator is not used as the one primary frequency band of the terminal apparatus, the frequency band being temporarily used by the first operator. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150110084 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BROADCASTING MESSAGES TO NODES WITHIN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A node within a wireless mesh network is configured to forward a high-priority message to adjacent nodes in the wireless mesh network by either (i) transmitting the message during successive timeslots to the largest subset of nodes capable of receiving transmissions during each timeslot, or (ii) transmitting the message on each different channel during the timeslot when the largest subset of nodes are capable of receiving transmissions on each of those channels. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150110085 | EDGE CONTINUED EVOLUTION, IMPROVED CHANNEL REQUEST METHOD AND SYSTEM - The present invention is a method and system adapted to facilitate, between a mobile station (MS) and network, an indication of support for reduced time transmission interval (RTTI). The MS can provide a base station system (BSS) with an indication of its multislot capability within an access burst sent at the start of a contention based access. In another aspect, the MS can indicate support for a new Immediate Assignment message as the conventional Immediate Assignment message can only assign single timeslots. The present invention enables the Radio Access Network (RAN) to assign RTTI and more than one timeslot for GPRS/EDGE temporary block flows (TBFs) during an Access Grant Channel (AGCH) assignment. The method of the present invention can be implemented in a computer program product or distributed software adapted to be loaded into at least one or a plurality of memory locations and executed by at least one or a plurality of respective computer processors. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150110086 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE - Base Station (BS) and User Equipment (UE) apparatuses for configuring a Random Access CHannel (RACH), and methods thereof, are provided. The method for a BS to configure a RACH includes generating configuration information on RACH resources, transmitting the configuration information on the RACH resources to a UE, receiving a random access preamble multiplexed on a plurality of continuous RACH resources from the UE, extracting the random access preamble multiplexed on the plurality of continuous RACH resources, and detecting the extracted random access preamble. The method for a UE to configure a RACH includes receiving configuration information on RACH resources from a BS, selecting occupied RACH resources among a plurality of continuous RACH resources, generating a random access preamble, multiplexing the generated random access preamble on the selected RACH resources, and transmitting the random access preamble on the selected RACH resources to the BS. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150117416 | STEPWISE SLOT ALLOCATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A stepwise slot allocation method and apparatus applicable to a node in a wireless network and includes: by the node, determining an initial boundary value of a slot for slot allocation at a current slot allocation stage; calculating a slot length needed by the node at the current slot allocation stage; and selecting a slot index needed by the current slot allocation stage starting from the initial boundary value. By using the method, the slot allocation is combined with an amount of traffics in the network, and slot index of each node is more proper. And it is ensured that one packet corresponds to a slot, and a case will not occur where a slot is reserved but not used. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150117417 | ENABLING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT RECEPTION - This invention measures the propagation delay τ | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150124782 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING CLOUD BASED RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method, apparatus are described for a cloud based radio access network (RAN). The method may include transmitting a first message from a base station to a user equipment (UE), determining that a second message from the UE is not received by a media access control (MAC) scheduler within a pre-determined time, delaying re-transmission of the first message or transmission of a third message from the base station to the UE, and scheduling other hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) processes of the UE in intervening sub-frames. The method may include receiving a first message from a UE at a base station, determining that a second message from the base station cannot be constructed within a pre-determined time from delays in receiving assignments from a Cloud, constructing and transmitting the second message to UEs based on assignments received earlier from the Cloud, and suspending an HARQ process associated with other UEs. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124783 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL OF AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS - A method for performing uplink (UL) transmission control of an electronic device and an associated apparatus are provided, where the method includes the steps of: determining a set of UL transmission patterns for a dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) and a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH), wherein one of the set of UL transmission patterns indicates whether UL transmission of a plurality of slots of one of the DPDCH and the DPCCH in at least one transmission time interval (TTI) is required, respectively; and performing UL transmission of the DPDCH and the DPCCH according to the set of UL transmission patterns, wherein with aid of a UL transmission pattern for the DPDCH within the set of UL transmission patterns, UL transmission of at least one slot of the DPDCH is prevented in the at least one TTI. The method may include selecting one of multiple sets of UL transmission patterns. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124784 | CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - One embodiment of the present invention is a method for performing channel access using a first station (STA) in a wireless communication system, comprising: a step of receiving a traffic indication map (TIM) bitmap; and a step of attempting channel access for a wireless medium in a first time period indicated by the first TIM bitmap. The first STA attempts channel access for the wireless medium in a third time period which is one of the second time periods indicated by the TIM bitmap in the event that the first STA senses an operation of a second STA relating to the wireless medium in the first time period. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124785 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GROUP ACCESS TO THE WIRELESS MEDIUM OF A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for allowing group access to the wireless medium of a wireless network are disclosed. In one aspect, the method includes performing a backoff procedure for each of one or more certain classes. The method may further include receiving an indication that the backoff procedure for at least one of the one or more certain classes is complete. In some aspects, once the backoff procedure for a class is completed, performing one or more transmissions which are transmittable simultaneously with other transmissions in the class. Finally, the method may update the backoff procedures for the class based on the one or more transmissions. In some aspects, the backoff procedures may be updated based on certain fairness conditions. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124786 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MODULATION CODING SCHEME SELECTION FOR RESPONSE FRAMES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a methods and apparatus for selecting modulation coding schemes (MCS). In one aspect, a method for wireless communication includes processing a message identifying a duration constraint for a response message. The method further includes selecting one or more parameters for transmission of the response message based at least in part on the duration constraint. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124787 | Uplink Transmission Timing Advance in a Wireless Device and Base Station - A base station transmits to a wireless device at least one timing-advance command (TAC) for a secondary cell group. Each of the at least one TAC includes a timing-advance value (TAV) to be employed by the wireless device to update a first TAV. The base station transmits, to the wireless device and after the TAT expires, a second TAC with a TAV of zero for the secondary cell group. The base station receives uplink signals from the wireless device according to the updated first TAV. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124788 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEACTIVATING SECONDARY CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and an apparatus in a mobile communication system are provided. The method by a terminal in the mobile communication system includes receiving, by the terminal, first information for activating a secondary cell (SCell) from a base station, activating, by the terminal, the SCell based on the first information, starting, by the terminal, a timer associated with the SCell, restarting, by the terminal, if second information for the activated SCell is received from the base station, the timer associated with the SCell, and if the timer expires, applying by the terminal, one or more corresponding actions for deactivating the SCell no later than in a predefined subframe. The one or more corresponding actions include at least one of preventing, by the terminal, from monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) on the SCell and preventing, by the terminal, from monitoring a PDCCH for the SCell. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150124789 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEACTIVATING SECONDARY CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and an apparatus in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes receiving, by the terminal, first information for activating a secondary Cell (SCell) from a base station, activating, by the terminal, the SCell based on the first information, starting, by the terminal, a timer associated with the SCell, restarting, by the terminal, if second information for the activated SCell is received from the base station, the timer associated with the SCell, and, if the timer expires, applying by the terminal, one or more corresponding actions for deactivating the SCell no later than in a predefined subframe, wherein the second information includes at least one of an uplink grant on the activated SCell, a downlink assignment on the activated SCell, and a control message for activating the SCell. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150131621 | FAST OUTER-LOOP POWER CONTROL - A signal-to-interference target is adjusted multiple times within a transmission time interval. For example, the signal-to-interference target may be adjusted at the slot level. According to some aspects of the disclosure, the signal-to-interference target may be adjusted based on early detection of the transport format being transmitted by the network. For example, the signal-to-interference target may be quickly adjusted at each slot upon detection of the kind of transport format present during that slot. Advantageously, such an approach may reduce the transient time that it takes for the signal-to-interference target to be updated to a new transport format. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131622 | PROACTIVE RANK INDEX MANAGEMENT IN SLTE ENABLED MODEM TO ACHIEVE HIGHER THROUGHPUT - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE which uses a first antenna and a second antenna for communication with a first RAT. The apparatus determines that the second antenna is to be used for a procedure associated with a second RAT at a first time. The apparatus reduces a UE RI from an initial value to a reduced value for the communication with the first RAT at the first time based on the determination. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131623 | SCHEDULING FOR ACCESS DIVISION MULTIPLEXING - Scheduling map(s) are generated and updated for employment in an access division multiplexing (ADM) environment for allocating resource utilization (e.g., use of transmission time intervals) to or between differing radio access technology networks, and particularly to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network and a Global System for Mobile communication (GSM) network. In some example embodiments the scheduling map(s), apparatus, and methods hereof are implemented in a wireless terminal which participates in access division multiplexing between the differing radio access technologies, in other example embodiments the scheduling map (s), apparatus, and methods hereof are implemented in a network node (e.g., eNodeB) of one of the radio access technology networks, e.g., the Long Term Evolution (LTE) network. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131624 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROTECTING LOW-RATE COMMUNICATIONS IN HIGH-EFFICIENCY WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication in an IEEE 802.11 wireless communication system including legacy and high-efficiency wireless (HEW) devices are described herein. In some aspects, a method includes configuring transmission of a first communication for at least partially protecting reception of a second communication. The method further includes transmitting the first communication, the first communication being decodable by the legacy devices. The method further includes transmitting the second communication, the second communication being decodable by the HEW devices. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131625 | STATION AND METHOD OF SETTING CONNECTION THE ACCESS POINT AND THE STATION - A method for setting connection between an access point and a station is provided. A method includes transmitting, by a station management entity, to a MAC layer management entity included in the station, information about a reception condition for a communication setup message transmitted by the access point and information about a reporting timing of the communication setup message by the MAC layer management entity to the station management entity when the MAC layer management entity receives the communication setup message, and adjusting, by the MAC layer management entity, a transmission timing of the communication setup message to the station management entity according to information about a connection priority requirement included in the communication setup message received by the MAC layer management entity from the access point, and the information about the reporting timing. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131626 | HANDHELD DEVICE, BASE STATION AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A handheld device, a base station and transmission control methods thereof are provided. The handheld device transmits an uplink signal to the base station with an uplink dedicated physical control channel (UL DPCCH) carrying both transport format combination indicator (TFCI) code word and acknowledgement (ACK) information. The base station terminates a downlink signal transmission to the handheld device in response to the ACK information. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131627 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED COMMUNICATION EFFICIENCY IN HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus for wireless communication in an IEEE 802.11 wireless communication system including legacy and high-efficiency wireless (HEW) devices are provided. In one aspect, a method for wireless communication in an IEEE 802.11 wireless communication system including legacy and high-efficiency wireless (HEW) devices includes determining a first time interval for communication according to a HEW protocol. The method further includes transmitting, according to a legacy protocol, a first communication at least partially protecting reception of communications during the first time interval. Another method includes receiving a first communication announcing a second communication. The method further includes determining a first time interval for communication according to a HEW protocol. The method further includes transmitting, according to a legacy protocol, the second communication for at least partially protecting reception of communications during the first time interval. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131628 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZING TIMING AMONG DEVICES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A wireless communication device including a first media access control device and a first transceiver. The first media access control device is configured to selectively generate a first timestamp having a first length and a second timestamp having a second length. The first timestamp indicates a first synchronization time of the wireless communication device, the second timestamp indicates only a first portion of the first synchronization time, and the first synchronization time is used by a client station to synchronize timing between the wireless communication device and the client station. The first media access control device is further configured to generate a beacon including either the first timestamp or the second timestamp, and an indication of whether the beacon includes the first timestamp or the second timestamp. The first transceiver is configured to transmit the beacon from the wireless communication device to the client station. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131629 | Methods and System for Scheduling a Virtual MIMO Communication Environment - A system and method for scheduling cooperative uplink transmissions in a virtual multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication environment are provided. More specifically, both random and channel aware orthogonal scheduling techniques for identifying a sub-set of N mobile terminals to provide cooperative uplink transmissions for each transmit time interval are provided. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131630 | Synchronization in Base Stations and Wireless Networks - A base station transmits subframes of downlink carriers in a primary cell group and downlink carriers in a secondary cell group in substantial time alignment with each other. A wireless device transmits subframes of uplink carriers in the primary cell group in substantially time alignment with each other. The wireless device transmits subframes of uplink carriers in the secondary cell group in substantially time alignment with each other. The subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group employ different synchronization signals as a timing reference and different timing advance commands. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131631 | UPLINK INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT METHOD, NODE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present application provide an uplink interference management method, node, and system, which relate to the field of wireless communications and can reduce interference caused by a macro cell UE to an adjacent micro cell, thereby improving an uplink capacity of the micro cell. The method of the present application includes: receiving, by a micro cell node, an interference cancellation request sent by a macro cell node, where the interference cancellation request includes uplink configuration information of a user equipment (UE), uplink scrambling code information of the UE, and location information for determining an uplink dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) of the UE; and cancelling interference according to the interference cancellation request. The embodiments of the present application are mainly used in a process of cancelling the interference caused by the macro cell UE to the micro cell. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131632 | DISTRIBUTION OF TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXED (TDM) MANAGEMENT SERVICES IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM, AND RELATED COMPONENTS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Distribution of management services in distributed antenna systems having a central unit and remote units configured to time-division multiplex (TDM) downlink and/or uplink management signals into time slots to form a TDM management frame signal. In this manner, collision will not occur between multiple management signals communicated over a common communications medium at the same time in the distributed antenna system. Collision detection and management mechanism can add design complexity, cost by requiring additional components, and require additional area on electronic boards. The TDM management frame signal may also be modulated at a carrier frequency before being combined with RF communications signals so that the combined signals are within a linear range of shared certain communications components to reduce cost and area. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131633 | METHOD OF PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing contention resolution associated with a random access procedure. The method according to one embodiment includes transmitting, by the mobile communication terminal, an uplink message containing a cell-radio network temporary identity (C-RNTI) and starting a contention resolution timer; receiving, by the mobile communication terminal, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) transmission; and considering, by the mobile communication terminal, a contention resolution successful and stopping the contention resolution timer if a specific condition is satisfied. The mobile communication terminal considers the contention resolution successful and stops the contention resolution timer if the PDCCH transmission is addressed to the C-RNTI and the random access procedure is initiated by a downlink (DL) data arrival. The mobile communication terminal considers the contention resolution successful and stops the contention resolution timer if the PDCCH transmission is addressed to the C-RNTI and contains an uplink (UL) grant. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131634 | ANTENNA TIME OFFSET IN MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT AND COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSIONS - A method for wireless communication is provided which includes receiving first and second signals transmitted from first and second antennas, respectively, determining a time offset between the first and second antennas based on the first and second signals, and reporting information regarding the time offset, including information regarding the time offset as being above or below a predetermined threshold. Another method for wireless communication is provided which includes generating channel state information feedback based on an assumption that the time offset is being compensated at a transmitter side. Yet another method for wireless communication is provided which includes receiving information regarding a time offset between multiple transmit antennas, including information regarding the time offset as being above or below a predetermined threshold, and adapting downlink transmissions to account for the time offset. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131635 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF CONFIGURING DOWNLINK TIMING AND TRANSMITTING RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method of configuring downlink timings and transmitting a random access response message is provided for a random access procedure in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system supporting carrier aggregation. The method for adjusting timing of a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting carrier aggregation of at least one carrier includes transmitting a Random Access Preamble to a base station, and receiving a Random Access Response with a Timing Advance Command (TAC) for commanding uplink timing adjustment from the base station, wherein the Random Access Response comprises information indicating a Timing Advance Group (TAG) to which the TAC is applied. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150131636 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station device includes a processor configured to: generate a group of mobile station devices based on timings of transmitting signals from a first mobile station device and a second mobile station device; and calculate a timing correction amount of uplink transmission timing based on a reception timing of a signal transmitted from the first mobile station device belonging to the group; and a radio communication circuit configured to transmit the timing correction amount to the first and the second mobile station devices belonging to the group. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150139197 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Mobile communication devices, such as user equipment (UE) using 3GPP-LTE or LTE Advanced, may communicate directly with another UE through a system called Device-to-Device (D2D) communication. The establishment of a D2D communication session may involve having one of the UEs trigger the signaling procedures. In particular, a D2D resource re-allocation method may be used to optimize the D2D communication resource utilization efficiency in a dynamic manner, which is fully controlled by one of the D2D pair (termed the master UE or M-UE). The M-UE may be arranged to re-allocate resources based on the buffer status report (BSR) of the UEs in the D2D communication session. The M-UE may be further arranged to dynamically change the configuration of the transmission window based on characteristics of the D2D communication session. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150139198 | SENSOR NODE AND GATEWAY MUTUALLY COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A gateway and method thereof are provided to communicate with sensor nodes. The gateway includes a generator configured to generate, based on schedule information on a previous uplink interval, response data. The gateway also includes an allocator configured to allocate a subsequent uplink interval to the sensor nodes to generate schedule information on the subsequent uplink interval. The gateway includes a transmitter configured to transmit the response data and the schedule information on the subsequent uplink interval to the sensor nodes. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150139199 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR HIERARCHICAL TIME SYNCHRONISATION IN AN AD-HOC NETWORK - In a method and in a system for time synchronization within a mobile ad-hoc network, every node ( | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150139200 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ALLOCATION OF WIRELESS RESOURCE - A base station provides a first wireless area to communicate with a wireless terminal using a wireless resource. The base station includes a controller that, when controlling allocation of a first wireless resource to be used for data communication between the base station and the wireless terminal in the first wireless area, refers to allocation information representing allocation of a second wireless resource to be used for communication of a preamble of random access in a second wireless area. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150139201 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - Disclosed are a method for transmitting and receiving a frame in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system and an apparatus for the same. A method for generating interference/non-interference station lists includes receiving a first frame from a second station, acquiring a receiver address of the first frame from the first frame, and setting, based on whether to receive a second frame that is a response to the first frame from a third station indicated by the receiver address within a preset time from a time when the first frame has been received, the third station as an interference station or a non-interference station. Therefore, the performance of a communication system may be improved. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150139202 | Wireless Device Connection to an Application Server - A base station transmits a first message to a wireless device over a primary cell group. The first message comprises a content descriptor and originates from an application server. The base station transmits to the wireless device over the primary cell group: first content packets; a control message configuring a secondary cell group; and an activation command activating one or more secondary cells in the secondary cell group. The base station transmits second content packets over the primary cell group and the secondary cell group. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150146697 | CLIENT-SIDE SCHEDULING FOR MEDIA TRANSMISSIONS ACCORDING TO CLIENT DEVICE STATES - A mobile device that incorporates the subject disclosure may perform, for example, obtaining performance characteristics for network segments of a network where the network segments are selected from a group of network segments of the network based on a trajectory of the mobile device. The mobile device can monitor power state transitions of the mobile device, and can predict a future power state of the mobile device based on the monitoring of the power state transitions. The mobile device can determine a target time for sending a request for transmission of a data packet over the network where the target time is determined based on the performance characteristics for the network segments and based on the future power state of the mobile device. The mobile device can schedule a time for sending the request for transmission according to the target time. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150146698 | MOBILE STATION - An objective is to appropriately select a “timing reference cell” and a “Pathloss reference cell” for an Scell in an sTAG. A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes a second management unit | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150146699 | EXTENDED BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT PROTOCOL - A method for selecting a size of a block acknowledgment bitmap for a block acknowledgment (BA) frame to be sent from a first wireless device to a second wireless device includes determining a transmission rate of a number of data frames received from the second wireless device, selecting the size of the block acknowledgment bitmap based at least in part on the determined transmission rate, and transmitting the BA frame, embedded with the block acknowledgment bitmap of the selected size, to the second wireless device. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150146700 | CHANNEL ACCESS DEFERRAL MECHANISM - A method for confirming receipt of an aggregated data frame containing one or more decoding errors is disclosed. A wireless device receives the aggregated data frame from another device over a wireless channel, determines a transmit duration of the aggregated data frame, and defers access to the channel for a time period selected as either an EIFS duration or a DIFS duration based, at least in part, on the transmit duration, and then transmits a block acknowledgement frame to the other device after the time period. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150146701 | RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, AND SYNCHRONIZATION TIMER CONTROL METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio station, a radio terminal, and a method for synchronization timer control are provided that can reduce a delay as much as possible until uplink signal resynchronization is done in a case where a plurality of cell groups exist. In a radio communication system having a function of using a plurality of radio resources corresponding to a plurality of cells, respectively, for communication between a radio station ( | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150295692 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SENDING FAST NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS (NACKS) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for sending fast negative acknowledgements (NACKs) after a user equipment (UE) tunes back to a first network after tuning away from the first network. The UE may determine that a trigger event has occurred, and in response to the determination, modify a NACK timing configuration from a default configuration. Modifying the NACK timing configuration may include using an aggressive NACK timing configuration for a configurable period of time, in response to detecting a trigger event. The trigger event may include detecting missed packets after a tune back, unavailability of sufficient memory to hold packets until a gap created by missed packets may be filled, or tuning back to a network. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296365 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALIGNING DISCOVERY CHANNEL INTERVALS AMONG CELLS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for aligning discovery channel intervals of a serving cell and a neighbor cell in a cellular communication system is provided. The method includes selecting at least one user equipment (UE), by a serving evolved node b (eNB) managing the serving cell, wherein the UE is located in the serving cell and operates in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode, transmitting, to the at least one UE, a request message requesting information related to a discovery channel of the neighbor cell, receiving, from the at least one UE, at least one of an identifier (ID) of the neighbor cell, a temporally adjusted value obtained by shifting the discovery channel with respect to a frame reference time of the neighbor cell, and a network time difference (NTD) between the serving cell and the neighbor cell, and aligning the discovery channel interval of the serving cell to the discovery channel interval of the neighbor cell based on the at least one of the ID of the neighbor cell, the temporally adjusted value, and the NTD. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296411 | Cellular-Network Based Control of Vehicle-to-Vehicle Communication - A vehicle-to-vehicle communication device ( | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296412 | REDUCING INTERFERENCE IN COLLOCATED RADIOS - Technology for reducing interference in collocated radios is disclosed. One method comprises logging transmit/receive information from a Bluetooth radio and an OFDMA radio for a repeating Tx/Rx pattern. Data collisions between the radios are identified. A persistent reservation is requested in the OFDMA radio for collisions in the repeating Tx/Rx pattern. A repeating Bluetooth Tx/Rx pattern is derived from the logged data and the collision data. Bluetooth radio communication is accomplished using the Bluetooth Tx/Rx pattern. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296468 | CAPTURE OF PSS AND SSS WITH WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVE CHAIN - An apparatus for capturing a signal of interest, e.g., PSS and/or SSS, captures data transmitted by a WWAN for each of a plurality of communication frames. The data is captured for a capture length corresponding to a duration less than a periodicity of transmission of the signal of interest. Data is captured with a WLAN receive chain, and each capture occurs at a different point within its respective communication frame relative to other communication frames. The apparatus processes the plurality of data captures to form an equivalent continuous data corresponding to a duration greater than the periodicity of transmission. Because the continuous data has a duration greater than the periodicity of transmission of the signal of interest, the signal of interest is contained in the captured data, and PSS and/or SSS can be detected. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296481 | Method And Corresponding Apparatus For Sending And Receiving Trunking Paging In LTE System - The method for sending the trunking paging includes: after receiving a group paging request, a base station sending a paging message to trunking terminals in a present cell in a predetermined paging time slot, wherein the paging message includes a group identification of a group needing to be paged. A base station for sending the trunking paging includes a receiving module and a sending module. A method for receiving the trunking paging includes: after monitoring a paging message, when determining that a group identity included in the paging message is the same as a group identity of the group to which the present terminal belongs, a trunking terminal accessing the group service, and sending a paging response to base station, or not sending a paging response to base station. A trunking terminal for receiving the trunking paging includes a monitoring module, a judging module and a group service processing module. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296493 | RESOURCE BLOCK CANDIDATE SELECTION TECHNIQUE EMPLOYING PACKET SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method of transmitting data packets over a plurality of dynamically allocated resource blocks in at least one or a combination of a time, code or frequency domain on a shared channel of a wireless communication system, comprising the steps of selecting a number of resource block candidates for potential transmission of data packets destined for a receiver and transmitting the data packet to the receiver using at least one allocated resource block from the selected resource block candidates. The invention also relates to a corresponding method of decoding data packets, a transmitter, receiver and communication system. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296498 | FLEXIBLE CONTROL CHANNELS FOR UNPLANNED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless node configured to communicate with a remote node using a timeslot structure. The timeslot structure includes a plurality of data channels and a plurality of control channels, wherein each of the control channels comprises a plurality of control units. The wireless node is further configured to assign any one of a plurality of control messages for the data channels to any one of the control units. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296507 | MULTIPATH COMMUNICATION - There is provided a method, comprising: transmitting, by a user equipment ( | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296510 | RF COLLABORATION METHOD TO REDUCE RF INTERFERENCE WITH WIRELESS ADAPTER - A system and method for preventing a wireless controller system and WiFi radio system within a game console from interfering with each other. Specifically, the WiFi system is adapted to avoid activating its transmitter during the controller receive times by detecting a signal sent to the WiFi module indicating where the controller receive times occur without an explicit signal indicative of the controller receive times. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296518 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a wireless communication system. The method includes: a terminal transmitting a coverage enhancement request or capability information for the terminal; a base station determining a channel setting for the terminal based on the transmitted request or information; and transmitting downlink data and performing random access on the basis of the determined channel setting. Namely, a scheme for adaptively transmitting and receiving data in consideration of the coverage of the terminal is proposed. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296531 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PPC RULE IN PRELOAD MODE - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for controlling a PPC rule in a Preload mode. The method comprises: in a Preload mode, a Policy and Charging Rule Function (PCRF) entity recording system time each time a PCC rule is delivered, and obtaining a Preload mode update time interval; at an interval of one clock period, the PCRF entity checking whether a service currently in a stable session state has a preset execution data, and if the service does not have a preset execution date, detecting an interval between the current time and a time when the previous PPC rule corresponding the service is delivered; when the interval between the current time and the time when the previous PPC rule corresponding to the service is delivered is one | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296560 | DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION (DRX)-AWARE CARRIER SENSE ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION (CSAT) IN SHARED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for Discontinuous Reception (DRX)-aware Carrier Sense Adaptive Transmission (CSAT) communication in shared spectrum are disclosed. An access point, for example, may receive signals via a medium in accordance with a first RAT, and identify utilization of the medium associated with the first RAT based on the received signals. Based on the identified utilization of the medium, operation of a second RAT may be cycled between activated and deactivated periods of transmission over the medium in accordance with a Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) communication pattern. A Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) may be transmitted to an access terminal associated with the second RAT to activate or deactivate the access terminal in accordance with the TDM communication pattern. The timing of the MAC CE transmission may be based on the TDM communication pattern and a DRX pattern associated with the access terminal. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150304073 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN COOPERATIVE RELAYS USING INCREMENTAL REDUNDANCY AND DISTRIBUTED SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING - A method and apparatus may be used to receive a first transmission. The first transmission of data bits may have a first redundancy version in a transmission time interval (TTI) from either a first node or a second node. The first transmission may have a first redundancy version in a TTI from both the first node and the second node. The method and apparatus may receive a second transmission of the data bits having a second redundancy version in a second TTI. The second transmission may be received from a different one of the first node, the second node, or both the first node and the second node. The first and second redundancy versions may be different redundancy versions. The method and apparatus may combine the received bits of the first and second transmissions to recover the first data bits. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150304810 | FRAME TIME SYNCHRONIZATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A position location system based on a wireless local area network such as an IEEE 802.11 network is described. The system determines position of mobile tags attached to assets or people. IEEE 802.11 enabled zone tags are installed to assist in positioning. The system aligns frame timing of zone tags to that of an associated basic service set (BSS). The system computes the frame timing offsets between adjacent BSSs, and utilizes the frame timing offsets in scheduling range measurements between zone tags and mobile tags. A set of zone tags which are in close proximity of a first zone tag and able to receive signals from the first zone tag is identified. Frame timing of all zone tags in a network are aligned. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305005 | DERIVING AN INDICATION OF A COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETER USING REFERENCE SYMBOLS - A perturbation is made to contents and/or locations in time and frequency of Reference Signals transmitted by a cell, such that the perturbation implies information regarding a capability or configuration of the cell as regards availability or configuration of a network functionality, in particular a facility to offer a narrowband virtual carrier operation. The contents and/or locations in time and frequency of the reference signals used are typically based on physical cell identity. In certain embodiments the PCI carried by some identifiable RS resources is changed, in others, the RS is transmitted in unexpected resources. The network functionality configuration information is inferred from various relationships between these transmissions and the cell's actual PCI and/or expected RS transmission resources. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305019 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A RESPONSE REQUEST FRAME AND A RESPONSE FRAME IN A MULTI-USER BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for efficient transmission of a request frame such as an RTS/CTS frame and a response frame in response to the request frame in a multi-user based wireless communication system. The method of the present invention comprises: a process where wireless terminals transmit a response frame at their own response frame transmission time through a request frame that contains information about a plurality of wireless terminals and information about the response frame transmission time of the respective wireless terminals; a process where the respective wireless terminals transmit a response frame according to a token scheme such that the response frame is transmitted to a final access point; and a process where only a representative wireless terminal selected depending on a given wireless environment receives the response frame. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305022 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION SYNCHRONIZATION - Various methods are described for determining a communications window for served nodes and internal applications in order to optimize power consumption. One example method may comprise determining a communications window for a plurality of served nodes. The method of this embodiment may also include causing the communications window to be signaled to the plurality served nodes. The method of this embodiment may also include causing a communications interface to be activated during the communications window in an instance in which at least one packet is received for at least one served node of the plurality of served nodes. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305023 | EXTENDED DSME MAC FOR LOW POWER UTILITY MONITORING SERVICE - A method of configuring a multi-superframe is provided. The method includes setting at least one parameter for configuring the multi-superframe, and configuring the multi-superframe corresponding to the at least one parameter, wherein the at least one parameter includes a superframe order (SO), a beacon order (BO), and a multi-superframe order (MO), in a form of positive integers, and the setting includes setting the MO to have a value higher than the BO. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305027 | Method And Apparatus For Configuring SRS Resource For Cooperating Cells - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for configuring Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) resource of cooperating cells. The method includes: grouping all cells into different cell groups; determining a SRS initial time domain resource configuration order of each cell group; determining a SRS resource grouping policy of the cells according to state information of user equipments; and configuring SRS resources for the user equipments accessing each cell according to the SRS initial time domain resource configuration order and the SRS resource grouping policy. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305030 | INTERLACED CARRIER SENSE ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION (CSAT) CO-EXISTENCE IN SHARED SPECTRUM - Techniques for managing operation over a communication medium shared between Radio Access Technologies (RATs) are disclosed. In one example, one or more parameters of a Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) communication pattern may be set to define activated periods and deactivated periods for communication over the medium. A first interlace may be selected among a plurality of interlaces for communication over the medium, the first interlace being reserved for a first operator. During the first interlace, transmission over the medium may be cycled in accordance with the TDM communication pattern, and deactivated during a second interlace among the plurality of interlaces that is reserved for a second operator. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305031 | TIME DOMAIN COEXISTENCE OF RF SIGNALS - Various methods and systems are provided for time domain coexistence of RF signals. In one example, among others, a method includes obtaining access to a WLAN channel during a free period of a coexisting cellular connection, providing a RDG to allow another device to transmit for a duration corresponding to at least a portion of a TXOP, and receiving a transmission during the duration. In another example, a method includes obtaining access to a WLAN channel during a transmission period of a coexisting cellular connection and providing a protection frame to defer transmissions from another device for a duration corresponding to at least a portion of a TXOP. In another example, a method includes determining a shift of a BT transaction based at least in part upon a schedule of cellular communications and shifting at least a portion of the BT transaction based upon the determined shift. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305033 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method and a base station for data transmission are disclosed. The data transmission method includes: when a semi-persistent resource is in an activated state and time alignment (TA) data needs to be sent, sending the TA data to a user equipment (UE) by using the semi-persistent resource. In embodiments of the present application, the base station sends the TA data by using the semi-persistent resource, thereby reasonably using the resource and reducing scheduling and allocation of PDCCH and PDSCH resources by the base station. This not only saves resources, but also reduces time that the base station takes to process TA data, and increases system resource utilization and cell throughput. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150305069 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UPLINK SET-UP IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of performing a procedure for link-setup and an apparatus therefore, wherein the method comprises: receiving a probe request frame including time information via a channel, wherein the time information indicates at least one of a minimum scan time for the channel and a maximum scan time for the channel; and performing a procedure for transmitting a probe response frame after receipt of the probe request frame, wherein if a beacon transmission time occurs within a time given based on the time information, transmission of the probe response frame is omitted. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150312012 | ENFORCING STATION FAIRNESS WITH MU-MIMO DEPLOYMENTS - A non-transitory computer readable medium including instructions which, when executed by one or more hardware processors, causes performance of operations. The operations include: obtaining a first pathloss value for a first data transmitted between a first device and a second device; receiving, at a first component of the first device, a second data to be transmitted to the second device; based at least on the first pathloss value: selecting a first subset of the second data for transmission from the first component to a second component of the first device, where the second component is configured for causing transmission of the first subset of the second data to the second device; transmitting, during a first period of time from the first component to the second component, the first subset of the second data. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312908 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND DEVICES FOR DECOUPLED INTERFERENCE RANDOMIZATION FOR UPLINK REFERENCE SIGNALS - Interference between reference signals from user equipments in a wireless network, the method may be reduced by using a received time shift value from a node in the wireless network. An interference randomization technique may be applied to a reference signal and a sequence may be generated based on the reference signal to which the interference randomization technique has been applied. A processed reference signal may be derived by applying a time shift based on the time shift value to the sequence. The processed reference signal may be transmitted to the node. Related systems, methods, nodes and wireless devices are also described. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312924 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING GROUP RESOURCES DURING TRUNKING COMMUNICATION - The present disclosure provides a method and system for scheduling group resources during trunking communication. The method includes: classifying base stations connected to a trunking switch center into at least one co frequency base station set and marking a base station that cannot be classified into the at least one co frequency base station set as a different frequency base station according to central frequencies and home regions of the base stations; step when a group call is established, allocating the same trunking shared channel and designating the same packet delivery time to base stations in one co frequency base station set, and notifying each base station in the co frequency base station set of the trunking shared channel and the packet delivery time; and step the base stations in the co frequency base station set starting to send trunking packets on the trunking shared channel at the packet delivery time. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312927 | METHOD FOR SIGNALING CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for signaling control information for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission in a wireless communication system. The control information signaling method for CoMP transmission is performed by a base station and comprises providing, through RRC signaling, a terminal with setup information on each CSI-RS resource of a CoMP measurement group which is set in the terminal; and selectively providing, through DCI, the terminal with control information which indicates mapping of the PDSCH resource element corresponding to terminal and at least either pseudo-same positionality information of CSI-RS or pseudo-same positionality information of DM-RS. Thus, control information signaling for coordinated multipoint transmission can be efficiently performed. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312930 | SIMULTANEOUS SCHEDULING REQUEST TRANSMISSION IN DUAL CONNECTIVITY - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, an apparatus may be configured to receive a first scheduling request transmission for a first cell group, and a second scheduling request transmission for a second cell group, determine one of the first scheduling request and the second scheduling request to have a higher priority and another one of the first scheduling request and the second scheduling request to have a lower priority, and process the scheduling request having a higher priority without processing the scheduling request having a lower priority. An apparatus may be configured to combine a configuration of a first scheduling request for a first cell group and a second configuration of a second scheduling request for a secondary cell group in a system radio bearer, and transmit the SRB to a user equipment to process the first scheduling request and the second scheduling request. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150318942 | MAXIMUM AWAY DURATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for signaling a maximum unavailable (away) time for a device. Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide an apparatus for wireless communications. The apparatus typically includes a processing system configured to generate a frame with an indication of a requested unavailable duration, wherein the requested unavailable duration comprises an amount of time for a device to be unavailable to communicate with the apparatus and an interface for outputting the frame | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150318969 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REFERENCE SYMBOL RECEPTION - To facilitate a selective transmission power boost in a narrowband subsystem of a wideband host carrier, where the narrowband subsystem is preferentially allocated to reduced capability communications devices, both data symbols and dedicated reference symbols are transmitted at a higher power within the narrowband. It is further determined whether to use the dedicated symbols exclusively or in addition to common reference symbols to generate channel estimates. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319643 | UE TRANSMITTER SHARING - Aspects of the present disclosure relate techniques for transmitter sharing by a user equipment (UE) for simultaneous communications between multiple radio access technology (RAT) networks. Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide a method for wireless communications by a UE. The method generally includes sharing a single transmit chain via time divisional multiplexing (TDM) for concurrent communication by at least first and second RAT, optionally negotiating an autonomous denial rate for the UE to deny uplink transmissions in the second RAT, detecting or predicting conflicts between scheduled uplink transmissions in the first RAT and a scheduled transmission in the second RAT, and denying uplink transmissions in the second RAT, subject to the negotiated autonomous denial rate if available, in response to detected or predicted. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319751 | RESOURCE ASSIGNMENTS FOR UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - A wireless communication method includes allocating physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) data in first slot to a first orthogonal cover code (OCC). The method also includes allocating PUCCH data in a second slot of the same subframe to a different orthogonal cover code (OCC). Another method includes mapping PUCCH resources to physical resource blocks based on a user equipment (UE) specific signaling parameter (e.g., a resource index) and a number of symbols in a slot of a subframe. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319759 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF USING TIME REUSE FRAME STRUCTURES FOR MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method of using time reuse frame structures for improving multi-hop communications are disclosed. Namely, the system is networked and includes a superframe structure for multi-hop communication including tiers. The system also includes a computer-implemented device located in an initiator subframe of a first tier frame of the superframe. The device including a non-transitory memory including executable instructions for multi-hop communication and a processor operably coupled thereto for executing the multi-hop communication. The system also includes a second tier frame of the superframe including at least two hopper subframes. Each of the at least two hopper subframes including a contention access period and a contention free period. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319782 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING PROTECTED ACCESS BASED ON A NULL DATA PACKET IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An access point including a generation module, a transceiver, and an acknowledgment module. The generation module is configured to generate a synchronization signal. The transceiver is configured to (i) transmit the synchronization signal to a station, (ii) receive a medium access control protocol data unit based on the synchronization signal during a transmit opportunity period for the station. The acknowledgment module is configured to generate an acknowledgment signal based on the reception of the medium access control protocol data unit. The synchronization signal or the acknowledgment signal includes a null data packet frame. The null data packet frame includes a legacy signal field. The legacy signal field comprises a length of a portion of the null data packet frame subsequent to the legacy signal field. The transceiver is configured to transmit the acknowledgment signal to the station. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150319785 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, CONTROL PROGRAM, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A mobile station (MS) obtains a parameter, performs transmission of a preamble, and sets a counter incremented based on transmission of the preamble. The MS is able to indicate a random access problem corresponding to one transmission timing cell group in a case where the counter reaches the parameter +1 and the transmission of the preamble is performed on the one transmission timing cell group, where the one transmission timing cell group being one of the plurality of transmission timing cell groups, and the MS is able to not indicate a random access problem corresponding to another transmission timing cell group in a case where the counter reaches the parameter +1 and the transmission of the preamble is performed on the another transmission timing cell group, where the another transmission timing cell group being one of the plurality of transmission timing cell groups. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150326362 | DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNAL (DMRS) SEQUENCE DESIGN FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) DISCOVERY - Technology for performing device-to-device (D2D) discovery is disclosed. A user equipment (UE) can identify a D2D discovery resource that is M subframes in a time domain, wherein M is a positive integer greater than one. The UE can generate K demodulation reference signal (DMRS) sequences to be transmitted from the UE for each subframe in the D2D discovery resource, wherein K is a positive integer greater than two. The UE can apply a predetermined orthogonal cover code (OCC) to each DMRS sequence. The predetermined OCC can be selected based on a value of M and a value of K. The UE can transmit the K DMRS sequences for each of the M subframes of the D2D discovery resource. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150326368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING UPLINK SIGNALING INFORMATION IN A SINGLE CARRIER FDMA SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus method are provided for transmitting uplink information including acknowledgement information in a wireless communication system. The method includes coding uplink data and the acknowledgement information by using different coding schemes respectively; multiplexing the coded uplink data and the coded acknowledgement information into the uplink information; and transmitting the uplink information using resources, wherein some of the uplink data is transmitted based on a first resource and the acknowledgment information is transmitted based on a second resource, and wherein the first and second resources are adjacent to each other with respect to a time domain. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150326374 | Methods and Apparatuses in a Mobile Communication Network - Techniques for supporting concurrent deployment of 2-millisecond and 10-millisecond TTI for E-DCH transmissions in CELL_FACH state and Idle Mode are disclosed. One example method comprises receiving a transport block from a mobile terminal, wherein said transport block is transmitted using either a 10-millisecond or 2-millisecond TTI, and sending, to an RNC, an indication of whether data carried by the transport block was transmitted using the 10-millisecond TTI or the 2-millisecond TTI. In some embodiments, the indication is sent in a user plane frame sent over a base-station-to-RNC interface. A spare bit in an uplink data frame sent to the RNC may be used, for example. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327185 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REFERENCE SYMBOL TRANSMISSION - To facilitate a selective transmission power boost in a narrowband subsystem of a wideband host carrier, wherein the narrowband subsystem is preferentially allocated to reduced capability communications devices, both data symbols and dedicated reference symbols are transmitted at a higher power within the narrowband. Where the benefits of inserting dedicated reference symbols are outweighed by the loss of data capacity, no dedicated reference symbols are inserted. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327198 | Handling of Cells Associated with Timing Advance Groups in a Wireless Communications System - Techniques and apparatus for handling timing alignment for a wireless device capable of aggregating carriers for uplink transmissions. In an example method, embodiments of which can be carried out in the wireless device or in a network node, a time difference between uplink transmission timings for a pair of timing advance groups (TAGs) for the wireless device is monitored, where each TAG comprises at least one serving cell. The method further includes determining whether the wireless device is able to support the time difference and, in response to determining that the wireless device is not able to support the time difference, excluding serving cells associated with one of the TAGS in the pair from uplink carrier aggregation. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327199 | Method of Managing Timing Alignment Functionality for Multiple Component Carriers and Related Communication Device - A method of managing TA functionality for a communication device of a wireless communication system which supports carrier aggregation that multiple component carriers are aggregated to support wider transmission bandwidth is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a RRC message indicating a usage of a timing advance command for each of a plurality of component carriers configured to the communication device, from a cell in a network of the wireless communication system, when the timing advance command has been received from the cell for each of the plurality of component carriers, applying the timing advance functionality corresponding to each of the plurality of component carriers, for updating a timing advance value for each of the plurality of component carriers, and when updating the timing advance value for each of the plurality of component carriers, starting or restarting a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of component carriers. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327201 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE SELECTION FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A user equipment (UE) is configured to scan for device-to-device synchronization sources based on scanning configuration information. The UE is configured to report detection of a device-to-device synchronization source to an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) Node B (eNB) in response to determining that the device-to-device synchronization source meets one or more reporting requirements of the scanning configuration information. The UE is configured to receive a communication from the eNB enabling the UE as a synchronization source and transmit signals to provide a synchronization reference to one or more in-range UEs including the device-to-device synchronization source. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327203 | MERGING OF INDEPENDENT BASIC SERVICE SET (IBSS) POWER SAVE (PS) ENABLED NETWORKS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for merging two or more power save enabled independent basic service set (IBSS) networks. In one example, a method includes receiving, at a station of a first IBSS network, a first beacon from a second IBSS network, wherein the first beacon identifies a timing synchronization function (TSF) of the second IBSS network. The method may further include transmitting, by the station, a second beacon at a next target beacon transmission time (TBTT) of the first IBSS network based on a comparison of the TSF of the second IBSS network with a TSF stored by the station, wherein the second beacon identifies a TSF of the second IBSS network. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327242 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND SCHEDULING APPARATUS FOR USER EQUIPMENT IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus for scheduling user equipments in a communication system. The method comprises: obtaining geographic position information of UEs in connected state, and determining, in each TTI, the UEs which need to feed back the geographic position information, by a serving base station; obtaining, in the (k+1)-th TTI, the channel information of a first part of UEs among the UEs in the connected state, wherein it is determined in the k-th TTI, based on the channel information of a second part of UEs obtained in the k-th TTI and the geographic position information of the second part of UEs, that the channel information of the first part of UEs is to be obtained in the (k+1)-th TTI; and selecting a UE to be scheduled from the first part of UEs based on the channel information of the first part of UEs. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327251 | Conditional Uplink Timing Alignment in a Mobile Station Device of a Radio Communication System - A mobile station device transmits a random access preamble to a base station device. The base station device receives the random access preamble from the mobile station device and transmits, to the mobile station device, a Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identity (RA-RNTI) which notifies a resource assignment of a random access response. The mobile station device further monitors downlink control channels while detecting both a Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identity (C-RNTI) and the RA-RNTI, in which a downlink control channel includes the RA-RNTI and a downlink control channel includes the C-RNTI which notifies a resource assignment of downlink data. Upon detection of the C-RNTI and the RA-RNTI in a same sub-frame, the mobile station receives both the random access response and the downlink data, or receives either the random access response or the downlink data. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327261 | TIMESLOT DISTRIBUTION IN A DISTRIBUTED ROUTING PROTOCOL FOR DETERMINISTIC WIRELESS NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a particular node operates a distributed routing protocol in a shared-media communication network, and distributes timeslot allocations using the routing protocol, where the particular node as a parent node allocates a pool of timeslots available to child nodes of the parent node. The parent node specifically allocates particular timeslots from the pool to particular child nodes according to particular flows from a source to a target in the shared-media communication network in order to meet a defined time budget for a resultant time-synchronized path from the source to the target. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327266 | Video sub-reservation protocol in a wireless ecosystem - Video sub-reservation protocol in a wireless ecosystem. Appropriate access is provided to a number of wireless communication devices to ensure very high performance and a high perceptual user experience with respect to media related content communications. Access to the communication medium (e.g., air within a wireless location system) is provided to various wireless communication devices in a manner as to minimize collisions and contention. In one instance, different respective access assignment periods are sub-divided to give respective communication medium access to various devices within the system. Such sub-reservation may be adaptive in response to any of a number of considerations (e.g., traffic, device processing history, etc.). Also, such sub-reservation may provide respective time specificity at or during which certain devices may conduct communications, but may also specify any other operational parameters (e.g., which frequency spectra to use, duration of such communications, modulation coding set (MCS) to use, etc.). | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327268 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method and arrangement in a user equipment for transmitting scheduling requests to a base station. The base station is adapted to serve the user equipment. The user equipment is configured to transmit scheduling requests to the base station only at certain predetermined scheduling request opportunities. The method comprises triggering a scheduling request transmission, transmitting a scheduling request to the base station at the next occurring scheduling request opportunity, starting a scheduling request prohibiting timer and prohibiting any further scheduling request retransmission at future scheduling request opportunities while the scheduling request prohibiting timer is running. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327289 | Method and Device for Transmission Scheduling - A scheduling device ( | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150327297 | RADIO COMMUNICATION IN UNLICENSED BAND - The present disclosure relates to a method of a first radio device using a first radio access technology, RAT, for communication with a second radio device. The method comprises listening for any transmission in a frequency channel of an unlicensed radio frequency band. The method also comprises determining whether the channel is idle. The method also comprises transmitting a first radio message on the channel in accordance with a second RAT, different than the first RAT. The method also comprises determining transmission properties for a message to be transmitted on the channel in accordance with the first RAT, based on the determining of whether the channel is idle. The method also comprises transmitting a second radio message on the channel, to the second radio device and in accordance with the first RAT using the determined transmission properties. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150334669 | Enhanced Mechanism of Uplink Time Alignment Maintenance for Inter-ENB Carrier Aggregation - Apparatus and method are provided to configure two-tier identifiers for serving cells of a UE configured with inter-eNB carrier aggregation (CA). In one novel aspect, cell group identifiers are configured. The cell group identifier is a super set of one or more uplink group identifiers that are associated with serving cells served by the same base station. In one embodiment, different MAC entities are associated with different cell group identifiers. The UE performs uplink alignment, monitoring and management procedures linking to the cell group identifier. In another novel aspect, a group TAG, which is a super set identifier of one or more cell TAGs associated with serving cells served by the same base station, is configured. In one embodiment, the UE performs uplink alignment procedure based on the status of the group TAG, which is determined based on the status of the cell TAGs associated with the group TAG. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334727 | COMMUNICATIONS COEXISTENCE SIGNALING - A coexistence signaling scheme for radio communications is described. In one embodiment, a method for coexistence signaling includes establishing first communications and second communications with separate access points or base stations. The method further includes determining protocol timings of the first and second communications. Based on various communications parameters, protocol timings, and identified interference conditions, the method includes generating one or more priority signals to manage the first and second communications. According to certain aspects, overlapping channel conditions can be avoided while maintaining acceptable communications data throughput. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334728 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TIME OPTIMIZATION FOR SILENCING WIRELESS DEVICES IN COEXISTENCE NETWORKS - Embodiments provide a communication device. A device comprises at least two dissimilar network technology subsystems, at least one subsystem of which is lower priority than at least another of the dissimilar subsystems. In some embodiments, a device is able to transmit a silencing frame during a transmission window within a lower priority technology network interval. A transceiver is able to calculate a transmission window to end by at least a duration of time to complete transmission of the silencing frame prior to the beginning of next immediate string of at least one higher priority network technology subsystem interval, and transmit a silencing frame during a lower priority technology network interval during the transmission window. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334729 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION UTILIZING THIN CONTROL - Aspects of the disclosure provide for a thin control channel structure that can be utilized for a variety of purposes including, for example, enabling the multiplexing of two or more data transmission formats. In another example, the thin control channel can be utilized to carry control information that relates to interference experienced by a user. By utilizing this control information on a thin control channel, the network can take suitable action to mitigate the interference. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334733 | DATA SCHEDULING METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a data scheduling method and a data scheduling device, which is configured to: receive channel quality information sent by a first terminal; calculate a current instantaneous scheduling rate of the first terminal on a first component carrier by using the channel quality information; acquire an average scheduling rate of the first terminal on the first component carrier; calculate a scheduling priority of the first terminal on the first component carrier by using the instantaneous scheduling rate and the average scheduling rate; and allocate a physical resource of the first component carrier to the first terminal. In this way, a multi-carrier terminal is enabled to obtain a stable high rate, differentiation between terminals is achieved | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334744 | LOAD BASED LTE/LTE-A WITH UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - In one aspect of the disclosure, a method of wireless communication includes receiving, at a transmitter, data for transmission over an unlicensed carrier, calculating, at the transmitter, a first available extended clear channel assessment (ECCA) opportunity of the unlicensed carrier after the receiving, wherein the calculating uses at least network information and a pseudo-random number, performing a clear channel assessment (CCA) check, by the transmitter, on the unlicensed carrier at the first available ECCA opportunity, in response to detecting a clear CCA check, transmitting channel reserving signals, by the transmitter, onto the unlicensed carrier, and in response to failing to detect the clear CCA check, calculating, by the transmitter, a next available ECCA opportunity of the unlicensed carrier using at least the network information and another pseudo-random number. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334747 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NODE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NODE, AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NODE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for accessing a wireless communication node, a wireless communication node, and a system for accessing a wireless communication node. The method includes: receiving, by a second wireless communication node, a request message that is sent by a first wireless communication node; sending, a request response to the first wireless communication node; receiving, a second wireless communication node activation request; and sending, a random access indication message, so that the UE accesses the second wireless communication node. In the embodiments of the present invention, communication among a first wireless communication node that a UE has already accessed, a second wireless communication node that the UE expects to access, and the UE enables the first wireless communication node and the second wireless communication node to provide a service for the UE at the same time. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334763 | METHOD FOR OPERATING TIME ALIGNMENT TIMER AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF - There is provided a method for operating time alignment timer (TAT). The method may comprise: operating a first TAT in a first medium access control (MAC) entity; operating a second TAT in a second MAC entity; and if the first TAT operated in the first MAC entity is expired, considering the second TAT operated in the second MAC entity as expired. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150341130 | SIGNALING SOFT TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING IN ENHANCED DISTRIBUTED CHANNEL ACCESS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for signaling soft time division multiplexing (TDM) assignment information in an enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) operation. The soft TDM assignment may be sent to one or more nodes of a group of nodes to communicate with indicated priority access parameters during at least one of a plurality of time slots. The soft TDM assignment may also convey one or more backoff operation rules to at least one of the one or more nodes. Further, primary and secondary non-concurrent nodes may be identified and a signal sent to the secondary node for it to communicate, at a different priority than the primary node, during at least one of a plurality of non-concurrent time slots the primary node is communicating during. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341150 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Disclosed is a method for enabling a first terminal to communicate with a second terminal. Specifically, the method includes the steps of: receiving from a base station the format information of a first sub-frame for directly communicating with a second terminal; and assigning a signal for direct communication between the terminals to the first sub-frame according to the format information, wherein the format information contains the information concerning the resource region assigned with the signal for the direct communication between the terminals in the first sub-frame if a part of the first sub-frame overlaps a subsequent second sub-frame. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341873 | DISTRIBUTED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described that provide for D2D synchronization. The methods, systems, and/or devices may include tools and techniques that provide for synchronizing a mobile device based on detection of a reliability alarm. A reliability alarm may be used between mobile devices, which is transmitted and/or received on specific D2D resources. Since the resources are reserved for the reliability alarm, a mobile device which was previously isolated from network synchronization will be able to receive the reliability alarm that a reliable synchronization signal is close when it moves within range of a reliable device. Once a reliability alarm is received the mobile device may free other resources to allow it to receive synchronization signals from the reliable devices. The mobile device may then synchronize with the network based on the received synchronization signals and transmit its own reliability alarm for subsequent isolated devices to use. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341879 | OUT-OF-BAND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Power consumption in a receiving device is avoided by receiving packets from a transmitting device in a first band of frequencies (such as around 60 GHz) and providing acknowledgments in a second band of frequencies that is different than the first band of frequencies (such as around 5 GHz). These out-of-band acknowledgments may allow the receiving device to avoid transmissions in the first band of frequencies and the associated power consumption. Moreover, the transmissions by the transmitting device in the first band of frequencies and the second band of frequencies may be synchronized so that packets are transmitted in the first band of frequencies when transmission in the second band of frequencies is enabled. In these ways, this communication technique may improve the performance of the transmitting device and the receiving device. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341882 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CROSS-CARRIER QUASI CO-LOCATION SIGNALING IN A NEW CARRIER TYPE (NCT) WIRELESS NETWORK - Generally, this disclosure provides devices, systems and methods for Cross-Carrier Quasi Co-Location Signaling in an NCT Wireless Network. A UE device may include a receiver circuit to receive a QCL signaling message from a primary cell, the QCL signaling message for a configured secondary cell to identify a primary or one or more secondary cells that are Quasi Co-located with the secondary cell for which the message is provided. The UE device may also include a QCL signal decoding module to decode the QCL signaling message and to determine QCL synchronization parameters. The UE device may further include a synchronization module to synchronize the UE with the primary or one or more secondary cells based on the QCL synchronization parameters obtained from the QCL message received from the primary cell. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341885 | Multiple Timing Advance And Carrier Aggregation - At least one of transmissions and receptions over allocated radio resources within a first timing advance group are synchronized using a first timer; and similar for allocated radio resources within a second timing advance group that are synchronized using a second timer. In response to determining that the first timer remains synchronized while the second timer is not synchronized with a radio network which has allocated the respective radio resources, a first procedure is followed for the case in which there is a primary component carrier within the second timing advance group and a different second procedure for the case in which there is no primary component carrier within the second timing advance group. In an exemplary embodiment, a message is sent to the radio network indicating that the second timer has expired. Various distinctions between the two procedures, and how the message is sent, are detailed for different embodiments. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341929 | Method and Arrangement for Resolving a Temporary Block Flow - A method for resolving a Temporary Block Flow (TBF) in a wireless network including one or more mobile stations exchanging data with a base station system. The method comprises receiving a RLC/MAC block and retrieving a first TFI in the RLC/MAC header. The TFI is compared to an assigned TFI. The capability for the associated MS to resolve TBFs based on extended TFI addressing is determined. If the received first TFI matches assigned TFI and represents a comprehensive TFI for the associated MS, the payload of the RLC/MAC block is decoded. When the first TFI matches assigned TFI value and is identified as a code point to an eTFI, at least a predetermined field of the RLC data block is decoded and an extended TFI, eTFI, is retrieved. The eTFI is compared with an assigned eTFI. Following a match, the payload of the RLC data block is decoded. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150341932 | WIRELESS ROUTER OR RESIDENTIAL GATEWAY CAPABLE OF DISTINGUISHING POWER-SENSITIVE WIRELESS SENSORS AND PROVIDING SEPARATE TREATMENT THERETO - Techniques are disclosed for a wireless router or residential gateway to distinguish power-sensitive wireless sensors and provide separate treatments thereto for low power consumption connections. In some embodiments, a network device includes a wireless network circuit, and control circuitry coupled to the network circuit and configured to, upon receipt of a request of connection from a client, identify whether the client is power-sensitive. The network device can further cause, if the client is identified as power-sensitive, the power-sensitive client to connect using a low-power connection while maintaining a regular connection to other regular clients. The low-power connection can be operated on a first channel different from but in a same frequency band as a second channel on which the regular connection is operated. | 11-26-2015 |
| 20150349878 | Method and Apparatus for Low-Power, Long-Range Networking - An endpoint device may be operable to transmit and receive data wirelessly via a medium to which access is time-division multiplexed into a plurality of repeating windows. A first window of the plurality of repeating windows may be time-division multiplexed into a plurality of timeslots utilized for transmitting beacon signals. A second window of the plurality of repeating windows may be time-division multiplexed into a plurality of timeslots utilized for transmitting alarm signals. The endpoint may be assigned one of the first timeslots and, when an alarm condition is present, select one of the second timeslots for transmitting an alarm signal based on the assigned first timeslot, and based on a hash function. The endpoint may then transmit an alarm signal during the second timeslot. The endpoint may be operable to synchronize its local clock by listening to beacons transmitted by other endpoints. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351046 | DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL FOR MULTIPLE DOWNLINK TIME SLOTS IN TDD COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for downlink power control for use in a spread spectrum time division communication system having time slots for communication, implemented in a user equipment, includes receiving data in a command per coded composite transport channel (CCTrCH) transmitted over a plurality of time slots. An interference power for each time slot of the plurality of time slots is measured and a single power command for the entire CCTrCH is transmitted in response to a signal to interference ratio of the received CCTrCH and the measured interference power measurement for each time slot. A subsequent data is received in the CCTrCH communication having a transmission power level for each downlink communication time slot set individually in response to the interference power measurement for that time slot and the single power command for the entire CCTrCH. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351088 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SIMULTANEOUS SAMPLING OF SERIAL DIGITAL DATA STREAMS FROM MULTIPLE ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTERS (ADCS), INCLUDING IN DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for simultaneous sampling of serial digital data streams from multiple analog-to-digital converters (ADCs), including in distributed antenna systems, are disclosed. In one embodiment, a controller unit samples a plurality of serial digital data streams simultaneously. To allow the controller unit to sample the multiple serial digital data streams simultaneously from a plurality of ADCs, the controller unit is configured to provide a plurality of data input ports. Each of the ADCs is coupled to a common chip select port and clock signal port on the controller unit. The controller unit communicates a chip select signal on the chip select port to activate all of the ADCs simultaneously to cause each of the ADCs to provide its respective digital data stream to the respective data input port of the controller unit simultaneously for sampling. As a result, fewer or lower-cost components may be used to sample multiple ADCs. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351093 | System and Method for Adaptive Transmission Time Interval (TTI) Structure - Methods and devices are provided for communicating data in a wireless channel. In one example, a method includes adapting the transmission time interval (TTI) length of transport container for transmitting data in accordance with a criteria. The criteria may include (but is not limited to) a latency requirement of the data, a buffer size associated with the data, a mobility characteristic of a device that will receive the data. The TTI lengths may be manipulated for a variety of reasons, such as for reducing overhead, satisfy quality of service (QoS) requirements, maximize network throughput, etc. In some embodiments, TTIs having different TTI lengths may be carried in a common radio frame. In other embodiments, the wireless channel may partitioned into multiple bands each of which carrying (exclusively or otherwise) TTIs having a certain TTI length. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351094 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK RADIO RESOURCES - A method and apparatus for managing radio resources in one or more wireless communication networks. At least one radio resource manager (RRM) is provided within a network node, or as an independent entity. The RRM monitors performance on wireless communication links of the network(s) and interacts with nodes associated with those links to change the configuration on a particular wireless communication link if its performance (i.e., quality) falls below an established threshold. Information regarding current resource usage of the network is sent to the RRM by the nodes. Each of the nodes may send a quality report to the RRM including wireless communication link quality measurements and performance statistics. Alternatively, the RRM may perform the wireless communication link quality measurements. The RRM facilitates the broadcasting of information regarding current resource usage of one network to other networks to avoid collisions and interference. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351120 | SCHEDULING METHOD AND DEVICE - A scheduling method includes: determining whether a valid time interval is shorter than a first time interval; and when the valid time interval is smaller than the first time interval, performing a search for a time length of N predetermined search cycles. In each of the predetermined search cycles, N consecutive TD-SCDMA sub-frames are regarded as a group, and one fixed sub-frame in the group is selected for the search. In the N predetermined search cycles, the fixed sub-frames selected from the group in respective predetermined search cycles are different. N is a natural number greater than or equal to 2. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351125 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCE - Provided is an apparatus and method for allocating a resource. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the method of allocating a resource in which an access point allocates a resource for communication between a first station and a second station based on a slot-based channel access scheme in a wireless local area network, the method including confirming a wakeup schedule set between the first station and the second station, and allocating the resource for communication between the first station and the second station through the slot-based channel access scheme reflecting the confirmed WS. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351127 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING A TIMING ADVANCE COMMAND IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method of receiving a timing advance command by a user equipment in a wireless communication system. A terminal receives information on a time advance group from a base station, and also receives the timing advance command corresponding to the time advance group from the base station. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351132 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method and a device for performing random access procedure by a UE (User Equipment) in the a wireless communication system, the method comprising: transmitting random access preamble to the BS (Base Station); receiving response message including UL (Uplink) grant and TTI (Transmission Time Interval) bundling information; and performing UL transmission using the UL grant by TTI bundling operation. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351133 | Methods, Apparatus, User Equipment, Wireless Network Node, and Computer Program Product for Random Access - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a method, an apparatus, a wireless network node, a user equipment and a computer program product for random access in a wireless network. According to the method, a RoT level may be selected from a plurality of RoT levels according to a predetermined policy, and a time period with the selected RoT level may be determined for initiating a random access request. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150351134 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE TIMING ADVANCE GROUPS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and apparatus for managing multiple Timing Advance Groups (TAGs) operating with different timings are provided for use in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. The method for managing multiple TAGs at a base station of a wireless communication system supporting carrier aggregation according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes categorizing a plurality of carriers into at least one TAG according to a predetermined rule, assigning a TAG index to each TAG, transmitting the TAG index to a terminal, generating a Timing Advance Command (TAC) for synchronization, and transmitting the TAC to the terminal in a random access process. The method and apparatus for managing TAGs according to exemplary embodiments of the present invention is capable of informing of the timing advance group to which each carrier belongs and managing multiple timing advance groups efficiently without signaling overhead. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150358121 | WIRELESS TRANSMITTER TO OPTIMIZE THROUGHPUT BY CONTROLLING TIME-AVERAGE BLOCK SIZE OF SIGNALS TO RECEIVERS - A prioritization is determined amongst a group of receivers for receiving signals transmitted from the wireless transmitter, without use of accurate channel state information. A signal is transmitted to each receiver based on an order that is determined by the prioritization. The transmitted signal can be encoded so that the receiver is able to receive the signal regardless of a channel state as between that receiver and the wireless transmitter. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358135 | Method, Apparatus and System for Feeding Back Early Stop Decoding - A method, apparatus and system for feeding back early stop decoding are provided. The method includes: a terminal side adjusting encoded TFCI bits, and sending the adjusted TFCI bits to a NodeB side via a TFCI domain of an uplink DPCCH (S | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358961 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND DATA FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD OF THE SAME - Provided is a data frame transmission method of a communication apparatus, the method including determining whether a transmission allowance condition of a data frame of the communication apparatus is satisfied when another communication apparatus occupies a channel, verifying an end time of another data frame transmitted by the other communication apparatus based on a result of the determining, and transmitting the data frame based on the verified end time. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358962 | METHOD FOR MONITORING DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method and a device by which a user equipment monitors a downlink control channel in a wireless communication system. More specifically, the method comprises a step of monitoring the downlink control channel on a flexible downlink subframe, wherein the flexible downlink subframe is obtained by reconfiguring, for downlink communication, an uplink subframe configured according to a reference UL-DL configuration, the reference UL-DL configuration is configured by the combination of a first UL-DL configuration set for a first cell and a second UL-DL configuration set for a second cell, and the first UL-DL configuration and the second UL-DL configuration are configured so as to change the usage of wireless resources. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358963 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - There is provided a communication control device that controls wireless communication in compliance with a time division duplex (TDD) scheme, the communication control device including: a selection unit configured to select a link direction configuration for the wireless communication among a plurality of candidates for the link direction configuration which indicates a link direction in units of sub-frames of a radio frame which includes a plurality of sub-frames; and an application unit configured to apply the selected link direction configuration to the wireless communication. The plurality of candidates include at least one of a link direction configuration dedicated to a downlink and a link direction configuration dedicated to an uplink. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358975 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING SIGNAL WITH INTERFERENCE ELIMINATED AND TERMINAL THEREFOR - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for receiving a signal with an interference eliminated. The method for receiving a signal with an interference eliminated includes the steps of: receiving the information of PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel) of a neighbor interference cell from a serving cell; receiving the information of the downlink synchronization with the neighbor interference cell from the serving cell; identifying the channel of the serving cell suffering an interference by PBCH of the neighbor interference cell based on the information of the downlink synchronization; and eliminating the interference for receiving the identified channel based on the information of PBCH of the neighbor interference cell. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358987 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ALLOCATION APPARATUS, AND ALLOCATION METHOD - The disclosed allocation apparatus appropriately selects a mobile station for which uplink scheduling is needed. An allocation apparatus ( | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358991 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELAYING TRANSMISSION OF BUFFER STATUS REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for delaying transmission of at least one of a buffer status report (BSR) and a power headroom report (PHR) in a wireless communication system. A user equipment (UE) triggers at least one of a BSR and a PHR, but delays transmission of the at least one of the BSR and the PHR to a base station if uplink (UL) transmission is not available. In this case, the UE may not trigger a scheduling request (SR). | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150359003 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HIGH-SPEED INITIAL ACCESS PROCESS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING ULTRAHIGH FREQUENCY BAND, AND DEVICE SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention provides a method for performing an initial access process used in a wireless access system and in an ultrahigh frequency band, and devices supporting same. The method for performing a high-speed initial access process in a wireless access system supporting an ultrahigh frequency band, according to one embodiment of the present invention, may comprise the steps of: receiving a synchronizing signal; receiving a broadcast channel signal; generating a random access preamble by using pre-fixed physical random access parameters according to a small cell supported in the ultrahigh frequency band; and transmitting the generated random access preamble on the basis of the synchronizing signal and the broadcast channel signal. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150365162 | FRAME STRUCTURE FOR AN ADAPTIVE MODULATION WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of simplifying the encoding of a predetermined number of bits of data into frames including adding error coding bits so that a ratio of the frame length times the baud rate of the frame times he bit packing ratio of the data divided the total bits of data is always an integer. The method may also convolutionally encode the bits of data so that the same equation is also always an integer. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365918 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INITIAL SYNCHRONIZATION AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE IN DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT NETWORK COVERAGE - A method at a first device for enabling a device-to-device wireless link, the method detecting whether a presence signal of a second device is received over a first time period, the presence signal of the second device having a time-slot boundary; and if the presence signal of the second device is not detected, initiating a time-slot boundary by the first device including: transmitting a first presence signal of the first device in a selected time-slot; and checking for an acknowledgment to the first presence signal. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365939 | BEAMFORM SCHEDULING BASED ON THE DIRECTIONALITY OF UES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for beamforming in a wireless communication are provided. The apparatus determines a beamforming direction and a SNR of at least two user equipments (UEs) and determines whether to schedule communication with the at least two UEs during a same time interval via a single communication beam based on the beamforming directions and the SNRs of the at least two UEs. When the communication with the at least two UEs during the same time interval via the single communication beam is scheduled, the apparatus allocates bandwidth resources respectively among the at least two UEs, sizes a width of the single communication beam to encompass the beamforming directions of the at least two UEs, and communicates with one or more of the at least two UEs during the same time interval via a respectively allocated bandwidth resource using the sized single communication beam. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365972 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for transmitting a downlink in a wireless communication system. A method for transmitting the downlink in a WLAN comprises the steps of: an access point (AP) transmitting, to a plurality of stations (STA), each of a plurality of request to send (RTS) frames through each of a plurality of channels; and the AP receiving a clear to send (CTS) frame from at least one of the plurality of STAs through at least one channel from the plurality of channels, wherein each of the plurality of RTS frames may include channel information for indicating a channel to be used from among the plurality of channels when transmitting the downlink to each of the STAs, and identifier information for indicating the plurality of STAs. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365973 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SIGNAL BY STATION IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting and receiving a signal by a station (STA) in a wireless LAN system, the method comprising the steps of: performing clear channel assessment (CCA); when electric power equal to or larger than a predetermined level is detected as a result of the CCA, transmitting, to an AP, a request relating to configuration of an interval; and receiving interval information as a response to the request, wherein when the electric power equal to or larger than the predetermined level has resulted from uplink transmission, the received interval information is information synchronized with interval information of a basic service set (BSS) relating to the uplink transmission. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365982 | MASSIVE MIMO LINK SETUP - The invention is directed to establishing a massive multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) link between an access point (AP) and a user equipment (UE). An exemplary method comprises: first repeatedly transmitting pilots from the UE to the AP for a first duration, wherein the first duration covers a portion of a data frame; listening at the UE for a response from the AP for substantially the first duration; in response to not receiving a response from the AP, second repeatedly transmitting pilots from the UE to the AP for a second duration, wherein the second duration covers at least a portion of the remaining portion of the data frame not covered during the first duration; and receiving an acknowledgment at the UE from the AP, and establishing the massive MIMO link between the UE and AP. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365994 | HANDLING A RADIO LINK FAILURE IN COMMUNICATIONS - A method for a communications system, wherein in response to detecting a radio link problem during a first phase of a radio link failure, the first user terminal transmits an indication of the detection of the radio link problem to a second user terminal over a device-to-device link. In response to a report on the radio link problem detection of the first user terminal being sent from the second user terminal to a network apparatus, the first user terminal receives a confirmation on a status of the report from the second user terminal over the device-to-device link. Based on the confirmation, the first user terminal decides, whether to stop a first radio link failure timer, reset the first radio link failure timer, or extend the first radio link failure timer. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150373624 | INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT, MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, SYSTEM AND METHOD - An infrastructure equipment forming part of a mobile communications network includes a transmitter configured to transmit signals to communications devices via a wireless access interface, a receiver configured to receive signals transmitted from the communications devices via the wireless access interface, and a controller. The controller controls the transmitter and receiver across a first frequency bandwidth divided in time into plural frames, to form one of plural cells of the mobile communications network, each cell allocated a cell identifier by the mobile communications network. The controller and transmitter transmit in one or more of the frames a synchronization sequence providing an indication of one of the cell identifiers. A relative temporal location of the synchronization sequence within the frame provides the communications devices with an indication of the cell identifier which can be combined with detecting the synchronization sequence to improve estimate of the cell identifier for the cell. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373686 | Carrier Grouping in Multicarrier Wireless Networks - A base station transmits an RRC message to modify a first cell group of a first cell. If the first cell is a primary cell, the RRC message reconfigures the primary cell with an updated first cell group and the RRC message comprises mobility control information. If the first cell is a secondary cell, the RRC message releases the secondary cell and adds the secondary cell with an updated first cell group without employing mobility control information. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373700 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NODE OPERATION ACCORDING TO NETWORK-WIDE RESOURCE-ALLOCATION SCHEDULES - Disclosed herein are methods and systems for node operation according to network-wide resource-allocation schedules. One embodiment takes the form of a method carried out by a given node within an ad-hoc wireless network, which includes a controller node for a current time period. The method includes obtaining one or more air-interface resource requests for the current time period, where each obtained resource request indicates a requesting node and a requested resource. The method further includes using a network-standard algorithm for deriving a network-wide resource-allocation schedule for the current time period based at least in part on the obtained resource requests. The method further includes verifying the derived resource-allocation schedule based at least in part on a verification value derived by the controller node from the network-wide resource-allocation schedule using a network-standard verification function. The method also includes operating according to the verified resource-allocation schedule for the current time period. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373703 | Method of Aligning Frame Transmission to Deterministic Time and Related Wireless Device - A method for a wireless device in a wireless communication system includes defining a time window prior to a first target time; and transmitting a packet to reserve a channel of the wireless communication system till a second target time when determining that the channel is clear during the time window. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373705 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - One problem in a related art is that the total throughput of a network decreases with an increase in the number of radio terminals or an increase in a traffic density of a radio communication. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373707 | Acknowledgment and/or receiver recovery mechanisms for scheduled responses within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Acknowledgment and/or receiver recovery mechanisms for scheduled responses within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Explicit scheduling information is provided from a first wireless communication device (e.g., an access point (AP), a transmitting wireless communication device) to a number of other wireless communication devices (e.g., wireless stations (STAs), receiving wireless communication devices) directing those other wireless communication devices a manner by which responses (e.g., acknowledgments (ACKs), block acknowledgments (BACKs), training feedback frames, etc.) are to be provided to the first wireless communication device there from. Such direction may include the order, timing, cluster assignment, etc. by which each respective wireless communication device is to provide its respective response to the first wireless communication device. In the event of the first wireless communication device failing to receive at least one response from at least one of the other wireless communication devices, various communication medium recovery mechanisms may be performed. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373709 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FIRST DATA STREAMS VIA RESPECTIVE TRANSMITTERS TO MULTIPLE CLIENT STATIONS DURING A SAME PERIOD AND SUCCESSIVELY TRANSMITTING SECOND DATA STREAMS - An access point including a first transmitter and a second transmitter. The first transmitter is configured to (i) during a first window, transmit a first data stream to a first client station, and (ii) during a second window, transmit a second data stream to a second client station. The second transmitter is configured to: during the first window and while the first transmitter transmits the first data stream to the first client station, transmit a third data stream to a third client station; during a first portion of the second window and while the first transmitter is transmitting the second data stream to the second client station, refrain from transmitting a fourth data stream to a fourth client station; and subsequent to the first transmitter completing the transmission of the second data stream and during a second portion of the second window, transmit the fourth data stream to the fourth client station. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373738 | METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION OF UNICAST CONTROL IN BROADCAST/MULTICAST TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVALS - Embodiments of the invention provide methods for maximizing the bandwidth utilization in the uplink of a communication system supporting time division multiplexing between unicast and multicast/broadcast communication modes during transmission time intervals in the downlink of a communication system. This is accomplished by multiplexing at least unicast control signaling for UL scheduling assignments in TTIs supporting the multicast/broadcast communication mode. Moreover, multiplexing of unicast control signaling can also be accomplished by splitting a symbol of the multicast/broadcast TTI into two shorter symbols with the first of these two shorter symbols carrying at least unicast control signaling and the second of these shorter symbols carrying multicast/broadcast signaling. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373741 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING SELF-JAMMING OF TRANSMISSIONS ON ADJACENT CARRIERS - The present disclosure provides methods and apparatuses for multi-carrier transmissions over adjacent channels that reduce self-jamming due to asymmetric interference. In an aspect, a large bandwidth load-base equipment (LBE) carrier may be provided such that CCA is performed jointly over the entire bandwidth. In another aspect, additional CCA timeslots may be used to synchronize the two carriers. In a further aspect, an extended CCA may be performed on a primary unlicensed carrier while a simple CCA may be performed on a secondary unlicensed carrier. In yet another aspect, LBE may be deployed on some carriers while frame-base equipment (FBE) may be deployed on other carriers. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373745 | SYMMETRIC TRANSMIT OPPORTUNITY (TXOP) TRUNCATION - Various embodiments of symmetric transmit opportunity (TXOP) truncation (STT) systems and methods are disclosed. One method embodiment, among others, comprises receiving a frame that truncates a TXOP around a first station, and responsive to receiving the frame, sending a second frame that truncates the TXOP around a second station. Others system and method embodiments are disclosed. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373746 | MASSIVE MIMO CELL SYNCHRONIZATION: AP TO AP DIRECT COMMUNICATION - The invention is directed to synchronizing a massive multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) link between an access point (AP) and a contaminating AP. An exemplary method comprises: detecting, by an AP, a contaminating AP, wherein the contaminating AP interferes with communication between the AP and other UEs in communication with the AP; and extracting, by the AP, broadcasted pilot information from a first channel associated with a data frame, wherein the broadcasted pilot information is associated with the contaminating AP. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373748 | ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL BUNDLING - A device is configured to send a connection message to a user device while a communication session is being established with the user device. The connection message may indicate a transmission time interval bundling (TTI-B) configuration to be configured by the user device. The device may determine to activate the TTI-B configuration after the communication session is established. The device may send a control message to the user device during the communication session. The control message may instruct the user device to activate the TTI-B configuration configured by the user device. The device may activate the TTI-B configuration for use during the communication session. The device may receive uplink data, from the user device, during the communication session based on activating the TTI-B configuration and sending the control message. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150382200 | CLUSTERING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a clustering method, including: adjusting, by a first device, a beginning of its own first small bandwidth beacon transmission interval to be aligned with a selected empty Beacon SP, setting its own BI to be equal to a synchronization device beacon interval S-BI, and joining, after accordingly adjusting an interval VBI for sending a beacon frame on a large bandwidth channel and an interval SBBI for sending a beacon frame on a small bandwidth channel, a target small bandwidth cluster; or sending a beacon frame including a cluster probe IE over a large bandwidth channel, requesting, by using the cluster probe IE, a synchronization PCP to return cluster synchronization information and control information, and joining the target large bandwidth cluster according the information and a second PCP. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382211 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method, an apparatus and a system for data transmission are provided. The method includes: receiving processed first microwave data information that is received through a microwave antenna; performing multiplexing through a preset rule on the first microwave data information and processed first radio frequency data information that is received through a base station antenna, and sending multiplexed information to a baseband unit, so that the baseband unit sends the first microwave data information to a microwave indoor unit. In the method, the apparatus and the system for data transmission, microwave data information and radio frequency data information are multiplexed, and then multiplexed information is transmitted together. The microwave data information can be transmitted through a transmission medium between base station devices, such as a fiber, thereby saving connection cables between microwave transmission devices and reducing a device cost and an installation cost of the microwave transmission devices. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382334 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LIGHTWEIGHT MESSAGING DURING INITIAL SYNCHRONIZATION, DISCOVERY, AND ASSOCIATION IN DIRECTIONAL WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus receives a discovery signal transmitted from a connection point (CP) via a directional beam. The discovery signal may include first information (including beam sweep configuration information) related to the CP. The apparatus then transmits an association signal to the CP based on the beam sweep configuration information and monitors for a resource grant from the CP based on the transmitted association signal. Alternatively, the apparatus transmits a discovery signal via a directional beam to a user equipment (UE). The discovery signal may include first information (including beam sweep configuration information) related to the apparatus. The apparatus then receives an association signal from the UE based on the beam sweep configuration information and determines a resource grant for communicating with the UE based on the received association signal. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382342 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting an uplink includes: an STA1 transmitting to an AP each of multiple RTS frames through at least one channel from among multiple first channels; the STA1 receiving from the AP at least one CTS frame through at least one channel from among the multiple channels which have received the RTS frames; and an STA2 receiving from the AP at least one CTS frame through at least one channel from among multiple second channels, wherein the at least one CTS frame includes STA identifier information and channel information, the STA identifier information includes information for indicating the STA1 and the STA2, and wherein the channel information includes information on an uplink channel1 allocated for transmitting a data frame1 of the STA1 and information on an uplink channel2 allocated for transmitting a data frame2 of the STA2. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382349 | Sector Individual Control of Access to a Cell of a Mobile Network - For controlling random access individually for a given sector of a cell ( | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150382351 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA OVER CARRIER COMPONENT IN A MULTI-CARRIER MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for receiving data over a plurality of carrier components at a Mobile Station (MS) is provided. The method includes receiving, from a Base Station (BS), resource allocation information including a first allocation information indicating at least one resource allocated to a first carrier component in a first subframe and a second allocation information indicating at least one resource allocated to a second carrier component in a second subframe and receiving data, from the BS, on the at least one resource of the first carrier component and on the at least one resource of the second carrier component based on the resource allocation information. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20160007266 | SCHEDULE FOR ACCESS TO SHARED WIRELESS MEDIUM BASED ON PROFILE DATA - A schedule for access to a shared wireless medium by a device is based on profile data and an algorithm. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007335 | SLOT-BASED D2D COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The D2D communication method may comprise the step of: transmitting, by a search device, a search request message through each of a plurality of channels in a search area, the search area corresponding to time resource allocated to integer multiple slots; receiving, by the search device, a search response message as a response to the search request message from a device found through at least one channel from among the plurality of channels in the search area, the search response message containing slot timing information and information on a first channel hopping pattern; synchronizing with the found device based on the slot timing information in a peering area by the search device; and performing communication with the found device, by the search device, on the basis of the information on the first channel hopping pattern in a communication area. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007348 | METHODS FOR TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL BUNDLING IN THE UPLINK - Methods, systems, and apparatus for supporting uplink Transmission Time Interval (TTI) bundling in Long Term Evolution (LTE) are provided. Methods, systems, and apparatus for signaling, activation/deactivation, and wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) behavior are also provided. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007364 | ACCESS POINT - An access point (AP) for an indoor antenna distributed deployment environment provides an access service for a wireless terminal. The AP includes N radio frequency (RF) processing units and N*M RF switches (RFSs). Each RFS includes a public port and at least two branch ports. The at least two branch ports respectively connect with at least two antennas deployed in different indoor areas via RF feeders. The RF processing unit includes M RF chains. Each RF chain is connected to a public port of an RFS. The RF processing unit is to transmit a packet to the wireless terminal, based on a predetermined antenna combination for the wireless terminal. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007374 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for a terminal to receive downlink control information in a wireless communications system and an apparatus therefor. More specifically, the method is characterized by comprising a step for receiving downlink control information (DCI) indicating whether to retransmit an uplink or not, wherein DCI is defined to simultaneously transmit whether to retransmit the uplink for each of the plurality of terminals. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160007375 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR TRANSMITTING SCHEDULING INFORMATION - The present disclosure provides a method and base station for transmitting scheduling information. The method comprises: determining that a downlink subframe corresponding to the uplink subframe according to a first scheduling timing corresponding to a first Time Division Duplex (TDD) uplink and downlink configuration scheme of a plurality of TDD uplink and downlink configuration schemes is unavailable for transmitting the scheduling information; obtaining a first equivalent TDD uplink and downlink configuration scheme by treating one or more downlink subframes, including the downlink subframe, in a radio frame as uplink subframes; selecting a downlink subframe corresponding to the uplink subframe according to a second scheduling timing corresponding to a second TDD uplink and downlink configuration scheme of the plurality of TDD uplink and downlink configuration schemes, wherein a set of downlink subframes specified in the second TDD uplink and downlink configuration scheme is a subset of a set of downlink subframes specified in the first equivalent TDD uplink and downlink configuration scheme; and transmitting the scheduling information in the selected downlink subframe. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160013879 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND METHOD | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014675 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014707 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMON TIME REFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMON TIME REFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014726 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR JOINT CHANNEL ESTIMATION AND NON-LINEAR SYMBOL DETECTION IN TD-SCDMA | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014774 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DISCOVERY SIGNAL FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DIRECT COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014775 | System and Methods For Controlling The Usage of a Carrier | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014813 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING FRAME IN ACCORDANCE WITH BANDWIDTH THEREOF IN WLAN SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160020873 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A HARQ FEEDBACK AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method and a device for transmitting a HARQ (Hybird-ARQ) feedback signal in the wireless communication system, wherein the method comprises: receiving 1st to ith data within a time window comprising subframes 1 to N, wherein the 1st to Nth data are transmitted by a base station for the time window, wherein the ‘i’ is a natural number no more than the ‘N’, and the 1st to the Nth data are the same, sequentially decoding the 1st to the ith data, wherein the ith data received at a subframe i is data first successfully decoded, and transmitting an ACK (Acknowledgement) signal for all the 1st to the Nth data at a subframe i+X, wherein the ‘X’ is a predetermined number for transmission of the HARQ signal. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160021577 | RESOURCE RESERVATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A resource reservation method applied to a WiFi system includes: receiving, by a destination node, a resource reservation request sent by a source node, and sending a resource reservation response to the source node, where the resource reservation response includes a reservation time, and the resource reservation response is used to enable another node, which can monitor the resource reservation response, in the WiFi system to set a network allocation vector of the another node according to the reservation time; determining, by the destination node, whether data sent by the source node is received within a predetermined time; and if the data is not received, sending a resource release instruction, so that the another node initializes the network allocation vector of the another node, and re-contends for a resource, thereby solving a hidden node problem and also ensuring that a network resource is fully and properly used. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160021625 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-CELL DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION AND DISCOVERY - A method includes detecting a device to device (D2D) synchronization signal of a neighbor base station, transmitted from at least one other UE associated with the neighbor base station through a transceiver, determining at least one UE receive (RX) resource pool configured by the neighbor base station based on the D2D synchronization signal of the neighbor base station, and monitoring a D2D discovery or communication signal transmitted from the at least one other UE according to the at least one UE RX resource pool through the transceiver. A method includes determining at least one UE RX resource pool for at least one device associated with a base station, each UE RX resource pool comprising a repetition of a Scheduling Assignment (SA) pool and a data pool with a scheduling cycle, the SA pool comprising a SA bitmap, and the data pool comprising at least one repeated data bitmap. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160021645 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention discloses a data transmission method and apparatus, and a user equipment. The method includes: classifying, by using a transmission time interval TTI as a classification basis, TTIs on a carrier in a cell into a time division multiplexing TDM TTI and a code division multiplexing CDM TTI; and sending, to a user equipment UE, control information carrying a classified result, so as to instruct the UE to send uplink data according to the classified result and a data scheduling type of the UE in the TDM TTI or the CDM. By using the foregoing technical solution, a data transmission resource can be well saved and scheduling flexibility can be improved. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160021648 | Timing Advance Group in LTE Small Cell Enhancement - A method for communication in a wireless telecommunication system is provided. The method includes assigning a first cell of a first network node to a first timing advance group (TAG) of a user equipment (UE) and assigning a second cell of a second network node to a second TAG of the UE, wherein the second network node has a separate MAC (medium access control) scheduler from the first network node, and wherein the UE is able to transmit data on both the first and the second cell. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160021654 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING USER EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE WITH EFFICIENT RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - Methods and apparatus for wireless communication are provided. In one aspect, a method of wireless communication comprises receiving a first resource request including a first interval for at least one timing-priority task associated with a first radio access technology and a second resource request including a second interval for at least one timing-non-priority task associated with the first radio access technology. The method comprises granting the first resource request and reserving the first interval for the at least one timing-priority task associated with the first radio access technology. The method comprises receiving at least a third resource request including a third interval for at least one timing-priority task associated with a second radio access technology. The method comprises granting the third resource request and reserving the third interval for the at least one timing-priority task associated with the second radio access technology when the first interval and the third interval do not overlap. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160028610 | SUBNETWORKS AND MULTIPLE NETWORKS - A Next Generation Data Network is described. It leverages the “cloud” for data management, frequency data computation and analytics. Nodes in the network are arranged into subnets with at least one node per subnet connected to a physical high-speed computer communication link. The wireless network using packet switched beams, the beams are formed and switched electronically. It utilizes advanced signal processing to compensate for low transmit signal power and multipath reflections that can be frequency or flat fades. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029324 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING DUAL CONNECTIVITY - A random access method and an apparatus of a terminal for performing random access procedure to multiple base stations in parallel in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system supporting dual connectivity are provided. The method includes determining whether a first preamble transmission to a first cell of a first base station is overlapped with a second preamble transmission to a second cell of a second base station in a time domain, determining, when the first preamble transmission is overlapped with the second preamble transmission in the time domain, whether a sum of transmit powers calculated for the first and second preamble transmissions is greater than a maximum allowed transmit power of the terminal, and controlling, when the sum of the first and second preamble transmit powers is greater than the maximum allowed transmit power, the transmit power calculated for the second preamble transmission. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029332 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The invention is directed to a method of synchronising transmission between two nodes in a wireless network. The method comprises the steps of obtaining an expected interference profile for each node; and agreeing a synchronised transmission schedule between the nodes, where the expected interference profile of the or each node meets predetermined criteria. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029337 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEFINING TIMING REFERENCE FOR SECONDARY CELLS IN A SECONDARY TIMING ADVANCE GROUP - A user equipment (UE) is configured to perform a method for determining a timing reference for a secondary cell (SCell) in a secondary timing advance group (sTAG). The method includes selecting a SCell among a plurality of SCells within a sTAG as an uplink timing reference cell based on a predefined rule that is known at the UE and an eNB in communication with the UE. The method also includes receiving a downlink carrier from the selected SCell and determining, from the downlink carrier, a downlink timing used as a reference for an uplink transmission timing. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029364 | Primary and Secondary Cell Group Configuration - A wireless device receives at least one control message comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells grouped into at least a first cell group and a second cell group. The first cell group comprises a first reference cell. The second cell group comprises a second reference cell. The at least one control message comprises a pathloss reference for a secondary cell in the second cell group. The pathloss reference is configurable to one of a) a downlink of the second reference cell and b) a downlink of the secondary cell. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029377 | WIRELESS TERMINAL STATION AND BASE STATION - Demodulation is effectivley performed that uses an MMSE adaptive array which uses a guard section of a signal that uses a cyclic prefix. According the present invention, there is provided a wireless terminal station that is applied to a wireless communication system which is made up of multiple wireless terminal stations and a base station, the wireless terminal station including: a delay time setting module | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029378 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCHEDULING CELL BROADCAST MESSAGES - Methods, apparatus, and computer readable storage media are described. The apparatus may receive a next cell broadcast message or a schedule message according to schedule information in first-received cell broadcast message. The schedule information may indicate timing of the next cell broadcast message or the schedule message. The first cell broadcast message may be received before timing information associated with a cell broadcast channel is known, including after a reselection procedure or after termination of a voice call. The schedule information may relate to a discontinuous reception schedule defined in a missed schedule message. Presence of the schedule information in the first cell broadcast message may be indicated in a page parameter of a header of the first cell broadcast message or in a block identifier of the first cell broadcast message. A network entity is described that adds the schedule information to the first cell broadcast message. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029380 | Speed frame exchange within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - A signaling protocol allows for speed frame exchange between different wireless communication devices within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communication system. A listening wireless communication device analyzes state of speed frame indicator bits within frames transmitted from a first other wireless communication device to determine the entire radio frame exchanges between that first other wireless communication device and a second other wireless communication device. The second other wireless communication device may be a hidden node relative to the listening wireless communication device such that all or less than all transmissions from the hidden node are received by the listening device. The listening wireless communication device determines the status of the communication medium (e.g., the air in the context of a wireless communication system), so that it can transmit successfully without interfering with any ongoing communications between the first and second other wireless communication devices. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029403 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR SCHEDULING RESOURCES IN MESH NETWORKS - Methods and apparatuses are described herein that facilitate mesh network communication by a millimeter wave base stations (mBs) or WTRUs as nodes of a directional mesh network with other nodes of the directional mesh network. The mB or WTRU may include a directional antenna configured to transmit and receive signals in specific directions during the mesh network communication to define a directional mesh network. The mBs or WTRUs may transmit transmission request messages to neighbor nodes, wherein the transmission request messages include transmission slot allocation bitmaps and channel quality indicator information (CQI). Then response messages from the neighbor nodes may be received, wherein the response messages include receive slot allocation bitmaps and resource allocation decisions. The mBs or WTRUs may then update their transmission slot allocation bitmaps based on the received response messages and transmit data packets in specific directions based on the updated transmission slot allocation bitmap. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029411 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO LINK SYNCHRONIZATION DETERMINING METHOD - A mobile station (MS) performs a measurement of cells on a plurality of downlink frequencies used for a connection with a base station apparatus. The MS also detects a first indication or a second indication, based on the measurement of each cell designated by the base station apparatus, the first indication indicating a measurement result of a cell becomes lower than a first threshold and the second indication indicating a measurement result of a cell becomes higher than a second threshold. In addition, the MS, in a case where a reconnection procedure is started by expiring a timer corresponding to the each cell, selects a cell, and initiates a random access procedure for requesting a reconnection in the selected cell. Further, the timer is started if the first indication is indicated consecutively for a certain number of times. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160029425 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING DUAL CONNECTIVITY - A random access method and an apparatus of a terminal for performing random access procedure to multiple base stations in parallel in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system supporting dual connectivity are provided. The method includes determining whether a first preamble transmission to a first cell of a first base station is overlapped with a second preamble transmission to a second cell of a second base station in a time domain, determining, when the first preamble transmission is overlapped with the second preamble transmission in the time domain, whether a sum of transmit powers calculated for the first and second preamble transmissions is greater than a maximum allowed transmit power of the terminal, and controlling, when the sum of the first and second preamble transmit powers is greater than the maximum allowed transmit power, the transmit power calculated for the second preamble transmission. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160036546 | LTE SIGNALING IN RF BANDS WITH COMPETING COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methods presented herein provide for an LTE wireless communication system operating in a Radio Frequency (RF) band with a conflicting wireless system. The LTE system includes an eNodeB operable to detect a plurality of UEs in the RF band, to generate LTE frames for downlink communications to the UEs, and to time-divide each LTE frame into a plurality of subframes. The eNodeB is also operable to condense the downlink communications into a first number of the subframes that frees data from a remaining number of the subframes in each LTE frame, and to burst-transmit the first number of the subframes of each LTE frame in the RF band. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037467 | Sounding Reference Signal Transmission in a Wireless Network - A wireless device receives message(s) comprising configuration parameters of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in a secondary cell group. The wireless device transmits one or more of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after applying a timing advance to the secondary cell group. The wireless device is configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after receiving the message(s) and before receiving the timing advance. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037504 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM STORING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A wireless communication device includes: a memory; and one or more processors coupled to the memory, which, while performing first wireless communication with a base station using a wireless channel, performs, using the wireless channel without the base station, second wireless communication with a wireless communication device of a communication partner. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037512 | SCHEDULING ASSIGNMENT TRANSMISSION TIMING FOR USER EQUIPMENT ENABLING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - This disclosure generally relates to scheduling assignment transmission timing by a base station for a D2D UE. In one embodiment, a base station may determine timing information for transmission of SA associated with a D2D Tx UE and then transmit the timing information to the UE. A D2D-grant signaling may also be transmitted from the base station to the UE. Responsive to receiving the D2D-grant signaling from the base station, the D2D Tx UE may firstly transmit the SA to other UE(s) according to the indicated timing information. In one embodiment, the timing information may be included in the D2D-grant signaling. In this way, timing of the SA transmission is determined by the base station and informed to the UE, and since the base station controls the SA transmission timings of in-coverage UEs, an appropriate timing of the SA transmission may be selected for the UE so as to guarantee UEs transmitting SAs have opportunities to receive the SA transmissions of other UEs. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037513 | DISCOVERY REFERENCE SIGNAL OCCASION CONFIGURATION - This disclosure generally relates to a discovery reference signal occasion configuration. In one embodiment, a time period for transmission of a discovery reference signal may be obtained, which comprises a plurality of consecutive subframes. Furthermore, at least one first subframe of the time period may be configured for transmission of discovery reference signals from activated small cells, and at least one second subframe of the time period may be configured for transmission of discovery reference signals from deactivated small cells, wherein the at least one second subframe is different from the at least one first subframe. In this way, the activated small cells and the deactivated small cells may transmit discovery reference signals in different subframes within the discovery reference signal occasion such that the interferences of transmission of discovery reference signals may be significantly reduced. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037514 | ENHANCED NODE B (ENB) AND METHOD FOR MTC COEXISTENCE - Embodiments of a machine-type communication (MTC) User Equipment (UE) and methods for configuring a MTC UE using an evolved Node B (eNB) are generally described herein. A method for configuring a UE for communication performed by circuitry of an evolved Node B (eNB) may include broadcasting, from the eNB, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) transmission on a licensed band, transmitting, from the eNB to the UE, a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) transmission multiplexed with a machine-type communication (MTC) PBCH (M-PBCH) transmission, the M-PBCH transmission including a MTC master information block (M-MIB) in a MTC region of the licensed band, wherein the MTC region includes a subset of frequencies of the licensed band, and transmitting, from the eNB to the UE, a first data transmission on the MTC region in a downlink. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037517 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING ENHANCED UPLINK DATA USING A H-ARQ PROCESS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is configured to configure a set of hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) processes. The WTRU is configured to receive information which limits a particular MAC-d flow to accessing a limited set of H-ARQ processes. The WTRU is configured to determine whether a first H-ARQ process from the set of H-ARQ processes is available for transmitting EU data in a transmit time interval (TTI). The WTRU is configured to determine whether the particular MAC-d flow has access to the first H-ARQ process, based on the information received. The WTRU is configured to transmit data from the particular MAC-d flow in the TTI using the first H-ARQ process, on a condition that the first H-ARQ process is available for transmitting EU data in the TTI and that the particular MAC-d flow has access to the first H-ARQ process. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037519 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication network that forms an ad-hoc network without the arrangement of a controlling station sets a period that a communication apparatus can utilize with priority and performs isochronous communication in the period as required. When isochronous communication has not been performed or after isochronous communication has finished in the priority utilization period, other communication apparatuses perform arbitrary communication. When another communication is performed in a communication apparatus's own priority utilization period, the start of isochronous communication is temporarily delayed. In an ad-hoc communication environment, data having a real-time characteristic, such as AV content, can be efficiently transmitted through the isochronous communication. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037554 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UE - A method for controlling delay tolerant access of a Machine-Type Communication (MTC) device based on a backoff mechanism is provided. The method includes receiving, at a terminal, a paging message including an access barring information update indicator from a base station, and receiving a System Information Block (SIB) including updated access barring information, the SIB being received regardless of modification periods. The terminal receives the SIB including the updated access barring information immediately without waiting for the arrival of next modification period, resulting in improvement of access barring efficiency. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037555 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UE - A method for controlling delay tolerant access of a Machine-Type Communication (MTC) device based on a backoff mechanism is provided. The method includes receiving, at a terminal, a paging message including an access barring information update indicator from a base station, and receiving a System Information Block (SIB) including updated access barring information, the SIB being received regardless of modification periods. The terminal receives the SIB including the updated access barring information immediately without waiting for the arrival of next modification period, resulting in improvement of access barring efficiency. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037556 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS OF UE - A method for controlling delay tolerant access of a Machine-Type Communication (MTC) device based on a backoff mechanism is provided. The method includes receiving, at a terminal, a paging message including an access barring information update indicator from a base station, and receiving a System Information Block (SIB) including updated access barring information, the SIB being received regardless of modification periods. The terminal receives the SIB including the updated access barring information immediately without waiting for the arrival of next modification period, resulting in improvement of access barring efficiency. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160037561 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM USING RR-ALOHA BASED PROTOCOLS - A communication method and system in an Ad-Hoc network using a RR-ALOHA based protocol are provided. The method may include: receiving a data frame which includes N slots, where N is a positive integer greater than two, where a slot includes a payload and a frame information field, where a frame information field includes N sub-frame information fields which correspond to the N slots, respectively, where a sub-frame information field includes a source temporary identifier field for indicating which node occupies its corresponding slot; and if a source temporary identifier field contained in the received data frame equals to a first predetermined value representing the status of free, determining that a corresponding slot is free and can be reserved. By using the method of the disclosure, communication efficiency is improved. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160044614 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID GROUP SYNCHRONIZATION - A first device of a network may decide to transmit a flood of packets that is longer in duration than the maximum amount of time that the first device can continuously transmit. The first device may coordinate with one or more second devices of the network such that each of the one or more second devices transmits a respective second portion of the flood of packets following transmission of a first portion of the flood of packets by the first network device. The packets may advertise a pending network event that is to occur at a time indicated by the contents of the packets. The first device may select the one or more second devices from a plurality of devices based on a location of the one or more second devices and/or how many third devices are in the network. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044617 | TIMING ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES FOR DUAL PUCCH - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication. A base station may configure a set of timing adjustment groups (TAGs) and a set of PUCCH cell groups for a user equipment (UE). The serving cells in the TAGs may be associated with different PUCCH cell groups. The UE may initiate a time alignment timer for each TAG, and if the timer expires prior to receiving a timing adjustment command, the UE may initiate a timing alignment procedure for a subset of serving cells based on the association between the TAGs and the PUCCH cell groups. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044648 | WHITE SPACE USAGE FOR WIRELEESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICES - A method and apparatus are described including defining a neighbor set for each access point, selecting a first clock in a first access point, the selected clock having a highest accuracy as a grand master clock, advising neighboring access points to synchronize with the selected grand master clock and transmitting a message to schedule a quiet period based on the grand master clock. Also described are a method and apparatus including receiving a beacon message, inspecting clock descriptors in the beacon message, selecting a best master clock responsive to the inspection and transmitting a message to schedule a quiet period based on the selected best master clock. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044663 | Dynamic Uplink-Downlink Configuration - A method and apparatus can be configured to determine an uplink-downlink configuration. The method also transmits an indication of the uplink-downlink configuration. The transmitting the indication of the uplink-downlink configuration includes using physical layer signaling. The transmitting the indication of the uplink-downlink configuration also includes reusing an existing physical layer channel. The transmitting the indication of the uplink-downlink configuration is performed without extending physical layer associations | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044664 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A communication apparatus allocates timeslots, indicating intervals usable for transmission or reception of data, to each of a first and a second apparatuses, and communicates a result of the allocation to the first and the second apparatuses. The communication apparatus allocates the timeslots so that a timeslot allocated for the first apparatus to transmit/receive a first type of data to/from a partner apparatus overlaps with a timeslot allocated for the second apparatus to transmit/receive the first type of data to/from a partner apparatus, and a timeslot allocated for the first apparatus to transmit/receive a second type of data to/from a partner apparatus does not overlap with a timeslot allocated for the second apparatus to transmit/receive the second type of data to/from a partner apparatus. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044665 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR D2D COMMUNICATIONS - A user equipment, apparatus, and method are provided for wireless communication in a hybrid communication network. A method includes transmitting, by a first user equipment (UE), a scheduling request to a first eNodeB (eNB). The scheduling request indicates that the UE is capable of device-to-device (D2D) communications. The method includes receiving, by the first UE, a first scheduling assignment (SA) from the first eNB. The first SA indicates resources to be used by the first UE for device-to-device (D2D) communications with the first eNB. The method includes communicating, by the first UE, with the first eNB according to the first SA. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044666 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A first terminal receives a first Timing Advance (TA) value from a base station and includes a second TA value that is obtained based on the first TA value in a Scheduling Assignment (SA) signal. The first terminal transmits the SA signal to a second terminal at downlink (DL) timing for receiving a downlink signal of the base station in cellular communication. When a length of a Cyclic Prefix (CP) that is set for the D2D communication and a length of a CP that is set for the cellular communication are different, the first terminal transmits data of the D2D communication to the second terminal at first timing that is obtained by applying the second TA value to the DL timing. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044669 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING D2D DATA BASED ON RESOURCE PATTERN - A method and apparatus for supporting a device-to-device (D2D) communication between user equipments (UEs) are provided. A method of transmitting device-to-device (D2D) data using a D2D data transmission resource by a user equipment (UE), the method including: receiving, at a UE, configuration information associated with a D2D data transmission resource, the configuration information including information of a D2D data allocation period and being transmitted from an evolved NodeB (eNB); determining, at the UE, a D2D data transmission resource in each D2D data allocation period, the D2D data transmission resource including a pool of subframes; selecting D2D data transmission subframes from among the pool of subframes based on a changed pattern, the changed pattern being derived from a basic pattern; and transmitting, from the UE to another UE, D2D data based on the selected D2D data transmission subframes. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044670 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA ACCORDING TO A TRANSMISSION SPEED OF DATA - A method of and an apparatus for transmitting first data to a plurality of receiver terminals connected to a transmitter terminal through the transmitter terminal and transmitting second data to the plurality of receiver terminals through the transmitter terminal is performed according to a transmission speed determined based on at least one selected from feedback information of a receiver terminal selected based on a data loss rate of the first data and variation information of data stored in a buffer of the transmitter terminal. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044693 | Service Data Transmission Processing Method and Device and Service Data Transmission Method and Device - Provided are a service data transmission processing method and device applied to a STA of a WLAN, and a service data transmission method and device. The transmission processing method includes that service data of a designated service type required to be sent by the STA is acquired; notification information is sent to an AP of the WLAN, wherein the notification information is used for instructing the AP to preferentially allocate a wireless transmission resource for sending the service data of the designated service type. Technical problems including a delay in sending emergency burst data due to the fact that an AP fails to identify the priority of the burst data during the sending of the emergency service data are solved by means of the technical solution, thereby reducing transmission delay of the emergency service data while improving the success rate of burst transmission of the emergency service data. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044695 | PROGRAMMABLE BROADBAND GATEWAY HIERARCHICAL OUTPUT QUEUEING - An improved method of hierarchical output queueing of packets for a network scheduler of a network gateway that determines delays needed to conform to applicable rate shaping, and enqueues the packets based on the delay. Queues are associated with different classes of service (CoS), and within each class, each queue has a different scheduled time upon which it becomes available for dequeuing. A single set of CoS queues can support a large number of devices, improving the efficiency of software-based queuing by reducing the number of queues and simplifying queue polling. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160050613 | PRK-BASED SCHEDULING FOR PREDICTABLE LINK RELIABILITY - A Distributed sensing and control network includes multiple sensing/control nodes, each of which includes a controller. Each sensing/control node determines signal transmission/receipt scheduling based on a physical-ratio-k-scheduling (PRKS) protocol stored within the controller. | 02-18-2016 |
| 20160050654 | CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus includes: a control unit that controls a network in its charge, by setting control information in communication node(s) to be controlled; a policy storage unit that holds a policy or policies for selecting, from among the control information, control information to be transmitted to another control apparatus; and a control information exchange unit that transmits, to the other control apparatus, control information selected by referring to the policy. | 02-18-2016 |
| 20160050661 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION LINKS - A system and method for managing a communication link between a consumer electronic device adapted for two-way, wireless communications with at least one peripheral. The communication link is managed using a controller that is associated with the consumer electronic device that functions to assign communication slots to the peripheral to facilitate communications between the peripheral and the consumer electronic device. | 02-18-2016 |
| 20160050689 | Multiple delivery traffic indication map (DTIM) per device within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Communications are coordinated between different respective wireless communication device groups in a multiple delivery traffic indication map (DTIM) per device signaling scheme. Different respective wireless communication devices (e.g., wireless stations (STAs)) may communicate with a manager/coordinator wireless communication device (e.g., access point (AP)) at different times and for different reasons. The manager/coordinator wireless communication device generates and transmits beacons to the wireless communication devices specifying times during which communications may be supported with the manager/coordinator wireless communication device. A restricted access window (RAW) information element (IE) within a beacon includes at least one restricted access window (RAW) to specify a wireless communication device authorized to communicate with the manager/coordinator wireless communication device. Different wireless communication device groups may communicate with the manager/coordinator wireless communication device at different periodicities, and any one wireless communication device may be included in more than one wireless communication device group. | 02-18-2016 |
| 20160056871 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - A radio communication system includes a first radio base station having multiple antenna elements, and user equipment, wherein, for initial connection of the user equipment to the first radio base station, the first radio base station applies different precoding vectors to a downlink user common signal transmitted to all users located in or near a serving area of the first radio base station, and transmits the downlink user common signal while changing the applied precoding vector; wherein the user equipment selects a desired one of the precoding vectors applied to the downlink user common signal, and reports a selection result to the first radio base station, and wherein the first radio base station precodes a data signal addressed to the user equipment using the selected precoding vector and transmits the precoded data signal to the user equipment. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160056944 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING A PLURALITY OF UPLINK CARRIERS AND A PLURALITY OF DOWNLINK CARRIERS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may communicate on a primary cell and a secondary cell. A transceiver of the WTRU may receive a medium access control (MAC) message indicating activation or deactivation of the secondary cell. A processor of the WTRU may start a timer in response to the activation of the secondary cell. The WTRU may deactivate the secondary cell on a condition that the timer expires. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160056977 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DATA TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present disclosure relate to downlink/uplink data transmission in a wireless communication system. In an embodiment of the present disclosure, there is provided a method for downlink data transmission in a wireless communication system which comprises transmitting an indication for a new-type reference signal to a user equipment, wherein the new-type reference signal has an identical location in frequency domain to a legacy reference signal; and transmitting the new-type reference signal and the legacy reference signal to the user equipment for using in channel estimation. In a case of more than one antenna port, the new-type reference signal may be designed to have a different location in time domain from a legacy reference signal to avoid interference to other antenna ports. With embodiments of the present disclosure, it is possible to perform a channel estimation based on both the legacy reference signal and the new-type reference signal to achieve a higher accuracy of channel estimation, and thus a UE with a low SNR may be also used in LTE networks. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057753 | REDUCED DMRS CONFIGURATION AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVELY SELECTING DMRS CONFIGURATION - The present invention provides a reduced DMRS configuration and a method and apparatus for adaptively selecting a DMRS configuration. The method comprises: estimating channel change with respect to a target UE; and selecting one of a normal DMRS configuration or a reduced DMRS configuration for the target UE based on the estimated channel change, wherein, in the normal DMRS configuration, a DMRS symbol is assigned to each time slot, while in the reduced DMRS configuration, a DMRS symbol is assigned to each subframe. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057775 | SCHEDULING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MULTICAST BROADCAST SERVICE - Provided are a scheduling apparatus and method for a multicast broadcast service. Scheduling information is configured with at least one of information related to a location in which each multicast broadcast service, which is identified by a unique identifier within one scheduling period, starts and information related to a location in which each multicast broadcast service ends, and a scheduling block including the configured scheduling information is generated. There is an advantage that power management of user equipment is easy, and a time delay when initially entering the MBMS and a channel change time when selecting a different MBMS are reduced. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057786 | Random Access in Networks with Carrier Aggregation - A wireless device receives a control command initiating a random access process for a secondary cell. The wireless device transmits a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell. The wireless device aborts the random access process if the secondary cell is deactivated before the wireless device receives a random access response. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057806 | User Equipment, Network Node, and Methods for Managing an Extended Discontinuous Reception Cycle Mode - A method in a User Equipment, UE, for managing an extended Discontinuous Reception, DRX, cycle mode. The UE is operating in a network and is in a Radio Resource Control, RRC, connected state. The UE enters (401) the extended DRX cycle mode when a first criterion is satisfied. The first criterion relates to anyone or more out of that the UE has not been scheduled by the network during a specific time duration, that the UE has completed a predefined or configured number of long DRX cycles when being in a long DRX cycle mode, that the UE has received an order from the network to enter to the extended DRX cycle mode. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160065332 | METHOD FOR MULTI-SUBFRAME SCHEDULING AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for multiple subframe sets scheduling (hereinafter, multi-subframe scheduling) in a window of the multi-subframe scheduling (hereinafter, multi-subframe scheduling window) performed by a terminal is provided. The method includes receiving multi-subframe control information for the multi-subframe scheduling, and receiving downlink data or transmitting uplink data using the multi-subframe control information, wherein the multi-subframe control information includes a field for retransmission related to each subframe of the multiple subframe sets, and the retransmission is performed in a subframe not configured as the multiple subframe sets. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160065341 | REFERENCE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND AVERAGING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Techniques are provided for combining different types of reference signals. A wireless communications network may be configured to allow a user equipment (UE) to combine multiple demodulation reference signals (DM-RSs) to support demodulation of a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), and/or other downlink transmissions, transmitted from a base station to the UE. The base station may provide explicit signaling that reference signals transmitted in two or more transmission time intervals may be combined, or a determination that reference signals transmitted in two or more transmission time intervals may be combined may be made implicitly based on system configuration and previous transmissions. Based on the explicit signaling and/or implicit determination, a UE may combine reference signals included in each of two or more reference signals for use in demodulation of downlink transmissions. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160066290 | Cell Timing Synchronization Via Network Listening - The present disclosure is directed to a system and method for performing timing synchronization via network listening. The system and method can be implemented in a non-synchronized base station to receive Cell-Specific Reference Signals (CRSs) of a synchronized base station during guard periods of special subframes. To allow the non-synchronized base station to receive the CRSs, the non-synchronized base station can configure one or more of its special subframes to have a shorter downlink part than corresponding special subframes of the synchronized base station. The system and method of the present disclosure can use the received CRSs to synchronize the timing of the non-synchronized base station to the timing of the synchronized base station. To prevent a substantial loss in downlink throughput due to the non-synchronized base station using a shorter DwPTS part, tracking can be performed on a once per multiple radio frame basis. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160066294 | RE-SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT IN LTE/LTE-A WITH UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Management of re-synchronization procedures for long term evolution (LTE)/LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems with unlicensed spectrum is disclosed. In managing re-synchronization procedures, a base station selects and sends out an enablement indication of the uplink and/or downlink re-synchronization procedure selected. The base station may select the re-synchronization procedures by itself or in coordination with neighboring base stations. Once the indication for the uplink re-synchronization procedure is received at a user equipment (UE), the UE performs its extended clear channel assessment (ECCA) check, but, when the ECCA check is successful, the UE will delay data transmission until the next re-synchronization boundary defined by the selected uplink re-synchronization procedure. With the delayed transmission, the UE performs a clear channel assessment (CCA) check prior to the re-synchronization boundary in order to determine whether the channel is still clear for transmission after the idle period. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160066308 | HANDLING THE AMBIGUITY OF THE SENDING OF HS-SCCH ORDER IN NODE B - A method in a network node is disclosed. The method comprises receiving, from a radio network controller (RNC), a request to send a high speed signaling control channel (HS-SCCH) order to a user equipment (UE) according to one of a first or second fast Transmission Time Interval (TTI) switching mode, the HS-SCCH order indicating that the UE should perform TTI switching. The method further comprises communicating, to the RNC in response to receiving the request to send the HS-SCCH order to the UE, feedback indicating a fast TTI switching mode supported by the network node. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160066317 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSMISSION OF DEVICE-TO-DEVICE USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment of the present invention, a method for transmitting Device-to-Device (D2D) data by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system, the method comprising: determining a bitmap to be applied to a subframe pool for data transmission from a subframe indicator bitmap; determining a set of subframes to transmit D2D data by using the bitmap to the subframe pool for data transmission; and transmitting D2D data in a subframe included in the determined subframe set, wherein a set of values available as k being the number of 1s in the subframe indicator bitmap are changed according to a Uplink/Downlink (UL/DL) configuration set to which a UL/DL configuration configured for the UE belongs. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160066319 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SLOT ASSIGNMENT METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus according to an embodiment includes a transceiver and a transmission slot determiner. The transceiver transmits/receives information. The transmission slot determiner determines a transmission slot in which the transceiver transmits information, from a frame time-divided into a plurality of slots, based on the rank value of self node corresponding to the number of hops to a root node. A plurality of slot groups including a plurality of continuous slots is set in the frame. The slot groups are assigned different rank values. The transmission slot determiner selects a slot group to which the rank value of self node is assigned, and determines a transmission slot from among the slots included in the selected slot group. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160073400 | MOBILE STATION, NETWORK NODE, AND METHODS FOR ASSIGNING RESOURCE BLOCKS TO THE MOBILE STATION - A method in a network node for assigning resource blocks to a Mobile Station, MS, served by the network node. The MS is capable of downlink multicarrier operation. The network node receives from the MS an indication of a maximum number of consecutive downlink timeslots that the MS is capable of receiving on a given carrier during a TTI. The network node receives, from the MS, an indication of a maximum number of resource blocks that the MS is capable of processing during a TTI. The network node receives, from the MS, an indication of a maximum number of carriers supported by the MS. The network node assigns resource blocks to the MS, based on the received indication of a maximum number of consecutive downlink TS, the received indication of a maximum number of resource blocks and the received indication of a maximum number of carriers. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160073401 | Component Carrier Configuration - A method of configuring a component carrier comprises determining how timings of receiving and/or sending data for at least two aggregated component carriers in at least one time period are related; and setting the timing of receiving and/or sending data for the at least two aggregated component carriers based on the determining. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160073402 | Method and Apparatus for Dynamic control of TTI Bundling Sizes - In an example of the teachings disclosed herein, there are multiple signaling options available for triggering a bundled transmission by a wireless device, and a known association between the different signaling options and different TTI bundling sizes. A network node thus indicates to the wireless device which TTI bundling size is desired, based on choosing which signaling option it uses to trigger the bundled transmission. Such signaling allows for the use of variable TTI bundle sizes, i.e., dynamic control of the TTI bundle size used by the wireless device for transmission and yet does not impose signaling overhead or necessarily require new signaling messages or types. Higher layer signaling may be used to activate TTI bundling with implicit signaling then used to dynamically control the actual TTI bundle size used. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160073426 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DECOUPLING LONG TERM EVOLUTION MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL SCHEDULING FROM SUBFRAME RATE PROCEDURES - A method is provided in one example embodiment and may include receiving data associated with a user equipment (UE) at a central baseband unit; determining one or more block time scheduling decisions for a plurality of subframes associated with the data; communicating the data to a remote radio unit; communicating the one or more block time scheduling decisions to the remote radio unit; and communicating the data to the UE from the remote radio unit based, at least in part, on the one or more block time scheduling decisions. In some cases, the method can include communicating the one or more block time scheduling decisions to the remote radio unit at a first rate and communicating the data to the remote radio unit at a second rate. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160081076 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a communication method to solve a problem of a failure in data receiving that arises. The method includes: sending, by a first base station, first data to UE according to first data allocation information that is determined according to a radio access capability of the UE; and sending, by a second base station according to second data allocation information that is determined by the first base station according to the radio access capability of the UE, second data to the UE; where the first base station performs carrier aggregation with the second base station, and a total amount of data that is sent by the first base station and the second base station to the UE in a same TTI does not exceed a total amount of data that can be received according to the radio access capability of the UE. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160081080 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, METHOD, AND PROCESSOR OF THE SAME - In a mobile station that performs communication with a base station device via a plurality of cells, the plurality of cells are grouped into a first group constituted by cells having an uplink transmission timing that is the same as that of one primary cell and a second group constituted by one or more cells having an uplink transmission timing that is different from that of the primary cell. The uplink transmission timings are each managed using a corresponding transmission timing timer for each of the groups. In a case where a transmission timing timer for the first group has expired, the mobile station stops all uplink transmissions in the plurality of cells. In a case where a transmission timing timer for the second group has expired, the mobile station stops uplink transmissions in the cells constituting the second group for which the transmission timing timer has expired. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160081085 | METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING HIDDEN NODE PROBLEM IN WLAN SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for alleviating a hidden node problem in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. A method for detecting a hidden node comprises the steps of: configuring a first restricted access interval used for a plurality of terminals transmitting a hidden node detection frame; configuring a second restricted access interval used for a plurality of terminals transmitting a hidden node report frame generated on the basis of an HND frame; generating a beacon including configuration information of the first restricted access interval and configuration information of the second restricted access interval; and transmitting the generated beacon. Accordingly, a terminal in a hidden node relation can be detected. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160081110 | TERMINAL DEVICE, INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal device sets a first UL-DL configuration, sets a subframe for monitoring a physical downlink control channel accompanied with information indicating a second UL-DL configuration, monitors the physical control channel accompanied with information indicating the second UL-DL configuration in the set subframe during an active time based on a first subframe set as a downlink subframe or a subframe including a DwPTS based on the first UL-DL configuration, and monitors a physical downlink control channel accompanied with a C-RNTI in a second subframe set as a downlink subframe or a subframe including the DwPTS based on the second UL-DL configuration during the active time. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160081117 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA - A communications system including infrastructure equipment providing a wireless interface to a communications device including a controller and a transceiver configured to transmit/receive signals representing the data to/from the infrastructure equipment over the wireless interface. The transceiver can transmit a request for services message to the infrastructure equipment, and receive a response message. The request for services message includes a delay period and the infrastructure equipment, in response to receiving the request for services message, processes the request to form the response message and stores the response message for transmission to the communications device. The response message is stored until expiry of the delay period or transmission of the response message, and the controller after transmission of the request for services can configure the transceiver to enter a reduced power state and to exit the reduced power state to receive the response message. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160087704 | Control Signaling in a Beamforming System - A method of control signaling in a beamforming system is proposed. A base station allocates a first sets of DL control resource blocks for DL transmission to a plurality of user equipments (UEs) in a beamforming network. Each set of DL control resource blocks is associated with a corresponding set of beamforming weights. The base station also allocates a second sets of UL control resource blocks for UL transmission from the UEs. Each set of UL control resource blocks is associated with the same corresponding set of beamforming weights. The base station transmits cell and beam identification information using a set of control beams. Each control beam comprises a set of DL control resource block, a set of UL control resource block, and the corresponding set of beamforming weights. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160087705 | Control Signaling in a Beamforming System - A method of control signaling in a beamforming system is proposed. A user equipment (UE) receives control beam transmission from a base station using a set of control beams in a beamforming network. Each control beam comprises a set of DL control resource blocks, a set of UL control resource blocks, and an associated set of beamforming weights. The UE selects a control beam for establishing a connection with the base station. The UE then performs random access with the base station using the selected control beam. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088447 | HOPPING MASTER IN WIRELESS CONFERENCE - A first radio has duplex communication with a second radio and a third radio, without using a base station by using a multiple-access protocol system. The first radio is configured to switch back and forth between being a master radio and a slave radio in the multiple-access protocol system. In some embodiments, time-division multiplexing is used as the multiple-access protocol system for the first radio, the second radio, and the third radio to communicate. In some embodiments, the master radio provides timing synchronization and/or assigns transmission slots for radios in the multiple-access protocol system. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088574 | POWER CONTROL IN ORTHOGONAL SUB-CHANNELS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus for power control in a wireless communication involves establishing at least two orthogonal sub-channels within a channel for communication and controlling transmitted power in each sub-channel independently. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088577 | TIMING VALUE ADJUSTMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a timing value adjustment method and apparatus, which relate to the communications field and reduce a probability that power of a terminal exceeds a limit. A specific solution is that: an absolute timing difference of a timing advance group TAG pair is obtained according to an absolute value of a difference between transmit timing values or receive timing values of the two TAGs in the TAG pair, where the TAG pair is formed by any two TAGs in a TAG set; and it is determined that the absolute timing difference of the TAG pair meets a predetermined condition, and first signaling is sent to a network device, where the first signaling includes identifiers of the two TAGs in the TAG pair. The present invention is used in a timing value adjustment process. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088579 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication system includes a first base station that is identified by a first cell identity, a second base station that is identified by a second cell identity, and a user device that can perform radio communication with each of the base stations. The user device detects a first transmission timing based on a first synchronization signal from the first base station and establishes synchronization with the first base station. The first base station notifies the user device of synchronization state information related to a synchronization state with the second base station and of frequency information related to an identification signal frequency that is used by the second base station to transmit an identification signal. The user device, based on the synchronization state information, performs identifying processing, on the identification signal frequency indicated by the frequency information, to identify the second cell identity indicated by the identification signal. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088596 | QUASI CO-LOCATED ANTENNA PORTS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION - Systems and methods are disclosed for estimating one or more channel properties of a downlink from a cellular communications network based on quasi co-located antenna ports with respect to the one or more channel properties. In one embodiment, a wireless device receives a downlink subframe including a downlink control channel from the cellular communications network. The wireless device estimates one or more large-scale channel properties for an antenna port of interest in the downlink control channel based on a subset of reference signals that correspond to antenna ports in the cellular communications network that are quasi co-located with the antenna port of interest with respect to the one or more large-scale channel properties. As a result of using the quasi co-located antenna ports, estimation of the one or more large-scale channel properties is substantially improved. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088604 | ULTRA-LOW LATENCY LTE DOWNLINK COMMUNICATIONS - A data structure for managing user equipment communications in a wireless communication system is presented. In some examples, the data structure may include one or more resource element blocks into which a frequency bandwidth of a downlink channel is divided within a symbol that defines a transmission time interval in a downlink subframe. Furthermore, the data structure may include a control region and a data region within at least one resource element block of the one or more resource element blocks. Additionally, the data structure may include a downlink resource grant, located within the control region, for a user equipment served by the downlink channel. In an additional aspect, a network entity and method for generating the example data structure are provided. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088619 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An autonomously dispersed type wireless network is suitably formed with communication stations avoiding collision of beacons transmitted one to another. In the event that the range of reach of airwaves change and a receivable state is created and beacons collide, a communication station changes the beacon transmission position of itself in response to receiving a beacon from another station at a timing immediately prior to transmission to its own beacon. Also, in the event that beacon collision is exposed due to emergence of a new communication which can perform reception from two systems out of airwave range of each other, the newly-participating station requests one of the communication stations of which the beacons are colliding to change the beacon transmission timing. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088621 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting data between wireless devices in a wireless communication system is provided. A first wireless device acquires downlink reception timing with a base station. The first wireless device determines transmission timing for direct communication with a second wireless device based on the downlink reception timing with the base station. The first wireless device transmits data for the direct communication to the second wireless device at the transmission timing for the direct communication. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088622 | Multicarrier Communications Employing Time Alignment Timers - A wireless device is configured with a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. When a first time alignment timer of the primary cell group expires, for a cell in the wireless device, the wireless device stops uplink transmission of HARQ feedback, uplink transport blocks, and channel state information while allowing uplink transmission of random access preamble(s). When a second time alignment timer of the secondary cell group expires and the first time alignment timer is running, for an activated cell in the secondary cell group, the wireless device stops transmission of uplink transport blocks, and continues downlink transmission of HARQ feedback and channel state information. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088634 | WIRELESS PACKET SCHEDULING FOR SATELLITE POSITIONING SYSTEM COEXISTENCE - Techniques are disclosed for managing wireless transmission duty cycle on a mobile device to mitigate interference during reception of one or more satellite-based positioning signals and transmission of one or more wireless signals, involving (1) determining a first transmission duty cycle, the first transmission duty cycle reflecting a proportion of a time duration occupied by transmission of the one or more wireless signals and (2) delaying transmission of a first wireless packet or transmitting at least one portion of the first wireless packet via the one or more wireless signals, based on a comparison of the first transmission duty cycle and a duty cycle threshold. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160088656 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND/OR METHODS FOR MANAGING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method includes transmitting a first message during a first time interval of a frame from a device. Transmission of the first message is followed by a second time interval of the frame. The method further includes transmitting a second message during the second time interval. The second message is followed by a third time interval that is shorter than the second time interval. The third time interval includes a contention-free period, a contention period, or a combination thereof. | 03-24-2016 |
| 20160094329 | Method and Apparatus for Asynchronous OFDMA/SC-FDMA - Various disclosed embodiments include methods and systems for communication in a wireless communication system. A method comprises receiving a signal corresponding to a plurality of modulated signals, each of the plurality of modulated signals corresponding to a unique electronic device. The method comprises filtering the received signal with a plurality of filters, each of which is matched to a corresponding filter in a respective electronic device to obtain a filtered signal for the respective electronic device. The method comprises performing a fast Fourier transform (FFT) operation on the filtered signal to obtain demodulated data corresponding to the respective electronic device. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160094375 | Pilot Design for Wireless System - The description herein relates to pilot designs for an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) based communication system. In at least one embodiment, the communication system is one operating according to the IEEE 802.16m, or WiMax, standard. In general, an OFDM transmitter operates to insert pilot symbols into a resource of a transmit frame according to a predetermined staggered pilot symbol pattern defining pilot symbol locations within the resource of the transmit frame. The predetermined pilot symbol pattern is defined such that pilot symbols are located at or near time boundaries of the resource, at or near frequency boundaries of the resource, or both. By doing so, when generating a channel estimate for the communication channel between the OFDM transmitter and an OFDM receiver based on the pilot symbols, extrapolations needed to estimate the channel near the boundaries of the resource are optimized, thereby improving overall channel estimation accuracy. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095076 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MTC DEVICE OPERATIONS - An eNodeB (eNB), user equipment (UE) and method for operating in enhanced coverage (EC) modes are generally described. The UE may receive one or more physical broadcast channel (PBCH) signals, dependent on whether the UE is in a normal coverage mode or in one of the EC modes. The PBCH signal may be combined to form a combined PBCH signal, when the UE is in an EC mode, and decoded to determine one of a plurality of sets of resource regions associated different EC modes for communication with the eNB. The signal may be scrambled using a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) dependent on at least one of a signal type of the control signal and the EC mode. Paging and the system information block (SIB) signals in a Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) may be decoded without decoding a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) signal associated with the PDSCH. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095094 | DOWNLINK CHANNEL DESIGN FOR LTE WITH LOW LATENCY - An example data structure for managing user equipment communications in a wireless communications system is presented, as well as methods and apparatuses configured to implement the data structure. For instance, the data structure may include a downlink subframe comprising two slots and including one or more quick downlink channels having a single-slot transmission time interval. In addition, the example data structure may include one or more resource element blocks each comprising one or more resource elements into which a frequency bandwidth is divided within one or both of the two slots, wherein each of the one or more resource element blocks comprises a control channel region or a data channel region. Furthermore, the example data structure may include one or more resource grants, located within one or more control channel regions, for one or more user equipment served by the one or more quick downlink channels. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095096 | System and Method for Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Timing for Device-to-Device Communication Overlaid on a Cellular Network - An embodiment of a system for operating a communications controller for a group of user equipments engaged in a DMC link in a wireless communications system is provided. The communications controller is configured to allocate a set of subframes in one periodic group of subframes to the group of UEs for the DMC link, signal the set of allocated subframes to the group of UEs, and transmit parameters related to a group of HARQ processes of the DMC link. In an embodiment, the communication controller uses HARQ processes for cellular UE transmission that are determined independently from HARQ processes of the group of HARQ processes for the DMC link, and the parameters are configured to enable the group of UEs to manage the group of HARQ processes for the DMC link. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095111 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING MESSAGE COLLISION - In one embodiment, the method includes performing symbol to resource element mapping such that mapping for a first message configured to use a first amount of transmission resource differs from mapping for a second message configured to use a second amount of transmission resource by a mapping offset of a number of resource units, and the first amount being different than the second amount. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095113 | RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM AND OPERATION METHOD THEREOF - Provide is a radio network system including gateways and end terminals, which includes: a time slot distributing unit configured to distribute time slots by which each of the gateways perform a radio communication, wherein the time slot distributing unit is configured to distribute the time slots such that the closer a distance between each of the gateways, a time difference between beginning points of the time slots becomes longer. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095134 | UPLINK GRANT MANAGEMENT FOR LTE IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Systems and methods for uplink transmission scheduling are disclosed. A wireless device may monitor at least two downlink sub-frames for scheduling grants. The wireless device may receive a first uplink scheduling grant in one of the at least two downlink sub-frames for at least a first uplink sub-frame and receive a second uplink scheduling grant in another of the at least two downlink sub-frames for at least the first uplink sub-frame. The wireless device may perform an uplink transmission in the first uplink sub-frame based on one or both of the first uplink scheduling grant and the second uplink scheduling grant. For the uplink transmission, the wireless device may select a most recent uplink scheduling grant or select an uplink scheduling grant received in a downlink sub-frame at least a minimum number of sub-frames before the first uplink sub-frame. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160095135 | Scheduling Method and Base Station - A scheduling method includes: enabling, by a base station, first scheduling to allocate resources to first-category UE, where the base station is configured to process data on a second component carrier of the first-category UE, and a current cell of the first-category UE is a secondary cell corresponding to the secondary component carrier; and transmitting, by the base station, data of the first-category UE over an air interface according to the allocated resources, where an enabling moment of the first scheduling is a first duration ahead of an air interface transmission moment corresponding to the first scheduling, the first duration is greater than a second duration, and the second duration is a duration ahead of an air interface transmission moment corresponding to the second scheduling compared with an enabling moment of the second scheduling. A real-time requirement in a CA scenario can be met by using the method. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160099761 | Beam Synchronization Methods for Beamforming Wireless Networks - Inter-cell coordination to avoid/minimize inter-cell interference in a beamformed mmWave network is proposed to enhance the detection probability of beam pattern indicator. A base station first obtains beacon signal transmission information of neighboring base stations. A plurality of beacon signals are transmitted over a plurality of control beams from the neighboring base stations. The base station then determines beacon signal transmission configuration by coordinating with the neighboring base stations to minimize inter-cell beacon signal interference. Each control beam is configured with a set of periodically allocated resource blocks and a set of beamforming weights. Finally, the base station transmits beacon signals based on the determined beacon signal transmission configuration over the plurality of control beams. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160099798 | MEDIUM ACCESS PROTECTION AND BANDWIDTH NEGOTIATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A first communication device transmits a first control frame to multiple second communication devices via a wireless communication medium, wherein the first control frame i) indicates to other communication devices that the wireless communication medium is reserved for a first time period, and ii) indicates that the second communication devices are requested to simultaneously transmit respective second control frames to the first communication device via the wireless communication medium, wherein the second control frames are to include information indicating to other communication devices that the wireless communication medium is reserved for a second time period that is a subset of the first time period. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100328 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF LINK ADAPTATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting information on a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) in a wireless local area network system is provided. A responding station receives a physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) from a requesting station, configures a MCS feedback (MFB) based on the PPDU, and transmits feedback information to the requesting station. If the MFB is configured as a response to a MFB request (MRQ) of the requesting station, the feedback information includes the configured MFB and a MFB type field indicating that the MFB is configured as a response to the MRQ of the requesting station. If the MFB is not configured as a response to the MRQ of the requesting station, the feedback information includes the configured MFB, a MFB type field indicating that the MFB is not configured as a response to the MRQ of the requesting station, and coding information indicating a PPDU coding type. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100395 | DOWNLINK AND UPLINK CHANNEL WITH LOW LATENCY - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques that may be used to help enable low latency communications between a user equipment (UE) and a base station (BS) using quick uplink channels that enable a reduced transmission time interval (TTI). Additionally, certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for managing communications in a wireless communication system, for example, by using enhanced downlink control channels. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100400 | BEACON BASED TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING SYNCHRONIZATION FOR MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY COEXISTENCE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for beacon based time division multiplexing (TDM) synchronization for multiple radio access technology (RAT) coexistence. In some aspects, TDM time slots corresponding to a plurality of RATs for wireless communication among a plurality of devices may be identified, and the TDM time slots may be synchronized based at least in part on a timing beacon associated with a first of the plurality of RATs. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100410 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RANK ADAPTATION - One of the embodiments of the present invention relates to a method for rank adaptation at a base station. The method comprises performing, during a rank sounding time interval, data transmission for a user equipment by using a sounding rank. The sounding rank is different from a transmission rank that is used in a transmission time interval immediately prior to the rank sounding time interval. The method further comprises determining whether spectrum efficiency for the user equipment under the condition of using the sounding rank is better than spectrum efficiency under the condition of using the transmission rank; and adjusting, in response to a positive result obtained from the determining step, the transmission rank to the sounding rank so as to be used during a transmission time interval immediately next to the rank sounding time interval. The present invention also relates to corresponding base station device. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100412 | INTERFERENCE RECOGNITION BASED D2D RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Disclosed herein is an interference recognition-based D2D resource allocation method that uses a base station in a cellular system which includes the base station, a plurality of cellular terminals being in a cell that the base station covers, and a plurality of D2D terminals, including: receiving information of a resource block of a least interference amount that a D2D receiving terminal obtains through resource search and information of search time of the resource search from the D2D receiving terminal; obtaining information of a cellular terminal corresponding to the received resource block and the search time among the plurality of cellular terminals from resource scheduling information storing allocation information of the resource block depending on time per each cellular terminal; and simultaneously allocating frequency resource of the cellular terminal to the D2D receiving terminal and a D2D transmitting terminal by using resource scheduling information corresponding to the obtained cellular terminal. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100418 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING RELEASE OF SIMULTANEOUS COMMUNICATION WITH MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A network node includes a communication interfacing unit and a processor. The processor operable to perform operations includes controlling the communication interfacing unit to establish at least one second RB with a secondary cell group (SCG) bearer type between the communication device and an auxiliary network node; and releasing one of the at least one second RB under a condition that, for a first time period, all of downlink data in at least one downlink buffer corresponding to the one of the at least one second RB is successfully transmitted or the at least one downlink buffer corresponding to the one of the at least one second RB is empty, and the auxiliary network node does not receive any request for an uplink grant allocation. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100421 | UPLINK DATA FRAGMENTATION FOR MULTI-USER NETWORKS - An apparatus for wireless communication includes data generation logic configured to generate data to be transmitted to an access point and to determine that a size of the data exceeds a size of a first transmit opportunity (TX_OP). The apparatus includes data fragmentation logic configured to generate at least a first data fragment and a second data fragment based on the data, where a size of the first data fragment is selected based on the size of the first TX_OP. The apparatus further includes a wireless interface configured to transmit, during the first TX_OP, a first data packet to the access point, the first data packet including the first data fragments. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100427 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMAL BEAMFORMING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Aspects of a method and system for optimal beamforming in a wireless network are presented. Aspects of the system may include one or more processors for use in a requesting communication device wherein the one or more processors may be operable to request a transmission time slot allocation. A determination may be made by a coordinating communication device as whether to assign a sector transmission time slot and/or beamforming transmission time slot to the requesting communication device based on the transmission time slot allocation request. The one or more processors may be operable to receive the assigned sector transmission time slot and/or beamforming transmission time slot. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160100432 | Managing Sounding Reference Signals in a Wireless Device - A wireless device receives a control message comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells grouped into a plurality of cell groups. The wireless device transmits a first sounding reference signal (SRS) in a first cell group overlapping in time with transmission of a first random access preamble in a second cell group. Transmission of a second SRS in the first cell group is dropped if: the second SRS transmission and a second random access preamble transmission in the second cell group overlap in time and the wireless device has insufficient transmission power. | 04-07-2016 |
| 20160105268 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION, USER EQUIPMENT, METHOD FOR RECEIVING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION, AND BASE STATION - A method for transmitting an uplink signal by a user equipment in a wireless communication system; the user equipment; a method for receiving an uplink signal by a base station in a wireless communication system; and the base station are discussed. The method for transmitting an uplink signal includes, according to one embodiment, receiving, by the user equipment, an enhanced physical downlink control channel (EPDCCH); receiving, by the user equipment, a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) based on the EPDCCH; and transmitting acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) information corresponding to the PDSCH using a PUCCH resource. The PUCCH resource is determined based on an index of an EPDCCH allocation unit included in the EPDCCH and on an index of an antenna port used for the EPDCCH. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105862 | Synchronization for Low Coverage Machine Type Communication Devices - A method of fast synchronization for low coverage machine type communication (MTC) devices is proposed. A machine-specific synchronization signal “mSYNC” with higher density in time and frequency is transmitted from each base station for fast timing and frequency acquisition and tracking. The mSYNC has a relatively longer periodicity (i.e., >>5 ms) to reduce overhead and inter-cell interference. The higher time-frequency density of mSYNC is designed to improve latency and power consumption by allowing the machine to wake up just before the scheduled mSYNC transmission time and to re-synchronize or track synchronization with the network without the need for long averaging time. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105871 | ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION OF SMALL CELL NETWORK DATA RESOURCE USING COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL - The present disclosure relates to a wireless communication system. The present disclosure relates to a wireless communication system supporting at least one of SC-FDMA, MC-FDMA and OFDMA, and more particularly, to a method for transmitting a reference signal in a wireless communication system. The present disclosure proposes a method for selecting, from common reference signals, a reference signal in a downlink data region and assigning the selected reference signal to a scheduling channel of the downlink data for data transfer, further proposes a method for selecting some common reference signals and diverting them to demodulation reference signals, and thereby promotes a reduction of the system overhead and an increase of data transmission capacity. Moreover, the present disclosure proposes preventing malfunction of the legacy terminals with a method for transmitting and receiving related information between terminals and base stations. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105887 | Method of Managing Data Transmission for Wireless System - A method of managing data transmission for a receiving terminal of a first wireless system wherein the first wireless system coexists with at least one second wireless system includes receiving a transmission schedule of each of the at least one second wireless system; determining a usable time period for the first wireless system according to the transmission schedule of each of the at least one second wireless system; and sending a clear to send (CTS) to self signal or a power saving signal to indicate an interruption of the usable time period according to a length of the usable time period. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105890 | CONCEPT FOR TRANSMITTING AND/OR RECEIVING DATA PACKETS FOR A SYSTEM FOR DETECTING AN EVENT, CORRESPONDING TO AN OBJECT CROSSING OVER A MONITORED LINE - Embodiments relate to a transmitter and/or a receiver for a system for detecting an event which is triggered by an object crossing a monitored line. The transmitter is configured to successively transmit data packets independently of an occurrence of the event. The receiver is configured to receive successive data packets independently of the occurrence of the event. Each data packet comprises information on a number of events which occurred up to a transmission time of the data packet, wherein the transmission times of successive data packets are each located in a predetermined transmission time period. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105906 | OVERLAYING RECEIVE SCHEDULES FOR ENERGY-CONSTRAINED DEVICES IN CHANNEL-HOPPING NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a time at which a first device in a frequency-hopping communication network is expected to transmit a data message is determined. A first schedule is then generated based on the determined time, and the first schedule is overlaid on a frequency-hopping schedule for a second device in the network. The first schedule defines a first timeslot during which the second device listens for the data message, while the frequency-hopping schedule defines second timeslots during which the second device listens for data messages from other devices in the network. Notably, a duration of the first timeslot is greater than respective durations of the second timeslots. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105907 | Device and Method of Handling Service in Unlicensed Cell - A communication device for receiving a service in an unlicensed cell comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise receiving information of a resource pool in the unlicensed cell from a network; detecting a first starting point of a first service in the resource pool; and receiving the first service according to the first starting point, after the first starting point is detected. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160112892 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION PROCEDURE FOR ENHANCED COMPONENT CARRIERS - Techniques are provided for transmitting reference signals and CSI reports within a wireless communications system using variable length downlink or uplink transmission time intervals (TTIs). CSI reference signals and CSI reports may be transmitted at times that accommodate the variable length TTIs. A UE may receive signaling that indicates when a CSI reference signal is to be transmitted, and when a CSI report is to be transmitted to a base station. CSI reporting may be performed periodically using a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) in designated uplink symbols, may be aperiodic using a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), or a combination thereof. A UE may receive signaling indicating periodic CSI reporting, aperiodic CSI reporting, or both. Such signaling may be received, for example, via radio resource control (RRC) signaling or within a downlink or uplink grant. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160112979 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - [Object] To simplify the operation of a terminal device for performing D2D communication in which the same communication scheme as the communication scheme of cellular communication is adopted. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160113008 | TRANSMISSION PREEMPTION FOR ENHANCED COMPONENT CARRIERS - Techniques are described for preempting resource allocations to one or more UEs in the event that delay sensitive data is received. A resource allocation of a number of symbols may be granted to a first user equipment (UE) for first associated data to be transmitted. Subsequently, data may be received for a second UE that is more delay sensitive than the first data. The resource allocation to the first UE may be preempted, and resources allocated to the second UE for the second data within a variable length transmission time interval (TTI) of the resource allocation to the first UE. UEs may monitor for preemption during transmissions to other UEs in order to receive new resource grants associated with the preempted resource grant. Whether a UE monitors transmissions for preemption may be determined based on a quality or service (QoS) of the UE. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160113011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CHANNEL SHARING AMONG WHITE SPACE NETWORKS - A method and an apparatus for providing channel sharing are disclosed. For example, the method receives a request for a white space channel assignment, and identifies one or more white space channels in accordance with the request. The method sends a response to the request comprising a white space channel assignment, wherein the white space channel assignment assigns one of the identified one or more white space channels. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160113028 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING RADIO RESOURCES - A method for allocating resource blocks of a transmission frame on a cellular network. The cellular network includes a cluster of antennas and a master unit of the cluster. Each antenna of each cluster is configured to provide radio coverage over a corresponding cell to exchange data with corresponding user equipment in communication with the antenna. During the transmission frame the antennas of the cluster are configured to be selectively activated and muted according to a plurality of cluster muting conditions. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160113031 | PREDICTIVE SCHEDULING FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - For controlling radio transmission in a cellular network, a network node detects data traffic between the cellular network and a user equipment. The detected data traffic is based on a transport protocol which involves transmission of an acknowledgement to acknowledge successful reception of data by the user equipment. The network node estimates a time at which sending of an future acknowledgement by the user equipment is expected. On the basis of the estimated time, the network node allocates UL radio resources to the user equipment. By sending an uplink grant, the network node may indicate the allocated uplink radio resources to the user equipment. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160119455 | WIRELESS DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR FRAGMENTATION AND AGGREGATION WITH BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT IN A WIRELESS LOCAL-AREA NETWORK - Wireless devices, methods, and computer readable media for fragmentation and aggregation with block acknowledgement in a wireless local-area network. A wireless communication device for fragmentation may include circuitry configured to fragment a media access control (MAC) service data unit (MSDU) into a plurality of MAC protocol data units (MPDU). The circuitry may be configured to set a sequence number field of each of the MPDUs of the plurality of MPDUs, where the sequence number indicates the relative position of the MPDU in a transmission stream of MPDUs, and set a position indication field of each of the MPDUs of the plurality of MPDUs to indicate a position of each MPDU in the plurality of MPDUs. The position indication field may indicate whether each MPDU is a start, a middle, or a last MPDU. The circuitry may be configured to aggregate MSDUs and fragments of MSDUs. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119900 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING INFORMATION BY MTC DEVICE LOCATED IN CELL COVERAGE-EXPANDED AREA - According to one discourse of the present specification, a method for receiving information by a machine type communication (MTC) device is provided. The method of receiving the information may comprise the steps of: monitoring cell-specific control information within a common search space; and monitoring MTC device-specific control information within a UE-specific search space. Here, a resource region in which the common search space (CSS) is located and a resource region in which the UE-specific search space (USS) is located may be configured not to overlap each other. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119917 | SCHEDULING DOWNLINK TIME SLOTS IN A HIGH SPEED DATA NETWORK - In a method of wireless communication, a base station receives, from a network device, a periodic interference measurement report corresponding to each of a plurality of downlink time slots within a subframe. The base station also receives a serving cell signal quality reported from a user equipment (UE). The base station schedules a number of downlink time slots for transmission by the UE based at least in part on the received interference measurement reports and the received serving cell signal quality and/or or if high priority IRAT neighbors are configured. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119920 | DYNAMIC UPLINK/DOWNLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR ENHANCED COMPONENT CARRIERS - Various aspects described herein relate to communicating using dynamic uplink and downlink transmission time interval (TTI) switching in a wireless network. A notification can be received from a network entity of switching a configurable TTI from downlink communications to uplink communications. The configurable TTI can be one of a plurality of TTIs in a frame structure that allows dynamic switching of configurable TTIs between downlink and uplink communications within a frame. Additionally, uplink communications can be transmitted to the network entity during the configurable TTI based at least in part on the notification. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119922 | Device and Method of Handling Resource Availability of Unlicensed Band - A communication device for handling resource availability of an unlicensed band comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise determining that a first time period of a first cell of an unlicensed band is occupied according to a listen-before-talk (LBT) operation; and transmitting a message via a second cell to a network to notify that the first cell is occupied. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119942 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ALIGNING MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method is described. The method includes determining channel quality report timing for a first radio access technology (RAT). The method also includes aligning scan timing for a second RAT with the channel quality report timing of the first RAT. The method further includes sending a first channel quality report to a base station that indicates lower-rank multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) is available for the first RAT when the second RAT performs a scan. The method additionally includes sending a second channel quality report to the base station that indicates higher-rank MIMO is available upon completion of the scan. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119950 | CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of apparatus for channel access in a wireless local area network is provided. A station receives a channel access control message including group indication information indicating a group of stations allowed to access a channel from an access point. The station attempts contention for accessing the channel if the station belongs to the group indicated by the group indication information. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119952 | Method and Network Node for Coordination of Channel Resources Between Transmissions - The present disclosure provides a method ( | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119955 | MAINTAINING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a method for maintaining a communication between a mobile terminal and a network in a mobile communication system includes: determining whether a state of the mobile terminal is in an unsynchronized state while maintaining a radio resource control (RRC) connected state with the network; performing a random access channel (RACH) procedure for a synchronized state if it is determined that the state of the mobile terminal is in the unsynchronized state while maintaining the RRC connected state with the network; and after performing the RACH procedure, transitioning from the synchronized state to the unsynchronized state with the network while maintaining the RRC connected state with the network when a timer expires. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160119958 | RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL WITH A GRID OF BEAMS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for random access channel (RACH) with a grid of beams for communication systems are provided. One method includes transmitting, by a base station, a beacon signal in one time slot with multiple switched beams, wherein the beams cover an intended coverage area with a grid-of-beams in both horizontal and vertical directions. The method may also comprise switching receiving beams in the grid-of-beams at a network reserved random access channel (RACH) slot by following an identical or directly related beam switching pattern in a downlink (DL) beacon channel. Another method includes detecting, by a user equipment, a beam ID in the downlink beacon channel, selecting the RACH slot using the detected beam ID, and transmitting, by the user equipment, a random access channel (RACH) signature in one or multiple beam blocks within a random access channel (RACH) slot. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160128028 | TWO-STAGE PDCCH WITH DCI FLAG AND DCI FORMAT SIZE INDICATOR - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication employing two-stage control channel messaging. Systems, methods, and apparatuses for two stage two-stage physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) with a downlink control information (DCI) flag and DCI format size indicator are described. For instance, the present disclosure presents an example method of wireless communication at a wireless device, which may include receiving, at a first bandwidth and during a transmission time interval (TTI), a first control channel message. In addition, the example method may include determining, based on a flag in the first control channel message, whether a second control channel message is present in the TTI. Furthermore, the example method may include receiving, at a second bandwidth, the second control channel message where the flag indicates that the second control channel message is present for the TTI. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128030 | NEW CARRIER TYPE ALLOCATION IN UPLINK/DOWNLINK SUBFRAME CONFIGURATION FOR TIME DIVISION COMMUNICATION - Certain embodiments relate to wireless communication systems, such as long term evolution advanced (LTE-A), which may be part of third generation partnership project (3GPP) LTE release 12 (Rel-12). More specifically, certain embodiments may provide an arrangement related to new carrier type for time division long term evolution (TD-LTE), which may also be related to Enhanced Interference Management and Traffic Adaptation. According to certain embodiments, a method can include determining that a split configuration is to be followed, in which at least one system information block configured up-link subframe is reconfigured as a new carrier type downlink subframe, whereas at least one other system information block configured subframe is as indicated by system information block configuration. The method can also include applying the determined split configuration to communications with an access point. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128036 | SIGNALING PROCESSING METHOD, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a signaling processing method. The method includes: in a downlink subframe set, generating a downlink assignment index (DAI) respectively for a downlink subframe that has a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) to be sent, where a value of the DAI is generated according to a preset rule and a sequence of carrier first and then subframe; and sending the PDCCH to the user equipment, where the PDCCH carries the DAI. According to the embodiments of the present invention, a transmission delay is shortened and transmission efficiency is improved. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128059 | Methods And Systems For Communication Management - Methods and systems for communication management are disclosed. Services and/or clients in a system can specify or determine timeout parameters in communication requests. A timeout parameter can be a time allocated to process a request and/or fulfill a task associated with a request. Tasks can be delegated to other devices or services, and the tasks can be sent with additional timeout parameters based on the first timeout parameter. A notification can be sent when a time to process a request or fulfill a task is predicted to exceed one or more of the timeout parameters. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128060 | HIGH RELIABILITY LOW LATENCY MISSION CRITICAL COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods for communicating mission-critical (MiCri) data in a network including a base station and user equipment (UE) are provided. The methods may include receiving a request message requesting MiCri data, and transmitting the MiCri data during a transmission time interval (TTI) of a first carrier component or during a transmission time interval (TTI) of a second carrier component. In various aspects, the TTI of the first carrier component may be staggered in time with respect to the TTI of the second carrier component. In another aspect, the UE may pre-report interference pattern information for a nominal TTI for use in communication of MiCri data. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128061 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes an access point and at least one station, wherein when the access point operates in a setup mode, both the access point and station confirm a specific time slot for transmitting a packet from the station to the access point; and when the access point operates in a data mode following the setup mode, the station directly uses the specific time slot determined in the setup mode to transmit the packet to the access point. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128062 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes an access point and at least one station, wherein when the access point operates in a setup mode, both the access point and station confirm a specific time slot for transmitting a packet from the station to the access point; and when the access point operates in a data mode following the setup mode, the station directly uses the specific time slot determined in the setup mode to transmit the packet to the access point. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128063 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORK COMMUNICATION - A general wireless mesh network of communication devices with packet message transmission, especially for telemetry and automation, includes at least a single control communication device and a set of slave communication devices. The control communication device searches in the network and assigns a virtual routing number to each slave communication device. The virtual routing number reflects a distance of the slave communication device from the control communication device, expressed by the number of routings, and is stored in the slave communication device. The slave communication device, for further routing of packets in the mesh network, uses time slots assigned according to the difference between said virtual routing number and the virtual routing number of the sender of a received packet. Packet routing is based on successive flooding of the virtual routing structure and time division multiplexing. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128076 | Triggering of Transmission Time Interval Bundling Based on Frequency Selective Channel Quality Information in a Radio Communication System - There is provided a method and corresponding network node for handling TTI bundling in a radio communication system. The method comprises the steps of obtaining (S | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128080 | LAA-LTE COMMUNICATION IN AN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - A method includes transmitting, at an access point configured to transmit data over an unlicensed band, a single message prior to transmitting data over a channel of the unlicensed band. The method further includes receiving, at the access point, a plurality of responses from a plurality of user equipment acknowledging the single message in response to the single message. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128095 | VARIABLE LENGTH TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVALS (TTI) - Methods, systems, and apparatuses for enabling and utilizing variable length transmission time intervals (TTI) are described. Latency for communications between base stations and user equipment (UEs) may be reduced by flexibly and dynamically adapting to data traffic needs. TTI for a given UE may be dynamically adjusted according to UE or system requirements and the configuration of uplink and downlink TTI. A base station may utilize dynamic grants to schedule resources within a system. A UE may receive a grant in a first portion of a variable TTI. The UE may determine a duration of the variable TTI based on the grant, and the UE may communicate accordingly. The UE may receive a subsequent grant in the variable TTI—either in the first portion or another portion—and may respond or alter its operation accordingly. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128097 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING SCHEDULING PERIODS BASED ON INFORMATION ABOUT THE MODE OF OPERATION - According to an example implementation, a method includes: receiving, at an apparatus, information from a node, said information defining a mode of operation for communicating scheduling information; and configuring transmission and reception periods of scheduling information at said apparatus in dependence on the mode of operation. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160128131 | DRX OPERATION FOR UL/DL RECONFIGURATION - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for identifying subframes in a radio frame on which a UE may receive a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) or enhanced PDCCH (ePDCCH) transmission. Specifically, the UE may receive multiple indications of uplink/downlink (UL/DL) subframe configurations and identify one or more subframes in which the UE may receive the PDCCH or ePDCCH transmission. The UE may then monitor one or more of the identified subframes and base discontinuous reception (DRX) timer functionality on one or more of the identified subframes. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160135121 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - [Object] To simplify the operation of a terminal device for performing D2D communication in which the same communication scheme as the communication scheme of cellular communication is adopted. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160135136 | Joint Position Detection by Sensor Devices - A method of joint position detection by a plurality of known location sensor devices is proposed in an indoor wireless local area network. A tag can query the sensors by sending a request. Timestamps of the query signal are recorded by the sensors. A known location designated sensor responds to the request and triggers a process to correct the clock offsets of other sensors. The timestamps are then corrected based on the clock offsets. The corrected timestamps are then sent to a position processor for determining the tag location. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160135145 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD RELATING TO A RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - A method in a wireless terminal of a telecommunications system comprises the steps of using an enhanced physical downlink control channel to receive a downlink assignment of one or more downlink messages relating to a random access procedure, prior to an enhanced physical downlink control channel being formally configured for use with the wireless terminal. A corresponding method in a network node of a telecommunications system comprises the steps of transmitting a downlink assignment of one or more downlink messages relating to a random access procedure to a wireless terminal using an enhanced physical downlink control channel, ePDCCH, prior to the enhanced physical downlink control channel being formally configured for use with the wireless terminal. This has the advantage of relieving a PDCCH bottleneck of the telecommunications system. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160135170 | PUCCH FOR MTC DEVICES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication at a device. A wireless device may be configured with a transmission time interval (TTI) bundling parameter. The device may then identify one or more resources for an uplink (UL) control channel based on the TTI bundling parameter (e.g., using either an implicit or an explicit indication from another wireless node such as a serving cell of a base station) and transmit the UL control channel using the identified resources. The device may also identify a downlink control information (DCI) format based on the TTI bundling parameter. For example, a resource allocation granularity level may be associated with the bundling parameter, and the length of a DCI field may depend on the resource allocation granularity level. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160135182 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is a base station of a mobile communication system configuring at least one low latency transmission time interval (TTI) within a length of at least one transmission symbol in a subframe including a plurality of transmission symbols and transmitting LL (low latency) TTI related information using a physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) transmitted at a pre-defined transmission symbol position within the subframe. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160135183 | MULTIMODE USER EQUIPMENT ACCESSING WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A method, an apparatus and a computer-readable storage medium for accessing a wireless sensor network with a multimode user equipment. The method includes a user equipment receiving broadcasted wireless sensor network information; requesting access information for the wireless sensor network from a base station of a mobile data network; receiving the access information from the base station; and accessing the wireless sensor network using said access information. | 05-12-2016 |
| 20160142920 | SHARING CHANNELS IN A LICENSED-ASSISTED ACCESS IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION OPERATION - A channel sharing method includes determining a starting time for transmission on an LAA-LTE channel. A length of a hybrid preamble is determined based on the starting time and a predetermined transmission time boundary. Subsequent to determining the length of the hybrid preamble, the hybrid preamble having the determined length is transmitted. Subsequent to the hybrid preamble, a Long Term Evolution (LTE) signal is transmitted. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160142980 | FRAME TRANSMITTING METHOD - A method of transmitting a frame is provided by a first device belonging to a first BSS in a wireless communication network. The first device determines whether an RTS frame or a CTS frame is received from a second BSS that is a neighbor BSS of the first BSS. When the RTS frame or the CTS frame is received from the second BSS, the first device transmits to a second device a transmission frame whose transmission power is changed from a normal power during a predetermined time within a data frame transmission time and an ACK frame transmission time of the second BSS. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160143008 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN LOW LATENCY MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a method and apparatus for transmitting information in a low latency mobile communication system. Delay time requests are obtained from terminals, and time intervals for transmitting control information for the respective terminals are determined on the basis of the delay time requests. Control information is transmitted to the respective terminals according to the determined time intervals. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160143031 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING SHORT DATA DURING AN ACTIVE TDMA CALL - A mobile radio (MR) transmits short data during an active time division multiple access (TDMA) call in a wireless communication system. The mobile radio receives first communication media (CM) of the active call in a first slot of a first outbound TDMA logical channel (FLC) of an outbound traffic frequency having a slotting ratio n>=2. The MR transmits short data during at least a portion of a second slot of the FLC, pending short data on an inbound logical data channel of an inbound traffic frequency. The MR then receives second CM of the active call in a third slot of the FLC, and receives missed CM of the active call without specifically identifying the missed CM in any request for re-transmission of missed CM, in a first slot of a second outbound TDMA logical channel of the outbound traffic frequency. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160143048 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND APPARATUS THEREFOR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING RECONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS RESOURCE - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for receiving a signal from a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting reconfiguration of a wireless resource. Specifically, the present invention comprises the method for receiving, during a reconfiguration period, a plurality of reconfiguration messages from a subframe at a location indicated by means of upper layer signaling, wherein the plurality of reconfiguration messages indicate the same uplink-downlink configuration within the reconfiguration period. | 05-19-2016 |
| 20160149660 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting, by a terminal, a synchronization signal for direct communication between terminals in a wireless communication system. In detail, the method comprises the steps of: generating a primary synchronization signal and a secondary synchronization signal for the direct communication between terminals; and transmitting the primary synchronization signal and the secondary synchronization signal, wherein the primary synchronization signal is generated on the basis of a synchronization reference cell identifier for the direct communication between terminals. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150492 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - In embodiments of the present invention, first user equipment acquires reference time, a first timing advance, and a data frame configuration, where the first timing advance represents a timing advance for the first user equipment to receive a first receiving subframe that is in the data frame configuration, and the first receiving subframe is sent by second user equipment; and the first user equipment determines, according to the reference time, the first timing advance, and the data frame configuration, time for receiving the first receiving subframe. Therefore, time when first UE receives a first receiving subframe sent by second UE is adjusted by using a first timing advance, so that the first UE has more accurate timing of a data frame, and interference among symbols can be avoided. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150532 | UL/DL WAVEFORM AND NUMEROLOGY DESIGN FOR LOW LATENCY COMMUNICATION - Methods, systems, and devices for wireless communication are described. In some examples, a wireless system may use a staggered uplink/downlink (UL/DL) format in which the symbol periods of the downlink are offset from the symbol periods of the uplink. Thus, if a user equipment (UE) receives a transmission in a first symbol period, it may decode the transmission and transmit a response in a staggered symbol period (e.g., in a UL control channel symbol period beginning one half of a symbol period after the first symbol period). A base station may then receive the response and, if it is a negative acknowledgement (NACK), retransmit during the third symbol period following the first symbol period. In another example, thin control channels may be used to reduce the round trip time between receiving a transmission and a retransmission. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150538 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID GROUP SYNCHRONIZATION - A first device of a network may decide to transmit a flood of packets that is longer in duration than the maximum amount of time that the first device can continuously transmit. The first device may coordinate with one or more second devices of the network such that each of the one or more second devices transmits a respective second portion of the flood of packets following transmission of a first portion of the flood of packets by the first network device. The packets may advertise a pending network event that is to occur at a time indicated by the contents of the packets. The first device may select the one or more second devices from a plurality of devices based on a location of the one or more second devices and/or how many third devices are in the network. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150553 | METHOD FOR MANAGING PERIODIC PACKETS, SERVER AND NETWORK EQUIPMENT - A method for managing periodic packets, a server and a network equipment are provided. The method includes the steps of receiving at least one transmission parameter of a plurality of periodic packets, determining at least one time sequence for rearranging and transmitting the periodic packets according to the at least one transmission parameter, transmitting the at least one time sequence, and receiving and disassembling the periodic packets already rearranged and transmitted according to the at least one time sequence. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160156435 | Feedback in a Communication System | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160156436 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROCESSES PER TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160156441 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL FROM DEVICE-TO-DEVICE TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160157196 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SYNCHRONIZATION BETWEEN BASE STATIONS | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160157227 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ADAPTING GUARD TIME BASED ON TIMING ADVANCE | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160157266 | STA Initiated Uplink Aggregation in Wireless Communication Systems | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160164643 | DYNAMIC SCHEDULING FOR SUBFRAME BUNDLING - The present invention relates to transmitting data on a shared communication channel in a communication system supporting multiple hybrid automatic repeat request processes and configurable to apply a bundling of transmission time intervals. The data transmitting including mapping of TTIs of the HARQ processes cyclically onto subframes. In order to efficiently support dynamic bundle scheduling, when a grant is received during a bundle transmission, this grant becomes a shifting grant, according to which the bundle is transmitted and according to the location of which the timing of the grant reception and the data transmission is adapted. The transmission of the shifted bundle is performed in accordance with the state of its retransmission process, i.e. the bundle is either initially transmitted or retransmitted. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160164655 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FRAME ACKNOWLEDGMENT - A method for frame acknowledgement, comprising bearing a delayed acknowledgement instruction into a data frame; the delayed acknowledgement instruction configured to instruct a return acknowledge response when it has free physical resources; and transmitting the data frame having the delayed acknowledgement instruction attached thereto. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165482 | TRAINING FIELD TONE PLANS FOR MIXED-RATE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of wirelessly communicating a packet can include generating, at a wireless device, a packet including a training field based on a training field tone plan. The method further includes populating training tones in the training field tone plan by duplicating tone positions from a base training field one or more times, and adding one or more additional sub-band direct current (DC) tones or edge tones. The method further includes transmitting the packet. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165598 | WIRELESS DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (OFDMA) ALLOCATIONS BASED ON A BASIC TONE RESOURCE UNIT OR ENTIRE SUB-CHANNEL - Wireless devices, methods, and computer readable media are disclosed. A high-efficiency wireless local-area network (HEW) master station is disclosed. The HEW master station may include circuitry. The circuitry may be configured to generate one or more resource allocations of a bandwidth for one or more HEW stations. Each resource allocation for a first portion of the bandwidth may be a multiple of a basic resource allocation or the entire first portion of the bandwidth. There may be only one resource allocation for a second portion of the bandwidth that is at least as large as the first portion of the bandwidth. In some embodiments, each resource allocation for the second portion of the bandwidth may be a multiple of the basic resource allocation or the entire second portion of the bandwidth. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165600 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING MESSAGE - Disclosed herein is a method and an electronic device. The electronic device may include a display and a transmission/reception module, and at least one processor. The processor may implemented the method, including receiving a first message and a second message to be transmitted to an external electronic device, generating, by at least one processor, a combined message including both the first message and the second message, and transmitting, by a transmission/reception module, the combined message to the external electronic device. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165603 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RECEPTION DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - A communication device comprising at least a receiver and a demodulator. The receiver receives first receiving signals and second receiving signals, wherein the first receiving signals are allocated to a first set of subcarriers composed of two or more continuous subcarriers, the second receiving signals are allocated to a second set of subcarriers composed of two or more continuous subcarriers, and at least a portion of the second set of subcarriers overlaps a portion of the first set of subcarriers in a time frame. The demodulator configured to detect the second receiving signals transmitted using one or more subcarriers from receiving signals including the first receiving signals and the second receiving signals, wherein the one or more subcarriers are subcarriers such that the first set of subcarriers overlap the second set of subcarriers, and the demodulator being demodulates the first receiving signals. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165618 | TECHNIQUES TO TRAIN A PERSONAL AREA NETWORK COMPONENT - Techniques to train a personal area network component may include obtaining a packet error rate from a personal area network component. It may be determined that the packet error rate is greater than a packet error rate threshold after a time period. A reservation may be requested from a wide area network component based a first transmit pattern from the personal area network component. A second or adjusted transmit pattern from the wide area network component may be received. Personal area network signals may be transmitted based on the second transmit pattern. The time period may be adjusted based on a personal area network packet error rate of the second transmit pattern. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING AN UPLINK RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL IN A SINGULAR CARRIER FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for accessing a contention-based uplink random access channel (RACH) in a single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) system are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) randomly selects a RACH subchannel and a signature among a plurality of available RACH subchannels and signatures. The WTRU transmits a preamble using the selected signature via the selected RACH subchannel at a predetermined or computed transmission power. A base station monitors the RACH to detect the preamble and sends an acquisition indicator (AI) to the WTRU when a signature is detected on the RACH. When receiving a positive acknowledgement, the WTRU sends a message part to the base station. If receiving a negative acknowledgement or no response, the WTRU retransmits the preamble. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165626 | METHODS PROVIDING COORDINATION FOR UPLINK (UL) COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (CoMP) RECEPTION AND RELATED NETWORK NODES - Scheduling information for a wireless device may be transmitted from a first node of a network to the second node of the network wherein the scheduling information defines a plurality of time slots for UpLink transmission from the wireless device. After transmitting the scheduling information to the second node, a UL signaling grant may be transmitted to the wireless device for one of the time slots defined by the scheduling information. A UL transmission may be received from the wireless device at the first node over the time slot of the UL signaling grant. Information may be received from the second node relating to the UL transmission over the time slot of the UL signaling grant. The UL transmission may be processed at the first node using the information from the second node relating to the UL transmission from the wireless device. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165627 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - Provided is a technique related to a terminal apparatus, a base station apparatus, a communication system, a control method, and an integrated circuit, which efficiently controls a state of a cell for a plurality of cells. In the terminal apparatus using a plurality of cells, configuration information which disables change in a state of a cell is received from the base station apparatus, and control is performed based on the received configuration information so that a state of a part of cells among the plurality of cells is not changed. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165628 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EFFECTIVE MULTI-CARRIER MULTI-CELL SCHEDULING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for providing effective scheduling of resources of each cell and each carrier to a User Equipment (UE) when there are a plurality of cells and carriers in a carrier aggregation mobile communication system. A communication method of a Base Station (BS) includes: obtaining a mapping relation between a cell and a carrier for each UE; receiving scheduling information for each cell; distributing data of each UE to one of cells corresponding to UEs by using the mapping relation between the carrier and the cell and the scheduling information for each cell; and scheduling the distributed data. When a multi-carrier multi-cell scheduler to which a carrier aggregation technology is applied is implemented, the existing single carrier single cell scheduler can be re-used and the time required for the scheduling can be reduced by processing schedulers in parallel. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165629 | Methods and Apparatus - A method includes receiving information at a base station for a plurality of user equipment, said information including respective data for a plurality of user equipment, said respective data to be transmitted in a same scheduling interval, and causing said respective data to be transmitted in the same scheduling interval. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165630 | METHODS AND PROCEDURES FOR SCHEDULING TO SECTOR-EDGE AND NON-SECTOR-EDGE STATION GROUPS - Methods and apparatus are presented for WiFi sectorization and beamforming. In one embodiment, an access point (AP) may send a Request to Send (RTS) to a first station (STA), receive a Sectorized Coordinated Beam (CB/S)-Clear to Send (CTS) from the first STA, and receive a CBS-CTS from a second STA. The AP may then send a Null Data Packet (NDP) Announcement (NDPA), followed by a NDP. The NDP may be sent using sub-sector beamforming. The AP may receive feedback from the first STA, and may create a targeted beam to transmit data to the first STA. The AP may determine sector order and timing based on the feedback. The AP may also identify whether the STA is a sector-edge STA or non-sector-edge (or sector center) STA. The AP may allow the STA to transmit based on whether the STA is assigned to the sector-edge or non-sector edge group. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165631 | UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE - Disclosed are an uplink control information transmission method and device for addressing a lack of a solution that a terminal provides feedback of downlink carriers scheduled by different base stations in a dual-connectivity scenario. The method in an embodiment of the present application comprises: a terminal receives data over a first carrier and a second carrier, the data over the first carrier being scheduled by a first base station and the data over the second carrier being scheduled by a second base station; the terminal generates first uplink control information for the first carrier, and/or the terminal generates second uplink control information for the second carrier; the terminal transmits the generated uplink control information over one uplink carrier according to a TA value and a reference carrier, the uplink control information comprising at least one of the first uplink control information and the second uplink control information. Therefore, the terminal can simply transmit over one uplink carrier the uplink control information corresponding to the downlink carriers scheduled by different base stations scheduling data for the terminal. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165634 | Service Scheduling Method and Base Station - Embodiments disclose a service scheduling method and a base station. The method includes reporting, by a Medium Access Control (MAC) entity of a carrier, bearer information of the carrier to a Radio Link Control RLC entity; and allocating, by the RLC entity, service data and control information to the carrier, and sending the service data and the control information to a data buffer of the carrier. The method also includes determining, by the MAC entity, a user equipment that needs to be scheduled, and acquiring the service data and the control information from the data buffer; and performing, by the MAC entity, RLC packet assembly and MAC packet assembly on the service data, and sending the service data experiencing the packet assembly to the user equipment. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165635 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DYNAMIC ALLOCATION USING A GRANT FRAME - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, devices, systems and methods of dynamically scheduling a transmit opportunity. For example, a first wireless station may be configured to generate a grant frame including a duration field and a dynamic allocation information field, the dynamic allocation information field including an allocation duration subfield, the allocation duration subfield being set to a value within a predefined range of values, when the grant frame is to grant to a second wireless station a period after a Transmit Opportunity (TxOP), the allocation duration subfield being set to a predefined value which is not within the predefined range of values, when the grant frame is to grant to the second wireless station a period within the TxOP; and transmit the grant frame during the TxOP. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160165640 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL FOR MTC AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for performing a random access procedure in a wireless communication system supporting repeated transmission of a same signal, and an apparatus for same, and more specifically, to a method and an apparatus for same, the method comprising the steps of: repeatedly transmitting a physical random access channel (PRACH) signal by using a PRACH resource; and receiving a random access response signal from a specific time section, as a response to the PRACH signal, wherein the random access response signal includes information related to the number of repeated transmissions of the PRACH signal. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160174213 | POWER DENSITY BOOSTING OF UPLINK CONTROL SIGNALS | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160174216 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HARQ BUFFER MANAGEMENT | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160174218 | DEVICE FOR MULTIPLE PAN ACCESS | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160174224 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SERVICE DATA, TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160174238 | PRIORITIZING COLLIDING TRANSMISSIONS IN LTE AND ULTRA-LOW LATENCY LTE COMMUNICATIONS | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160174264 | EDGE CONTINUED EVOLUTION, IMPROVED CHANNEL REQUEST METHOD AND SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160182212 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TIME DIVISION DUPLEX COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160183249 | CHANNEL SENSING ENHANCEMENT | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160183251 | TERMINAL-TO-TERMINAL COMMUNICATION | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160183252 | IMMEDIATE RESPONSE RESOURCE ALLOCATION WITH MIXED PHY AND MAC SIGNALING | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160183277 | RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, AND SYNCHRONIZATION TIMER CONTROL METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160183279 | Time Division Multiplex System and Transmission Method Thereof | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160183292 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE SIGNALING FOR REVERSE DIRECTION PROTOCOL | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160191417 | Topology- and Load-Aware (TLA) Resource Allocation for a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol - A medium access control (MAC) protocol may be used to facilitate communication between nodes in a network. A protocol for allocating network resources between a set of nodes with demands may be an adaptive topology- and load-aware (TLA) allocation protocol. The allocation protocol may be executed by a bidder algorithm and an auctioneer algorithm on each node of the network. Claims and offers may be generated at each node and transmitted to other nodes on the network. The claims and offers may be updated as load and topology of the network change. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192328 | DYNAMIC ADAPTIVE AND NON-ADAPTIVE MODE SWITCHING - A method of operating a transceiver may comprise operating in an adaptive mode in which transmissions from the transceiver are halted after detection of interference, performing a clear channel assessment (CCA), as a result of the CCA, detecting energy from an interferer above a predetermined threshold, and switching operation to a non-adaptive mode in which the transceiver is configured to alternate transmission periods and idle periods according to a duty cycle. Then, the method may comprise performing an energy detect, as a result of the energy detect, subsequently detecting the energy from the interferer below the predetermined threshold, and switching operation to the adaptive mode. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192353 | Method and Apparatus for Asynchronous OFDMA/SC-FDMA - Cyclic prefix based OFDM (CP-OFDM) signals can be filtered using a digital filter whose filter length exceeds the length of a cyclic prefix in CP-OFDM symbols of the signal. In one example, the duration of the filtered CP-OFDM symbol may be expressed by the following equation: M=N+L−1, where M is the duration of the filtered CP-OFDM signal, N is a duration of the CP-OFDM signal, and L is the filter length of the digital filter. Digitally filtering the CP-OFDM signal may include convolving a filtering signal with the CP-OFDM signal. The digital filter may include a finite impulse response (FIR) filter or an infinite impulse response (IIR) filter. In some embodiments, a different digital filter may be applied to each sub-band of the CP-OFDM signal. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192359 | ACCESS METHOD AND PROTOCOL IN AN AD HOC NETWORK - A method for accessing a radio channel in a communication system comprises a plurality of terminals communicating with one another by radio links, a terminal being equipped with transmission and/or reception means, a processor suitable for executing the steps of the method, wherein it uses an access protocol based on a communication frame made up of a plurality of slots S( | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192360 | Method and Apparatus for Processing Signal in a Mobile Device - The present disclosure relates to a sensor network, Machine Type Communication (MTC), Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communication, and technology for Internet of Things (IoT). The present disclosure may be applied to intelligent services based on the above technologies, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, connected car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. A method and apparatus for processing a signal in a mobile device are provided. The method includes classifying signals transmitted and received between devices according to at least two predetermined rates, and transmitting and receiving the classified signals in connection lines supporting the at least two rates, respectively. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192385 | IMPROVED UPLINK SPECTRUM EFFICIENCY - Methods and systems are disclosed for reducing control signaling in uplink transmissions. A device, such as a wireless transmit/receive unit, may determine to use a demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) transmission schedule out of a plurality of DM-RS transmission schedules. The DM-RS transmission schedule may be characterized by a DM-RS transmission being mapped to a single orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol per subframe of a data stream. The DM-RS transmission schedule may be characterized by a DM-RS transmission being mapped to a first subset of subcarriers of an OFDM symbol of a subframe of a data stream and Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) transmission or Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) control information being mapped to a second set of subcarriers of the OFDM symbol. The first set of subcarriers may be different than the second set of subcarriers. The data stream may be transmitted according to the DM-RS transmission schedule. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192390 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA BASED ON LIMITED CONTENTION - Disclosed is a method for transmitting data between a terminal and a base station. The method includes: being assigned a scheduling request identifier (SRID) through a connection with the base station, in the terminal; configuring a scheduling request (SR) message and transmitting the scheduling request message to the base station when uplink traffic is generated, in the terminal; assigning an uplink resource based on the scheduling request message, in the base station; and transmitting data using the uplink resource, in the terminal. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192392 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN VIRTUAL CELL NETWORK SYSTEM - The present invention can reduce the clashing of random accesses by assigning a random access priority according to the number of links. A method for random access from a terminal in a virtual cell network system according to an embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of determining the number of links that are connected to the terminal; selecting a random access set for random access on the basis of the number of links; selecting a slot resource for random access from the random access set on the basis of the number of links; and performing a random access over the slot resource, wherein the slot resource includes a common resource held by a plurality of base stations. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160192397 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS LAN - A method for transmitting data in wireless LAN may include the step of: receiving a non-target RTS frame from a second STA by a first STA, wherein the non-target RTS frame includes an RA field indicating a third STA; when the first STA does not receive a non-target CTS frame after a predetermined time and tries to transmit a data frame to an AP, transmitting an RTS frame to the AP by the first STA, wherein the non-target CTS frame is a response frame to the non-target RTS frame; and when the first STA has received a CTS frame in response to the RTS frame from the AP, transmitting the data frame to the AP by the first STA. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160197712 | MAINTAINING PHASE COHERENCE FOR FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160198354 | INTELLIGENT NETWORK ACCESS CONTROLLER AND METHOD | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160198426 | METHODS AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160198462 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUBFRAME INTERLACING IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160198493 | System and Method for Adaptive Back-off Time Determination | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160198495 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RANDOM ACCESS REQUEST AND TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160205529 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN AWARENESS NETWORKING DEVICES | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205597 | METHOD FOR CELL HANDOVER, BASE STATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205642 | METHODS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATIONS, AND SYSTEM FOR SYNCHRONIZING DEVICES AND NEIGHBOR AREA NETWORKING (NAN) CONFIGURATION | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205682 | Dynamic Real-Time Tiered Client Access | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205684 | CORRECTION SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND BASE STATION | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160254938 | TIMING SYNCHRONIZATION FOR DOWNLINK (DL) TRANSMISSIONS IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (CoMP) SYSTEMS | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255601 | Handling Timing Differences in Timing Advance Groups in a Communication Device | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255614 | Network Device, Terminal Device, and Voice Service Control Method | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255625 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING DOWNLINK FRAME IN WIRELESS LAN | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160255639 | INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160380751 | Methods for Signal Detection in a System with Sparse Synchronization Signal Rate - The present disclosure relates to methods and devices for signal detection. More particularly the disclosure pertains to methods and arrangements for signal detection systems with sparse synchronization signal rate. According to some aspects, the disclosure relates to a method, performed in a radio network node, of detecting at least one signal transmitted from a wireless device, wherein the radio network node transmits a synchronization signal to the wireless device with a synchronization signal rate. The method comprises determining a period of time that has passed since the most recent transmission of the synchronization signal to the wireless device and configuring, in the radio network node, at least one radio setting related to detecting the at least one signal, based on the determined period of time. The method further comprises monitoring a radio spectrum for the at least one signal using the at least one radio setting. | 12-29-2016 |
| 20160381682 | TRANSMITTING A PACKET VIA A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AFTER A DELAY - Methods of operating an electronic device are provided. A method of operating a first electronic device includes listening for a wireless transmission by a second electronic device on a wireless communications channel The method includes determining whether a packet is a particular type of packet. The method includes assigning a randomized time delay value that defines a randomized delay period, in response to determining that the packet is the particular type of packet. The method includes beginning the randomized delay period in response to determining that the wireless communications channel is clear. Moreover, the method includes transmitting the packet via the wireless communications channel based on expiration of the randomized delay period. Related electronic devices and computer program products are also provided. | 12-29-2016 |
| 20160381710 | System and Methods for Using a Radio Frequency Resource to Improve Performance on a Data Communication in a Multi-Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Wireless Communication Device - In a multi-subscription wireless communication device with a shared radio frequency (RF) resource, when there is an active data communication associated with the first SIM, a tune-away may be performed to support a subscription on a second SIM. After tuning to the second network to receive data during an assigned time slot in a frame capable of carrying a common control channel the wireless communication device may determine whether a message granting or denying the requested channel access can be recovered or excluded, and skip receiving remaining frames for the message and stop tune-aways when a message granting the requested channel access can be excluded. In some embodiments determining whether the message can be excluded may include determining whether a signal-to-noise ratio for the received data burst is greater than 10 dB, and if so, determining whether the decoded data can be identified as part of a paging message. | 12-29-2016 |
| 20170238270 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING VEHICULAR COMMUNICATIONS | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238296 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION, AND DEVICE FOR SAME | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238304 | UCI TRANSMISSION USING DIFFERENT SUBFRAME TYPES | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238314 | Collision Avoidance for Uplink Radio Resource Allocation in Reoccurring Time Intervals | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238327 | BASE STATION, SIGNAL SYNTHESIS METHOD, AND SIGNAL FORWARDING METHOD | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238334 | Listen before Talk Channel Access Procedure for Uplink LAA | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238341 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSMISSION | 08-17-2017 |
| 20170238355 | DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION | 08-17-2017 |
| 20180026691 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180026696 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BEAMFORMING TRAINING USING FRAMES | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027453 | TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR TRIGGER FRAME BY A 802.11ax ACCESS-POINT | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027483 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION, AND METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027522 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING BEAM-FORED PAGING BASED ON FEEDBACK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027534 | DOWNLINK CHANNEL DESIGN FOR LTE WITH LOW LATENCY | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027552 | METHOD FOR MANAGING WIRELESS RESOURCES, AND ACCESS POINT USING SAME | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027553 | USER TERMINAL AND BASE STATION | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027556 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEVING SIGNAL TO A PLURALITY OF STATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027575 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK DATA | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027578 | Method and System for Implementing Service Scheduling, Base Station, and User Equipment | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027582 | TECHNIQUES FOR COMMUNICATING ON AN UPLINK IN A SHARED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027585 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION OR RECEPTION USING BEAMFORMING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027608 | FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD PERFORMED IN ACCESS POINT, FRAME RECEPTION METHOD PERFORMED IN TERMINAL, AND ACCESS POINT | 01-25-2018 |
| 20190149278 | UPLINK GRANT MANAGEMENT FOR LTE IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190149295 | JOINT RESOURCE MAP DESIGN OF DM-RS AND PT-RS | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190149298 | Reference Signals With Improved Cross-Correlation Properties In Wireless Communications | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150125 | DOWNLINK CONTROL FOR ULTRA RELIABLE COMMUNICATIONS | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150126 | QUASI CO-LOCATED ANTENNA PORTS FOR CHANNEL ESTIMATION | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150140 | REPETITION-BASED TRANSMISSIONS AND HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST RETRANSMISSIONS | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150142 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING TIME DOMAIN RESOURCE ALLOCATION OF DATA TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150147 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS IN V2X COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150148 | TERMINAL APPARATUS AND METHOD | 05-16-2019 |
| 20190150183 | USER EQUIPMENTS, BASE STATIONS AND METHODS | 05-16-2019 |
| 20220141863 | USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment (UE) for a mobile communication system is provided. The UE receives, from the BS, a first downlink control information (DCI) indicating a first uplink resource for transmitting a first uplink signal, and then receives, from the BS, a second DCI indicating a second uplink resource for transmitting a second uplink signal. The BS configures the second uplink resource to be advanced to the first uplink resource in the time domain based on the uplink out-of-order configuration. The UE decides the transmission of the first uplink signal according to the condition of resource configuration. | 05-05-2022 |
